Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager

Power Systems
Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager
commands
Power Systems
Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager
commands
Note
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices,” on
page 465.
This edition applies to IBM Virtual I/O Server 2.1.2.0 and to all subsequent releases and modifications until
otherwise indicated in new editions.
© Copyright IBM Corporation 2007, 2009.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands listed alphabetically
1
Reading syntax diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
activatevg command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
alt_root_vg command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
awk command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
backup command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
backupios command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
IVM bkprofdata command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
bootlist command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
cat command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
cattracerpt command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
cfgassist command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
cfgdev command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
cfglnagg command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
cfgnamesrv command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
cfgsvc command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
chbdsp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
chdate command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
chdev command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
IVM chhwres command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
chkdev command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
chlang command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
IVM chled command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
IVM chlparutil command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
chlv command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
chmod command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
chpath command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
chrep command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
chsp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
IVM chsvcevent command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
IVM chsyscfg command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
IVM chsysstate command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
chtcpip command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
chuser command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
IVM chvet command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
chvg command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
chvopt command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
cl_snmp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
clear command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
cp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
cplv command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
cpvdi command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
crontab command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
date command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
deactivatevg command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
IVM defsysplanres command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
IVM deploysysplan command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
diagmenu command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
dsmc command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
entstat command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
errlog command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
exportvg command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
extendlv command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
extendvg command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
fcstat command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009
iii
fsck command . . . . .
ftp command . . . . .
grep command . . . . .
head command . . . . .
hostmap command . . .
hostname command . . .
importvg command . . .
installios command . . .
invscout command . . .
ioslevel Command. . . .
ldapadd command . . .
ldapsearch command . . .
ldfware command . . . .
license command . . . .
loadopt command . . . .
loginmsg command . . .
IVM lpar_netboot command
IVM lpcfgop command . .
ls command . . . . . .
lsdev command . . . .
lsfailedlogin command . .
lsfware command . . . .
lsgcl command . . . . .
IVM lshwres command . .
IVM lsled command . . .
lslparinfo command . . .
IVM lslparmigr command .
IVM lslparutil command .
lslv command . . . . .
lsmap command . . . .
IVM lsmemdev command .
lsnetsvc command . . . .
lsnports command. . . .
lspath command . . . .
lspv command . . . . .
IVM lsrefcode command .
lsrep command . . . . .
lssp command . . . . .
lssvc command . . . . .
IVM lssvcevents command .
lssw command . . . . .
IVM lssyscfg command . .
IVM lssysconn command .
IVM lssysplan command .
IVM lssysplanres command
lstcpip command . . . .
lsuser command . . . .
IVM lsvet command . . .
lsvg command . . . . .
lsvopt command . . . .
man command . . . . .
migratepv command . . .
IVM migrlpar command. .
mirrorios command . . .
IVM mkauthkeys command
mkbdsp command. . . .
mkdir command . . . .
IVM mkgencfg command .
mkkrb5clnt command . .
mkldap command . . . .
mklv command. . . . .
iv
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
117
118
130
132
133
135
135
136
138
139
139
140
142
143
144
144
145
147
148
152
156
156
157
158
183
185
185
188
195
200
205
207
208
210
213
217
220
221
223
224
234
235
249
251
252
252
254
255
257
261
262
262
263
267
268
270
271
273
275
275
277
mklvcopy command . . . .
mkpath command . . . . .
mkrep command . . . . .
mksp command . . . . .
IVM mksvcevent command .
IVM mksyscfg command . .
IVM mksysplan command . .
mktcpip command . . . .
mkuser command . . . . .
mkvdev command . . . .
mkvg command . . . . .
mkvopt command . . . . .
mkvt command . . . . .
more command. . . . . .
motd command . . . . .
mount command . . . . .
mv command . . . . . .
netstat command . . . . .
oem_platform_level command.
oem_setup_env command . .
optimizenet command . . .
IVM os_install Command . .
passwd command . . . . .
pdump command . . . . .
ping command . . . . . .
postprocesssvc command . .
prepdev command . . . .
redefvg command . . . . .
reducevg command . . . .
remote_management command
replphyvol command. . . .
restore command . . . . .
restorevgstruct command . .
rm command . . . . . .
rmbdsp command . . . . .
rmdev command . . . . .
rmlv command . . . . . .
rmlvcopy command . . . .
rmpath command . . . . .
rmrep command . . . . .
rmsp command. . . . . .
IVM rmsyscfg command . .
IVM rmsysplan command . .
IVM rmsysplanres command .
rmtcpip command. . . . .
rmuser command . . . . .
rmvdev command . . . . .
rmvopt command . . . . .
rmvt command . . . . . .
IVM rsthwres command . . .
IVM rstprofdata command . .
save_base command . . . .
savevgstruct command . . .
seastat command . . . . .
sed command . . . . . .
showmount command . . .
shutdown command . . . .
snap command . . . . . .
snmp_info command . . . .
snmp_trap command . . . .
snmpv3_ssw command . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
278
279
280
281
282
283
291
292
294
295
298
299
300
300
305
305
306
309
313
313
314
319
323
324
324
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
340
341
344
345
346
346
347
349
349
350
350
351
352
353
353
354
354
355
357
359
360
361
362
366
367
367
368
371
371
Contents
v
startnetsvc command . .
startsvc command . . .
startsysdump command .
starttrace command . .
stopnetsvc command . .
stopsvc command . . .
stoptrace command . .
stty command . . . .
su command . . . .
svmon command . . .
syncvg command . . .
sysstat command . . .
tail command . . . .
tee command . . . .
topas command . . .
topasrec command . .
traceroute command . .
uname command . . .
unloadopt command . .
unmirrorios command .
unmount command . .
IVM update_install_setup
updateios command . .
vasistat command . . .
vfcmap command . . .
vi command . . . . .
viosbr command . . .
viosecure command . .
viostat command . . .
vmstat command . . .
wall command . . . .
wc command . . . .
who command . . . .
wkldagent command . .
wkldmgr command . .
wkldout command . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
command.
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
372
374
375
376
376
378
379
380
387
388
391
392
393
394
395
405
406
407
409
409
410
411
412
413
421
422
441
445
447
451
456
457
458
461
462
463
Appendix. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Programming interface information .
Trademarks . . . . . . . . .
Terms and conditions. . . . . .
vi
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 466
. 466
. 467
Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager
commands listed alphabetically
This topic contains links to information about the Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization
Manager commands, including syntax statements, flag descriptions, and usage examples. Commands are
listed alphabetically.
Reading syntax diagrams
Syntax diagrams are a way to represent command syntax and consist of symbols such as brackets ([ ]),
braces ({ }), and vertical bars (|). The following is a sample of a syntax statement for the lsdev command:
lsdev { -dev DeviceName | -plc PhysicalLocationCode } [ -child ] [ -field FieldName... ] [ -fmt Delimiter ]
The following conventions are used in the command syntax statements:
v Items that must be entered literally on the command line are in bold. These items include the
command name, flags, and literal characters.
v Items representing variables that must be replaced by a name are in italics. These items include
parameters that follow flags and parameters that the command reads, such as Files and Directories.
v Parameters enclosed in brackets are optional.
v Parameters enclosed in braces are required.
v Parameters not enclosed in either brackets or braces are required.
v A vertical bar signifies that you choose only one parameter. For example, [ a | b ] indicates that you
can choose a, b, or nothing. Similarly, { a | b } indicates that you must choose either a or b.
v Ellipses ( ... ) signify the parameter can be repeated on the command line.
v The dash ( - ) represents standard input.
Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands
The following table defines the standard return codes returned by all of the Virtual I/O Server
commands. Additional return codes unique to a specific command are defined within the individual
command description page.
Return Code
Description
0
Success
1
Syntax Error
2
Not Found
1
Command requires an option
1
Command requires the specified option
1
Command requires an attribute
3
Invalid access to execute command
1
Invalid command
1
Invalid flag or argument
1
Invalid option flag
1
Invalid attribute
1
Invalid option combination
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009
1
Return Code
Description
1
Specified option requires an argument
1
Specified option requires an attribute
1
Specified option also requires another option
1
Specified option is repeated
1
Attributes cannot be repeated
1
Contains an invalid argument
1
Is invalid
1
Too many arguments
1
Too few arguments
1
Unable to acquire permission to execute command
4
Execution of this command did not complete
10
No device found with physical location
11
Too many matches for physical location
12
Too many matches for physical location code
18
Insufficient memory
activatevg command
Purpose
Activates a volume group.
Syntax
activatevg [-f ] VolumeGroup
Description
The activatevg command activates the volume group specified by the VolumeGroup parameter and all
associated logical volumes. When a volume group is activated, physical partitions are synchronized if
they are not current.
Flags
Allows a volume group to be made active that does not currently have a quorum of
available disks.
-f
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To activate volume group vg03, type:
activatevg vg03
2
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Related Information
The mkvg command, the chvg command, the extendvg command, the reducevg command, the mirrorios
command, the unmirrorios command, the lsvg command, the deactivatevg command, the importvg
command, the exportvg command, and the syncvg command.
alt_root_vg command
Purpose
Creates a copy of (clones) the currently running system to an alternative disk.
Syntax
alt_root_vg [-g][-z] [-bundle bundle_name -location images_location] -target target_disks...
Description
The alt_root_vg command allows users to copy the current root volume group to an alternate disk and to
update the operating system to the next fix pack level, without taking the machine down for an extended
period of time and mitigating outage risk. This can be done by creating a copy of the current rootvg on
an alternate disk and simultaneously applying fix pack updates. If needed, the bootlist command can be
run after the new disk has been booted, and the bootlist can be changed to boot back to the older level of
the operating system.
Note: The target_disk cannot be a physical volume that is assigned to a shared memory pool (to be used
as a paging space device by a shared memory partition).
Cloning the running rootvg, allows the user to create a backup copy of the root volume group. This copy
can be used as a back up in case the rootvg failed, or it can be modified by installing additional updates.
One scenario might be to clone a 1.3.0.0 system, and then install updates to bring the cloned rootvg to
1.3.0.0-FP8.0. This would update the system while it was still running. Rebooting from the new rootvg
would bring the level of the running system to 1.3.0.0-FP8.0. If there was a problem with this level,
changing the bootlist back to the 1.3.0.0 disk and rebooting would bring the system back to 1.3.0.0. Other
scenarios would include cloning the rootvg and applying individual fixes, rebooting the system and
testing those fixes, and rebooting back to the original rootvg if there was a problem.
At the end of the installation, a volume group, altinst_rootvg, is left on the target disks in the varied off
state as a placeholder. If varied on, it indicates that it owns no logical volumes; however, the volume
group does contain logical volumes, but they have been removed from the ODM because their names
now conflict with the names of the logical volumes on the running system. Do not vary on the
altinst_rootvg volume group; instead, leave the definition there as a placeholder.
After rebooting from the new alternate disk, the former rootvg volume group is displayed in a lspv
listing as old_rootvg, and it includes all disks in the original rootvg. This former rootvg volume group is
set to not vary-on at reboot.
If a return to the original rootvg is necessary, the bootlist command is used to reboot from the original
rootvg.
Flags
-target target_disks
Specifies a space-delimited list of the name or names of the target disks where the
alternate rootvg will be created. These disks must not contain any volume group
definitions. The lspv command shows these disks as belonging to volume group None.
Alphabetical list of commands
3
-bundle bundle_name
-location image_location
-g
-z
Path name of optional file that contains a list of packages or file sets that are installed
after a rootvg clone is created. You must also specify the -location flag when you
specify the bundle option.
Location of the installp images or updates to apply after a clone of rootvg is created.
The location can be a directory and full-path name or device name, such as /dev/rmt0.
Skips checks to ensure the disk can boot.
Specifies that no types of non-rootvg volume groups are to be imported.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
To create a boot list of logical devices to be used in the next normal boot, enter the following commands:
alt_root_vg -target hdisk2 -bundle my_bundle -location /tmp/update
alt_root_vg -target hdisk2 -bundle my_bundle -location /home/padmin
Related Information
The bootlist command.
awk command
Purpose
Finds lines in files that match a pattern and performs specified actions on those lines.
Syntax
awk [ -F Ere ] [ -v Assignment ] ... { -f ProgramFile | 'Program' } [ [ File ... | Assignment ... ] ] ...
Description
The awk command utilizes a set of user-supplied instructions to compare a set of files, one line at a time,
to extended regular expressions supplied by the user. Then actions are performed upon any line that
matches the extended regular expressions.
The pattern searching of the awk command is more general than that of the grep command, and it allows
the user to perform multiple actions on input text lines. The awk command programming language
requires no compiling, and allows the user to use variables, numeric functions, string functions, and
logical operators.
The awk command is affected by the LANG, LC_ALL, LC_COLLATE, LC_CTYPE, LC_MESSAGES,
LC_NUMERIC, NLSPATH, and PATH environment variables.
The awk command takes two types of input: input text files and program instructions.
Input Text Files
Searching and actions are performed on input text files. The files arespecified by:
v Specifying the File variable on the command line.
v Modifying the special variables ARGV and ARGC.
v Providing standard input in the absence of the File variable.
4
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
If multiple files are specified with the File variable,the files are processed in the order specified.
Program Instructions
Instructions provided by the user control the actions of the awk command. These instructions come from
either the `Program' variable on the command line or from a file specified by the -f flag together with the
ProgramFile variable. If multiple program files are specified, the files are concatenated in the order
specified and the resultant order of instructions is used.
Output for the awk Command
The awk command produces three types of output from the data within the input text file:
v Selected data can be printed to standard output, without alteration to the input file.
v Selected portions of the input file can be altered.
v Selected data can be altered and printed to standard output, with or without altering the contents of
the input file.
All of these types of output can be performed on the same file. The programming language recognized
by the awk command allows the user to redirect output.
File Processing with Records and Fields
Files are processed in the following way:
1. The awk command scans its instructions and executes any actions specified to occur before the input
file is read.
The BEGIN statement in the awk programming language allows the user to specify a set of
instructions to be done before the first record is read. This is particularly useful for initializing special
variables.
2. One record is read from the input file.
A record is a set of data separated by a record separator. The default value for the record separator is
the new-line character, which makes each line in the file a separate record. The record separator can
be changed by setting the RS special variable.
3. The record is compared against each pattern specified by the awk command's instructions.
The command instructions can specify that a specific field within the record be compared. By default,
fields are separated by white space (blanks or tabs). Each field is referred to by a field variable. The
first field in a record is assigned the $1 variable, the second field is assigned the $2 variable, and so
forth. The entire record is assigned to the $0 variable. The field separator can be changed by using the
-F flag on the command line or by setting the FS special variable. The FS special variable can be set to
the values of: blank, single character, or extended regular expression.
4. If the record matches a pattern, any actions associated with that pattern are performed on the record.
5. After the record is compared to each pattern, and all specified actions are performed, the next record
is read from input; the process is repeated until all records are read from the input file.
6. If multiple input files have been specified, the next file is then opened and the process repeated until
all input files have been read.
7. After the last record in the last file is read, the awk command executes any instructions specified to
occur after the input processing.
The END statement in the awk programming language allows the user to specify actions to be
performed after the last record is read. This is particularly useful for sending messages about what
work was accomplished by the awk command.
Alphabetical list of commands
5
The awk Command Programming Language
The awk command programming language consists of statements in the form:
Pattern { Action }
If a record matches the specified pattern, or contains a field that matches the pattern, the associated
action is then performed. A pattern can be specified without an action, in which case the entire line
containing the pattern is written to standard output. An action specified without a pattern is performed
for every input record.
Patterns
Four types of patterns are used in the awk command language syntax:
Regular Expressions
The extended regular expressions used by the awk command are similar to those used by the grep
command. The simplest form of an extended regular expression is a string of characters enclosed in
slashes. For an example, suppose a file named testfile had the following contents:
smawley, andy
smiley, allen
smith, alan
smithern, harry
smithhern, anne
smitters, alexis
Entering the following command line:
awk ’/smi/’ testfile
would print to standard output of all records that contained an occurrence of the string smi. In this
example, the program '/smi/' for the awk command is a pattern with no action. The output is:
smiley, allen
smith, alan
smithern, harry
smithhern, anne
smitters, alexis
The following special characters are used to form extended regular expressions:
Character
+
Function
Specifies that a string matches if one or more occurrences of the character or extended
regular expression that precedes the + (plus) are within the string. The command line:
awk ’/smith+ern/’ testfile
prints to standard output any record that contained a string with the characters smit,
followed by one or more h characters, and then ending with the characters ern. The output
in this example is:
smithern, harry
smithhern, anne
6
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Character
?
Function
Specifies that a string matches if zero or one occurrences of the character or extended
regular expression that precedes the ? (question mark) are within the string. The command
line:
awk ’/smith?/’ testfile
prints to standard output of all records that contain the characters smit, followed by zero
or one instance of the h character. The output in this example is:
|
smith, alan
smithern, harry
smithhern, anne
smitters, alexis
Specifies that a string matches if either of the strings separated by the | (vertical line) are
within the string. The command line:
awk ’/allen
|
alan /’ testfile
prints to standard output of all records that contained the string allen or alan. The output
in this example is:
()
smiley, allen
smith, alan
Groups strings together in regular expressions. The command line:
awk ’/a(ll)?(nn)?e/’ testfile
prints to standard output of all records with the string ae or alle or anne or allnne. The
output in this example is:
{m}
smiley, allen
smithhern, anne
Specifies that a string matches if exactly m occurrences of the pattern are within the string.
The command line:
awk ’/l{2}/’ testfile
prints to standard output
{m,}
smiley, allen
Specifies that a string matches if at least m occurrences of the pattern are within the string.
The command line:
awk ’/t{2,}/’ testfile
prints to standard output:
{m, n}
smitters, alexis
Specifies that a string matches if between m and n, inclusive, occurrences of the pattern are
within the string ( where m <= n). The command line:
awk ’/er{1, 2}/’ testfile
prints to standard output:
[String]
smithern, harry
smithern, anne
smitters, alexis
Signifies that the regular expression matches any characters specified by the String variable
within the square brackets. The command line:
awk ’/sm[a-h]/’ testfile
prints to standard output of all records with the characters sm followed by any character in
alphabetical order from a to h. The output in this example is:
smawley, andy
Alphabetical list of commands
7
Character
[^ String]
Function
A ^ (caret) within the [ ] (square brackets) and at the beginning of the specified string
indicates that the regular expression does not match any characters within the square
brackets. Thus, the command line:
awk ’/sm[^a-h]/’ testfile
prints to standard output:
smiley, allen
smith, alan
smithern, harry
smithhern, anne
smitters, alexis
Signifies a conditional statement that a specified variable matches (tilde) or does not match
(tilde, exclamation point) the regular expression. The command line:
~,!~
awk ’$1 ~ /n/’ testfile
prints to standard output of all records whose first field contained the character n. The
output in this example is:
smithern, harry
smithhern, anne
Signifies the beginning of a field or record. The command line:
^
awk ’$2 ~ /^h/’ testfile
prints to standard output of all records with the character h as the first character of the
second field. The output in this example is:
smithern, harry
Signifies the end of a field or record. The command line:
$
awk ’$2 ~ /y$/’ testfile
prints to standard output of all records with the character y as the last character of the
second field. The output in this example is:
. (period)
smawley, andy
smithern, harry
Signifies any one character except the terminal new-line character at the end of a space.
The command line:
awk ’/a..e/’ testfile
prints to standard output of all records with the characters a and e separated by two
characters. The output in this example is:
*(asterisk)
smawley, andy
smiley, allen
smithhern, anne
Signifies zero or more of any characters. The command line:
awk ’/a.*e/’ testfile
prints to standard output of all records with the characters a and e separated by zero or
more characters. The output in this example is:
smawley, andy
smiley, allen
smithhern, anne
smitters, alexis
8
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Character
\ (backslash)
Function
The escape character. When preceding any of the characters that have special meaning in
extended regular expressions, the escape character removes any special meaning for the
character. For example, the command line:
/a\/\//
would match the pattern a //, since the backslashes negate the usual meaning of the slash
as a delimiter of the regular expression. To specify the backslash itself as a character, use a
double backslash. See the following item on escape sequences for more information on the
backslash and its uses.
Recognized Escape Sequences
The awk command recognizes most of the escape sequences used in C language conventions, as well as
several that are used as special characters by the awk command itself. The escape sequences are:
Escape Sequence
\"
\/
\ddd
\\
\a
\b
\f
\n
\r
\t
\v
Character Represented
\" (double-quotation) mark
/ (slash) character
Character whose encoding is represented by a one-, two- or three-digit octal integer,
where d represents an octal digit
\ (backslash) character
Alert character
Backspace character
Form-feed character
New-line character (see following note)
Carriage-return character
Tab character
Vertical tab.
Note: Except in the gsub, match, split, and sub built-in functions, the matching of extended regular
expressions is based on input records. Record-separator characters (the new-line character by default)
cannot be embedded in the expression, and no expression matches the record-separator character. If the
record separator is not the new-line character, then the new-line character can be matched. In the four
built-in functions specified, matching is based on text strings, and any character (including the record
separator) can be embedded in the pattern so that the pattern matches the appropriate character.
However, in all regular-expression matching with the awk command, the use of one or more NULL
characters in the pattern produces undefined results.
Relational Expressions
The relational operators < (less than), > (greater than), <= (less than or equal to), >= (greater than or
equal to), = = (equal to), and ! = (not equal to) can be used to form patterns. For example, the pattern:
$1 < $4
matches records where the first field is less than the fourth field. The relational operators also work with
string values. For example:
$1 =! "q"
matches all records where the first field is not a q. String values can also be matched on collation values.
For example:
$1 >= "d"
Alphabetical list of commands
9
matches all records where the first field starts with a character that is a, b, c, or d. If no other information
is given, field variables are compared as string values.
Combinations of Patterns
Patterns can be combined using three options:
v Ranges are specified by two patterns separated with a , (comma). Actions are performed on every
record starting with the record that matches the first pattern, and continuing through and including the
record that matches the second pattern. For example:
/begin/,/end/
matches the record containing the string begin, and every record between it and the record containing
the string end, including the record containing the string end.
v Parentheses ( ) group patterns together.
v The boolean operators || (or), && (and), and ! (not) combine patterns into expressions that match if
they evaluate true, otherwise they do not match. For example, the pattern:
$1 == "al" && $2 == "123"
matches records where the first field is al and the second field is 123.
BEGIN and END Patterns
Actions specified with the BEGIN pattern are performed before any input is read. Actions specified with
the END pattern are performed after all input has been read. Multiple BEGIN and END patterns are
allowed and processed in the order specified. An END pattern can precede a BEGIN pattern within the
program statements. If a program consists only of BEGIN statements, the actions are performed and no
input is read. If a program consists only of END statements, all the input is read prior to any actions
being taken.
Actions
There are several types of action statements:
Action Statements
Action statements are enclosed in { } (braces). If the statements are specified without a pattern, they are
performed on every record. Multiple actions can be specified within the braces, but must be separated by
new-line characters or ; (semicolons), and the statements are processed in the order they appear. Action
statements include:
Arithmetical Statements
The mathematical operators + (plus), - (minus), / (division), ^ (exponentiation), * (multiplication),
% (modulus) are used in the form:
Expression Operator Expression
Thus, the statement:
$2 = $1 ^ 3
assigns the value of the first field raised to the third power to the second field.
Unary Statements
The unary - (minus) and unary + (plus) operate as in the C programming language:
+Expression or -Expression
Increment and Decrement Statements
The pre-increment and pre-decrement statements operate as in the C programming language:
++Variable or --Variable
10
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
The post-increment and post-decrement statements operate as in the C programming language:
Variable++ or Variable--
Assignment Statements
The assignment operators += (addition), -= (subtraction), /= (division), and *= (multiplication)
operate as in the C programming language, with the form:
Variable += Expression
Variable -= Expression
Variable /= Expression
Variable *= Expression
For example, the statement:
$1 *= $2
multiplies the field variable $1 by the field variable $2 and then assigns the new value to $1.
The assignment operators ^= (exponentiation) and %= (modulus) have the form:
Variable1^=Expression1
AND
Variable2%=Expression2
and they are equivalent to the C programming language statements:
Variable1=pow(Variable1, Expression1)
AND
Variable2=fmod(Variable2, Expression2)
where pow is the pow subroutine and fmod is the fmod subroutine.
String Concatenation Statements
String values can be concatenated by stating them side by side. For example:
$3 = $1 $2
assigns the concatenation of the strings in the field variables $1 and $2 to the field variable $3.
Built-In Functions
The awk command language uses arithmetic functions,string functions, and general functions. The close
Subroutine statement is necessary if you intend to write a file, then read it later in the same program.
Arithmetic Functions
The following arithmetic functions perform the same actions as the C language subroutines by the same
name:
Function
atan2( y, x )
cos( x )
sin( x )
exp( x )
log( x )
sqrt( x )
int( x )
rand( )
srand( [Expr] )
Action
Returns arctangent of y/x.
Returns cosine of x; x is in radians.
Returns sin of x; x is in radians.
Returns the exponential function of x.
Returns the natural logarithm of x.
Returns the square root of x.
Returns the value of x truncated to an integer.
Returns a random number n, with 0 <= n < 1.
Sets the seed value for the rand function to the value of the Expr parameter, or use the
time of day if the Expr parameter is omitted. The previous seed value is returned.
Alphabetical list of commands
11
String Functions
The string functions are:
Function
gsub( Ere, Repl, [ In ] )
sub( Ere, Repl, [ In ] )
index( String1, String2 )
length [(String)]
blength [(String)]
substr( String, M, [ N ] )
match( String, Ere )
12
Action
Performs exactly as the sub function, except
that all occurrences of the regular expression are
replaced.
Replaces the first occurrence of the extended
regular expression specified by the Ere
parameter in the string specified by the In
parameter with the string specified by the Repl
parameter. The sub function returns the number
of substitutions. An & (ampersand) appearing
in the string specified by the Repl parameter is
replaced by the string in the In parameter that
matches the extended regular expression
specified by the Ere parameter. If no In
parameter is specified, the default value is the
entire record ( the $0 record variable).
Returns the position, numbering from 1, within
the string specified by the String1 parameter
where the string specified by the String2
parameter occurs. If the String2 parameter does
not occur in the String1 parameter, a 0 (zero) is
returned.
Returns the length, in characters, of the string
specified by the String parameter. If no String
parameter is given, the length of the entire
record (the $0 record variable) is returned.
Returns the length, in bytes, of the string
specified by the String parameter. If no String
parameter is given, the length of the entire
record (the $0 record variable) is returned.
Returns a substring with the number of
characters specified by the N parameter. The
substring is taken from the string specified by
the String parameter, starting with the character
in the position specified by the M parameter.
The M parameter is specified with the first
character in the String parameter as number 1.
If the N parameter is not specified, the length of
the substring will be from the position specified
by the M parameter until the end of the String
parameter.
Returns the position, in characters, numbering
from 1, in the string specified by the String
parameter where the extended regular
expression specified by the Ere parameter
occurs, or else returns a 0 (zero) if the Ere
parameter does not occur. The RSTART special
variable is set to the return value. The
RLENGTH special variable is set to the length
of the matched string, or to -1 (negative one) if
no match is found.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Function
split( String, A, [Ere] )
tolower( String )
toupper( String )
sprintf(Format, Expr, Expr, . . . )
Action
Splits the string specified by the String
parameter into array elements A[1], A[2], . . .,
A[n], and returns the value of the n variable.
The separation is done with the extended
regular expression specified by the Ere
parameter or with the current field separator
(the FS special variable) if the Ere parameter is
not given. The elements in the A array are
created with string values, unless context
indicates a particular element should also have
a numeric value.
Returns the string specified by the String
parameter, with each uppercase character in the
string changed to lowercase. The uppercase and
lowercase mapping is defined by the
LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.
Returns the string specified by the String
parameter, with each lowercase character in the
string changed to uppercase. The uppercase and
lowercase mapping is defined by the
LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.
Formats the expressions specified by the Expr
parameters according to the printf subroutine
format string specified by the Format parameter
and returns the resulting string.
General Functions
The general functions are:
Function
close( Expression )
system(Command )
Action
Close the file or pipe opened by a print or
printf statement or a call to the getline
function with the same string-valued
Expression parameter. If the file or pipe is
successfully closed, a 0 is returned; otherwise
a non-zero value is returned. The close
statement is necessary if you intend to write a
file, then read the file later in the same
program.
Executes the command specified by the
Command parameter and returns its exit
status. Equivalent to the systemsubroutine.
Alphabetical list of commands
13
Function
Expression | getline [ Variable ]
Action
Reads a record of input from a stream piped
from the output of a command specified by
the Expression parameter and assigns the
value of the record to the variable specified
by the Variable parameter. The stream is
created if no stream is currently open with the
value of the Expression parameter as its
command name. The stream created is
equivalent to one created by a call to the
popen subroutine with the Command
parameter taking the value of the Expression
parameter and the Mode parameter set to a
value of r. Each subsequent call to the getline
function reads another record, as long as the
stream remains open and the Expression
parameter evaluates to the same string. If a
Variable parameter is not specified, the $0
record variable and the NF special variable
are set to the record read from the stream.
Reads the next record of input from the file
named by the Expression parameter and sets
the variable specified by the Variable
parameter to the value of the record. Each
subsequent call to the getline function reads
another record, as long as the stream remains
open and the Expression parameter evaluates
to the same string. If a Variable parameter is
not specified, the $0 record variable and the
NF special variable are set to the record read
from the stream.
Sets the variable specified by the Variable
parameter to the next record of input from the
current input file. If no Variable parameter is
specified, $0 record variable is set to the value
of the record, and the NF, NR, and FNR
special variables are also set.
getline [ Variable ] < Expression
getline [ Variable ]
Note: All forms of the getline function return 1 for successful input, zero for end of file, and -1 for an
error.
User-Defined Functions
User-defined functions are declared in the following form:
function Name (Parameter, Parameter,...)
{ Statements }
A function can be referred to anywhere in an awk command program, and its use can precede its
definition. The scope of the function is global.
Function parameters can be either scalars or arrays. Parameter names are local to the function; all other
variable names are global. The same name should not be used for different entities; for example, a
parameter name should not be duplicated as a function name, or special variable. Variables with global
scope should not share the name of a function. Scalars and arrays should not have the same name in the
same scope.
The number of parameters in the function definition does not have to match the number of parameters
used when the function is called. Excess formal parameters can be used as local variables. Extra scalar
14
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
parameters are initialized with a string value equivalent to the empty string and a numeric value of 0
(zero); extra array parameters are initialized as empty arrays.
When invoking a function, no white space is placed between the function name and the opening
parenthesis. Function calls can be nested and recursive. Upon return from any nested or recursive
function call, the values of all the calling function's parameters shall be unchanged, except for array
parameters passed by reference. The return statement can be used to return a value.
Within a function definition, the new-line characters are optional before the opening { (brace) and after
the closing } (brace).
An example of a function definition is:
function average ( g,n)
{
for (i in g)
sum=sum+g[i]
avg=sum/n
return avg
}
The function average is passed an array, g, and a variable, n, with the number of elements in the array.
The function then obtains an average and returns it.
Conditional Statements
Most conditional statements in the awk command programming language have the same syntax and
function as conditional statements in the C programming language. All of the conditional statements
allow the use of { } (braces) to group together statements. An optional new-line can be used between the
expression portion and the statement portion of the conditional statement, and new-lines or ; (semicolon)
are used to separate multiple statements in { } (braces). Six conditional statements in C language are:
Conditional
statement
if
while
for
break
continue
Required syntax or description
if ( Expression ) { Statement } [ else Action ]
while ( Expression ) { Statement }
for ( Expression ; Expression ; Expression ) { Statement }
Causes the program loop to be exited when the break statement is used in either a while or for
statement.
Causes the program loop to move to the next iteration when the continue statement is used in
either a while or for statement.
Five conditional statements in the awk command programming language that do not follow C-language
rules are:
Conditional
statement
for...in
Required syntax or description
for ( Variable in Array ) { Statement }
The for...in statement sets the Variable parameter to each index value of the Array variable, one
index at a time and in no particular order, and performs the action specified by the Statement
parameter with each iteration. See the delete statement for an example of a for...in statement.
Alphabetical list of commands
15
Conditional
statement
if...in
Required syntax or description
if ( Variable in Array ) { Statement }
The if...in statement searches for the existence of the Array element. The statement is performed if
the Array element is found.
delete
delete Array [ Expression ]
The delete statement deletes both the array element specified by the Array parameter and the index
specified by the Expression parameter. For example, the statements:
for (i in g)
delete g[i];
would delete every element of the g[] array.
exit
exit [ Expression ]
The exit statement first invokes all END actions in the order they occur, then terminates the awk
command with an exit status specified by the Expression parameter. No subsequent END actions are
invoked if the exit statement occurs within an END action.
#
# Comment
The # statement places comments. Comments should always end with a new-line but can begin
anywhere on a line.
Stops the processing of the current input record and proceeds with the next input record.
next
Output Statements
Two output statements in the awk command programming language are:
Output
statement
print
Syntax and description
print [ ExpressionList ] [ Redirection ] [ Expression ]
The print statement writes the value of each expression specified by the ExpressionList parameter
to standard output. Each expression is separated by the current value of the OFS special variable,
and each record is terminated by the current value of the ORS special variable.
printf
The output can be redirected using the Redirection parameter, which can specify the three output
redirections with the > (greater than), >> (double greater than), and the | (pipe). The Redirection
parameter specifies how the output is redirected, and the Expression parameter is either a path
name to a file (when Redirection parameter is > or >> ) or the name of a command ( when the
Redirection parameter is a | ).
printf Format [ , ExpressionList ] [ Redirection ] [ Expression ]
The printf statement writes to standard output the expressions specified by the ExpressionList
parameter in the format specified by the Format parameter. The printf statement functions exactly
like the printf command, except for the c conversion specification (%c). The Redirection and
Expression parameters function the same as in the print statement.
For the c conversion specification: if the argument has a numeric value, the character whose
encoding is that value will be output. If the value is zero or is not the encoding of any character in
the character set, the behavior is undefined. If the argument does not have a numeric value, the
first character of the string value will be output; if the string does not contain any characters the
bahaviour is undefined.
16
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Note: If the Expression parameter specifies a path name for the Redirection parameter, the Expression
parameter should be enclosed in double quotation marks to ensure that it is treated as a string.
Variables
Variables can be scalars, field variables, arrays, or special variables. Variable names cannot begin with a
digit.
Variables can be used just by referencing them. With the exception of function parameters, they are not
explicitly declared. Uninitialized scalar variables and array elements have both a numeric value of 0
(zero) and a string value of the null string (" ").
Variables take on numeric or string values according to context. Each variable can have a numeric value,
a string value, or both. For example:
x = "4" + "8"
assigns the value of 12 to the variable x. For string constants, expressions should be enclosed in " "
(double quotation) marks.
There are no explicit conversions between numbers and strings. To force an expression to be treated as a
number, add 0 (zero) to it. To force an expression to be treated as a string, append a null string (" ").
Field Variables
Field variables are designated by a $ (dollar sign) followed by a number or numerical expression. The
first field in a record is assigned the $1 variable , the second field is assigned to the $2 variable, and so
forth. The $0 field variable is assigned to the entire record. New field variables can be created by
assigning a value to them. Assigning a value to a non-existent field, that is, any field larger than the
current value of $NF field variable, forces the creation of any intervening fields (set to the null string),
increases the value of the NF special variable, and forces the value of $0 record variable to be
recalculated. The new fields are separated by the current field separator ( which is the value of the FS
special variable). Blanks and tabs are the default field separators. To change the field separator, use the -F
flag, or assign the FS special variable a different value in the awk command program.
Arrays
Arrays are initially empty and their sizes change dynamically. Arrays are represented by a variable with
subscripts in [ ] (square brackets). The subscripts, or element identifiers, can be numbers of strings, which
provide a type of associative array capability. For example, the program:
/red/ { x["red"]++ }
/green/ { y["green"]++ }
increments counts for both the red counter and the green counter.
Arrays can be indexed with more than one subscript, similar to multidimensional arrays in some
programming languages. Because programming arrays for the awk command are really one dimensional,
the comma-separated subscripts are converted to a single string by concatenating the string values of the
separate expressions, with each expression separated by the value of the SUBSEP environmental variable.
Therefore, the following two index operations are equivalent:
x[expr1, expr2,...exprn]
AND
x[expr1SUBSEPexpr2SUBSEP...SUBSEPexprn]
Alphabetical list of commands
17
When using the in operator, a multidimensional Index value should be contained within parentheses.
Except for the in operator, any reference to a nonexistent array element automatically creates that
element.
Special Variables
The following variables have special meaning for the awk command:
Special
variable
ARGC
ARGV
Description
The number of elements in the ARGV array. This value can be altered.
The array with each member containing one of the File variables or Assignment variables, taken in
order from the command line, and numbered from 0 (zero) to ARGC -1. As each input file is
finished, the next member of the ARGV array provides the name of the next input file, unless:
v The next member is an Assignment statement, in which case the assignment is evaluated.
v The next member has a null value, in which case the member is skipped. Programs can skip
selected input files by setting the member of the ARGV array that contains that input file to a
null value.
CONVFMT
ENVIRON
v The next member is the current value of ARGV [ARGC -1], which the awk command interprets
as the end of the input files.
The printf format for converting numbers to strings (except for output statements, where the OFMT
special variable is used). The default is "%.6g".
An array representing the environment under which the awk command operates. Each element of
the array is of the form:
ENVIRON [ "Environment VariableName" ] = EnvironmentVariableValue
FILENAME
FNR
FS
The values are set when the awk command begins execution, and that environment is used until the
end of execution, regardless of any modification of the ENVIRON special variable.
The path name of the current input file. During the execution of a BEGIN action, the value of
FILENAME is undefined. During the execution of an END action, the value is the name of the last
input file processed.
The number of the current input record in the current file.
The input field separator. The default value is a blank. If the input field separator is a blank, any
number of locale-defined spaces can separate fields. The FS special variable can take two additional
values:
v With FS set to a single character, fields are separated by each single occurrence of the character.
NF
NR
OFMT
OFS
ORS
RLENGTH
RS
RSTART
SUBSEP
18
v With FS set to an extended regular expression, each occurrence of a sequence matching the
extended regular expression separates fields.
The number of fields in the current record, with a limit of 99. Inside a BEGIN action, the NF special
variable is undefined unless a getline function without a Variable parameter has been issued
previously. Inside an END action, the NF special variable retains the value it had for the last record
read, unless a subsequent, redirected, getline function without a Variable parameter is issued prior to
entering the END action.
The number of the current input record. Inside a BEGIN action the value of the NR special variable
is 0 (zero). Inside an END action, the value is the number of the last record processed.
The printf format for converting numbers to strings in output statements. The default is "% .6g".
The output field separator (default is a space).
The output record separator (default is a new-line character).
The length of the string matched by the match function.
Input record separator (default is a new-line character). If the RS special variable is null, records are
separated by sequences of one or more blank lines; leading or trailing blank lines do not result in
empty records at the beginning or end of input; and the new-line character is always a field
separator, regardless of the value of the FS special variable.
The starting position of the string matched by the match function, numbering from 1. Equivalent to
the return value of the match function.
Separates multiple subscripts. The default is \031.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Flags
-f ProgramFile
Obtains instructions for the awk command from the file specified by the ProgramFile
variable. If the -f flag is specified multiple times, the concatenation of the files, in the
order specified, will be used as the set of instructions.
Uses the extended regular expression specified by the Ere variable as the field separator.
The default field separator is a blank.
Assigns a value to a variable for the awk command's programming language. The
Assignment parameter is in the form of Name = Value. The Name portion specifies the
name of the variable and can be any combination of underscores, digits, and alphabetic
characters, but it must start with either an alphabetic character or an underscore. The
Value portion is also composed of underscores, digits, and alphabetic characters, and is
treated as if it were preceded and followed by a " (double-quotation character, similar to
a string value). If the Value portion is numeric, the variable will also be assigned the
numeric value.
-F Ere
-v Assignment
The assignment specified by the -v flag occurs before any portion of the awk command's
program is executed, including the BEGIN section.
Assigns a value to a variable for the awk command's programming language. It has the
same form and function as the Assignment variable with the -v flag, except for the time
each is processed. The Assignment parameter is processed just prior to the input file
(specified by the File variable) that follows it on the command line. If the Assignment
parameter is specified just prior to the first of multiple input files, the assignments are
processed just after the BEGIN sections (if any). If an Assignment parameter occurs after
the last file, the assignment is processed before the END sections (if any). If no input
files are specified, the assignments are processed the standard input is read.
Specifies the name of the file that contains the input for processing. If no File variable is
specified, or if a - (minus) sign is specified, standard input is processed.
Contains the instructions for the awk command. If the -f flag is not specified, the
Program variable should be the first item on the command line. It should be bracketed by
' ' (single quotation mark).
Assignment
File
'Program'
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
Successful completion.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To display the lines of a file that are longer than 72 characters, enter:
awk
’length
>72’
chapter1
This selects each line of the chapter1 file that is longer than 72 characters and writes these lines to
standard output, because no Action is specified. A tab character is counted as 1 byte.
2. To display all lines between the words start and stop, including "start" and "stop", enter:
awk
’/start/,/stop/’
chapter1
3. To run an awk command program, sum2.awk, that processes the file, chapter1, enter:
awk
-f
sum2.awk
chapter1
The following program, sum2.awk, computes the sum and average of the numbers in the second
column of the input file, chapter1:
{
sum += $2
}
Alphabetical list of commands
19
END {
print "Sum: ", sum;
print "Average:", sum/NR;
}
The first action adds the value of the second field of each line to the variable sum. All variables are
initialized to the numeric value of 0 (zero) when first referenced. The pattern END before the second
action causes those actions to be performed after all of the input file has been read. The NR special
variable, which is used to calculate the average, is a special variable specifying the number of records
that have been read.
4. To print the first two fields in opposite order, enter:
awk ’{ print $2, $1 }’ chapter1
5. The following awk program
awk -f sum3.awk chapter2
prints the first two fields of the file chapter2 with input fields separated by comma and blanks and
tabs, and then adds up the first column, and prints the sum and average:
BEGIN
END
{FS = ",|[ \t]+"}
{print $1, $2}
{s += $1}
{print "sum is",s,"average is", s/NR }
Related Information
The grep command and the sed command.
backup command
To back up a file system by i-node, specify the -Level and FileSystem parameters. When used in
conjunction with the -u flag, the -Level parameter provides a method of maintaining a hierarchy of
incremental backups for each file system. Specify the -u flag and set the -Level parameter to n to back up
only those files that have been modified since the n-1 level backup. The possible backup levels are 0 to 9.
A level 0 backup archives all files in the file system.
The FileSystem parameter can specify either the physical device name (block or raw name) or the name of
the directory on which the file system is mounted. The default file system is the root (/) file system.
Users must have read access to the file system device (such as /dev/hd4) or have backup authorization to
perform backups by i_node.
Note:
1. You must first unmount a file system before backing it up by i-node. If you attempt to back up a
mounted file system, a warning message is displayed. The backup command continues, but the
created backup might contain inconsistencies because of changes that might have occurred in the file
system during the backup operation.
2. Backing up file systems by i-node truncates the uid or gid of files having a uid or gid greater than
65535. When restored, these files might have different values for the uid and gid attributes. To retain
the values correctly, always back up by name those files that have a uid or gid greater than 65535.
3. You can archive only JFS (Journaled File System) file systems when backing up by i-node. Back up
any non-JFS file systems by file name.
Purpose
Backs up files and file systems.
20
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Syntax
To back up files by name:
backup -i [ -b Number ] [ -p [ -e RegularExpression ] ] [ -E{force|ignore|warn} ] [ -f Device ] [ -l Number ]
[ -U ] [ -o ] [ -q ] [ -v ]
To back up file systems by i-node:
backup [ [ -Level ] [ -b Number ] [ -c ] [ -f Device ] [ -L Length ] [ -U ] [ -u ] ] [ FileSystem ] | [ -w | -W ]
Description
The backup command creates copies of your files on a backup medium, such as a magnetic tape or
diskette. The copies are in one of the two backup formats:
v Specific files backed up by name using the -i flag.
v Entire file system backed up by i-node using the Level and FileSystem parameters.
If you issue the backup command without any parameters, the root file system level 9 i-node back ups to
the /dev/rfd0 device. The default syntax is:
-9uf/dev/rfd0 /dev/rhd4
The default backup device is /dev/rfd0. If flags are specified that are not appropriate for the specified
backup device, the backup command displays an error message and continues with the backup.
A single backup can span multiple volumes.
Note:
1. Running the backup command results in the loss of all material previously stored on the selected
output medium.
2. Data integrity of the archive might be compromised if a file is modified during system backup. Keep
system activity at a minimum during the system backup procedure.
3. If a backup is made to a tape device with the device block size set to 0, it might be difficult to restore
data from the tape unless the default write size was used with the backup command. The default
write size for the backup command can be read by the restore command when the tape device block
size is 0.
In other words, the -b flag should not be specified when the tape device block size is 0. If the -b flag
of the backup command is specified and is different from the default size, the same size must be
specified with the -b flag of the restore command when the archived files are restored from the tape.
Backing up files by name
To back up by name, use the -i flag. The backup command reads standard input for the names of the
files to be backed up.
File types can be special files, regular files, or directories. When the file type is a directory, only the
directory is backed up. The files under the directory are not backed up, unless they are explicitly
specified.
Note:
1. Files are restored using the same path names as the archived files. Therefore, to create a backup that
can be restored from any path, use full path names for the files that you want to back up.
2. When backing up files that require multiple volumes, do not enter the list of file names from the
keyboard. Instead, pipe or redirect the list from a file to the backup command.
Alphabetical list of commands
21
When you enter the file names from the keyboard and the backup process needs a new tape or
diskette, the command loses any file names already entered but not yet backed up. To avoid this
problem, enter each file name only after the archived message for the previous file has been
displayed. The archived message consists of the character a followed by the file name.
3. If you specify the -p flag, only files of less than 2 GB are packed.
Backing up file systems by i-node
Flags
-b Number
For backups by name, specifies the number of 512-byte blocks; for backups by i-node,
specifies the number of 1024-byte blocks to write in a single output operation. When
the backup command writes to tape devices, the default is 100 for backups by name
and 32 for backups by i-node.
The write size is the number of blocks multiplied by the block size. The default write
size for the backup command writing to tape devices is 51200 (100 × 512) for backups
by name and 32768 (32 × 1024) for backups by i-node. The write size must be an even
multiple of the tape's physical block size.
-c
-e RegularExpression
-E
22
The value of the -b flag is always ignored when the backup command writes to
diskette. In this case, the command always writes in clusters that occupy a complete
track.
Specifies that the tape is a cartridge, not a nine-track.
Specifies that the files with names matching the regular expression are not to be
packed. A regular expression is a set of characters, meta characters, and operators that
define a string or group of strings in a search pattern. It can also be a string containing
wildcard characters and operations that define a set of one or more possible strings.
The -e flag is applied only when the -p flag is specified.
For backups by name, the -E flag requires one of the following arguments. If you omit
the -E flag, warn is the default behavior.
force
Fails the backup operation on a file if the fixed extent size or space reservation
of the file cannot be preserved.
ignore
Ignores any errors in preserving extent attributes.
warn
Issues a warning if the space reservation or the fixed extent size of the file
cannot be preserved.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-f Device
Specifies the output device. To send output to a named device, specify the Device
variable as a path name such as the following example:
/dev/rmt0
To send output to the standard output device, specify a - (minus sign). The - (minus
sign) feature enables you to pipe the output of the backup command to the dd
command.
You can also specify a range of archive devices. The range specification must be in the
following format:
/dev/deviceXXX-YYY
where XXX and YYY are whole numbers, and XXX must always be less than YYY; for
example:
/dev/rfd0-3
All devices in the specified range must be of the same type. For example, you can use a
set of 8 mm, 2.3 GB tapes or a set of 1.44 MB diskettes. All tape devices must be set to
the same physical tape block size.
i
-L Length
-l Number
-o
-p
-q
-U
If the Device variable specifies a range, the backup command automatically goes from
one device in the range to the next. After exhausting all of the specified devices, the
backup command stops and requests that new volumes be mounted on the range of
devices.
Specifies that files be read from standard input and archived by file name. If relative
path names are used, files are restored (with the restore command) relative to the
current directory at restore time. If full path names are used, files are restored to those
same names.
Specifies the length of the tape in bytes. This flag overrides the -c, -d, and -s flags. You
can specify the size with a suffix of b, k, m, or g to represent blocks (512 bytes), kilo
(1024 bytes), mega (1024 kilobytes), or giga (1024 MB), respectively. To represent a tape
length of 2 GB, enter -L 2g.
Note: Use the -L flag only for i-node backups.
Limits the total number of blocks to use on the diskette device. The value specified
must be a nonzero multiple of the number of sectors per diskette track. This option
applies to by-name backups only.
Creates a Version 2-compatible backup by name. This flag is required for compatibility
with Version 2 systems because backups by name that are created by a version higher
than 2 cannot be restored on Version 2 systems. To create a Version 2-compatible
backup by name, use the -o flag along with other flags required for backups by name.
Files with attributes and values, such as user IDs and group IDs, that are too large for
Version 2 systems are not backed up. A message is displayed for each such file and
each value that is too large.
Specifies that the files be packed, or compressed, before they are archived. Only files
smaller than 2 GB are packed.
Note: This option should only be used when backing up files from an inactive file
system. Modifying a file when a backup is in progress might result in corruption of the
backup and an inability to recover the data. When backing up to a tape device that
performs compression, this option can be omitted.
Indicates that the removable medium is ready to use. When you specify the -q flag, the
backup command proceeds without prompting you to prepare the backup medium.
Press the Enter key to continue. This option applies only to the first volume. You are
prompted for subsequent volumes. The -q flag applies only to backups by name.
Specifies to backup any Access Control List (ACL)s or named extended attributes.
Without this option the image will include only AIXC ACLs and Printing Color Files
(PCL)s in the archive along with the other regular file data. For files containing NFS4
ACLs, conversion to AIXC will happen by default during archival.
Alphabetical list of commands
23
Updates the /etc/dumpdates file with the raw device name of the file system and the
time, date, and level of the backup. You must specify the -u flag if you are making
incremental backups. The -u flag applies only to backups by i-node.
Causes the backup command to display additional information about the backup.
When using the -v flag, the size of the file as it exists on the archive is displayed in
bytes. Additionally, a total of these file sizes is displayed when all files have been
processed. Directories are listed with a size of 0. Symbolic links are listed with the size
of the symbolic link. Hard links are listed with the size of the file, which is how hard
links are archived. Block and character devices, if they were backed up, are listed with
a size of 0. When the -v flag is not specified, the backup command displays only the
names of the files being archived. This option is used only when backing up by file
name.
Disabled. If the -w flag is specified, no other flags are applied.
Displays, for each file system in the /etc/dumpdates file, the most recent backup date
and level. If the -W flag is specified, no other flags are applied.
Specifies the backup level (0 to 9). The default level is 9.
-u
-v
-w
-W
-Level
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
Successful completion.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To back up all the files and subdirectories in the /home directory using full path names, type the
following command:
find /home -print | backup
-i -f /dev/rmt0
The -i flag specifies that files will be read from standard input and archived by the file name. The
find command generates a list of all the files in the /home directory. The files in this list are full path
names. The | (pipe symbol) causes this list to be read from standard input by the backup command.
The -f flag directs the backup command to write the files to the /dev/rmt0 tape device. Because the
files are archived using full path names, they will be written to the same paths when restored.
2. To back up all the files and subdirectories in the /home/padmin directory using relative path names,
type the following command:
find . -print | backup
-i -v -q
Each file name in the list generated by the find command is preceded by ./ (dot, slash). Because the
files are backed up using relative path names, they are written to the current directory when restored.
The -v flag causes the backup command to display additional information about the backup. The files
are written to the default backup device /dev/rfd0.
3. To back up the / (root) file system, type the following command:
backup
-0 -u -f /dev/rmt0 /
The 0 level specifies that all the files in the / (root) file system be backed up. The -u flag causes the
backup command to update the /etc/dumpdates file for this backup.
4. To back up all the files in the root (/) file system that have been modified since the last level 0
backup, type the following command:
backup
-1 -u -f /dev/rmt0 /
If the /etc/dumpdates file does not have an entry for a level 0 backup of the / (root) system, all the
files in the file system are backed up.
5. To back up virtual optical media files from the virtual media repository, complete the following tasks:
a. Create a file called backup_files with the names of the files to be backed up. Include the full path
name.
24
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
/var/vio/VMLibrary/media_file1
/var/vio/VMLibrary/media_file2
/var/vio/VMLibrary/media_filen
b. Send the file using the backup command:
cat backup_files | backup -i -f /dev/rmt0
Related Information
The restore command.
backupios command
Purpose
Creates an installable image of the root volume group either onto a bootable tape, file system, or DVD.
Syntax
backupios -file {Directory} [-nosvg]
backupios -file {File name} [-mksysb] [-nosvg]
backupios -tape Device [-nopak] [-verify] [-nosvg]
backupios -cd Device {-udf | -cdformat} [-accept] [-nosvg]
Description
The backupios command creates a backup of the Virtual I/O Server and places it onto a file system,
bootable tape, or DVD. You can use this backup to reinstall a system to its original state after it has been
corrupted. If you create the backup on tape , the tape is bootable and includes the installation programs
needed to install from the backup.
If the -cd flag is specified, the backupios command creates a system backup image to DVD-RAM media.
If you need to create multi-volume discs because the image does not fit on one disc, the backupios
command gives instructions for disk replacement and removal until all the volumes have been created.
Note: Vendor disc drives may support burning to additional disc types, such as CD-RW and DVD-R.
Refer to the documentation for your drive to determine which disc types are supported.
If the -file flag is specified, the backupios command creates a system backup image to the path specified.
The file system must be mounted and writable by the Virtual I/O Server root user prior to running the
backupios command (see “mount command” on page 305 for details). Backing up the Virtual I/O Server
to a remote file system will create the nim_resources.tar image in the directory you specify. The Virtual
I/O Server must have root write access to the server on which the backup will be created. This backup
can be reinstalled from the HMC using the installios command.
The backupios command empties the target_disks_stanza section of bosinst.data (which is part of the
nim_resources.tar image) and sets RECOVER_DEVICES=Default. This allows the mksysb file generated
by the command to be cloned to another logical partition. If you plan to use the nim_resources.tar image
to install to a specific disk, then you need to repopulate the target_disks_stanza section of bosinst.data
and replace this file in the nim_resources.tar image. All other parts of the nim_resources.tar image must
remain unchanged.
Alphabetical list of commands
25
Prior to backing up the root volume group, the backupios command saves the structure of all
user-defined volume groups by calling the savevgstruct command for each volume group defined. To
avoid having all user-defined volume groups backed up, use the -nosvg flag.
Note: The backupios command backs up only the volume group structures that are activated. The
structures of volumes groups that are deactivated are not backed up.
Flags
-accept
-cd
-cdformat
-file
-mksysb
-nopak
-nosvg
-tape
-udf
-verify
Accepts licenses.
The Virtual I/O Server backup is placed onto DVD-RAM media.
Creates final CD images that are DVD sized (up to 4.38 GB).
The Virtual I/O Server backup is placed in a file.
When the -mksyb flag is used, the resources used by the installios command are not
saved in the image.
Disables software packing of the files as they are backed up. Some tape drives use their
own packing or compression algorithms.
Prevents the volume groups structure of user defined volume groups from being saved
as part of the backupios process.
The Virtual I/O Server backup is placed onto a tape.
Creates a UDF (Universal Disk Format) file system on DVD-RAM media. The default
format is Rock Ridge (ISO9660).
Verifies a tape backup. This flag causes the backupios command to verify the file
header of each file on the backup tape and report any read errors as they occur.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To generate a backup to the optical device named /dev/cd1, type:
backupios -cd /dev/cd1 -cdformat
2. To generate a system backup to a tape device named /dev/rmt0, type:
backupios -tape /dev/rmt0
Related Information
The mount command and the savevgstruct command.
IVM bkprofdata command
Purpose
Backs up profile data. This command is operable only in an Integrated Virtualization Manager
environment.
Syntax
bkprofdata -o backup [ -f BackupFile ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The bkprofdata command performs a back up of logical partition configuration information to a file. The
file can later be used to restore the partition configuration with the rstprofdata command.
26
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Flags
-f BackupFile
-o backup
-m ManagedSystem
The name of the file to write the dump to in the current working directory. If not
specified, the default file is /var/adm/lpm/profile.bak.
The backup parameter backs up logical partition configuration data to a file.
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is available to all users.
Examples
1. To back up the partition configuration data to /var/adm/lpm/profile.bak, type:
bkprofdata -o backup
2. To back up the partition configuration data to lparData.bak, type:
bkprofdata -o backup -f lparData.bak
Related Information
The rstprofdata command.
bootlist command
Purpose
Displays and alters the list of boot devices available to the system.
Syntax
bootlist -mode mode {[ -ls ] [ [ -rm ] | [ Device [ -attr Attribute=Value ... ] ... ] ] }
Description
The bootlist command allows the user to display and alter the list of possible boot devices from which
the system may be booted. When the system is booted, it will scan the devices in the list and attempt to
boot from the first device it finds containing a boot image. This command supports the updating of the
following:
v Service boot list. The service list designates possible boot devices for when the system is booted in
service mode. How a system is booted in service mode is hardware-platform dependent. It may require
a key switch to be turned to the Service position, a particular function key to be pressed during the
boot process, or some other mechanism, as defined for the particular hardware platform.
v Previous boot device entry. This entry designates the last device from which the system booted. Some
hardware platforms may attempt to boot from the previous boot device before looking for a boot
device in one of the other lists.
Alphabetical list of commands
27
The bootlist command supports the specification of generic device types as well as specific devices for
boot candidates. Devices in the boot device list occur in the same order as devices listed on the
invocation of this command.
The selection of the boot list to display or alter is made with the -mode mode option, where the mode
variable is one of the keywords: service, normal, both, or prevboot. If the both keyword is specified,
then both the normal boot list and the service boot list will be displayed, or if being altered, will be set to
the same list of devices. If the prevboot keyword is specified, the only alteration allowed is with the -rm
flag . The -rm flag invalidates the boot list specified by the -mode flag.
The devices currently in the boot list may be displayed by using the -ls flag. The list of devices that make
up the specified boot list will be displayed, one device per line. If a device specified in the boot list is no
longer present on the system, a '-' is displayed instead of a name.
Note: When you add a hot plug adapter to the system, that adapter and its child devices might not be
available for specification as a boot device when you use the bootlist command. You may be required to
reboot your system to make all potential boot devices known to the operating system.
Device Choices
The device name specified on the command line can occur in one of two different forms:
v It can indicate a specific device by its device logical name.
v It can indicate a generic or special device type by keyword. The following generic device keywords are
supported:
fd
scdisk
badisk
cd
rmt
ent
fddi
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
standard I/O-attached diskette drive
SCSI-attached disk (including serial-link disk drives)
direct bus-attached disk
SCSI-attached CD-ROM
SCSI-attached tape device
Ethernet adapter
Fiber Distributed Data Interface adapter
When a specific device is to be included in the device list, the device's logical name (used with system
management commands) must be specified. This logical name is made up of a prefix and a suffix. The
suffix is generally a number and designates the specific device. The specified device must be in the
Available state. If it is not, the update to the device list is rejected and this command fails. The
following devices and their associated logical names are supported (where the bold type is the prefix
and the xx variable is the device-specific suffix):
fdxx
hdiskxx
cdxx
rmtxx
entxx
fddixx
Diskette-drive device logical names
Physical-volume device logical names
SCSI CD-ROM device logical names
Magnetic-tape device logical names
Ethernet-adapter logical names
Fiber Distributed Data Interface adapter logical names
Attribute Choices
Attributes are extra pieces of information about a device that the user supplies on the command line.
Since this information is specific to a particular device, generic devices do not have attributes. Attributes
apply to the device that immediately precedes them on the command line, which allows attributes to be
interspersed among devices on the command line. Currently, only network devices have attributes. These
are:
28
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
bserver
gateway
client
speed
duplex
IP address of the BOOTP server
IP address of the gateway
IP address of the client
Network adapter speed
The mode of the network adapter
Error Handling
If this command returns with an error, the device lists are not altered. The following device list errors are
possible:
v If the user attempts to display or alter a boot list that is not supported by the hardware platform, the
command fails, indicating the mode is not supported.
v If the user attempts to add too many devices to the boot list, the command fails, indicating that too
many devices were requested. The number of devices supported varies depending on the device
selection and the hardware platform .
v If an invalid keyword, invalid flag, or unknown device is specified, the command fails with the
appropriate error message.
v If a specified device is not in the Available state, the command fails with the appropriate error
message.
Flags
Device
-attr Attribute=Value
-mode Mode
-ls
-rm
Provides the names of the specific or generic devices to include in the boot list.
Specifies the device attribute value pairs to be used instead of the defaults. The
Attribute=Value variable can be used to specify one attribute value pair or multiple
attribute value pairs for one -attr flag. If you use an -attr flag with multiple attribute
value pairs, the list of pairs must be enclosed in quotation marks with a blank space
between the pairs. For example, entering -attr Attribute=Value lists one attribute
value pair per flag, while entering -attr ’Attribute1=Value1 Attribute2=Value2’ lists
more than one attribute value pair.
Specifies which boot list to display or alter. Possible values for the mode variable are
normal, service, both, or prevboot.
Indicates that the specified boot list is to be displayed after any specified alteration is
performed. The output is a list of device names.
Indicates that the device list specified by the -mode flag should be invalidated.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To invalidate the Service mode boot list, type:
bootlist -mode service -rm
2. To make a boot list for Normal mode with devices listed on the command line, type:
bootlist -mode normal hdisk0 hdisk1 rmt0 fd
3. To attempt to boot through a gateway using Ethernet, and then try other devices, type a command
similar to the following. Substitute the IP addresses specified in the example with your IP addresses.
bootlist -mode normal ent0 -attr gateway=129.35.21.1 bserver=129.12.2.10 \
client=129.35.9.23 hdisk0 rmt0 tok0 bserver=129.35.10.19 hdisk1
Related Information
The backupios command.
Alphabetical list of commands
29
cat command
Purpose
Concatenates or displays files.
Syntax
cat [ - q ] [ -r ] [ - s ] [ - S ] [ - u ] [ - n [ - b ] ] [ - v [ - e ] [ - t ] ] [ - | File ... ]
Description
The cat command reads each File parameter in sequence and writes it to standard output. If you do not
specify a file name, the cat command reads from standard input. You can also specify a file name of (dash) for standard input.
Attention: Do not redirect output to one of the input files using the redirection symbol, > (caret). If you
do this, you lose the original data in the input file because the shell truncates the file before the cat
command can read it.
Flags
Omits line numbers from blank lines, when specified with the -n flag.
Displays a $ (dollar sign) at the end of each line, when specified with the -v flag.
Displays output lines preceded by line numbers, numbered sequentially from 1.
Does not display a message if the cat command cannot find an input file. This flag is
identical to the -s flag.
Replaces multiple consecutive empty lines with one empty line. This flag is identical to
the -S flag.
Does not display a message if the cat command cannot find an input file. This flag is
identical to the -q flag.
Note: Previously, the -s flag handled tasks now assigned to the -S flag.
Replaces multiple consecutive empty lines with one empty line. This flag is identical to
the -r flag.
Displays tab characters as ^I if specified with the -v flag.
Does not buffer output. The default is buffered output.
Displays nonprinting characters as visible characters, with the exception of tabs,
new-lines, and form-feeds. ASCII control characters (octal 000-037) are printed as ^n,
where n is the corresponding ASCII character in the octal range 100-137 (@, A, B, C,...,
X, Y, Z, [, \, ], ^, and _); the DEL character (octal 0177) is printed as ^?. Other
non-printable characters are printed as M-x, where x is the ASCII character specified by
the low-order seven bits.
-b
-e
-n
-q
-r
-s
-S
-t
-u
-v
When used with the -v option, the following options may be used:
-e
A $ character will be printed at the end of each line prior to a new line.
-t
Tabs will be printed as ^I and form feeds will be printed as ^L
The -e and -t options are ignored if the -v option is not specified.
Allows standard input to the cat command.
-
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
0
>0
30
All input files were output successfully.
An error occurred.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Examples
Attention: Do not redirect output to one of the input files using the redirection symbol, > (caret).
1. To display a file at the workstation, enter:
cat notes
This command displays the data in the notes file.
2. To concatenate several files, enter:
cat section1.1 section1.2 section1.3 >section1
This command creates a file named section1 that is a copy of section1.1 followed by section1.2 and
section1.3.
3. To suppress error messages about files that do not exist, enter:
cat
-q section2.1 section2.2 section2.3 >section2
If section2.1 does not exist, this command concatenates section2.2 and section2.3. The result is the
same if you do not use the -q flag, except that the cat command displays the error message:
cat: cannot open section2.1
You may want to suppress this message with the -q flag when you use the cat command in shell
procedures.
4. To append one file to the end of another, enter:
cat section1.4 >> section1
The >> (two carets) appends a copy of section1.4 to the end of section1. If you want to replace the
file, use the > (caret).
5. To add text to the end of a file, enter:
cat >>notes
Get milk on the way home
Ctrl-D
This command adds Get milk on the way home to the end of the file called notes. The cat command
does not prompt; it waits for you to enter text. Press the Ctrl-D key sequence to indicate you are
finished.
6. To concatenate several files with text entered from the keyboard, enter:
cat section3.1 - section3.3 >section3
This command concatenates the file section3.1 with text from the keyboard (indicated by the minus
sign), and the file section3.3, then directs the output into the file called section3.
Files
/usr/bin/cat
Contains the cat command.
Related Information
The cp command.
Alphabetical list of commands
31
cattracerpt command
Purpose
Formats a report from the trace log.
Syntax
cattracerpt [ -hookid List | -lshid ] [ -outfile FileName ]
Description
The cattracerpt command reads the trace log, formats the trace entries, and writes a report to standard
output.
Flags
-hookid List
-lshid
-outfile File
Limits report to hook IDs specified with the List variable. The List parameter items must
be separated by commas.
Displays the list of hook IDs. The cattracerpt -listid command can be used with the
starttrace -event command that includes IDs of trace events.
Writes the report to a file instead of to standard output.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
v To send a trace report to the newfile file, enter:
cattracerpt -outfile newfile
v To display a list of hook IDs, enter:
cattracerpt -lshid
Related Information
The starttrace command, and the stoptrace command.
cfgassist command
Purpose
Manages some of the initial setup of the Virtual I/O Server.
The cfgassist command is used by a padmin user only. Initial setup includes the following tasks:
v Set date and time zone
v Change passwords
v Set system security
v Virtual I/O Server TCP/IP configuration
v Install and update software
v Storage management
v Devices
v Performance
32
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
v Electronic Service Agent™
The cfgassist command is menu-driven and accessible only by the padmin user for security reasons.
Syntax
cfgassist
Description
Set date and time zone
Set the date and time zone of the Virtual I/O Server.
Change passwords
Change the passwords for the users of the Virtual I/O Server.
Set system security
Set or unset the security settings by enforcing security rules and configuring firewall settings on
the Virtual I/O Server.
Virtual I/O Server TCP/IP configuration
Set the TCP/IP configuration parameters that the Virtual I/O Server requires. This includes the
host name, the IP address, the interface on which the IP is to be configured, the subnet mask, the
gateway, the name server address, and the domain name.
Install and update software
Use to install and update software on the Virtual I/O Server.
Storage Management
Manage the storage on the Virtual I/O Server. Management operations include creation, deletion,
or modification to the following storage devices: volume groups, logical volumes, physical
volumes, storage pools, and virtual media repositories.
Devices
Manage the devices on the Virtual I/O Server, including virtual devices. Management operations
include configuring or unconfiguring devices, changing characteristics of devices, removing
devices, as well as configuring shared Ethernet adapters, link aggregation, and virtual local area
network (VLAN).
Performance
Manage the performance tools on the Virtual I/O Server by using the following topas functions:
1. Topas recordings:
The Virtual I/O Server supports local, central electronics process (CEC), and cluster recording
capabilities. These recordings can be either persistent or normal. Persistent recordings are
recordings that run on the Virtual I/O Server and continue to run after the Virtual I/O Server
reboots. Normal recordings are recordings that run for a specified time interval. The recording
data files that are generated are stored in /home/ios/perf/topas. Local recordings gather data
about the Virtual I/O Server, whereas CEC recordings gather data about any AIX® logical
partitions that are running on the same CEC as the Virtual I/O Server. The data collected
consists of dedicated and shared logical partition data, as well as a set of aggregated values
that provide an overview of the partition set. Cluster recordings gather data from a list of
hosts that are specified in a cluster configuration file. This list is considered a single cluster.
The cluster configuration file is populated with host names and IP addresses by using the
xmtopas configuration option for the cfgassist command. These hosts can belong to various
CECs that are not on the same CEC as the Virtual I/O Server, although the xmtopas option,
which is responsible for gathering data outside of the Virtual I/O Server, must be enabled to
start the CEC and cluster recordings. The recording format can be specified by the user as
either binary or nmon.
Persistent recordings are started by the cfgassist command with the option to specify the cut
and retention of the recording. The user can specify the number of days of recording to be
Alphabetical list of commands
33
stored per recording file (cut) and the number of days of recording to be retained (retention)
before the recording can be deleted. Not more than one instance of persistent recording of the
same type (CEC or local recording) can be run in a system. When a persistent recording is
started, the recording command is called with user-specified options. The same set of
command line options used by this persistent recording is added to inittab entries. This
ensures that the recording is started automatically on reboot or restart of the system.
In the case of a system that is already running a persistent local recording (binary or nmon
recording format), a user might want to start a new persistent recording of a local binary
recording. To start a new persistent recording, the existing persistent recording must first be
stopped by using the stop persistent recording option available under the stop recording
option. Then a new persistent local recording has to be started from the start persistent local
recording option. Starting a persistent recording fails if a persistent recording of the same
recording format is already running in the system. Recordings are deleted after the specified
retention period. By default, local persistent recordings run on the Virtual I/O Server.
2. Performance Manager
This function configures the Performance Manager (perfmgr) agent to gather data about
performance of the Virtual I/O Server to analyze the data. The generated recordings are
picked up by the Electronic Service Agent (ESA) agent, which sends the data to IBM support
for analysis.
After the agent is started, it runs various scripts internally to collect various data and
generates a single data file named stats.send. All the individual data files and the stats.send file
are stored in /var/perf/pm/daily/<hostname>/. Normally, the stats.send file is generated every
midnight from the list of individual data files, which are generated by internally called
scripts. A user can generate the stats.send file on-demand by running the Retransmit Recorded
Data menu.
Electronic Service Agent
Electronic Service Agent automatically monitors and collects hardware problem information and
sends this information to IBM® support. It also can collect hardware, software, system
configuration, and performance management information which can help IBM support assist in
diagnosing problems.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
To display network sockets, type:
cfgassist -h
Related Information
The bootlist command.
cfgdev command
Purpose
Configures devices in the Virtual I/O Server.
Syntax
cfgdev [ -dev Name ]
34
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Description
The cfgdev command configures devices. If there are any devices detected that have no device software
installed when configuring devices, the cfgdev command returns a warning message with the name or a
list of possible names for the device package that must be installed. If the specific name of the device
package is determined, it is displayed as the only package name, on a line below the warning message. If
the specific name cannot be determined, a colon-separated list of possible package names is displayed on
a single line. A package name or list of possible package names is displayed for each of the devices, if
more than one device is detected without its device software.
The system displays the following warning message when devices without their device software are
detected:
cfgdev: 0514-621 WARNING: The following device packages are
required for device support but are not currently
installed.
devices.pci.22100020
devices.pci.14101800
devices.pci.scsi:devices.pci.00100300:devices.pci.NCR.53C825
In this example, two devices were found that had missing software, and the cfgdev command displayed
the names of the device packages that must be installed. A third device that also has missing software
was found, but in this case, the cfgdev command displays several possible device package names.
Attention: To protect the Configuration database, the cfgdev command is not interruptible. Stopping
this command before execution is complete could result in a corrupted database.
Flags
-dev Name
Specifies the named device to configure along with its children.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To configure detected devices attached to the scsi0 adapter, type:
cfgdev -dev scsi0
Related Information
The chdev command, the chpath command, the lsdev command, the lsmap command, the lspath
command, the mkpath command, the mkvdev command, the rmdev command, and the rmpath
command.
cfglnagg command
Purpose
Add or remove adapters from a Link Aggregation or change Link Aggregation attributes.
Syntax
cfglnagg { -add [ -backup ] | -rm } LinkAggregation Adapter
cfglnagg [ -f ] -attr Attribute=NewValue LinkAggregation ...
Alphabetical list of commands
35
Description
This command adds adapters to a Link Aggregation or removes adapters from a Link Aggregation. This
command can also be used to modify Link Aggregation attributes. It is not necessary to detach the Link
Aggregation's interface to add or remove adapters or modify most Link Aggregation attributes.
Changing the use_jumbo_frame attribute requires the Link Aggregation to be detached. If this attribute is
specified, the cfglnagg command detaches the Link Aggregation before modifying the use_jumbo_frame
attributes, then brings the Link Aggregation back up. The user is prompted to continue unless the -f flags
is specified.
Use the lsdev command with the -attr flag to view all attributes associated with a Link Aggregation
device, including adapters.
Note: To create a Link Aggregation see the mkvdev command.
Flags
-add
-attr
-backup
-f
-rm
Adds the specified Adapter to the specified Link Aggregation. If the adapter must be
added as a back up adapter, the -backup flag must be specified.
Specifies an attribute of the specified Link Aggregation.
Specifies that the Adapter is being added as a back up adapter.
Instructs the cgflnagg command to not prompt the user.
Deletes the specified Adapter from the specified Link Aggregation. The specified
adapter can be either a primary or back up adapter.
Parameters
Adapter
LinkAggregation
Specifies the adapter to add or delete.
Specifies the Link Aggregation.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To add adapter ent8 to Link Aggregation ent3, type:
cfglnagg -add ent3 ent8
Related Information
The mktcpip command, the mkvdev command, the hostname command, the startnetsvc command, the
stopnetsvc command, the netstat command, the entstat command, the cfgnamesrv command, the
hostmap command, the traceroute command, the ping command, the optimizenet command.
cfgnamesrv command
Purpose
Directly manipulates domain name server entries for local resolver routines in the system configuration
database.
36
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Syntax
To Add a Name Server Entry
cfgnamesrv -add { -ipaddr IPAddress | -dname DomainName | -slist SearchList}
To Delete a Name Server Entry
cfgnamesrv -rm { -ipaddr IPAddress | -domain | -slist}
To Change a Name Server Entry
cfgnamesrv -ch DomainName
To Display a Name Server Entry
cfgnamesrv -ls [ -namesrv | -domain | -slist ]
To Create the Configuration Database File
cfgnamesrv -mk [ -ipaddr IPAddress [ -dname DomainName ] [ -slist SearchList ] ]
To Change a Search List Entry
cfgnamesrv -chslist SearchList
Description
The cfgnamesrv command adds or deletes domain name server entries for local resolver routines in the
system configuration database. To add a name server entry, specify an Internet Protocol address and,
optionally, a domain name.
The cfgnamesrv command can show one or all domain name server entries in the system configuration
database. There are three types of domain name server entries:
v A domain entry identifying the name of the local Internet domain.
v A name server entry that identifies the Internet address of a domain name server for the local domain.
The address must be in dotted decimal format.
v A search list entry that lists all the domains to search when resolving hostnames. This is a space
delimited list.
One domain entry and a maximum of three name server entries can exist in the system configuration
database. One search entry can exist.
Flags
-add
-ch DomainName
-chslist
-dname
-domain
-ipaddr IPAddress
Adds an entry to the system configuration database.
Changes the domain name in the system configuration database.
Changes the search list.
Indicates that the command deals with the domain name entry.
Specifies that the operation is on the domain name. Use this flag with the -rm flag and
the -ls flag.
Indicates that the command deals with a name server entry. Use dotted decimal format
for the given IP address.
Alphabetical list of commands
37
Shows all domain and name server entries in the configuration system database. If you
use the -ipaddr flag, the cfgnamesrv command shows all name server entries. If you
use the -domain flag, the cfgnamesrv command shows the domain name entry found
in the database.
Creates the system configuration database.
Specifies that the -ls flag should print all name server entries.
Deletes an entry in the system configuration database. It must be used with the -ipaddr
IPAddress flag or the -domain flag. The -ipaddr flag deletes a name server entry. The
-domain flag deletes the domain name entry.
Specifies that the operation is on the search list. Use this flag with the -rm and -ls flag.
Changes the search list in the system configuration database.
-ls
-mk
-namesrv
-rm
-slist
-slist SearchList
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To add a domain entry with a domain name of abc.aus.century.com, type:
cfgnamesrv -add -dname abc.aus.century.com
2. To add a name server entry with IP address 192.9.201.1, type:
cfgnamesrv
-add
-ipaddr 192.9.201.1
3. To show all system configuration database entries related to domain name server information used by
local resolver routines, type:
cfgnamesrv
-ls
The output is given in the following format:
domain xyz.aus.century.com
name server 192.9.201.1
4. To set the search list abc.aus.century.com xyz.aus.century.com, type:
cfgnamesrv -chslist abc.aus.century.com xyz.aus.century.com
The cfglnagg command, the entstat command, the lsnetsvc command, the mktcpip command, the netstat
command, and the optimizenet command.
cfgsvc command
Purpose
Configures an agent or service specified by the given name.
Syntax
cfgsvc AgentName [-attr Attribute=Value... | -ls | -key]
Description
The cfgsvc command configures the agent or service specified, by the given name. Use the lssvc
command to obtain a list of agents or services. After configuring the agent or service, you can start and
stop the agent or service by using the startsvc and stopsvc commands. Each time you run the command,
it overwrites previous configurations.
To find the values for required attributes for an agent or service, use the -ls flag. If you do not specify a
required attribute when you specify this command, a message is displayed that indicates the missing
required attribute.
38
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Agents might create ssh keys as part of their configuration. You can display the ssh public key that is
generated during configuration by using the -key flag.
Parameters
-attr Attribute=Value
-ls
-key
Identifies an attribute and value that are associated with the configuration of an agent
or service.
Lists all the attributes that can be changed for a particular agent or service
configuration.
Displays the ssh public key that is generated for a particular agent or service
configuration.
Note: The -key flag is not valid for the IBM TotalStorage Productivity Center.
Agent or service names
The following agents or services can be managed by the Virtual I/O Server.
DIRECTOR_agent
Attribute names for the IBM Systems Director agent
View and track hardware configuration details of the system, and monitor performance
and use of critical components, such as processors, disks, and memory.
RESTART_ON_REBOOT
This is an optional configuration attribute for the IBM Systems Director agent.
It designates whether the IBM Systems Director agent will be restarted if the
Virtual I/O Server is rebooted.
Valid values are:
True
False
Alphabetical list of commands
39
ITM_premium
Attribute names for the IBM Tivoli® Monitoring (ITM) agents
ITM_cec
The ITM_premium and ITM_cec agents provide system information including I/O
virtualization mappings and system utilization.
These agents require that you specify the HOSTNAME attribute for configuration. Also,
an ssh public key is generated if one does not exist.
HOSTNAME
Provides the monitoring agent with a Tivoli Enterprise Management System
(TEMS) host name. This is a required attribute.
Valid values are:
Host name
IP address
RESTART_ON_REBOOT
Designates whether the monitoring agent will be restarted if the Virtual I/O
Server is rebooted. Because you can only run one monitoring agent on the
Virtual I/O Server at any given time, configuring more than one monitoring
agent to restart is only valid for the last agent that is configured to restart. Run
the lssvc command using the ITM agent name to verify which agent restarts.
Valid values are:
True
False
managing_system
Provides the monitoring agent with a Hardware Management Console (HMC)
host name. This attribute is not valid for the Integrated Virtualization Manager.
Valid values are:
[user_name@]Host name
IP address
CEC
Provides the ITM_cec agent with a CEC host name.
DIRECTOR_HOST_ADDRESS
Provides the ITM_cec agent with a Director host name or IP address. The
default value is blank. This is an optional attribute.
DIRECTOR_AUTHENTICATION
Provides the ITM_cec agent with a Director authentication value. The default
value is Yes. This is an optional attribute.
TSM_base
DIRECTOR_PORT_NUMBER
Provides the ITM_cec agent with a Director port number. The default value is
8422. This is an optional attribute.
Attribute names for the Tivoli Storage Manager agent
SERVERNAME
The host name of the Tivoli Storage Manager server to which the Tivoli
Storage Manager client is associated.
SERVERIP
The IP address or domain name of the Tivoli Storage Manager server to which
the Tivoli Storage Manager client is associated.
NODENAME
The name of the machine on which the Tivoli Storage Manager client is
installed.
40
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
ITUAM_base
Attribute names for the Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager agent
ACCT_DATA0
The size, in megabytes, of the first data file that holds daily accounting
information.
ACCT_DATA1
The size, in megabytes, of the second data file that holds daily accounting
information.
ISYSTEM
The time, in minutes, when the agent generates system interval records.
IPROCESS
The time, in minutes, when the system generates aggregate process records.
Alphabetical list of commands
41
TPC
Attribute names for the TotalStorage Productivity Center agents
The TPC agent is a TotalStorage Productivity Center agent. This agent requires that you
specify the S, A, devAuth, and caPass attributes for configuration. By default,
specifying this agent configures both the TPC_data and TPC_fabric agents.
S
Provides the TotalStorage Productivity Center agent with a TotalStorage
Productivity Center server host name. This a required configuration attribute.
Tha valid values are:
Host name
IP address
A
Provides the TotalStorage Productivity Center agent with an agent manager
host name. This is a required attribute.
The valid values are:
Host name
IP address
devAuth
Sets the TotalStorage Productivity Center device server authentication
password. This is a required attribute.
The valid value is:
Password
caPass
Sets the CA authentication password. This is a required attribute.
The valid value is:
Password
caPort
Sets the CA port. This is an optional attribute. The default value is 9510.
The valid value is:
Number
amRegPort
Specifies the agent manager registration port. This is an optional attribute. The
default value is 9511.
The valid value is:
Number
amPubPort
Specifies the agent manager public port. This is an optional attribute. The
default value is 9513.
The valid value is:
Number
dataPort
Specifies the TotalStorage Productivity Center data server port. This is an
optional attribute. The default value is 9549.
The valid value is:
Number
42
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
devPort
Specifies the TotalStorage Productivity Center device server port. This is an
optional attribute. The default value is 9550.
The valid value is:
Number
newCA
This is an optional attribute. The default value is true.
The valid values are:
True
False
oldCA
This is an optional attribute. The default value is true.
The valid values are:
True
False
daScan This is an optional attribute. The default value is true.
The valid values are:
True
False
daScript
This is an optional attribute. The default value is true.
The valid values are:
True
False
daInstall
This is an optional attribute. The default value is true.
The valid values are:
True
False
faInstall
This is an optional attribute. The default value is true.
The valid values are:
True
False
U
perfmgr
ipsec_tunnel
Specifies to uninstall the agent. This is an optional attribute.
The valid values are:
All | data | fabric
Attribute names for the performance management data collector agent: see the
postprocesssvc command.
ipsec_tunnel works as a service on the Virtual I/O Server. Configurable parameters are
as follows:
local_ip
The IP address of the source Virtual I/O Server.
remote_ip
The IP address of the destination Virtual I/O Server.
key
The key value consists of alphanumeric characters only.
Examples
IBM Tivoli Monitoring
1. To list all the attributes that are associated with an agent configuration, type the following command:
cfgsvc -ls ITM_premium
Alphabetical list of commands
43
2. To configure the ITM_premium agent with several attributes, type the following command:
cfgsvc ITM_premium -attr Restart_On_Reboot=TRUE hostname=tems_server
managing_system=hmc_console
Note: When the RESTART_ON_REBOOT attribute is set to TRUE, the ITM agent is restarted when
the Virtual I/O Server is being rebooted. The hostname attribute specifies the Tivoli Enterprise
Monitoring Server (TEMS) IP address or hostname is set to tems_server. The managing_system
attribute specifies the HMC IP address or hostname is set to hmc_console.
3. To display the ITM_premium agent ssh public key, type the following command:
cfgsvc -key ITM_premium
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
1. To list all the attributes associated with an agent configuration, type the following command:
cfgsvc -ls TSM_base
2. To configure the TSM_base agent with several attributes, type the following command:
cfgsvc TSM_base -attr SERVERNAME=tsm_server SERVERIP=1.127.0.1
NODENAME=VIOS
IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager
1. To list all the attributes associated with an agent configuration, type the following command:
cfgsvc -ls ITUAM_base
2. To configure the ITUAM_base agent with several attributes, type the following command:
cfgsvc ITUAM_base -attr ACCT_DATA0=15 ACCT_DATA1=15
ISYSTEM=60 IPROCESS=60
IBM TotalStorage Productivity Center
1. To list all TotalStorage Productivity Center configurable attributes, type the following command:
cfgsvc TPC -ls
2. To configure TotalStorage Productivity Center with mandatory attributes, type the following
command:
cfgsvc TPC -attr S=tpc_server_hostname
A=agent_manager_hostname devAuth=password caPass=password
IBM Systems Director Agent
1. To list all the attributes associated with an agent configuration, type the following command:
cfgsvc -ls DIRECTOR_agent
2. To configure the DIRECTOR_agent with several attributes, type the following command:
cfgsvc DIRECTOR_agent -attr RESTART_ON_REBOOT=TRUE
ipsec tunnels
1. To list all the attributes associated with the service configuration, type the following command:
cfgsvc -ls ipsec_tunnel
2. To configure ipsec_tunnel, type the following command:
cfgsvc ipsec_tunnel -attr local_ip=1.2.3.4 remote_ip=2.1.4.3 key=abcd1234
Related Information
The lssvc command, the startsvc command, the stopsvc command, and the postprocesssvc command.
For more information about the various agents, see the following information:
v IBM Tivoli software and the Virtual I/O Server
44
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
v Configuring the IBM Tivoli agents and clients on the Virtual I/O Server
v IBM Systems Director software
v Configuring the IBM Systems Director agent
chbdsp command
Purpose
Change the characteristics of a backing device within a storage pool.
Syntax
Increase the size of a backing device:
chbdsp [-sp StoragePool | -bd BackingDevice -size Size
Rename a backing device:
chbdsp [-sp StoragePool | -bd BackingDevice -mv NewName
Description
The chbdsp command changes attributes of the specified backing device. If the -size flag is specified the
backing devices's size is increased. Size can be given in megabytes (###M/m) or gigabytes (###G/g).
If the -mv flag is specified, the backing device is renamed.
Note: The backing device that you specified cannot be assigned to a shared memory pool (to be used as
a paging space device by a shared memory partition).
Flags
-bd BackingDevice
-mv NewName
-size Size
-sp StoragePool
Specifies
Specifies
Specifies
Specifies
the
the
the
the
backing device.
new name of the backing device.
minimum amount of storage to add to the backing device.
storage pool to be used.
Exit Status
23
39
40
Specified storage pool is not a valid storage pool.
The given backing device is not in the specified storage pool.
File backing device names cannot exceed "38" characters in length.
Examples
1. To increase the size of a the backing device client1, in the default storage pool by 3 gigabytes, type:
chbdsp -bd client1 -size 3g
2. To rename the backing device cl_data, in the storage pool partition_3, to bank_data, type:
chbdsp -sp partition_3 -bd cl_data -mv bank_data
Alphabetical list of commands
45
chdate command
Purpose
Displays or changes the date, time or time zone.
Syntax
chdate [ mmddHHMM [YYyy | yy] ] [-timezone TZ]
chdate [-year YYyy] [-month mm] [-day dd] [-hour HH] [-minute MM] [-timezone TZ]
Description
Displays or changes the system date, time, or time zone. Changes made to the time zone will not take
effect until the user logs out. For the time zone to take effect for the entire system, the system must be
rebooted. All flags are optional, and the current system time information will be used if a flag was
unspecified.
If no flags or arguments are specified, the chdate command displays the current date and time.
The mmddHHMM [YYyy | yy] parameters correspond to month, day, hour, minute, and optional 4 or 2
digit year.
Note: The user must have padmin authority to change the date and time.
Flags
-year
-month
-day
-hour
-minute
-timezone
Sets
Sets
Sets
Sets
Sets
Sets
the
the
the
the
the
the
year to YYyy.
month to mm.
day to dd.
hour to HH in 24-hour format.
minute to MM.
time zone (for example, CST6CDT).
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To display the current date and time, type:
chdate
2. To change the date to Tue Oct 12 16:30:00 CDT 2004 for a system in the US Central time zone, type:
chdate -day 12 -month 10 -year 2004 -hour 16 -minute 30
or
chdate 101216302004
Note: The user must have padmin authority to change the date and time.
46
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
chdev command
Purpose
Changes the characteristics of a device.
Syntax
chdev -dev Name [ -perm ] [ -attr Attribute=Value [ Attribute=Value... ] ]
Description
The chdev command changes the characteristics of the device specified with the given device logical
name (the -dev Name flag). Some changes may not be allowed when the device is in the Available state.
When the -perm flag is not specified, the chdev command applies the changes to the device and updates
the database to reflect the changes. If the -perm flag is specified, only the database is updated to reflect
the changes, and the device itself is left unchanged. This is useful in cases where a device cannot be
changed because it is in use; in which case, the changes can be made to the database with the -perm flag,
and the changes will be applied to the device when the system is restarted. Not all devices support the
-perm flag.
Attention: To protect the Configuration database, the chdev command is not interruptible. To stop this
command before execution is complete could result in a corrupted database.
Flags
-attr Attribute=Value
-dev Name
-perm
Specifies the device attribute value pairs used for changing specific attribute values.
The Attribute=Value parameter can use one attribute value pair or multiple attribute
value pairs for one -attr flag. If you use an -attr flag with multiple attribute value pairs,
the list of pairs must be separated by spaces. For example, entering -attr Attribute=Value
lists one attribute value pair per flag, while entering -attr Attribute1=Value1
Attribute2=Value2 lists more than one attribute value pair.
Specifies the device logical name, indicated by the Name parameter, whose
characteristics are to be changed.
Changes the device's characteristics permanently without actually changing the device.
This is useful for devices that cannot be made unavailable and cannot be changed while
in the available state. By restarting the system, the changes will be applied to the
device. Not all devices support the -perm flag.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To change the retention instructions of the 4mm SCSI tape drive rmt0 so that the drive does not move
the tape to the beginning, then to the end, and then back to the beginning each time a tape is inserted
or the drive is powered on, type:
chdev -dev rmt0 -attr ret=no
2. To change the SCSI ID of the available SCSI adapter scsi0 that cannot be made unavailable or
changed due to available disk drives connected to it, type:
chdev
-dev scsi0 -attr id=6 -perm
To apply the change to the adapter, shutdown and restart the system.
Alphabetical list of commands
47
Related Information
The cfgdev command, the chpath command, the lsdev command, the lsmap command, the lspath
command, the mkpath command, the mkvdev command, the rmdev command, and the rmpath
command.
IVM chhwres command
Purpose
Changes hardware resources.
Syntax
To add, remove, or modify physical or virtual I/O, memory, or processors settings
chhwres -r io | mem | proc | virtualio | mempool [ --rsubtype scsi | slot | eth | fc | pgdev] [-m
<managed system>] -o a | r | s | rs [-p <partition name> | --id <partition ID>] [-l <DRC index>] [-s <virtual
slot number>] [-q<quantity>] [--procs <quantity>] [--procunits <quantity>] [-w <wait time>] [-d <detail
level>] [--force] [-a "<attributes>"] [--entitled <size>] [--device] [--help]
To add, remove, or modify Host Ethernet Adapter resource assignments and settings
chhwres -r hea [--rsubtype slot | eth ] [-m <managed system>] -o a | r | s [-p <partition name> | --id
<partition ID>] [-l <HEA DRC index>] [-g<port group ID>] [--physport <physical port ID>] [--logport
<logical port ID>] [-w <wait time>] [-d <detail level>] [--force] [-a"<attributes>"] [--help]
Description
The chhwres command changes the hardware resource configuration of the managed system. The
chhwres command is used to perform dynamic LPAR operations.
Flags
--device
-r
--rsubtype
Specifies the paging space device to add or remove. The --device flag is valid only
with -r mempool --rsubtype pgdev.
Specifies the type of hardware resources to change. Valid values are io for physical
I/O, hea for Host Ethernet Adapter resources, virtualio for virtual I/O, mem for
memory, and proc for processing resources.
Specifies the subtype of hardware resources to change. Valid values for --rsubtype
depend on the resource type you specify.
v io: slot, taggedio
v virtualio: eth, scsi, fc, hsl, virtualopti
v mempool: pgdev
-m managed system
Specifies the name of the managed system for which the hardware resource
configuration is to be changed.
The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the
form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss
is the serial number of the managed system.
-o
48
Specifies the operation to perform. Valid values are a to add hardware resources to a
logical partition, r to remove hardware resources from a logical partition, and s to set
hardware resource related attributes for a logical partition an Host Ethernet Adapter,
or the managed-system.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-p
Specifies the name of the logical partition for which the operation is to be performed.
You can either use this option to specify the name of the logical partition for which the
operation is to be performed, or use the --id option to specify the logical partition's ID.
The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
The logical partition name or --id is required for virtual Ethernet.
--id partition ID
Specifies the ID of the logical partition for which the operation is to be performed. To
perform an add or remove operation, the logical partition must be in the running state.
You can either use this option to specify the ID of the logical partition for which the
operation is to be performed, or use the -p option to specify the logical partition's
name. The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
A logical partition is required to be specified with this option or the -p option for all
operations except a virtual Ethernet, memory, Host Ethernet Adapter set operation.
-l
When adding, removing, or moving a physical I/O slot, use this option to specify the
DRC index of the slot.
When performing an Host Ethernet Adapter operation, use this option to specify the
adapter ID of the Host Ethernet Adapter for which the operation is to be performed.
This option is not valid for any other operation.
-s
-q
--procs quantity
Specifies the virtual slot number of the virtual I/O adapter to add or remove. When
adding or removing a virtual I/O adapter, this option is required.
Specifies the quantity of memory to add or remove. The quantity specified must be in
megabytes, it must be a multiple of the memory region size for the managed-system,
and it must be greater than 0.
When adding or removing processing resources to or from a logical partition using
dedicated processors, use this option to specify the quantity of dedicated processors to
add or remove.
When adding or removing processing resources to or from a logical partition using
shared processors, use this option to specify the quantity of virtual processors to add
or remove.
The quantity of processing resources specified with this option must be a whole
number greater than 0.
--procunits
--physport
--logport
-g
When adding or removing processing resources to or from a logical partition using
shared processors, use this option to specify the quantity of processing units to add or
remove.
Otherwise, the quantity of processing units specified with this option can have up to 2
decimal places. In either case, the quantity specified must be greater than 0.
Specifies the ID of the Host Ethernet Adapter physical port. This option is required
when adding an Host Ethernet Adapter logical port to a logical partition. This option
is also required when setting Host Ethernet Adapter physical port attributes. This
option is not valid for any other operation.
Specifies the ID of the Host Ethernet Adapter logical port to add or remove. This
option is required for a Host Ethernet Adapter add or remove operation. This option is
not valid for any other operation.
Specifies the Host Ethernet Adapter port group. This option is required for all Host
Ethernet Adapter operations, and is not valid for any other operation.
Alphabetical list of commands
49
-w
Specifies the elapsed time, in minutes, after which an add, remove, or move operation
will be stopped. wait-time must be a whole number. If wait-time is 0, the operation will
not be timed out.
If this option is not specified, a default value of 5 minutes is used.
This option is valid for all add, remove, and move operations for AIX, Linux, and
Virtual I/O Server logical partitions. This option is also valid for memory add,
remove, and move operations for IBM i logical partitions.
-d
Specifies the level of detail to be displayed upon return of an add or remove
operation. Valid values are 0 (none) through 5 (highest).
If this option is not specified, a default value of 0 is used.
--entitled
--force
-a attributes
This option is valid for all add or remove operations for AIX, Linux, and Virtual I/O
Server logical partitions.
Dynamically changes the amount of I/O entitled memory that is assigned to the
logical partition. Use the -o parameter to specify which operation to perform.
Forces an add or remove operation to be performed for an AIX, Linux, and Virtual I/O
Server logical partition that does not have an RMC connection to the Integrated
Virtualization Manager. If this command completes successfully, you will need to
restart your operating system for the change to take effect. Use this option only if you
intentionally configured your LAN to isolate the Integrated Virtualization Manager
from the operating system of your logical partition.
Specifies the configuration data needed to create virtual I/O adapters or set hardware
resource related attributes. The configuration data consists of attribute name/value
pairs, which are in comma separated value (CSV) format. The configuration data must
be enclosed in double quotation marks. Possible values are:
adapter_type
Whether the adapter is a client or server. Valid values are client and server.
IVM requires the value to be client. This attribute is optional.
addl_vlan_ids
alt_console_slot
The location of the physical I/O slot that contains the alternate console device
for the IBM i logical partition. The default value is none.
alt_restart_device_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the alternate restart device
for the IBM i logical partition. If the load source slot has a value other than
none, then this attribute is optional. Valid values are:
v Slot number (virtual I/O)
v none
50
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
conn_speed
The configured connection speed of the port in Mbps. Possible values are:
v auto
v 10
v 100
v 1000
v 10000
console_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the console device for the
IBM i logical partition. Valid values are:
v Slot number (virtual I/O)
v none
flow_control
Receive flow control value of the port
v 1 (enabled)
v 0 (disabled)
hsl_pool_id
Whether the logical partition participates in the high-speed link (HSL) pool.
The default value is 0 (does not participate).
ieee_virtual_eth
Valid values:
v 0 - not IEEE 802.1Q compatible
v 1 - IEEE 802.1Q compatible
is_trunk
Valid values:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
Alphabetical list of commands
51
lhea_capabilities
Comma-separated list of logical Host Ethernet Adapter capabilities, with each
capability having one of the following formats: adapter-ID/capability or
adapter-ID/5/ieq/nieq/qp/cq/mr where ieq (interruptible event queues), nieq
(non-interruptible event queues), qp (queue pairs), cq (completion queues),
and mr (memory regions) each specify the resource amount in addition to the
base minimum. Valid values are:
v 0 - minimum
v 1 - low
v 2 - medium
v 3 - high
v 4 - dedicated
v 5 - custom
load_source_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the load source for the IBM i
logical partition. If the alt_restart_device_slot has a value other than none,
then this attribute is optional. Valid values are:
v Slot number (virtual I/O)
v none
max_pool_mem
Maximum amount of physical memory that can be assigned to the memory
pool without taking the pool offline. The value should be designated in
megabytes and must be a multiple of the logical memory block (LMB) size.
This attribute is required. The attribute supports the =/+=/-= format.
max_recv_packet_size
Maximum transmission unit (MTU) size of the port. Possible values:
v 1500 (default)
v 9000 (jumbo)
mem_weight
The shared memory weight of the shared memory partition. This flag is used
for determining the priority of logical partitions in a memory pool for
distribution of memory. This attribute is only supported when the value of
the -o parameter is s. This attribute supports the = format.
op_console_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the directly-attached
operations console device for the IBM i logical partition. The default value is
none.
paging_storage_pool
The name of the default paging storage pool. This is the storage pool from
which new paging space devices are created. This attribute is optional, but
can only be defined during the creation stage.
paging_vios_ids
A comma-separated list of logical partition IDs of paging service partitions to
associate with this memory pool. This attribute is optional, but if specified,
must be equal to 1.
52
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
paging_vios_names
A comma-separated list of logical partition names of paging service partitions
to associate with this memory pool. This attribute is optional, but if specified,
must be equal to the name of the Virtual I/O Server logical partition.
pend_port_group_mcs_value
A Host Ethernet Adapter port group attribute value. In order to synchronize
the pending value with the current value, you need to reboot the system.
pool_mem
The amount of physical memory to assign, to add, or remove from the
memory pool in megabytes. This required value must be a multiple of the
logical memory block size.
The attribute supports the =/+=/-= format.
port_vlan_id
This option is required if you are adding a virtual Ethernet adapter.
promisc_lpar_id
The ID assigned to the promiscuous logical partition. Possible values:
v none
v 1 - 254
promisc_lpar_name
Name assigned to the promiscuous logical partition.
sharing_mode
The sharing mode of the logical partition.
Valid values are:
keep_idle_procs: Never share processors
share_idle_procs: Share processors only when logical
partition is inactive
share_idle_procs_always: Always share processors
share_idle_procs_active: Share processors only when
the logical partition is active
cap: Capped mode. uncap: Uncapped mode.
remote_lpar_id
The ID of the logical partition that has the virtual SCSI or virtual fibre
channel server adapter.
A value of any indicates that any client adapter should be allowed to connect
to this adapter.
Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM) requires the value to be 1. This
attribute is optional.
Note: The remote_lpar_id attribute and the remote_lpar_name attribute are
mutually exclusive.
remote_lpar_name
Specifies a user-defined name for the logical partition where the virtual fibre
channel or virtual SCSI server adapter will be created.
IVM will require the value of this to be the name of the Virtual I/O Server
logical partition. This attribute is optional.
Note: The remote_lpar_id attribute and the remote_lpar_name attribute are
mutually exclusive.
Alphabetical list of commands
53
remote_slot_num
Specifies the slot number where the virtual fibre channel or virtual SCSI
server adapter will be created on the remote logical partition.
If the value is not specified, IVM will use the next available slot. This
attribute is optional.
trunk_priority
Valid values are integers between 1 and 15, inclusive. Required for a trunk
adapter.
uncap_weight
The weighted average of processing priority when in uncapped sharing mode.
The smaller the value, the lower the weight. Possible values are 0 - 255.
virtual_opti_pool_id
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the directly-attached
operations console device for the IBM i logical partition. The default value is
0 (does not participate).
vlan_id_list
List of virtual LAN IDs that the logical port has access to.
wwpns Designates the worldwide port names to this adapter, which are entered as a
comma-separated list. If the worldwide port names are not specified, IVM
will request that a pair be allocated. Each worldwide port name must be a
16-character hexadecimal value, and two worldwide port names must be
specified.
Displays the help text for this command and exit.
--help
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Examples
1. To change the tagged I/O for an IBM i logical partition, type the following command:
chhwres -r io -rsubtype taggedio -o s --id <LPAR ID> | -p <LPAR NAME>
-a ATTR=VALUE
2. Configure a Host Ethernet Adapter port for a logical partition:
a. Add a Host Ethernet Adapter port to the logical partition with ID 2, with port 3 in port group 1:
chhwres -r hea -o a -l 23000000 -g 1 -a vlan_id_list=all
--id 2 --logport 3 --physport 0
b. Set the connection speed of physical port 0 to auto:
chhwres -r hea -o s -l 23000000 -g 1 -a conn_speed=auto --physport 0
3. Add a virtual Ethernet adapter to the management partition in slot 25 with VLAN tags on VLAN 212
and VLAN 313 to be used with a shared Ethernet adapter:
chhwres -r virtualio --rsubtype eth -o a --id 1 -s 25
-a port_vlan_id=2,ieee_virtual_eth=1,
\"addl_vlan_ids=212,313\",is_trunk=1,trunk_priority=1
4. Add a virtual Ethernet adapter to partition 4 in virtual slot 5 with VLAN tags on VLAN 212 and
VLAN 313:
chhwres -r virtualio --rsubtype eth -o a --id 4 -s 5
-a port_vlan_id=2,ieee_virtual_eth=1,
\"addl_vlan_ids=212,313\"
5. Create a memory pool with 4 GB of physical memory in the pool and 8 GB of maximum memory in
the pool. Use the rootvg volume group to create paging space devices:
54
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
chhwres -r mempool -o a
-a pool_mem=4096,max_pool_mem=8192,paging_storage_pool=rootvg
chkdev command
Purpose
Checks devices for virtual device provisioning capability in the Virtual I/O Server.
Syntax
chkdev [-dev Name] [-verbose] [-field FieldName ...] [-fmt delimiter]
Description
The chkdev command determines whether a device can be used in physical to virtual transitions in the
Virtual I/O Server. Devices include all physical volumes and multipath representations of logical units. If
the -dev option is used, information is shown for the device specified. If the -verbose option is used,
detailed information is shown. With the -field option, the user can specify which fields to display. With
the -fmt option, the user can format the output to be separated by a given delimiter.
Capability in a virtual environment refers to the capability for a device to move between a physical
environment to a virtual environment. The command displays these fields: Phys2Virt_Capable,
Virt2NPIV_Capable, and Virt2Phys_Capable.
For a device to be capable of moving from a physical to a virtual environment, it must pass the address
compatibility check. If the physical volume can be moved from a physical to a virtual environment, the
Phys2Virt_Capable field has a value of YES. If the device is not capable of this move, the field has a value
of NO. If the device is already in use by Virtual Small Computer System Interface (VSCSI), the field has a
value of NA.
If a device is capable of moving from a VSCSI LUN environment to an N_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV)
environment, it must pass the address-compatibility check. If this device can be moved, the
Virt2NPIV_Capable field has a value of YES. If the device is not capable of this move, the field has a value
of NO. If the device is not in use by the virtual target device (VTD), this field has a value of NA. This
command is not sufficient to guarantee that the client can read the data after the VSCSI logical unit
number (LUN) is removed. The storage area network (SAN) configuration must also be checked by the
SAN administrator to ensure that it is mapped to a client NPIV.
Determination of whether a device is capable of moving from a virtual environment to a physical
environment is applicable for devices that are mapped as VTDs. For devices to be capable of moving
from a virtual environment to a physical environment, it must pass the address capability test. If the
physical volume is capable of being transferred from a virtual environment to a physical environment,
the Virt2Phys_Capable field has a value of YES. If the device is not capable of this move, the field has a
value of NO. If the device is not in use by VTD, the field has a value of NA.
Flags
-dev Name
-verbose
-field FieldName ...
-fmt delimiter
Specifies the device logical name for the device for which compatibility is checked.
Displays additional details, including values for IEEE, unique_id, and PVID.
Specifies a list of fields to be displayed.
Divides the output by using a user-specified delimiter character.
Alphabetical list of commands
55
Exit Status
The command completed successfully
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To check device capability and to display unique identifier information for a particular device, type
the following command:
chkdev -dev hdisk5 -verbose
The system displays a message similar to the following:
Name:
hdisk5
IDENTIFIER:
210ChpO-c4JqYs9g04N37006NETAPPfcp
PHYS2VIRT_CAPABLE:
NA
VIRT2NPIV_CAPABLE:
YES
VIRT2PHYS_CAPABLE:
YES
PVID:
UDID:
210ChpO-c4JqYs9g04N37006NETAPPfcp
IEEE:
VTD:
vtscsi0
2. To check device capability and to display unique identifier information for a particular device, type
the following command:
chkdev -dev hdisk6 –verbose
The system displays a message similar to the following:
Name:
hdisk6
IDENTIFIER:
210ChpO-c4JqYs9g04N37006NETAPPfcp
PHYS2VIRT_CAPABLE:
YES
VIRT2NPIV_CAPABLE:
NA
VIRT2PHYS_CAPABLE:
NA
PVID:
UDID:
IEEE:
210ChpO-c4JqYs9g04N37006NETAPPfcp
VTD:
3. To check device capability and to display unique identifier information for a particular device, type
the following command:
chkdev -dev hdisk8 -verbose
The system displays a message similar to the following:
Name:
hdisk8
IDENTIFIER:
PHYS2VIRT_CAPABLE:
NO
VIRT2NPIV_CAPABLE:
NA
VIRT2PHYS_CAPABLE:
NA
PVID:
UDID:
IEEE:
VTD:
4. To check device capability for a particular device, type the following command:
chkdev -dev hdisk5
The system displays a message similar to the following:
Name:
hdisk5
IDENTIFIER:
210ChpO-c4JqYs9g04N37006NETAPPfcp
PHYS2VIRT_CAPABLE: NA
VIRT2NPIV_CAPABLE: YES
VIRT2PHYS_CAPABLE: YES
56
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
5. To list the PHYS2VIRT_CAPABLE field for a particular device, type the following command:
chkdev -dev hdisk5 –field name phys2virt_capable
The system displays a message similar to the following:
Name:
hdisk5
PHYS2VIRT_CAPABLE:
NA
6. To check all devices for device-capability information, type the following command:
chkdev
The system displays a message similar to the following:
Name:
hdisk5
IDENTIFIER:
210ChpO-c4JqYs9g04N37006NETAPPfcp
PHYS2VIRT_CAPABLE:
NA
VIRT2NPIV_CAPABLE:
YES
VIRT2PHYS_CAPABLE:
YES
Name:
hdisk6
IDENTIFIER:
PHYS2VIRT_CAPABLE:
YES
VIRT2NPIV_CAPABLE:
NA
VIRT2PHYS_CAPABLE:
NA
Name:
hdisk7
IDENTIFIER:
0000c2aaec372704
PHYS2VIRT_CAPABLE:
NA
VIRT2NPIV_CAPABLE:
NO
VIRT2PHYS_CAPABLE:
NO
Name:
hdisk8
IDENTIFIER:
PHYS2VIRT_CAPABLE:
NO
VIRT2NPIV_CAPABLE:
NA
VIRT2PHYS_CAPABLE:
NA
Related Information
The lsdev command and the rmdev command.
chlang command
Purpose
Changes the language settings for the system.
Syntax
chlang { [ -msg msgtran ] -lang Name [ -dev Media | -ls }
Description
The chlang command is a high-level command that changes the language and keyboard settings for the
entire Virtual I/O Server. The user needs to log out for language changes to take effect. If the language
file sets are not already installed on the system, the -dev flag is used to specify their location.
When chlang is run with the -ls option, all available languages are listed.
Alphabetical list of commands
57
Flags
-msg msgtran
-dev Media
-lang Name
-ls
Modifies the NSLPATH environment variable. The msgtran parameter is a
colon-separated list of message translations (locale names) that indicates the message
translation hierarchy required for the system or user.
Specifies the device or directory containing the images to install.
Specifies the language-territory (locale name) that will become the locale setting for the
LANG environment variable.
Lists available languages.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To change the language for the entire system to French Canadian, type:
chlang -lang fr_CA
2. To display available languages:
chlang -ls
Related Information
The license command.
IVM chled command
Purpose
Change states for physical and virtual LEDs. This command is available only in an Integrated
Virtualization Manager environment.
Syntax
To change virtual partition LEDs:
chled -r sa -t virtuallpar -o Operation { -p PartitionName | --id PartitionID } [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To change virtual system LEDs:
chled -r sa -t virtualsys -o Operation [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The chled command changes the states of physical and virtual LEDs.
Flags
-r ResourceType
58
The type of LED resource to change. The only valid value is sa for System Attention
(SA) LED.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-t SystemAttentionType
The type of System Attention (SA) LEDs to change.
-r sa -t virtuallpar
Change attributes for virtual partition system attention LEDs
Attributes: lpar_id, lpar_name, state
Filters: None
-r sa -t virtualsys
Change attributes for virtual system attention LEDs
Attributes: state
Filters: None
The operation to perform on the LED. Valid values are:
-o
off
-m ManagedSystem
-p PartitionName
--id PartitionID
deactivate the LED
on
activate the LED
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
The name of the partition for which the virtual partition system attention LED is to be
changed.
The ID of the partition for with the virtual partition system attention LED is to be
changed.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is not accessible by users with the ViewOnly role.
Examples
1. To deactivate the virtual system attention LED for the system, type:
chled -r sa -t virtualsys -o off
2. To activate the virtual partition system attention LED for partition lpar3, type:
chled -r sa -t virtuallpar -o on -p lpar3
3. To dectivate the virtual partition system attention LED for the partition with ID 3, type:
chled -r sa -t virtuallpar -o off --id 3
Related Information
The lsled command.
IVM chlparutil command
Purpose
Change settings for data collection.
Alphabetical list of commands
59
Syntax
chlparutil -r config -s SampleRate [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The chlparutil command changes the settings for data collection such as the sample rate at which data is
collected.
Flags
-r ResourceType
-s SampleRate
-m ManagedSystem
The type of resources to change:
config Change configuration settings.
The interval in seconds to sample utilization data. An interval of zero disables
sampling. Valid sample rates are 0, 30, 60, 300, 1800, and 3600.
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is not accessible by users with the ViewOnly role.
Examples
1. Disable the collection of utilization data:
chlparutil -r config -s 0
Related Information
The lslparutil command.
chlv command
Purpose
Changes the characteristics of a logical volume.
Syntax
To change the name of a logical volume:
chlv { -lv NewLogicalVolumeName | -bbr value}LogicalVolume
Description
The chlv command changes the characteristics of a logical volume according to the command flags. The
LogicalVolume parameter can be a logical volume name or logical volume ID. The chlv command can
rename and set the bad-block relocation (BBR) policy. Changing the name of a logical volume and setting
the bad-block relocation policy are the only supported options.
60
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Note: A logical volume that has been assigned as a backing device or as a paging space device cannot be
renamed. Although supported, it is not recommended that the bad-block relocation policy be enabled on
the Virtual I/O Server for Virtual Small Computer System Interface (VSCSI) devices. Instead, the
bad-block relocation policy needs to be enabled for VSCSI devices on the client. Doing so ensures that the
bad-block relocation policy is enabled for VSCSI devices that use logical volumes and physical volumes
as storage and provides better performance. Also, enabling the bad-block relocation policy is
recommended for paging spaces used by Active Memory Sharing.
Flags
-lv
-bbr
Specifies the logical volume.
Sets the bad-block relocation policy. The value can be either:
v yes (Causes bad-block relocation to occur.)
v no (Prevents bad block relocation from occurring.)
Examples
1. To change the logical volume name from oldlv to newlv, type:
chlv -lv newlv oldlv
2. To enable the bad-block relocation policy for the logical volume testlv, type:
chlv -bbr yes testlv
3. To disable the bad-block relocation policy for the logical volume lv01, type:
chlv -bbr no lv01
chmod command
Purpose
Changes file modes.
Syntax
To Change File Modes Symbolically
chmod [ -R ] [ -h ] [ -f ] [ [ u ] [ g ] [ o ] | [ a ] ] { { - | + | = } [ r ] [ w ] [ x ] [ X ] [ s ] [ t ] } { File ... |
Directory ... }
To Change File Modes Numerically
chmod [ -R ] [ -h ] [ -f ] PermissionCode { File ... | Directory ... }
Description
The chmod command modifies the mode bits and the extended access control lists (ACLs) of the
specified files or directories. The mode can be defined symbolically or numerically (absolute mode).
When a symbolic link is encountered and you have not specified the -h flag, the chmod command
changes the mode of the file or directory pointed to by the link and not the mode of the link itself. If you
specify the -h flag, the chmod command prevents this mode change.
If you specify both the -h flag and the -R flag, the chmod command descends the specified directories
recursively, and when a symbolic link is encountered, the mode of the file or directory pointed to by the
link is not changed.
Alphabetical list of commands
61
Flags
-f
-h
-R
Suppresses all error reporting except invalid permissions and usage statements.
Suppresses a mode change for the file or directory pointed to by the encountered symbolic link.
Note: This behavior is slightly different from the behavior of the -h flag on the chgrp and chown
commands because mode bits cannot be set on symbolic links.
Descends only directories recursively, as specified by the pattern File...|Directory.... The -R flag changes
the file mode bits of each directory and of all files matching the specified pattern. See Example 6.
When a symbolic link is encountered and the link points to a directory, the file mode bits of that
directory are changed but the directory is not further traversed.
Symbolic Mode
To specify a mode in symbolic form, you must specify three sets of flags.
Note: Do not separate flags with spaces.
The first set of flags specifies who is granted or denied the specified permissions, as follows:
u
g
o
a
File owner.
Group and extended ACL entries pertaining to the file's group.
All others.
User, group, and all others. The a flag has the same effect as specifying the ugo flags together. If none of
these flags are specified, the default is the a flag and the file creation mask (umask) is applied.
The second set of flags specifies whether the permissions are to be removed, applied, or set:
+
=
Removes specified permissions.
Applies specified permissions.
Clears the selected permission field and sets it to the permission specified. If you do not specify a
permission following =, the chmod command removes all permissions from the selected field.
The third set of flags specifies the permissions that are to be removed, applied, or set:
r
w
x
X
s
t
Read permission.
Write permission.
Execute permission for files; search permission for directories.
Execute permission for files if the current (unmodified) mode bits have at least one of the user, group, or
other execute bits set. The X flag is ignored if the File parameter is specified and none of the execute bits
are set in the current mode bits.
Search permission for directories.
Set-user-ID-on-execution permission if the u flag is specified or implied. Set-group-ID-on-execution
permission if the g flag is specified or implied.
For directories, indicates that only file owners can link or unlink files in the specified directory. For files,
sets the save-text attribute.
Numeric or Absolute Mode
The chmod command also permits you to use octal notation for the mode. The numeric mode is the sum
of one or more of the following values:
4000
2000
62
Sets user ID on execution.
Sets group ID on execution.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Sets the link permission to directories or sets the save-text attribute for files.
Permits read by owner.
Permits write by owner.
Permits execute or search by owner.
Permits read by group.
Permits write by group.
Permits execute or search by group.
Permits read by others.
Permits write by others.
Permits execute or search by others.
1000
0400
0200
0100
0040
0020
0010
0004
0002
0001
Note:
1. Specifying the mode numerically disables any extended Access Control Lists (ACL).
2. Changing group access permissions symbolically also affects the extended ACL entries. The group
entries in the ACL that are equal to the owning group of the file are denied any permission that is
removed from the mode.
3. You can specify multiple symbolic modes separated with commas. Operations are performed in the
order they appear from left to right.
4. You must specify the mode symbolically or use an explicit 4-character octal with a leading zero (for
example, 0755) when removing the set-group-ID-on-execution permission from directories.
Security
Access Control: This program should be installed as a normal user program in the Trusted Computing
Base.
Only the owner of the file or the root user can change the mode of a file.
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
The command executed successfully and all requested changes were made.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To add a type of permission to several files:
chmod
g+w
chap1
chap2
This adds write permission for group members to the files chap1 and chap2.
2. To make several permission changes at once:
chmod
go-w+x
mydir
This denies group members and others the permission to create or delete files in mydir (go-w) and
allows group members and others to search mydir or use it in a path name (go+x). This is equivalent
to the command sequence:
chmod
chmod
chmod
chmod
g-w
o-w
g+x
o+x
mydir
mydir
mydir
mydir
3. To permit only the owner to use a shell procedure as a command:
chmod
u=rwx,go= cmd
Alphabetical list of commands
63
This gives read, write, and execute permission to the user who owns the file (u=rwx). It also denies
the group and others the permission to access cmd in any way (go=).
If you have permission to execute the cmd shell command file, then you can run it by entering:
cmd
Note: Depending on the PATH shell variable, you may need to specify the full path to the cmd file.
4. To use Set-ID Modes:
chmod
ug+s
cmd
When the cmd command is executed, the effective user and group IDs are set to those that own the
cmd file. Only the effective IDs associated with the child process that runs the cmd command are
changed. The effective IDs of the shell session remain unchanged.
This feature allows you to permit access to restricted files. Suppose that the cmd program has the
Set-User-ID Mode enabled and is owned by a user called dbms. The user dbms is not actually a person,
but might be associated with a database management system. The user betty does not have
permission to access any of dbms's data files. However, she does have permission to execute the cmd
command. When she does so, her effective user ID is temporarily changed to dbms, so that the cmd
program can access the data files owned by the user dbms.
This way the user betty can use the cmd command to access the data files, but she cannot accidentally
damage them with the standard shell commands.
5. To use the absolute mode form of the chmod command:
chmod
644
text
This sets read and write permission for the owner, and it sets read-only mode for the group and
others. This also removes all extended ACLs that might be associated with the file.
6. To recursively descend directories and change file and directory permissions given the tree structure:
./dir1/dir2/file1
./dir1/dir2/file2
./dir1/file1
enter this command sequence:
chmod -R 777 f*
which will change permissions on ./dir1/file1.
But given the tree structure of:
./dir1/fdir2/file1
./dir1/fdir2/file2
./dir1/file3
the command sequence:
chmod -R 777 f*
will change permissions on:
./dir1/fdir2
./dir1/fdir2/file1
./dir1/fdir2/file2
./dir1/file3
File
/usr/bin/chmod
64
Contains the chmod command .
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
chpath command
Purpose
Changes the operational status of paths to a MultiPath I/O (MPIO) capable device, or changes an
attribute associated with a path to an MPIO capable device.
Syntax
chpath -dev Name -op OpStatus [ -pdev Parent ] [ -conn Connection ]
chpath -dev Name -pdev Parent [ -conn Connection ] [ -perm ] -attr Attribute=Value...
Description
The chpath command either changes the operational status of paths to the specified device (the -dev
Name flag) or it changes one, or more, attributes associated with a specific path to the specified device.
The required syntax is slightly different depending upon the change being made.
The first syntax shown above changes the operational status of one or more paths to a specific device.
The set of paths to change is obtained by taking the set of paths which match the following criteria:
v The target device matches the specified device.
v The parent device matches the specified parent (-pdev Parent), if a parent is specified.
v The connection matches the specified connection (-conn Connection), if a connection is specified.
v The path status is PATH_AVAILABLE
The operational status of a path refers to the usage of the path as part of MPIO path selection. The value
of enable indicates that the path is to be used while disable indicates that the path is not to be used. It
should be noted that setting a path to disable impacts future I/O, not I/O already in progress. As such, a
path can be disabled, but still have outstanding I/O until such time that all of the I/O that was already
in progress completes. As such, if -op disable is specified for a path and I/O is outstanding on the path,
this fact will be displayed.
Disabling a path affects path selection at the device driver level. The path_status of the path is not
changed in the device configuration database. The lspath command must be used to see current
operational status of a path.
The second syntax shown above changes one or more path specific attributes associated with a particular
path to a particular device. Note that multiple attributes can be changed in a single invocation of the
chpath command; but all of the attributes must be associated with a single path. In other words, you
cannot change attributes across multiple paths in a single invocation of the chpath command. To change
attributes across multiple paths, separate invocations of chpath are required; one for each of the paths
that are to be changed.
Flags
-attr Attribute=Value
Identifies the attribute to change as well as the new value for the attribute. The
Attribute is the name of a path specific attribute. The Value is the value which is to
replace the current value for the Attribute. The Attribute=Value parameter can use one
attribute value pair or multiple attribute value pairs for one -attr flag. If you use an
-attr flag with multiple attribute value pairs, the list of pairs must be enclosed in
quotation marks with spaces between the pairs. For example, entering -attr
Attribute=Value lists one attribute value pair per flag, while entering -attr
'Attribute1=Value1 Attribute2=Value2' lists more than one attribute value pair.
Alphabetical list of commands
65
-dev Name
-pdev Parent
-perm
-conn Connection
-op OpStatus
Specifies the logical device name of the target device for the path(s) affected by the
change. This flag is required in all cases.
Indicates the logical device name of the parent device to use in qualifying the paths to
be changed. This flag is required when changing attributes, but is optional when
change operational status.
Changes the path's characteristics without actually changing the path. The change takes
effect on the path the next time the path is unconfigured and then configured (possibly
on the next boot).
Indicates the connection information to use in qualifying the paths to be changed. This
flag is optional when changing operational status. When changing attributes, it is
optional if the device has only one path to the indicated parent. If there are multiple
paths from the parent to the device, then this flag is required to identify the specific
path being changed.
Indicates the operational status to which the indicated paths should be changed. The
operational status of a path is maintained at the device driver level. It determines if the
path will be considered when performing path selection.The allowable values for this
flag are:
enable Mark the operational status as enabled for MPIO path selection. A path with
this status will be considered for use when performing path selection. Note
that enabling a path is the only way to recover a path from a failed condition.
disable
Mark the operational status as disabled for MPIO path selection. A path with
this status will not be considered for use when performing path selection.
This flag is required when changing operational status. When used in conjunction with
the -attr Attribute=Value flag, a usage error is generated.
Exit Status
See“Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To disable the paths between scsi0 and the hdisk1 disk device, enter:
chpath -dev hdisk1 -pdev scsi0 -op disable
The system displays a message similar to one of the following:
paths disabled
or
some paths disabled
The first message indicates that all PATH_AVAILABLE paths from scsi0 to hdisk1 have been
successfully enabled. The second message indicates that only some of the PATH_AVAILABLE paths
from scsi0 to hdisk1 have been successfully disabled.
Related Information
The cfgdev command, the chdev command, the lsdev command, the lsmap command, the lspath
command, the mkpath command, the mkvdev command, the rmdev command, and the rmpath
command.
chrep command
Purpose
Change the characteristics of the Virtual Media Repository.
66
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Syntax
chrep -size Size
Description
The chrep command increases the size of the Virtual Media Repository by at least the amount specified
with the -size flag. The actual amount of storage added to the repository is dependent on the allocation
size of the parent storage pool. Use the lssp command to determine the parent storage pools allocation
size. The specified flag can not be a negative number.
Size
Minimum file storage pool size
###M/m
###MB
###G/g
###GB
Flags
-size Size
Specifies the minimum amount of storage to add to the file storage pool.
Examples
To increase the size of the Virtual Media Repository by at least 64 megabyte, type the following
command:
chrep -size 64m
chsp command
Purpose
Change the characteristics of a storage pool.
Syntax
Increase the size of a file storage pool:
chsp -add [-sp StoragePool] -size Size
Add physical volume to a logical volume storage pool:
chsp -add [ -f ] [-sp StoragePool] PhysicalVolume...
Remove a physical volume from a logical volume storage pool :
chsp -rm [ -f ] [-sp StoragePool] PhysicalVolume...
Set storage pool as the default:
chsp -default StoragePool
Description
The chsp command adds and removes physical volumes represented by the PhysicalVolume parameter
from a logical volume storage pool. Before adding a physical volume, the chsp command checks to verify
that it is not already in another volume group or storage pool, or is not assigned to a shared memory
Alphabetical list of commands
67
pool (to be used as a paging space device by a shared memory partition). If the system detects a
description area from a volume group or storage pool, the command will fail. If the -f flag is specified,
the physical volume is added even if it contains a description area, unless it is a member of another
storage pool or volume group, or is assigned to a shared memory pool (to be used as a paging space
device by a shared memory partition).
Before removing physical volumes from a logical volume the storage pool, the chsp command prompts
the user to verify each logical volume should be removed. If the user specifies the -f flag, the logical
volumes are removed with out prompting for input. If all physical volumes in a storage pool are
removed, the storage pool is also removed.
Note: A logical volume storage pool which contains file storage pools or the Virtual Media Repository
cannot be removed.
If the -sp flag is not specified, the default storage pool is assumed.
If the specified, or default, storage pool is a file storage pool and the -size flag is specified the given
pools size will be increased by at least the amount specified. The specified flag cannot be a negative
number and file storage pools cannot be reduced in size.
Size
Minimum file storage pool size
###M/m
###MB
###G/g
###GB
If the -default flag is included, the storage pool specified will become the default storage pool for all
users. If no default has been set, the rootvg storage pool will be the default. Only the padmin user can
set the default storage pool.
Files
-add
-default
-f
-rm
-size StoragePool
-sp StoragePool
Adds the given physical volume into specified storage pool. If a storage pool is not
specified the physical volume is added to the default pool.
Sets the specified storage pool as the system default pool. Only the padmin user can set
the default storage pool.
When combined with the -add flag, forces the physical volume to be added to the
specified storage pool unless the physical volume is part of another storage pool or
volume group in the Device Configuration Database or a volume group that is active.
When combined with the -rm flag, forces the removal of all logical volumes on the
physical volume before removal from the storage pool.
Remove the specified physical volume from specified storage pool. If a storage pool is
not specified, the physical volume is removed from the default pool. The user will be
prompted to confirm the removal of any logical volumes on the physical volume.
Specifies the minimum amount of storage to add to the file storage pool.
Specifies the storage pool to be changed.
Exit Status
23
Specified storage pool is not valid
Examples
1. To add physical volume hdisk3 to the default storage pool, type:
chsp -add hdisk3
2. To remove physical volume hdisk2 from clstorage storage pool, type:
68
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
chsp -rm -sp clstorage hdisk2
3. To increase the size of the file storage pool clientData by at least 1 gigabyte, type:
chsp -add -sp clientData -size 1g
IVM chsvcevent command
Purpose
Changes an existing serviceable event. This command is available only in an Integrated Virtualization
Manager environment.
Syntax
To close an existing serviceable event:
chsvcevent -o close -p ProblemNumber -n Name -c CommentText [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The chsvcevent command closes an existing serviceable event.
Flags
-o Operation
-p ProblemNumber
-n
-c
-m ManagedSystem
The operation to be performed. The only valid value is close.
The problem number (problem_number) for the event, as displayed by the lssvcevents
command.
A free form name string identifying the person who is closing the event.
A free form text comment about why the event is being changed.
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is not accessible by users with the ViewOnly role.
Examples
1. To close a serviceable event, type:
chsvcevent -o close -p 6013EFFF-205F3F22-4CC992E5-F8B6270-7540D8A3
-m 9111-520*XXXXXXX -n My Name -c Closing Comment
Related Information
The lssvcevents command, and the mksvcevent command.
Alphabetical list of commands
69
IVM chsyscfg command
Purpose
Changes attributes of logical partitions, logical partition profiles, or the managed system. This command
is available only in an Integrated Virtualization Manager environment.
Syntax
To change system attributes:
chsyscfg -r sys { -f ConfigurationFile | -i ConfigurationData } [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To change partition attributes
chsyscfg -r lpar { -f ConfigurationFile | -i ConfigurationData } [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To change partition profile attributes, the Host Ethernet Adapter logical port assignments, or the logical
Host Ethernet Adapter capabilities
chsyscfg -r prof { -f ConfigurationFile | -i ConfigurationData } [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The chsyscfg command changes attributes of logical partitions, logical partition profiles, or the managed
system.
Flags
-r ResourceType
-m ManagedSystem
70
The type of resources to change:
sys
Managed system resources
lpar
Logical partition resources
prof
Logical partition profile resources
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-f ConfigurationFile
The name of the file containing the configuration data needed to change the resources.
The configuration data consists of attribute name and value pairs, which are in comma
separated value (CSV) format. These attribute name and value pairs form a
configuration record. A line feed marks the end of a configuration record. The file must
contain one configuration record for each resource to be changed, and each
configuration record must be for the same resource type. If the resource type is the
managed system, then the file must contain only one configuration record.
The format of a configuration record is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...<LF>
Note that certain attributes accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
"attribute-name=value,value,...",...<LF>
When a list of values is specified, the attribute name/value pair must be enclosed in
double quotation marks. Depending on the shell being used, nested double quotation
marks may need to be preceded by an escape character, which is usually a \ (back
slash) character.
If '+=' is used in the attribute name/value pair instead of '=', then the specified value is
added to the existing value for the attribute if the attribute is numerical. If the attribute
is a list, then the specified values are added to the existing list.
If '-=' is used in the attribute name/value pair instead of '=', then the specified value is
subtracted from the existing value for the attribute if the attribute is numerical. If the
attribute is a list, then the specified values are deleted from the existing list.
Attribute names for logical partitions
allow_perf_collection
Valid values are:
0 - do not allow authority
1 - allow authority
ipl_source
The IPL source for the IBM i logical partition. This attribute is optional. Valid
values are:
v a
v b
v c
v d
name | lpar_id
Name or ID of the logical partition to change (required)
new_name
New name for the logical partition.
work_group_id
Valid values are:
none - do not participate in the workload management
group
1 - participate in the workload management group
Alphabetical list of commands
71
Attribute names for logical partition profiles
alt_restart_device_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the alternate restart device for
the IBM i logical partition. If the load source slot is has a value other than
none, then this attribute is optional. Valid values are:
v Slot Number (virtual I/O)
v none
auto_start
Valid values are:
0 - do not automatically start with system power on
1 - automatically start with system power on
boot_mode
Logical partition power on mode. Valid values are:
norm - normal
dd - diagnostic with default boot list
ds - diagnostic with stored boot list
of - Open Firmware OK prompt
sms - System Management Services
console_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the console device for the
IBM i logical partition. Valid values are:
v Slot Number (for virtual I/O)
v none
desired_io_entitled_mem
The amount of I/O entitled memory for a shared memory partition. This is the
portion of memory that is reserved for I/O mappings. Valid values follow:
v auto (automatically manage)
v Number of megabytes
If the value is auto, the entitlement is calculated based on the virtual I/O
configuration of the logical partition. If the virtual I/O configuration is
changed, the entitlement is updated automatically. If auto is not used, no
automatic adjustments are made. The default value is auto.
desired_mem
Assigned memory in megabytes
desired_procs
Assigned processors. In shared processing mode, this refers to virtual
processors.
desired_proc_units
Assigned shared processing units.
72
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
lhea_capabilities
Comma-separated list of logical Host Ethernet Adapter capabilities, with each
capability having one of the following formats: adapter-ID/capability or
adapter-ID/5/ieq/nieq/qp/cq/mr where ieq (interruptible event queues), nieq
(non-interruptible event queues), qp (queue pairs), cq (completion queues), and
mr (memory regions) each specify the resource amount in addition to the base
minimum. Valid values are:
v 0 - minimum
v 1 - low
v 2 - medium
v 3 - high
v 4 - dedicated
v 5 - custom
lhea_logical_ports
Comma separated list of Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (LHEA) logical ports,
with each logical port having the following format:
adapter-ID/port-group/physical-port-ID/
logical-port-ID/allowed-VLAN-IDs
All 4 '/' characters must be present, but optional values may be omitted.
Optional values are allowed-VLAN-IDs.
load_source_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the load source for the IBM i
logical partition. If the alt_restart_device_slot has a value other than none, then
this attribute is optional. Valid values are:
v Slot number (virtual I/O)
v none
lpar_avail_priority
The priority of the logical partition to maintain its entitled processors. If a
processor failure occurs, processing resources will be removed first from the
lowest priority logical partition. Valid values are 0 - 255.
Note: The Virtual I/O Server logical partition must have a higher priority than
any other logical partition on the system.
lpar_proc_compat_mode
The requested compatibility mode. Use lssyscfg -r sys -F
lpar_proc_compat_modes to retrieve a list of valid values.
max_mem
Maximum memory in megabytes.
min_mem
Minimum memory in megabytes.
Alphabetical list of commands
73
min_procs
Minimum processors. In shared processing mode, this refers to virtual
processors.
max_procs
Maximum processors. In shared processing mode, this refers to virtual
processors.
max_proc_units
Maximum shared processing units.
min_proc_units
Minimum shared processing units.
max_virtual_slots
Maximum number of virtual I/O adapter slots
mem_mode
Logical partition memory mode. Valid values follow:
v ded: dedicated processor mode
v shared: shared processor mode
If the memory mode is shared, the logical partition cannot be assigned any
physical I/O slots or host Ethernet adapter resources, the proc_mode attribute
on the logical partition must be shared, and a memory pool must exist.
Note: The Virtual I/O Server logical partition only supports the dedicated
memory mode.
mem_weight
The shared memory weight of the shared memory partition. The memory
weight is used to determine the priority of logical partitions in a memory pool
for distributing memory. Valid values are 0 - 255. The default value is 128.
name | lpar_name | lpar_id
Name or ID of the logical partition to change (required)
Note: This command uses the profile name and lpar_name interchangeably
because this environment does not support multiple profiles per logical
partition. When using this command on the Hardware Management Console,
you must specify the profile name and logical partition name or ID because it
supports multiple profiles per logical partition.
74
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
new_name
New name for the logical partition.
paging_device
The paging space device to use if a memory pool is used. A paging space
device is a block storage device that has been added to the memory pool and
is not designated as a paging device for any other logical partition. This
attribute is optional. If omitted, an appropriate paging device is selected
automatically. If the paging_device value is a blank string and a paging space
device is currently assigned to this partition, the paging space device is
removed from the logical partition.
proc_mode
Valid values follow:
v ded: dedicated processor mode
v shared: shared processor mode
sharing_mode
The sharing mode of the logical partition. Valid values follow:
v keep_idle_procs: Never share processors
v share_idle_procs: Share processors only when the logical partition is
inactive
v share_idle_procs_always: Always share processors
v share_idle_procs_active: Share processors only when the logical partition is
active
v cap: Capped mode
v uncap: Uncapped mode
uncap_weight
A weighted average of processing priority when in uncapped sharing mode.
The smaller the value, the lower the weight. Valid values are: 0 - 255
virtual_eth_adapters
Comma-separated list of virtual Ethernet adapters, with each adapter having
the following format: slot_number/is_ieee/port_vlan_id/
additional_vlan_ids/is_trunk/is_required All 5 '/' characters must be
present, but optional values may be omitted. Optional values are is_ieee,
additional_vlan_ids, is_required and is_trunk.
Valid values for is_ieee, is_trunk, and is_required"
0 - no
1 - yes
For example, 4/0/2//0/0 specifies a virtual Ethernet adapter with a virtual slot
number of 4, is not IEEE 802.1Q enabled, has a port virtual LAN ID of 2, no
additional virtual LAN IDs, it is not a trunk adapter, and is not required.
Alphabetical list of commands
75
virtual_fc_adapters
Comma-separated list of virtual fibre channel adapters. Each item in this list
has the following format:
virtual slot num/adapter_type/remote_lpar_id/
remote_lpar_name/remote_slot_num/wwpn_list/is_required
Required values: remote_lpar_id, remote_lpar_name, adapter_type,
virtual_slot_num
Note: You can specify either remote_lpar_id, remote_lpar_name, or use them
both, but at least one of the values is required.
Valid values for adapter_type:
v client
v server
Note: If you specify a value for adapter type, the Integrated Virtualization
Manager (IVM) requires the adapter type to be a client.
Optional values: wwpn_list, is_required, remote_slot_num
When you add a virtual fibre channel adapter, wwpn_list can be left blank to
allow IVM to automatically assign worldwide port names to the client adapter.
If you leave wwpn_list blank and the virtual slot number specified for this
adapter already contains a virtual fibre channel adapter, IVM will use the
worldwide port names that are already assigned. New worldwide port names
will only be generated if it is a new adapter. If you specify a wwpn_list value,
there must be exactly two values. Each worldwide port name must be a
16-character hexadecimal value. These values are not case sensitive.
Valid values for is_required:
0 - no
1 - yes
A value of none or an empty string indicates that no virtual fibre channel
adapters should be assigned.
Note: If the logical partition being changed is the Virtual I/O Server, you
cannot change the current configuration. The IVM handles the client and
server adapter as a pair; thus, IVM handles modifications automatically.
76
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
virtual_scsi_adapters
Comma-separated list of virtual SCSI adapters. Each item in this list has the
format:
slot_num/adapter_type/remote_lpar_id/remote_lpar_name/
remote_slot_num/is_required
The attribute names are not present in the list, just their values are present. If
an attribute is optional and is not to be included, then no value is specified for
that attribute. For example, 2/client//lpar2/3/0 specifies a virtual client SCSI
adapter with a virtual slot number of 2, a server partition name of lpar2, a
server slot number of 3, and is not required. The server partition ID was
omitted.
Required values: slot_num, adapter_type, remote_lpar_id,
remote_lpar_name
Note: You can specify remote_lpar_id, remote_lpar_name, or both, but at least
one of the values is required.
Optional values: is_required, remote_slot_num
Note: IVM requires that virtual slot number 2 always contain a virtual SCSI
adapter, so if you specify adapters in any other slots, the default adapter is still
created in slot number 2. If you use the chsyscfg command with an empty list
for the virtual_scsi_adapters attribute, all virtual SCSI adapters are removed,
except the default adapter.
Valid values for adapter_type:
v client: client adapter
v server: server adapter, valid for Virtual I/O Server logical partitions only
Valid values for is_required:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
Attribute names for the managed system
lpar_comm_default
Returns the lpar_comm_ipaddr to using the default IP address configured on
the system as reported by lstcpip -interfaces. Valid values:
v 1: Default IP address will be used.
lpar_comm_ipaddr
The IP address through which client logical partitions will communicate with
the management logical partition. This is used primarily for dynamic LPAR. It
is defaulted to the first IP address available on your system, but can be
manually set if desired. If you set this manually and then change your systems
IP address, you must update this value.
Note: This attribute supports multiple IP addresses using a comma-separated
list.
new_name
New name for the managed system
pend_configured_max_lpars
The maximum number of logical partitions which can be created after
restarting the managed system.
This option is deprecated. Instead use:
chsyscfg -r prof
with attribute "max_virtual_slots" value for partition 1.
Alphabetical list of commands
77
-i ConfigurationData
This option allows you to enter configuration data on the command line, instead of
using a file. Data entered on the command line must follow the same format as data in
a file, and must be enclosed in double quotation marks.
When this option is used, only a single resource can be changed.
The -i and the -f options are mutually exclusive.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is not accessible by users with the ViewOnly role.
Examples
1. To change the user defined name for the managed system, type:
chsyscfg -r sys -i "new_name=sys1"
2. To change logical partitions using the configuration data in the file /tmp/lparfile, type:
chsyscfg -r lpar -f /tmp/lparfile
3. To reduce a partition profile's assigned and minimum memory by 256 MB, type:
chsyscfg -r prof -i "lpar_name=partition3,min_mem-=256,desired_mem-=256"
Related Information
The lssyscfg command, the mksyscfg command, and the rmsyscfg command.
IVM chsysstate command
Purpose
Changes the state of a partition. This command is operable only in the Integrated Virtualization Manager
environment.
Syntax
To activate a partition:
chsysstate -r lpar -o on { -n Name | --id PartitionID } [ -k KeylockPosition ] [ -b BootMode ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To perform a partition shut down using the shutdown command on the client operating system:
chsysstate -r lpar -o osshutdown { -n Name | --id PartitionID } [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To perform a delayed partition shut down (white button shut down):
chsysstate -r lpar -o shutdown { -n Name | --id PartitionID } [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To perform an immediate partition shutdown (operator panel function 8):
chsysstate -r lpar -o shutdown --immed { -n Name | --id PartitionID } [ -m ManagedSystem ]
78
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
To perform an immediate restart of a partition (operator panel function 3):
chsysstate -r lpar -o shutdown --immed --restart { -n Name | --id PartitionID } [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To perform a restart of a partition after initiating a dump (operator panel function 22):
chsysstate -r lpar -o dumprestart { -n Name | --id PartitionID } [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To change the keylock position for a partition:
chsysstate -r lpar -o chkey -k KeylockPosition { -n Name | --id PartitionID } [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The chsysstate command changes the state of a partition. To avoid data loss, use the shutdown facilities
provided by the operating system in the partition.
Flags
-r ResourceType
-m ManagedSystem
-o Operation
The type of resources to change: lpar Logical partition resources
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
The type of operation to perform:
v chkey: Changes the keylock position
v consoleservice: Disables a remote service session for the IBM i partition (operator
panel function 65) followed by the activation of the dedicated service tools for the
IBM i partition (operator panel function 21).
v dston: Activates dedicated service tools for the IBM i partition (operator panel
function 21).
v dumprestart: Restarts after initiating a dump
v iopdump: Allows use of the IOP control storage dump (operator panel function 70).
This operation is valid for IBM i partitions only.
v iopreset: Resets or reloads the failed IOP (operator panel function 67). This
operation is valid for IBM i partitions only.
v on: Power on
v osshutdown: Shuts down using the client partition's shutdown command. This is the
safest shutdown option, so should be used if available (RMC state must be active).
v remotedston: Enables a remote service session for the IBM i partition (operator panel
function 66).
v retrydump: Retries the dump on the IBM i partition and restarts the partition when
the dump is complete (operator panel function 34).
v shutdown: Shuts down
v remotedstoff: Disables a remote service session for the IBM i partition (operator
panel function 65).
-i IPL Source
The IPL source that will be used when activating the IBM i partition. You can also use
the “IVM chsyscfg command” on page 70 command to complete this task. If this flag is
not specified, then the current IPL source will be used. Valid values are:
v a
v b
v c
v d
Alphabetical list of commands
79
-b BootMode
Override the current power on mode setting. Valid values are:
v norm: normal
v dd: diagnostic with default boot list
v ds: diagnostic with stored boot list
v of: Open Firmware OK prompt
-k KeylockPosition
v sms: System Management Services
Keylock position. Valid values are:
v norm: normal keylock
--immed
--restart
v manual: manual keylock
Force the state change immediately.
Restart the partition. This flag is valid only if the --immed flag is also specified.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is not accessible by users with the ViewOnly role.
Examples
1. To power on the partition with an ID of 2 and set the boot mode to System Management Services,
type the following command:
chsysstate -r lpar -o on --id 2 -b sms
2. To shut down the partition with an ID of 3, type the following command:
chsysstate -r lpar -o shutdown --id 3
3. To immediately restart the partition with an ID of 3 using the client operating system's shutdown
command, type the following command:
chsysstate -r lpar -o osshutdown --restart --immed --id 3
4. To select the IPL source before activating an IBM i logical partition, type the following command:
chsysstate -r lpar -o [-i <IPL Source>]
Related Information
The lssyscfg command, the mksyscfg command, the rmsyscfg command, and the mkvt command.
chtcpip command
Purpose
Changes the Virtual I/O Server TCP/IP settings and parameters.
Syntax
To change a network interface:
chtcpip [-interface Interface -inetaddr Address -netmask SubnetMask]
chtcpip [-interface Interface -gateway -add New_gateway_address -remove Old_gateway_address]
chtcpip -ip6-interface Interface [-inetaddr Address] [-plen pfixlen ] [-gateway]
80
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Description
The chtcpip command changes the TCP/IP settings and configuration on the Virtual I/O Server.
Flags
-add New_Gateway_Address
-inetaddr Address
-interface Interface
-ip6
-gateway Gateway
-netmask SubnetMask
-plen prefixLen
-remove
Old_Gateway_Address
Specifies the new default gateway address to add.
Changes the IP address of the host. Specify the address in dotted decimal notation.
Specifies a particular network interface, for example en0.
Specifies to use the IPv6 version of this command. The -ip6 flag allows you to change
an existing IPv6 address, state, prefix length, and default gateway.
Changes the gateway address for a static route. Specify both the current address and
new address in dotted decimal notation.
Specifies the subnet mask of the gateway, which is used to route through the
appropriate subnetwork.
Specifies the prefix length of the IPv6 interface.
Specifies the old default gateway address to remove.
Exit Status
The command completed successfully.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To changes the current network address and mask to the new settings, type:
chtcpip -interface en0 -inetaddr 9.1.1.1 -netmask 255.255.255.0
2. To changes the default gateway from 9.1.2.3 to 9.2.3.4, type:
chtcpip -interface en0 -gateway -add 9.2.3.4 -remove 9.1.2.3
Note: If more than one default gateway is defined, an error will occur. Only one default gateway can
be defined by the mktcpip command.
Related Information
The topas command, and the mktcpip command.
chuser command
Purpose
Changes user attributes.
Syntax
chuser [-ldap] -attr Attribute=Value ... Name
Description
The chuser command changes attributes for the user identified by the Name variable. To change an
attribute, specify the attribute name and the new value with the -attr Attribute=Value variable.
Use the -ldap flag if the user is an LDAP user. Specifying the -ldap flag authenticates through the LDAP
load module and changes the users attributes specified by the -attr flag.
Alphabetical list of commands
81
Attributes
The prime administrator (padmin) user can set the following attributes:
account_locked
Indicates whether the user account is locked. Possible values are as follows:
true | yes | always
The user's account is locked. The values true, yes, and always are equivalent.
The user is denied access to the system.
expires
histexpire
histsize
loginretries
maxage
maxexpired
maxrepeats
minage
minalpha
mindiff
minlen
minother
pgrp
pwdwarntime
82
false | no | never
The user's account is not locked. The values false, no, and never are equivalent.
The user is allowed access to the system. The default value is false.
Identifies the expiration date of the account. The Value variable is a 10-character string in
the MMDDhhmmyy form, where MM = month, DD = day, hh = hour, mm = minute,
and yy = last 2 digits of the years 1939 through 2038. All characters are numeric. If the
Value variable is 0, the account does not expire. The default is 0.
Defines the period of time (in weeks) that a user cannot reuse a password. The value is a
decimal integer string. The default is 0, indicating that no time limit is set.
Defines the number of previous passwords a user cannot reuse. The value is a decimal
integer string. The default is 0. Only an administrative user can change this attribute.
Defines the number of unsuccessful login attempts allowed after the last successful login
before the system locks the account. The value is a decimal integer string. A zero or
negative value indicates that no limit exists. Once the user's account is locked, the user is
not able to log in until the prime administrator resets the user's account_locked attribute.
Defines the maximum age (in weeks) of a password. The password must be changed by
this time. The value is a decimal integer string. The default is a value of 0, indicating no
maximum age. The value can be from 0 to 52.
Defines the maximum time (in weeks) beyond the maxage value that a user can change
an expired password. The value is a decimal integer string. The default is -1, indicating
restriction is set. If the maxexpired attribute is 0, the password expires when the maxage
value is met. If the maxage attribute is 0, the maxexpired attribute is ignored. The value
can be from 0 to 52.
Defines the maximum number of times a character can be repeated in a new password.
Since a value of 0 is meaningless, the default value of 8 indicates that there is no
maximum number. The value is a decimal integer string. The value can be from 0 to 8.
Specifies the minimum age at which a password can be changed. Passwords must be
kept for a minimum period. This value is measured in weeks.
Specifies the minimum number of alphabetic characters.
Specifies the minimum number of characters in the new password that are not in the old
password. Note: This restriction does not consider position. If the new password is abcd
and the old password is edcb, the number of different characters is 1.
Defines the minimum length of a password. The value is a decimal integer string. The
default is a value of 0, indicating no minimum length. The maximum value allowed is 8.
This attribute is determined by minlen or 'minalpha + minother', whichever is greater.
The values for 'minalpha + minother' cannot be greater than 8. If 'minalpha + minother'
is greater than 8, then the effective value for minother is reduced to '8 - minalpha'.
Defines the minimum number of non-alphabetic characters that must be in a new
password. The value is a decimal integer string. The default is a value of 0, indicating no
minimum number. The value can be from 0 to 8.
Defines the Primary Group and Groups membership. The valid entries are staff and
view. If this attribute is not defined, the default staff is used.
Defines the number of days before the system issues a warning that a password change
is required. The value is a decimal integer string. A zero or negative value indicates that
no message is issued. The value must be less than the difference of the maxage and
minage attributes. Values greater than this difference are ignored and a message is
issued when the minage value is reached.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Security
This command can only be run by the prime administrator (padmin) user.
Examples
To change the expiration date for the davis user account to 8 a.m., 1 May, 2010, type:
chuser -attr expires=0501080010 davis
Related Information
The lsuser command, the mkuser command, the rmuser command, and the passwd command.
IVM chvet command
Purpose
Activates Virtualization Engine systems technologies
Syntax
chvet -o <e> -k <activation code> [-m <managed system>] [--help ]
Description
The chvet command performs activation of Virtualization Engine systems technologies on the
managed-system.
Flags
-o
-m managed system
-k
--help
The operation to perform. The only valid value is e to enter an activation code.
The name of the managed system for which the Virtualization Engine systems
technologies activation is to be performed. The name may either be the user-defined
name for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the
machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed
system.
The activation code (key) to enter. Letters may be entered in either upper case or lower
case.
Display the help text for this command and exit.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Examples
To enter an activation code, type the following command:
chvet -m mySystem -o e -k AlphaNumericString12345
Alphabetical list of commands
83
chvg command
Purpose
Sets the characteristics of a volume group.
Syntax
chvg [ -unlock] [ -suspend | -resume] [-factor <num> [ -chksize] VolumeGroup
Description
The chvg command changes the characteristics of a volume group.
Flags
-resume
-suspend
-unlock
-factor
-chksize
Resumes normal I/O operations for a volume group.
Drains I/O's for this volume group and suspends future I/O's.
Unlocks the volume group. This option is provided if the volume group is left in a
locked state by abnormal termination of another LVM operation (such as the command
core dumping, or the system crashing).
Note: Before using the -unlock flag, make sure that the volume group is not being
used by another LVM command.
Changes the limit of the number of physical partitions per physical volume, specified
by factor. factor should be between 1-16 for 32 disk volume groups and 1-64 for 128
disk volume groups.
If factor is not supplied, it is set to the lowest value such that the number of physical
partitions in the volume group is less than factor x1016. If factor is specified, the
maximum number of physical partitions per physical volume for the volume group
changes to factor x1016.
Examines all the disks in the volume group to determine if they have grown in size.
This option does not support resizing a volume group while it is activated in classic or
enhanced concurrent mode. This option does not support resizing the rootvg volume
group.
If any disks have grown in size, this option attempts to add additional physical
partitions to the physical volume. If necessary, this option determines the appropriate
1016 multiplier and conversion to big volume group.
Note: After running chvg -chksize, it might be necessary to run the deactivatevg,
followed by running the activatevg command on the volume group to see the change
of size of the disks.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To suspend the volume group vg03, type:
chvg
-suspend vg03
2. To resume the volume group vg03, type:
chvg
-resume vg03
3. To change the number of physical partitions per physical volume by 4, type:
chvg -factor 4 testvg
84
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
4. To determine whether the testvg volume group has grown in size after adding additional physical
partitions to the physical volumes in the group, type:
chvg -chksize testvg
Related Information
The mkvg command, the lsvg command, the extendvg command, the reducevg command, the mirrorios
command, the unmirrorios command, the activatevg command, the deactivatevg command, the
importvg command, the exportvg command, and the syncvg command.
chvopt command
Purpose
Change the characteristics of a virtual optical media disk within the Virtual Media Repository.
Syntax
chvopt -name FileName {-access Value | -mv NewName}
Description
The chvopt command renames or changes the access permission's of a virtual optical media disk within
the Virtual Media Repository. If the -access flag is specified, then the permissions can be set to read-only
(ro) or read-write (rw). If the -mv flag is specified the media file name is changed. The file name cannot
be changed if the media file is loaded into a virtual optical device.
Flags
-dev Value
Specifies the new access permission. Valid values are:
ro
-name FileName
-mv NewName
read-only
rw
read-write
Specifies the file name whose access permission is to be changed.
Specifies the new file name.
Examples
To change the access permissions on the file clientData to read-only, type the following command:
chvopt -name clientData -access ro
cl_snmp command
Purpose
Issues Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) requests to agents and processes SNMP responses
returned by agents.
Syntax
cl_snmp [-com][-debug Level] [-host TargetHost] [-timeout TimeoutValue] [-retry RetryNumber] [-max
MaxRepetitions] [-file ConfigurationFile] [-port PortNumber] [-verbose ] [-non NonRepeaters] Function
[MIBvariable][VariableType][Value][...]]
Alphabetical list of commands
85
Description
Use the cl_snmp command to issue SNMP requests to agents and to process SNMP responses returned
by agents. The Virtual I/O Server cl_snmp command can be used for SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3
requests.
Flags
-com
-debug Level
-host TargetHost
-timeout TimeoutValue
-retry RetryNumber
-max MaxRepetitions
-file ConfigurationFile
-port PortNumber
-verbose
-non NonRepeaters
86
Specifies the community name used to access the specified variables at the
destination SNMP agent. If you do not specify a community name, the default
name is public. Community names are not required when using the user-based
security model.
Note: Community names are case sensitive.
Specifies a debugging level during run time. The default is 0. The higher the
debugging level, the greater the number of messages that are displayed. The
levels can be from 0 through 4.
Specifies the target host to which you want to send a request. This can be an
Internet protocol address, a host name, or a winSNMP name in the clsnmp.conf
configuration file. If you do not specify a host, the default is the local host.
Specifies the amount of time (in seconds) that the cl_snmp command waits for a
reply from the SNMP agent. The default is 3.
Specifies the maximum number of times to retry the command if it timed out. The
default is 2.
Specifies the number of lexicographic successors to be returned for each variable
binding pair after the first -non number successors. The parameter applies only to
the getbulk request. This is ignored if the function request is not a getbulk
request. For example, starting with successor -non number+1, return -max number
of successors for each variable binding pair. The default is 10.
Specifies the full path and file name of the configuration file.
Specifies the number of the port that listens for traps. If a port number is not
specified, the cl_snmp trap function listens on the well-known port 162, which is
the default port for cl_snmp traps.
Specifies that the output from a request should be displayed using verbose
output, for example, using the textual name instead of the MIB object identifier.
Specifies the number of variable binding pairs (name/value), starting with the
first, for which only a single successor is returned. This parameter applies only to
getbulk requests. This is ignored if the function request is not a getbulk request.
The default is 0.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Function [MIBvariable]
[VariableType] [Value] [...]]
Specifies the SNMP function or operation to perform, which is one of the
following:
v get
v getnext
v getbulk
v set
v walk
v trap
v findname
MIBVariable
Specifies the Management Information Base (MIB) object, using its object
descriptor (textual name), object identifier in ASN.1 notation, or a
combination of the two. When used with the walk function, this is the
MIB object prefix. A prefix can be any leading portion of the complete
object identifier. When used with the findname command, this object
identifier is in the ASN.1 notation.
Value
Specifies the value to be set by the SET function. If white space is needed
in the value, enclose the value in quotation marks. To set a variable to a
value that is also a type, you must specify the type.
VariableType
Specifies the type of value being set. To complete an SNMP SET request,
the SMI_type must be known. If no type is specified, cl_snmp command
searches first the /etc/mib.defs file and then the compiled MIB to
determine the type. If the variable is not found, an error is returned. If a
VariableType is specified, the VariableType takes precedence over any type
that may be assigned in the MIB. The VariableType and value must be
compatible. For example, if you specify a type of number and a value of
foo, an error is returned because foo is not a number. VariableType is not
case sensitive. Valid variable types are:
v bitstring
v counter
v counter32
v counter64
v display or displaystring
v gauge
v gauge32
v integer
v integer32
v ipaddress
v nsapaddress
v null
v objectidentifier or OID
v
octetstring
v
opaque
v
opaqueascii
v
timeticks
v
uinteger
Alphabetical list of commands
87
Request Types
findname
get
getbulk
getnext
set
trap
walk
Sends a request that a search be done to obtain the textual name, for a given
MIBVariable input, whose internal ASN.1 value best matches the input ASN.1 value. The
search first checks the /etc/mib.defs file, and if a matching textual name is not found,
it continues with the compiled management information base (MIB). Only one
MIBVariable is allowed per cl_snmp findname invocation.
Sends a request to an SNMP agent for a specific MIB variable. The cl_snmp command
then waits for a response or times out.
Obtains the value of the variables in the MIB tree specified by the object identifier
(OID) or MIB variable name. A single getbulk performs the same function as a series of
getnext commands, with fewer data exchanges between the cl_snmp command and the
SNMP agent.
Sends a request to an SNMP agent for the next MIB variable that lexicographically
follows the MIBVariable specified. The cl_snmp command then waits for a response or
times out.
Sends a request to an SNMP agent to set a specific MIBVariable. The cl_snmp command
then waits for a response or times out.
Listens for SNMP traps and displays trap information when they occur. Uses the
default, well-known port 162 or the port number specified on the -port option. The
cl_snmp trap function continues to listen for traps until the process is killed or
canceled.
Issues a getnext request for a specified prefix, then continues to issue getnext requests
for as long as there are variables that match the specified prefix. A prefix can be any
leading portion of the complete object identifier.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
To issue an SNMP request, run the following command:
cl_snmp -host hostname get sysName.0
Related Information
The snmp_info command and snmp_trap command.
clear command
Purpose
Clears the terminal screen.
Syntax
clear
Description
The clear command clears your screen, if possible. The clear command first checks the TERM
environment variable for the terminal type. Next, the /usr/share/lib/terminfo directory, which contains
terminal definition files, is checked to determine how to clear the screen. If the TERM environment
variable is not set, the clear command exits without taking any action.
88
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Examples
To clear your screen, enter:
clear
Files
/usr/share/lib/terminfo
Contains terminal information database.
cp command
Purpose
Copies files.
Syntax
To Copy a File to another File
cp [ -E{force|ignore|warn} ] [ -f ] [ -h ] [ -i ] [ -p ] [ -I ] [ -U ] [ - ] SourceFile TargetFile
To Copy a File to a Directory
cp [ -E{force|ignore|warn} ] [ -f ] [ -h ] [ -i ] [ -p ] [[ -r | -R ] [ -H | -L | -P ]] [ -I ] [ -U ] [ - ]
SourceFile ... TargetDirectory
To Copy a Directory to a Directory
cp [ -E{force|ignore|warn} ] [ -f ] [ -h ] [ -i ] [ -p ] { -r | -R } [ -H | -L | -P ] [ -I ] [ -U ] [ - ]
SourceDirectory ... TargetDirectory
Description
The cp command copies the source file specified by the SourceFile parameter to the destination file
specified by the TargetFile parameter. If the target file exists, cp overwrites the contents, but the mode,
owner, and group associated with it are not changed. The last access time of the SourceFile and the last
modification time of the TargetFile are set to the time the copy was done. If the TargetFile does not exist,
cp creates a new file named TargetFile that has the same mode as the source file except that the sticky bit
is not set unless it was done by a superuser; the owner and group of the TargetFile is that of the user.
When the TargetFile is a link to another file, cp overwrites the destination link with the content of the
source file; the links from the TargetFile remains. Also, the cp command can copy the source files specified
by the SourceFile parameter (or directories named by the SourceDirectory parameter) to the directory
specified by the TargetDirectory parameter.
Note: If one of the source parameters is a directory, you need to specify one of the -r or -R flags.
If any directories are created by the cp command during the copying process, the newly created directory
will have the same mode as the corresponding source directory.
You can also copy special device files. The preferred option for accomplishing this is the -R flag.
Specifying -R causes the special files to be re-created under the new path name. Specifying the -r flag
causes the cp command to attempt to copy the special file to a regular file.
Alphabetical list of commands
89
Flags
-E
The -E option requires one of the following arguments. If you omit the -E option, warn is the default
behavior.
force
Fails the cp operation on a file if the fixed extent size or space reservation of the file cannot
be preserved.
ignore
Ignores any errors in preserving extent attributes.
Issues a warning if the space reservation or the fixed extent size of the file cannot be
preserved.
Specifies removal of the target file if it cannot be opened for write operations. The removal precedes
any copying performed by the cp command.
Forces the cp command to copy symbolic links. The default is to follow symbolic links, that is, to
copy files to which symbolic links point.
Take actions based on the type and contents of the file referenced by any symbolic link specified as a
SourceFile operand.
Prompts you with the name of a file to be overwritten. This occurs if the TargetDirectory or TargetFile
parameter contains a file with the same name as a file specified in the SourceFile or SourceDirectory
parameter. If you enter y or the locale's equivalent of y, the cp command continues. Any other
answer prevents the cp command from overwriting the file.
Suppresses the warning message during ACL conversion.
Take actions based on the type and contents of the file referenced by any symbolic link specified as a
SourceFile operand or any symbolic links encountered during traversal of a file hierarchy.
Duplicates the following characteristics of each SourceFile/SourceDirectory in the corresponding
TargetFile or TargetDirectory:
warn
-f
-h
-H
-i
-I
-L
-p
v The time of the last data modification and the time of the last access. If this duplication fails for
any reason, the cp command will write a diagnostic message to standard error.
v The user ID and group ID. If this duplication fails for any reason, the cp command may write a
diagnostic message to standard error.
v The file permission bits and the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits. If this duplication fails for any reason,
the cp command will write a diagnostic message to standard error.
If the user ID or group ID cannot be duplicated, the file permission bits S_ISUID and S_ISGID are
cleared.
In order to preserve the owner ID and group ID, permission modes, modification and access times,
user must have the appropriate file access permissions (user should be a superuser or have the same
owner ID as the destination file)
The target file will not be deleted if these characteristics cannot be preserved.
Access control lists (ACLs) associated with the SourceFile are preserved if the target file system
supports the same. If the source file contains NFS4 ACL and the target file system does not support
NFS4 ACL, the NFS4 ACL is converted to AIXC.
-P
-r
90
When ACL conversion succeeds, a warning message is printed out the stderr.
Take actions on any symbolic link specified as a SourceFile operand or any symbolic link encountered
during traversal of a file hierarchy.
Copies file hierarchies under the file or directory specified by the SourceFile or SourceDirectory
parameter (recursive copy). The -r flag processes special files in the same manner as regular files.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Copies file hierarchies under the regular files and directories from the directory specified by the
SourceFile or SourceDirectory parameter to the directory specified by the TargetDirectory parameter.
Special file types, such as first-in, first-out (FIFO) files and block and character device files, are
re-created instead of copied. Symbolic links are followed unless the -h flag is specified. (The -R flag
is preferred to the -r flag.)
-R
If none of the -H, -L, or -P options were specified, it is unspecified which of those options will be
used as the default. Consider the following:
v If the -H option was specified, the cp command will take action based on the type and contents of
the file referenced by any symbolic link specified as a SourceFile operand.
v If the -L option was specified, the cp command will take action based on the type and contents of
the file referenced by any symbolic link specified as a SourceFile operand or any symbolic links
encountered during traversal of a file hierarchy.
v If the -P option was specified, the cp command will copy any symbolic link specified as a
SourceFile operand and any symbolic links encountered during traversal of a file hierarchy and
will not follow any symbolic links.
Copies Extended Attributes (EA), Access Control Lists ( ACL ) in the SourceFile to the TargetFile. If
the EA is not supported on the target file system then it is ignored. If the source ACL type is not
supported on the target file system then it is converted to the compatible ACL type supported by
the target file system.
Indicates that parameters following the -- (dash, dash) flag are to be interpreted as file names. This
null flag allows the specification of file names that start with a - (minus sign).
-U
--
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
All files were copied successfully.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To make a copy of a file in the current directory, enter:
cp prog.c prog.bak
This copies prog.c to prog.bak. If the prog.bak file does not already exist, the cp command creates it.
If it does exist, the cp command replaces it with a copy of the prog.c file.
2. To copy a file in your current directory into another directory, enter:
cp jones /home/nick/clients
This copies the jones file to /home/nick/clients/jones.
3. To copy a file to a new file and preserve the modification date, time, and access control list associated
with the source file, enter:
cp
-p smith smith.jr
This copies the smith file to the smith.jr file. Instead of creating the file with the current date and
time stamp, the system gives the smith.jr file the same date and time as the smith file. The smith.jr
file also inherits the smith file's access control protection.
4. To copy all the files in a directory to a new directory, enter:
cp /home/janet/clients/* /home/nick/customers
This copies only the files in the clients directory to the customers directory.
5. To copy a directory, including all its files and subdirectories, to another directory, enter:
Alphabetical list of commands
91
cp
-R /home/nick/clients /home/nick/customers
Note: A directory cannot be copied into itself.
This copies the clients directory, including all its files, subdirectories, and the files in those
subdirectories, to the customers/clients directory.
6. To copy a specific set of files to another directory, enter:
cp jones lewis smith /home/nick/clients
This copies the jones, lewis, and smith files in your current working directory to the
/home/nick/clients directory.
7. To use pattern-matching characters to copy files, enter:
cp programs/*.c .
This copies the files in the programs directory that end with .c to the current directory, signified by
the single . (dot). You must type a space between the c and the final dot.
8. To copy a file to a new file and preserve the ACL and EA associated with the source file, enter:
cp -U smith smith.jr
Files
/usr/bin/cp
Contains the cp command.
Related Information
The mv command.
cplv command
Purpose
Copies the contents of a logical volume to a new logical volume.
Syntax
To Copy to a New Logical Volume
cplv [ -vg VolumeGroup ] [ -lv NewLogicalVolume | -prefix Prefix ] SourceLogicalVolume
To Copy to an Existing Logical Volume
cplv [ -f ] SourceLogicalVolume DestinationLogicalVolume
Description
Attention: Do not copy from a larger logical volume containing data to a smaller one. Doing so results
in a corrupted file system because some data is not copied.
The cplv command copies the contents of SourceLogicalVolume to a new or existing logical volume. The
SourceLogicalVolume parameter can be a logical volume name or a logical volume ID. The cplv command
creates a new logical volume with a system-generated name by using the default syntax. The
system-generated name is displayed.
Note: The cplv command cannot copy logical volumes which are in the open state, including logical
volumes that are being used as backing devices for virtual storage.
92
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Flags
-f
-lv NewLogicalVolume
-prefix Prefix
-vg VolumeGroup
Copies to an existing logical volume without requesting user confirmation.
Specifies the name to use, in place of a system-generated name, for the new logical
volume. Logical volume names must be unique systemwide names, and can range from
1 to 15 characters.
Specifies a prefix to use in building a system-generated name for the new logical
volume. The prefix must be less than or equal to 13 characters. A name cannot be a
name already used by another device.
Specifies the volume group where the new logical volume resides. If this is not
specified, the new logical volume resides in the same volume group as the
SourceLogicalVolume.
Examples
1. To copy the contents of logical volume fslv03 to a new logical volume, type:
cplv fslv03
The new logical volume is created, placed in the same volume group as fslv03, and named by the
system.
2. To copy the contents of logical volume fslv03 to a new logical volume in volume group vg02, type:
cplv
-vg vg02 fslv03
The new logical volume is created, named, and added to volume group vg02.
3. To copy the contents of logical volume lv02 to a smaller, existing logical volume, lvtest, without
requiring user confirmation, type:
cplv -f lv02 lvtest
cpvdi command
Purpose
Copies a block device.
Syntax
cpvdi -src input_disk_image -dst output_disk_image [-isp input_storage_pool] [-osp output_storage_pool]
[-progress] [-overwrite] [-unconfigure] [-f]
Description
The cpvdi command copies a block device image, which can be either a logical or physical volume, a
file-backed device, or a file on another existing disk. The parameters of the -src and -dst flags should be
fully qualified names when specifying a file or device. Specifying the -progress flag prints a number sign
(#) on the stderr for each block (1 M) of data copied on to the destination.
Note: The output_disk_image device that you specify with the -dst flag cannot be a physical volume that is
assigned to a shared memory pool (to be used as a paging space device by a shared memory partition).
Flags
-src input_disk_image
Specifies the input backing device. The input backing device might either be a physical
or logical volume or a file is located in the caller's home directory, any of its
subdirectories or in the /mnt directory. The root user will not have any file location
restrictions.
Alphabetical list of commands
93
-dst output_disk_image
-f
-progress
-isp input_storage_pool
-osp output_storage_pool
-overwrite
-unconfigure
Specifies the output backing device. The output backing device might either be a
physical or logical volume or a file is located in the caller's home directory, any of its
subdirectories or in the /mnt directory. The root user will not have any file location
restrictions.
Overwrites the destination file. However, if the source or destination file is configured
as backing device, it copies the file without unconfiguring the device or devices. If the
-unconfigure flag is used in addition to the -f flag, then the -unconfigure flag takes
priority.
Specifies the process status of the command will be expressed by printing a number
sign (#) to stderr for every 1024 KB block of data that has been copied.
Specifies the name of the storage pool where the input file-backed device exists.
Required if the argument of the -src flag is a file-backed device.
Specifies the name of the storage pool where the input file-backed device exists.
Required if the argument of the -dst flag is a file-backed device.
Overwrites the destination file, if the file is present. If you do not use this flag, an error
message displays with a non-zero exit code.
Specifies to unconfigure the virtual target device (VTD) and reconfigure the VTD after a
copy operation. Only use this flag if the source or destination file is configured as
backing device. If you do not use this flag, an error message displays with a non-zero
exit code.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To copy a physical volume disk image to a file, type the following command:
cpvdi -src hdisk1 -dst /home/my_home/image1_file
2. To copy a disk image that is a file to a physical volume, type the following command:
cpvdi -src /home/my_home/image2_file -dst hdisk2
3. To output a hash symbol for every block of data that is copied, type the following command:
cpvdi -src hdisk1 -dst hdisk2 -progress
4. To copy a file-backed device to another file-backed device, type the following command:
cpvdi -src image1_file -dst image2_file -isp sp01 -osp sp02
5. To copy a file1 to file2, when file2 already exists, type the following command:
cpvdi -src /home/padmin/file1 -dst /home/padmin/file2 -overwrite
6. To copy a file-backed device fbd1 as fbd2, when fbd1 is configured as the backing device, type the
following command:
cpvdi -src fbd1 -dst fbd2 -isp sp01 -osp sp01 -f
Related Information
The cp command and the backupios command.
crontab command
Purpose
Submits, edits, lists, or removes cron jobs.
Syntax
crontab [ -e [UserName] | -l [UserName] | -r [UserName] | -v [UserName] | File ]
94
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Description
The crontab command submits, edits, lists, or removes cron jobs. A cron job is a command run by the
cron daemon at regularly scheduled intervals. To submit a cron job, specify the crontab command with
the -e flag. The crontab command invokes an editing session that allows you to create a crontab file. You
create entries for each cron job in this file. Each entry must be in a form acceptable to the cron daemon.
For information on creating entries, see the crontab File Entry Format section.
When you finish creating entries and exit the file, the crontab command copies it into the
/var/spool/cron/crontabs directory and places it in a file named for your current user name. If a file with
your name already exists in the crontabs directory, the crontab command overwrites it.
Alternatively, you can create a crontab file by specifying the File parameter. If the file exists, it must be in
the format the cron daemon expects. If the file does not exist, the crontab command invokes the editor. If
the EDITOR environment variable exists, the command invokes the editor it specifies. Otherwise, the
crontab command uses the vi editor.
To list the contents of your crontab file, specify the crontab command with the -l flag. To remove an
existing file, use the -r flag.
The optional UserName parameter can be used by the owner of the crontab file or by the root user to edit,
list, remove, or verify the status of the cron jobs for the specified user. If the UserName is invalid, an error
message is generated and the program exits.
If the optional UserName parameter is not specified, the crontab flags are available for the root user and
the current user.
Security
Only the root user or the owner of the crontab file can use UserName following the -e, -l, -r, and -v flags
to edit, list, remove, or verify the crontab file of the specified user.
The cron Daemon
The cron daemon runs commands according to the crontab file entries. Unless you redirect the output of
a cron job to standard output or error, the cron daemon mails you any command output or errors. If you
specify a cron job incorrectly in your crontab file, the cron daemon does not run the job.
The cron daemon examines crontab files only when the cron daemon is initialized. When you make
changes to your crontab file using the crontab command, a message indicating the change is sent to the
cron daemon. This eliminates the overhead of checking for new or changed files at regularly scheduled
intervals.
Controls on Using the crontab Command
The /var/adm/cron/cron.allow and /var/adm/cron/cron.deny files control which users can use the crontab
command. A root user can create, edit, or delete these files. Entries in these files are user login names
with one name to a line. If your login ID is associated with more than one login name, the crontab
command uses the first login name that is in the /etc/passwd file, regardless of which login name you
might actually be using. Also, to allow users to start cron jobs, the daemon attribute in the
/etc/security/user file should be set to TRUE , using the chuser command.
The following is an example of an cron.allow file:
Alphabetical list of commands
95
root
nick
dee
sarah
If the cron.allow file exists, only users whose login names appear in it can use the crontab command.
The root user's log name must appear in the cron.allow file if the file exists. A system administrator can
explicitly stop a user from using the crontab command by listing the user's login name in the cron.deny
file. If only the cron.deny file exists, any user whose name does not appear in the file can use the crontab
command.
A user cannot use the crontab command if one of the following is true:
v The cron.allow file and the cron.deny file do not exist (allows root user only).
v The cron.allow file exists but the user's login name is not listed in it.
v The cron.deny file exists and the user's login name is listed in it.
If neither the cron.allow nor the cron.deny file exists, only someone with root user authority can submit
a job with the crontab command.
The crontab File Entry Format
A crontab file contains entries for each cron job. Entries are separated by newline characters. Each
crontab file entry contains six fields separated by spaces or tabs in the following form:
minute
hour
day_of_month
month
weekday
command
These fields accept the following values:
minute
hour
day_of_month
month
weekday
command
0
0
1
1
0
a
through 59
through 23
through 31
through 12
through 6 for Sunday through Saturday
shell command
You must specify a value for each field. Except for the command field, these fields can contain the
following:
v A number in the specified range. To run a command in May, specify 5 in the month field.
v Two numbers separated by a dash to indicate an inclusive range. To run a cron job on Tuesday
through Friday, place 2-5 in the weekday field.
v A list of numbers separated by commas. To run a command on the first and last day of January, you
would specify 1,31 in the day_of_month field.
v An * (asterisk), meaning all allowed values. To run a job every hour, specify an asterisk in the hour
field.
Note: Any character preceded by a backslash (including the %) causes that character to be treated
literally. The specification of days may be made by two fields (day of the month and day of the
week). If you specify both as a list of elements, both are adhered to. For example, the following
entry:
0 0 1,15 * 1 command
would run command on the first and fifteenth days of each month, as well as every Monday. To
specify days by only one field, the other field should contain an * .
96
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Specifying Commands
The cron daemon runs the command named in the sixth field at the selected date and time. If you
include a % (percent sign) in the sixth field, the cron daemon treats everything that precedes it as the
command invocation and makes all that follows it available to standard input, unless you escape the
percent sign (\%). Blank lines and lines whose first non-blank character is the number sign (#) will be
ignored. If the arguments to the command have a backslash ('\'), the backslash should be preceded by
another backslash.
Note: The shell runs only the first line of the command field. All other lines are made available to the
command as standard input.
The cron daemon starts a subshell from your HOME directory. If you schedule a command to run when
you are not logged in and you want commands in your .profile file to run, the command must explicitly
read your .profile file.
The cron daemon supplies a default environment for every shell, defining HOME, LOGNAME, SHELL
(=/usr/bin/sh), and PATH (=/usr/bin).
Flags
-e UserName
Edits a copy of the user's crontab file or creates an empty file to edit if the crontab
file does not exist for a valid UserName. When editing is complete, the file is copied
into the crontab directory as the user's crontab file.
Lists the user's crontab file.
Removes the user's crontab file from the crontab directory.
Lists the status of the user's cron jobs.
-l UserName
-r UserName
-v UserName
Security
Auditing Events: If the auditing subsystem has been properly configured and is enabled, the crontab
command generates the following audit record (event) every time the command is run:
Event
CRON_JobRemove
CRON_JobAdd
Information
Lists which users removed a cron job and when.
Lists which users added a cron job and when.
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
0
>0
Successful completion.
An error occurred.
Examples
1. To copy a file called mycronjobs into the /var/spool/cron/crontabs directory, enter the following:
crontab mycronjobs
The file will be copied as:
/var/spool/cron/crontabs/<username>
where <username> is your current user name.
2. To write the time to the console every hour on the hour, enter:
Alphabetical list of commands
97
0 * * * * echo The hour is `date` .
>/dev/console
3. To run the calendar command at 6:30 a.m. every Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, enter:
30 6 * * 1,3,5 /usr/bin/calendar
4. To run the calendar command every day of the year at 6:30, enter the following:
30 6 * * * /usr/bin/calendar
5. To run a script called maintenance every day at midnight in August, enter the following:
0 0 * 8 * /u/harry/bin/maintenance
6. To define text for the standard input to a command, enter:
0 16 * 12 5 /usr/sbin/wall%HAPPY HOLIDAY!%Remember to
turn in your time card.
The text following the % (percent sign) defines the standard input to the wall command as:
HAPPY HOLIDAY!
Remember to turn in your time card.
Files
/var/adm/cron/FIFO
/var/spool/cron/crontabs
/var/adm/cron/cron.allow
/var/adm/cron/cron.deny
A named pipe that sends messages to the cron daemon when new
jobs are submitted with the crontab or at command.
Specifies the crontab spool area.
Specifies a list of users allowed access to the crontab command.
Specifies a list of users denied access to the crontab command.
date command
Purpose
Displays or sets the date or time.
Syntax
To Set the Date and Time as Root User
/usr/bin/date [ -n ] [ -u ] [ Date ] [ +FieldDescriptor ... ]
To Display the Date and Time
/usr/bin/date [ -u ] [ +FieldDescriptor ... ]
To adjust the Time in Seconds as root User
/usr/bin/date [ -a [ + | - ]sss[.fff ]
Description
Attention:
Do not change the date when the system is running with more than one user.
The date command writes the current date and time to standard output if called with no flags or with a
flag list that begins with a + (plus sign). Otherwise, it sets the current date. Only a root user can change
the date and time. The date command prints out the usage message on any unrecognized flags or input.
The following formats can be used when setting the date with the Date parameter:
98
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
v mmddHHMM[YYyy]
v mmddHHMM[yy]
The variables to the Date parameter are defined as follows:
mm
dd
HH
MM
YY
yy
Specifies the month number.
Specifies the number of the day in the month.
Specifies the hour in the day (using a 24-hour clock).
Specifies the minute number.
Specifies the first two digits of the year.
Note: If you do not specify the first two digits of the year, values in the range 69 to 99 refer to the
twentieth century, 1969 to 1999 inclusive, and values in the range 00 to 68 refer to years in the twenty-first
century, 2000 to 2068 inclusive.
Specifies the last two digits of the year.
Note: The date command accepts a 4 digit year as input. For example, if a four-digit year is specified, the
date command tries to set the year to "YYyy" and fails for values which are out of range (less than 1970 and
greater than 2037).
The current year is used as the default value when the year is not specified. The system operates in
Coordinated Universal Time (CUT).
If you follow the date command with a + (plus sign) and a field descriptor, you can control the output of
the command. You must precede each field descriptor with a % (percent sign). The system replaces the
field descriptor with the specified value. Enter a literal % as %% (two percent signs). The date command
copies any other characters to the output without change. The date command always ends the string with
a new-line character.
Flags
-a [ + | - ]sss[.fff ]
-n
-u
Slowly adjusts the time by sss.fff seconds (fff represents fractions of a second). This
adjustment can be positive or negative. The system's clock will be sped up or
slowed down until it has drifted by the number of seconds specified.
Does not set the time globally on all machines in a local area network that have
their clocks synchronized.
Displays or sets the time in Coordinated Universal Time (CUT).
Field Descriptors
%a
%A
%b
%B
%c
%C
%d
%D
%e
%h
%H
%I
%j
%k
Displays the locale's abbreviated weekday name.
Displays the locale's full weekday name.
Displays the locale's abbreviated month name.
Displays the locale's full month name.
Displays the locale's appropriate date and time representation. This is the default.
Displays the first two digits of the four-digit year as a decimal number (00-99). A year is divided by 100 and
truncated to an integer.
Displays the day of the month as a decimal number (01-31). In a two-digit field, a 0 is used as leading space
fill.
Displays the date in the format equivalent to %m/%d/%y.
Displays the day of the month as a decimal number (1-31). In a two-digit field, a blank space is used as
leading space fill.
Displays the locale's abbreviated month name (a synonym for %b).
Displays the hour (24-hour clock) as a decimal number (00-23).
Displays the hour (12-hour clock) as a decimal number (01-12).
Displays the day of year as a decimal number (001-366).
Displays the 24-hour-clock hour clock as a right-justified, space-filled number ( 0 to 23).
Alphabetical list of commands
99
%m
%M
%n
%p
%r
%S
%s
%t
%T
%u
%U
%V
%w
%W
%x
%X
%y
%Y
%Z
%%
Displays the month of year as a decimal number (01-12).
Displays the minutes as a decimal number (00-59).
Inserts a <new-line> character.
Displays the locale's equivalent of either AM or PM.
Displays 12-hour clock time (01-12) using the AM-PM notation; in the POSIX locale, this is equivalent to
%I:%M:%S %p.
Displays the seconds as a decimal number (00- 59).
Displays the number of seconds since January 1, 1970, Coordinated Universal Time (CUT).
Inserts a <tab> character.
Displays the 24-hour clock (00-23) in the format equivalent to HH:MM:SS .
Displays the weekday as a decimal number from 1-7 (Sunday = 7). Refer to the %w field descriptor.
Displays week of the year(Sunday as the first day of the week) as a decimal number[00 - 53] . All days in a
new year preceding the first Sunday are considered to be in week 0.
Displays the week of the year as a decimal number from 01-53 (Monday is used as the first day of the
week). If the week containing January 1 has four or more days in the new year, then it is considered week
01; otherwise, it is week 53 of the previous year.
Displays the weekday as a decimal number from 0-6 (Sunday = 0). Refer to the %u field descriptor.
Displays the week number of the year as a decimal number (00-53) counting Monday as the first day of the
week.
Displays the locale's appropriate date representation.
Displays the locale's appropriate time representation.
Displays the last two numbers of the year (00-99).
Displays the four-digit year as a decimal number.
Displays the time-zone name, or no characters if no time zone is determinable.
Displays a % (percent sign) character.
Modified Field Descriptors
The %E and %O field descriptors can be modified to indicate a different format or specification. If the
corresponding keyword (see the era, era_year, era_d_fmt, and alt_digits keywords) is not specified or not
supported for the current locale, the unmodified field descriptor value is used.
%Ec
%EC
%Ex
%EX
%Ey
%EY
%Od
%Oe
%OH
%OI
Displays
Displays
Displays
Displays
Displays
Displays
Displays
Displays
Displays
Displays
%Om
%OM
%OS
%Ou
%OU
Displays the month using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
Displays minutes using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
Displays seconds using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
Displays the weekday as a number in the locale's alternative representation (Monday=1).
Displays the week number of the year using the locale's alternative numeric symbols. Sunday is
considered the first day of the week.
Displays the week number of the year using the locale's alternative numeric symbols. Monday is
considered the first day of the week.
Displays the weekday as a number in the locale's alternative representation (Sunday =0).
Displays the week number of the year using the locale's alternative numeric symbols. Monday is
considered the first day of the week.
Displays the year (offset from %C) in alternative representation.
%OV
%Ow
%OW
%Oy
100
the
the
the
the
the
the
the
the
the
the
locale's alternative appropriate date and time representation.
name of the base year (or other time period) in the locale's alternative representation.
locale's alternative date representation.
locale's alternative time representation.
offset from the %EC field descriptor (year only) in the locale's alternative representation.
full alternative year representation.
day of the month using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
day of the month using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
hour (24-hour clock) using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
hour (12-hour clock) using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
The date was written successfully.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To display current date and time, enter:
date
2. To set the date and time, enter:
date 0217142590
For a system using CST as its time zone, this sets the date and time to Sat Feb 17 14:25:00 CST 1990.
Note: You must have root authority to change the date and time.
3. To display the date and time in a specified format, enter:
date +"%r %a %d %h %y (Julian Date: %j)"
This displays the date shown in Example 2 as:
02:25:03 PM Fri 17 Feb 90 (Julian Date: 048)
Environment Variables
The following environment variables affect the execution of the date command.
LANG
LC_ALL
LC_CTYPE
LC_MESSAGES
LC_TIME
NLSPATH
TZ
Determines the locale to use when both LC_ALL and the corresponding environment variable
(beginning with LC_) do not specify a locale.
Determines the locale to be used to override any values for locale categories specified by the
setting of LANG or any environment variable beginning with LC_.
Determines the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of text data as characters (for
example, single versus multibyte character in an argument).
Determines the language in which messages should be written.
Determines the contents of date and time strings written by date.
Determines the location of message catalogues for the processing of LC_MESSAGES.
Specifies the time zone in which the time and date are written, unless the -u option is
specified. If the TZ variable is not set and the -u flag is not specified, an unspecified system
default time zone is used.
deactivatevg command
Purpose
Deactivates a volume group.
Syntax
deactivatevg VolumeGroup
Alphabetical list of commands
101
Description
The deactivatevg command deactivates the volume group specified by the VolumeGroup parameter along
with its associated logical volumes. The logical volumes must first be closed. For example, if the logical
volume contains a file system, it must be unmounted.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To deactivate volume group vg03, type:
deactivatevg vg03
Related Information
The mkvg command, the chvg command, the extendvg command, the reducevg command, the mirrorios
command, the unmirrorios command, the lsvg command, the activatevg command, the importvg
command, the exportvg command, and the syncvg command.
IVM defsysplanres command
Purpose
Defines the system plan resource.
Syntax
defsysplanres -r osinstall -n <resource name> -v <resouce value> [-d <resource description>] [-help]
Descriptio
The defsysplanres command defines a system plan resource for use by system plans deployed from the
Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM).
Flags
-r
Specifies the type of system plan resources to define. To define the installation resources
for the operating system, the only valid value is osinstall.
This command does not create the resource. It sets the reference to an operating system
installation resource that can later be used within system plans that are deployed from
the IVM where the resource has been defined. This resource is defined only to the IVM
and not to any system plan. If the resource defined appears with a location attribute in
a system plan, the plan location is used instead.
102
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Specifies the name of the system plan resource you want to define. When a system plan
is deployed that needs to use the resource, the name is used to retrieve the plan
resource location attribute. Valid values follow:
-n
v resource name - the name of the resource to define.
v sles9 - Define the installation resources for installing the SLES9 Linux operating
system with a system plan.
v rhel4 - Define the installation resources for installing the Red Hat 4 Linux operating
system with a system plan.
v aix52 - Define the installation resources for installing the AIX 5.2 operating system
with a system plan.
-v
-d
-help
v aix53 - Define the installation resources for installing the AIX 5.3 operating system
with a system plan.
Specifies the value of the resource. This value is not checked for validity by the
command. It is treated as a string value.
Specifies a description for the resource. This is an open text description field.
Displays the help text for this command and exit.
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
Successful completion.
Invalid flag, argument, or command failure.
Examples
1. To define the plan resource for the osinstall type used as the Red Hat installation source, type:
defsysplanres -r osinstall -n rhel4
-v rhel43
-d "Red hat install source"
2. To define the plan resource for the osinstall type used as the AIX 5.3 installation source, type:
defsysplanres -r osinstall -n aix53
-v aix53install
Related Information
The deploysysplan, lssysplanres, lssysplan, and rmsysplanres commands.
IVM deploysysplan command
Purpose
Deploys a system plan (an XML-based system configuration) generated using the mksysplan command
or the System Planning Tool (SPT) on the managed system.
Syntax
deploysysplan -f <system plan file name>-o dv | v | d [-m <managed system>] [--force] [--plan <system plan
name>] [-v] [-clientinstall] [--help]
Description
The deploysysplan command deploys a managed system's partition plan from an XML input file.
Alphabetical list of commands
103
Flags
-f SysPlanFileName
-o
Specifies the XML file (saved as a compressed stream with extension .sysplan) that
contains the system plan that is to be deployed. This file is not changed by the
deploysysplan command. The file must be in the system plan file directory
(/opt/hsc/data/sysplan) on the management partition. The file name that you specify must
end in ".sysplan." The file name can be uppercase, lowercase, or mixed.
Specifies the deployment option to be used when deploying the system plan. The
options are as follows:
dv
Validates and deploys the system plan on the managed system.
v
Validates the system plan for the managed system but does not deploy it.
Indicates that the system plan should not be validated against the managed
system, but the plan-specified partitions and profiles on the managed system
are to be deployed.
Specifies the managed system's name where the plan is to be deployed. The system-plan
file specifies the managed system's name where that system plan was intended to be
deployed. Because IVM can cater to only one managed system, specify only the
defaulted managed system using the -m option. This option is kept just to maintain the
consistency with other IVM commands. The name can either be the user-defined name
for the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine
type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
When the managed system has existing partitions other than the Virtual I/O Server
partition, that the system plan contains and that are in an active state, this option allows
the deploysysplan command to proceed with deployment. Otherwise, if active
partitions are found, the deploysysplan command will fails with an error message.
Specifies that a list of identifiers that identify the steps of the validated system plan
should be written to standard output (stdout). These steps are part of the plan but not
yet implemented on the managed system. Otherwise, this list is not written out. When
you specify the -dv or -d options, this parameter specifies that a list of log entries that
record the steps performed as part of deploying the system plan be written to stdout.
Otherwise, this list is not written out.
Specifies the which system plan files can contain more than one system definition. If the
file contains more than one system, this flag specifies the name of the system within the
system plan to deploy. If this name is not specified and there is more than one system
defined, an error listing the system name is returned. If there is only one system plan in
the file, this flag is ignored.
Identifies the operating systems to be installed on the client logical partitions and
performs an automatic installation of one or more of the clients, as defined in the
system plan.
Displays the help text for this command and exit.
d
-m
--force
-v
--plan <system plan name>
-clientinstall
--help
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
To deploy a system plan from file mysysplan.xml onto the managed system configured in the file. Run the
following command to validate the plan against the managed system before deploying it:
deploysysplan -f mysysplan.sysplan -o dv
Deploy a system plan from file mysysplan.xml and specify the managed system mySystem. Validate the
plan against the managed system before deploying it. Deploy the plan, if valid, even though there might
be active client partitions on the managed system:
deploysysplan -f mysysplan.sysplan -o dv -m mySystem --force
104
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Deploy a system plan from file mysysplan.xml onto a managed system by machine type, model number,
and serial number of the managed system. Validate the plan against the managed system before
deploying it. Write any errors found in validation or deployment to stdout:
deploysysplan -f mysysplan.sysplan -o dv -m 9406-570*34134888 -v
Validate the ability to deploy a system plan from file mysysplan.sysplan onto managed system mySystem.
Validate the plan against the managed system to determine if that plan can be deployed there but do not
actually deploy the plan. Write out the steps in the system plan that are part of the plan but not yet
implemented to stdout. Write any errors found in validation or deployment to stdout:
deploysysplan -f mysysplan.sysplan -o v -m mySystem -v
Deploy a system plan from file mysysplan.sysplan onto managed system mySystem. Do not validate the
plan against the managed system to determine if that plan can be deployed there. Write information
about the steps performed in deployment to stdout. Write any errors found in validation or deployment
to stdout. Deploy the plan, if valid, even though there might be active partitions on the managed system:
deploysysplan -f mysysplan.sysplan -o d -m mySystem -v -force
Deploy a system plan from file mysysplan.sysplan onto managed system mySystem. Validate the plan
against the managed system before deploying it. Deploy the plan, if valid, even though there might be
active partitions on the managed system. Only deploy those steps from the system plan that have been
identified by the -i parameter:
deploysysplan -f mysysplan.sysplan -o dv -m mySystem -force -i "23 45 33 465 99 3 4"
Deploy a system plan from the mysysplan.sysplan file onto the managed system configured in the file.
Type the following command to validate the plan against the managed system before deploying it, and
install the client partitions with the operating systems specified in the system plan.
deploysysplan -f mysysplan.sysplan -o dv -clientinstall
Related Information
The lssysplan command, mksysplan command, and rmsysplan command.
diagmenu command
Purpose
Places the user into the diagnostic menus.
Syntax
diagmenu
Description
The diagmenu command performs hardware problem determination and maintenance. When the user
suspects there is a problem, diagmenu assists in finding it. Through the diagnostic menus, users can
perform tasks such as running diagnostics, hot plugging devices, formatting and certifying media, and
managing RAID devices.
Once inside the diagnostic menus, task specific help can be obtained by pressing the F1 key.
Related Information
The errlog command.
Alphabetical list of commands
105
dsmc command
Purpose
Backups and stores data generated while using the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server.
Syntax
dsmc [ -incremental | -schedule ]
dsmc [ -query | -restore ] argv
Description
The dsmc command allows the user to back up and restore data from the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
Server.
Flag
-incremental
106
Backs up all new or changed files or directories in the default client domain or from file
systems, directories, or files you specify, unless you exclude them from backup services.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-query [argument]
Query functions to query backups on the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server
access
Displays a list of current authorization rules.
archive Displays a list of archived files
backup Displays a list of back up versions.
backupset
Queries a backup set from a local file, tape device, or the IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager Server.
filespace
Displays a list of file spaces in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager storage. You can
also specify a single file space name to query.
group
Displays information about group backups and their members.
image
Displays information about image backups.
inclexcl
Displays a list of include-exclude statements in the order in which they are
processed during backup and archive operations.
mgmtclass
Displays information about available management classes.
node
Displays all the nodes for which an administrative user ID has authority to
perform operations.
options
Displays all or part of your options and their current settings.
restore Displays a list of your restartable restore sessions in the server database.
schedule
Displays information about scheduled events for your node.
session Displays information about your session, including the current node name,
when the session was shed, server information, and server connection
information.
systeminfo
Gathers IBM Tivoli Storage Manager system information and outputs this
information to a file or the console.
Displays backups of the WebSphere® Application Server (WAS) Network
Deployment Manager (contains setup, application files, and configuration
information) or the Application Server that match the node name and type of
the WAS group backup that you specify.
Restores copies of backup versions of your files from an IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
server.
was
-restore [argument]
backupset
Restores a backup set from the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server or a local
file. You can also restore a backup from a tape device.
group
Restores specific members or all members of a group backup.
image
Restores a file system or raw volume image backup.
nas
Restores the image of a file system belonging to a Network Attached Storage
(NAS) file server.
Restores the WebSphere Application Server (WAS) Network Deployment
Manager (contains setup, application files, and configuration information) or
the Application Server from the Tivoli Storage Manager server.
Starts the client scheduler on the workstation.
was
-schedule
Alphabetical list of commands
107
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager can help protect computers running a variety of different operating
environments, including the Virtual I/O Server, on a variety of different hardware. Configuring the IBM
Tivoli Storage Manager client on the Virtual I/O Server enables you to include the Virtual I/O Server in
your standard backup framework.
Attributes
DSMC_CONFIG
DSMC_DIR
Description
Value
Specifies the location of the dsm.sys
/home/padmin/tivoli/tsm/dsm.sys
configuration file.
Specifies the location of the Tivoli Storage /home/padmin/tivoli/tsm/
Manager configuration directory.
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
Successful completion.
An error occurred.
Examples
To backup an image to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server, type:
dsmc -incremental <mksysb_file_to_backup>
To view backup images on the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server, type:
dsmc -query backup <mksysb_file_to_backup>
entstat command
Purpose
Shows Ethernet device driver and device statistics.
Syntax
entstat [ -all ] [ -reset ] Device_Name
Description
The entstat command displays the statistics gathered by the specified Ethernet device driver. The user
can optionally specify that the device-specific statistics be displayed in addition to the device generic
statistics. If no flags are specified, only the device generic statistics are displayed.
Flags
Displays all the statistics, including the device-specific statistics.
Resets all the statistics back to their initial values.
-all
-reset
Parameters
Device_name
108
The name of the Ethernet device, for example, ent0.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Exit Status
The statistic fields displayed in the output of the entstat command and their descriptions are as follows.
Note: Some adapters may not support a specific statistic. The value of non-supported statistic fields is
always 0.
Title Fields
Device Type
Hardware Address
Elapsed Time
Displays the description of the adapter type.
Displays the Ethernet network address currently used by the device.
Displays the real time period which has elapsed since last time the statistics were reset.
Part of the statistics may be reset by the device driver during error recovery when a
hardware error is detected. There will be another Elapsed Time displayed in the middle
of the output when this situation has occurred in order to reflect the time differences
between the statistics.
Transmit Statistics Fields
Packets
The number of packets transmitted successfully by the device.
Bytes
The number of bytes transmitted successfully by the device.
Interrupts
The number of transmit interrupts received by the driver from the adapter.
Transmit Errors
The number of output errors encountered on this device. This is a counter for
unsuccessful transmissions due to hardware or network errors.
Packets Dropped
The number of packets accepted by the device driver for transmission which were not
(for any reason) given to the device.
Max Packets on S/W
Transmit Queue
The maximum number of outgoing packets ever queued to the software transmit
queue.
S/W Transmit Queue
Overflow
The number of outgoing packets which have overflowed the software transmit queue.
Current S/W+H/W
Transmit Queue Length
The number of pending outgoing packets on either the software transmit queue or the
hardware transmit queue.
Broadcast Packets
The number of broadcast packets transmitted without any error.
Multicast Packets
The number of multicast packets transmitted without any error.
No Carrier Sense
The number of unsuccessful transmissions due to the no carrier sense error.
DMA Underrun
The number of unsuccessful transmissions due to the DMA underrun error.
Lost CTS Errors
The number of unsuccessful transmissions due to the loss of the Clear-to-Send signal
error.
Max Collision Errors
The number of unsuccessful transmissions due to too many collisions. The number of
collisions encountered exceeded the number of retries on the adapter.
Late Collision Errors
The number of unsuccessful transmissions due to the late collision error.
Deferred
The number of outgoing packets deferred during transmission. Deferred means that
the adapter had to defer while trying to transmit a frame. This condition occurs if the
network is busy when the adapter is ready to transmit. The adapter will only defer the
first attempt to send a packet. After that the adapter will transmit the packet without
checking. If the network is still busy then a collision will be recorded.
SQE Test
Contains the number of "Signal Quality Error" Tests (i.e. Heartbeat) performed
successfully during transmission.
Timeout Errors
The number of unsuccessful transmissions due to adapter reported timeout errors.
Single Collision Count
The number of outgoing packets with single (only one) collision encountered during
transmission.
Alphabetical list of commands
109
Multiple Collision Count
The number of outgoing packets with multiple (2 - 15) collisions encountered during
transmission
Current HW Transmit
Queue Length
The number of outgoing packets which currently exist on the hardware transmit
queue.
CRC Errors
The number of incoming packets with the Checksum (FCS) error.
DMA Overrun
The number of incoming packets with the DMA overrun error.
Alignment Errors
The number of incoming packets with the alignment error.
No Resource Errors
The number of incoming packets dropped by the hardware due to the no resource
error. This error usually occurs because the receive buffers on the adapter were
exhausted. Some adapters may have the size of the receive buffers as a configurable
parameter. Check the device configuration attributes for possible tuning information.
Receive Collision Errors
The number of incoming packets with the collision errors during the reception.
Packet Too Short Errors
The number of incoming packets with the length error indicating that the packet size
is less than the Ethernet minimum packet size.
Packet Too Long Errors
The number of incoming packets with the length error indicating that the packet size
is bigger than the Ethernet maximum packet size.
Packets Discarded by
Adapter
The number of incoming packets dropped by the hardware for any other reasons.
Receiver Start Count
The number of times that the receiver (receive unit) on the adapter has been started.
Examples
1. To display the device generic statistics for ent0, type:
entstat ent0
This produces output similar to the following:
ETHERNET STATISTICS (ent0) :
Device Type: Ethernet High Performance LAN Adapter
Hardware Address: 02:60:8c:2e:d0:1d
Elapsed Time: 0 days 0 hours 8 minutes 41 seconds
Transmit Statistics:
-------------------Packets: 3
Bytes: 272
Interrupts: 3
Transmit Errors: 0
Packets Dropped: 0
Max Packets on S/W
Transmit Queue:0
S/W Transmit Queue
Overflow: 0
Current S/W+H/W Transmit
Queue Length: 0
Receive Statistics:
------------------Packets: 2
Bytes: 146
Interrupts: 2
Receive Errors: 0
Packets Dropped: 0
Bad Packets: 0
Broadcast Packets: 2
CRC Errors: 0
Multicast Packets: 0
Broadcast Packets: 1
No Carrier Sense: 0
Multicast Packets: 0
DMA Underrun: 0
DMA Overrun: 0
Lost CTS Errors: 0
Alignment Errors: 0
Max Collision Errors: 0 No Resource Errors: 0
Late Collision Errors: 0 Receive Collision Errors: 0
Deferred: 0
Packet Too Short Errors: 0
SQE Test: 0
Packet Too Long Errors: 0
Timeout Errors: 0
Packets Discarded by Adapter: 0
Single Collision
Receiver Start Count: 1
Count: 0
Multiple Collision Count: 0
110
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Current HW Transmit Queue
Length: 0
General Statistics:
------------------No mbuf Errors: 0
Adapter Reset Count: 0
Driver Flags: Up Broadcast Running Simplex
2. To display the Ethernet device generic statistics and the Ethernet device-specific statistics for ent0,
type:
entstat -all
Results similar to the following will be displayed:
ETHERNET STATISTICS (ent0) :
Device Type: Ethernet High Performance LAN Adapter
Hardware Address: 02:60:8c:2e:d0:1d
Elapsed Time: 0 days 2 hours 6 minutes 30 seconds
Transmit Statistics:
Receive Statistics:
-------------------------------------Packets: 3
Packets: 2
Bytes: 272
Bytes: 146
Interrupts: 3
Interrupts: 2
Transmit Errors: 0
Receive Errors: 0
Packets Dropped: 0
Packets Dropped: 0
Max Packets on S/W
Receiver Start Count: 1
Transmit Queue:0
Bad Packets: 0
S/W Transmit Queue Overflow: 0
Current S/W+H/W Transmit Queue Length: 0
Broadcast Packets: 0
Multicast Packets: 0
No Carrier Sense: 0
DMA Underrun: 0
Lost CTS Errors: 0
Max Collision Errors: 0
Late Collision Errors: 0
Deferred: 0
SQE Test: 0
Timeout Errors: 0
Single Collision Count: 0
Multiple Collision Count:
Current HW Transmit Queue
Broadcast Packets: 0
Multicast Packets: 0
CRC Errors: 0
DMA Overrun: 0
Alignment Errors: 0
No Resource Errors: 0
Receive Collision Errors: 0
Packet Too Short Errors: 0
Packet Too Long Errors: 0
Packets Discarded by Adapter: 0
Receiver Start Count: 1
0
Length: 0
General Statistics:
------------------No mbuf Errors: 0
Adapter Reset Count: 0
Driver Flags: Up Broadcast Running Simplex
Ethernet High Performance LAN Adapter Specific Statistics:
---------------------------------------------------------Receive Buffer Pool Size: 37
Transmit Buffer Pool Size: 39
In Promiscuous Mode for IP Multicast: No
Packets Uploaded from Adapter: 0
Host End-of-List Encountered: 0
82586 End-of-List Encountered: 0
Receive DMA Timeouts: 0
Adapter Internal Data: 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0
Alphabetical list of commands
111
Related Information
The optimizenet command.
errlog command
Purpose
Displays or clears the error log.
Syntax
errlog [ -ls][ -seq SequenceNumber ]| -rm Days ]
Description
The errlog command generates an error report from entries in the Virtual I/O Server error log or deletes
all entries from the error log older the number of days specified by the Days parameter. To delete all
error-log entries, specify a value of 0 for the Days parameter. If no flags are specified a summary report is
displayed.
Flags
-ls
-rm Days
-seq SequenceNumber
Displays detailed information about errors in the error log file.
Deletes error-log entries older than the number of days specified by the Days
parameter.
Displays information about a specific error in the error log file by the sequence number.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To display a complete detailed report, enter:
errlog -ls
2. To delete error-log entries older than 5 days, enter:
errlog -rm 5
3. To delete all error-log entries, enter:
errlog -rm 0
Related Information
The diagmenu command.
exportvg command
Purpose
Exports the definition of a volume group from a set of physical volumes.
Syntax
exportvg VolumeGroup
112
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Description
The exportvg command removes the definition of the volume group specified by the VolumeGroup
parameter from the system. The primary use of the exportvg command, coupled with the importvg
command, is to allow portable volumes to be exchanged between systems. Only a complete volume
group can be exported, not individual physical volumes.
Using the exportvg command and the importvg command, you can also switch ownership of data on
physical volumes shared between two processors.
Mount points longer than 128 characters will not automatically be re-mounted when the volume group is
imported using the importvg command and should not be used.
Note: A volume group that has a paging space volume on it cannot be exported.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To remove volume group vg02 from the system, type:
exportvg vg02
Note: The volume group must be deactivated before exporting.
The definition of vg02 is removed from the system and the volume group cannot be accessed.
Restrictions
Mount points longer than 128 characters should not be used.
A volume group that has a paging space volume on it cannot be exported.
Related Information
The mkvg command, the chvg command, the lsvg command, the reducevg command, the mirrorios
command, the unmirrorios command, the activatevg command, the deactivatevg command, the
importvg command, the extendvg command, and the syncvg command.
extendlv command
Purpose
Increases the size of a logical volume.
Syntax
extendlv LogicalVolume Size [ PhysicalVolume ... ]
Description
The extendlv command increases the size of the logical volume. The LogicalVolume parameter can be a
logical volume name or a logical volume ID. To limit the allocation to specific physical volumes, use the
names of one or more physical volumes in the PhysicalVolume parameter; otherwise, all the physical
volumes in a volume group are available for allocating new physical partitions.
Alphabetical list of commands
113
The Size parameter specifies the minimum size the logical volume should be increased by. When
specifying Size the following conventions must be used:
Size
Logical volume size
###M/m
### MB
###G/g
### GB
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1
Examples
1. To increase the size of the logical volume lv05 by three megabytes, type:
extendlv lv05 3M
2. To request a logical volume named lv05 with a minimum size of 10MB, type:
extendlv lv05 10M
The extendlv command will determine the number of partitions needed to create a logical volume of
at least that size.
Related Information
The mklv command, the lslv command, and the rmlv command.
extendvg command
Purpose
Adds physical volumes to a volume group.
Syntax
extendvg [ -f ] VolumeGroup PhysicalVolume ...
Description
The extendvg command increases the size of volume group by adding one or more physical volumes.
The physical volume is checked to verify that it is not already in another volume group. If the system
determines the physical volume belongs to a volume group that is activated, it exits. But if the system
detects a description area from a volume group that is not activated, it prompts you for confirmation
while continuing with the command. The previous contents of the physical volume are lost, so you must
be cautious when using the override function.
Flags
-f
Forces the physical volume to be added to the specified volume group unless the
following conditions are true:
v The physical volume is a member of another volume group in the device
configuration database.
v The physical volume is a member of the another volume group that is active.
v The physical volume is assigned to a shared memory pool (to be used as a paging
space device by a shared memory partition).
114
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
To add physical volumes hdisk3 and hdisk8 to volume group vg3, type the following command:
extendvg vg3 hdisk3 hdisk8
Related Information
The lsvg command, the chvg command, the mkvg command, the reducevg command, the mirrorios
command, the unmirrorios command, the activatevg command, the deactivatevg command, the
importvg command, the exportvg command, and the syncvg command.
fcstat command
Purpose
Displays the statistics gathered by the specified fibre channel device driver.
Syntax
To display statistics gathered by the specified fibre channel device driver:
fcstat -Device_Name
Description
The fcstat command displays the statistics gathered by the specified fibre channel device driver. It collects
the statistics using the following process:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Opens the message catalog of fcstat and checks the parameter list.
Accesses the ODM database for information that relates to the selected adapter.
Accesses the ODM database for information that relates to ports of the selected adapter.
Opens and accesses adapter statistics.
Reports statistics and exits.
Flags
Device_Name
The name of the fibre channel device, for example, fcs0.
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
Successful completion.
An error occurred.
Examples
To display the statistics for fibre channel device driver fcs0, enter:
fcstat fcs0
Alphabetical list of commands
115
Output similar to the following is displayed.
Note: The output format of various AIX commands is not always static. Do not write programs with the
expectation that the output for the fcstat command will remain as follows.
FIBRE CHANNEL STATISTICS REPORT: fcs0
Device Type: FC Adapter (df1000f9)
Serial Number: 1E313BB001
Option ROM Version: 02C82115
Firmware Version: B1F2.10A5
Node WWN: 20000000C9487B04
Port WWN: 10000000C9416DA4
FC4 Types
Supported: 0x0000010000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
Active:
0x0000010000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
Class of Service: 4
Port FC ID: 011400
Port Speed (supported): 2 GBIT
Port Speed (running):
1 GBIT
Port Type: Fabric
Seconds Since Last Reset: 345422
Transmit Statistics
------------------Frames: 1
Words: 1
Receive Statistics
-----------------Frames: 1
Words: 1
LIP Count: 1
NOS Count: 1
Error Frames: 1
Dumped Frames: 1
Link Failure Count: 1
Loss of Sync Count: 1
Loss of Signal: 1
Primitive Seq Protocol Err Count: 1
Invalid Tx Word Count: 1
Invalid CRC Count: 1
IP over FC Adapter Driver Information
No DMA Resource Count: 0
No Adapter Elements Count: 0
FC SCSI Adapter Driver Information
No DMA Resource Count: 0
No Adapter Elements Count: 0
No Command Resource Count: 0
IP over FC Traffic Statistics
Input Requests:
0
Output Requests: 0
Control Requests: 0
Input Bytes: 0
Output Bytes: 0
FC SCSI Traffic Statistics
Input Requests:
16289
Output Requests: 48930
Control Requests: 11791
Input Bytes: 128349517
Output Bytes: 209883136
Related Information
The entstat command and the netstat command.
116
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
fsck command
Purpose
Checks file system consistency and interactively repairs the file system.
Syntax
fsck [ FileSystem ... ]
Description
The fsck command checks and interactively repairs inconsistent file systems. Normally, the file system is
consistent, and the fsck command merely reports on the number of files, used blocks, and free blocks in
the file system. If the file system is inconsistent, the fsck command displays information about the
inconsistencies found and prompts you for permission to repair them. If no FileSystem is specified, all file
systems are checked.
The fsck command checks for the following inconsistencies:
v Blocks or fragments allocated to multiple files.
v i-nodes containing block or fragment numbers that overlap.
v i-nodes containing block or fragment numbers out of range.
Discrepancies between the number of directory references to a file and the link count of the file.
Illegally allocated blocks or fragments.
i-nodes containing block or fragment numbers that are marked free in the disk map.
i-nodes containing corrupt block or fragment numbers.
A fragment that is not the last disk address in an i-node. This check does not apply to compressed file
systems.
v Files larger than 32KB containing a fragment. This check does not apply to compressed file systems.
v Size checks:
– Incorrect number of blocks.
v
v
v
v
v
– Directory size not a multiple of 512 bytes.
Note: These checks do not apply to compressed file systems.
v Directory checks:
– Directory entry containing an i-node number marked free in the i-node map.
– i-node number out of range.
– Dot (.) link missing or not pointing to itself.
– Dot dot (..) link missing or not pointing to the parent directory.
– Files that are not referenced or directories that are not reachable.
v Inconsistent disk map.
v Inconsistent i-node map.
In addition to its messages, the fsck command records the outcome of its checks and repairs through its
exit value. This exit value can be any sum of the following conditions:
0
All checked file systems are now okay.
2
The fsck command was interrupted before it could complete checks or repairs.
4
The fsck command changed the file system; the user must restart the system
immediately.
Alphabetical list of commands
117
The file system contains unrepaired damage.
8
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To check a file system, enter:
fsck /dev/hd1
This command checks the unmounted file system located on the /dev/hd1 device.
ftp command
Purpose
Transfers files between a local and a remote host.
Syntax
ftp [ -d ] [ -g ] [ -i ] [ -n ] [ -v ] [ -f ] [ -k realm] [-q[-C]][ HostName [ Port ] ]
Description
The ftp command uses the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) to transfer files between the local host and a
remote host or between two remote hosts.
The FTP protocol allows data transfer between hosts that use dissimilar file systems. Although the
protocol provides a high degree of flexibility in transferring data, it does not attempt to preserve file
attributes (such as the protection mode or modification times of a file) that are specific to a particular file
system. Moreover, the FTP protocol makes few assumptions about the overall structure of a file system
and does not provide or allow such functions as recursively copying subdirectories.
Issuing Subcommands
At the ftp> prompt, you can enter subcommands to perform tasks such as listing remote directories,
changing the current local and remote directory, transferring multiple files in a single request, creating
and removing directories, and escaping to the local shell to perform shell commands. See the
Subcommands section for a description of each subcommand.
If you execute the ftp command and do not specify the HostName parameter for a remote host, the ftp
command immediately displays the ftp> prompt and waits for an ftp subcommand. To connect to a
remote host, execute the open subcommand. When the ftp command connects to the remote host, the ftp
command then prompts for the login name and password before displaying the ftp> prompt again. The
ftp command is unsuccessful if no password is defined at the remote host for the login name.
The ftp command interpreter, which handles all subcommands entered at the ftp> prompt, provides
facilities that are not available with most file-transfer programs, such as:
v Handling file-name parameters to ftp subcommands
v Collecting a group of subcommands into a single subcommand macro
v Loading macros from a $HOME/.netrc file
These facilities help simplify repetitive tasks and allow you to use the ftp command in unattended mode.
118
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
The command interpreter handles file-name parameters according to the following rules:
v If a - (hyphen) is specified for the parameter, standard input (stdin) is used for read operations and
standard output (stdout) is used for write operations.
v If the preceding check does not apply and file-name expansion is enabled (see the -g flag or the glob
subcommand), the interpreter expands the file name according to the rules of the C shell. When
globbing is enabled and a pattern-matching character is used in a subcommand that expects a single
file name, results may be different than expected.
For example, the append and put subcommands perform file-name expansion and then use only the
first file name generated. Other ftp subcommands, such as cd, delete, get, mkdir, rename, and rmdir,
do not perform file-name expansion and take the pattern-matching characters literally.
v For the get, put, mget, and mput subcommands, the interpreter has the ability to translate and map
between different local and remote file-name syntax styles (see the case, ntrans, and nmap
subcommands) and the ability to modify a local file name if it is not unique (see the runique
subcommand). Additionally, the ftp command can send instructions to a remote ftpd server to modify
a remote file name if it is not unique (see the sunique subcommand).
v Use double quotation marks (" ") to specify parameters that include blank characters.
Note: The ftp command interpreter does not support pipes. It also does not necessarily support
all multibyte-character file names.
To end an ftp session when you are running interactively, use the quit or bye subcommand or the End of
File (Ctrl-D) key sequence at the ftp> prompt. To end a file transfer before it has completed, press the
Interrupt key sequence. The default Interrupt key sequence is Ctrl-C. The stty command can be used to
redefine this key sequence.
The ftp command normally halts transfers being sent (from the local host to the remote host)
immediately. The ftp command halts transfers being received (from the remote host to the local host) by
sending an FTP ABOR instruction to the remote FTP server and discarding all incoming file transfer
packets until the remote server stops sending them. If the remote server does not support the ABOR
instruction, the ftp command does not display the ftp> prompt until the remote server has sent all of the
requested file. Additionally, if the remote server does something unexpected, you may need to end the
local ftp process.
Security and Automatic Login
If Standard is the current authentication method:
The ftp command also handles security by sending passwords to the remote host and permits automatic
login, file transfers, and logoff.
If you execute the ftp command and specify the host name (HostName) of a remote host, the ftp
command tries to establish a connection to the specified host. If the ftp command connects successfully,
the ftp command searches for a local $HOME/.netrc file in your current directory or home directory. If
the file exists, the ftp command searches the file for an entry initiating the login process and command
macro definitions for the remote host. If the $HOME/.netrc file or automatic login entry does not exist the
ftp command prompts the user for a user name and password. The command displays the prompt
whether or not the HostName parameter is specified on the command line.
Note: The queuing system does not support multibyte host names.
If the ftp command finds a $HOME/.netrc automatic login entry for the specified host, the ftp command
attempts to use the information in that entry to log in to the remote host. The ftp command also loads
any command macros defined in the entry. In some cases (for example, when the required password is
not listed in an automatic login entry), the ftp command prompts for the password before displaying the
ftp> prompt.
Alphabetical list of commands
119
Once the ftp command completes the automatic login, the ftp command executes the init macro if the
macro is defined in the automatic login entry. If the init macro does not exist or does not contain a quit
or bye subcommand, the ftp command then displays the ftp> prompt and waits for a subcommand.
Note: The remote user name specified either at the prompt or in a $HOME/.netrc file must exist and
have a password defined at the remote host. Otherwise, the ftp command fails.
If Kerberos 5 is the current authentication method:
The ftp command will use the extensions to ftp specifications as defined in IETF draft document
"draft-ietf-cat-ftpsec-09.txt". The FTP security extensions will be implemented using the Generic Security
Service API (GSSAPI) security mechanism. The GSSAPI provides services independent to the underlying
security and communication mechanism. The GSSAPI is defined in rfc 1508 and 1509.
The ftp command will use the AUTH and ADAT commands to authenticate with the ftpd daemon. If
both support Kerberos authentication, then they will use the local users DCE credentials to authenticate
the user on the remote system. If this fails and Standard authentication is configured on both systems, the
process described above will be used.
The HostName parameter is the name of the host machine to which files are transferred. The optional Port
parameter specifies the ID of the port through which to transmit. (The /etc/services file specifies the
default port.)
Flags
-C
-d
Allows the user to specify that the outgoing file sent using the send_file command must be cached
in the Network Buffer Cache (NBC). This flag cannot be used unless the -q flag is specified. This
flag is only applicable when a file is being sent out in the binary mode with no protection.
Sends debugging information about ftp command operations to the syslogd daemon. If you specify
the -d flag, you must edit the /etc/syslog.conf file and add one of the following entries:
user.info FileName
OR
user.debug FileName
Note: The syslogd daemon debug level includes info level messages.
-g
-i
-n
-q
-v
-f
120
If you do not edit the /etc/syslog.conf file, no messages are produced. After changing the
/etc/syslog.conf file, run the refresh -s syslogd or kill -1 SyslogdPID command to inform the syslogd
daemon of the changes to its configuration file. For more information about debug levels, refer to
the /etc/syslog.conf file. Also, refer to the debug subcommand.
Disables the expansion of metacharacters in file names. Interpreting metacharacters can be referred
to as expanding (sometimes called globbing) a file name. See the glob subcommand.
Turns off interactive prompting during multiple file transfers. See the prompt , mget , mput, and
mdelete subcommands for descriptions of prompting during multiple file transfers.
Prevents an automatic login on the initial connection. Otherwise, the ftp command searches for a
$HOME/.netrc entry that describes the login and initialization process for the remote host. See the
user subcommand.
Allows the user to specify that the send_file subroutine must be used for sending the file on the
network. This flag is only applicable when a file is being sent out in the binary mode with no
protection.
Displays all the responses from the remote server and provides data transfer statistics. This display
mode is the default when the output of the ftp command is to a terminal, such as the console or a
display.
If stdin is not a terminal, the ftp command disables verbose mode unless the user invoked the ftp
command with the -v flag or issued the verbose subcommand.
Causes the credentials to be forwarded. This flag will be ignored if Kerberos 5 is not the current
authentication method.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-k realm
Allows the user to specify the realm of the remote station if it is different from the local systems
realm. For these purposes, a realm is synonymous with a DCE cell. This flag will be ignored if
Kerberos 5 is not the current authentication method.
Subcommands
The following ftp subcommands can be entered at the ftp> prompt. Use double quotation marks(" ") to
specify parameters that include blank characters.
![Command [Parameters]]
$Macro [Parameters]
?[Subcommand]
account [Password]
append LocalFile [RemoteFile]
ascii
bell
binary
block
bye
carriage-control
case
cd RemoteDirectory
cdup
close
copylocal
cr
Invokes an interactive shell on the local host. An optional command, with one or
more optional parameters, can be given with the shell command.
Executes the specified macro, previously defined with the macdef subcommand.
Parameters are not expanded.
Displays a help message describing the subcommand. If you do not specify a
Subcommand parameter, the ftp command displays a list of known subcommands.
Sends a supplemental password that a remote host may require before granting
access to its resources. If the password is not supplied with the command, the user is
prompted for the password. The password is not displayed on the screen.
Appends a local file to a file on the remote host. If the remote file name is not
specified, the local file name is used, altered by any setting made with the ntrans
subcommand or the nmap subcommand. The append subcommand uses the current
values for form , mode, struct, and type subcommands while appending the file.
Synonym for the type ascii subcommand.
Sounds a bell after the completion of each file transfer.
Synonym for the type binary subcommand.
Synonym for the mode block subcommand.
Ends the file-transfer session and exits the ftp command. Same as the quit
subcommand.
Synonym for the form carriage-control subcommand.
Sets a toggle for the case of file names. When the case subcommand is On, the ftp
command changes remote file names displayed in all capital letters from uppercase
to lowercase when writing them in the local directory. The default is Off (so the ftp
command writes uppercase remote file names in uppercase in the local directory).
Changes the working directory on the remote host to the specified directory.
Changes the working directory on the remote host to the parent of the current
directory.
Ends the file-transfer session, but does not exit the ftp command. Defined macros are
erased. Same as the disconnect subcommand.
Toggles local copy. copylocal defaults to off. An effort is made by ftp to make sure
you do not zero out a file by ftp'ing it to itself (eg. same hostname, same pathname).
Turning copylocal ON bypasses this check.
Strips the carriage return character from a carriage return and line-feed sequence
when receiving records during ASCII-type file transfers. (The ftp command
terminates each ASCII-type record with a carriage return and line feed during file
transfers.)
Records on remote hosts with operating systems other than the one you are running
can have single line feeds embedded in records. To distinguish these embedded line
feeds from record delimiters, set the cr subcommand to Off. The cr subcommand
toggles between On and Off.
Alphabetical list of commands
121
debug [0 | 1]
Toggles debug record keeping On and Off. Specify debug or debug 1 to print each
command sent to the remote host and save the restart control file. Specify debug
again, or debug 0, to stop the debug record keeping. The Ctrl-C key sequence also
saves the restart control file.
Specifying the debug subcommand sends debugging information about ftp
command operations to the syslogd daemon. If you specify the debug subcommand,
you must edit the /etc/syslog.conf file and add one of the following entries:
user.info FileName
OR
user.debug FileName
Note: The syslogd daemon debug level includes info level messages.
If you do not edit the /etc/syslog.conf file, no messages are produced. After changing
the /etc/syslog.conf file, run the refresh -s syslogd or kill -1 SyslogdPID command to
inform the syslogd daemon of the changes to its configuration file. For more
information about debug levels, refer to the /etc/syslog.conf file. Also, refer to the ftp
-d flag.
delete RemoteFile
Deletes the specified remote file.
dir [RemoteDirectory] [LocalFile] Writes a listing of the contents of the specified remote directory (RemoteDirectory) to
the specified local file (LocalFile). If the RemoteDirectory parameter is not specified, the
dir subcommand lists the contents of the current remote directory. If the LocalFile
parameter is not specified or is a - (hyphen), the dir subcommand displays the
listing on the local terminal.
disconnect
Ends the file-transfer session but does not exit the ftp command. Defined macros are
erased. Same as the close subcommand.
ebcdic
Synonym for the type ebcdic subcommand.
exp_cmd
Toggles between conventional and experimental protocol commands. The default is
off.
file
Synonym for the struct file subcommand.
form [ carriage-control |
Specifies the form of the file transfer. The form subcommand modifies the type
non-print | telnet ]
subcommand to send the file transfer in the indicated form. Valid arguments are
carriage-control, non-print, and telnet.
carriage-control
Sets the form of the file transfer to carriage-control.
non-print
Sets the form of the file transfer to non-print.
Sets the form of the file transfer to Telnet. Telnet is a Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol that opens connections to a
system.
Copies the remote file to the local host. If the LocalFile parameter is not specified, the
remote file name is used locally and is altered by any settings made by the case,
ntrans, and nmap subcommands. The ftp command uses the current settings for the
type, form, mode, and struct subcommands while transferring the file.
telnet
get RemoteFile [LocalFile]
122
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
glob
Toggles file-name expansion (globbing) for the mdelete, mget, and mput
subcommands. If globbing is disabled, file-name parameters for these subcommands
are not expanded. When globbing is enabled and a pattern-matching character is
used in a subcommand that expects a single file name, results may be different than
expected.
For example, the append and put subcommands perform file-name expansion and
then use only the first file name generated. Other ftp subcommands, such as cd,
delete, get, mkdir, rename, and rmdir, do not perform file-name expansion and take
the pattern-matching characters literally.
Globbing for the mput subcommand is done locally in the same way as for the csh
command. For the mdelete and mget subcommands, each file name is expanded
separately at the remote machine and the lists are not merged. The expansion of a
directory name can be different from the expansion of a file name, depending on the
remote host and the ftp server.
To preview the expansion of a directory name, use the mls subcommand:
mls RemoteFile
hash
help [Subcommand]
image
lcd [Directory]
local M
ls [RemoteDirectory] [LocalFile]
macdef Macro
To transfer an entire directory subtree of files, transfer a tar archive of the subtree in
binary form, rather than using the mget or mput subcommand.
Toggles hash sign (#) printing. When the hash subcommand is on, the ftp command
displays one hash sign for each data block (1024 bytes) transferred.
Displays help information. See the ? subcommand.
Synonym for the type image subcommand.
Changes the working directory on the local host. If you do not specify a directory,
the ftp command uses your home directory.
Synonym for the type local M subcommand.
Writes an abbreviated file listing of a remote directory to a local file. If the
RemoteDirectory parameter is not specified, the ftp command lists the current remote
directory. If the LocalFile parameter is not specified or is a - (hyphen), the ftp
command displays the listing on the local terminal.
Defines a subcommand macro. Subsequent lines up to a null line (two consecutive
line feeds) are saved as the text of the macro. Up to 16 macros, containing at most
4096 characters for all macros, can be defined. Macros remain defined until either
redefined or a close subcommand is executed.
The $ (dollar sign) and \ (backslash) are special characters in ftp macros. A $ symbol
followed by one or more numbers is replaced by the corresponding macro parameter
on the invocation line (see the $ subcommand). A $ symbol followed by the letter i
indicates that the macro is to loop, with the $i character combination being replaced
by consecutive parameters on each pass.
mdelete RemoteFiles
mdir [RemoteDirectories
LocalFile]
The first macro parameter is used on the first pass, the second parameter is used on
the second pass, and so on. A \ symbol prevents special treatment of the next
character. Use the \ symbol to turn off the special meanings of the $ and \.
(backslash period) symbols.
Expands the files specified by the RemoteFiles parameter at the remote host and
deletes the remote files.
Expands the directories specified by the RemoteDirectories parameter at the remote
host and writes a listing of the contents of those directories to the file specified in the
LocalFile parameter. If the RemoteDirectories parameter contains a pattern-matching
character, the mdir subcommand prompts for a local file if none is specified. If the
RemoteDirectories parameter is a list of remote directories separated by blanks, the
last argument in the list must be either a local file name or a - (hyphen).
If the LocalFile parameter is - (hyphen), the mdir subcommand displays the listing on
the local terminal. If interactive prompting is on (see the prompt subcommand), the
ftp command prompts the user to verify that the last parameter is a local file and
not a remote directory.
Alphabetical list of commands
123
mget RemoteFiles
mkdir [RemoteDirectory]
mls [RemoteDirectories
LocalFile]
mode [ stream | block ]
Expands the RemoteFiles parameter at the remote host and copies the indicated
remote files to the current directory on the local host. See the glob subcommand for
more information on file-name expansion. The remote file names are used locally
and are altered by any settings made by the case, ntrans, and nmap subcommands.
The ftp command uses the current settings for the form, mode, struct, and type
subcommands while transferring the files.
Creates the directory specified in the RemoteDirectory parameter on the remote host.
Expands the directories specified in the RemoteDirectories parameter at the remote
host and writes an abbreviated file listing of the indicated remote directories to a
local file. If the RemoteDirectories parameter contains a pattern-matching character, the
mls subcommand prompts for a local file if none is specified. If the RemoteDirectories
parameter is a list of remote directories separated by blanks, the last argument in the
list must be either a local file name or a - (hyphen).
If the LocalFile parameter is - (hyphen), the mls subcommand displays the listing on
the local terminal. If interactive prompting is on (see the prompt subcommand), the
ftp command prompts the user to verify that the last parameter is a local file and
not a remote directory.
Sets file-transfer mode. If an argument is not supplied, the default is stream.
block
Sets the file-transfer mode to block.
stream Sets the file-transfer mode to stream.
modtime
mput [LocalFiles]
nlist [RemoteDirectory]
[LocalFile]
124
Shows the last modification time of the specified file on the remote machine. If the
ftp command is not connected to a host prior to execution, the modtime
subcommand terminates with an error message. The ftp command ignores parameter
beyond the first parameter. If the FileName parameter is not specified, the ftp
command prompts for a file name. If no file name is given, the ftp command sends
a usage message to standard output and terminates the subcommand.
If the name specified by the FileName parameter exists on the remote host, and the
name specifies a file, then the ftp command sends a message containing the last
modification time of the file to standard output and terminates the subcommand. If
FileName specifies a directory, the ftp command sends an error message to standard
output and terminates the subcommand.
Note: The modtime subcommand interprets metacharacters when allowed.
Expands the files specified in the LocalFiles parameter at the local host and copies the
indicated local files to the remote host. See the glob subcommand for more
information on file-name expansion. The local file names are used at the remote host
and are altered by any settings made by the ntrans and nmap subcommands. The
ftp command uses the current settings for the type, form, mode, and struct
subcommands while transferring the files.
Writes a listing of the contents of the specified remote directory (RemoteDirectory) to
the specified local file (LocalFile). If the RemoteDirectory parameter is not specified, the
nlist subcommand lists the contents of the current remote directory. If the LocalFile
parameter is not specified or is a - (hyphen), the nlist subcommand displays the
listing on the local terminal.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
nmap [InPattern OutPattern]
Turns the file-name mapping mechanism On or Off. If no parameters are specified,
file-name mapping is turned off. If parameters are specified, source file names are
mapped for the mget and mput subcommands and for the get and put
subcommands when the destination file name is not specified. This subcommand is
useful when the local and remote hosts use different file-naming conventions or
practices. Mapping follows the pattern set by the InPattern and OutPattern
parameters.
The InPattern parameter specifies the template for incoming file names, which may
have already been processed according to the case and ntrans settings. The template
variables $1 through $9 can be included in the InPattern parameter. All characters in
the InPattern parameter, other than the $ (dollar sign) and the \$ (backslash, dollar
sign), are treated literally and are used as delimiters between InPattern variables. For
example, if the InPattern parameter is $1.$2 and the remote file name is mydata.dat,
the value of $1 is mydata and the value of $2 is dat.
The OutPattern parameter determines the resulting file name. The variables $1
through $9 are replaced by their values as derived from the InPattern parameter, and
the variable $0 is replaced by the original file name. Additionally, the sequence
[Sequence1,Sequence2] is replaced by the value of Sequence1, if Sequence1 is not null;
otherwise, it is replaced by the value of Sequence2. For example, the subcommand:
nmap $1.$2.$3 [$1,$2].[$2,file]
non-print
ntrans [InCharacters
[OutCharacters]]
would yield myfile.data from myfile.data or myfile.data.old, myfile.file from
myfile, and myfile.myfile from .myfile. Use the \ (backslash) symbol to prevent
the special meanings of the $ (dollar sign), [ (left bracket), ] (right bracket), and ,
(comma) in the OutPattern parameter.
Synonym for the form non-print subcommand.
Turns the file-name character translation mechanism On and Off. If no parameters
are specified, character translation is turned off. If parameters are specified,
characters in source file names are translated for mget and mput subcommands and
for get and put subcommands when the destination file name is not specified.
This subcommand is useful when the local and remote hosts use different
file-naming conventions or practices. Character translation follows the pattern set by
the InCharacters and OutCharacters parameter. Characters in a source file name
matching characters in the InCharacters parameter are replaced by the corresponding
characters in the OutCharacters parameter.
open HostName [Port]
passive
private
prompt
protect
If the string specified by the InCharacters parameter is longer than the string
specified by the OutCharacters parameter, the characters in the InCharacters parameter
are deleted if they have no corresponding character in the OutCharacters parameter.
Establishes a connection to the FTP server at the host specified by the HostName
parameter. If the optional port number is specified, the ftp command attempts to
connect to a server at that port. If the automatic login feature is set (that is, the -n
flag was not specified on the command line), the ftp command attempts to log in the
user to the FTP server.
You must also have a $HOME/.netrc file with the correct information in it and the
correct permissions set. The .netrc file must be in your home directory.
Toggles passive mode for file transfers. When a file transfer command (such as get,
mget, put, or mput) is invoked with passive mode off, the ftp server opens a data
connection back to the client. In passive mode, the client opens data connections to
the server when sending or receiving data.
Sets the protection level to "private." At this level, data is integrity and confidentially
protected.
Toggles interactive prompting. If interactive prompting is on (the default), the ftp
command prompts for verification before retrieving, sending, or deleting multiple
files during the mget, mput, and mdelete subcommands. Otherwise, the ftp
command acts accordingly on all files specified.
This command returns the current level of protection.
Alphabetical list of commands
125
proxy [Subcommand]
Executes an ftp command on a secondary control connection. This subcommand
allows the ftp command to connect simultaneously to two remote FTP servers for
transferring files between the two servers. The first proxy subcommand should be an
open subcommand to establish the secondary control connection. Enter the proxy ?
subcommand to see the other ftp subcommands that are executable on the secondary
connection.
The following subcommands behave differently when prefaced by the proxy
subcommand:
v The open subcommand does not define new macros during the automatic login
process.
v The close subcommand does not erase existing macro definitions.
v The get and mget subcommands transfer files from the host on the primary
connection to the host on the secondary connection.
v The put, mput, and append subcommands transfer files from the host on the
secondary connection to the host on the primary connection.
v The restart subcommand can be handled by the proxy command.
v The status subcommand displays accurate information.
put LocalFile [RemoteFile]
pwd
quit
quote String
record
recv RemoteFile [LocalFile]
reinitialize
remotehelp [Subcommand]
rename FromName ToName
reset
restart get | put | append
rmdir RemoteDirectory
runique
126
File transfers require that the FTP server on the secondary connection must support
the PASV (passive) instruction.
Stores a local file on the remote host. If you do not specify the RemoteFile parameter,
the ftp command uses the local file name to name the remote file, and the remote
file name is altered by any settings made by the ntrans and nmap subcommands.
The ftp command uses the current settings for the type, form, mode, and struct
subcommands while transferring the files.
Displays the name of the current directory on the remote host.
Closes the connection and exits the ftp command. Same as the bye subcommand.
Sends the string specified by the String parameter verbatim to the remote host.
Execute the remotehelp or quote help subcommand to display a list of valid values
for the String parameter.
Note: "Quoting" commands that involve data transfers can produce
unpredictable results.
Synonym for the struct record subcommand.
Copies the remote file to the local host. Same as the get subcommand.
Reinitializes an FTP session by flushing all I/O and allowing transfers to complete.
Resets all defaults as if a user had just started an FTP session without logging in to a
remote host.
Requests help from the remote FTP server.
Renames a file on the remote host.
Clears the reply queue. This subcommand resynchronizes the command parsing.
Restarts a file transfer at the point where the last checkpoint was made. To run
successfully, the subcommand must be the same as the aborted subcommand,
including structure, type, and form. Valid arguments are get, put, and append.
Removes the remote directory specified by the RemoteDirectory parameter at the
remote host.
(ReceiveUnique) Toggles the facility for creating unique file names for local
destination files during get and mget subcommands. If this facility is Off (the
default), the ftp command overwrites local files. Otherwise, if a local file has the
same name as that specified for a local destination file, the ftp command modifies
the specified name of the local destination file with .1. If a local file is already using
the new name, the ftp command appends the postfix .2 to the specified name. If a
local file is already using this second name, the ftp command continues
incrementing the postfix until it either finds a unique file name or reaches .99
without finding a unique file name. If the ftp command cannot find a unique file
name, the ftp command reports an error and the transfer does not take place. Note
that the runique subcommand does not affect local file names generated from a shell
command.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
safe
send LocalFile [RemoteFile]
sendport
site Args
size RemoteFile
status
stream
struct [ file | record ]
Sets the protection level to "safe." At this level, data is integrity protected.
Stores a local file on the remote host. Same as the put subcommand.
Toggles the use of FTP PORT instructions. By default, the ftp command uses a PORT
instruction when establishing a connection for each data transfer. When the use of
PORT instructions is disabled, the ftp command does not use PORT instructions for
data transfers. The PORT instruction is useful when dealing with FTP servers that
ignore PORT instructions while incorrectly indicating the instructions have been
accepted.
Displays or sets the idle time-out period, displays or sets the file-creation umask, or
changes the permissions of a file, using the chmod command. Possible values for the
Args parameter are umask and chmod.
Displays the size in bytes of the remote file specified by the RemoteFile parameter.
Displays the current status of the ftp command as well as the status of the
subcommands.
Synonym for the mode stream subcommand.
Sets the data transfer structure type. Valid arguments are file and record.
file
sunique
system
telnet
tenex
trace
type [ ascii | binary | ebcdic
| image | local M | tenex ]
Sets the data-transfer structure type to file.
record Sets the data-transfer structure type to record.
(Send/Store Unique) Toggles the facility for creating unique file names for remote
destination files during put and mput subcommands. If this facility is off (the
default), the ftp command overwrites remote files. Otherwise, if a remote file has the
same name as that specified for a remote destination file, the remote FTP server
modifies the name of the remote destination file. Note that the remote server must
support the STOU instruction.
Shows the type of operating system running on the remote machine.
Synonym for the form telnet subcommand.
Synonym for the type tenex subcommand.
Toggles packet tracing.
Sets the file-transfer type. Valid arguments are ascii, binary, ebcdic, image, local M,
and tenex. If an argument is not specified, the current type is printed. The default
type is ascii; the binary type can be more efficient than ascii.
ascii
Sets the file-transfer type to network ASCII. This type is the default. File
transfer may be more efficient with binary-image transfer. See the binary
argument for further information.
binary Sets the file-transfer type to binary image. This type can be more efficient
than an ASCII transfer.
ebcdic
Sets the file-transfer type to EBCDIC.
image
Sets the file-transfer type to binary image. This type can be more efficient
than an ASCII transfer.
local M
Sets the file-transfer type to local. The M parameter defines the decimal
number of bits per machine word. This parameter does not have a default.
user User [Password] [Account]
tenex
Sets the file-transfer type to that needed for TENEX machines.
Identifies the local user (User) to the remote FTP server. If the Password or Account
parameter is not specified and the remote server requires it, the ftp command
prompts for the password or account locally. If the Account parameter is required,
the ftp command sends it to the remote server after the remote login process
completes.
Note: Unless automatic login is disabled by specifying the -n flag on the
command line, the ftp command sends the User, Password, and Account
parameters automatically for the initial connection to the remote server. You
also need a .netrc file in your home directory in order to issue an automatic
login.
Alphabetical list of commands
127
verbose
Toggles verbose mode. When the verbose mode is on (the default), the ftp command
displays all responses from the remote FTP server. Additionally, the ftp command
displays statistics on all file transfers when the transfers complete.
Examples
1. To invoke the ftp command, log in to the system canopus, display local help information, display
remote help information, display status, toggle the bell, prompt, runique, trace, and verbose
subcommands, and then quit, enter:
$ ftp canopus
Connected to canopus.austin.century.com.
220 canopus.austin.century.com FTP server
(Version 4.1 Sat Nov 23 12:52:09 CST 1991) ready.
Name (canopus:eric): dee
331 Password required for dee.
Password:
230 User dee logged in.
ftp> help
Commands may be abbreviated. Commands are:
!
delete
mdelete
proxy
runique
$
debug
mdir
sendport
send
account
dir
mget
put
size
append
disconnect
mkdir
pwd
status
ascii
form
mls
quit
struct
bell
get
mode
quote
sunique
binary
glob
modtime
recv
system
bye
hash
mput
remotehelp
tenex
case
help
nmap
rstatus
trace
cd
image
nlist
rhelp
type
cdup
lcd
ntrans
rename
user
close
ls
open
reset
verbose
cr
macdef
prompt
rmdir
?
clear
private
protect
safe
ftp> remotehelp
214-The following commands are recognized(* =>’s unimplemented).
USER PORT
RETR
MSND* ALLO
DELE
SITE* XMKD
CDUP
PASS PASV
STOR
MSOM* REST* CWD
STAT* RMD
XCUP
ACCT* TYPE
APPE
MSAM* RNFR
XCWD
HELP
XRMD
STOU
REIN* STRU
MLFL* MRSQ* RNTO
LIST
NOOP
PWD
QUIT MODE
MAIL* MRCP* ABOR
NLST
MKD
XPWD
AUTH ADAT
PROT
PBSZ
MIC
ENC
CCC
214 Direct comments to [email protected].
ftp> status
Connected to canopus.austin.century.com.
No proxy connection.
Mode: stream; Type: ascii; Form: non-print; Structure: file
Verbose: on; Bell: off; Prompting: on; Globbing: on
Store unique: off; Receive unique: off
Case: off; CR stripping: on
Ntrans: off
Nmap: off
Hash mark printing: off; Use of PORT cmds: on
ftp> bell
Bell mode on.
ftp> prompt
Interactive mode off.
ftp> runique
Receive unique on.
ftp> trace
Packet tracing on.
ftp> verbose
Verbose mode off.
ftp> quit
$
128
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
2. To invoke the ftp command, log in to the system canopus, print the working directory, change the
working directory, set the file transfer type to ASCII, send a local file to the remote host, change the
working directory to the parent directory, and then quit, enter:
$ ftp canopus
Connected to canopus.austin.century.com.
220 canopus.austin.century.com FTP server
(Version 4.1 Sat Nov 23 12:52:09 CST 1991) ready.
Name (canopus:eric): dee
331 Password required for dee.
Password:
230 User dee logged in.
ftp> pwd
257 "/home/dee" is current directory.
ftp> cd desktop
250 CWD command successful.
ftp> type ascii
200 Type set to A.
ftp> send typescript
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opening data connection for typescript (128.114.4.99,1412).
226 Transfer complete.
ftp> cdup
250 CWD command successful.
ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.
$
3. To invoke the ftp command with automatic logon (using the .netrc file), open a session with the
system canopus, log in, change the working directory to the parent directory, print the working
directory, list the contents of the current directory, delete a file, write a listing of the contents of the
current directory to a local file, close the session, and then quit, enter:
$ ftp canopus
Connected to canopus.austin.century.com.
220 canopus.austin.century.com FTP server
(Version 4.1 Sat Nov 23 12:52:09 CST 1991) ready.
331 Password required for dee.
230 User dee logged in.
ftp> cdup
250 CWD command successful.
ftp> pwd
257 "/home" is current directory.
ftp> dir
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opening data connection for /usr/bin/ls (128.114.4.99,1407)
(0 bytes).
total 104
drwxr-xr-x
2 system
32 Feb 23 17:55 bin
Drwxr-xr-x 26 rios
4000 May 30 17:18 bin1
drwxr-xr-x
2 system
32 Feb 23 17:55 books
drwxrwxrwx 18 rios
1152 Jun 5 13:41 dee
-r--r--r-1 system
9452 May 17 12:21 filesystems
drwxr-xr-x
2 system
32 Feb 23 17:55 jim
drwxr-xr-x
5 system
80 Feb 23 17:55 krs
drwxrwxrwx
2 rios
16432 Feb 23 17:36 lost+found
-rwxr-xr-x
1 rios
3651 May 24 16:45 oldmail
drwxr-xr-x
2 system
256 Feb 23 17:55 pubserv
drwxrwxrwx
2 system
144 Feb 23 17:55 rein989
drwxr-xr-x
2 system
112 Feb 23 17:55 reinstall
226 Transfer complete.
ftp> delete oldmail
250 DELE command successful.
ftp> mdir /home/dee/bin binlist
output to local-file: binlist? y
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opening data connection for /usr/bin/ls (128.114.4.99,1408) (0 bytes).
226 Transfer complete.
Alphabetical list of commands
129
ftp> close
221 Goodbye.
ftp> quit
$
Files
Contains the sample .netrc file.
Contains configuration information for the syslogd daemon.
/usr/samples/tcpip/netrc
/etc/syslog.conf
Related Information
The stty command.
grep command
Purpose
Searches for a pattern in a file.
Syntax
grep [ -E | -F ] [ -i ] [ -h ] [ -H ] [ -L ] [ -r | -R ] [ -s ] [ -v ] [ -w ] [ -x ] [ -y ] [ [ [ -b ] [ -n ] ] | [ -c | -l |
-q ] ] [ -p [ Separator ] ] { [ -e PatternList ... ] [ -f PatternFile ... ] | PatternList ... } [ File ... ]
Description
The grep command searches for the pattern specified by the Pattern parameter and writes each matching
line to standard output. The patterns are limited regular expressions in the style of the ed or egrep
command. The grep command uses a compact non-deterministic algorithm.
The grep command displays the name of the file containing the matched line if you specify more than
one name in the File parameter. Characters with special meaning to the shell ($, *, [, |, ^, (, ), \ ) must be
in quotation marks when they appear in the Pattern parameter. When the Pattern parameter is not a
simple string, you usually must enclose the entire pattern in single quotation marks. In an expression
such as [a-z], the - (minus sign) cml specifies a range, according to the current collating sequence. A
collating sequence may define equivalence classes for use in character ranges. If no files are specified,
grep assumes standard input.
Notes:
1. Do not run the grep command on a special file because it produces unpredictable results.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Input lines should not contain the NULL character.
Input files should end with the newline character.
The newline character will not be matched by the regular expressions.
Although some flags can be specified simultaneously, some flags override others. For example,
the -l option takes precedence over all other flags. And if you specify both the -E and -F flags,
the last one specified takes priority.
Flags
-b
-c
130
Precedes each line by the block number on which it was found. Use this flag to
help find disk block numbers by context. The -b flag cannot be used with input
from stdin or pipes.
Displays only a count of matching lines.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-E
-e PatternList
-F
-f PatternFile
-h
-H
-i
-l
-L
-n
-p[Separator]
-q
-r
-R
-s
-v
-w
-x
-y
PatternList
File
Treats each pattern specified as an extended regular expression (ERE). A NULL
value for the ERE matches every line.
Specifies one or more search patterns. This works like a simple pattern but is useful
when the pattern begins with a - (minus). Patterns should be separated by a
new-line character. A NULL pattern can be specified by two adjacent new-line
characters or a quotation mark followed by a new-line character ("\n). Each pattern
is treated like a basic regular expression (BRE) unless the -E or -F flag is also
specified. Multiple -e and -f flags are accepted by grep. All of the specified patterns
are used when matching lines, but the order of evaluation is unspecified.
Treats each specified pattern as a string instead of a regular expression. A NULL
string matches every line.
Specifies a file containing search patterns. Each pattern should be separated by a
new-line character, and an empty line is considered a NULL pattern. Each pattern is
treated like a basic regular expression (BRE), unless the -E or -F flag is also
specified.
Prevents the name of the file containing the matching line from being appended to
that line. Suppresses file names when multiple files are specified.
If the -r or -R option is specified and a symbolic link referencing a file of type
directory is specified on the command line, grep will search the files of the
directory referenced by the symbolic link and all the files in the file hierarchy below
it.
Ignores the case (uppercase or lowercase) of letters when making comparisons.
Lists just the names of files (once) which contain matching lines. Each file name is
separated by a new-line character. If standard input is searched, a path name of
(StandardInput) is returned. The -l flag with any combination of the -c and -n flags
behaves like the -l flag only.
If the -r or -R option is specified and a symbolic link referencing a file of type
directory is specified on the command line or encountered during the traversal of a
file hierarchy, grep shall search the files of the directory referenced by the symbolic
link and all the files in the file hierarchy below it. If both -H and -L are specified,
the last option specified on the command line takes effect.
Precedes each line with the relative line number in the file. Each file starts at line 1,
and the line counter is reset for each file processed.
Displays the entire paragraph containing matched lines. Paragraphs are delimited by
paragraph separators, as specified by the Separator parameter, which are patterns in
the same form as the search pattern. Lines containing the paragraph separators are
used only as separators; they are never included in the output. The default
paragraph separator is a blank line.
Suppresses all writing to standard output, regardless of matching lines. Exits with a
zero status if an input line is selected. The -q flag with any combination of the -c, -l
and -n flags behaves like the -q flag only.
Searches directories recursively. By default, links to directories are followed.
Searches directories recursively. By default, links to directories are not followed.
Suppresses error messages ordinarily written for nonexistent or unreadable files.
Other error messages are not suppressed.
Displays all lines not matching the specified pattern.
Does a word search.
Displays lines that match the specified pattern exactly with no additional characters.
Ignores the case of letters when making comparisons.
Specifies one or more patterns to be used during the search. The patterns are treated
as if they were specified using the -e flag.
Specifies a name of a file to be searched for patterns. If no File variable is given, the
standard input is used.
Alphabetical list of commands
131
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
A match was found.
No match was found.
A syntax error was found or a file was inaccessible (even if matches were found).
0
1
>1
Examples
1. To use a pattern that contains some of the pattern-matching characters *, ^, ?, [, ], \(, \), \{, and \},
enter:
grep
"^[a-zA-Z]"
pgm.s
This displays every line in pgm.s whose first character is a letter.
2. To display all lines that do not match a pattern, enter:
grep
-v "^#" pgm.s
This displays every line in pgm.s whose first character is not a # (pound sign).
3. To display all lines in the file1 file that match either the abc or xyz string, enter:
grep
-E "abc|xyz" file1
4. To search for a $ (dollar sign) in the file named test2, enter:
grep \\$ test2
The \\ (double backslash) characters are necessary in order to force the shell to pass a \$ (single
backslash, dollar sign) to the grep command. The \ (single backslash) character tells the grep
command to treat the following character (in this example the $) as a literal character rather than an
expression character. Use the fgrep command to avoid the necessity of using escape characters such as
the backslash.
5. To search recursively through /tmp to find files which have the word IBM without recursing through
links pointing to directories, type:
grep -R IBM /tmp
OR
grep -r -H IBM /tmp
6. To search recursively through /tmp to find files which have the word IBM and recurse through links as
well, type:
grep -r IBM /tmp
OR
grep -R -L IBM /tmp
Files
/usr/bin/grep
Contains the grep command.
head command
Purpose
Displays the first few lines of a file.
132
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Syntax
head [ -Count | -cNumber | -n Number ] [ File ... ]
Description
The head command writes to standard output a specified number of lines or bytes of each of the
specified files, or of the standard input. If no flag is specified with the head command, the first 10 lines
are displayed by default. The File parameter specifies the names of the input files. An input file must be a
text file. When more than one file is specified, the start of each file will look like the following:
==> filename <==
To display a set of short files, identifying each one, enter:
example% head -9999 filename1 filename2...
Flags
-Count
-c Number
-n Number
Specifies the number of lines from the beginning of each specified file to be displayed. The Count
variable must be a positive decimal integer. This flag is equivalent to the -n Number flag, but
should not be used if portability is a consideration.
Specifies the number of bytes to display. The Number variable must be a positive decimal integer.
Specifies the number of lines from the beginning of each specified file to be displayed. The number
variable must be a positive decimal integer. This flag is equivalent to the -Count flag.
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
0
>0
Successful completion.
An error occurred.
Examples
To display the first five lines of the Test file, enter:
head -5 Test
OR
head -n 5 Test
Related Information
The tail command.
hostmap command
Purpose
Directly manipulates address-mapping entries in the system configuration database.
Alphabetical list of commands
133
Syntax
To Add an Address-to-Host Name Mapping
hostmap -addr IPAddress -host HostName...
To Delete an Address-to-Host Name Mapping
hostmap -rm IPAddress
To Show all Address-to-Host Name Mappings
hostmap -ls
Description
The hostmap low-level command adds, deletes, or lists address-mapping entries in the system
configuration database. Entries in the database are used to map an Internet Protocol (IP) address (local or
remote) to its equivalent host names.
An Internet Protocol (IP) address of a given local or remote host may be associated with one or more host
names. Represent an IP address in dotted decimal format. Represent a host name as a string with a
maximum length of 255 characters, and do not use any blank characters.
Note:
1. Valid host names or alias host names must contain at least one alphabetic character. If you choose to
specify a host name or alias that begins with an x followed by any hexadecimal digit (0-f), the host
name or alias must also contain at least one additional letter that cannot be expressed as a
hexadecimal digit. The system interprets a leading x followed by a hexadecimal digit as the base 16
representation of an address unless there is at least one character in the host name or alias that is not
a hexadecimal digit. Thus, xdeer would be a valid host name, whereas xdee would not.
2. The hostmap command does not recognize the following addresses: .08, .008, .09, and .009. Addresses
with leading zeros are interpreted as octal, and numerals in octal cannot contain 8s or 9s.
Flags
-addr IPAddress
-host HostName...
-ls
-rm IPAddress
Adds an IP address-to-host name mapping entry for the
given Internet Protocol address in the database. Specify
the host names with the -host flag.
Specifies a list of host names. Entries in the list should be
separated by blanks.
Shows all entries in the database.
Deletes the IP address-to-host name mapping entry in the
database that corresponds to the given address specified
by the IPAddress variable.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To add an entry in the database associating an address with a series of host names, enter the
command in the following format:
hostmap
134
-addr 192.100.201.7
-host alpha bravo charlie
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
The IP address 192.100.201.7 is specified as the address of the host that has a primary host name of
alpha with synonyms of bravo and charlie.
Note: If you attempt to use .08, .008, .09, or .009 in an address to add, you will get an error message
that states "IP Address already exists," although the address is not in the database.
2. To list all entries in the database, enter the command in the following format:
hostmap -ls
Related Information
The hostname command, and the mktcpip command.
hostname command
Purpose
Sets or displays the name of the current host system.
Syntax
hostname [ HostName ]
Description
The hostname command sets or displays the name of the current host system.
Parameters
Hostname
Sets the primary name of the host.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To set the hostname to rotterdam, type:
hostname rotterdam
Related Information
The mktcpip command, the startnetsvc command, the stopnetsvc command, the cfglnagg command, the
netstat command, the entstat command, the cfgnamesrv command, the hostmap command, the
traceroute command, the ping command, the optimizenet command.
importvg command
Purpose
Imports a new volume group definition from a set of physical volumes.
Syntax
importvg [ -vg VolumeGroup ] PhysicalVolume
Alphabetical list of commands
135
Description
The importvg command makes the previously exported volume group known to the system. The
PhysicalVolume parameter specifies only one physical volume to identify the volume group; any remaining
physical volumes (those belonging to the same volume group) are found by the importvg command and
included in the import. An imported volume group is automatically activated. When a volume group
with file systems is imported, the /etc/filesystems file is updated with values for the new logical volumes
and mount points.
After importing the volume group, you must run the fsck command before the file systems can be
mounted. Care should be taken to avoid using mount point longer than 128 characters as the mount
point information would be missing from the LVCB (logical volume control block) if it is longer than 128
characters. In this case, the importvg command will not be able to update the /etc/filesystems file with
the stanza for the newly imported logical volume.
The importvg command changes the name of a logical volume if the name already exists in the system. It
prints a message and the new name to standard error, and updates the /etc/filesystems file to include the
new logical volume name.
Flags
-vg VolumeGroup
Specifies the name to use for the new volume group. If this flag is not used, the system
automatically generates a new name.
The volume group name can only contain the following characters: "A" through "Z," "a"
through "z," "0" through "9," or "_" (the underscore), "-" (the minus sign), or "." (the
period). All other characters are considered invalid.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To import the volume group bkvg from physical volume hdisk07, type:
importvg -vg bkvg hdisk07
The volume group bkvg is made known to the system.
Restrictions
Mount points cannot be longer than 128 characters.
Related Information
The activatevg command, the chvg commands, the deactivatevg command, the exportvg command, the
extendvg command, the lsvg command, the mirrorios command, the mkvg command, the syncvg
command, and the unmirrorios command.
installios command
Purpose
Installs the Virtual I/O Server. This command is run from the HMC.
136
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Syntax
installios [ -p partition_name -i ipaddr or hostname -S subnet_mask -g gateway -d path -s system_name -m
mac_address -r profile [-n] [-P speed] [-D duplex] [-l language ] ] [-t] | -u
Description
The installios command installs the Virtual I/O Server. It must be run from the HMC. All of the flags are
optional. If no flags are provided, the installios wizard will be invoked and the user will be prompted to
interactively enter the information contained in the flags.
Flags
-s
-p
-r
-d
-i
-S
-g
-m
-P
-D
-n
-l
-t
-u
Specifies the managed system. The name of the managed system maintained by the
HMC. This name must match the name shown on the HMC, not a host name.
Specifies the partition name. The name of the LPAR that will be installed with Virtual
I/O Server. This partition must be of type Virtual I/O Server and the name given for
it must match the name shown on the HMC, not a host name.
Specifies the profile name. The name of the profile that contains the hardware resources
being installed to.
Specifies the path to installation images. Either /dev/cdrom or the path to a system
backup of the Virtual I/O Server created by the backupios command. The path may
also specify a remote location mountable by NFS such as hostname:/path_to_backup
Specifies the client IP address. The IP address with which the client's network interface
will be configured for network installation of the Virtual I/O Server operating system.
Specifies the client subnet mask. The subnet mask with which the client's network
interface will be configured for network installation of the Virtual I/O Server operating
system.
Specifies the client gateway. The default gateway that the client will use during
network installation of the Virtual I/O Server operating system.
Specifies the client MAC address. The MAC address of the client network interface
through which the network installation of the Virtual I/O Server will take place.
Specifies speed (optional) The communication speed with which to configure the
client's network interface. This value can be 10, 100, or 1000, and is 100 by default if
this flag is not specified.
Specifies duplex (optional). The duplex setting with which to configure the client's
network interface. This value can be full or half and is set to full by default if this
flag is not specified.
Specifies not to configure the client's network interface (optional): If this flag is
specified, then the client's network interface will not be configured with the IP settings
specified in the flags given to this command after the installation has completed.
Specifies language (optional): The language in which the license agreement will be
displayed before the installation. Upon viewing the license, a prompt will be shown
asking if the license is to be accepted. If the prompt is answered with y, then the
installation will proceed and the Virtual I/O Server license will be automatically
accepted after the installation. If the prompt is answered with n, then the installios
command will exit and the installation will not proceed. If this flag is not specified,
then the installation will proceed, but the Virtual I/O Server will not be usable until the
license is manually accepted after the installation.
Specifies to migrate the Virtual I/O Server. This option creates network installation
management (NIM) resources to be used for the migration and requires a Virtual I/O
Server migration DVD.
Unconfigure installios (optional). Will manually unconfigure the installios installation
resources. This flag is only needed if a problem occurs during the installation and
installios does not automatically unconfigure itself.
Alphabetical list of commands
137
invscout command
Purpose
Surveys the host system for currently installed microcode or Vital Product Data (VPD).
Syntax
invscout [-vpd | -report] [-model Type-Model] [-serial SerialNumber]
invscout -version
invscout -rpm rpmPackage rpmOption ...
invscout -install Device [-file FileName]
Description
The invscout command executes one instance of the stand alone version of the Inventory Scout process.
The invscout command starts the server daemon side of a client-server version. The Inventory scout
process supports two survey types:
v Microcode Survey
v Vital Product Data (VPD) Survey
Flags
-file FileName
-install Device
-model Type-Model
-report
-rpm rpmPackage
-serial SerialNumber
-version
-vpd
Specifies the location of the upgrade.
Installs microcode for a given device.
Machine type and model. For a VPD survey, allows input of the host platform machine
type and model for hosts that use this information.
For a Microcode Survey, sends a copy of the formatted text report file to the screen
from which the command was invoked. This flag is ignored if the -vpd flag is used.
RPM options:
-i
Installs a new package.
-e
Uninstalls a package.
-qp
Query for an uninstalled package.
--force
Used to install a package even if it is already installed.
--ignoreos
Allows installation of a package even if the operating system of the host and
binary RPM are different.
Serial number. For a VPD survey, allows input of the host serial number for hosts that
use this information.
Displays the versions of this command and of the logic database currently in use.
Sets the survey or concatenation type to VPD (the default is Microcode).
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
138
Successful completion.
An error occurred.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Examples
1. To generate report on microcode levels of all the devices, type:
invscout -report
2. To get the vpd survey of the partition. type:
invscout -vpd
ioslevel Command
Purpose
Reports the latest installed maintenance level of the system.
Syntax
ioslevel
Description
The ioslevel command displays the Virtual I/O Server level.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1
Related Information
The lssw command, the updateios command, the remote_management command, the oem_setup_env
command, and the oem_platform_level command.
ldapadd command
Purpose
Opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds, and modifies or adds entries.
Syntax
ldapadd [-a ][-b ][-c][-C][-d][-D ][-f][-g][-G][-h][-i file][-K][-m][-M][-N][-O][-p][-P][-r][-R][-U][-v][-V][-w][y][-Y][-Z]
Description
The ldapmodify command opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds, and modifies or adds entries.
The entry information is read from standard input or from file, specified using the -f option. ldapadd is
implemented as a hard link to the ldapmodify tool. When invoked as ldapadd, the -a (add new entry)
option is turned on automatically.
Flags
-a
-b
-c
-C charset
-d level
Forces add operation as default.
Supports binary values from files (old style paths).
Specifies continuous operation; do not stop processing on error.
Sets the character set name to use, as registered with Internet Assigned Numbers
Authority (IANA).
Sets the debugging level in LDAP library.
Alphabetical list of commands
139
-D dn
-f file
-g
-G realm
-h host
-i file
-K keyfile
-m mechanism
-M
-N key_name
-O maxhops
-p port
-P key_pw
-r
-R
-U username
-v
-V version
-w password
-y
-Y
-Z
Binds dn.
Specifies that entry-modification information should be read from the specified file.
Note: Standard input is used if the file is not specified.
Specifies that trailing spaces should not be stripped on attribute values.
Specifies that realm is to be used for the DIGEST-MD5 bind mechanism.
Specifies the LDAP server host name.
Specifies that read entry-modification information should be read from the specified
file.
Note: Standard input is used if the file is not specified.
Specifies the file to use for keys.
Performs SASL bind with the given mechanism.
Manages referral objects as normal entries.
Specifies the private key name to use in the keyfile.
Specifies the maximum number of referrals to follow in a sequence.
Specifies the LDAP server port number.
Specifies the keyfile password.
Forces replace operation as default.
Specifies not to chase referrals.
Specifies the user name for the DIGEST-MD5 bind mechanism.
Specifies verbose mode
Specifies the LDAP protocol version (2 or 3; default is 3).
Binds password or '?' for non-echoed prompt.
Requests proxied authorization control.
Uses a secure ldap connection (TLS).
Uses a secure ldap connection (SSL).
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Related Information
The mkldap command, and the ldapsearch command.
ldapsearch command
Purpose
Opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds, and performs a search using the filter filter.
Syntax
ldapsearch [-a ][-A ][-b basedn][-B][-C][-d][-D ][-e ][-f][-F][-G][-h][-i][-k][-K][-l][-L][-m][-M][-n][-N][-o][O][-p][-P][-q][-R][-s][-t][-T][-U][-v][-V][-w][-y][-Y][-z ][-Z][-9] filter [attributes...]
where basedn equals the base distinguished name for the search, filter equals the LDAP search filter,
options equals any other flags, and attributes equals a whitespace-separated list of attributes to retrieve. If
no attribute list is specified, all attributes are retrieved.
Note: basedn is optional if LDAP_BASEDN is set in the environment.
Description
If the ldapsearch command finds one or more entries, the attributes specified by attrs are retrieved and
the entries and values are printed to standard output. If no attrs are listed, all attributes are returned.
140
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Flags
-a deref
-A
-b basedn
-B
-C charset
-d level
-D dn
-e
-f file
-F sep
-G realm
-h host
-i file
-k
-K keyfile
-l time
-L
-m mechanism
-M
-n
-N key_name
-o attr_type
-O maxhops
-p port
-P key_pw
-q pagesize
-R
-s scope
-t scope
-T seconds
-U username
-v
-V version
-w password
-y proxydn
-Y
-zsize
-Z
-9control
Specifies how to dereference aliases (never, always, search, or find).
Retrieves attribute names only (no values).
Specifies base distinguished name (dn) for search. LDAP_BASEDN in environment is
the default.
Specifies not to suppress printing of non-ASCII values.
Sets the character set name to use, as registered with Internet Assigned Numbers
Authority (IANA).
Sets the debugging level in LDAP library.
Binds dn.
Displays LDAP library version information and quit.
Performs sequence of searches using filters in ‘file' “ must be substituted for the filter.
Prints ‘sep' between attribute names and values.
Specifies that realm is to be used for the DIGEST-MD5 bind mechanism.
Specifies the LDAP server host name.
Performs sequence of searches using filters in ‘file' “ must be substituted for the filter.
Uses server administration control on bind.
Specifies the file to use for the keys.
Specifies time limit (in seconds) for search.
Prints entries in LDIF format (-B is implied).
Performs SASL bind with the specified mechanism.
Manages referral objects as normal entries.
Shows what would be done but don't actually perform the action.
Specifies the private key name to use in the keyfile.
Sorts based on specified attribute type.
Specifies the maximum number of referrals to follow in a sequence.
Specifies the LDAP server port number.
Specifies the keyfile password.
Queries page size for paged results.
Specifies not to chase referrals.
Searches scope. The search scope can be one of the following: base, one, or sub.
Writes values to files in /tmp.
Specifies the number of seconds to wait between pages for paged results.
Specifies the user name for the DIGEST-MD5 bind mechanism.
Runs in verbose mode.
Specifies the LDAP protocol version. The version can be 2 or 3. The default is 3.
Binds password or '?' for non-echoed prompt.
Sets proxied ID for proxied authorization operation.
Uses a secure LDAP connection (TLS).
Specifies the size limit (in entries) for the search.
Uses a secure LDAP connection (SSL).
Sets the criticality for control option. The control can be one of the following options:
v s sets criticality for sorting to false
v p sets criticality for paging to false
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
To open a connection to the LDAP server and search on specific attributes, type:
ldapsearch -h vclient.host.com -D cn=admin -w adminpw -b cn=aixdata objectclass=*
Alphabetical list of commands
141
Related Information
The mkldap command and the ldapadd command.
ldfware command
Purpose
Loads the system's flash EPROM with the specified file, which must contain a valid binary flash EPROM
image, and then reboots the system.
Syntax
ldfware [ -dev Device ] -file filename
ldfware -commit
ldfware -reject
Description
Periodically, you need to install fixes for your server firmware. If you do not use an HMC to manage
your server, you must get your fixes through your operating system. If your server is not connected to
the Internet, you must obtain optical media that contains the server firmware fix and install the server
firmware fix from the optical media. The flash update image file is copied to the file system from
diskette. The user needs to provide the image on a diskette if the user does not have access to remote file
systems or any other files that are on the system. If enough space is not available, an error is reported
stating additional system memory is needed. After the file is copied, a warning screen asks for
confirmation to continue the update flash. Continuing the update flash reboots the system. The current
flash image is not saved.
After you download and install a firmware fix, the fix is temporarily installed until you install it
permanently. You might want to use the new level of firmware for a period of time to verify that it works
correctly. When you are sure that the new level of firmware works correctly, you can permanently install
the firmware fix. Be aware that if you install the firmware fix permanently (copy the temporary firmware
level from the temporary side to the permanent side, so that the temporary and permanent sides contain
the same level of firmware), you cannot return to the level that was previously on the permanent side. To
install it permanently, use the -commit flag.
Attention: The ldfware command reboots the entire system. Do not use this command if more than one
user is signed onto the system.
Flags
-commit
-dev Device
-file FileName
-reject
142
Commits the temporary image when booted from the temporary image. This effectively
causes the permanent image to be copied over by the temporary image. This flag is not
supported on all systems.
Specifies that the flash update image file is on diskette. The device_name variable
specifies the device. The default device_name is /dev/fd0.
Specifies the file name of the image file source. The flash update image file source
follows this flag. The file_name variable specifies the fully qualified path of the flash
update image file.
Rejects the temporary image when booted from the permanent image. This overwrites
the temporary image with the permanent image. This flag is not supported on all
systems.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Exit Status
The following exit codes are returned:
0
1
2
3
Completed successfully.
Command terminated due to an error.
Command was aborted by the user.
Command was aborted by the user using the F10 key.
Examples
1. To update the firmware from a local file, type the following command:
ldfware -file /tmp/firmware/latest_flash
2. To update the firmware that is on a diskette, type the following command:
ldfware -device /dev/fd0 -file latest_flash
3. To update the firmware that is on a CD device, type the following command:
mount -cd
/mnt ldfware -file /mnt/firmware/latest_flash
license command
Purpose
View and accept the license agreement.
Syntax
license { [ -view ] [ -accept ] } [ -lang Name ]
license [ -ls ]
Description
The license command is used to view and accept the Virtual I/O Server license agreement. If no flags are
specified, the current status of the license agreement is displayed. If the license has been accepted, the
date and time of acceptance is displayed.
Flags
-accept
-lang Name
-ls
-view
Accepts the license agreement.
Specifies the language-territory (locale name) that the license will be displayed in. The
default is en_US.
Lists available languages.
Displays the Virtual I/O Server license agreement.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To view the license in the en_US locale, type:
license -view
2. To accept the license in the fr_FR locale, type:
license -accept -lang fr_FR
Alphabetical list of commands
143
3. To view if the license has been accepted, type:
license
Related Information
The chlang command.
loadopt command
Purpose
Load a virtual optical media disk from the Virtual Media Repository into a virtual optical device.
Syntax
loadopt [ -f ] [ -release ] -disk FileName -vtd VirtualTargetDevice
Description
The loadopt command loads the specified virtual optical disk (FileName) into the specified virtual optical
device (VirtualTargetDevice).
Note: A particular virtual disk can only be loaded into more than one file-backed virtual optical device
simultaneously if the virtual DVD is designated as read-only. If the virtual optical device already has a
different virtual disk loaded, the command will fail unless the -f flag is specified, in which case an
implicit unload will be performed first.
Flags
-disk FileName
-f
-release
-vtd VirtualTargetDevice
Specifies the file name of the virtual media to load into the virtual optical device.
Force the media to be loaded even if the virtual optical device already has media loaded.
Forces the virtual optical device to be unlocked even if the client has a reserve on the
device.
The name of the virtual target device.
Examples
To load the virtual optical disk clientData into the virtual optical device vopt1, type the following
command:
loadopt -disk clientData -vtd vopt1
loginmsg command
Purpose
Modifies the Virtual I/O Server partition's login herald.
Syntax
loginmsg { -reset | "Herald string" }
Description
The loginmsg command sets the Virtual I/O Server partition's login herald.
144
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Flags
-reset
Reset the login message back to the system default.
Examples
1. To set the login herald to Welcome followed by login: on a separate line, type:
loginmsg "Welcome\nlogin:"
2. To reset the login herald back to the system default, type:
loginmsg -reset
IVM lpar_netboot command
Purpose
Retrieves the media access control (MAC) address and physical location code from network adapters for
a logical partition, or instructs a logical partition to do a network boot.
Syntax
To retrieve a MAC address:
lpar_netboot -M -n [-v] [-x] [-f] [-i] [-A] -t ent [-D -s Speed-d Duplex -S Server -G Gateway -C Client -K
subnetmask] partition name partition profile manage system
To perform a network boot:
lpar_netboot [-v[-x] [-f] [-i] [-g args] [-A -D | [-D] -l phys_loc | [-D] -m maddress] -t ent [-D -s Speed-d
Duplex -S Server -G Gateway -C Client -K subnetmask partition name partition profile manage system
Description
The lpar_netboot command instructs a logical partition to do a network boot by having the logical
partition send out a bootp request to a server specified with the -S flag. The server can be a network
installation management (NIM) server serving SPOT resources or any server serving network boot
images.
If the -M and -n flags are specified, the lpar_netboot command returns the MAC address and the
physical location code for a particular type of network adapter specified with the -t flag. When the -m
flag is specified, lpar_netboot boots a partition using a specific network adapter that matches the
specified MAC address. When the -l flag is specified, lpar_netboot boots a logical partition using a
specific physical location code for the network adapter that matches the specified physical location code.
The matching MAC address or physical location code is dependent on the hardware resource allocation
in the profile in which the logical partition was booted. The lpar_netboot command also requires
arguments for the partition name and the partition profile (which contains the allocated hardware
resources), and the name of the managed system in which the logical partition was defined.
Flags
-A
-C Client
-D
-d Duplex
-f
Returns all adapters of the given type.
Specifies the IP address of the machine to do a network boot.
Performs a ping test so the adapter can successfully ping the server that is specified
with the -S flag.
Specifies the duplex setting of the machine that is specified with the -C flag.
Forces a close virtual terminal session for the logical partition.
Alphabetical list of commands
145
-G Gateway
-g args
-i
-K subnetmask
-l phys_loc
-M
-m maddress
-n
-S Server
-s Speed
-t ent
-v
-x
Specifies the gateway IP address of the machine that is specified with the -C flag.
Specifies generic arguments for booting.
Forces an immediate shutdown of the partition.
Specifies the mask that the gateway should use in determining the appropriate
subnetwork for routing. The subnet mask is a set of 4 bytes, as in the Internet address.
The subnet mask consists of high bits (1s) corresponding to the bit positions of the
network and subnetwork address, and low bits (0s) corresponding to the bit positions
of the host address.
Specifies the physical location code of the network adapter to do a network boot.
Displays the network adapter MAC address and physical location code.
Specifies the MAC address of the network adapter to do a network boot.
Instructs the logical partition to not do a network boot.
Specifies the IP address of the machine to retrieve the network boot image during the
network boot.
Specifies the speed setting of the machine that is specified with the -C flag.
Specifies the type of adapter for MAC address or physical location code discovery, or
for a network boot.
Displays additional information while the command is running.
Displays debug output while the command is running.
Parameters
Parameter
Description
partition_name
Specifies the name of the partition.
partition_profile
Specifies the name of the partition profile to use.
managed_system
Specifies the name of the managed system on which the
partition is defined.
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
The command completed successfully.
An error occurred.
Security
Access Control: You must have root authority to run the lpar_netboot command.
Examples
1. To retrieve MAC address and physical location code for partition machA with logical partition profile
machA_prof on managed system test_sys, type:
lpar_netboot -M -n -t ent "machA" "machA_prof" "test_sys"
2. To do a network boot logical partition machA with a partition profile machA_prof on managed system
test_sys, type:
lpar_netboot -t ent -s auto -d auto -S 9.3.6.49 -G 9.3.6.1 -C 9.3.6.234
"machA" "machA_prof" "test_sys"
3. To do a network boot logical partition machA with the specific MAC address 00:09:6b:dd:02:e8 and
logical partition profile machA_prof on managed system test_sys, type:
OS_install -o allocate -a os_resource=my53resource myclient01
4.
To do a network boot logical partition machA with the specific physical location code
U1234.121.A123456-P1-T6 and logical partition profile machA_prof on managed system test_sys, type:
146
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
lpar_netboot -t ent -l U1234.121.A123456-P1-T6 -s auto -d auto -S 9.3.6.49
-G 9.3.6.1 -C 9.3.6.234 "machA" "machA_prof" "test_sys"
5.
To perform a ping test and do a network boot of logical partition machA with logical partition profile
machA_prof on a managed system test_sys, type:
lpar_netboot -t ent -D -s auto -d auto -S 9.3.6.49 -G 9.3.6.1 -C 9.3.6.234
"machA" "machA_prof" "test_sys"
Related Information
The installios command.
IVM lpcfgop command
Purpose
Perform a partition configuration image operation. This command is valid only in an Integrated
Virtualization Manager environment.
Syntax
To clear logical partition configuration data at next system restart:
lpcfgop -o clear [--force ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To disable logical partition configuration data at next system restart:
lpcfgop -o disable [--force ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To dump logical partition configuration data to a file:
lpcfgop -o dump [-f DumpFile] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To enable logical partition configuration data at next system restart:
lpcfgop -o enable [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The lpcfgop command performs a partition configuration image operation such as clearing, disabling,
enabling, or dumping the logical partition configuration data.
Flags
-o Operation
The type of operations:
v clear: Marks the logical partition configuration data to be cleared when the managed
system is restarted.
v disable: Marks the logical partition configuration data to be disabled when the
managed system is restarted. This will temporarily place the system back into the
factory configuration partition mode.
v dump: Dumps all logical partition configuration data from managed system firmware
to a file. This data may be used by service. Use the bkprofdata command to create
backups that can be restored.
-f DumpFile
v enable: Enables partition configuration data so that it will not be disabled or cleared
when the managed system is restarted.
The name of the file to write the dump to in the current working directory. If not
specified, the default file will be /var/adm/lpm/lparConfig.dump
Alphabetical list of commands
147
--force
-m ManagedSystem
Skip confirmation prompts for clear and disable operations.
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is not accessible by padmin.
Examples
1. Clear the partition configuration data (confirmation will be required) during the next reboot:
lpcfgop -o clear
2. Dump the logical partition configuration data to lparData.dump:
lpcfgop -o dump -f lparData.dump
Related Information
The bkprofdata command and the rstprofdata command.
ls command
Purpose
Displays the contents of a directory.
Syntax
To Display Contents of Directory or Name of File
ls [ -1 ] [ -A ] [ -C ] [ -F ] [-H | -L ] [ -N ] [ -R ] [ -X] [ -a ] [ -b ] [ -c ] [ -d ] [ -e ] [ -f ] [ -g ] [ -i ] [ -l ] [
-m ] [ -n ] [ -o ] [ -p ] [ -q ] [ -r ] [ -s ] [ -t ] [ -u ] [ -U ] [ -x ] [ File ... ]
To Display Contents of Directory
ls -f [ -C ] [ -d ] [ -i ] [ -m ] [ -s ] [ -X] [ -x ] [ -1 ] [ -U ] [ Directory ... ]
Description
The ls command writes to standard output the contents of each specified Directory parameter or the name
of each specified File parameter, along with any other information you ask for with the flags. If you do
not specify a File or Directory parameter, the ls command displays the contents of the current directory.
Specifying more than one of the options in the mutually exclusive pairs is not considered an error. The
last option specified in each pair determines the output format.
By default, the ls command displays all information in alphabetic order by file name. The collating
sequence is determined by the LANG or LC_COLLATE environment variable.
148
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
When the ls command displays the contents of a directory, it does not show entries for files whose names
begin with a . (dot) unless you use the -a or -A flag. If the command is executed by root, it uses the -A
flag by default.
There are three main ways to format the output:
v List one entry per line.
v List entries in multiple columns by specifying either the -C or -x flag. The -C flag is the default format
when output is to a tty. The ls command displays single column output if file or directory names are
too long.
v List entries in a comma-separated series by specifying the -m flag.
To determine the number of character positions in the output line, the ls command uses the COLUMNS
environment variable. If this variable is not set, the command gets the current column value of the
display. If the ls command cannot determine the number of character positions by either of these
methods, it uses a default value of 80.
The mode displayed with the -U flag is the same as with the -l flag, except for the addition of an 11th
character interpreted as follows:
E
Indicates a file has extended attributes (EA) information. The EA of a file is displayed by using the getea
command.
-
Indicates a file does not have extended attributes information.
The mode displayed with the -e and -l flags is interpreted as follows:
If the first character is:
d
b
c
l
p
s
-
The entry is a directory.
The entry is a block special file.
The entry is a character special file.
The entry is a symbolic link, and either the -N flag was specified or the symbolic link did not point to an
existing file.
The entry is a first-in,first-out (FIFO) special file.
The entry is a local socket.
The entry is an ordinary file.
The next nine characters are divided into three sets of three characters each. The first set of three
characters show the owner's permission. The next set of three characters show the permission of the other
users in the group. The last set of three characters shows the permission of anyone else with access to the
file. The three characters in each set indicate, respectively, read, write, and execute permission of the file.
Execute permission of a directory lets you search a directory for a specified file.
Permissions are indicated as follows:
r
w
x
-
Read
Write (edit)
Execute (search)
Corresponding permission not granted
The group-execute permission character is s if the file has set-group-ID mode. The user-execute
permission character is s if the file has set-user-ID mode. The last character of the mode (usually x or -) is
T if the 01000 (octal) bit of the mode is set (see the chmod command for the meaning of this mode). The
Alphabetical list of commands
149
indications of set-ID and 01000 bit of the mode are capitalized (S and T, respectively) if the
corresponding execute permission is not set. The mode t indicates that the sticky bit is on for the file or
the directory.
The mode displayed with the -e flag is the same as with the -l flag, except for the addition of an 11th
character interpreted as follows:
+
-
Indicates a file has extended security information. For example, the file may have extended ACL, TCB, or TP
attributes in the mode.
Indicates a file does not have extended security information.
When the size of the files in a directory are listed, the ls command displays a total count of blocks,
including indirect blocks.
Flags
-A
-a
-b
-c
-C
-d
-e
-E
-f
-F
-g
-H
-i
-L
150
Lists all entries except . (dot) and .. (dot-dot).
Lists all entries in the directory, including the entries that begin with a . (dot).
Displays nonprintable characters in an octal (\nnn) notation.
Uses the time of last modification of the i-node for either sorting (when used with the -t flag) or for
displaying (when used with the -l flag). This flag must be used with either the -t or -l flag, or both.
Sorts output vertically in a multicolumn format. This is the default method when output is to a terminal.
Displays only the information for the directory named. Directories are treated like files, which is helpful
when using the -l flag to get the status of a directory.
Displays the mode (including security information), number of links, owner, group, size (in bytes), time
of last modification, and name of each file. If the file is a special file, the size field contains the major and
minor device numbers. If the file is a symbolic link, the path name of the linked-to file is printed
preceded by a -> (minus, greater than) sign. The attributes of the symbolic link are displayed.
Lists space reservation, fixed extent size, and extent allocation flag information for a file. -l must be
specified with this flag.
Lists the name in each slot for each directory specified in the Directory parameter. This flag turns off the
-l, -t, -s, and -r flags, and turns on the -a flag. The order of the listing is the order in which entries appear
in the directory.
Puts a / (slash) after each file name if the file is a directory, an * (asterisk) if the file can be executed, an
= (equal sign) if the file is a socket, a | (pipe) sign if the file is a FIFO, and an @ for a symbolic link.
Note: Symbolic links are displayed with the trailing -> only if the -N flag is used or if the link
points to a nonexistent file. Otherwise, information about the target file is displayed. You can also
invoke this option by entering the ls -f command.
Displays the same information as the -l flag, except the -g flag suppresses display of the owner and
symbolic link information.
If a symbolic link referencing a file of type directory is specified on the command line, the ls command
shall evaluate the file information and file type to be those of the file referenced by the link, and not the
link itself; however, the ls command shall write the name of the link itself and not the file referenced by
the link.
Displays the i-node number in the first column of the report for each file.
Lists the file or directory contents that the link references. This is the default action. Symbolic links are
followed. If the -l option is used, the -N option becomes the default, and no symbolic links are followed.
When the -l option is used, only the -L option can override the -N default.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-l
(Lower case L) Displays the mode, number of links, owner, group, size (in bytes), and time of last
modification for each file. If the file is a special file, the size field contains the major and minor device
numbers. If the time of last modification is greater than six months ago, the time field is shown in the
format month date year where as files modified within six months the time field is shown as month date
time format.
If the file is a symbolic link, the path name of the linked-to file is printed preceded by a ->. The attributes
of the symbolic link are displayed. The -n, -g, and -o flag overrides the -l flag.
Notes:
1. A symbolically linked file is followed by an arrow and the contents of the symbolic link.
2. The performance of the ls command when used with the -l option can be improved by
executing the mkpasswd command. This is helpful when a directory contains files owned by
different users, such as the /tmp directory.
-m
-n
-N
-o
-p
-q
-r
-R
-s
-t
-U
-u
-x
-X
-1
Uses stream output format (a comma-separated series).
Displays the same information as the -l flag, except that the -n flag displays the user and the group IDs
instead of the user and group names.
Does not follow symbolic links when determining the status of a file.
Note: If both the -L and -N options are used, the last one will dominate. Also, any time a symbolic
link is given that includes a / (slash) as the final character, the link will automatically be followed
regardless of any options used.
Displays the same information as the -l flag, except the -o flag suppresses display of the group and
symbolic link information.
Puts a slash after each file name if that file is a directory. This is useful when you pipe the output of the
ls command to the pr command, as follows:
ls -p | pr -5 -t -w80
Displays nonprintable characters in file names as a ? (question mark).
Reverses the order of the sort, giving reverse alphabetic or the oldest first, as appropriate.
Lists all subdirectories recursively.
Gives size in kilobytes (including indirect blocks) for each entry.
Sorts by time of last modification (latest first) instead of by name.
Displays similar information as the -l flag. Displays the mode (including security information and named
extended attribute information), number of links, owner, group, size (in bytes), time of last modification,
and name of each file. If the file is a special file, the size field contains the major and minor device
numbers. If the file is a symbolic link, the path name of the linked-to file is printed preceded by a ->
(minus, greater than) sign. The attributes of the symbolic link are displayed.
Uses the time of the last access, instead of the time of the last modification, for either sorting (when used
with the -t flag) or for displaying (when used with the -l flag). This flag has no effect if it is not used
with either the -t or -l flag, or both.
Sorts output horizontally in a multi-column format.
Prints long user names when used with other flags that display user names. The upper limit is
determined by the max_logname ODM attribute in the PdAt and CuAt object classes. If a user name is
greater than the max_logname attribute, it will be truncated to the number of characters as specified by
the max_logname attribute, less one character.
Forces output into one-entry-per-line format. This is the default when the output is not directed to a
terminal.
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
0
>0
All files were written successfully.
An error occurred.
Alphabetical list of commands
151
Examples
1. To list all files in the current directory, type:
ls -a
This lists all files, including . (dot), .. (dot-dot), and other files with names beginning with a dot.
2. To display detailed information, type:
ls -l chap1 .profile
This displays a long listing with detailed information about chap1 and .profile.
3. To display detailed information about a directory, type:
ls -d -l .manual
manual/chap1
This displays a long listing for the directories . and manual, and for the file manual/chap1. Without the
-d flag, this would list the files in the . and manual directories instead of the detailed information
about the directories themselves.
4. To list the files in order of modification time, type:
ls -l -t
This displays a long listing of the files that were modified most recently, followed by the older files.
5. To display detailed information with expanded user and group name, type:
ls
-lX .profile
This displays a long listing with detailed information about .profile.
6. To display about whether extended attributes are set on the files in current directory, type:
ls -U
Example output:
-rwSr-x---+
-rwSr-x---E
-rw-r--r--E
----------+
----------E
-rw-r--r---
1
1
1
1
1
1
root
root
root
root
root
root
system
system
system
system
system
system
28
4
4
265
64
4
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
29
29
29
29
29
29
03:23
03:23
03:23
03:23
03:23
03:23
Contains
Contains
Contains
Contains
the ls command.
user IDs.
group IDs.
terminal information.
only_aixc
only_aixc_ea
only_ea
only_nfs4
only_nfs4_ea
only_regular
Files
/usr/bin/ls
/etc/passwd
/etc/group
/usr/share/lib/terminfo/*
Related Information
The chmod command.
lsdev command
Purpose
Displays Virtual I/O Server devices and their characteristics.
152
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Syntax
To list devices:
lsdev [ -type DeviceType... ] [ -virtual ] [ -field FieldName... ] [ -fmt Delimiter ] [-state State ]
To display information about a specific device:
lsdev { -dev DeviceName | -plc PhysicalLocationCode } [ -child ] [ -field FieldName... ] [ -fmt Delimiter ]
lsdev { -dev DeviceName | -plc PhysicalLocationCode } [ -attr [ Attribute ] | -range Attribute | -slot | -vpd |
-parent]
lsdev -vpd
lsdev -slots
Description
The lsdev command displays information about devices in the Virtual I/O Server. If no flags are
specified, a list of all devices, both physical and virtual, in the Virtual I/O Server is displayed. To list
devices, both physical and virtual, of a specific type use the -type DeviceType flag. Use the -virtual flag to
list only virtual devices. Combining both the -type and -virtual flags will list the virtual devices of the
specified type.
To display information about a specific device, use the -dev DeviceName or -plc PhysicalLocationCode. Use
either the -child, -parent, -attr, -range, -slot, or -vpd flag to specify what type of information is displayed.
If none of these flags are used, the name, status, and description of the device will be displayed.
Using the -vpd flag, without specifying a device, displays platform-specific information for all devices.
If the -fmt Delimiter flag is specified the lsdev command returns all output in a delimiter separated
format. The -state State flag limits the output to devices in the indicated state. The -slots flag produces a
list of I/O slot information for built-in adapters that are not hot-pluggable but can have dynamic LPAR
operations performed on them.
The lsdev output will be truncated to 80 characters per line, unless the -fmt flag is used. If the -fmt flag
is used, the output lines will not be truncated and line wrap may occur, based on what the terminal
window line length is set to.
Flags
-attr [Attribute ]
Displays information about attributes of a given device. If an attribute is specified, its
current value is displayed. If no attribute is specified, the following information is
displayed about all attributes for the give device:
attribute
Attribute name
value
Current value of the attribute
description
Description of the attribute
-child
-dev DeviceName
user
Whether attribute can be set by the user (TRUE/FALSE)
Displays the name, status, physical location code, and description for each child of the
specified device (-dev DeviceName or -plc PhysicalLocationCode).
Specifies the device logical name for the device for which information is listed. This
flag cannot be used with the -plc flag.
Alphabetical list of commands
153
-field FieldName
Specifies the list of fields to be displayed. The following fields are supported:
name
Device name
status
Device status
physloc
Physical location code
description
Description of the device
-fmt Delimiter
-parent
-plc PhysicalLocationCode
-range Attribute
-slot
-slots
-State State
parent
Note: The -field flag cannot be combined with the -parent, -attr, -range, -slot, or -vpd
flags.
Specifies a delimiter character to separate output fields.
Displays the name, status, physical location code, and description of the parent device
of the given device (-dev DeviceName or -plc PhysicalLocationCode).
Specifies the device physical location code for the device for which information is
listed. This flag cannot be used with the -dev flag.
Displays the allowed values for the specified attribute.
Displays the slot, description, and device name of the specified device (-dev DeviceName
or -plc PhysicalLocationCode). The device must be in a PCI hot swappable slot.
Displays a list of I/O slot information for built-in adapters that are not hot-pluggable
but can have dynamic LPAR operations performed on them.
Limits the output to devices in the specified state. The following states are supported:
0, defined
Server Virtual Adapter.
1, available
Server Virtual Adapter Physical Location Code
-type DeviceType
2, stopped
Client Partition ID
Specifies the device type. This flag can be used to restrict output to devices in the
specified types. Both physical and virtual devices are listed.
Supported types are as follows:
adapter
Lists adapters
disk
Lists disks
lv
Lists logical volumes and volume groups
optical Lists optical devices (cdrom/dvdrom)
tape
Lists tape devices
tape4vtd
Lists tape devices available for creating virtual target devices
tty
Lists tty devices
ent4sea Lists all physical Ethernet adapters and Etherchannel adapters available for
creating a shared Ethernet adapter
ven4sea
Lists all virtual Ethernet adapters available for creating shared Ethernet
adapter
ent4ip
-virtual
154
Lists all adapters over which interface can be configured.
sea
Lists all shared Ethernet adapters over which the interface can be configured.
Restricts output to virtual devices only.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Displays platform-specific information for all devices or for a single device when -dev
DeviceName or -plc PhysicalLocationCode are specified.
-vpd
Exit Status
Table 1. Command specific return codes
Return code
Description
12
Specified logical volume belongs to the operating system.
13
Specified physical or logical volume is not valid physical
or logical volume
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To list all virtual adapters and display the name and status fields, type:
lsdev -type adapter -virtual -field name status
The system displays a message similar to the following:
name
vhost0
vhost1
vhost2
ent6
ent7
ent8
ent9
status
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
2. To list all devices of type disk and display the name and physical location fields, type:
lsdev -type disk -field name physloc
The system displays a message similar to the following:
name
physloc
hdisk0 U9111.520.10004BA-T15-L5-L0
hdisk1 U9111.520.10004BA-T15-L8-L0
hdisk2 U9111.520.10004BA-T16-L5-L0
hdisk3 U9111.520.10004BA-T16-L8-L0
hdisk4 UTMP0.02E.00004BA-P1-C4-T1-L8-L0
hdisk5 UTMP0.02E.00004BA-P1-C4-T2-L8-L0
hdisk6 UTMP0.02F.00004BA-P1-C8-T2-L8-L0
hdisk7 UTMP0.02F.00004BA-P1-C4-T2-L8-L0
hdisk8 UTMP0.02F.00004BA-P1-C4-T2-L11-L0
vtscsi0 U9111.520.10004BA-V1-C2-L1
vtscsi1 U9111.520.10004BA-V1-C3-L1
vtscsi2 U9111.520.10004BA-V1-C3-L2
vtscsi3 U9111.520.10004BA-V1-C4-L1
vtscsi4 U9111.520.10004BA-V1-C4-L2
vtscsi5 U9111.520.10004BA-V1-C5-L1
3. To display the parent of a devices, type:
lsdev -dev hdisk0 -parent
The system displays a message similar to the following:
parent
scsi0
Alphabetical list of commands
155
4. To display all I/O slots that are not hot-pluggable but can have DLPAR operations performed on
them, type:
lsdev -slots
The system displays a message similar to the following:
U787A.001.DNZ00Y1-P1-C1
U787A.001.DNZ00Y1-P1-T5
U787A.001.DNZ00Y1-P1-T7
U9111.520.10DFD8C-V2-C0
U9111.520.10DFD8C-V2-C2
U9111.520.10DFD8C-V2-C4
Logical
Logical
Logical
Virtual
Virtual
Virtual
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
pci4 sisscsia0
pci3 ent0 ent1
pci2 usbhc0 usbhc1
vsa0
vhost0
Unknown
Related Information
The cfgdev command, the chdev command, the chpath command, the lsmap command, the lspath
command, the mkpath command, the mkvdev command, the rmdev command, and the rmpath
command.
lsfailedlogin command
Purpose
Lists the contents of the failed login log to the screen.
Syntax
lsfailedlogin
Description
The lsfailedlogin command dumps the contents of the failed login log. The failed login file records
unsuccessful login attempts by any user on the Virtual I/O Server.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Security
This command can only be executed by the prime administrator (padmin) user.
Examples
1. To list all failed logins, type:
lsfailedlogin
Related Information
The lsgcl command.
lsfware command
Purpose
Displays microcode and firmware levels of the system, adapters and devices.
156
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Syntax
lsfware [ -all | -dev Name ]
Description
The lsfware command displays the platform system firmware microcode level and the service processor
microcode levels, if supported. Not all systems contain a service processor, nor do all systems support
displaying the system processor level. Information on a specific device is displayed with the -dev flag.
The -all flag displays system firmware/microcode for all devices. The output from the -all flag is always
delimiter separated.
Flags
-all
-dev Name
Displays microcode level information for all supported devices.
Displays microcode level information for the named device.
Examples
1. To display the system firmware level and service processor (if present), type:
lsfware
The system displays a message similar to the following:
System Firmware level is TCP99256
2.
To display the microcode level for all supported devices, type:
lsfware -all
The system displays a message similar to the following:
sys0|system:TCP99256
rmt0|C009
scraid0|adapter:4.20.18|adapter-boot:4.00.26
raid-dasd|22:FFC #:DDYS-T0.524D3031.53393446
raid-dasd|26:FFC #:DDYS-T0.524D3031.53393446
raid-dasd|2e:FFC #:DDYS-T0.525A3034.53393243
....
lsgcl command
Purpose
Lists the contents of the global command log to the screen.
Syntax
lsgcl
Description
The lsgcl command lists the contents of the global command log (gcl). This log contains a listing of all
commands that have been executed by all Virtual I/O Server users. Each listing contains the date and
time of execution as well as the userid the command was executed from.
Global command log file format is as follows:
Alphabetical list of commands
157
Date
Time
userid
Command
Command options
mmm dd yyyy
hh:mm:ss
cccccccc
Command
Command options
span to 80 characters
then wraps to the
next row
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Security
This command can only be executed by the prime administrator (padmin) user.
Examples
1. To list the contents of the global command log, type:
lsgcl
Related Information
The lsfailedlogin command.
IVM lshwres command
Purpose
Lists the hardware resources of a managed system. This command is valid only in an Integrated
Virtualization Manager environment.
Syntax
To list attributes for physical I/O buses
lshwres -r io --rsubtype bus [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem
]
To list attributes for I/O pools
lshwres -r io --rsubtype iopool --level pool [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To list system attributes for I/O pools
lshwres -r io --rsubtype iopool --level sys [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list attributes for physical I/O buses
lshwres -r io --rsubtype bus [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem
]
To list attributes for physical I/O slots
lshwres -r io --rsubtype slot [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem
]
158
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
To list attributes for physical I/O units
lshwres -r io --rsubtype unit [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem
]
To list recoverable I/O resources
lshwres -r io --rsubtype slot -R [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To list the currently tagged I/O for all IBM i logical partitions
lshwres -r io --rsubtype taggedio [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To list partition attributes for memory
lshwres -r mem --level lpar [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem
]
To display memory statistics from a partition
lshwres -r mem --level lpar --stat --filter "FilterData" [-F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To list system attributes for memory
lshwres -r mem --level sys [ --maxmem ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list recoverable memory resources
lshwres -r mem --level lpar -R [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To list information about the memory pool
lshwres -r mempool [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list paging devices associated with the memory pool
lshwres -r mempool --rsubtype pgdev [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To list recoverable memory pools
lshwres -r mempool -R [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list partition attributes for processors
lshwres -r proc --level lpar [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list shared processor pool attributes
lshwres -r proc --level pool [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list system attributes for processors
Alphabetical list of commands
159
lshwres -r proc --level sys [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list recoverable processors resources
lshwres -r proc --level lpar -R [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To list virtual Ethernet adapter attributes
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype eth --level lpar [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [
-m ManagedSystem ]
To list system attributes for virtual Ethernet adapters
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype eth --level sys [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list virtual fibre channel adapter attributes
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype fc --level lpar [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [
-m ManagedSystem ]
To list system attributes for virtual fibre channel adapters
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype fc --level sys [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list virtual SCSI adapter attributes
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype scsi [ --level lpar ] [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ]
[ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list virtual serial adapter attributes
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype serial --level lpar [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ]
[ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list partition attributes for virtual I/O slots
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype slot --level lpar [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [
-m ManagedSystem ]
To list virtual I/O slot attributes
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype slot --level slot [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [
-m ManagedSystem ]
To list recoverable virtual I/O resources
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype slot -- level slot -R [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header
] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list high-speed link (HSL) pools for all IBM i logical partitions
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype hsl [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To list Virtual OptiConnect pools for all IBM i logical partitions
160
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype virtualopti [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To list the physical Host Ethernet Adapters
lshwres -r hea --rsubtype phys --level sys [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To list the physical Host Ethernet Adapters ports
lshwres -r hea --rsubtype phys --level port [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To list the physical Host Ethernet Adapters port performance metrics
lshwres -r hea --rsubtype phys --level port --stat [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ]
[ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list the physical Host Ethernet Adapters port groups
lshwres -r hea --rsubtype phys --level port_group [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header
] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list the logical Host Ethernet Adapters and resource settings
lshwres -r hea --rsubtype logical --level sys [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To list the logical ports
lshwres -r hea --rsubtype logical --level port [-R] [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ]
[ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list the virtual Ethernet topology
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype eth --level lpar -F devce_name,drc_name,shared_adapter,backing_device
Description
The lshwres command lists the hardware resources of the managed-system, including physical I/O,
virtual I/O, memory, and processing.
Flags
-r ResourceType
--rsubtype
ResourceSubtype --level
ResourceLevel
The combination of -r, --rsubtype, and --level indicates which type of attributes and objects
to list. The valid combinations are enumerated below.
v -r io --rsubtype bus: List attributes for physical I/O buses
– Attributes: unit_phys_loc,bus_id,backplane_phys_loc,bus_drc_index,bus_drc_name
– Filters: units, buses
Alphabetical list of commands
161
v -r io --rsubtype iopool -level sys: List attributes for physical I/O pools
– Attributes: max_io_pools
– Filters: none
v -r io --rsubtype iopool -level pool: List attributes for physical I/O pools
– Attributes: io_pool_id, lpar_ids, slots
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, pools
v -r io --rsubtype slot: List attributes for physical I/O slots
– Attributes: unit_phys_loc, bus_id, phys_loc, drc_index, lpar_name, lpar_id,
slot_io_pool_id, description, feature_codes, adapter_feature_codes,
adapter_descriptions, pci_vendor_id, pci_device_id, pci_subs_vendor_id,
pci_subs_device_id, pci_class, pci_revision_id, bus_grouping, iop,
iop_info_stale,console_capable, load_source_capable, laod_source_attached,
alt_restart_device_capable, alt_restart_device_attached, op_console_capable,
op_console_attached, twinas_capable, twinax_attached, direct_console_capable,
lan_console_capablevpd_stale, vpd_type, vpd_model, vpd_serial_num,
parent_slot_drc_index, drc_name
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, units, buses, slots, pools
v -r io --rsubtype slot -R: List attributes for physical I/O slots
– Attributes: drc_index, lpar_name, lpar_id, drc_name
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, units, buses, slots, pools
v -r io --rsubtype taggedio: List attributes for tagged I/O resources
– Attributes: lpar_name, lpar_id, load_source_slot, alt_restart_device_slot,
recent_alt_restart_device_slot, console_slot, alt_console_slot, op_console_slot
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}
v -r io --rsubtype unit: List attributes for physical I/O units
– Attributes: unit_phys_loc
– Filters: units
v -r hea --rsubtype phys --level sys
– Attributes: adapter_id, state, phys_loc
– Filters: adapter_ids
v -r hea --rsubtype phys --level port_group
– Attributes: adapter_id, port_group, phys_port_ids, unassigned_logical_port_ids,
curr_port_group_mcs_value, pend_port_group_mcs_value,
valid_port_group_mcs_values
– Filters: adapter_ids, port_groups
v -r hea --rsubtype phys --level port
– Attributes: adapter_id, port_group, phys_port_id, phys_port_type, phys_port_state,
conn_state, curr_conn_speed, config_conn_speed, curr_duplex, config_duplex,
trans_flow_control, recv_flow_control, config_flow_control, max_recv_packet_size,
promisc_lpar_id, promisc_lpar_name, logical_port_ids, phys_port_loc
– Filters: adapter_ids, port_groups
162
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
v -r hea --rsubtype phys --level port --stat
– Attributes: adapter_id, port_group, phys_port_id, recv_octets, recv_packets_0_64,
recv_packets_65_127, recv_packets_128_255, recv_packets_256_511,
recv_packets_512_1023, recv_packets_1024_max, recv_packets_dropped_bad_FCS,
recv_packets_dropped_internal_mac_error,
recv_packets_dropped_in_range_length_error,
recv_packets_dropped_out_of_range_length_error,
recv_packets_dropped_frame_too_long, recv_packets_dropped_jabber,
recv_symbol_error, recv_code_error,recv_runt_frame, recv_fragments,
recv_unsupported_opcode, recv_control_pause_frames, recv_search_busy,
recv_packets_dropped_filter, recv_packets_dropped_other,
recv_packets_dropped_alignment, recv_MC_packets, recv_BC_packets,
trans_MC_packets, trans_BC_packets, trans_octets, trans_packets_length_0_64,
trans_packets_length_65_127, trans_packets_length_128_255,
trans_packets_length_255_511, trans_packets_length_512_1023,
trans_packets_length_1024_max, trans_packets_dropped_bad_FCS,
trans_control_pause_frames, trans_tx_local_fault_packets,
trans_tx_remote_fault_packets, trans_tx_packets_dropped_int_MAC_error,
trans_packets_retried_single_collision, trans_packets_retried_multiple_collision,
trans_packets_signal_quality, trans_packets_deferred, trans_packets_late_collisions,
trans_packets_excessive_collisions, trans_packets_no_carrier,
recv_overrun_frames_dropped
– Filters: adapter_ids, port_groups
v -r hea --rsubtype logical --level sys
– Attributes: adapter_id, lpar_id, lpar_name, drc_index, drc_name, capabilities, ieq, nieq,
qp, cq, mr
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, adapter_ids
v -r hea --rsubtype logical --level port
– Attributes: adapter_id, lpar_id, lpar_name, state, port_group, phys_port_id,
logical_port_id, drc_index, drc_name, mac_addr, user_def_mac_addr, vlan_id_list
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, adapter_ids, port_groups
v -r mem --level lpar: List partition attributes for memory
– Attributes: lpar_name, lpar_id, mem_mode, auto_io_entitled_mem,
curr_io_entitled_mem, curr_min_mem, curr_mem, curr_mem_weight, curr_max_mem,
pend_io_entitled_mem, pend_min_mem, pend_mem, pend_mem_weight,
pend_max_mem, run_io_entitled_mem, run_mem_weight, run_min_mem, run_mem
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}
v -r mem --level lpar -R: List partition attributes for memory
– Attributes: lpar_name, lpar_id, mem_mode, pend_mem_weight, pend_io_entitled_mem,
run_mem_weight, run_io_entitled_mempend_mem, run_mem
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}
v -r mem --level lpar -stat: List partition attributes for memory
– Attributes: min_io_entitled_mem, optimial_io_entitled_mem,
max_io_entitled_mem_usage
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}
Alphabetical list of commands
163
v -r mem --level sys [--maxmem]: List system attributes for memory
– Attributes: configurable_sys_mem, curr_avail_sys_mem, pend_avail_sys_mem,
installed_sys_mem, deconfig_sys_mem, sys_firmware_mem, mem_region_size,
pend_mem_region_size, possible_mem_region_size, max_mem_pools,
max_paging_vios_per_mem_pool
– Additional attributes with --maxmem: required_min_mem_aix_linux,
required_min_mem_os400
– Filters: None
v -r mempool : List system attributes for memory pools
– Attributes: curr_pool_mem, pend_pool_mem, curr_max_pool_mem,
pend_max_pool_mem, sys_firmware_pool_mem, paging_storage_pool,
paging_vios_names, paging_vios_ids
– Filters: None
v -r mempool -R: List system attributes for recoverable memory pool resources
– Attributes: curr_pool_mem, pend_pool_mem, curr_max_pool_mem,
pend_max_pool_mem, sys_firmware_pool_mem, paging_storage_pool,
paging_vios_names, paging_vios_ids
– Filters: None
v -r mempool --rsubtype pgdev: List paging devices associated with the memory pool
– Attributes: device_name, size, state, type, phys_loc, storage_pool, lpar_name, lpar_id,
paging_vios_name, paging_vios_id, redundant_state, is_redundant,
redundant_device_name, redundant_paging_vios_id, redundant_paging_vios_name,
redundant_phys_loc
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}
v -r proc --level lpar: List partition attributes for processors
– Attributes: lpar_name, lpar_id, curr_shared_proc_pool_id, curr_proc_mode,
curr_min_proc_units, curr_proc_units, curr_max_proc_units, curr_min_procs,
curr_procs, curr_max_procs, curr_sharing_mode, curr_uncap_weight,
pend_shared_proc_pool_id, pend_proc_mode, pend_min_proc_units, pend_proc_units,
pend_max_proc_units, pend_min_procs, pend_procs, pend_max_procs,
pend_sharing_mode, pend_uncap_weight, run_proc_units, run_procs,
run_uncap_weight
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}
v -r proc --level lpar -R: List partition attributes for processors
– Attributes: lpar_name, lpar_id, curr_proc_mode, curr_sharing_mode, pend_proc_mode,
pend_proc_units, pend_procs, pend_sharing_mode, pend_uncap_weight,
run_proc_units, run_procs, run_uncap_weight
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}
v -r proc --level pool: List shared processor pool attributes
– Attributes: shared_proc_pool_id, configurable_pool_proc_units,
curr_avail_pool_proc_units, pend_avail_pool_proc_units
– Filters: None
v -r proc --level sys: List system attributes for processors
– Attributes: configurable_sys_proc_units, curr_avail_sys_proc_units,
pend_avail_sys_proc_units, installed_sys_proc_units, deconfig_sys_proc_units,
min_proc_units_per_virtual_proc, max_shared_proc_pools, max_virtual_procs_per_lpar,
max_procs_per_lpar
– Filters: None
v -r virtualio --rsubtype eth --level lpar: List virtual Ethernet adapter attributes
– Attributes: lpar_name, lpar_id, slot_num, state, ieee_virtual_eth, port_vlan_id,
addl_vlan_ids, is_trunk, trunk_priority, is_required, mac_addr
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, vlans, slots
164
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
v -r virtualio --rsubtype eth --level sys: List system attributes for virtual Ethernet adapters
– Attributes: max_vlans_per_port, mac_prefix
– Filters: None
v -r virtualio --rsubtype eth --level lpar -F device_name,drc_name,shared_adapter,backing
device: List virtual Ethernet adapter attributes
Note: The shared_adapter and backing_device are empty for all logical partitions other
than the Virtual I/O Server. These attributes might be empty on the Virtual I/O Server if
the Integrated Virtualization Manager cannot retrieve the information or if no such
adapter exists (shared_adapter) or if no such shared Ethernet adapter (backing_device)
exists.
– Attributes: lpar_name, lpar_id, slot_num, state, ieee_virtual_eth, port_vlan_id,
addl_vlan_ids, is_trunk, trunk_priority, is_required, mac_addr
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, vlans, slots
v -r virtualio --rsubtype fc --level lpar: List information about virtual fibre channel adapters
for each logical partition
– Attributes: lpar_name, lpar_id, slot_num, adapter_type, remote_lpar_id,
remote_lpar_name, remote_slot_num, is_required, wwpns, state
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, slots
v -r virtualio --rsubtype fc --level sys: List system attributes for virtual fibre channel
adapters
– Attributes: num_wwpns_remaining, wwpn_prefix
– Filters: None
v -r virtualio --rsubtype fc --level lpar -F topology: List information about virtual fibre
channel adapters for each logical partition in the form of a slash delimited list (for
example, vd_name/status/fc_client_name/fc_server_name/phys_port_name)
– Attributes: lpar_name, lpar_id, slot_num, adapter_type, remote_lpar_id,
remote_lpar_name, remote_slot_num, is_required, wwpns, state
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, slots
v -r virtualio --rsubtype hsl: List system attributes for high-speed link
– Attributes: hsl_pool_id, lpar_names, lpar_ids
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, pools
v -r virtualio --rsubtype scsi --level lpar: List virtual SCSI adapter attributes
– Attributes: lpar_name, lpar_id, slot_num, state, adapter_type, remote_lpar_id,
remote_lpar_name, remote_slot_num, is_required
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, slots
v -r virtualio --rsubtype scsi --level lpar -F topology: List virtual SCSI adapter attributes in
the form of a slash delimited list (for example, vd_name/status/vscsi_client_name/
bd_sp_name/bd_name)
Note: The bd_sp_name might be empty if the Virtual I/O Server uses physical volumes
rather than a storage pool.
– Attributes: vd_name, vscsi_client_name, vscsi_server_name, bd_sp_name, bd_name
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, slots
Alphabetical list of commands
165
v -r virtualio --rsubtype slot --level lpar: List partition attributes for virtual I/O slots
– Attributes: lpar_name, lpar_id, curr_max_virtual_slots, pend_max_virtual_slots
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}
v -r virtualio --rsubtype slot --level slot: List virtual I/O slot attributes
– Attributes: slot_num, lpar_name, lpar_id, config, state, drc_name
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, slots
v
-r virtualio --rsubtype slot --level slot -R: List virtual I/O slot attributes
– Attributes: slot_num, lpar_name, lpar_id, drc_name
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, slots
v -r virtualio --rsubtype virtualopti: List virtual OptiConnect resource attributes
– Attributes: virtual_opti_pool_id, lpar_names, lpar_ids
--maxmem
MaximumMemory
– Filters: {lpar_ids | lpar_names}, pools
When this option is specified, the required minimum memory amount needed for partitions
to support the maximum memory quantity specified is listed. All memory quantities are in
megabytes, and are a multiple of the memory region size for the managed- system.
This information is useful for specifying memory amounts in partition profiles.
-m ManagedSystem
166
This option is only valid when listing system level memory resources.
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one system
to manage. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in
the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss
is the serial number of the managed system.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
--filter FilterData
The filters to apply to the resources to be listed. Filters are used to select which resources of
the specified resource type are to be listed. If no filters are used, then all of the resources of
the specified resource type will be listed. For example, specific partitions can be listed by
using a filter to specify the names or IDs of the partitions to list. Otherwise, if no filter is
used, then all the partitions in the managed system will be listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value
(CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotation marks.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in double
quotation marks. Depending on the shell being used, nested double quotation marks
characters might need to be preceded by an escape character, which is usually a '\' character.
Unless otherwise indicated, multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names:
adapter_ids
The DRC index of the Host Ethernet Adapter in hexadecimal
buses
The bus ID of the I/O bus to view
lpar_ids | lpar_names
Name or ID of the logical partition to view
Note: The filter value of none for lpar_ids is supported and displays only paging
devices that are not currently assigned to any logical partition. If the memory pool
does not exist, and you use the -r mempool --rsubtype pgdev attribute, an error is
displayed.
pools
The pool ID of the I/O pool to view
port_groups
The Host Ethernet Adapter port group or groups
-F AttributeNames
slots
For physical I/O slots, the DRC index of the slot to view. For virtual I/O slots, the
virtual slot number of the slot to view
units
The physical location code of the unit to view
vlans
The virtual LAN of the virtual Ethernet adapters to view
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be displayed
for each resource. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of the attributes for
the resource will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute names
will be displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the delimiter which
was specified with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when the
values of only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Attribute names:
Alphabetical list of commands
167
adapter_descriptions
Indicates a description of the adapter.
adapter_feature_codes
List of possible feature codes for the I/O adapter sorted by likely match. Each
element in the list consists of two feature codes - one for each operating system.
This list follows the following format:
aix_feature_code1/linux_feature_code1,
/i5_feature_code1,aix_feature_code2/
linux_feature_code2/i5_feature_code2,...
adapter_id
Indicates the DRC index of the Host Ethernet Adapter in hexadecimal.
adapter_type
Indicates whether the virtual SCSI, virtual fibre channel, or serial adapter is a client
or server. Valid values are client and server.
addl_vlan_ids
The list of additional IEEE 802.1Q virtual LANs (VLANs) on a virtual Ethernet
adapter.
alt_console_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the alternate console device for the
IBM i logical partition. The default value is none.
alt_restart_device_attached
Whether this IOP has an alternate restart device. Valid values are:
v 0 - not attached
v 1 - attached
alt_restart_device_capable
Whether the IOP is capable of being tagged as the alternate restart device. The
default values is 0 (not capable).
alt_restart_device_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the alternate restart device for the
IBM i logical partition. If the load source slot has a value other than none, this
attribute is optional. Valid values are:
v Slot number (for virtual I/O)
v None
auto_io_entitled_mem
Indicates whether the I/O entitled memory of the partition is automatically
managed. Valid values follow:
v 0 (Not managed/custom)
v 1 (Automatically managed)
This attribute is only displayed by default if the mem_mode attribute is shared. If
the value is dedicated and the attribute is requested, the value is null.
auto_mem_region_size
Indicates the optimal size of the memory region, as automatically calculated by the
firmware.
Note: The memory region size applies to the entire system and requires you to
reboot the entire system.
backing_device
The name of the physical Ethernet adapter that is connected to the shared Ethernet
adapter on the VIOS. For example, ent0.
backplane_phys_loc
Physical location code of the backplane on which the bus resides.
168
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
bus_drc_index
DRC index, in hex, of the bus.
bus_drc_name
DRC name of the bus.
bus_grouping
Indicates whether bus grouping is required. Possible values:
v 0 - not required
v 1 - required
bus_id I/O bus unique ID.
capabilities
Values currently applied to the system.
config
Virtual slot configuration state. Possible values follow:
v empty - no adapter
v ethernet - virtual Ethernet adapter
v fc - virtual fibre channel adapter
v reserved - reserved slot
v scsi - virtual SCSI adapter
v serial - virtual serial adapter
v vasi - virtual asynchronous services interface
v vmc - virtual management channel adapter
config_conn_speed
The configured connection speed of the port in megabits per second. This value can
be set by the user using chhwres. Possible values are:
v auto
v 10
v 100
v 1000
v 10000
config_duplex
Configured duplex value of the port. This value can be set by the user using
chhwres. Possible values are:
v auto
v half
v full
config_flow_control
Configured flow control value of the port. This value is used for both the receive
and transmit flow control. This attribute can also be set using the chhwres
command. Possible values are:
v 1 (enabled)
v 0 (disabled)
configurable_pool_proc_units
Total number of configurable processing units in the shared processing pool.
Alphabetical list of commands
169
configurable_sys_mem
Total amount, in megabytes, of configurable memory on the managed system.
configurable_sys_proc_units
Total number of configurable processing units on the managed system.
conn_state
Connection state or link state of the physical port. Possible values are:
v 1 (up)
v 0 (down)
v unavailable
cq
Total number of completion queues.
console_capable
Whether the IOP is capable of being tagged as the console device. Valid values are:
v 0 - not capable
v 1 - capable
console_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the console device for the IBM i
logical partition. Valid values are:
v Slot number (for virtual I/O)
v None
curr_avail_pool_proc_units
Current number of configurable processing units in the shared processing pool that
are not assigned to partitions.
curr_avail_sys_mem
Current amount, in megabytes, of configurable memory on the managed system
that is not assigned to partitions.
curr_avail_sys_proc_units
Current number of configurable processing units on the managed system that are
not assigned to partitions.
curr_conn_speed
Speed of the port in Mbps. Possible values are:
v 10
v 100
v 1000
v 10000
v unavailable
curr_duplex
Duplex value of the port. Valid values are:
v half
v full
v unavailable
curr_io_entitled_mem
The current I/O entitled memory of the partition in megabytes. This attribute is
only displayed, by default, if the value of the mem_mode attribute is Shared. If the
value is Dedicated and the attribute is requested, the value is null.
170
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
curr_max_mem
Maximum amount of memory, in megabytes, that can be dynamically assigned to
the partition.
curr_max_pool_mem
Maximum amount of physical memory that can be assigned to the memory pool
without taking the pool offline. This value is in megabytes.
curr_max_proc_units
Maximum number of processing units that can be dynamically assigned to the
partition. This attribute is only valid for partitions using shared processors.
curr_max_procs
Maximum number of processors or virtual processors that can be dynamically
assigned to the partition.
curr_max_virtual_slots
Maximum number of virtual slots that can be dynamically configured for the
partition.
curr_mem
Current amount of memory, in megabytes, assigned to the partition.
curr_mem_weight
The current shared memory weight of the partition. Possible values are 0 through
255. This attribute is only displayed by default if the mem_mode attribute is set to
the shared value. If the value is dedicated and the attribute is requested, the value
is null.
curr_min_mem
Minimum amount of memory, in megabytes, that can be dynamically assigned to
the partition.
curr_min_proc_units
Minimum number of processing units that can be dynamically assigned to the
partition. This attribute is only valid for partitions using shared processors.
curr_min_procs
Minimum number of processors or virtual processors that can be dynamically
assigned to the partition.
curr_pool_mem
The amount of physical memory currently assigned to the memory pool in
megabytes.
curr_port_group_mcs_value
The current MCS value for the port group.
curr_proc_mode
Indicates whether the partition is using dedicated or shared processors. The mode
cannot change dynamically. Valid values:
v ded - dedicated
v shared - shared
curr_proc_units
The current number of processing units assigned to the partition. This attribute is
only valid for partitions using shared processors.
curr_procs
The current number of processors or virtual processors assigned to the partition.
Alphabetical list of commands
171
curr_shared_proc_pool_id
The shared processor pool that this partition is currently participating in. This
attribute is only valid for partitions using shared processors.
curr_sharing_mode
The current sharing mode for a partition. Valid values:
v keep_idle_procs - valid with dedicated processor mode
v share_idle_procs - valid with dedicated processor mode
v share_idle_procs_always - valid with dedicated processor mode
v share_idle_procs_active - valid with dedicated processor mode
v cap - capped mode. valid with shared processor mode
v uncap - uncapped mode. valid with shared processor mode
curr_uncap_weight
The current weighted average of processing priority when in uncapped sharing
mode. Valid values are 0 - 255.
deconfig_sys_mem
The amount of memory, in megabytes, on the managed system that has been
unconfigured. This includes memory that has been unconfigured by the system due
to hardware failure, and memory that has been manually unconfigured.
deconfig_sys_proc_units
The number of processing units on the managed system that have been
unconfigured. This includes processing units that have been unconfigured by the
system due to hardware failure, and processing units that have been manually
unconfigured.
description
A description of the I/O adapter which is in the slot.
device_name
The Virtual I/O Server device used as a paging space device in the memory pool.
direct_console_capable
Whether the IOP is capable of being tagged as the console device for directly
attached console. Valid values are:
v 0 - not capable
v 1 - capable
drc_index
The DRC index, in hexadecimal, of the I/O slot.
drc_name
The DRC name of the I/O slot.
feature_codes
The most likely feature code for the I/O adapter. The feature code may be different
for each operating system. The adapter_feature_codes attribute should be used to
distinguish the feature code specific to each operating system.
hsl_pool_id
Whether the logical partition participates in the high-speed Link (HSL) pool. The
default value is 0 (does not participate).
ieee_virtual_eth
Indicates whether the virtual Ethernet adapter is using IEEE 802.1Q. Valid values
follow:
v 0 - No
v 1 - Yes
172
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
ieq
Total number of interruptible event queues.
installed_sys_mem
Total amount, in megabytes, of memory installed on the managed system.
installed_sys_proc_units
Total number of processing units installed on the managed system.
io_pool_id
A unique identifier for an I/O pool. I/O pools are used in some I/O clustering
environments.
iop
Indicates whether the I/O adapter is an I/O processor. Valid values:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
iop_info_stale
Indicates whether the information about the I/O processor is stale. Valid values:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
is_required
Indicates whether the I/O slot or virtual I/O adapter is required for the partition.
Valid values:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
is_trunk
Indicates whether the virtual Ethernet adapter is the trunk or uplink adapter for the
virtual LAN. Valid values:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
lan_console_capable
Whether the IOP is capable of being tagged as the console device for a LAN
console. The default values is 0 (not capable).
load_source_attached
Whether this IOP has a load source device. Valid values:
v 0 - not attached
v 1 - attached
load_source_capable
Whether this IOP is capable of being tagged as the load source device. The default
values is 0 (not capable).
load_source_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the load source for the IBM i
logical partition. If the alt_restart_device_slot has a value other than none, then this
attribute is optional. Valid values are:
v Slot number (for virtual I/O)
v None
Alphabetical list of commands
173
logical_port_id
The ID of the logical port.
logical_port_ids
Logical port IDs defined on the physical port.
lpar_id Partition ID. Valid values are 1 through the maximum number of partitions
supported on the managed system (max_lpars).
When using the --rsubtype pgdev flag, this attribute represents the partition ID of
the shared memory partition to which this paging device is associated. If no
partition is associated, then the value is none.
lpar_ids
List of logical partition IDs of logical partitions using a pool.
lpar_name
User-defined name for the partition.
When using the --rsubtype pgdev flag, this attribute represents the name of the
shared memory partition to which this paging device is associated. If no partition is
associated, this attribute is not displayed by default. If no partition is associated but
the attribute is requested, the attribute will have a blank value.
lpar_names
List of names of logical partitions using a pool.
mac_addr
MAC address for the virtual Ethernet adapter.
mac_prefix
The first 3 bytes of the MAC address to be assigned to all virtual Ethernet adapters
for this managed system. This must be specified as a 3 byte hexadecimal value (for
example, 32ab10) and can only be configured in the mkgencfg command.
max_io_entitled_mem_usage
The highest level of I/O entitled memory used by the specified logical partition
since the value was last reset.
max_io_pools
Maximum number of I/O pools supported on the managed system.
max_mem_pools
Maximum number of memory pools supported. If the system does not support
memory pools, then the value is 0; otherwise, it is 1.
max_paging_vios_per_mem_pool
Maximum number of paging Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) partitions that can be
assigned to a memory pool. If the system supports memory pools, this value is 1.
max_procs_per_lpar
Indicates the largest number of dedicated processors that you can assign as the
maximum processors value for a logical partition.
max_recv_packet_size
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size of the port. This value can also be
changed using the chhwres command. Possible values:
v 1500 (default)
v 9000 (jumbo)
max_shared_proc_pools
Maximum number of shared processing pools which are supported on the managed
system.
max_virtual_procs_per_lpar
Indicates the largest number of virtual processors that can be assigned as the
maximum processors value for a logical partition.
174
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
max_vlans_per_port
Indicates the largest number of VLANs that can be specified as additional IEEE
802.1Q VLANs on a virtual Ethernet adapter.
mem_mode
Partition memory mode.
v ded: Dedicated memory
v shared: Shared memory
mem_region_size
The memory region size, in megabytes, for the managed system. The memory
regions size represents the granularity of memory allocation to partitions.
min_io_entitled_mem
The minimum I/O entitled memory required for the logical partition to function
with the current I/O configuration.
min_proc_units_per_virtual_proc
Minimum number of processing units that are required for each virtual processor
assigned to a partition.
mr
Total number of memory regions.
nieq
Total number of non-interruptible event queues.
num_wwpns_remaining
The number of worldwide port names that remain to be allocated on the managed
system.
op_console_attached
Whether this IOP has an operations console device. This attribute is only shown if
iop is 1. This attribute is current only if vpd_stale is 0. Valid values are:
v 0 - not capable
v 1 - attached
op_console_capable
Whether this IOP is capable of being tagged as the console device for operations
console. This attribute is only shown if iop is 1. This attribute is current only if
vpd_stale is 0. The default value is 0 (not capable).
op_console_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the directly attached Operations
Console device for the IBM i logical partition. The default value is none.
optimal_io_entitled_mem
The amount of I/O entitled memory that would satisfy the requested configuration
of all I/O devices.
paging_storage_pool
The name of default paging storage pool. This attribute is the storage pool from
which new paging devices are created. If there is no default paging storage pool,
the value is an empty string.
paging_vios_id
The partition ID of the paging VIOS partition.
paging_vios_ids
A comma-separated list of partition IDs for paging VIOS partitions associated with
this memory pool. This attribute is not displayed by default. If requested, the value
displayed is 1.
Alphabetical list of commands
175
paging_vios_name
The name of the paging VIOS partition.
paging_vios_names
A comma-separated list of partition names for paging VIOS partitions that are
associated with this memory pool. This attribute is not displayed by default. If
requested, the value displayed is the name of the Virtual I/O Server logical
partition.
parent_slot_drc_index
The DRC index, in hex, of the parent slot. A value of none indicates there is no
parent slot.
pci_class
PCI class code for the I/O adapter. This value is displayed in hexadecimal.
pci_device_id
ID of the device for this I/O adapter. This value is displayed in hexadecimal.
pci_revision_id
Vendor-assigned code indicating the revision number of the I/O adapter. This value
is displayed in hexadecimal.
pci_subs_device_id
Vendor-assigned code identifying the type of driver that is installed for the I/O
adapter. This value is displayed in hexadecimal.
pci_subs_vendor_id
ID of the vendor that made the driver for the I/O adapter. This value is displayed
in hexadecimal.
pci_vendor_id
ID of the vendor that made this I/O adapter. This value is displayed in
hexadecimal.
pend_avail_pool_proc_units
After system restart, the number of configurable processing units in the shared
processing pool that are not assigned to partitions.
pend_avail_sys_mem
After system restart, the amount, in megabytes, of configurable memory on the
managed system that is not assigned to partitions.
pend_avail_sys_proc_units
After system restart, the number of configurable processing units on the managed
system that are not assigned to partitions.
pend_io_entitled_mem
The pending I/O entitled memory of the partition in megabytes. This attribute is
only displayed by default if the mem_mode attribute has a value of shared. If the
value is dedicated and the attribute is requested, the value is null.
pend_max_mem
After partition restart, the maximum amount of memory, in megabytes, that can be
dynamically assigned to the partition.
pend_max_pool_mem
The pending value for the maximum amount of physical memory that can be
assigned to the memory pool without taking the memory pool offline. This value is
in megabytes.
176
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
pend_max_proc_units
After partition restart, the maximum number of processing units that can be
dynamically assigned to the partition. This attribute is only valid for partitions
using shared processors.
pend_max_procs
After partition restart, the maximum number of processors or virtual processors
that can be dynamically assigned to the partition.
pend_max_virtual_slots
After partition restart, the maximum number of virtual slots that can be
dynamically created for the partition.
pend_mem
The target amount of memory, in megabytes, assigned to the partition.
pend_mem_region_size
This is the memory region size of the system after the system is restarted.
pend_mem_weight
The pending shared memory weight of the partition. Possible values are 0 - 255.
This attribute is only displayed by default if the mem_mode attribute is set to the
shared value. If the value is dedicated and the attribute is requested, the value is
null.
pend_min_mem
After partition restart, the minimum amount of memory, in megabytes, that can be
dynamically assigned to the partition.
pend_min_proc_units
After partition restart, the minimum number of processing units that can be
dynamically assigned to the partition. This attribute is only valid for partitions
using shared processors.
pend_min_procs
After partition restart, the minimum number of processors or virtual processors that
can be dynamically assigned to the partition.
pend_pool_mem
The amount of physical memory to be assigned to the memory pool in megabytes.
pend_port_group_mcs_value
Pending MCS value of the port group. Setting the MCS value may require a system
restart.
pend_proc_mode
Indicates whether the partition will be using dedicated or shared processors after
restart. Valid values:
v ded: Dedicated
v shared: Shared
pend_proc_units
The target number of processing units assigned to the partition. This attribute is
only valid for partitions using shared processors.
pend_procs
The target number of processors or virtual processors assigned to the partition.
pend_shared_proc_pool_id
The shared processor pool that a partition is will participate in after restart. This
attribute is only valid for partitions using shared processors.
Alphabetical list of commands
177
pend_sharing_mode
The target sharing mode for a partition. Valid values:
v keep_idle_procs: Valid with pending dedicated processor mode
v share_idle_procs: Valid with pending dedicated processor mode
v cap - capped mode: Valid with pending shared processor mode
v uncap - uncapped mode: Valid with pending shared processor mode
pend_uncap_weight
The target weighted average of processing priority when in uncapped sharing
mode. Valid values are: 0 - 255.
phys_loc
If the device has a physical location code for the slot, this attribute is displayed by
default with the physical location code as the value. If the device does not have a
physical location code, this attribute is not displayed by default and has a blank
value.
phys_port_id
The ID of the physical port in the port group (0 or 1).
phys_port_ids
List of host Ethernet adapter (HEA) physical port IDs in a port group.
phys_port_loc
Location code suffix for the physical port.
phys_port_state
State of the physical port.
phys_port_type
Speed of the port.
port_group
Indicates the Host Ethernet Adapter port group(s).
port_vlan_id
Port virtual LAN ID for the virtual ethernet adapter.
possible_mem_region_size
The memory region size that is possible of the system.
promisc_lpar_id
ID assigned to the promiscuous logical partition. Possible values:
v none
v 1 - 254
promisc_lpar_name
Name assigned to the promiscuous logical partition.
qp
The total number of queue pairs.
recent_alt_restart_device_slot
The previous alternate restart device slot.
recv_flow_control
Receive flow control value of the port
v 1 (enabled)
v 0 (disabled)
v unavailable
178
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
recv_octets, recv_packets_0_64, recv_packets_65_127, recv_packets_128_255,
recv_packets_256_511, recv_packets_512_1023, recv_packets_1024_max,
recv_packets_dropped_bad_FCS, recv_packets_dropped_internal_mac_error,
recv_packets_dropped_in_range_length_error,
recv_packets_dropped_out_of_range_length_error, recv_packets_dropped_frame_too_long,
recv_packets_dropped_jabber, recv_symbol_error, recv_code_error, recv_runt_frame,
recv_fragments, recv_unsupported_opcode, recv_control_pause_frames, recv_search_busy,
recv_packets_dropped_filter, recv_packets_dropped_other,
recv_packets_dropped_alignment, default_unicast_QPN, recv_MC_packets,
recv_BC_packets, trans_MC_packets, trans_BC_packets, trans_octets,
trans_packets_length_0_64, trans_packets_length_65_127, trans_packets_length_128_255,
trans_packets_length_255_511, trans_packets_length_512_1023,
trans_packets_length_1024_max, trans_packets_dropped_bad_FCS,
trans_control_pause_frames, trans_tx_local_fault_packets, trans_tx_remote_fault_packets,
trans_tx_packets_dropped_int_MAC_error, trans_packets_retried_single_collision,
trans_packets_retried_multiple_collision, trans_packets_signal_quality,
trans_packets_deferred, trans_packets_late_collisions, trans_packets_excessive_collisions,
trans_packets_no_carrier, recv_overrun_frames_dropped
Performance metric values
remote_lpar_id
For client adapters, this specifies the ID of the partition which has the virtual
serial/SCSI server adapter for this adapter. For server adapters, this specifies the ID
of the partition which has the only client virtual serial/SCSI adapter allowed to
connect to this adapter. A value of any indicates that any client virtual serial/SCSI
adapter should be allowed to connect to this adapter.
remote_lpar_name
The partition name which corresponds to the remote_lpar_id.
remote_slot_num
For client adapters, this specifies the virtual slot number of the virtual serial/SCSI
server adapter for this adapter. For server adapters, this specifies the virtual slot
number of the only client virtual serial/SCSI adapter allowed to connect to this
adapter. A value of any indicates that any client virtual serial/SCSI adapter should
be allowed to connect to this adapter.
required_min_mem_aix_linux
For an AIX or Linux partition, this is the required minimum memory amount, in
megabytes, for the maximum memory amount specified with the --maxmem
parameter.
required_min_mem_os400
The required minimum memory amount, in megabytes, for the maximum memory
amount specified with the --maxmem parameter. This attribute only applies for an
IBM i logical partition.
run_io_entitled_mem
The I/O entitled memory of the partition at run time in megabytes. This attribute is
only displayed by default if the mem_mode attribute has a value of shared. If the
value is dedicated and the attribute is requested, the value is null.
run_mem
Current amount of memory, in megabytes, that the partition has varied on.
Alphabetical list of commands
179
run_mem_weight
The runtime shared memory weight of the logical partition. Possible values are 0 255. This attribute is only displayed by default if the mem_mode attribute is set to
the shared value. If the value is dedicated and the attribute is requested, the value
is null.
run_min_mem
The amount of memory, in megabytes, returned by a running partition's operating
system to represent the smallest memory assignment which is currently supported
by the operating system. If the operating system does not support this feature, then
the value is 0.
run_proc_units
Number of processing units that are varied on for the partition.
run_procs
Number of processors or virtual processors that are varied on for the partition.
run_uncap_weight
The operating system's current setting for the weighted average of processing
priority when in uncapped sharing mode. Valid values are: 0 - 255.
shared_adapter
The name of the shared Ethernet adapter on the VIOS. For example, ent9.
shared_proc_pool_id
A unique decimal identifier for a shared processing pool.
size
The size of the paging device in megabytes.
slot_io_pool_id
A unique decimal identifier of the I/O pool to which the slot is assigned. A value of
none indicates that the slot is not assigned to any I/O pools.
slot_num
Virtual slot number.
slots
A list of slot DRC indices.
state
The state of a virtual slot. A virtual slot must be able to transition into the off state
before a dynamic reconfiguration of the slot can succeed. Valid states follow:
v 0 - The virtual slot is ready for dynamic reconfiguration.
v 1 - The virtual slot is not yet ready for dynamic reconfiguration.
When using paging devices, state indicates the state of the paging device in
megabytes. Valid states follow:
v Active - The paging device is in use.
v Inactive - The paging device is available.
v Missing backing device - The backing device being used as a paging space device
is missing.
v Defined - The backing device being used as a paging space device is defined.
storage_pool
If the device comes from a storage pool, this attribute is displayed by default with
the storage pool as the value. If the device does not come from a storage pool, this
attribute is not displayed by default and has a blank value.
180
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
supports_hmc
Indicates whether or not the virtual serial adapter is enabled for HMC client
support. Valid values:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
sys_firmware_mem
The amount of memory, in megabytes, on the managed system that is being used
by system firmware.
sys_firmware_pool_mem
The amount of memory in the shared memory pool that is reserved for firmware
use. This is the greater of the current and pending values.
trans_flow_control
Transmit flow control value of the port. Possible values are:
v 1 (enabled)
v 0 (disabled)
v unavailable
trunk_priority
The valid values are integers between 1 and 15, inclusive. This value is required for
a trunk adapter.
twinax_attached
Whether the IOP has a twinaxial device. This attribute is only shown if iop is 1.
This attribute is current only if vpd_stale is 0. Valid values are:
v 0 - not attached
v 1 - attached
twinax_capable
Whether the IOP is capable of being tagged as the console device for a twinaxial
console. This attribute is only shown if iop is 1. This attribute is current only if
vpd_stale is 0. The default values is 0 (not capable).
type
The type of the underlying device. Possible values follow:
v logical - logical device
v phys - physical device
unassigned_logical_port_ids
List of logical port IDs in the port group that are not assigned to a partition.
unit_phys_loc
Physical location code of the I/O unit.
user_def_mac_addr
User defined MAC address for the logical port.
valid_port_group_mcs_values
Valid MCS values.
virtual_opti_pool_id
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the directly attached operations
console device for the IBM i logical partition. The default value is 0 (does not
participate).
Alphabetical list of commands
181
vlan_id_list
List of virtual LAN IDs that the logical port has access to.
vpd_model
Model of the I/O adapter.
vpd_serial_num
Serial number of the I/O adapter.
vpd_stale
Indicates whether or not type, model, and serial number of the adapter is not
current. Valid values:
v 0 - not current
v 1 - current
vpd_type
Type of the I/O adapter.
wwpns If the adapter is of type client, the worldwide port names assigned to this adapter
are displayed as a comma-separated list. If the adapter is of type server, by default,
the attribute is not displayed. If the attribute is requested, the value is null.
--header
-R
wwpn_prefix
A 12-character hexadecimal string that is used by the managed system to generate
worldwide port names.
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the
attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record displayed.
This option is only valid when used with the -F option.
List information for partitions with resources that can be restored due to a dynamic LPAR
operation failure.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is accessible by all users.
Examples
1. List system level memory information and include the minimum memory required to support a
maximum of 1024 MB:
lshwres -r mem --level sys --maxmem 1024
2. List all memory information for partitions lpar1 and lpar2, and only display attribute values,
following a header of attribute names:
lshwres -r mem --level lpar --filter "\"lpar_names=lpar1,lpar2\"" -F --header
3. List all I/O units on the system:
lshwres -r io --rsubtype unit
4.
List all virtual Ethernet adapters on the managed system:
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype eth --level lpar
5. List all virtual slots for partition lpar1:
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype slot --level slot --filter "lpar_names=lpar1"
6. List only the installed and configurable processors on the system:
lshwres -r proc --level sys -F installed_sys_proc_units,
configurable_sys_proc_units
7. List all physical Host Ethernet Adapter ports on the system:
182
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
lshwres -r hea --rsubtype phys --level port
8. List all logical Host Ethernet Adapter ports on the system:
lshwres -r hea --rsubtype logical --level port
9. List the physical Host Ethernet Adapter adapters on the system:
lshwres -r hea --rsubtype phys --level sys
10. List the Host Ethernet Adapter port groups on the system:
lshwres -r hea --rsubtype phys --level port_group
Related Information
The lssyscfg and chhwres commands.
IVM lsled command
Purpose
List states for physical and virtual LEDs. This command is valid only in an Integrated Virtualization
Manager environment.
Syntax
To list physical platform LEDs:
lsled -r sa -t phys [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list virtual partition LEDs:
lsled -r sa -t virtuallpar [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list virtual platform LEDs:
lsled -r sa -t virtualsys [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The lsled command lists the states of physical and virtual LEDs.
Flags
-r ResourceType
-t SystemAttentionType
The type of LED resources to list. The only valid value is sa for System Attention (SA)
LEDs.
The type of System Attention (SA) LEDs to list.
v -r sa -t virtuallpar: List attributes for virtual partition system attention LEDs
– Attributes: lpar_id, lpar_name, state
– Filters: { lpar_ids | lpar_names}
v -r sa -t virtualsys: List attributes for virtual system attention LEDs
– Attributes: state
– Filters: None
v -r sa -t phys: List attributes for physical system attention LEDs
– Attributes: state
– Filters: None
Alphabetical list of commands
183
-m ManagedSystem
--filter FilterData
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name might either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
The filters to apply to the resources to be listed. Filters are used to select which
resources of the specified resource type are to be listed. If no filters are used, then all of
the resources of the specified resource type will be listed. For example, specific
partitions can be listed by using a filter to specify the names or IDs of the partitions to
list. Otherwise, if no filter is used, then all the partitions in the managed system will be
listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value
(CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotation marks.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in
double quotation marks. Depending on the shell being used, nested double quotation
marks might need to be preceded by an escape character, which is usually a '\'
character.
Unless otherwise indicated, multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names for -r lpar
lpar_ids
ID of the partitions to view
-F AttributeNames
lpar_names
Name of the partitions to view
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be
displayed for each resource. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of
the attributes for the resource will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute
names will be displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the
delimiter which was specified with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when
the values of only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Attribute Names
v lpar_id: Unique integer identifier for the partition
v lpar_name: name of the partition
v state: The current state of the LED. Valid values:
– off - the LED is off
--header
– on - the LED is on
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the
attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record
displayed. This option is only valid when used with the -F option.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
184
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Security
This command is accessible by all users.
Examples
1. Display the physical system attention LED for the system:
lsled -r sa -t phys
2. Display all of the virtual partition system attention LEDs:
lsled -r sa -t virtuallpar
3. Display the virtual partition system attention LEDs for partitions lpar1 and lpar2:
lsled -r sa -t virtuallpar --filter \"lpar_names=lpar1,lpar2\"
Related Information
The chled command.
lslparinfo command
Purpose
Displays the logical partition number and name.
Syntax
lslparinfo
Description
The lslparinfo command displays LPAR number and LPAR name. If LPAR does not exist, -1 is displayed
for LPAR number and NULL for LPAR name.
Examples
1. To display the logical partition number and name, type:
lslparinfo
IVM lslparmigr command
Purpose
Lists and displays partition migration information
Syntax
lslparmigr -r manager | lpar | msp | procpool | sys | virtualio | mempool | pgdev [-m <managed system] [-t
<managed system>] [--ip <target HMC/IVM IP address> [-u <target HMC/IVM username>]] [--filter "<filter
data>"] [-F [<attribute names>]] [--redundantpgvios { 0 | 1 | 2 }] [--header] [--help]
Description
The lslparmigr command displays the state of the partition migration and the adapter mappings that
might be used during the partition migration.
Alphabetical list of commands
185
Flags
-r
The type of resources for which to list partition migration information.
Specify lpar to list partition migration information for all of the partitions in
managed-system.
Specify msp to list possible source and destination mover service partition (MSP) pairs
for an active partition migration of the partition specified with the lpar_names or
lpar_ids filter.
Specify procpool to list possible shared processor pools in the destination managed
system that have enough available processing resources for the partition specified with
the lpar_names or lpar_ids filter.
Specify sys to list the partition mobility capabilities for managed-system.
Specify virtualio to list possible and suggested mappings of the virtual SCSI adapters
and virtual fibre channels in the partition specified with the lpar_names or lpar_ids
filter to Virtual I/O Server in the destination managed system.
Specify mempool to list details for each shared memory pool on the target managed
system.
-m <managed system>
-t <managed system>
--ip
-u
--filter <filter data>
Specify pgdev to list paging devices available on the target managed system.
The name of the source managed system.
The name of target managed system.
The IP address or hostname of the Integrated Virtualization Manager managing the
target system.
The user name to use on the Integrated Virtualization Manager that manages the target
system. If the --ip flag is specified and -u flag is not specified, the user name on the
source Integrated Virtualization Manager is used on the target Integrated Virtualization
Manager.
The filter or filters to apply to the resources to be listed. Filters are used to select which
resources are to be listed. If no filters are used, then all of the resources will be listed.
For example, partition information can be listed by using a filter to specify the names
or IDs of the partitions to list. Otherwise, if no filter is used, then information for all of
the partitions in the managed system will be listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value
(CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in quotation marks.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note: Certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in
quotation marks. Depending on the shell being used, nested quotation marks may need
to be preceded by an escape character, which is usually a '\' character.
-F [<attribute names>]
186
Valid filter names:
lpar_names | lpar_ids
Only one of these filters may be specified
List of the names of the attributes. If no attribute names are specified, then all attributes
will be listed.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-redundantpgvios
Specify the configured level of redundancy for the memory pools to be listed.
0
Do not require redundancy on the target managed system.
1
Only return memory pool information for those that are capable of
redundancy.
2
Return all memory pool information regardless of redundancy capabilities.
If you do not specify the parameter, memory pools capable of the currently configured
level of redundancy are returned.
Exactly one partition must be specified by either the lpar_ids filter or lpar_names filter.
--header
--help
If no suitable memory pools are found on the destination managed system, the
destination IVM generates an error message that describes the problem.
Displays a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the
attribute values that are displayed. This header record is the first record displayed. This
option is only valid when used with the -F option.
Displays the help text for this command and exit.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Examples
1. To return partition mobility capabilities for the HMC or the Integrated Virtualization Manager, type
the following command:
lslparmigr -r manager
remote_lpar_mobility_capable=1
2. To return partition mobility capabilities for the specified managed system, type the following
command:
lslparmigr -m zd25ae -r sys
inactive_lpar_mobility_capable=1,num_inactive_migrations_supported=40,
num_inactive_migrations_in_progress=0,
active_lpar_mobility_capable=1,num_active_migrations_supported=40,
num_active_migrations_in_progress=0
3. To return a list of partitions on the specified managed system and their migration state, type the
following command:
$ lslparmigr -r lpar
name=10-0EDDA,lpar_id=1,migration_state=Not Migrating
name=mptest_migration,lpar_id=2,migration_state=Not Migrating
name=lp3,lpar_id=3,migration_state=Not Migrating
name=mp_i51,lpar_id=4,migration_state=Not Migrating
name=mover2,lpar_id=5,migration_state=Migration Starting,
migration_type=active,dest_sys_name=migfspL4,
dest_lpar_id=5,source_msp_name=10-0EDDA,source_msp_id=1,
dest_msp_name=10-0EDEA,dest_msp_id=1,bytes_transmitted=10247078,
bytes_remaining=259547136,
remote_manager=miglpar9.yourcity.yourcompany.com,
remote_user=padmin
name=lpar10,lpar_id=10,migration_state=Not Migrating
4. To return a list of possible source and destination MSP pairs, type the following command:
lslparmigr -r msp -m migfspL2 -t migfspL1
source_msp_name=VIOS,source_msp_id=2,"dest_msp_names=VIOS,VIOS2",
"dest_msp_ids=1,3","ipaddr_mappings=192.168.10.10/en1/1/VIOS/192.
168.10.11/en1,192.168.20.10/en2/3/VIOS2/192.168.20.13/en0"
source_msp_name=VIOS2,source_msp_id=1,"dest_msp_names=VIOS,VIOS2",
"dest_msp_ids=1,3","ipaddr_mappings=192.168.10.12/en0/1/VIOS/192.
168.10.11/en1,192.168.20.12/en1/3/VIOS2/192.168.20.13/en0"
5. To return a list of possible and suggested mappings for virtual SCSI and virtual Ethernet adapters,
type the following command:
Alphabetical list of commands
187
lslparmigr -r virtualio -m migfspL2 -t migfspL1 --filter "lpar_ids=5"
"possible_virtual_scsi_mappings=2/VIOS/1,2/VIOS2/3",
"suggested_virtual_scsi_mappings=2/VIOS/1"
6. To return a list of existing shared processor pools on the target managed system, type the following
command:
lslparmigr -r procpool -m migfspL2 -t migfspL1 --filter "lpar_ids=5"
"shared_proc_pool_ids=0,3,6","shared_proc_pool_names=
DefaultPool,ProcPoolA,ProcPoolB"
7. To return a list of possible and suggested mappings for virtual fibre channel adapters, type the
following command:
lslparmigr -r virtualio -m migfspL2 -t migfspL1 --filter "lpar_ids=5"
"possible_virtual_scsi_mappings=2/VIOS/1",
"suggested_virtual_scsi_mappings=2/VIOS/1"
"possible_virtual_fc_mappings=4/VIOS/1,4/VIOS2/2",
"suggested_virtual_fc_mappings=4/VIOS/1"
IVM lslparutil command
Purpose
List utilization metrics for the managed system and partitions. This command is available only in an
Integrated Virtualization Manager environment.
Syntax
To list utilization metrics:
lslparutil {-r sys | pool | lpar | mempool} [ --startyear Year ] [ --startmonth Month ] [ --startday Day ] [
--starthour Hour ] [ --startminute Minute ] [ --endyear Year ] [ --endmonth Month ] [ --endday Day ] [
--endhour Hour ] [ --endminute Minute ] [ -n NumberOfEvents ] [-spread] [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F
"AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list utilization configuration attributes:
lslparutil -r config [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The lslparutil command lists utilization metrics for the managed system and partitions. The sample rate
at which these metrics are gathered can be changed, or disabled. The information gathered from this
command allows for the determination of processor utilization on a system and partition level over a
given period of time.
188
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Flags
-r ResourceType
The type of resources to list:
v -r config: List configuration attributes for utilization monitoring
– Attributes: sample_rate
– Filters: None
v -r lpar: List utilization data for logical partitions
– Attributes: time, time_bin, sys_time, event_type, resource_type, time_cycles,
lpar_id, uptime, curr_io_entitled_mem, curr_proc_mode, curr_proc_units,
curr_procs, curr_sharing_mode, curr_uncap_weight, curr_5250_cpw_percent,
curr_mem, entitled_cycles, capped_cycles, mapped_io_entitled_mem, mem_mode,
mem_overage_cooperation, phys_run_mem, uncapped_cycles, donated_cycles,
idle_cycles, run_latch_instructions, run_latch_cycles, run_mem_weight
– Filters: { lpar_ids | lpar_names}
v -r mempool: List information and statistics about memory pools
– Attributes: time, time_bin, sys_time, event_type, resource_type, page_faults,
page_in_delay, curr_pool_mem, lpar_curr_io_entitled_mem,
lpar_mapped_io_entitled_mem, lpar_run_mem, sys_firmware_pool_mem
v -r pool: List utilization data for shared processor pools
– Attributes: time, time_bin, sys_time, event_type, resource_type, time_cycles,
shared_proc_pool_id, curr_avail_pool_proc_units, configurable_pool_proc_units,
borrowed_pool_proc_units, total_pool_cycles, utilized_pool_cycles
– Filters: None
v -r sys: List utilization data for the managed system
– Attributes: time, time_bin, sys_time, event_type, resource_type, state,
configurable_sys_proc_units, configurable_sys_mem, curr_avail_sys_proc_units,
curr_avail_5250_cpw_percent, curr_avail_sys_mem, sys_firmware_mem,
proc_cycles_per_second
--startyear Year
--startmonth Month
--startday Day
--starthour Hour
--startminute Minute
--endyear Year
--endmonth Month
--endday Day
--endhour Hour
--endminute Minute
--n NumberOfEvents
--spread
-m ManagedSystem
– Filters: None
Starting year filter (default 1970)
Starting month filter (default 1) January is 1. December is 12
Starting day filter (default 1)
Starting hour filter (default 0)
Starting minute filter (default 0)
Ending year filter (default now)
Ending month filter (default now)
Ending day filter (default now)
Ending hour filter (default now)
Ending minute filter (default now)
Starting from the most recent event, the maximum number of samples to return.
Used with -n to distribute displayed samples evenly over time.
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name might either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
Alphabetical list of commands
189
--filter FilterData
The filters to apply to the resources to be listed. Filters are used to select which
resources of the specified resource type are to be listed. If no filters are used, then all of
the resources of the specified resource type will be listed. For example, specific
partitions can be listed by using a filter to specify the names or IDs of the partitions to
list. Otherwise, if no filter is used, then all the partitions in the managed system will be
listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value
(CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotation marks.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in
double quotation marks. Depending on the shell being used, nested double quotation
marks might need to be preceded by an escape character, which is usually a '\'
character.
Unless otherwise indicated, multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names for -r lpar
lpar_ids
ID of the partitions to view
-F AttributeNames
lpar_names
Name of the partitions to view
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be
displayed for each resource. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of
the attributes for the resource will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute
names will be displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the
delimiter which was specified with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when
the values of only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Attribute Names:
borrowed_pool_proc_units
Processing units that are being borrowed from powered off partitions with
dedicated processors.
capped_cycles
The number of capped processing cycles utilized by this partition since the
system started.
configurable_pool_proc_units
The number of configurable processing units in the shared pool at the time of
the sample
configurable_sys_mem
The amount of configurable system memory (in megabytes) at the time of the
sample.
190
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
configurable_sys_proc_units
The number of configurable system processing units at the time of the sample.
curr_5250_cpw_percent
The 5250 CPW percent assigned to the partition at the time of the sample.
curr_avail_5250_cpw_percent
The 5250 CPW percent available to be assigned to partitions at the time of the
sample.
curr_avail_pool_proc_units
The number of processing units available to be assigned to partitions at the
time of the sample.
curr_avail_sys_mem
The amount of memory (in megabytes) available to be assigned to partitions at
the time of the sample.
curr_avail_sys_proc_units
The number of processing units available to be assigned to partitions at the
time of the sample.
curr_io_entitled_mem
The size of memory that the logical partition is entitled to map to I/O (in
megabytes).
curr_mem
The amount of memory (in megabytes) assigned to the partition at the time of
the sample.
curr_pool_mem
The total amount of physical memory (in megabytes) in the memory pool.
curr_proc_mode
The processing mode for the partition at the time of the sample. Valid values
v ded: dedicated processor mode
v shared: shared processor mode curr_proc_units
curr_proc_units
Current number of processing units assigned to the partition. This attribute is
only valid for partitions using shared processors.
curr_procs
The number of processors or virtual processors assigned to the partition at the
time of the sample.
curr_sharing_mode
The sharing mode of the partition at the time of the sample. Valid values:
v keep_idle_procs: valid with dedicated processor mode
v share_idle_procs: valid with dedicated processor mode
v cap: capped mode. valid with shared processor mode
v uncap: uncapped mode. valid with shared processor mode
curr_uncap_weight
The current weighted average of processing priority when in uncapped
sharing mode at the time of the sample. The smaller the value, the lower the
weight. Valid values are 0-255
donated_cycles
The number of cycles donated by a partition with dedicated processors.
Alphabetical list of commands
191
entitled_cycles
The number of processing cycles to which the partition has been entitled since
the system started. This value is based on the number of processing units
assigned to the partition, and might be greater than, or smaller than the
number of cycles actually used.
event_type
The type of event. This will be displayed with a constant value of sample for
all samples except the config resource type.
idle_cycles
The number of cycles that the logical partition reported as idle. If the partition
does not have the ability to report idle cycles, this value is 0.
lpar_curr_io_entitled_mem
The total entitlement (in megabytes) of all shared memory partitions served by
the memory pool.
lpar_id The unique integer identifier for the partition.
lpar_mapped_io_entitled_mem
The total I/O mapped memory (in megabytes) of all active partitions served
by the memory pool.
lpar_run_mem
The total logical real memory in megabytes of all active partitions served by
the memory pool.
mapped_io_entitled_mem
Size of memory (in megabytes) that the logical partition has mapped to I/O
memory.
mem_mode
The partition memory mode. Valid values:
v ded - dedicated memory
v shared - shared memory
If the memory mode is shared, then the logical partition cannot be assigned
any physical I/O slots, the proc_mode attribute on the partition must be
shared, and a memory pool must exist.
Note: The Virtual I/O Server logical partition only supports the dedicated
memory mode.
page_faults
The total-page fault count of the memory pool since the initialization of the
pool, or since the last reboot of the hypervisor, whichever is more recent.
page_in_delay
The total page in delay (in microseconds) spent waiting for the page faults
since the initialization of the memory pool, or since the last reboot of the
hypervisor, whichever is more recent.
phys_run_mem
The size of physical memory (in megabytes) that is backing the logical address
space of the logical partition. This value represents the portion of the logical
memory assignment that is currently paged in the logical partition.
192
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
proc_cycles_per_second
The processing cycles per second on one physical processor. This value is static
for a particular managed system.
resource_type
The resource type queried. Valid values are sys, pool, and lpar, depending on
which value is supplied for the -r flag.
run_latch_cycles
The number of nonidle cycles used by the partition, while the run-latch is set,
since the last time the system was started.
run_latch_instructions
The number of nonidle instructions performed by the partition, while the
run-latch is set, since the last time the system was started.
run_mem_weight
Shared memory weight at run time.
sample_rate
The rate at which samples are obtained. This can be changed with the
chlparutil command. Valid values:
v 0: Samples will not be retrieved.
v 30: Samples will be retrieved every 30 seconds. This is the default value.
v 60: Samples will be retrieved every minute.
v 300: Samples will be retrieved every 5 minutes.
v 1800: Samples will be retrieved every 30 minutes.
v 3600: Samples will be retrieved every hour.
shared_proc_pool_id
The unique decimal identifier for a shared processing pool.
state
The state of the managed system at the time of the sample.
sys_firmware_mem
The amount of memory, in megabytes, on the managed system that is being
used by system firmware at the time of the sample.
sys_firmware_pool_mem
The amount of memory in the shared memory pool that is reserved for use by
the firmware. This is the greater of the current and pending values.
sys_time
The time on the managed system that the sample was taken. The time and
sys_time attributes will have the same value.
time
The time on the management partition that this sample was taken. The time
and sys_time attributes will have the same value.
time_bin
The time or sys_time represented as the number of milliseconds since January
1, 1970.
time_cycles
The number of time cycles since the system was started.
total_pool_cycles
The total number of processing cycles available in the shared pool since the
system was started.
Alphabetical list of commands
193
uncapped_cycles
The number of uncapped processing cycles utilized by this partition since the
system was started.
uptime The amount of time (in seconds) that the partition has been running at the
time of the sample.
utilized_pool_cycles
The number of processing cycles in the shared pool that have been utilized
since the system was started.
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the
attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record
displayed. This option is only valid when used with the -F option.
--header
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is accessible by all users.
Examples
1. To list the last five shared processing pool utilization metrics, type:
lslparutil -r pool -n 5
2. To calculate the shared processing pool utilization in percent over a five-minute time period, type:
lslparutil -r pool --startyear 2006 --startmonth 10 --startday 4
--starthour 15 --startminute 23 --endyear 2006 --endmonth 10
--endday 4 --endhour 15 --endminute 28
-F time,total_pool_cycles,utilized_pool_cycles
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
15:27:56,449504263518104,372389272879
15:27:26,449442382657200,372195239995
15:26:56,449382561908822,371998920942
15:26:26,449320667371346,371797239591
15:25:56,449258781703684,371592366752
15:25:26,449196894951060,371394157970
15:24:56,449135006535822,371192089089
15:24:27,449075176369863,369243635687
15:23:56,449013298087726,369040980263
15:23:26,448951445376558,368850062933
Pool utilization = (utilized_pool_cycle / total_pool_cycles) * 100
Pool utilization = ((372389272879 - 368850062933) /
(449504263518104 - 448951445376558)) * 100
Pool utilization = 0.64%
3. To calculate the shared processing pool size over a five-minute time period, type:
lslparutil -r pool --startyear 2006 --startmonth 10 --startday 4
--starthour 15 --startminute 23 --endyear 2006 --endmonth 10
--endday 4 --endhour 15 --endminute 28 -F time,time_cycles,total_pool_cycles
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
10/04/2006
194
15:27:56,112376065883848,449504263518104
15:27:26,112360595668767,449442382657200
15:26:56,112345640481652,449382561908822
15:26:26,112330166847247,449320667371346
15:25:56,112314695430447,449258781703684
15:25:26,112299223741951,449196894951060
15:24:56,112283751639775,449135006535822
15:24:27,112268794096846,449075176369863
15:23:56,112253324526335,449013298087726
15:23:26,112237861348574,448951445376558
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Pool size = total_pool_cycles / time_cycles
Pool size = (449504263518104 - 448951445376558) /
(112376065883848 - 112237861348574)
Pool size = 4
4. To calculate the processing utilization in percent for partition 1 over the last 11 samples, type:
lslparutil -r lpar -F time,lpar_id,entitled_cycles,capped_cycles,uncapped_cycles
--filter lpar_ids=1 -n 11
06/26/2005
06/26/2005
06/26/2005
06/26/2005
06/26/2005
06/26/2005
06/26/2005
06/26/2005
06/26/2005
06/26/2005
06/26/2005
12:13:04,1,13487973395246,353524992184,93964052971
12:12:33,1,13486720703117,353490258336,93964052971
12:12:03,1,13485467110700,353456792591,93964052971
12:11:33,1,13484213859686,353423048854,93964052971
12:11:03,1,13482961098044,353386674795,93964052971
12:10:32,1,13481706673802,353350985013,93964052971
12:10:02,1,13480453156357,353317211748,93964052971
12:09:32,1,13479199972343,353283141535,93964052971
12:09:02,1,13477946765207,353248812551,93964052971
12:08:31,1,13476693184663,353213970760,93964052971
12:08:01,1,13475439617080,353179654833,93964052971
Processor utilization = ((capped_cycles + uncapped_cycles)
/ entitled_cycles) * 100
Processor utilization = (((353524992184 - 353179654833)
+ (93964052971 - 93964052971))
/ (13487973395246 - 13475439617080)) * 100
Processor utilization = 2.76%
5. To calculate the most recent number of utilized processor units for partition 1, type:
lslparutil -r lpar -F time,time_cycles,capped_cycles,uncapped_cycles -n 2 \
--filter lpar_ids=1
10/06/2006 09:42:58,190122585897822,836322334068,1209599213218
10/06/2006 09:42:28,190107628555119,836215824328,1209507899652
Processor units used = (capped_cycles +
Processor units used = ((836322334068 + (1209599213218
(190122585897822
Processor units used = 0.01
uncapped_cycles) / time_cycles
836215824328)
- 1209507899652)) /
- 190107628555119)
6. To display 5 entries spread over the last day, type:
lslparutil -r lpar --startyear 2005 --startmonth 6 --startday 25 \
--starthour 14 --startminute 20 --endyear 2005 --endmonth 6 \
--endday 26 --endhour 14 --endminute 20 -F time,lpar_id,entitled_cycles,\
capped_cycles,uncapped_cycles -n 5 --spread
06/26/2005
06/26/2005
06/26/2005
06/25/2005
06/25/2005
14:20:03,1,64074629124428,2634420796918,3335839807455
08:20:03,1,63180190141506,2597103712238,3292339240560
02:20:02,1,62285686629911,2559847748332,3249081303922
20:20:01,1,61391161857754,2522594738730,3205850397796
14:20:01,1,60496719757782,2485459490629,3162821474641
Note: This data is particularly useful for graphing utilization data.
7. To view the number of donated cycles:
lslparutil -r lpar -F donated_cycles
Related Information
The chlparutil and lssyscfg commands.
lslv command
Purpose
Displays information about a logical volume.
Alphabetical list of commands
195
Syntax
lslv [ -map | -pv ] LogicalVolume [ -field FieldName ] [ -fmt Delimiter ]
lslv -free [ -field Fieldname ] [ -fmt Delimiter ]
Description
The lslv command displays the characteristics and status of the LogicalVolume or lists the logical volume
allocation map for the physical partitions on the PhysicalVolume in which the logical volume is located.
The logical volume can be a name or identifier.
If no flags are specified, the following status is displayed:
Logical volume
Volume group
Logical volume identifier
Permission
Volume group state
Logical volume state
Type
Write verify
Mirror write consistency
Max LPs
PP size
Copies
Schedule policy
LPs
PPs
Stale partitions
Bad blocks
Inter-policy
Strictness
Intra-policy
Upper bound
Relocatable
Mount point
Label
PV distribution
striping width
196
Name of the logical volume. Logical volume names must be unique systemwide and
can range from 1 to 15 characters.
Name of the volume group. Volume group names must be unique systemwide and can
range from 1 to 15 characters.
Identifier of the logical volume.
Access permission; read-only or read-write.
State of the volume group. If the volume group is activated with the activatevg
command, the state is either active/complete (indicating all physical volumes are
active) or active/partial (indicating all physical volumes are not active). If the volume
group is not activated with the activatevg command, the state is inactive.
State of the logical volume. The Opened/stale status indicates the logical volume is
open but contains physical partitions that are not current. Opened/syncd indicates the
logical volume is open and synchronized. Closed indicates the logical volume has not
been opened.
Logical volume type.
Write verify state of On or Off.
Mirror write consistency state of Yes or No.
Maximum number of logical partitions the logical volume can hold.
Size of each physical partition.
Number of physical partitions created for each logical partition when allocating.
Sequential or parallel scheduling policy.
Number of logical partitions currently in the logical volume.
Number of physical partitions currently in the logical volume.
Number of physical partitions in the logical volume that are not current.
Bad block relocation policy.
Inter-physical allocation policy.
Current state of allocation. Possible values are strict, nonstrict, or superstrict. A
strict allocation states that no copies for a logical partition are allocated on the same
physical volume. If the allocation does not follow the strict criteria, is called nonstrict. A
nonstrict allocation states that at least one occurrence of two physical partitions belong
to the same logical partition. A superstrict allocation states that no partition from one
mirror copy may reside the same disk as another mirror copy.
Intra-physical allocation policy.
If the logical volume is super strict, upper bound is the maximum number of disks in a
mirror copy.
Indicates whether the partitions can be relocated if a reorganization of partition
allocation takes place.
File system mount point for the logical volume, if applicable.
Specifies the label field for the logical volume.
The distribution of the logical volume within the volume group. The physical volumes
used, the number of logical partitions on each physical volume, and the number of
physical partitions on each physical volume are shown.
The number of physical volumes being striped across.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
strip size
The number of bytes per stripe.
The -free flag displays logical volumes that are available to be used as backing devices for virtual
storage.
Full scripting support is available by using the -field FieldNames and -fmt Delimiter flags. The -field flag
will allow the user to select which output fields to display and in what order, while the -fmt flag
provides scriptable output. The output fields will be displayed in the order they appear on the command
line.
Flags
-free
-field
Lists only logical volumes that are available for use as a backing device for virtual
SCSI.
Specifies the list of fields to display. The following fields are supported if no flags are
specified:
lvname Name of the logical volume. Logical volume names must be unique
systemwide and can range from 1 to 15 characters.
vgname
Name of the volume group. Volume group names must be unique systemwide
and can range from 1 to 15 characters.
lvid
Identifier of the logical volume.
access Access permission: read-only or read-write.
vgstate State of the volume group. If the volume group is activated with the
activatevg command, the state is either active/complete (indicating all
physical volumes are active) or active/partial (indicating all physical
volumes are not active). If the volume group is not activated with the
deactivatevg command, the state is inactive.
lvstate
State of the logical volume. The opened/stale status indicates the logical
volume is open but contains physical partitions that are not current.
Opened/syncd indicates the logical volume is open and synchronized. Closed
indicates the logical volume has not been opened.
type
Logical volume type.
wverify
Write verify state of on or off.
mwc
Mirror write consistency state of on or off.
maxlps Maximum number of logical partitions the logical volume can hold.
ppsize
Size of each physical partition.
copies
Number of physical partitions created for each logical partition when
allocating.
spolicy Sequential or parallel scheduling policy.
lps
Number of logical partitions currently in the logical volume.
pps
Number of physical partitions currently in the logical volume.
stale
Number of physical partitions in the logical volume that are not current.
bbpolicy
Bad block relocation policy.
Alphabetical list of commands
197
inter
Inter-physical allocation policy.
intra
Intra-physical allocation policy.
ubound
If the logical volume is super strict, upper bound is the maximum number of
disks in a mirror copy.
relocatable
Indicates whether the partitions can be relocated if a reorganization of
partition allocation takes place.
mount
File system mount point for the logical volume, if applicable.
label
Specifies the label field for the logical volume.
separatepv
The strictness value. Current state of allocation, strict, nonstrict, or superstrict.
A strict allocation states that no copies for a logical partition are allocated on
the same physical volume. If the allocation does not follow the strict criteria, it
is called nonstrict. A nonstrict allocation states that at least one occurrence of
two physical partitions belong to the same logical partition. A superstrict
allocation states that no partition from one mirror copy may reside the same
disk as another mirror copy.
serialio Serialization of overlapping IOs state of yes or no. If serialization is turned on
(yes), then overlapping IOs are not allowed on a block range, and only a single
IO in a block range is processed at any one time. Most applications, such as
file systems and databases, perform serialization; therefore, serialization should
be turned off (no). The default setting for new logical volumes is no.
The following fields are supported if the -pv flag is specified:
pvname
Physical volume disk name
copies
The following three fields:
v The number of logical partitions containing at least one physical partition
(no copies) on the physical volume
v The number of logical partitions containing at least two physical partitions
(one copy) on the physical volume
v The number of logical partitions containing three physical partitions (two
copies) on the physical volume
inband
The percentage of physical partitions on the physical volume that belong to
the logical volume and were allocated within the physical volume region
specified by Intra-physical allocation policy.
dist
198
The number of physical partitions allocated within each section of the physical
volume: outer edge, outer middle, center, inner middle, and inner edge of the
physical volume.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
The following fields are supported if the -map flag is specified:
lpnum Logical partition number.
pvname1
Physical volume name where the logical partition's first physical partition is
located.
ppnum1
First physical partition number allocated to the logical partition.
pvname2
Physical volume name where the logical partition's second physical partition
(first copy) is located.
ppnum2
Second physical partition number allocated to the logical partition.
The following fields are supported if the -free flag is specified:
lvname
Logical partition number.
size
Physical volume name where the logical partition's first physical partition is
located.
vgname
-fmt
-map
-pv
Name of the volume group. Volume group names must be unique systemwide
and can range from 1 to 15 characters.
Specifies a delimiter character to separate output fields.
Lists the following fields for each logical partition:
LPs
Logical partition number.
PV1
Physical volume name where the logical partition's first physical partition is
located.
PP1
First physical partition number allocated to the logical partition.
PV2
Physical volume name where the logical partition's second physical partition
(first copy) is located.
PP2
Second physical partition number allocated to the logical partition.
Lists the following fields for each physical volume in the logical volume:
PV
Physical volume name.
Copies The following three fields:
v The number of logical partitions containing at least one physical partition
(no copies) on the physical volume
v The number of logical partitions containing at least two physical partitions
(one copy) on the physical volume
v The number of logical partitions containing three physical partitions (two
copies) on the physical volume
In band
The percentage of physical partitions on the physical volume that belong to
the logical volume and were allocated within the physical volume region
specified by Intra-physical allocation policy.
Distribution
The number of physical partitions allocated within each section of the physical
volume: outer edge, outer middle, center, inner middle, and inner edge of the
physical volume.
Alphabetical list of commands
199
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To display information about logical volume lv03, type:
lslv lv03
Information about logical volume lv03, its logical and physical partitions, and the volume group to
which it belongs is displayed.
2. To display information about logical volume lv03 by physical volume, type:
lslv -pv lv03
The characteristics and status of lv03 are displayed, with the output arranged by physical volume.
3. To display a list of logical volumes that can be used as backing devices, type:
lslv -free
The system displays a message similar to the following:
LV NAME
lv00
lv01
4.
SIZE(megabytes) VOLUME GROUP
64
rootvg
64
rootvg
To display only the type and volume group of logical volume hd6 and separate the data by a :
(colon) , type:
lslv hd6 -field type vgname -fmt :
The system displays a message similar to the following:
paging:rootvg
Related Information
The mklv command, the extendlv command, and the rmlv command.
lsmap command
Purpose
Displays the mapping between physical, logical, and virtual devices.
Syntax
lsmap { -vadapter ServerVirtualAdapter | -plc PhysicalLocationCode | -all } [ -type BackingDeviceType | -net
| -npiv] [ -field FieldNames ] [ -fmt Delimiter ]
lsmap -ams { -vtd PagingDevice | -all } [ -type BackingDeviceType ] [ -field FieldNames ] [ -fmt Delimiter ]
Description
The lsmap command displays the mapping between virtual host adapters and the physical devices they
are backed to. Given an adapter name (ServerVirtualAdapter) or physical location code
(PhysicalLocationCode) of a server virtual adapter, the device name of each connected virtual target device
(child devices), its logical unit number, backing device(s) and the backing devices physical location code
is displayed. If the -net flag is specified the supplied device must be a virtual server Ethernet adapter.
200
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
The -fmt flag divides the output by a user-specified delimiter/character (delimiter). The delimiter can be
any non-white space character. This format is provided to facilitate scripting.
The -type flag limits the types of backing devices displayed to the user-specified list, BackingDeviceType.
With the exception of the net type, any combination of device types may be specified. The net type
cannot be combined with any other type.
The -npiv flag is used to display the server binding information between the virtual fibre channel and the
physical fibre channel adapter. It is also used to display client adapter attributes that are being sent to the
server adapter.
Flags
-all
-ams
-field FieldName
Specifies the lsmap output that should be displayed for all virtual SCSI devices. If used
with the -net flag, virtual Ethernet adapters are displayed. If used with the -npiv flag,
virtual fibre channel adapters are displayed.
Displays paging space device information used in active memory sharing.
Specifies the list of fields to display.
Note: The order that you specify the attributes is not guaranteed to be the same order
as they are returned.
For virtual SCSI (default), the following fields are supported:
svsa
Server virtual adapter.
physloc
The physical location code of the server virtual adapter.
clientid
Client partition ID.
vtd
Virtual target device.
lun
Logical unit number.
backing
Backing device.
bdphysloc
The physical location code of the backing device.
status
Virtual target device status.
For shared Ethernet adapter (-net flag), the following fields are supported:
svea
Virtual Ethernet adapter.
physloc
The physical location code of the server virtual adapter.
sea
Shared Ethernet adapter.
backing
Backing device.
bdphysloc
The physical location code of the backing device.
status
Shared Ethernet adapter status.
Alphabetical list of commands
201
For NPIV (-npiv flag), the following fields are supported:
name
Virtual fibre channel adapter name.
physloc
The physical location code of the server virtual fibre channel adapter.
clntid
Client logical partition ID.
clntname
Client logical partition name.
clntos
The operating system on the client logical partition.
status
Virtual fibre channel adapter status.
fc
Physical fibre channel adapter name.
fcphysloc
The physical location of the fibre channel adapter.
ports
Physical fibre channel port number.
flags
Virtual fibre channel adapter flags.
vfcclient
Client virtual fibre channel adapter name.
vfcclientdrc
Client virtual fibre channel adapter used for Dynamic Reconfiguration
Connection (DRC).
For active memory sharing (-ams flag), the following fields are supported:
paging Paging virtual target device.
streamid
Stream ID.
clientid
Client logical partition ID.
status
Paging virtual target device status.
redundancy
Redundancy usage for the paging VIOS logical partitions.
backing
Backing device.
-fmt delimiter
-net
-npiv
-plc PhysicalLocatoinCode
202
poolid
Memory pool ID.
vasi
Virtual Asynchronous Services Interface (VASI) device name.
pager
Pager device name.
vbsd
Virtual Block Storage Device (VBSD) name.
Specifies a delimiter character to separate output fields.
Specifies the supplied device is a server virtual Ethernet adapter or if used with the -all
flag all virtual Ethernet adapters and backing devices are displayed.
Displays NPIV binding information.
Specifies the device physical location code of a server virtual adapter. This flag cannot
be used with the -vadapter flag.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-type
Specifies the type of devices to display. The following fields are supported:
disk
List physical backing devices.
lv
List logical volume backing devices.
optical
List optical backing devices.
tape
List tape backed devices.
file
List file backed devices.
file_disk
List file backed disk devices.
file_opt
List file backed optical devices.
List network devices. (This option cannot be used in combination with disk, lv,
or optical)
Specifies the device name of a server virtual adapter. This flag cannot be used with the
-plc flag.
net
-vadapter
VirtualServerAdapter
-vtd PagingDevice
Output Field Definitions
Field
Description
SVSA
Server Virtual SCSI Adaper
Physloc
Physical Location Code
VTD
Virtual Target Device
LUN
Logical Unit Number
SVEA
Server Virtual Ethernet Adapter
SEA
Shared Ethernet Adapter
Exit Status
Return code
Description
11
No VTDs associated with device
12
No SEAs associated with device
15
Specified device is not a server virtual SCSI adapter
16
Specified device is not a server virtual Ethernet adapter
17
Specified device in not in the AVAILABLE state
63
Specified device is not a virtual fibre channel adapter on a server logical partition.
Examples
1. To list all virtual target devices and backing devices mapped to the server virtual SCSI adapter
vnode2, type:
lsmap -vadapter vhost2
The system displays a message similar to the following:
SVSA
Physloc
Client Partition ID
------------ -------------------------------------------- -----------------vhost0
U9111.520.10004BA-V1-C2
0x00000004
Alphabetical list of commands
203
VTD
Status
LUN
Backing device
Physloc
vtscsi0
Available
0x8100000000000000
vtd0-1
VTD
LUN
Backing device
Physloc
vtscsi1
0x8200000000000000
vtd0-2
VTD
Status
LUN
Backing device
Physloc
vtscsi2
Available
0x8300000000000000
hdisk2
U787A.001.0397658-P1-T16-L5-L0
2. To list the shared Ethernet adapter and backing device mapped to the virtual server Ethernet adapter
ent4, type:
lsmap -vadapter
ent4 -net
The system displays a message similar to the following:
SVEA
Physloc
------ -------------------------------------------ent4 P2-I1/E1
SEA
Backing device
Status
Physloc
ent5
ent1
Available
P2-I4/E1
3. To list the shared Ethernet adapter and backing device mapped to the virtual server Ethernet adapter
ent5 in script format separated by a : (colon), type:
lsmap -vadapter ent5 -fmt ":"
The system displays a message similar to the following:
ent5:ent8:ent2
4. To list all virtual target devices and backing devices, where the backing devices are of type disk or lv,
type:
lsmap -all -type disk lv
The system displays a message similar to the following:
SVSA
Physloc
Client Partition ID
--------------- -------------------------------------------- -----------------vhost0
U9117.570.10D1B0E-V4-C3
0x00000000
VTD
Status
LUN
Backing device
Physloc
vtscsi0
Available
0x8100000000000000
hdisk0
U7879.001.DQD0KN7-P1-T12-L3-L0
VTD
Status
LUN
Backing device
Physloc
vtscsi2
Available
0x8200000000000000
lv04
SVSA
ID
204
Physloc
Client Partition
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
--------------- -------------------------------------------- -----------------vhost1
U9117.570.10D1B0E-V4-C4
0x00000000
VTD
Status
LUN
Backing device
Physloc
vtscsi1
Available
0x8100000000000000
lv03
5. To list NPIV mapping information, type:
lsmap -all -npiv
The system displays a message similar to the following:
Name
======
vfchost0
Physloc
ClntID ClntName ClntOS
======================
===== ========== =====
U8203.E4A.HV40026-V1-C12
1
HV-40026
AIX
Status:NOT_LOGGED_IN
FC name:fcs0
FC loc code:U789C.001.0607088-P1-C5-T1
Ports logged in:3
Flags:1 <not_mapped, not_connected>
VFC client name:
VFC client DRC:
Related Information
The cfgdev command, the chdev command, the chpath command, the lsdev command, the lspath
command, the mkpath command, the mkvdev command, the rmdev command, the rmpath command.
IVM lsmemdev command
Purpose
Lists block storage devices on the Virtual I/O Server that are capable of being added to a shared memory
pool for use as paging space devices.
Syntax
lsmemdev -r avail [-m ManagedSystem ] [-p <VIOS LPAR name> | --id <VIOS LPAR ID>] [--min
<minimum size in MB>] [--max <maximum size in MB> [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ]
[--header] [--help]
Description
The lsmemdev command lists block storage devices on the Virtual I/O Server that are capable of being
added to a shared memory pool for use as paging space devices. Only devices in the available state are
displayed.
Flags
-r ResourceType
-m ManagedSystem
The type of resources to list:
avail: available resources
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because only one system is
managed. The name can either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be
in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and
ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
Alphabetical list of commands
205
--filter FilterData
The filters to apply to the resources to be listed. Filters are used to select which
resources of the specified resource type are to be listed. If no filters are used, all of the
resources of the specified resource type are listed. For example, specific logical
partitions can be listed by using a filter to specify the names or IDs of the logical
partitions to list. Otherwise, if no filter is used, all the logical partitions in the managed
system are listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma-separated value
(CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in quotation marks.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma-separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in
quotation marks. Depending on the shell being used, nested quotation marks might
need to be preceded by an escape character, which is usually a backslash (\) character.
Unless otherwise indicated, multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names:
-F AttributeNames
types | storage_pools | redundant
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be
displayed for each resource. If no attribute names are specified, values for all of the
attributes for the resource are displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values are displayed. No attribute names
are displayed. The attribute values displayed are separated by the delimiter which was
specified with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when
the values of only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Attribute names for partitions:
device_name
The Virtual I/O Server name of a block storage device.
phys_loc
If the device has a physical location code, this attribute is displayed by default
with the physical location code as the value. If the device does not have a
physical location code, this attribute is not displayed by default and has a
blank value.
redundant_capable
This attribute is not displayed by default, but if requested has a value of 0.
size
Size of the block storage device in megabytes.
storage_pool
If the device comes from a storage pool, this attribute is displayed by default
with the storage pool as the value. If the device does not come from a storage
pool, this attribute is not displayed by default and has a blank value.
type
Type of the underlying device. Valid values follow:
v logical
v phys
v storage_pool
206
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Displays a header record, which is a delimiter-separated list of attribute names for the
attribute values that are displayed. This header record is the first record displayed. This
option is only valid when used with the -F option.
--header
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is accessible by all users.
Examples
To list the storage devices that are capable of being added to a memory pool, type:
lsmemdev -r avail
Related Information
The lshwres and chhwres commands.
lsnetsvc command
Purpose
Displays the status of a network service.
Syntax
lsnetsvc NetworkService
Description
The lsnetsvc command displays the status of a network service. Use the NetworkService parameter to
specify which service should have its status displayed.
Parameters
NetworkService
Specify on the following values:
cimserver
Returns the status of the cimserver daemon.
inetd
Returns the status of the inetd subsystem. The inetd subsystem must be in the
active state for the telnet and ftp daemons to be active. If the inetd subsystem is
in the inoperative state, when you start the startnetsvc command with any of the
supported network services it reactivates the inetd subsystem.
ssh
Returns the status of the ssh daemon.
telnet
Returns the status of the telnet daemon.
ftp
Returns the status of the ftp daemon.
xntpd
Returns the status of the xntpd daemon.
Alphabetical list of commands
207
Exit Status
Invalid network service
9
Examples
1. To list the status of the inetd subsystem, type:
lsnetsvc inetd
This command will return either active or not active.
2. To list the status of the telnet daemon, type:
lsnetsvc telnet
This command will return either active or not active.
3. To list the status of the ftp daemon, enter:
lsnetsvc ftp
This command will return either active or not active.
Related Information
The entstat command, the hostmap command, the hostname command, the mktcpip command, the
netstat command, the optimizenet command, the startnetsvc command, and the stopnetsvc command.
lsnports command
Purpose
Lists available ports that are capable of N_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV) and related information.
Syntax
lsnports [ -fmt Delimiter ] [ -field Fieldname ]
Description
The lsnports command displays information for all the ports capable of NPIV. If you use the name of the
adapter driver (for a particular physical port) in the vfcmap command, the map_port attribute is set for a
virtual fibre channel adapter on the server logical partition. This attribute maps the virtual fibre channel
adapter on the server logical partition to a physical fibre channel port.
Without a flag, information is displayed in a column. Specifying the -fmt flag formats the output with a
specified delimiter. If no NPIV ports are in the Virtual I/O Server logical partition, the error code
E_NO_NPIV_PORTS(62) is displayed.
Flags
-fmt delimiter
208
Specifies a delimiter character to separate output fields.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Specifies a list of fields to be displayed. The following fields are supported:
-field
name
Physical port name
physloc
Physical port location code
fabric
Fabric support
tports
Total number of NPIV ports
aports
Number of available NPIV ports
swwpns
Total number of target worldwide port names supported
awwpns
Number of target worldwide port names available
Output Field Definitions
Field
Description
name
Physical port name
physloc
Physical port location code
fabric
Fabric support
tports
Total number of NPIV ports
aports
Number of available NPIV ports
swwpns
Total number of target worldwide port names supported
awwpns
Number of target worldwide port names available
Exit Status
Return code
Description
62
System does not have ports capable of NPIV.
Examples
1. To list all the NPIV-capable ports, type:
lsnports
The system displays a message similar to the following:
Name
fcs0
fcs1
physloc
fabric tports aports swwpns awwpns
U789D.001.DQDMLWV-P1-C1-T1
1
64
64
2048
2047
U787A.001.DPM0WVZ-P1-C1-T2
1
63
62
504
496
2. To list all the NPIV-capable ports in script format separated by two colons (::), type:
lsnports -fmt "::"
The system displays a message similar to the following:
fcs0::U789D.001.DQDMLWV-P1-C1-T1::1::64::64::2048::2047
fcs1::U787A.001.DPM0WVZ-P1-C1-T2::1::63::62::504::496
3. To list specific fields (name, swwpns, and awwpns) of all the NPIV-capable ports, type:
lsnports -field name swwpns awwpns
The system displays a message similar to the following:
Alphabetical list of commands
209
name
fcs0
swwpns
2048
awwpns
2047
Related Information
The lsmap and vfcmap commands.
lspath command
Purpose
Displays information about paths to a MultiPath I/O (MPIO) capable device.
Syntax
lspath [ -dev DeviceName ] [ -pdev Parent ] [ -status Status ] [ -conn Connection ] [ -field FieldName ] [ -fmt
Delimiter ]
lspath -dev DeviceName -pdev Parent [ -conn Connection ] -lsattr [ -attr Attribute... ]
lspath -dev DeviceName -pdev Parent [ -conn Connection ] -range -attr Attribute
Description
The lspath command displays one of three types of information about paths to an MPIO capable device.
It either displays the operational status for one or more paths to a single device, or it displays one or
more attributes for a single path to a single MPIO capable device. The first syntax shown above displays
the operational status for one or more paths to a particular MPIO capable device. The second syntax
displays one or more attributes for a single path to a particular MPIO capable device. Finally, the third
syntax displays the possible range of values for an attribute for a single path to a particular MPIO
capable device.
Displaying Path Status with the lspath Command
When displaying path status, the set of paths to display is obtained by searching the device configuration
database for paths that match the following criteria:
v The target device name matches the device specified with the -dev flag. If the -dev flag is not present,
then the target device is not used in the criteria.
v The parent device name matches the device specified with the -pdev flag. If the -pdev flag is not
present, then parent is not used in the criteria.
v The connection matches the connection specified with the -conn flag. If the -conn flag is not present,
then connection is not used in the criteria.
v The path status matches status specified with the -status flag. If the -status flag is not present, the path
status is not used in the criteria.
If none of the -dev, -pdev, -conn, or -status flags are specified, then all paths known to the system are
displayed.
By default, this command will display the information in columnar form. When no flags are specified
that qualify the paths to display, the format of the output is:
status device
parent
Possible values that can appear for the status column are:
210
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
enabled
Indicates that the path is configured and operational. It will be considered when paths are
selected for IO.
disabled
Indicates that the path is configured, but not currently operational. It has been manually disabled
and will not be considered when paths are selected for IO.
failed Indicates that the path is configured, but it has had IO failures that have rendered it unusable. It
will not be considered when paths are selected for IO.
defined
Indicates that the path has not been configured into the device driver.
missing
Indicates that the path was defined in a previous boot, but it was not detected in the most recent
boot of the system.
detected
Indicates that the path was detected in the most recent boot of the system, but for some reason it
was not configured. A path should only have this status during boot and so this status should
never appear as a result of the lspath command.
Displaying Path Attributes with the lspath Command
When displaying attributes for a path, the path must be fully qualified. Multiple attributes for a path can
be displayed, but attributes belonging to multiple paths cannot be displayed in a single invocation of the
lspath command. Therefore, in addition to the -lsattr, -dev, and -pdev flags, the -conn flags are required
to uniquely identify a single path. For example:
v if only one path between a device and a specific parent, the -conn flag is not required
v if there are multiple paths between a device and a specific parent, the -conn flag is required
Furthermore, the -status flag is not allowed.
By default, this command will display the information in columnar form.
attribute
value
description
user_settable
Flags
-attr Attribute
-lsattr
-dev Name
-field FieldNames
-fmt Delimiter
-pdev Parent
Identifies the specific attribute to list. The 'Attribute' is the name of a path specific
attribute. When this flag is provided, only the identified attribute is displayed. Multiple
instances of this flag may be used to list multiple attributes. If this flag is not specified
at all, all attributes associated with the identified path will be listed.
Displays the attribute names, current values, descriptions, and user-settable flag values
for a specific path.
Specifies the logical device name of the target device whose path information is to be
displayed.
Specifies the list of fields to display. The following fields are supported:
status
Status of the path
name
Name of the device
parent
Name of the parent device
conn
Path connection.
Specifies a delimiter character to separate output fields.
Indicates the logical device name of the parent device of the path(s) to be displayed.
Alphabetical list of commands
211
Displays the legal values for an attribute name. The -range flag displays the list
attribute values in a vertical column as follows:
-range
Value1
Value2
.
.
ValueN
The -range flag displays the range attribute values as x...n(+i) where x is the start of the
range, n is the end of the range, and i is the increment.
The -status Status flag indicates the status to use in qualifying the paths to be
displayed. When displaying path information, the allowable values for this flag are:
-status Status
enabled
Display paths that are enabled for MPIO path selection.
disabled
Display paths that are disabled from MPIO path selection.
failed
Display paths that are failed due to IO errors.
available
Display paths whose path_status is PATH_AVAILABLE (that is, paths that are
configured in the system, includes enabled, disabled, and failed paths).
defined
Display paths whose path_status is PATH_DEFINED.
missing
Display paths whose path_status is PATH_MISSING.
Indicates the connection information to use in qualifying the paths to be displayed.
-conn Connection
Exit Status
Return code
Description
1
Invalid status value.
Examples
1. To display, without column headers, the set of paths whose operational status is disabled, enter:
lspath -status disabled
The system will display a message similar to the following:
disabled hdisk1
disabled hdisk2
disabled hdisk23
disabled hdisk25
scsi1
scsi1
scsi8
scsi8
2. To display the set of paths whose operational status is failed, enter:
lspath -status failed
The system will display a message similar to the following:
failed hdisk1
scsi1
failed hdisk2
scsi1
failed hdisk23 scsi8
failed hdisk25 scsi8
3. If the target device is a SCSI disk, to display all attributes for the path to parent scsi0 at connection
5,0, use the command:
lspath -dev hdisk10 -pdev scsi0 -conn "5,0" -lsattr
212
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
The system will display a message similar to the following:
weight
1
Order of path failover selection
true
Related Information
The lsmap command, the mkpath command, the chpath command, and the rmpath command.
lspv command
Purpose
Displays information about a physical volume within a volume group.
Syntax
lspv [ -avail | -free | -size ][ -field Fieldname... ] [ -fmt Delimiter ]
lspv [ -map | -lv | -pv | -size] PhysicalVolume
lspv [ -map | -lv | -pv] PhysicalVolume [-field Fieldname ] [ -fmt Delimiter ]
Description
The lspv command displays information about the physical volume if the specific physical volume name
is given. If the lspv command is run without any arguments, the default is to print every known physical
volume in the system along with its physical disk name, physical volume identifiers (PVIDs), to which
volume group, if any, the physical volume belongs, and the state if the volume group is active.
When the PhysicalVolume parameter is used, the following characteristics of the specified physical volume
are displayed:
Physical volume
Volume group
PV Identifier
VG Identifier
PVstate
Allocatable
Logical volumes
Stale PPs
VG descriptors
PP size
Total PPs
Free PPs
Used PPs
Free distribution
Used distribution
Name of the physical volume
Name of volume group. Volume group names must be unique systemwide names and
can be from 1 to 15 characters long.
The physical volume identifier for this physical disk.
The volume group identifier of which this physical disk is a member.
State of the physical volume. If the volume group that contains the physical volume is
activated with the activatevg command, the state is active, missing, or removed. If the
physical volume is deactivated with the deactivatevg command, the state is varied off.
Allocation permission for this physical volume.
Number of logical volumes using the physical volume.
Number of physical partitions on the physical volume that are not current.
Number of volume group descriptors on the physical volume.
Size of physical partitions on the volume.
Total number of physical partitions on the physical volume.
Number of free physical partitions on the physical volume.
Number of used physical partitions on the physical volume.
Number of free partitions available in each intra-physical volume section.
Number of used partitions in each intra-physical volume section.
Flags
-avail
Lists only physical volumes that are available for use as a backing device for virtual
SCSI. If the physical volume is assigned to a shared memory pool (to be used as a
paging space device by a shared memory partition), it is not available and is not listed.
Alphabetical list of commands
213
-free
-field FieldNames
Lists only physical volumes that are available for use as a backing device. If the
physical volume is already used as a backing device or is assigned to a shared memory
pool (to be used as a paging space device by a shared memory partition), it is not
available and is not listed.
Specifies the list of fields to display. The following fields are supported if no physical
volume is specified:
pvname
Physical volume disk name
pvid
Physical volume identifier
vgname
Volume group the physical volume is in
pvstate
Physical volume state (active, missing, removed, varied off)
The following fields are supported if a physical volume is specified:
pvname
Physical volume disk name
vgname
Volume group the physical volume is in
pvid
Physical volume identifier
vgid
Volume group identifier
pvstate
Physical volume state (active, missing, removed, varied off)
allocatable
Allocation permission for this physical volume.
stale
Number of stale partitions on the disk
ppsize
Physical partition size
numlv Number of logical volumes
size
Number of physical partitions and total disk size
vgds
Number of volume group descriptor areas within the volume group.
free
Number of free partitions and free space
pvused
Number of used partitions and used space
maxreq
Maximum transfer size of physical volume
freedist
Number of free partitions available in each intra-physical volume section.
usedist Number of used partitions in each intra-physical volume section
hotspare
214
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-field FieldNames
(continued)
The following fields are supported if the -pv flag is specified:
range
A range of consecutive physical partitions contained on a single region of the
physical volume.
ppstate
The current state of the physical partitions: free, used, stale, or vgda
region
The intra-physical volume region in which the partitions are located.
lvname
The name of the logical volume to which the physical partitions are allocated.
type
The type of the logical volume to which the partitions are allocated.
mount File system mount point for the logical volume, if applicable.
The following fields are supported if the -map flag is specified:
physical
Physical volume name and physical partition number.
logical Logical volume name and logical partition number. If mirrored the mirror
number is also shown. If the partition is stale this is also shown.
The following fields are supported if the -free or -avail flag is specified:
pvname
Physical volume disk name.
pvid
Physical volume identifier
size
Size of the physical volume.
The following fields are supported if the -size flag and a physical volume are specified:
pvname
Physical volume disk name.
pvid
-fmt Delimiter
-lv
Physical volume identifier
size
Size of the physical volume.
Specifies a delimiter character to separate output fields.
Lists the following fields for each logical volume on the physical volume:
LVname
Name of the logical volume to which the physical partitions are allocated.
LPs
The number of logical partitions within the logical volume that are contained
on this physical volume.
PPs
The number of physical partitions within the logical volume that are contained
on this physical volume.
Distribution
The number of physical partitions, belonging to the logical volume, that are
allocated within each of the following sections of the physical volume: outer
edge, outer middle, center, inner middle and inner edge of the physical
volume.
Mount Point
File system mount point for the logical volume, if applicable.
Alphabetical list of commands
215
Lists the following fields for each logical volume on the physical volume:
PVname:PPnum [LVname: LPnum [:Copynum] [PPstate]] Where:
-map
PVname
Name of the physical volume as specified by the system.
PPnum Physical partition number.
LVname
Name of the logical volume to which the physical partitions are allocated.
Logical volume names must be system-wide unique names, and can range
from 1 to 64 characters.
LPnum Logical partition number. Logical partition numbers can range from 1 to
64,000.
Copynum
Mirror number.
PPstate Only the physical partitions on the physical volume that are not current are
shown as stale.
Lists the following fields for each physical partition on the physical volume:
-pv
Range
A range of consecutive physical partitions contained on a single region of the
physical volume.
State
The current state of the physical partitions: free, used, stale, or vgda.
Note: If a volume group is converted to a big vg format, it may be necessary
to use some data partitions for volume group descriptor area. These partitions
will be marked vgda.
Region The intra-physical volume region in which the partitions are located.
LVname
The name of the logical volume to which the physical partitions are allocated.
Type
The type of the logical volume to which the partitions are allocated.
Mount Point
File system mount point for the logical volume, if applicable.
Displays the size of one or all physical volumes in megabytes.
-size
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To display the status and characteristics of physical volume hdisk3, type:
lspv hdisk3
2. To display all physical volumes in the system, type:
lspv
You should see output similar to the following:
hdisk0
hdisk1
hdisk2
0000000012345678
10000BC876543258
ABCD000054C23486
rootvg
vg00
None
active
active
The previous example shows that physical volume hdisk0 contains the volume group rootvg, and it is
activated. Physical volume hdisk1 contains the volume group vg00, and it is activated. Physical
volume hdisk2 does not contain an active volume group.
3. To display all physical volumes that can be virtual SCSI backing devices, type:
lspv -avail
216
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Output similar to the following is displayed:
lspv -avail
NAME
hdisk2
hdisk3
hdisk4
PVID
00c3e35c99c55ebd
00c3e35c99c0a332
00cbe8ddc00fbaad
SIZE(megabytes)
7820
7820
7820
4. To display all physical volumes that can be virtual SCSI backing devices and are not currently a
backing device, type:
lspv -free
Output similar to the following is displayed:
hdisk3
hdisk4
10000BC876543258
ABCD000054C23486
None
None
None
None
Related Information
The migratepv command.
IVM lsrefcode command
Purpose
Lists reference codes for partitions or the managed system. This command is valid only in an Integrated
Virtualization Manager environment.
Syntax
To list reference codes for the managed system:
lsrefcode -r sys [ -n Number ] [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
To list reference codes for partitions:
lsrefcode -r lpar [ -n Number ] [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
Description
The lsrefcode command lists reference codes for partitions or the managed system.
Flags
-r ResourceType
The type of resources to list:
v -r sys: List reference codes for the managed system.
– Attributes: refcode_num, time_stamp, refcode, word2, word3, word4, word5,
word6, word7, word8, word9, fru_call_out_loc_codes
– Filters: None
v -r lpar: List reference codes for partitions.
– Attributes: lpar_name, lpar_id, time_stamp, refcode, word2, word3, word4, word5,
word6, word7, word8, word9, fru_call_out_loc_codes
-n Number
– Filters: { lpar_ids | lpar_names}
The number of reference codes to list. The default is to list one. Reference codes are
listed in order, with the most recent reference code first.
Alphabetical list of commands
217
-m ManagedSystem
--filter FilterData
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name might either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
The filters to apply to the resources to be listed. Filters are used to select which
resources of the specified resource type are to be listed. If no filters are used, then all of
the resources of the specified resource type will be listed. For example, specific
partitions can be listed by using a filter to specify the names or IDs of the partitions to
list. Otherwise, if no filter is used, then all the partitions in the managed system will be
listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value
(CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotation marks.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in
double quotation marks. Depending on the shell being used, nested double quotation
marks might need to be preceded by an escape character, which is usually a '\'
character.
Unless otherwise indicated, multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names for -r lpar:
lpar_ids
ID of the partition to view
lpar_names
Name of the partitions to view
218
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-F AttributeNames
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be
displayed for each resource. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of
the attributes for the resource will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute
names will be displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the
delimiter which was specified with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when
the values of only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Attribute Names:
fru_call_out_loc_codes
Location codes of the field replaceable unit related to the reference code
lpar_id Unique integer identifier for the partition
lpar_name
Name of the partition
refcode The ASCII reference code string
refcode_num
The sequence number of the reference code.
time_stamp
The time that the reference code was created in the format: MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS where MM is the two digit month, DD is the two digit day, YYYY
is the four digit year, HH is the two digit hour, MM is the two digit minute,
and SS is the two digit second.
--header
fru_call_out_loc_codes
The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) numbers for the FRUs whose absence or
failure caused this reference code to be received. This field might be used for
other values.
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the
attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record
displayed. This option is only valid when used with the -F option.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is accessible by all users.
Examples
1. To list the current reference code for the managed system, type:
lsrefcode -r sys
2. To list the current reference code for all partitions, type:
lsrefcode -r lpar
3. To list the last 25 reference codes for partitions p1 and p2, only viewing the lpar_id and refcode
attributes, type:
lsrefcode -r lpar -n 25 --filter \"lpar_names=p1,p2\" -F lpar_id,refcode
Alphabetical list of commands
219
lsrep command
Purpose
Lists and displays information about the Virtual Media Repository.
Syntax
lsrep [-field Fieldname] [-fmt Delimiter ]
Description
The lsrep command displays information about the Virtual Media Repository. The following information
is displayed; the size of the repository and free space, parent storage pool, size and free space, and the
name, size, associated virtual target device, and access state of all virtual optical media in the repository.
This command will provide full scripting support through the use of the -field and -fmt flags.
Flags
-field FieldName
size
Total Size
free
Free space
parent pool
Parent storage pool name
parent size
Parent storage pool size
parent free
Parent storage pool free space
name
Number of backing device file
file size
Backing device file size
optical Virtual Target Device off the virtual optical device media is loaded in
-fmt Delimiter
access Media access, read-only (ro) or read-write (rw)
Specifies a delimiter character to separate output fields.
Examples
1. To display information about the Virtual Media repository and all virtual media with the repository,
type the following command:
lsrep
The system displays output similar to the following:
SIZE(mb) FREE(mb)
2039
299
Name
clientCD
installDVD1
installDVD2
PARENT SIZE
18352
PARENT FREE
16304
File Size
640
1000
100
Optical
vtopt3
vtopt16
None
Access
ro
rw
rw
2. To display only the parent storage pool size, type the following command:
220
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
lsrep -field "parent size"
Parent Size
30624
lssp command
Purpose
Lists and displays information about storage pools.
Syntax
List all available storage pools
lssp [ -type PoolType [-field Fieldname ] [ -fmt Delimiter ]
Display information about a specific storage pool
lssp -detail | -bd [-sp StoragePool] [-field Fieldname ] [ -fmt Delimiter ]
Display the default storage pool
lssp -default
Description
The lssp command displays information about storage pools in the Virtual I/O Server. If no flags are
specified, a list of all defined storage pools, their total size, free space, minimum allocation size, and
number of backing devices contained in the pool and the type of pool is displayed. If the -type flag is
specified only storage pools of the indicated type are displayed. If the -detail flag is specified, detailed
information about the storage pool is displayed. If the -bd flag is specified, a list of all the backing
devices in the specified (or default) storage pool is displayed along with their size and associated virtual
target device, or None, and virtual host adapter, or None. If the -default flag is specified, the default
storage pool is displayed.
This command will provide full scripting support through the use of the -field and -fmt flags.
Flags
-default
Displays the default storage pool.
Alphabetical list of commands
221
-field FieldName
The following fields are supported if no flags are specified:
pool
Storage pool name
size
Total size
free
Free space
alloc
Minimum allocation size
bds
Number of backing devices
type
Type of pool
The following fields are supported if the -detail flag is specified for a logical volume
pool:
pvname
Name of the physical volume.
pvid
Physical volume identifier
size
The size of the physical volume.
The following fields are supported if the -detail flag is specified for a file pool:
Name of the parent storage pool.
name
The following fields are supported if the -bd flag is specified:
bdname
Backing device name.
-fmt Delimiter
-bd
-detail
-sp StoragePool
-type PoolType
size
The size of the logical volume.
vtd
Virtual target device.
svsa
Server virtual SCSI adapter.
Specifies a delimiter character to separate output fields.
Displays information about the backing devices in the storage pool.
Displays detailed information about the storage pool.
Specifies which storage pool to display information about.
Specifies the type of pool to list. The following fields are supported:
lvpool
List only logical volume pools.
fbpool List only file pools.
Examples
1. To list all storage pools, type:
lssp
The system displays output similar to the following:
Pool
PRODClient
rootvg
DEVClient
PRODClient_FBP
PRODClient_FBP2
Size(mb)
30624
30656
18352
1016
1016
Free(mb)
28576
14208
18352
985
1005
Alloc Size(mb)
32
64
16
32
32
BDs
0
0
0
3
1
Type
LVPOOL
LVPOOL
LVPOOL
FBPOOL
FBPOOL
2. To display the default storage pool, type:
lssp -default
3. To display detailed information about the logical volume storage pool sp_sp00, type:
lssp -detail -sp sp_sp00
The system will display output similar to the following:
222
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
NAME
hdisk3
hdisk2
PVID
00cdfd8c85bd4b2e
00cdfd8c525d94a2
SIZE(megabytes)
34624
34624
4. To display information about the backing devices in the logical volume storage pool rootvg, type:
lssp -bd -sp rootvg
The system displays output similar to the following:
NAME
lv01
lv02
SIZE(megabytes) VTD
96
vtscsi1
64
vtscsi2
SVSA
vhost0
vhost0
lssvc command
Purpose
Lists the available agents and services.
Syntax
lssvc AgentName
Description
The lssvc command lists all the available agents and services that can be managed by the Virtual I/O
Server command-line interface. If an agent name or service name is passed to the lssvc command, a list
of attributes with their configured values is displayed. These agents and services are managed by the
cfgsvc, startsvc, and stopsvc commands.
Agent or service names
The following agents can be managed by the Virtual I/O Server.
DIRECTOR_agent
ITM_premium
ITM_cec
TSM_base
ITUAM_base
TPC
perfmgr
ipsec_tunnel
Lists the attributes and values for the IBM Systems Director agent.
Lists the attributes and values for the IBM Tivoli Monitoring agents.
Lists the attributes and values for the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager agent.
Lists the attributes and values for the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager agent.
Lists the attributes and values for the TotalStorage Productivity Center agent.
Does not have attributes that the user can set. See the postprocesssvc command for
more information about working with this agent.
Lists the secure tunnels that are created on the system. If none are created, the message
No tunnels created is displayed.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To list available agents, type the following command:
lssvc
2. To list values of attributes by agent name, type one or more of the following commands:
lssvc ITM_premium
lssvc ITUAM_base
lssvc TSM_base
Alphabetical list of commands
223
These commands produce output similar to the following:
$lssvc ITM_premium
HOSTNAME:tems_server
MANAGING_SYSTEM:hmc_console
RESTART_ON_REBOOT:TRUE
$lssvc ITUAM_base
ACCT_DATA0:
ACCT_DATA1:
ISYSTEM:
IPROCESS:
$lssvc TSM_base
SERVERNAME:
SERVERIP:
NODENAME:
3. To list the mandatory attributes (for IBM TotalStorage Productivity Center) with their configured
values, type the following command:
$lssvc TPC
This command produces output similar to the following:
$lssvc TPC
A:
S:
devAuth:
caPass:
4. To list the status of ipsec tunnels on the Virtual I/O Server, type the following command:
$lssvc ipsec_tunnel
This command produces output similar to the following:
Phase
1
2
Tun Id
1
1
Status
Dormant
Dormant
Local Id
N/A
1.2.3.4
Remote Id
4.3.2.1
4.3.2.1
Related Information
The cfgsvc command, the startsvc command, the stopsvc command, and the postprocesssvc command.
For more information about the various agents, see the following information:
v IBM Tivoli software and the Virtual I/O Server
v Configuring the IBM Tivoli agents and clients on the Virtual I/O Server
v IBM Systems Director software
v Configuring the IBM Systems Director agent
IVM lssvcevents command
Purpose
List attributes of console or serviceable events. This command is valid only in an Integrated Virtualization
Manager environment.
Syntax
To list console events:
lssvcevents -t console [ -d NumberDays | -i NumberMinutes ] [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ]
[ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
224
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
To list serviceable events:
lssvcevents -t hardware [ -d NumberDays | -i NumberMinutes ] [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames"
] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list field replaceable units (frus) for a specific serviceable events
lssvcevents -t fru --filter "FilterData" [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list comments for a specific serviceable event
lssvcevents -t comment --filter "FilterData" [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list service objects associated with a specific serviceable event
lssvcevents -t service_object -filter "FilterData" [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list the status of dynamic LPAR events:
lssvcevents -t dlpar [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The lssvcevents command lists attributes of console or serviceable events.
Flags
-t EventType
The type of event to list:
console
Console events - events created by the applications
v Attributes: time, userid, pid, name, category, severity, time_bin, text
v Filters: severities, categories, name
hardware
Serviceable events
v Attributes: problem_num, pmh_num, refcode, status, first_time, last_time,
sys_name, reporting_name, sys_mtms, reporting_mtms, enclosure_mtms,
failing_mtms, text, firmware_fix, created_time, analyzing_sfp,
refcode_extension, firmware_pkg_name, firmware_pkg_status,
reporting_sfp_name, reporting_sfp_mtms, failing_sfp_mtms, severity,
lpar_id, lpar_name, lpar_hostname, lpar_os_type, notification_type,
notification_status, duplicate_count, analyzing_sfp_mtms,
analyzing_sfp_name, called_home_sys_mtms, sys_log_id, platform_log_id,
subsystem_id, creator_id, ipl_state, symptom, failing_lpar_id,
failing_lpar_name, failing_lpar_os_type, fru_part_nums, fru_phys_locs,
first_time_bin, last_time_bin, created_time_bin
v Filters: status, problem_nums, refcodes, fru_part_nums, fru_phys_locs,
reporting_mtms, failing_mtm
Alphabetical list of commands
225
fru
Field replaceable units (frus) for a serviceable event.
v Attributes: part_num, class, description, phys_loc, prev_replaced,
replaced_time, serial_num, replacement_grp, ccin, logic_ctl_mtms,
power_ctl_mtms, replaced_time_bin
v Filters: problem_nums (required)
comment
Comments for a serviceable event.
v Attributes: time,commenter,text
v Filters: problem_nums (required), status
service_object
Service objects for a serviceable event. These are not accessible to users
without the DEUser or SRUser roles.
v Attributes: key, sys_log_id, notification_type, platform_log_id, severity,
creator_id, refcode, subsystem_id, lpar_os_type, failing_mtms, text, lpar_id,
lpar_name, lpar_hostname, first_time, last_time, duplicate_count, eed_ptr,
first_time_bin, last_time_bin
v Filters: problem_nums (required), status
dlpar
Status of dynamic LPAR events - events used to synchronize resources that can
be dynamically configured while the partition is active. These can be used to
determine why the runtime and pending values of a resource are not
synchronized. Typically, the last two status records are stored per partition per
resource type.
v Attributes: lpar_id, resource_type, sequence_num, status_code, time,
internal_rc, drmgr_cmd, drmgr_rc, drmgr_stdout, drmgr_stderr
v Filters: lpar_ids, resource_types
-d NumberDays
-i NumberMinutes
-m ManagedSystem
226
The number of previous days for which to view events. This might not be used with
the -i flag, and is only applicable to -t console, and -t hardware. If this flag and the -i flag
are omitted, the default is 7 days.
The number of minutes for which to view events. This might not be used with the -d
flag, and is only applicable to -t console, and -t hardware.
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name might either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
--filter FilterData
The filters to apply to the resources to be listed. Filters are used to select which
resources of the specified resource type are to be listed. If no filters are used, then all of
the resources of the specified resource type will be listed. For example, specific
partitions can be listed by using a filter to specify the names or IDs of the partitions to
list. Otherwise, if no filter is used, then all the partitions in the managed system will be
listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value
(CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotation marks.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in
double quotation marks. Depending on the shell being used, nested double quotation
marks might need to be preceded by an escape character, which is usually a '\'
character.
Unless otherwise indicated, multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names for -t console:
severities, categories, name
Valid filter names for -t hardware:
status, problem_nums, refcodes, fru_part_nums, fru_phys_locs, reporting_mtms,
failing_mtms
Valid filter names for -t fru:
problem_nums (required)
Valid filter names for -t comments and -t service_objects:
problem_nums (required), status
Valid filter names for -t dlpar:
-F AttributeNames
lpar_ids, resource_types
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be
displayed for each resource. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of
the attributes for the resource will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute
names will be displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the
delimiter which was specified with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when
the values of only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Attribute names:
analyzing_sfp
Name or MTMS of the service focal point system analyzing the event.
analyzing_sfp_mtms
MTMS of the service focal point system analyzing the event.
analyzing_sfp_name
Name of the service focal point system analyzing the event.
Alphabetical list of commands
227
called_home_sys_mtms
MTMS of the system to which the event was called home.
category
Category or client type of the console event. Valid values:
v GUI: Web interface
v CLI: Command line interface
v AP: Access process
ccin
CCIN of the FRU
class
Class or type of the FRU
commenter
Name of the person adding a comment to the event
created_time
Time the event was created.
creator_id
The ID of the entity that created the event. Valid values:
v C: Hardware Management Console
v E: Service processor
v H: POWER® hypervisor
v W: Power
v L: Partition firmware
v S: Licensed Internal Code for IBM i
description
Description of the FRU
drmgr_cmd
The command used for a dynamic LPAR event. The drmgr command is run on
the client partition's operating system to synchronize a particular resource.
drmgr_rc
The return code for the command used for a dynamic LPAR event. The drmgr
command is run on the client partition's operating system to synchronize a
particular resource.
drmgr_stdout
The standard output for the command used for a dynamic LPAR event. The
drmgr command is run on the client partition's operating system to
synchronize a particular resource.
drmgr_stderr
The standard error for the command used for a dynamic LPAR event. The
drmgr command is run on the client partition's operating system to
synchronize a particular resource.
duplicate_count
Number of duplicates for this event.
enclosure_mtms
Enclosure MTMS
failing_lpar_id
Unique ID for the failing partition
228
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
failing_lpar_name
Name of the failing partition
failing_lpar_os_type
Operating system type of the failing partition
failing_mtms
MTMS of the failing system
failing_sfp_mtms
MTMS of the failing systems service focal point
firmware_fix
Indicates whether a firmware fix is available for the event
firmware_pkg_name
Package name of a possible firmware fix
firmware_pkg_status
Package status of a possible firmware fix
first_time
First time this event was reported
fru_part_nums
Part numbers of the FRUs
fru_phys_locs
Unique physical location codes of the FRUs
internal_rc
The return code for a dynamic LPAR event. This will be non zero only if the
dynamic LPAR command was unexpectedly not able to be sent to the client
partition.
ipl_state
State of the system when this event occurred
key
Unique ID for a service object for a particular serviceable event.
last_time
Last time this event was reported
logic_ctl_mtms
MTMS of the unit that logically controls the unit that the FRU is located in
lpar_hostname
Hostname of the partition that created this event
lpar_id ID of the partition that created this event
lpar_name
Name of the partition that created this event
lpar_os_type
Operating system type of the partition that created this event
name
Name of the application that created the console event
notification_status
The status of the notification type
Alphabetical list of commands
229
notification_type
The notification type for the event. Valid values:
v Yes: Call home
v No: Customer notify
part_num
Part number of the FRU
phys_loc
Unique physical location code of the FRU
pid
Process ID of the process generating the console event
platform_log_id
Unique ID of the platform log for this event
pmh_num
PMH or tracking number
power_ctl_mtms
MTMS of the unit that power controls the unit that the FRU is located in
prev_replaced
Indicates if the FRU has been previously replaced
problem_num
A unique ID for the event
refcode Reference code for the event
refcode_extension
Extended reference code for the event
replaced_time
Time the FRU was replaced
replacement_grp
Replacement priority and grouping for the FRU. Valid values:
v H: Multiple high priority FRUs should be acted on as a group
v M: Medium priority FRUs should be acted on, one at a time, in the order
given.
v A: Medium priority group A FRUs should be acted on as a group.
v B: Medium priority group B FRUs should be acted on as a group.
v C: Medium priority group C FRUs should be acted on as a group.
v L: Low priority FRUs should be acted on only after all other priority
call-outs failed to resolve the problem.
reporting_mtms
MTMS of the reporting unit
reporting_name
Name of the reporting unit
reporting_sfp_mtms
MTMS of the service focal point reporting the event
reporting_sfp_name
Name of the service focal point reporting the event
230
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
resource_type
The resource type for the dynamic LPAR event. These are all the resources that
can be dynamically reconfigured. Valid values:
v mem
v proc
v proc_units
v uncap_weight
v memory
v io_entitled_mem
v mem_weight
sequence_num
The sequence number for this dynamic LPAR event. Each resource type might
have more than one entry. The sequence number distinguishes the entries, and
increments over time.
serial_num
Serial number of the FRU
severity
Severity of the event. Valid values:
v 10: Recovered error, general (10)
v 20: Predictive error, general (20)
v 21: Predictive error, degraded performance (21)
v 22: Predictive fault might be corrected after platform re-IPL (22)
v 23: Predictive error, fault might be corrected after IPL, degraded
performance (23)
v 24: Predictive error, loss of redundancy (24)
v 40: Unrecovered error, general (40)
v 41: Unrecovered error, bypassed with degraded performance (41).
v 44: Unrecovered error, bypassed with loss of redundancy (44)
v 45: Unrecovered error, bypassed with loss of redundancy and performance
(45)
v 48: Unrecovered error, bypassed with loss of function (48)
v 60: Error on diagnostic test, general (60)
v 61: Error on diagnostic test, resource might produce incorrect result (61)
status
Status of the event. Valid values:
v Open: Event is in the open state
v Closed: Event has been closed
Alphabetical list of commands
231
status_code
Status code for the event. Valid values for dynamic LPAR events:
v 0: Synchronization successful
v 1: Synchronization in progress
v 2: Resource will not synchronize because the partition is a workload group
participant
v 3: Resource will not synchronize because the partition communication state
is not active
v 4: Resource will not synchronize because the partition does not support
dynamic LPAR of this resource type
v 5: Resource will not synchronize because the partition is not in the Running
state
v 6: Resource will not synchronize because the partition is unable to remove
any more memory dynamically
v 7: Resource will not synchronize because the synchronization command
failed to run for an unknown reason
v 8: Resource is not synchronized because the RMC command failed. The
system will retry. If the partition is in the Running state with an active
network connection, check the return code and contact your support
representative.
v 9: Resource is not synchronized because the drmgr command on the
partition failed. The system will retry. Check the return code, and the
command output.
v 10: Resource will not synchronize because the requested assigned value is
less than the current minimum. Restart your partition in order to complete
the synchronization.
v 11: Resource will not synchronize because the requested assigned value is
greater than the current maximum. Restart your partition in order to
complete the synchronization.
v 12: Resource will not synchronize because the pending and current
processing modes do not match. Restart your partition in order to complete
the synchronization.
v 13: Resource will not synchronize because IVM is unable to determine
dynamic LPAR capabilities of the logical partition.
v 255: Resource synchronization has not yet been attempted. It might take a
few seconds depending on your system utilization before synchronization is
attempted.
232
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
subsystem_id
The subsystem causing the event. Valid values include:
v 10 - 1F: Processor subsystem including internal cache
v 20 - 2F: Memory subsystem including external cache
v 30 - 3F: I/O subsystem (hub, bridge, bus)
v 40 - 4F: I/O adapter, device and peripheral
v 50 - 5F: CEC hardware
v 60 - 6F: Power/Cooling subsystem
v 70 - 79: Other subsystem
v 7A - 7F: Surveillance error
v 80 - 8F: Platform firmware
v 90 - 9F: Software
v A0 - AF: External environment
symptom
Symptom of the event
sys_log_id
Unique ID of the system log for the event
sys_mtms
MTMS of the system
text
Text of the event
time
Time of the console or dynamic LPAR event
time_bin
Time in milliseconds since Jan 1, 1970
--header
userid User ID of the user that ran the command that caused the console event
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the
attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record
displayed. This option is only valid when used with the -F option.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is accessible by all users, except for certain types and attributes as noted, which require
SR User or DE User roles.
Examples
1. To list the serviceable events that occurred today, type:
lssvcevents -t hardware -d 0
2. To list the console events that occurred within the past 3 days, type:
lssvcevents -t console -d 3
3. To list all of the open serviceable events for the system, type:
lssvcevents -t hardware --filter "status=open"
4. To list the associated FRUs for a specific serviceable event, type:
lssvcevents -t fru
--filter problem_nums=6013EFFF-205E9F22-4CC931E5-F892358-A0F6C1D6
Alphabetical list of commands
233
Related Information
The chsvcevent command, and the mksvcevent command.
lssw command
Purpose
Lists installed software products.
Syntax
lssw [ -hist ]
Description
The lssw command displays information about installed file sets or file set updates. If the -hist parameter
is not specified, the name, most recent level, state, and description of all file sets is displayed. Part
information (usr, root, and share) is consolidated into the same listing. For formatted file sets, it displays
the most recent maintenance level. Any interim fixes on the system are also displayed.
If the -hist flag is specified, installation and update history information is displayed.
Output Values
The following sections define terms used in several of the output fields. Note that not all output values
are defined here. Only the ones that require explanation are defined.
State Values
The state field in the lssw output gives the state of the fileset on your system. It can have the following
values:
State
APPLIED
APPLYING
BROKEN
COMMITTED
EFIX LOCKED
OBSOLETE
COMMITTING
REJECTING
234
Description
The specified fileset is installed on the system. The APPLIED state means that the
fileset can be removed with the updateios command and the previous level of the
fileset restored.
An attempt was made to apply the specified fileset, but it did not complete successfully,
and cleanup was not performed.
The specified fileset or fileset update is broken and should be reinstalled before being
used.
The specified fileset is installed on the system. The COMMITTED state means that a
commitment has been made to this level of the software. A committed fileset update
cannot be rejected, but a committed fileset base level and its updates (regardless of
state) can be removed by the updateios command.
The specified fileset was installed successfully and locked.
The specified fileset was installed with an earlier version of the operating system but
has been replaced by a repackaged (renamed) newer version. Some of the files that
belonged to this fileset have been replaced by versions from the repackaged fileset.
An attempt was made to commit the specified fileset, but it did not complete
successfully, and cleanup was not performed.
An attempt was made to reject the specified fileset, but it did not complete successfully,
and cleanup was not performed.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Action Values
The action field in the lssw output identifies the installation action that was taken for the fileset. The
following values may be found in this field:
Action
APPLY
CLEANUP
COMMIT
REJECT
Definition
An attempt
An attempt
An attempt
An attempt
was
was
was
was
made
made
made
made
to
to
to
to
apply the specified fileset.
perform cleanup for the specified fileset.
commit the specified fileset.
reject the specified fileset.
Status Values
The status field in the lssw output identifies the resultant status in the history of installation actions. The
following values may be found in this field:
Status
BROKEN
CANCELED
COMPLETE
Description
The fileset was left in a broken state after the specified action.
The specified action was canceled before it completed.
The commitment of the fileset has completed successfully.
Flags
-hist
Displays the installation and update history information.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1
Examples
1. To list all installed software, type:
lssw
2. To list installation and update history, type:
lssw -hist
Related Information
The updateios command, the ioslevel command, the remote_management command, the oem_setup_env
command, and the oem_platform_level command.
IVM lssyscfg command
Purpose
List attributes of partitions, partition profiles, or the managed system. This command is valid only in an
Integrated Virtualization Manager environment.
Syntax
To list partition attributes:
lssyscfg -r lpar [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Alphabetical list of commands
235
To list partition profile attributes:
lssyscfg -r prof [ --filter "FilterData" ] [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
To list system attributes:
lssyscfg -r sys [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The lssyscfg command lists attributes of partitions, partition profiles, or the managed system.
Flags
-r ResourceType
-m ManagedSystem
--filter FilterData
The type of resources to list:
lpar: Logical partition resources
prof: Logical partition profile resources
sys: Managed system resources
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
The filters to apply to the resources to be listed. Filters are used to select which
resources of the specified resource type are to be listed. If no filters are used, then all of
the resources of the specified resource type will be listed. For example, specific
partitions can be listed by using a filter to specify the names or IDs of the partitions to
list. Otherwise, if no filter is used, then all the partitions in the managed system will be
listed.
The filter data consists of filter name/value pairs, which are in comma separated value
(CSV) format. The filter data must be enclosed in double quotes.
The format of the filter data is as follows:
"filter-name=value,filter-name=value,..."
Note that certain filters accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""filter-name=value,value,...",..."
When a list of values is specified, the filter name/value pair must be enclosed in
double quotes. Depending on the shell being used, nested double quote characters may
need to be preceded by an escape character, which is usually a '\' character.
Unless otherwise indicated, multiple values can be specified for each filter.
Valid filter names for partitions:
lpar_names | lpar_ids - name or ID of the partitions to view
work_groups - work groups to which the partitions belong
Valid filter names for partition profiles:
lpar_names | lpar_ids: name or ID of the partition profiles
profile_names: profile names for the partitions
Note: This option is not valid when listing managed systems.
236
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-F AttributeNames
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be
displayed for each resource. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of
the attributes for the resource will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute
names will be displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the
delimiter which was specified with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when
the values of only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Attribute names for partitions:
allow_perf_collection
Permission for the partition to retrieve shared processor pool utilization
information Valid values are:
v 0: do not allow authority
v 1: allow authority
auto_start
Valid values are:
v 0 - do not automatically start with system power on
v 1 - automatically start with system power on
boot_mode
Partition power on mode. This attribute is only available for AIX and Linux
logical partitions. Valid values are:
v norm: normal
v dd: diagnostic with default boot list
v ds: diagnostic with stored boot list
v of: Open Firmware OK prompt
v sms: System Management Services
v null: not applicable
curr_lpar_proc_compat_mode
Displays the current negotiated compatibility mode. This is the mode that the
partition operating system has negotiated, and will be less than or equal to the
desired mode at logical partition boot time.
Note: It is possible that the mode will be greater than the desired mode, if the
partition is powered off. The current value only changes when the logical
partition restarts.
curr_profile
The current profile is always equal to the partition name
default_profile
The default profile is always equal to the partition name
desired_lpar_proc_compat_mode
Displays the requested compatibility mode.
dlpar_mem_capable
Indicates if the partition supports dynamic LPAR of memory. Valid values:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
Alphabetical list of commands
237
dlpar_proc_capable
Indicates if the partition supports dynamic LPAR of processing resources. Valid
values:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
ipl_source
The IPL source for the IBM i logical partition. This attribute is optional. Valid
values:
v a
v b
v c
v d
logical_serial_num
A globally unique string for this partition
lpar_env
The operating environment for this partition Valid values:
v aixlinux: a partition type that supports AIX or Linux
v os400: an IBM i partition
v vioserver: a Virtual I/O Server partition
lpar_id unique integer identifier for the partition
lpar_keylock
Partition keylock position. Valid values:
v norm: normal keylock
v manual: manual keylock
mem_synchronized
The current and pending memory values for this partition are synchronized.
name
Name of the partition
os_version
The version of the operating system running that is in the logical partition.
power_ctrl_lpar_ids
A list of partitions which have power control over this partition. Valid values:
v none: No partitions
proc_synchronized
The current and pending processing values for this partition are synchronized.
resource_config
Valid values:
v 0 - resources are not available to power on with system
v 1 - resources are available to power on with system
238
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
rmc_ipaddr
The IP address of the client partition. This IP address is used by RMC to
connect to the client partition for dynamic LPAR.
rmc_state
The state of the RMC connection between the management partition and the
client partition. The RMC connection is used primarily for dynamic LPAR.
Valid values:
v inactive
v active
v unknown
v none - RMC not configured. This partition has never been registered with
RMC.
rmc_osshutdown_capable
Indicates if the partition supports shutdown via the RMC connection. This
allows the management partition to safely shutdown the client partition via
chsysstate -o osshutdown Valid values follow:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
state
The current runtime state of the partition. Valid values follow:
v Not Activated
v Starting
v Running
v Shutting Down
v Error
v Open Firmware
v Not Available
uptime Partition uptime in seconds.
work_group_id
Valid values follow:
v none: do not participate in the workload management group
v 1: participate in the workload management group
Attribute names for partition profiles:
all_resources
Valid values:
v 0: This partition will not own all physical resources on the system
alt_console_slot
The location of the physical I/O slot that contains the alternate console device
for the IBM i logical partition. The default value is none.
Alphabetical list of commands
239
alt_restart_device_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the alternate restart device for
the IBM i logical partition. If the load source slot is a value other than none,
then this attribute is optional. Valid values are:
v Slot number (for virtual I/O)
v none
auto_start
Valid values:
v 0 - do not automatically start with system power on
v 1 - automatically start with system power on
boot_mode
Partition power on mode. Valid values are:
v norm - normal
v dd - diagnostic with default boot list
v ds - diagnostic with stored boot list
v of - Open Firmware OK prompt
v sms - System Management Services
conn_monitoring
Valid values:
v 0 - connection monitoring is disabled
v 1 - connection monitoring is enabled
console_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the console device for the
IBM i logical partition. Valid values are:
v Slot number (for virtual I/O)
v none
desired_io_entitled_mem
The amount of I/O entitled memory for a shared memory partition. This is the
portion of memory that is reserved for I/O mappings.
v auto (automatically manage)
v Number of megabytes
If the value is auto, the entitlement is calculated based on the virtual I/O
configuration of the partition. If the virtual I/O configuration is changed, the
entitlement is updated automatically. If auto is not used, no automatic
adjustments are made. The default value is auto.
desired_mem
The assigned megabytes of memory for this partition.
desired_procs
The assigned number of processors for this partition. In shared processing
mode, this refers to virtual processors.
desired_proc_units
The assigned number of processing units for this partition.
240
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
hsl_pool_id
Whether the logical partition participates in the high-speed link (HSL) pool.
The default value is 0 (does not participate).
io_slots
Comma separated list of I/O slots for the partition. Each item in this list has
the format:
drc_index/slot_io_pool_id/is_required
Valid values for is_required:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
lhea_logical_ports
Comma-separated list of logical Host Ethernet Adapter (LHEA) logical ports,
with each logical port having the following format:
adapter-ID/port-group/physical-port-ID
/logical-port-ID/allowed-VLAN-IDs
lhea_capabilities
Comma-separated list of LHEA capabilities, with each capability having one of
the following formats:
adapter-ID/capability
adapter-ID/5/ieq/nieq/qp/cq/mr
The values for ieq (interruptible event queues), nieq (non-interruptible event
queues), qp (queue pairs), cq (completion queues), and mr (memory regions)
specify the resource amount in addition to the base minimum. Valid values
are:
v 0 - minimum
v 1 - low
v 2 - medium
v 3 - high
v 4 - dedicated
v 5 - custom
load_source_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the load source for the IBM i
logical partition. If the alt_restart_device_slot has a value other than none, then
this attribute is optional. Valid values are:
v Slot number (for virtual I/O)
v none
lpar_id Unique integer identifier for the partition.
lpar_io_pool_ids
Valid values are:
v none - this partition is not part of an I/O pool.
lpar_name
Name of the partition.
lpar_proc_compat_mode
The currently requested compatibility mode of the processor for the logical
partition.
Alphabetical list of commands
241
max_mem
The maximum megabytes of memory for this partition.
max_procs
The maximum number of processors for this partition. In shared processing
mode, this refers to virtual processors. Valid values are:
v keep_idle_procs - never share processors
v share_idle_procs - share processors only when the partition is inactive
v share_idle_procs_active - share processors only when partition is active
v share_idle_procs_always - always share processors
v cap - capped mode
v uncap - uncapped mode
max_proc_units
The maximum number of processing units for this partition.
max_virtual_slots
Maximum number of virtual I/O adapter slots.
mem_mode
The partition memory mode.
v ded - dedicated memory
v shared - shared memory
If the memory mode is shared, then the logical partition cannot be assigned
any physical I/O slots, the proc_mode attribute on the logical partition must
be shared, and a memory pool must exist.
Note: The Virtual I/O Server logical partition only supports the dedicated
memory mode.
mem_weight
The shared memory weight of the logical partition with shared memory. This
flag is used for determining priority of logical partitions in a memory pool for
distribution of memory.
min_mem
The minimum megabytes of memory for this logical partition.
min_procs
The minimum number of processors for this logical partition. In shared
processing mode, this refers to virtual processors.
min_proc_units
The minimum number of processing units for this logical partition.
name
Name of the profile.
op_console_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the directly-attached
operations console device for the IBM i logical partition. The default value is
none.
os_type
The operating system environment for this logical partition. Valid values:
v aixlinux: an RPA partition type which supports AIX or Linux
v os400: an IBM i logical partition
v vioserver: a Virtual I/O Server partition
242
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
paging_device
The paging space device to use if a memory pool is used. A paging device is a
block storage device that has been added to the memory pool and is not
designated as a paging device for any other logical partition. If the
paging_device value is a blank string, no paging device is currently assigned.
power_ctrl_lpar_ids
A list of logical partitions which have power control over this logical partition.
Valid values are:
v none - No partitions
power_ctrl_lpar_names
A list of logical partitions which have power control over this logical partition.
Valid values are:
v none - No partitions
primary_paging_vios_id
The ID of the primary paging Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) partition that
provides access to the paging space devices for the shared memory partitions.
A paging VIOS partition is a VIOS logical partition that is assigned to the
shared memory pool.
primary_paging_vios_name
The name of the primary paging VIOS partition that provides access to the
paging space devices for the shared memory partitions. A paging VIOS
partition is a VIOS logical partition that is assigned to the shared memory
pool.
proc_mode
Valid values:
v ded: dedicated processor mode
v shared: shared processor mode
secondary_paging_vios_id
The ID of the secondary paging Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) partition that
provides access to the paging space devices for the shared memory partitions.
A paging VIOS partition is a VIOS logical partition that is assigned to the
shared memory pool.
secondary_paging_vios_name
The name of the secondary paging VIOS partition that provides access to the
paging space devices for the shared memory partitions. A paging VIOS
partition is a VIOS logical partition that is assigned to the shared memory
pool.
sharing_mode
Valid values:
v share_idle_procs
v proc_mode=ded
v share_idle_procs_active
v share_idle_procs_always
v proc_mode=shared
v cap
v uncap
Alphabetical list of commands
243
uncap_weight
A weighted average of processing priority when in uncapped sharing mode.
The smaller the value, the lower the weight. Valid values are: 0 - 255.
virtual_eth_adapters
Comma-separated list of virtual Ethernet adapters, with each adapter having
the following format: slot_number/is_ieee/port_vlan_id/additional_vlan_ids/
is_trunk/is_required
All 5 '/' characters must be present, but optional values may be omitted.
Optional values are additional-vlan-IDs, and is-trunk. Valid values for
is_ieee, is_trunk, and is_required:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
For example, 4/0/2//0/0 specifies a virtual Ethernet adapter with a virtual slot
number of 4, is not IEEE 802.1Q enabled, has a port virtual LAN ID of 2, no
additional virtual LAN IDs, it is not a trunk adapter, and is not required.
A value of none indicates that there are no virtual Ethernet adapters.
virtual_fc_adapters
Comma-separated list of virtual fibre channel adapters. Each item in the list
has the following format:
virtual slot num/adapter_type/remote_lpar_id/
remote_lpar_name/remote_slot_num/wwpn_list/is_required
virtual_opti_pool_id
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the directly-attached
operations console device for the IBM i logical partition. The default value is 0
(does not participate).
virtual_scsi_adapters
Comma-separated list of virtual SCSI adapters. Each item in the list has the
following format:
slot_num/adapter_type/remote_lpar_id/remote_lpar_name/
remote_slot_num/is_required
244
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
virtual_serial_adapters
Comma-separated list of virtual serial adapters. Each item in the list has the
following format:
slot_num/adapter_type/supports_hmc/remote_lpar_id/
remote_lpar_name/remote_slot_num/is_required
The attribute names are not present in the list, just their values are present. If
an attribute is optional and is not to be included, then no value would be
specified for that attribute. For example, 0/server/1/any//any/1 specifies a
virtual server serial device that has a virtual slot number of 0, supports HMC,
supports any remote partition, supports any remote slot, and is required.
A value of none indicates that there are no virtual serial adapters.
Valid values for adapter_type:
v client: client adapter
v server: server adapter, valid for Virtual I/O Server partitions only
Valid values for supports_hmc:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
Valid values for is_required:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
Attribute names for the managed system:
active_lpar_share_idle_procs_capable
Indicates if the platform supports setting the share while active sharing_mode.
Valid values:
v 0 - not capable
v 1 - capable
active_mem_sharing_capable
The capability of the managed system to use a shared memory pool. Valid
values follow:
v 0 - Not capable
v 1 - Capable
capabilities
Displays a comma-separated list of capabilities.
cod_mem_capable
Valid values:
v 0- not capable of memory Capacity on Demand
v 1 - capable of memory Capacity on Demand
cod_proc_capable
Valid values:
v 0- not capable of processor Capacity on Demand
v 1 - capable of processor Capacity on Demand
config_version
The version of the configuration data in platform firmware of the current
logical partition .
Alphabetical list of commands
245
curr_configured_max_lpars
The current maximum number of logical partitions supported by the
management logical partition
This option is deprecated. Instead use:
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype slot --level lpar
with attribute "curr_max_virtual_slots" value for partition 1
dlpar_mem_capable
Valid values:
0: Changes do not take effect until the next reboot of the logical partition or
platform.
1: Changes take effect immediately.
lhea_capable
Indicates if the managed system has one or more Host Ethernet Adapters.
lpar_avail_priority
The priority of the partition to maintain its entitled processors. If a processor
failure occurs, processing resources will be removed first from the lowest
priority partition.
Note: The Virtual I/O Server partition must have a higher priority than any
other partition on the system.
lpar_avail_priority_capable
Specifies if the platform supports the lpar_avail_priority attribute. Valid values:
v 0 - not capable
v 1 - capable
lpar_comm_default
Indicates if the lpar_comm_ipaddr is using the default IP address, or if the
user has manually set this using chsyscfg. Valid values:
v 0: User has manually set the IP address
v 1: Default IP address is used. This is the first IP address configured on your
system as reported by lstcpip -interfaces
lpar_comm_ipaddr
The IP address through which client partitions will communicate with the
management partition. This is used primarily for dynamic LPAR. It is
defaulted to the first IP address configured on your system, but can be
manually set if desired.
Note: This attribute supports multiple IP addresses using a comma-separated
list.
lpar_proc_compat_mode_capable
The supported compatibility modes of the processor for the logical partition.
Valid values:
v 0: The managed system does not support setting the processor compatibility
mode for a partition.
v 1: The managed system supports setting the processor compatibility mode
for a partition.
lpar_proc_compat_modes
A comma separated list of compatibility modes that the managed system
supports.
246
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
max_lpars
Maximum number of partitions supported by firmware.
max_power_ctrl_lpars
Maximum number of power controlling partitions per controlled partition.
max_vscsi_remote_lpar_id
Indicates the largest partition ID of the remote partition with a virtual SCSI
server adapter.
max_micro_lpar_id
Indicates largest partition ID of a partition using the MicroPartition technology.
micro_lpar_capable
Valid values:
0: not capable of creating shared processor partitions
1: capable of creating shared processor partitions
mfg_default_config
Specifies whether or not the system is in the manufacturing default partition
configuration.
Valid values:
0: No
1: Yes
name
Name for the managed system.
pend_configured_max_lpars
The maximum number of partitions supported by the management partition
after the next restart.
This option is deprecated. Instead use:
lshwres -r virtualio --rsubtype slot --level lpar
with attribute "pend_max_virtual_slots" value for partition 1.
pend_lpar_config_state
Valid values:
enabled: The logical partition configuration data will be enabled during the
next restart operation.
disabled: The logical partition configuration data will be disabled during
the next restart operation.
cleared: The logical partition configuration data will be cleared to
manufacturing defaults during the next restart operation.
power_off_policy
Valid values:
v 0- Power off the managed system after all partitions are powered off.
os400_capable
Indicates that the platform supports IBM i logical partitions. Valid values:
v 0: not capable of running IBM i
v 1: capable of running IBM i
serial_num
Serial number for the managed system.
service_lpar_id
ID of the partition with platform service authority.
Alphabetical list of commands
247
service_lpar_name
Name of the partition with platform service authority.
state
Valid values:
v Operating - The managed system is running.
sys_time
The UTC time of system firmware in the format month/day/year
hour:minute:second.
type_model
Type and model for the managed system
vet_activation_capable
Whether the platform supports PowerVM™ Editions system technologies
activation. Valid values:
v 0 - not capable
v 1 - capable
virtual_fc_capable
A value indicating whether the managed system supports a virtual fibre
channel. Valid values follow:
v 0: The managed system does not support a virtual fibre channel.
v 1: The managed system supports a virtual fibre channel.
--header
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the
attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record
displayed. This option is only valid when used with the -F option.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is accessible by all users.
Examples
1. To list the attributes for the managed system, type:
lssyscfg -r sys
2. To list only the user-defined name, machine type and model, and serial number for the managed
system, type:
lssyscfg -r sys -F name,type_model,serial_num
3. To list all partitions and only display attribute values for each partition following a header of attribute
names, type:
lssyscfg -r lpar -F --header
4. To list the partitions named lpar1, lpar2, and lpar3, type:
lssyscfg -r lpar --filter \"lpar_names=lpar1,lpar2,lpar3\"
5. To list the partition profile for partition lpar2, type:
lssyscfg -r prof --filter lpar_names=lpar2
6. To view the desired compatibility mode in the profile, type:
lyssyscfg -r prof -F lpar_proc_compat_mode
248
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Related Information
The chsyscfg command, the mksyscfg command, and the rmsyscfg command.
IVM lssysconn command
Purpose
List connection information for systems. This command is valid only in an Integrated Virtualization
Manager environment.
Syntax
To list the service processor network connection information:
lssysconn -r all [ -F "AttributeNames" ] [ --header ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The lssysconn command lists the service processor network connection information.
Flags
-r ResourceType
The type of resources to list:
all - Lists all connections
Attributes: resource_type, type_model_serial_num, sp, side, ipaddr, alt_ipaddr, state,
eth_loc_code, alt_eth_loc_code
Filters: None
-m ManagedSystem
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
Alphabetical list of commands
249
-F AttributeNames
A delimiter separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be
displayed for each resource. If no attribute names are specified, then values for all of
the attributes for the resource will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute
names will be displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the
delimiter which was specified with this option.
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when
the values of only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
The following attributes are available:
resource_type
Indicates the resource type. This attribute always reads 0.
type_model_serial_num
The type-model and serial number of the system in the form ttt-mmm*ssssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial
number of the managed system.
sp
The type of service processor. This attribute always reads unavailable.
side
The current side of the service processor. This attribute always reads
unavailable.
ipaddr The IP Address of the first Ethernet device on the service processor.
alt_ipaddr
The IP Address of the second Ethernet device on the service processor.
state
The connection state to the service processor. This attribute always reads No
Connection.
eth_loc_code
The physical location code of the first Ethernet device on the service processor.
--header
alt_eth_loc_code
The physical location code of the second Ethernet device on the service
processor.
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the
attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record
displayed. This option is only valid when used with the -F option.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is accessible by all users.
Examples
1. To list all system connections, type:
lssysconn -r all
Related Information
The lssyscfg command.
250
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
IVM lssysplan command
Purpose
Lists the system plan files in the Integrated Virtualization Manager directory where system plan files are
kept.
Syntax
lssysplan [-f <file name> -t plan] [-F [<attribute names>] [--header]] [--help]
Description
The lssysplan command lists the system plan files in the Integrated Virtualization Manager directory
where system plan files are kept.
Flags
-f -tplan
-F
--header
--help
Specifies the name of the system plan file and provides the following details: sys_name,
type_model, and ivm_deployable
A delimiter-separated list of attribute names for the attribute values to be displayed for
each file. If no attribute names are specified then the values for all the attributes for
each file are displayed. When this option is specified, only attribute values are
displayed; no attribute names are displayed. The attribute values displayed are
separated by the delimiter that was specified with this option. The attributes that can
be listed are as follows: name, description, source, version, and date.
Displays a header record, which is a delimiter-separated list of attribute names for the
attributes that are displayed. The header record is the first record displayed. This
option is only valid with the -f option.
Displays the help text for this command and exit.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To list the system plan files on the Integrated Virtualization Manager system, type the following
command:
lssysplan
2. To list the system plan files following a header, type the following command:
lssysplan -F --header
3. To list the name and creation date of the system plan file, type the following command:
lssysplan -F name,date
4. To list the names and descriptions of the system plan following a header, type the following
command:
lssysplan -F name,description --header
Related Information
The deploysysplan command, mksysplan command, and the rmsysplan command.
Alphabetical list of commands
251
IVM lssysplanres command
Purpose
Lists the system plan resources that are defined on the Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM).
Syntax
lssysplanres -r osinstall [-F "<attributes>" [--header]] [-help]
Description
The lssysplanres command lists the system plan resources that are defined on the IVM. These resources
can be used when deploying system plans from this IVM.
Flags
-r
-F
--header
-help
Specifies the type of system plan resources to list. To list the installation resources for
the operating system, the only valid value is osinstall.
Lists the names of the attributes in delimiter-separated list. If no attribute names are
specified, all attributes are listed.
Displays a header record, which is a delimiter-separated list of attribute names for the
attributes that are displayed. The header record is the first record displayed. This
option is only valid with the -F flag.
Displays the help text for this command and exit.
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
Successful completion.
Invalid flag, argument, or command failure.
Examples
1. To list all of the system plan resources that have an osinstall type on this Integrated Virtualization
Manager, type:
lssysplanres -r osinstall
2. To use a header record and list only the names and descriptions of system plan resources that have an
osinstall type defined on this IVM:
lssysplanres -r osinstall -F name,description --header
Related Information
The defsysplanres, deploysysplan, lssysplan, and rmsysplanrescommands.
lstcpip command
Purpose
Displays the Virtual I/O Server TCP/IP settings and parameters.
252
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Syntax
lstcpip -interfaces [-fmt delimiter]
lstcpip [-state] [-num] [-field] [-fmt delimiter]
lstcpip [-num] [-routtable] [-routinfo] [-state] [-arp]
lstcpip -stored
lstcpip -adapters
lstcpip [-sockets] [-family {inet | inet6 | unix}]
lstcpip -namesrv
lstcpip [ -state [ -field FieldName ...] ] | [ -routtable [ -field FieldName ... ]] [ -fmt delimter ]
lstcpip -hostname
Note: If IPv6 is configured on the Virtual I/O Server, the lstcpip command lists an IPv6 address. Due to
its size, the IPv6 address spans both the Network and Address fields of the output screen.
Description
The lstcpip command displays the current and stored TCP/IP setting such as IP address, routing table,
sockets, name server settings, and so forth.
Flags
-adapters
-arp
-family
-field
-fmt
-hostname
-interfaces
-namesrv
-num
-routtable
-routinfo
-sockets
-state
-stored
Lists Ethernet adapters on the system.
Displays the current ARP table entries.
Specifies the INET, INET6, or UNIX socket family.
Specifies a list of fields to display.
Divides output by a user-specified delimiter.
Displays the system hostname.
Displays all of the interfaces configured on the system. Specifically, it displays their
addresses, network masks, states, and mac addresses.
Lists DNS name servers in search order and domain name.
Displays numeric output, rather than trying to resolve host names.
Displays the routing tables.
Displays the routing tables, including the user-configured and current costs of each
route.
Displays information about currently open sockets.
Displays the current state of all configured interfaces.
Displays stored TCP/IP configuration, which will be applied when the system starts. It
will list interface IP addresses, any defined static routes, host names, and DNS info.
Examples
1. To list the Virtual I/O Server TCP/IP configuration, type:
lstcpip -stored
2. To list the current routing table, type:
lstcpip -routtable
3. To list open inet sockets, type:
Alphabetical list of commands
253
lstcpip -sockets -family inet
4. To display the states of all interfaces using a delimiter, type:
lstcpip -states -fmt “/”
This command produces output similar to the following:
sit0/1480/link#2/9.3.126.60/0/0/0/0/0
sit0/1480/commo126060./austin.ixx.com/0/0/0/0/0
en2/1500/link#3/0.9.6b.6e.e3.72/871825/0/16305/1/0
en2/1500/9.3.126/commo126060.austi/871825/0/16305/1/0
en2/1500/fe80::209:6bff:fe6e:e372/871825/0/16305/1/0
lo0/16896/link#1/5013/0/5019/0/0
lo0/16896/127/localhost/5013/0/5019/0/0
lo0/16896/::1/5013/0/5019/0/0
5. To display all interface information, type:
lstcpip -interfaces
This command produces output similar to the following:
Name
Address
mask/Pfx
en2
en3
et2
et3
en4
fe80::209:6bff:fe6e:e372
-
64
-
State
up
down
down
down
down
MAC
00:09:6b:6e:e3:72
00:09:6b:6e:e3:73
00:09:6b:6e:e3:72
00:09:6b:6e:e3:73
0e:f0:c0:00:30:04
lsuser command
Purpose
Displays user account attributes.
Syntax
lsuser [ ALL | Name[, Name ] ...]
Description
The lsuser command displays the user account attributes. You can use this command to list all attributes
of all the system user accounts or all the attributes of specific user accounts. If you specify more than one
user account, each user account is separated by a comma. If you do not specify any user accounts, the
attributes of all user accounts are displayed.
The lsuser command lists each user's attributes on one line. It displays attribute information as
Attribute=Value definitions, each separated by a blank space.
Note: The lsuser command only displays the users that were created on the Virtual I/O Server. It filters
out all users that do not use the rksh shell or have the following role: roles=RunDiagnostics. The lsuser
command does not display all LDAP users. For example, the command does not display an LDAP user
that was created on another LDAP client, that does not exist on the Virtual I/O Server.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Security
This command can be run by any users. However, user attributes are only displayed for the padmin user.
254
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Examples
1. To list all users on the system, type:
lsuser
The system displays output similar to the following for the padmin user:
padmin roles=PAdmin account_locked=false expires=0 histexpire=0
histsize=0 loginretries=0 maxage=0 maxexpired=-1 maxrepeats=8 minage=0
minalpha=0 mindiff=0 minlen=0 minother=0 pwdwarntime=0
sally roles=DEUser account_locked=false expires=0 histexpire=0
histsize=0 loginretries=0 maxage=0 maxexpired=-1 maxrepeats=8 minage=0
minalpha=0 mindiff=0 minlen=0 minother=0 pwdwarntime=330
henry roles=DEUser account_locked=false expires=0 histexpire=0
histsize=0 loginretries=0 maxage=0 maxexpired=-1 maxrepeats=8 minage=0
minalpha=0 mindiff=0 minlen=0 minother=0 pwdwarntime=330
admin1 roles=Admin account_locked=false expires=0 histexpire=0
histsize=0 loginretries=0 maxage=0 maxexpired=-1 maxrepeats=8 minage=0
minalpha=0 mindiff=0 minlen=0 minother=0 pwdwarntime=330
deuser1 roles=DEUser account_locked=false expires=0 histexpire=0
histsize=0 loginretries=0 maxage=0 maxexpired=-1 maxrepeats=8 minage=0
minalpha=0 mindiff=0 minlen=0 minother=0 pwdwarntime=330
sadan roles=Admin account_locked=false expires=0 histexpire=0
histsize=0 loginretries=0 maxage=0 maxexpired=-1 maxrepeats=8 minage=0
minalpha=0 mindiff=0 minlen=0 minother=0 pwdwarntime=330 registry=LDAP
SYSTEM=LDAP sruser1 roles=SRUser,RunDiagnostics
account_locked=false expires=0 histexpire=0
histsize=0 loginretries=0 maxage=0 maxexpired=-1 maxrepeats=8 minage=0
minalpha=0 mindiff=0 minlen=0 minother=0 pwdwarntime=330
view1 roles=ViewOnly account_locked=false expires=0 histexpire=0
histsize=0 loginretries=0 maxage=0 maxexpired=-1 maxrepeats=8 minage=0
minalpha=0 mindiff=0 minlen=0 minother=0 pwdwarntime=330
The system displays the following information for other users:
padmin roles=PAdmin
sally roles=DEUser
henry roles=DEUser
admin1 roles=Admin
deuser1 roles=DEUser
sadan roles=Admin
sruser1 roles=SRUser
view1 roles=ViewOnly
2. To display the attributes of user admin1, type the following command:
lsuser admin1
3. To display the attributes of user admin1 and user admin2, type the following command:
lsuser admin1, admin2
Related Information
The chuser command, the mkuser command, the rmuser command, and the passwd command.
IVM lsvet command
Purpose
List Capacity on Demand advanced functions activation information.
Syntax
lsvet -t {code | hist} -m managed-system [-F [attribute-names] [--header]] [--help ]
Alphabetical list of commands
255
Description
The lsvet command lists activation information for Capacity on Demand advanced functions. Capacity on
Demand advanced functions include PowerVM Editions and Enterprise Enablement. Capacity on
Demand advanced functions are sometimes referred to as Virtualization Engine systems technologies.
Flags
-t
The IP address or host name of the managed system. Use code for the Virtualization
Engine systems technologies activation codes, and hist for the Virtualization Engine
systems technologies activation history log.
Attribute name
time_stamp=08/30/2007 00:16:28,entry=[VIOSI0500040A-0336] IBM i processor capacity
limit enabled.
The name of the managed system for which information is to be listed. The name may
either be the user-defined name for the managed system, or be in the form
tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the
serial number of the managed system. The tttt-mmm*ssssssss form must be used if there
are multiple managed systems with the same user-defined name.
-m
-F
A delimiter separated list of attribute names representing the desired attribute values to
display. If this option is specified without any attribute names, then all of the attributes
will be displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values will be displayed. No attribute
names will be displayed. The attribute values displayed will be separated by the
delimiter which was specified with this option.
--header
--help
This option is useful when only attribute values are desired to be displayed, or when
the values of only selected attributes are desired to be displayed.
Display a header record, which is a delimiter separated list of attribute names for the
attribute values that will be displayed. This header record will be the first record
displayed. This option is only valid when used with the -F option.
Display the help text for this command and exit.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Examples
1. To display the activation code generation information, type the following command:
lsvet -m sys1 -t code
To display the activation history log, type the following command:
2.
lsvet -m 9117-570*1001213 -t hist
time_stamp=02/07/2006 19:52:03,entry=HSCL0421 POWER Hypervisor code entered.
time_stamp=02/07/2006 19:52:03,entry=HSCL0403 Virtual I/O server
capability enabled.
time_stamp=02/07/2006 19:52:03,entry=HSCL0405 Micro-partitioning
capability enabled.
time_stamp=02/07/2006 19:52:03,entry=HSCL0406 Multiple partitions enabled.
256
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
lsvg command
Purpose
Displays information about volume groups.
Syntax
lsvg [-map | -lv | -pv ] [ -field FieldName ] [ -fmt Delimiter ] VolumeGroup...
Description
The lsvg command displays information about volume groups. If you use the VolumeGroup parameter,
only the information for that volume group is displayed. If you do not use the VolumeGroup parameter, a
list of the names of all defined volume groups is displayed.
When information from the Device Configuration database is unavailable, some of the fields will contain
a question mark (?) in place of the missing data. The lsvg command attempts to obtain as much
information as possible from the description area when the command is given a logical volume identifier.
Full scripting support is provided to the lsvg command by using the -field FieldNames and -fmt Delimiter
flags. The -field flag will allow the user to select which output fields to display and in what order, while
the -fmt flag provides scriptable output. The output fields will be displayed in the order they appear on
the command line.
If you do not specify any flags, the following information will be displayed:
Volume group
Volume group state
Permission
Max LVs
LVs
Open LVs
Total PVs
Active PVs
VG identifier
PP size
Total PPs
Free PPs
Alloc PPs
Quorum
VGDS
Auto-on
Concurrent
Auto-Concurrent
VG Mode
Node ID
Active Nodes
Max PPs Per PV
Name of the volume group. Volume group names must be unique and can range from
1 to 15 characters.
State of the volume group. If the volume group is active, the state is either
active/complete (indicating all physical volumes are active) or active/partial
(indicating some physical volumes are not active). If the volume group is not active, the
state is inactive.
Access permission: read-only or read-write.
Maximum number of logical volumes allowed in the volume group.
Number of logical volumes currently in the volume group.
Number of logical volumes within the volume group that are currently open.
Total number of physical volumes within the volume group.
Number of physical volumes that are currently active.
The volume group identifier.
Size of each physical partition.
Total number of physical partitions within the volume group.
Number of physical partitions not allocated.
Number of physical partitions currently allocated to logical volumes.
Number of physical volumes needed for a majority.
Number of volume group descriptor areas within the volume group.
Automatic activation at IPL (yes or no).
States whether the volume group is Concurrent Capable or Non-Concurrent Capable.
States whether you should auto activate the Concurrent Capable volume group in
concurrent or non-concurrent mode. For volume groups that are Non-Concurrent
Capable, this value defaults to Disabled.
The mode of the volume group: Concurrent or Non-Concurrent.
Node id of this node if volume group is in concurrent node.
Node ids of other concurrent nodes that have this volume group active.
Maximum number of physical partitions per physical volume allowed for this volume
group.
Alphabetical list of commands
257
Max PVs
LTG size
BB POLICY
SNAPSHOT VG
PRIMARY VG
Maximum number of physical volumes allowed in this volume group.
Logical track group size, in number of kilobytes, of the volume group.
Bad block relocation policy of the volume group.
Snapshot volume group name if the snapshot volume group is active else snapshot
volume group identifier.
Original volume group name of a snapshot volume group if the original volume group
is active else original volume group identifier.
Flags
-field
258
Specifies the list of fields to display. The following fields are supported if no flags are
specified:
vgname
Name of the volume group. Volume group names must be unique systemwide
and can range from 1 to 15 characters.
vgstate State of the volume group. If the volume group is activated with the
activatevg command, the state is either active/complete (indicating all
physical volumes are active) or active/partial (indicating all physical
volumes are not active). If the volume group is de-activated with the
deactivatevg command, the state is inactive.
access Access permission: read-only or read-write.
maxlvs Maximum number of logical volumes allowed in the volume group.
numlvs
Number of logical volumes currently in the volume group.
openlvs
Number of logical volumes within the volume group that are currently open.
totalpvs
Total number of physical volumes within the volume group.
stalepvs
Number of PVs which are not current. The data is stale.
stalepps
Number of PPs which are not current. The data is stale.
totalpps
Total number of physical partitions within the volume group.
freepps
Number of physical partitions not allocated.
usedpps
Number of physical partitions currently allocated to logical volumes.
quorum
Number of physical volumes needed for a majority.
vgds
Number of volume group descriptor areas within the volume group.
auton Automatic activation at IPL (yes or no).
pppervg
Maximum number of physical partitions allowed in this volume group.
ppperpv
Maximum number of physical partitions per physical volume allowed for this
volume group.
maxpvs
Maximum number of physical volumes allowed in this volume group. This
information is displayed only for 32 and 128 PV volume groups.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Logical track group size of the volume group. The maximum amount of data
that can be transferred in one I/O request to the disks of the volume group.
The LTG size will be displayed in kilobytes unless the LTG size is greater than
1 MB, in which case megabytes will be used. it is capable of dynamically
determining the LTG size based-on the disk topology and it is listed as
Dynamic. If that capability is disabled by the user with the option, then it will
be listed as Static.
bbpolicy
Bad block relocation policy of the volume group.
hotspare
autosync
ltgsize
The following fields are supported if the -lv flag is specified:
lvname A logical volume within the volume group.
type
Logical volume type.
lps
Number of logical partitions in the logical volume.
pvs
Number of physical partitions used by the logical volume.
lvstate
State of the logical volume. Opened/stale indicates the logical volume is open
but contains partitions that are not current. Opened/syncd indicates the logical
volume is open and synchronized. Closed indicates the logical volume has not
been opened.
mount File system mount point for the logical volume, if applicable.
The following fields are supported if the -pv flag is specified:
pvname
A physical volume within the volume group.
pvstate State of the physical volume.
totalpps
Number of physical partitions on the physical volume.
freepps
Number of free physical partitions on the physical volume.
The number of physical partitions allocated within each section of the physical
volume: outer edge, outer middle, center, inner middle, and inner edge of the
physical volume.
Specifies a delimiter character to separate output fields.
Lists the following information for each physical volume within the group specified by
the VolumeGroup parameter:
dist
-fmt
-pv
Physical volume
A physical volume within the group.
PVstate
State of the physical volume.
Total PPs
Total number of physical partitions on the physical volume.
Free PPs
Number of free physical partitions on the physical volume.
Distribution
The number of physical partitions allocated within each section of the physical
volume: outer edge, outer middle, center, inner middle, and inner edge of the
physical volume.
Alphabetical list of commands
259
Lists the following information for each logical volume within the group specified by
the VolumeGroup parameter:
-lv
LV
A logical volume within the volume group.
Type
Logical volume type.
LPs
Number of logical partitions in the logical volume.
PPs
Number of physical partitions used by the logical volume.
PVs
Number of physical volumes used by the logical volume.
Logical volume state
State of the logical volume. Opened/stale indicates the logical volume is open
but contains partitions that are not current. Opened/syncd indicates the logical
volume is open and synchronized. Closed indicates the logical volume has not
been opened.
Mount Point
File system mount point for the logical volume, if applicable.
Lists the following fields for each logical volume on the physical volume:
PVname:PPnum [LVname: LPnum [:Copynum] [PPstate]]
-map
PVname
Name of the physical volume as specified by the system.
PPnum Physical partition number. Physical partition numbers can range from 1 to
1016.
LVname
Name of the logical volume to which the physical partitions are allocated.
Logical volume names must be system-wide unique names, and can range
from 1 to 64 characters.
LPnum Logical partition number. Logical partition numbers can range from 1 to
64,000.
Copynum
Mirror number.
PPstate Only the physical partitions on the physical volume that are not current are
shown as stale.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To display the names of all volume groups within the system, type:
lsvg
2. To display information about volume group vg02, type:
lsvg vg02
The characteristics and status of both the logical and physical partitions of volume group vg02 are
displayed.
3. To display the names, characteristics, and status of all the logical volumes in volume group vg02,
type:
lsvg -lv vg02
260
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Related Information
The mkvg command, the chvg command, the extendvg command, the reducevg command, the mirrorios
command, the unmirrorios command, the activatevg command, the deactivatevg command, the
importvg command, the exportvg command, and the syncvg command.
lsvopt command
Purpose
Lists and displays information about the systems virtual optical devices.
Syntax
lsvopt [ -vtd VirtualTargetDevice] [-field Fieldnames] [-fmt Delimiter]
Description
The lsvopt command displays information about file backed virtual optical devices in the Virtual I/O
Server. If no flags are specified, a list of all defined file backed virtual optical devices, loaded media, and
the size of the media is displayed. If the -vtd flag is specified, the media loaded and its size is displayed
for the given virtual target device.
This command will provide full scripting support through the use of the -field and -fmt flags.
Flags
Specifies the Virtual target device of the file backed virtual optical media
The following fields are supported if no flags are specified:
-vtd
-field FieldName
vtd
Virtual target device of file backed virtual optical device
media
File name of loaded media or No Media
size
Size of loaded media or n/a
Specifies a delimiter character to separate output fields.
-fmt Delimiter
Examples
To display information about all file backed virtual optical devices in the Virtual I/O Server, type the
following command:
lsvopt
The system displays output similar to the following:
VTD
testopt
vtopt2
vtopt3
vtopt4
vtopt5
vtopt6
vtopt7
vtopt8
vtopt9
vtopt10
vtopt11
vtopt12
vtopt13
vtopt14
Media
No Media
No Media
clientCD
No Media
No Media
No Media
No Media
No Media
No Media
No Media
No Media
No Media
clientCD
No Media
Size(mb)
n/a
n/a
640
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
640
n/a
Alphabetical list of commands
261
vtopt15
vtopt16
vtopt17
No Media
installDVD1
installDVD2
n/a
1000
100
man command
Purpose
Displays manual entries online.
Syntax
man Command
Description
The man command provides reference information on commands specified by name.
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
Successful completion.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To display information about the grep command, enter:
man grep
Related Information
The more command.
migratepv command
Purpose
Moves allocated physical partitions from one physical volume to one or more other physical volumes.
Syntax
migratepv [ -lv LogicalVolume] SourcePhysicalVolume DestinationPhysicalVolume ...
Description
The migratepv command moves allocated physical partitions and the data they contain from the
SourcePhysicalVolume to one or more other physical volumes, DestinationPhysicalVolume. All physical
volumes must be within the same volume group. The specified source physical volume cannot be
included in the list of DestinationPhysicalVolume parameters.
The allocation of the new physical partitions follows the policies defined for the logical volumes that
contain the physical partitions being moved.
If you specify a logical volume that contains the boot image, the migratepv -lv command attempts to find
enough contiguous partitions on one of the target physical volumes. If the migration is successful, the
262
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
migratepv command will indicate a change in the boot device as well as the new boot physical volume.
The attempted migration fails if the migratepv -lv command is unable to find enough contiguous space
to satisfy the request.
Note: All logical volume manager migration functions work by creating a mirror of the logical volumes
involved, then resynchronizing the logical volumes. The original logical volume is then removed. If the
migratepv command is used to move a logical volume containing the primary dump device, the system
will not have an accessible primary dump device during the execution of the command. Therefore, a
dump taken during this execution may fail.
Flags
Moves only the physical partitions allocated to the specified logical volume and located
on the specified source physical volume.
-lv
Exit Status
Return code
Description
8
The physical volume is not assigned to a volume group
Examples
1. To move physical partitions from hdisk1 to hdisk6 and hdisk7, type:
migratepv hdisk1 hdisk6 hdisk7
Physical partitions are moved from one physical volume to two others within the same volume group.
2. To move physical partitions in logical volume lv02 from hdisk1 to hdisk6, type:
migratepv -lv lv02 hdisk1 hdisk6
Only those physical partitions contained in lv02 are moved from one physical volume to another.
Related Information
The lspv command.
IVM migrlpar command
Purpose
Moves active or inactive logical partitions from one physical system to another physical system.
Syntax
To validate a migration
migrlpar [-o v -m <managed system> -t <managed system> --ip <target HMC/IVM IP address> [-u <target
HMC/IVM username>]] -p <partition name> |--id <partition ID>[-n <profile name>] [-f <input data file> | -i
"<input data>"] [-w <wait time>] [-d <detail level>]
To migrate a logical partition
migrlpar [-o m -m <managed system> -t <managed system> --ip <target HMC/IVM IP address> [-u <target
HMC/IVM username>]] -p <partition name> |--id <partition ID>[-n <profile name>] [-f <input data file> | -i
"<input data>"] [-w <wait time>] [-d <detail level>] [--async] [-v] | [ -redundantpgvios { 0 | 1 | 2 }]
Alphabetical list of commands
263
To stop a migration
migrlpar [-o s -m <managed system> {-p <partition name> |--id <partition ID> } [--help]
To recover from a failed partition migration
migrlpar [-o r -m <managed system> [--ip <target HMC/IVM IP address>] [-u <target HMC/IVM username>] ]
{-p <partition name> |--id <partition ID> }[--force] [--help]
Description
The migrlpar command validates, starts, stops, and recovers a partition migration. The Integrated
Virtualization Manager determines which type of migration to perform based on the state of the partition
referenced in the command.
Flags
The partition migration operation. Possible values:
-o
v s - stops a partition migration
v m - validates and migrates a partition if the validation succeeds
v r - recover from a failed partition migration
-m managed system
-t managed system
--ip target HMC/IVM IP
address
-u target HMC/IVM
username
-p partition name
--id partition ID
-n profile name
v v - validates a partition migration
The name of the source managed system for the partition migration operation. The
name may be the user-defined name for the managed system, or may be in the form
tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the
serial number of the managed system.
The name of the target system for the partition migration operation. The name may be
the user-defined name for the managed system, or may be in the form ttttmmm* ssssssss,
where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of
the managed system. The -t flag is required when using the -o m or -o v flags.
The IP address or hostname of the target system managing the Hardware Management
Consoleor Integrated Virtualization Manager.
The user name to use on the Integrated Virtualization Manager that manages the target
system or the HMC. If --ip flag is specified and -u flag is not specified, the user name
on the source HMC or Integrated Virtualization Manager is used on the target HMC or
Integrated Virtualization Manager.
The name of the partition on which to perform the migration.
The ID of the partition on which to perform the migration.
The name of the partition profile to be created for the migrated partition on the
destination managed system. If this option is omitted when migrating a partition, then
the last activated profile for the partition will be replaced with the current partition
configuration on the destination managed system.
This option is only valid when migrating a partition or validating a partition migration.
Note: This option is only valid if you are migrating to a system managed by the HMC.
If you are migrating to a system managed by the Integrated Virtualization Manager, the
option is not used.
264
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-f input data file
The name of the file containing the input data for the migrlpar command. The data
given in the file specified with the -f flag, or the data specified with -i, must be in
comma-separated (CSV) format. These switches can be used with the migrate (-o m)
and the validate (-o v) operations. The following attributes are supported:
virtual_scsi_mappings, virtual_fc_mappings,source_msp_name,
source_msp_ipaddr, source_msp_id,
dest_msp_name, dest_msp_ipaddr,
dest_msp_id, shared_proc_pool_id,
shared_proc_pool_name, paging_device
primary_paging_vios_id
primary_paging_vios_name
The data specified with the virtual_scsi_mappings or virtual_fc_mappings attribute
consists of one or more source virtual SCSI or virtual fibre channel adapters to
destination Virtual I/O Server logical partitions in the following format:
client_virtual_slot_num/dest_vios_lpar_name/
dest_vios_lpar_id
Attribute names
dest_msp_id
Specifies the partition ID to use on the destination managed system.
dest_msp_ipaddr
Specifies the IP address of the mover service partition of the destination
managed system.
Note: This value is verified by comparing it with the output of the lstcpip
-interfaces command.
dest_msp_name
Specifies the mover service partition name of the destination managed system.
paging_device
The paging space device to use if a memory pool is used. A paging device is a
block storage device that has been added to the memory pool and is not
designated as a paging device for any other logical partition. If the
paging_device value is a blank string, there is no paging device currently
assigned.
primary_paging_vios_id
The ID of the primary paging Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) partition that provides
access to the paging space devices for the shared memory partitions. A paging
VIOS partition is a VIOS logical partition that is assigned to the shared
memory pool.
primary_paging_vios_name
The name of the primary paging VIOS partition that provides access to the
paging space devices for the shared memory partitions. A paging VIOS
partition is a VIOS logical partition that is assigned to the shared memory
pool.
shared_proc_pool_id
The unique decimal identifier for a shared processing pool in which this logical
partition should be on the target system. The default ID is zero. If Integrated
Virtualization Manager is the destination managed system, the ID must equal
0.
shared_proc_pool_name
Specifies the name of the shared processor pool in which this partition should
be on the target system. This attribute is only valid for logical partitions using
shared processors. The default value is DefaultPool.
Alphabetical list of commands
265
source_msp_id
Specifies the partition ID to use on the source managed system. On IVM, this
ID must equal the ID of the Virtual I/O Server.
source_msp_ipaddr
Specifies the IP address of the mover service partition of the source managed
system.
Note: This value is verified by comparing it with the output of the lstcpip
-interfaces command.
source_msp_name
Specifies the mover service partition name of the source managed system. On
IVM, this name must equal the name of the Virtual I/O Server logical
partition.
virtual_fc_mappings
Comma-separated list of virtual fibre channel adapters. Each item in this list
has the format slot_num/vios_lpar_name/vios_lpar_id. For example,
4/vios2/3 specifies a virtual fibre channel adapter on a client logical partition
with a virtual slot number of 4, a VIOS partition name of vios2, and the ID of
the destination VIOS logical partition of 3.
virtual_scsi_mappings
Comma-separated list of virtual SCSI adapters. Each item in this list has the
format slot_num/vios_lpar_name/vios_lpar_id. For example, 2/vios/1
specifies a client virtual SCSI adapter with a virtual slot number of 2, a VIOS
partition name of vios, and the ID of the destination VIOS logical partition of
1.
-i input data
The input data for the migrlpar command. The format of the filter data is
attr_name1=value,attr_name2=value,... or attr_name1=value1,value2,... ,...
-w wait time
The maximum time, in minutes, to wait for the operating system commands issued by
the HMC or Integrated Virtualization Manager to the partition to be migrated to
complete.
-d detail level
The level of detail requested from the operating system commands issued by the HMC
or Integrated Virtualization Manager to all partitions participating in the migration.
Values range from 0 (none) to 5 (highest).
--async
The command returns after the validation is completed. This flag does not wait for the
migration to complete. This is only valid with the -o m flag.
-v
Enables verbose mode for the partition migration operation. When verbose mode is
enabled, detail messages and warning messages are displayed for a successful partition
migration. Detail messages and warning messages are always displayed for a partition
migration that fails, regardless of whether this option is specified.
--force
Forces a recover operation to proceed when errors are encountered. This option is only
valid when recovering from a failed partition migration and can be initiated from either
the source VIOS logical partition or the destination managed system. If the operation is
initiated from the destination managed system, only the destination managed system is
recovered.
reduntantpgvios {0 | 1 | 2} Specifies whether to configure the partition for redundancy on the target managed
system. Possible values follow:
0
Do not configure the partition for redundancy on the target managed system.
1
Configure the partition for redundancy on the target managed system.
Configure the partition for redundancy if possible on the target managed
system. If redundancy is not possible, configure as nonredundant.
If you do not specify the parameter, the current redundancy level of the migrating
partition is used.
Displays the help text for this command and exit.
2
--help
266
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Examples
1. To validate a partition migration, type the following command:
migrlpar -o v -m migfspL1 --ip migivm2 -t migfspL2 --id 5
-i "shared_proc_pool_name=ProcPoolA"
2. To perform a partition migration, type the following command:
migrlpar -o m -m migfspL1 --ip migivm2 -t migfspL2 --id 5 -i "source_msp_id=1,
source_msp_ipaddr=9.3.252.192,dest_msp_id=1,dest_msp_ipaddr=9.3.126.77"
3. To perform a partition migration for logical partitions that use virtual fibre channel adapters, type the
following command:
migrlpar -o m -m migfspL1 --ip migivm2 -t migfspL2 --id 5
-i "virtual_fc_mappings=5/VIOS/1,6/VIOS3/3"
4. To stop a partition migration, type the following command:
migrlpar -o s -m migfspL1 --id 5
5. To recover from a failed partition migration, type the following command:
migrlpar -o r -m migfspL1 --id 5
mirrorios command
Purpose
Mirrors all the logical volumes on rootvg. This command may reboot the partition as part of its
operation.
Syntax
mirrorios [-f] [-defer] [PhysicalVolume ...]
Description
The mirrorios command takes all the logical volumes on the rootvg volume group and mirrors those
logical volumes. The target physical drives must already be members of the volume group.
The mirrorios command attempts to mirror the logical volumes onto any of the disks in a volume group.
To control which drives are used for mirroring, you must include the list of disks in the input
parameters, PhysicalVolume. Mirror strictness is enforced. The mirrorios command mirrors the logical
volumes, using the default settings of the logical volume being mirrored.
The Virtual I/O Server will restart when the command is completed and you are prompted to continue.
The Virtual I/O Server will be restarted as part of the command's operation. If the user does not want the
VIOS to reboot as part of the commands operation, the user may specify the -defer option, which is only
available for VIOS 1.4 or later. No need to reboot for VIOS 1.5 or later, so you should use the -defer
option. If the command restarts as part of its operation, then the user can specify not to be prompted to
continue. The -f option tells the command to run without prompting you.
Note: For best results, mirror the rootvg volume group on all Virtual I/O Server partitions.
Only the prime administrator (padmin) can run this command.
Alphabetical list of commands
267
Flags
-f
-defer
PhysicalVolume
Runs the command without prompting you to continue.
Instructs the command not to reboot the VIOS. Running the command without the
-defer option will automatically reboot the VIOS.
Specifies the target physical volume name. The volume must already be a member of
the volume group.
Exit Status
The Virtual I/O Server is already mirrored
Boot LV not found
The physical volume appears to belong to another volume group
5
6
7
Examples
1. To mirror the Virtual I/O Server root volume group to physical volume hdisk4, type the following
command:
mirrorios -f hdisk4
2. To mirror the Virtual I/O Server root volume group to physical volume hdisk4, but defer a system
reboot, type the following command:
mirrorios -defer hdisk4
Related Information
The activatevg command, the chvg command, the deactivatevg command, the exportvg command, the
importvg command, the lsvg command, the mkvg command, the syncvg command, the unmirrorios
command, and the alt_root_vg.
IVM mkauthkeys command
Purpose
Allows key-based SSH authentication between two systems. This updates the ~/.ssh/authorized_keys2
file with the specified public key. It can also be used to push the users public key to a remote Integrated
Virtualization Manager or HMC system.
Syntax
To add the SSH key as an authorized key locally:
mkauthkeys { -a | --add } <key string>
To remove the SSH key locally:
mkauthkeys { -r | --remove } [ -u <user> ] <key string>
To exchange public keys with a remote system:
mkauthkeys { -a | --add } -- ip <remote system> [ -u <user> ] <key string>
To test the remote non-interactive authentication using the SSH key:
mkauthkeys --test -- ip <remote system> [ -u <user> ]
268
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Description
The mkauthkeys command updates the Integrated Virtualization Manager user's authorized_keys2 file.
Flags
-a
-g
-r
--add
--remove
--test
--ip <remote server IP>
-u username
key string
Adds the ssh command key.
Displays the public key for the specified user and generates the user's public and
private key pair if they do not exist.
Removes the key for the specified user ID and host.
Adds the ssh command key.
Removes the key for the specified user ID and host.
Verifies authentication to the remote host
Allows installing this user's public key on the specified remote HMC or Integrated
Virtualization Manager system for the user specified with -u flag. If -u flag is not
specified, the remote user's public key will be installed on the local system.
Specifies the user name to add or remove the key. You must have hmcsuperadmin or
PAdmin authority to add or remove key for other users.
The ssh command key to add to or the ID to remove.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Examples
1. To add the SSH key generated for user joe@somehost , type the following command:
mkauthkeys -a ’adB8fqeZs2d-gg+q joe@somehost
2. To display the current user's public key, type the following command:
mkauthkeys -g
3. To display the public key for fred, type the following command:
mkauthkeys -g -u fred
4. To remove the SSH key generated for user joe@somehost, type the following command:
mkauthkeys -r ’adB8fqeZs2d-gg+q joe@somehost’
5. To remove all SSH keys generated for user joe@somehost, type the following command:
mkauthkeys -r ’joe@somehost’
6. To add the SSH key generated for this user to a remote.host as user fred, type the following
command:
mkauthkeys -a --ip remote.host -u fred
Note: The user will prompted for the password on the remote.host.
7. To enable user from somesystem with public key ssh-rsa thersakeygoeshere= to access the Virtual I/O
Server without using a password. type the following command:
mkauthkeys -a ssh-rsa thersakeygoeshere= user@somesystem
8. To remove the key from the authorized key list, type the following command:
mkauthkeys -r ssh-rsa thersakeygoeshere= user@somesystem
9. To remove all keys that end with the string user@somesystem, type the following command:
mkauthkeys -r user@somesystem
10. To allow the padmin user to remove a key for any user, type the following command:
mkauthkeys -r -u user ssh-rsa thersakeygoeshere= user@somesystem
Alphabetical list of commands
269
11. To add the current user's local public key to the authorized keys list on a remote system, and adds
the user's remote public key to the authorized keys list on the local system, type the following
command:
mkauthkeys -a --ip othersystem.com
12. To add the current user's local public key to the authorized keys list for remote user user on a remote
system, and adds the remote public key of user to the authorized keys list for the current user on the
local system, type the following command:
mkauthkeys -a --ip othersystem.com -u user
13. To verify non-interactive authentication using the SSH key for the current user, type the following
command:
mkauthkeys --test --ip othersystem.com
Note: If it returns 0, then non-interactive authentication is working properly. If mkauthkeys returns
nonzero, then non-interactve authentication is not configured properly and displays the following
message: [VIOSE0104200B-0217] Permission denied (publickey,password,keyboard-interactive).
14. To verify non-interactive authentication using the SSH key for the current user on local system to
specify the user on a remote system, type the following command:
mkauthkeys --test --ip othersystem.com -u user
mkbdsp command
Purpose
Assign storage from a storage pool to be a backing device for a virtual SCSI adapter.
Syntax
Create a backing device file or logical volume:
mkbdsp [-sp StoragePool] Size -bd BackingDevice
Assign an existing file or logical volume as a backing device:
mkbdsp [-sp StoragePool]-bd BackingDevice -vadapter ServerVirtualSCSIAdapter -tn TargetDeviceName
Create a new file or logical volume as a backing device:
mkbdsp [-sp StoragePool] Size [-bd BackingDevice] -vadapter ServerVirtualSCSIAdapter -tn TargetDeviceName
Description
The mkbdsp command assigns a backing device to a virtual SCSI server adapter. If the -sp flag is not
specified the default storage pool will be used. The storage pool must be specified when working with
file backed devices. The default storage pool will still be used when working with logical volumes. If the
storage size is given, the mkvdev command will create a backing device of at least the specified size and
assign it as the backing device. When working with file backed devices the -bd flag must be specified.
The system will not generate a name. The type of backing device created will be determined by the
storage pool type. Size can be given in megabytes (###M/n) or gigabytes (###G/g)or physical partition
(###).
Note:
v Specifying physical partitions only works for logical volume backing devices.
v The backing device specified cannot be assigned to a shared memory pool (to be used as a paging
space device by a shared memory partition).
270
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
You must specify the name for the newly created backing device using the -bd flag in combination with
the size parameter. Naming the backing device is optional when working with logical volumes. You also
have the option of assigning the name for the newly created virtual target device using the -tn flag in
combination with the -vadapter flag.
Flags
-bd BackingDevice
-sp StoragePool
-vadapter
-tn
Specifies the backing device.
Specifies the storage pool to be used.
Specifies the virtual SCSI server adapter.
Specifies the name of the target device.
Note: The only values accepted are alphanumeric, a dash, an underscore, or a period.
Exit Status
23
26
34
Specified storage pool is not a valid storage pool.
Specified name is already used. Choose a different name.
Specified name is reserved. Choose a different name.
Examples
To create a virtual target device that maps a 3 GB backing device from the default storage pool the virtual
SCSI server adapter vhost3, type the following command:
mkbdsp -bd bdname 3g -vadapter vhost3
mkdir command
Purpose
Creates one or more new directories.
Syntax
mkdir [ -m Mode ] [ -p ] Directory ...
Description
The mkdir command creates one or more new directories specified by the Directory parameter. Each new
directory contains the standard entries . (dot) and .. (dot-dot). You can specify the permissions for the
new directories with the -m Mode flag.
The owner-ID and group-ID of the new directories are set to the process's effective user-ID and group-ID,
respectively. The setgid bit setting is inherited from the parent directory. To change the setgid bit, you can
either specify the -m Mode flag or issue the chmod command after the creation of the directory.
Note: To make a new directory you must have write permission in the parent directory.
Alphabetical list of commands
271
Flags
-m Mode
Sets the permission bits for the newly-created directories to the value specified by the
Mode variable. The Mode variable takes the same values as the Mode parameter for the
chmod command, either in symbolic or numeric form.
When you specify the -m flag using symbolic format, the op characters + (plus) and (minus) are interpreted relative to the assumed permission setting a=rwx. The + adds
permissions to the default mode, and the - deletes permissions from the default mode.
Refer to the chmod command for a complete description of permission bits and
formats.
Creates missing intermediate path name directories. If the -p flag is not specified, the
parent directory of each-newly created directory must already exist.
-p
Intermediate directories are created through the automatic invocation of the following
mkdir commands:
mkdir -p -m $(umask -S),u+wx $(dirname Directory) &&
mkdir [-m Mode] Directory
where the [-m Mode] represents any option supplied with your original invocation of
the mkdir command.
The mkdir command ignores any Directory parameter that names an existing directory.
No error is issued.
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
All the specified directories were created successfully, or the -p option was specified and all the
specified directories now exist.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To create a new directory called Test in the current working directory, enter:
mkdir Test
The Test directory is created with default permissions.
2. To create a new directory called Test with rwxr-xr-x permissions in the previously created
/home/demo/sub1 directory, enter:
mkdir -m 755 /home/demo/sub1/Test
3. To create a new directory called Test with default permissions in the /home/demo/sub2 directory, enter:
mkdir -p /home/demo/sub2/Test
The -p flag creates the /home, /home/demo, and /home/demo/sub2 directories if they do not already exist.
Files
/usr/bin/mkdir
Contains the mkdir command.
Related Information
The chmod command, rm command.
272
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
IVM mkgencfg command
Purpose
Performs the initial logical partition configuration for the managed system. This command is valid only
in an Integrated Virtualization Manager environment.
Syntax
mkgencfg -o init [-i "ConfigurationData" ] [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The mkgencfg command performs the initial logical partition configuration for the managed system. As
part of the initial configuration, virtual Ethernet adapters are created in the management partition. The
virtual Ethernet MAC address prefix can optionally be configured through this command.
Flags
-o Operation
The type of operations:
-i ConfigurationData
init - Perform initial logical partition configuration actions for the managed system
The configuration data consists of attribute name/value pairs, which are in a comma
separated value (CSV) format. The format of a configuration record is as follows:
"attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,..."
Note that certain attributes accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
""attribute-name=value,value,...",..."
When you specify a list of values, the attribute name/value pair must be enclosed in
double quotation marks. Depending on the shell being used, nested double quotation
marks might need to be preceded by an escape character.
Valid Attributes for Configuration Data:
mac_prefix
The prefix needs to be a 3 byte hexadecimal value. It specifies the first 2.5
bytes of the MAC address to be assigned to all virtual Ethernet adapters for
this managed system. The value cannot be a multicast address (010000 bit
must be off), and needs to be a private address (020000 bit must be on). For
example, a valid MAC address prefix is 0642A0.
pend_configured_max_lpars
The maximum number of partitions supported by the management partition
after the next restart.
Alphabetical list of commands
273
virtual_eth_mac_base_value
The virtual Ethernet MAC address base value is a per partition value. The base
value is used to build the MAC addresses for each virtual Ethernet adapter in
that partition. The base value is the first 5 bytes of the MAC address. The
virtual slot number of the virtual Ethernet adapter makes up the last byte. If
you do not assign a base value, one is generated automatically using the
following format: Base value = 0xSSSSSBBBBB
Where SSSSS is the system wide MAC address prefix and BBBBB is a randomly
generated sequence of bits (guaranteed to be unique within this physical
system).
Note:
1. The system wide MAC prefix is randomly generated unless you override it
using mkgencfg -o init -i mac_prefix.
2. If the base value is automatically generated, then the MAC address format
for a virtual Ethernet adapter is 0xSSSSSBBBBBNN, where NN is the slot
number. If you specify the base value using mkgencfg for partition 1 or
mksyscfg/chsyscfg for any other partition, then the format is
0xBBBBBBBBBBNN, where BBBBBBBBBB is the base value that you specified.
3. If a virtual Ethernet adapter is in a slot greater than or equal to 256, then
the slot number overflows into the base value, since it does not fit in 1
byte. For example, Integrated Virtualization Manager handles it as
0xBBBBBBBBBB00 + 0x00000000NNNN.
4. The mkgencfg command is the only way to specify the base value for
partition 1. After this value is set, you cannot change it without losing all
partition configuration. If you need to change the value, use the lpcfgop
command. The value is set implicitly when mkgencfg is running. The
value will be generated automatically, unless you specify the value. The
mkgencfg command runs implicitly when you run your first change
command. You can change the base value for any other partition, when the
partition is powered off.
A side effect of setting the base value for partition 1 with mkgencfg, is that
the system wide prefix is set to the first 2.5 bytes of the partition 1 base
value. As a result, there are restrictions on setting both mac_prefix and
virtual_eth_mac_base_value with mkgencfg at the same time. If you
specify both, the mac_prefix value needs to be equal to the first 2.5 bytes of
the virtual_eth_mac_base_value value.
-m ManagedSystem
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name might either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of zero on success.
Security
This command is not accessible by users with the ViewOnly role.
Examples
1. To initialize the logical partition configuration for the managed system using defaults, type:
mkgencfg -o init
2. To initialize the logical partition configuration for the managed system with support for 17 partitions
and a MAC prefix of 0x06ABC0, type:
274
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
mkgencfg -o init -i "pend_lpm_max_lpars=17,mac_prefix=06ABC0"
mkkrb5clnt command
Purpose
Configures a Kerberos client.
Syntax
mkkrb5clnt -h | -r <realm> { -c <KDC> -s <server> | -l {ldapserver | ldapserver:port} [-c <KDC> -s<server>]
} [-a<admin> ] -d <domain> [-A] [-i <database>] [-K] [-T] | -i <database> | -U [-a <admin>]
Description
The mkkrb5clnt command configures a Kerberos client.
Flags
-h
-c KDC
-r realm
-s server
-U
-a admin
-d domain
-A
-i database
-K
-T
-l ldapserver | ldapserver:port
Specifies that the command will only display the valid command syntax
Specifies the KDC server
Specifies the full realm name for which the Kerberos client is to be configured.
Specifies the fully qualified host name for Kerberos admin server
Undo the setup from the previous configuration command
Specifies the principal name of the Kerberos server admin
Specifies the complete domain name for the Kerberos client
Specifies root to be added as a Kerberos administrative user
Configures integrated Kerberos authentication
Specifies Kerberos to be configured as the default authentication scheme
Specifies the flag to acquire the server administration TGT based administration ticket.
For clients, specifies the LDAP directory server to use for Administration server and
KDC discovery using LDAP. If the -l flag is used, then the KDC and server flags are
optional. If the -l option is not used, the KDC and server flags must be specified. The
port number can optionally be specified.
Exit Status
Return code
Description
0
Success
1
Invalid flag, argument, or command failure
Examples
1. To display the command syntax, type the following command:
mkkrb5clnt -h
2. To configure testbox.com as the client, make root as the server admin, configure integrated login,
configure Kerberos as default authentication scheme, type the following command:
mkkrb5clnt -c bob.kerberso.com -r KERBER.COM -s bob.kerberso.com -d testbox.com
-A -i files -K -T
mkldap command
Purpose
Sets up Virtual I/O Server as a Lightweight Direct Access Protocol (LDAP) client.
Alphabetical list of commands
275
Syntax
mkldap -host serverlist -bind bindDN -passwd bindpwd [ -base baseDN ] [ -port serverport ] [ -ctimeout
cacheTimeout ] [ -csize cacheSize ] [ -threads NumberofThreads ] [ -hbeatint heartBeatInt ] [-keypath
SSL_database_path ] [-keypasswd SSL_password ] [ -auth authType ] [ -users userlist | ALL]
mkldap -deconfig
Description
The mkldap command is used to set up the Virtual I/O Server as an LDAP client. The server bind
distinguished name (DN) and password for client access to the LDAP server. The mkldap command
saves server bind DN, password, server name, the SSL key path and password, and other configuration
attributes to the /etc/security/ldap/ldap.cfg file. The mkldap command saves the bind password and
SSL key password (if SSL is configured) to the /etc/security/ldap/ldap.cfg file in encrypted format.
Note: These encrypted passwords are system specific, and can only be used by the secldapclntd daemon
on the system where they are generated.
You can supply multiple LDAP servers to the mkldap command during client setup. In this case, the
client contacts the servers in the supplied order and establishes connection to the first server to which the
client can successfully bind.
The LDAP client communicates to the LDAP server through a client side daemon, secldapclntd.
The secldapclntd command is enabled or disabled by using the startnetsvc and stopnetsvc commands.
Flags
-host serverlist
-bind bindDN
-passwd bindpwd
-base baseDN
-port serverport
-ctimeout cachetimeout
-csize cacheSize
-threads NumberofThreads
-hbeatint heartBeatInt
-keypath SSL_database_path
-keypasswd SSL_password
-auth authType
-users userlist
-deconfig bindpwd
Specifies comma-separated list of host names.
Specifies the DN (distinguished name) to bind to the LDAP server.
Specifies the clear text password for the bindDN used to bind to the LDAP server.
Specifies the base DN for the mkldap command, in which to search for the user base
DN and group base DN. If you do not specify this flag, the entire database is searched.
Specifies the port number to which the LDAP server is listening.
Specifies the maximum time length that a cache entry expires. Set this value to 0 to
disable caching.
Specifies the maximum number of user entries used in the client side daemon cache.
Specifies the numbers of threads that the client side daemon uses.
Specifies the time interval of heartbeats between the client and the LDAP server.
Specifies the full path to the SSL database.
Note: This requires the ldap.max_crypto_client fileset to be installed.
Specifies the password for the SSL key.
Note: This requires the ldap.max_crypto_client fileset to be installed.
Specifies the authentication mechanism that is used to authenticated users. Valid values
are unix_auth and ldap_auth.
Specifies the comma-separted list of user names to enable for LDAP authentication.
Specify ALL to enable all users on the client.
Specifies that the previous client setup to the LDAP client configuration file should be
undone.
Exit Status
0
276
Success
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
1
Invalid flag, argument, or command failure
Examples
Run one of the following mkldap commands with the -u flag for a user ID to become an LDAP user ID
at client setup time:
v
mkldap -host ldapserv1 -bind cn=admin -passwd adminpwd
-users user1,user2
mkldap -host ldapserv1 -bind cn=admin -passwd adminpwd
v To setup the client to talk to the server3.your_company.com LDAP server using SSL, enter the
following command:
mkdap -bind cn=admin -passwd adminpwd -host server3.your_company.com
-base o=mycompany,c=us -keypath /usr/ldap/clientkey.kdb
-keypasswd keypwd -users user1,user2
Either of these commands set up the local host as the client of the LDAP server running on host
ldapserv1 and cn=admin and -passwd adminpwd are the LDAP server administrator DN and password.
Files
/etc/security/ldap/ldap.cfg Contains the mkldap command, and server bind DN, password, server name, the SSL
key path and password, and other configuration attributes.
Related Information
The ldapadd command and the ldapsearch command.
mklv command
Purpose
Creates a logical volume.
Syntax
mklv [ -mirror ] [ -lv NewLogicalVolume | -prefix Prefix ] VolumeGroup Size [ PhysicalVolume ... ]
Description
The mklv command creates a new logical volume within the VolumeGroup. If you specify one or more
physical volumes with the PhysicalVolume parameter, only those physical volumes are available for
allocating physical partitions; otherwise, all the physical volumes within the volume group are available.
The allocation policy is to use a minimum number of physical volumes.
The Size parameter specifies the minimum size the logical volume should be. When specifying Size the
following conventions must be used:
Size
Minimum logical volume size
###M/m
### MB
###G/g
### GB
Alphabetical list of commands
277
Flags
-lv
-mirror
-prefix
Specifies the logical volume name to use instead of using a system-generated name.
Logical volume names must be unique system wide name, and can range from 1 to 15
characters.
Activates mirroring for this logical volume.
Specifies the Prefix to use instead of the prefix in a system-generated name for the new
logical volume. The prefix must be less than or equal to 13 characters. The name cannot
begin with a prefix already defined in the PdDv class in the Device Configuration
Database for other devices, nor be a name already used by another device.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To make a logical volume in volume group vg02 with a minimum size of 1 Mb , type:
mklv vg02 1M
2. To make a logical volume in vg03 with 1GB chosen from physical volumes hdisk5, hdisk6, and
hdisk9, type:
mklv vg03 1G hdisk5 hdisk6 hdisk9
3. To request a logical volume with a minimum size of 10MB, type:
mklv VGNAME 10m
where VGNAME is the name of your logical volume.
Related Information
The lslv command, the extendlv command, and the rmlv command.
mklvcopy command
Purpose
Creates a mirror of a logical volume.
Syntax
mklvcopy LogicalVolume [ PhysicalVolume ... ]
Description
The mklvcopy command creates a mirror (an additional copy) of a LogicalVolume. The LogicalVolume
parameter can be a logical volume name or logical volume ID. You can request that the new copy of the
logical volume be allocated on specific physical volumes (within the volume group) with the
PhysicalVolume parameter; otherwise, all the physical volumes within the volume group are available for
allocation. The new copy of the logical volume will be placed on a separate physical volume.
Note: Only one additional copy of a logical volume can be created.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
278
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Examples
1. To create a copy of the logical volume lv01, so that a total of two copies exist, type:
mklvcopy lv01
Related Information
The extendlv command, the lslv command, the mklv command, the rmlv command, and the rmlvcopy
command.
mkpath command
Purpose
Adds to the system another path to an MPIO capable device.
Syntax
mkpath { [ -dev Name ] [ -pdev Parent ] [ -conn Connection ] } [ -def ]
Description
The mkpath command defines, and possibly configures, one or more paths to the target device (-dev
Name). The paths are identified by a combination of the -dev Name, -pdev Parent, and -conn Connection
flags. Both the target device and parent must be previously defined in the system to define a path. They
both must be AVAILABLE to configure a path.
If the -def flag is specified, the mkpath command only defines the new path definition to the system. If
the -def flag is not specified, the mkpath command attempts to define the path, if it does not already
exist, before it attempts to configure the path. Configuring a path requires the path to already be defined
and both the device and the parent device to already be configured.
The mkpath command displays a status message upon completion. It is possible for some paths to
configure and others to fail.
Note that not all devices will be able to have paths manually defined by using the mkpath command.
These limitations are due to the way that path information is stored for these devices. Fiber channel
devices fall into this category.
The mkpath command provides status messages about the results of operation. Messages in one of the
following formats will be generated:
path [ available | defined ]
This message is displayed when mkpath is run on a single path. If the path is successfully
configured the message path available is displayed. If the path is not successfully configured
and there is no explicit error code returned by the method, the message path defined is
displayed.
paths available
This message is displayed if multiple paths were identified and all paths were successfully
configured.
some paths available
This message is displayed if multiple paths were identified, but only some of them were
successfully configured.
no paths processed
This message is generated if no paths were found matching the selection criteria.
Alphabetical list of commands
279
Flags
-conn Connection
-def
-dev Name
-pdev Parent
Indicates the connection information associated with the path to be added. This flag is
required if the -def flag is specified.
Defines a new path to a device by adding a path definition to the system. The new
path will not automatically be configured when the -def flag is specified. Note that
only one path may be defined at a time. The -conn and the -pdev flags are required
when the -def flag is used.
Specifies the logical device name of the target device to which the path(s) are being
added. The path(s) to be added are qualified by the -pdev and -conn flags.
Indicates the logical device name of the parent device associated with the path(s) to be
added. This flag is required if the -def flag is specified.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To define and configure an already defined path between scsi0 and the hdisk1 device at SCSI ID 5
and LUN 0 (connection 5,0), enter:
mkpath -dev hdisk1 -pdev scsi0 -conn 5,0
The system displays a message similar to the following:
path available
2. To configure an already defined path from fscsi0 to fiber channel disk hdisk1, type:
mkpath -dev hdisk1 -pdev fscsi0
The system displays a message similar to the following:
path available
3. To only add to the Customized Paths object class a path definition between scsi0 and the hdisk1 disk
device at SCSI ID 5 and LUN 0, enter:
mkpath -def -dev hdisk1 -pdev scsi0 -conn 5,0
The system displays a message similar to the following:
path defined
Related Information
The lspath command and the rmpath command.
mkrep command
Purpose
Create the Virtual Media Repository.
Syntax
mkrep -sp ParentStoragePool -sizeSize
280
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Description
The mkrep command creates the virtual media repository in the specified parent storage pool. The virtual
media repository is used to store virtual optical media which can be conceptually inserted into
file-backed virtual optical devices. See the mkvdev command for detail on how to create file-backed
virtual optical devices.
The -size flag specifies the minimum size the repository should be. When specifying the Size the
following conventions must be used:
Size
Minimum file storage pool size
###M/m
###MB
###G/g
###GB
Flags
-size Size
-sp ParentStoragePool
Specifies the minimum size the repository should be.
Specifies the parent storage pool the repository should be created within. The parent
storage pool must be a logical volume pool.
Examples
To create the virtual media repository within logical volume storage pool client_data with a size of at
least 100 megabytes , type the following command:
mkrep -sp client_data -size 100m
mksp command
Purpose
Create a storage pool.
Syntax
Create a logical volume storage pool:
mksp [ -f ] StoragePool PhysicalVolume ...
Create a file storage pool:
mksp -fb StoragePool -sp ParentStoragePool-size Size [-mirror]
Description
The mksp command creates a new logical volume or file storage pool. Logical volume pools are used to
store logical volume backing devices, file storage pools and the Virtual Media Repository. These pools are
created using the physical volumes represented by the PhysicalVolume parameter.
If the system detects a description area from a volume group that is not varied on, it prompts you for
confirmation in continuing with the command. The previous contents of the physical volume are lost, so
you must be cautious when using the override function. By specifying the -f flag, you force the volume
group to be created without sending a confirmation message.
Alphabetical list of commands
281
File pools are used to store backing device files. A file pool is created within a logical volume pool,
specified by the -sp ParentStorage Pool parameter.
The -size Size flag specifies the minimum size the pool should be. When specifying Size the following
conventions must be used:
Size
Minimum file storage pool size
###M/m
###MB
###G/g
###GB
Flags
Forces the storage pool to be created on the specified physical volume unless the
physical volume is part of another storage pool or volume group in the Device
Configuration Database or is an active volume group.
-f
-fb StoragePool
-mirror
-size Size
-sp ParentStoragePool
In addition, the physical volume that you specify cannot be assigned to a shared
memory pool (to be used as a paging space device by a shared memory partition).
Specifies the name of the file storage pool to be created. The name must be a unique
system wide name, and can range from 1 to 15 characters.
Activates mirroring for this file storage pool.
Specifies the minimum size the file storage pool should be.
Specifies the parent storage pool the file pool should be created within. The parent
storage pool must be a logical volume pool
Examples
1. To create a new logical volume storage pool from physical volumes hdisk3 and hdisk4 and with the
name client_data, type:
mksp -f client_data hdisk3 hdisk4
The new storage pool is created with the name client_data.
2. To create a new file storage pool within logical volume storage pool client_data with a size of at least
100 MB and with the name client2_data, type:
mksp -fb client2_data -sp client_data -size 100m
The new storage pool is created with the name client2_data.
IVM mksvcevent command
Purpose
Creates a new serviceable event. This command is valid only in an Integrated Virtualization Manager
environment.
Syntax
mksvcevent -d Description --reporting_mtms ReportingMTMS
Description
The mksvcevent command creates a serviceable event with the specified description. This event will
show up in the list of serviceable events obtained by the lssvcevents command.
282
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Flags
-d Description
-reporting_mtms
ReportingMTMS
The description or text of the event.
The type-model*serial of the reporting system. This should be in the form
tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is
the serial number of the managed system.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of zero on success.
Security
This command is not accessible by users with the ViewOnly role.
Examples
1. To create a serviceable event, type:
mksvcevent -d This is a test event entry -reporting_mtms 9111-520*XXXXXXX
Related Information
The lssvcevents command, and the chsvcevent command.
IVM mksyscfg command
Purpose
Creates a logical partition on the managed system.
Syntax
To create a logical partition on the managed system
mksyscfg -r lpar { -f ConfigurationFile | -i ConfigurationData } [ -m ManagedSystem ]
Description
The mksyscfg command creates a logical partition on the managed system.
Flags
-r ResourceType
-m ManagedSystem
The type of resources to create:
lpar - Logical partition resources
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name might either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is the
model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
Alphabetical list of commands
283
-f ConfigurationFile
The name of the file containing the configuration data needed to change the resources.
The configuration data consists of attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma
separated value (CSV) format. These attribute name/value pairs form a configuration
record. A line feed marks the end of a configuration record. The file must contain one
configuration record for each resource to be changed, and each configuration record
must be for the same resource type. If the resource type is the managed system or the
managed frame, then the file must contain only one configuration record.
The format of a configuration record is as follows:
attribute-name=value,attribute-name=value,...<LF>
Note that certain attributes accept a comma separated list of values, as follows:
"attribute-name=value,value,...",...<LF>
When a list of values is specified, the attribute name/value pair must be enclosed in
double quotation marks. Depending on the shell being used, nested double quotation
marks might need to be preceded by an escape character.
Required Attributes for Partition
desired_mem
The assigned megabytes of memory for this partition
lpar_env
A required attribute that indicates the type of partition to create. This attribute
is used to create an RPA partition, which supports AIX, Linux, or IBM i
partition types.
name
Name of the partition to create.
max_mem
The maximum megabytes of memory for this partition
min_mem
The minimum megabytes of memory for this partition.
Optional Attributes for partitions
allow_perf_collection
Permission for the partition to retrieve shared processor pool utilization
information Valid values are:
v 0: do not allow authority
v 1: allow authority
alt_restart_device_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the alternate restart device for
the IBM i logical partition. If the load source slot is a value other than none,
then this attribute is optional. Valid values are:
v Slot Number (virtual I/O)
v none
284
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
alt_console_slot
The location of the physical I/O slot that contains the alternate console device
for the IBM i logical partition. The default value is none.
auto_start
Valid values are:
0 - do not automatically start with system power on
1 - automatically start with system power on
boot_mode
Partition power on mode. Valid values are:
norm - normal
dd - diagnostic with default boot list
ds - diagnostic with stored boot list
of - Open Firmware OK prompt
sms - System Management Services
console_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the console device for the
IBM i logical partition. Valid values are:
v Slot Number (virtual I/O)
v none
desired_io_entitled_mem
The amount of I/O entitled memory for a shared memory partition. This is
the portion of memory that is reserved for I/O mappings.
v auto (automatically manage)
v Number of megabytes
If the value is auto, the entitlement is calculated based on the virtual I/O
configuration of the logical partition. If the virtual I/O configuration is
changed, the entitlement is updated automatically. If auto is not used, no
automatic adjustments are made. The default value is auto.
desired_proc_units
The assigned number of processing units for this partition
Alphabetical list of commands
285
desired_procs
The assigned number of processors for this partition. In shared processing
mode, this refers to virtual processors.
io_slots
Comma separated list of I/O slots for the partition. Each item in this list has
the format: drc_index/slot_io_pool_id/is_required
The attribute names are not present in the list, just their values are present.
For example, 21010003/none/1, specifies an I/O slot with a DRC index of
0x21010003 which is not assigned to an I/O pool, and it is a required slot.
Valid values for is_required:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
ipl_source
The IPL source for the IBM i logical partition. This attribute is optional. Valid
values are:
v a
v b
v c
v d (default)
lhea_capabilities
Comma-separated list of logical Host Ethernet Adapter capabilities, with each
capability having one of the following formats: adapter-ID/capability or
adapter-ID/5/ieq/nieq/qp/cq/mr where ieq (interruptible event queues), nieq
(non-interruptible event queues), qp (queue pairs), cq (completion queues), and
mr (memory regions) each specify the resource amount in addition to the base
minimum. Valid values are:
v 0 - minimum
v 1 - low
v 2 - medium
v 3 - high
v 4 - dedicated
v 5 - custom
lhea_logical_ports
Comma-separated list of Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (LHEA) logical ports,
with each logical port having the following format:
adapter-ID/port-group/physical-port-ID/
logical-port-ID/allowed -VLAN-IDs
All four '/' characters must be present, but optional values may be omitted.
Optional values are allowed-VLAN-IDs.
286
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
load_source_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the load source for the IBM i
logical partition. If the alt_restart_device_slot has a value other than none,
then this attribute is optional. Valid values are:
v Slot Number (virtual I/O)
v none
lpar_avail_priority
The priority of the partition to maintain its entitled processors. If a processor
failure occurs, processing resources will be removed first from the lowest
priority partition.
lpar_id Unique integer ID for the partition. If this attribute is not specified, the lowest
available partition will be assigned.
lpar_proc_compat_mode
The requested compatibility mode. Use lssyscfg -r sys -F
lpar_proc_compat_modes to retrieve a list of valid values.
max_procs
The maximum number of processors for this partition. In shared processing
mode, this refers to virtual processors.
max_proc_units
The maximum number of processing units for this partition
max_virtual_slots
Maximum number of virtual I/O adapter slots.
Note: The system determines this value.
mem_mode
The partition memory mode.
v ded - dedicated memory
v shared - shared memory
If the memory mode is shared, then the logical partition cannot be assigned
any physical I/O slots or host Ethernet adapter resources, the proc_mode
attribute on the logical partition must be shared, and a memory pool must
exist. If the memory mode is omitted, then it is assumed to be a dedicated
memory mode.
Note: The Virtual I/O Server logical partition only supports the dedicated
memory mode.
mem_weight
The shared memory weight of the logical partition that uses shared memory.
This attribute is used for determining the priority of logical partitions in a
memory pool for distribution of memory. The weight must be a value from 0 255. If a value is not specified, the default is 128.
min_procs
The minimum number of processors for this partition. In shared processing
mode, this refers to virtual processors.
min_proc_units
The minimum number of processing units for this partition
Alphabetical list of commands
287
op_console_slot
The location of the virtual I/O slot that contains the directly-attached
operations console device for the IBM i logical partition. The default value is
none.
paging_device
The paging space device to use if a memory pool is used. A paging device is a
block storage device that has been added to the memory pool and is not
designated as a paging device for any other logical partition. This attribute is
optional. If omitted, an appropriate paging device is selected automatically. If
the paging_device value is a blank string, no device is assigned.
proc_mode
Valid values are:
ded- dedicated processor mode
shared- shared processor mode
profile_name
Name of the profile to create. This attribute is not required, but if specified,
must be the same as the name attribute.
sharing_mode
Value values are:
keep_idle_procs- never share processors
share_idle_procs- share processors
only when the partition
is inactive
share_idle_procs_always- share processors
only when the partition is active
share_idle_procs_active- always share processors
cap- capped mode
uncap- uncapped mode
uncap_weight
A weighted average of processing priority when in uncapped sharing mode.
The smaller the value, the lower the weight. Valid values are: 0 - 255
virtual_eth_adapters
Comma-separated list of virtual Ethernet adapters, with each adapter having
the following format:
slot_number/is_ieee/port_vlan_id/additional_vlan_ids/
is_trunk/is_required
All 5 '/' characters must be present, but optional values might be omitted.
Optional values are additional_vlan_ids, and is_trunk. Valid values for
is_ieee, is_trunk, and is_required:
0 - no
1 - yes
For example, 4/0/2//0/0 specifies a virtual Ethernet adapter with a virtual
slot number of 4, is not IEEE 802.1Q enabled, has a port virtual LAN ID of 2,
no additional virtual LAN IDs, it is not a trunk adapter, and is not required.
288
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
virtual_fc_adapters
Comma-separated list of virtual fibre channel adapters. Each item in this list
has the following format:
virtual slot num/adapter_type/remote_lpar_id/
remote_lpar_name/remote_slot_num/wwpn_list/is_required
Required values: remote_lpar_id, remote_lpar_name, adapter_type,
virtual_slot_num
Note: You can specify either remote_lpar_id, remote_lpar_name, or use them
both, but at least one of the values is required.
Valid values for adapter_type:
v client
v server
Note: If you specify a value for adapter type, the Integrated Virtualization
Manager (IVM) requires the adapter type to be a client.
Optional values: wwpn_list, is_required, remote_slot_num
When you add a virtual fibre channel adapter, wwpn_list can be left blank to
allow IVM to automatically assign worldwide port names to the client adapter.
If you leave wwpn_list blank and the virtual slot number specified for this
adapter already contains a virtual fibre channel adapter, IVM will use the
worldwide port names that are already assigned. New worldwide port names
will only be generated if it is a new adapter. If you specify a wwpn_list value,
there must be exactly two values. Each worldwide port name must be a
16-character hexadecimal value. These values are not case sensitive.
Valid values for is_required:
0 - no
1 - yes
A value of none or an empty string indicates that no virtual fibre channel
adapters should be assigned.
Note: If the logical partition being changed is the Virtual I/O Server, you
cannot change the current configuration. The IVM handles the client and
server adapter as a pair; therefore, IVM handles changes automatically.
Alphabetical list of commands
289
virtual_scsi_adapters
Comma-separated list of virtual SCSI adapters. Each item in this list has the
format:
slot_num/adapter_type/remote_lpar_id/remote_lpar_name/
remote_slot_num/is_required
The attribute names are not present in the list, just their values are present. If
an attribute is optional and is not to be included, then no value is specified for
that attribute. For example, 2/client//lpar2/3/0 specifies a virtual client SCSI
adapter with a virtual slot number of 2, a server partition name of lpar2, a
server slot number of 3, and is not required. The server partition ID was
omitted.
Required values: slot_num, adapter_type, remote_lpar_id,
remote_lpar_name
Note: You can specify remote_lpar_id, remote_lpar_name, or both, but at least
one of the values is required.
Optional values: is_required, remote_slot_num
Note: IVM requires that virtual slot number 2 always contain a virtual SCSI
adapter, so if you specify adapters in any other slots, the default adapter is
still created in slot number 2. If you use the chsyscfg command with an empty
list for the virtual_scsi_adapters attribute, all virtual SCSI adapters are
removed, except the default adapter.
Valid values for adapter_type:
v client: client adapter
v server: server adapter, valid for Virtual I/O Server logical partitions only
Valid values for is_required:
v 0 - no
v 1 - yes
work_group_id
Valid values:
v none: do not participate in the workload management group
v 1: participate in the workload management group
-i ConfigurationData
This option allows you to enter configuration data on the command line, instead of
using a file. Data entered on the command line must follow the same format as data in
a file, and must be enclosed in double quotation marks. When this option is used, only
a single resource can be changed. The -i and the -f options are mutually exclusive.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is not accessible by users with the ViewOnly role.
Examples
1. To create a partition named lp3 with 128 megabytes, type:
mksyscfg -r lpar -i "name=lp3,lpar_env=aixlinux,min_mem=128,desired_mem=128,\
max_mem=128"
2. To create a partition with 128 megabytes and a dedicated processor, type:
290
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
mksyscfg -r lpar -i "name=lp4,lpar_env=aixlinux,min_mem=128,desired_mem=128,\
max_mem=128,proc_mode=ded, sharing_mode=share_idle_procs,min_procs=1,\
desired_procs=1,max_procs=2"
3. To create a partition with 128 megabytes and 0.2 shared processing units, type:
mksyscfg -r lpar -i "name=lp2,lpar_env=aixlinux,min_mem=128,desired_mem=128,\
max_mem=128,proc_mode=shared, sharing_mode=uncap,min_procs=1,\
desired_procs=1,max_procs=2,min_proc_units=0.1,desired_proc_units=0.2,\
max_proc_units=2"
4. To create a partition with 128 megabytes and 0.2 shared processing units, and a virtual Ethernet
adapter on VLAN 1, type:
mksyscfg -r lpar -i "name=lp2,lpar_env=aixlinux,min_mem=128,desired_mem=128,\
max_mem=128,proc_mode=shared, sharing_mode=uncap,min_procs=1,desired_procs=1,\
max_procs=2,min_proc_units=0.1,desired_proc_units=0.2, max_proc_units=2,\
virtual_eth_adapters=4/0/1//0/0"
5. To create a partition with 128 megabytes and 0.2 shared processing units, a virtual Ethernet adapter
on VLAN 1, and HEA ports 3 and 4, type:
mksyscfg -r lpar -i "name=lp2,lpar_env=aixlinux,min_mem=128,desired_mem=128,\
max_mem=128,proc_mode=shared, sharing_mode=uncap,min_procs=1,desired_procs=1,\
max_procs=2,min_proc_units=0.1,desired_proc_units=0.2, max_proc_units=2,\
virtual_eth_adapters=4/0/1//0/0,\ \
"lhea_logical_ports=23000000/1/0/3/all,23000000/1/1/4/all\",\
lhea_capabilities=23000000/0/////"
6. To create a logical partition with 1 gigabyte, 2 virtual processors, and 2 virtual Ethernet adapters,
type:
mksyscfg -r lpar -i ’name=lp2,lpar_env=aixlinux,min_mem=256,desired_mem=1024,\
max_mem=2048,proc_mode=shared,sharing_mode=uncap,min_procs=1,desired_procs=2,\
max_procs=2,min_proc_units=0.1,desired_proc_units=0.2,max_proc_units=2,\
"virtual_eth_adapters=4/0/1//0/0,""5/1/2/212,313/0/0"""’
Related Information
The lssyscfg command, the chsyscfg command, and the rmsyscfg command.
IVM mksysplan command
Purpose
Creates an system plan file that represents the information known about a managed system's hardware,
partitions, profiles, and partition provisioning information. The mksysplan command will also have
information about Virtual I/O Devices.
Syntax
mksysplan -f <file name> -m <managed system> [--check] [-d "<description>"] [--noinvscout] [--help]
Description
The mksysplan command creates a system plan that represents the information known about a managed
system's hardware, partitions, profiles, and partition provisioning.
Flags
-f system plan file name
Specifies the system plan file name that will contain the system plan created by the
command. If it does not exist, the file will be created in the system plan file directory
on the Integrated Virtualization Manager partition. If the file exists the file contents will
be overwritten. The file name must end in a .sysplan suffix.
Alphabetical list of commands
291
-m managed system
--check
-d description
--noinvscout
--help
Specifies the managed system's name where the plan should be created. Since the
Integrated Virtualization Manager can work with only one managed system, -m flag
should specify the default managed system only.
Specifies that the command should check the system plan directory and fail with an
error if the file with the name specified by -f already exists.
Specifies a description that will be added to the generated file.
Attempts the hardware discovery for unallocated or inactive partition hardware. The
--noinvscout flag does not perform additional inventory probes for active partitions.
Note: The --noprobe flag overrides the action of this option.
Displays the help text for this command and then exits.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To make a system plan file sample.sysplan that represents the configuration of the Integrated
Virtualization Manager system, type the following command:
mksysplan -f sample.sysplan
Related Information
The deploysysplan command, lssysplan command, and the rmsysplan command.
mktcpip command
Purpose
Sets the required values for starting TCP/IP on a host.
Syntax
mktcpip -hostname HostName -inetaddrAddress -interfaceInterface [ -start] [ -netmaskSubnetMask ] [
-cabletype CableType ] [ -gateway Gateway ] [ -nsrvaddrNameServerAddress -nsrvdomain Domain ]
To run stateless autoconfiguration of link-local addresses:
mktcpip [-interface Interface] -auto
To add a static IPv6 address:
mktcpip -interfaceInterface -inetaddr IPv6 address [-plenPrefixLen] [-gatewaygateway]
Description
The mktcpip command sets the minimal values required for using TCP/IP on a host machine. The basic
functions of the mktcpip command include the following:
v Setting the host name
v
v
v
v
Setting the IP address of the interface
Setting the domain name and IP address of the nameserver, if applicable
Setting the subnetwork mask, if applicable
Starting the specified TCP/IP daemons
292
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Flags
-auto
-cabletype CableType
-gateway Gateway
-hostname Hostname
Enables automatic stateless configuration of link-local addresses. Link-local addresses
can coexist with other preexisting IPv6 addresses. Therefore, if an address is assigned
using the -auto flag, it will not replace existing IPv6 addresses.
Specifies the cable size for Standard Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 Ethernet networks. Valid
values for the CableType variable are dix for thick cable, bnc for thin cable, or N/A for
not applicable. The -cabletype CableType flag should be used only for Standard Ethernet
(en) and IEEE 802.3 Ethernet (et) interfaces. The default is N/A.
Sets the gateway address for a static route. Specify the address in dotted decimal
notation.
Sets the name of the host. If using a domain naming system, the domain and any
subdomains must be specified. The following is the standard format for setting the host
name:
hostname
The following is the standard format for setting the host name in a domain naming
system:
-inetaddr Address
-interface Interface
-netmask SubnetMask
-nsrvaddr
NameserverAddress
-nsrvdomain Domain
-plen prefixLen
-start
hostname.subdomain.subdomain.rootdomain
Sets the Internet address of the host. Specify the address in dotted decimal notation.
Each network interface on the host should have a unique Internet address. The
following is the standard format for setting the Internet address:
127.10.31.2
Specifies a particular network interface, for example:
en1
Specifies the mask that the gateway should use in determining the appropriate
subnetwork for routing. The subnet mask is a set of 4 bytes, as in the Internet address.
The subnet mask consists of high bits (1s) corresponding to the bit positions of the
network and subnetwork address, and low bits (0s) corresponding to the bit positions
of the host address.
Specifies the Internet address of the name server that the host uses for name resolution,
if applicable. The address should be entered in dotted decimal notation, as follows:
127.1.0.1
Specifies the domain name of the name server that the host should use for name
resolution, if any. The domain name should be in the following format:
subdomain.subdomain.rootdomain
Specifies the prefix length of the IPv6 interface.
Starts the TCP/IP daemons.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To set the required values for starting TCP/IP, type:
mktcpip -hostname fred.austin.century.com -inetaddr 192.9.200.4 -interface en0 \
-nsrvaddr 192.9.200.1 -nsrvdomain austin.century.com -start
2. To set the required values for starting TCP/IP using an IPv6 address, type:
mktcpip -interface en0 -auto
Note: If an IPv6 address already exists on the specified interface, this command format will not
replace it. You can use the -auto flag to allow multiple IPv6 addresses to coexist on the interface.
3. To set the required values for starting TCP/IP, using an IPv6 address to replace any pre-existing IPv6
addresses, type:
mktcpip -interface en0 -hostname host -inetaddr ipv6_address
Alphabetical list of commands
293
Note: This method replaces any IPv6 addresses that were assigned to the interface.
Related Information
The hostname command, the startnetsvc command, the stopnetsvc command, the cfglnagg command,
the netstat command, the entstat command, the cfgnamesrv command, the hostmap command, the
traceroute command, the ping command, the optimizenet command.
mkuser command
Purpose
Creates a new user account.
Syntax
mkuser [-ldap] [-de | -sr ] [-attr Attributes=Value [ Attribute=Value... ] ] Name
Description
The mkuser command creates a new user account. Upon completion of creating a the new account you
are prompted to set the new account password. User accounts are created with the -attr pgrp=view are
designated as read only. These users do not have the authority to change the system configuration and
do not have write permission to their home directories.
Flags
-attr Attribute=Value
Identifies the attribute to set, as well as the new value for the attribute. The
Attribute=Value parameter can use one attribute value pair or multiple attribute value
pairs for one -attr flag.
For a complete list of supported attributes, see “chuser command” on page 81.
Creates a Development Engineer (DE) user account. This type of account allows IBM
developers to log into the Virtual I/O Server and debug problems.
Identifies the user as an LDAP user account. LDAP user accounts are authenticated
through the LDAP load module.
Creates a service representative (SR) user account. This type of account enables a
service representative to run commands required to service the system without being
logged in as root. This includes the following command types:
-de
-ldap
-sr
v Run diagnostics, including service aids (for example, hot plug tasks, certify, format,
and so forth).
v Run all commands that can be run by a group system.
v Configure and unconfigure devices that are not busy.
v Use the service aid to update system microcode.
v Perform the shut down and reboot operations.
The recommended SR login user name is qserv.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Security
This command can only be run by the prime administrator (padmin) user.
294
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Examples
1. To create the davis user account with default values, type the following command:
mkuser davis
2. To create the davis user account and set the maxage attribute to a value of 52, type the following
command:
mkuser -attr maxage=52 davis
3. To create a user with read only authority, type the following command:
mkuser -attr pgrp=view View1
Related Information
The chuser command, the lsuser command, the rmuser command, and the passwd command.
mkvdev command
Purpose
Adds a virtual device to the system.
Syntax
To create a virtual target device:
mkvdev [ -f ] {-vdev TargetDevice | -dplc TDPhysicalLocatonCode } { -vadapter VirtualServerAdapter | -aplc
VSAPhysicalLocationCode} [ -dev DeviceName ]
To create a virtual target device for a file backed virtual optical device:
mkvdev -fbo { -vadapter VirtualServerAdapter | -aplc VSAPhysicalLocationCode } [-dev DeviceName]
To create a shared Ethernet Adapter:
mkvdev -sea TargetDevice -vadapter VirtualEthernetAdapter... -default DefaultVirtualEthernetAdapter
-defaultid SEADefaultPVID [ -attr Attribute=Value [ Attribute=Value... ] ]
To create an Link Aggregation adapter:
mkvdev -lnagg TargetAdapter... [ -attr Attribute=Value [ Attribute=Value... ] ]
To create a VLAN Ethernet adapter:
mkvdev -vlan TargetAdapter -tagid TagID
Description
The mkvdev command creates a virtual device. The name of the virtual device is automatically generated
and assigned unless the -dev DeviceName flag is specified, in which case DeviceName becomes the device
name.
If the -lnagg flag is specified, a Link Aggregation or IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation (automatic Link
Aggregation) device is created. To create an IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation set the mode attribute to
8023ad. If the -sea flag is specified, a Shared Ethernet Adapter is created. The TargetDevice may be a Link
Aggregation adapter (note, however, that the VirtualEthernetAdapter may not be Link Aggregation
adapters). The default virtual Ethernet adapter, DefaultVirtualEthernetAapter, must also be included as one
of the virtual Ethernet adapters, VirtualEthernetAdapter.
Alphabetical list of commands
295
The -fbo flag is used to create a virtual target device which maps the VirtualServerAdapter to a file backed
virtual optical device. Virtual optical devices cannot be used until virtual media is loaded into the device.
See the loadopt command for details.
The -vlan flag is used to create a VLAN device and the -vdev flag creates a virtual target device which
maps the VirtualServerAdapter to the TargetDevice.
If the backing device that is specified by the -vdev or -dplc flags is already in use, an error is returned
unless the -f flag is also specified. Also, the backing device that is specified cannot be a physical or
logical volume that is assigned to a shared memory pool (to be used as a paging space device by a
shared memory partition).
The mkvdev command also configures virtual optical and tape devices, where the -vdev or -dplc flag
specifies the physical optical or tape device and the -vadapter or -aplc flag specifies the virtual SCSI
adapter. If the specified optical or tape device is already assigned to a virtual SCSI adapter, an error is
returned unless the -f flag is also specified. If the -f flag is specified, the optical or tape device will be
removed from the virtual SCSI adapter it is currently assigned to before reassigning it to the new virtual
SCSI adapter.
When an additional disk drive that has a lower max_transfer_size than the current setting is added, and it
is set as a virtual target device (processing mkvdev), the client cannot recognize this device until the
VIOS is rebooted and the max_transfer_size is reestablished to the new setting. Because the
max_transfer_size cannot be dynamically changed, the mkvdev command checks the current
max_transfer_size of the device being added. If it is lower, it posts a message stating that the VIOS must
be rebooted before the client can see this device.
Attention: To protect the Configuration Database, the mkvdev command is not interruptible. Stopping
this command before execution is complete could result in a corrupted database.
Flags
-aplc VSAPhysicalLocationCode
-attr Attribute=Value
-default DefaultVirtualEthernetAdapter
-defaultid SEADefaultPVID
-dev DeviceName
-dplc TDPhysicalLocatonCode
-f
-fbo
296
Specifies the virtual SCSI adapter using the physical location code
Specifies the device attribute value pairs to be used instead of the defaults.
The Attribute=Value variable can be used to specify one attribute value pair
or multiple attribute value pairs for one -attr flag. If you use an -attr flag
with multiple attribute value pairs, the list of pairs must be enclosed in
quotation marks with a blank space between the pairs. For example,
entering -attr Attribute=Value lists one attribute value pair per flag, while
entering -attr 'Attribute1=Value1 Attribute2=Value2' lists more than one
attribute value pair.
Default virtual adapter to use for non-VLAN-tagged packets. This flag
maps to the SEA device attribute pvid_adapter.
The SEADafaultPVID is the VID used for untagged frames. All untagged
packets are assigned the SEADefaultPVID value. When a tagged frame is
received by a port, the tag is used. Otherwise if the frame is untagged, the
value contained in the PVID is considered as a tag. This flag maps to the
SEA device attribute pvid.
By using the -dev flag, you can specify the name you want the device to be
known by. If you do not use the -dev flag, a name will be automatically
generated and assigned. Not all devices support user-supplied names.
Specifies the physical device using the physical location code
Force the physical volume specified to be used as a backing device even if
its already associated with a virtual SCSI adapter. If the specified backing
device is an optical device, -f forces the optical device will be removed
from the virtual SCSI adapter it is currently assigned to before reassigning
it to the new virtual SCSI adapter.
Create a virtual optical device.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-lnagg TargetAdapter...
-sea TargetDevice
-tagid TagID
-vadapter VirtualEthernetAdapter or
VirtualServerAdapter
-vdev TargetDevice
-vlan TargetAdapter
Creates a Link Aggregation device.
Creates a Shared Ethernet Adapter which maps VirtualEthernetAdapter to
the adapter TargetDevice. TargetDevice can be a physical adapter or a Link
Aggregation adapter.
Specifies the VLAN tag ID.
Specifies the virtual server adapter or virtual Ethernet adapter the new
device will be mapped to. If multiple virtual Ethernet adapters are
specified, separate the adapter names with commas and no spaces.
Creates a virtual device mapped to the physical/logical device TargetDevice
and the virtual server adapter VirtualServerAdapter. The TargetDevice can be
either a physical volume, logical volume, tape, or optical device. Physical
volumes assigned to volume groups cannot be used as target devices.
Creates a Virtual Local Area Network device.
Exit Status
13
21
22
Specified physical or logical volume is not a valid.
Device is already in use. Use the -f flag to force assignment.
Logical volumes cannot be assigned as backing devices more than once.
Examples
1. To create a virtual target device that maps the logical volume lv20 as a virtual disk for a client
partition hosted by the vhost0 virtual server adapter, type the following command:
mkvdev -vdev lv20 -vadapter vhost0
The system displays a message similar to the following:
vtscsi0 available
2. To create a virtual target device that maps the physical volume hdisk6 as a virtual disk for a client
partition served by the vhost2 virtual server adapter, type the following command:
mkvdev -vdev hdisk6 -vadapter vhost2
The system displays a message similar to the following:
vtscsi1 available
3. To create a virtual target device that maps the physical tape device rmt0 as a virtual tape device for a
client partition served by the vhost2 virtual server adapter, type the following command:
mkvdev -vdev rmt0 -vadapter vhost2
The system displays a message similar to the following:
vttape0 available
4. To create a Shared Ethernet Adapter that maps the physical Ethernet adapter ent4 as a virtual
Ethernet adapter for the client partitions served by the virtual Ethernet adapters ent6, ent7, and ent9,
using ent6 as the default adapter and 8 as the default ID, type the following command:
mkvdev -sea ent4 -vadapter ent6,ent7,ent9 -default ent6 -defaultid 8
The system displays a message similar to the following:
ent10 available
5. To create an automatic Link Aggregation with primary adapters ent4 and ent5 and backup adapter
ent6, type the following command:
mkvdev -lnagg ent4,ent5 -attr backup_adapter=ent6 mode=8023ad
The system displays a message similar to the following:
ent10 available
Alphabetical list of commands
297
Related Information
The cfgdev command, the chdev command, the chpath command, the lsdev command, the lsmap
command, and the rmdev command.
mkvg command
Purpose
Creates a volume group.
Syntax
mkvg [ -f ][ -vg VolumeGroup ] PhysicalVolume ...
Description
The mkvg command creates a new volume group using the physical volumes represented by the
PhysicalVolume parameter. After creating the volume group, the mkvg command automatically activates
the new volume group using the activatevg command.
Note:
1. The physical volume is checked to verify that it is not already in another volume group. If the system
believes the physical volume belongs to a volume group that is active, it exits. But if the system
detects a description area from a volume group that is not active, it prompts the user for confirmation
in continuing with the command. The previous contents of the physical volume are lost, so the user
must be cautious when using the override function.
2. This command will fail to add a disk to the volume group if the disk indicates that it is managed by a
third party volume manager.
3. The physical volume that you specify cannot be assigned to a shared memory pool (to be used as a
paging space device by a shared memory partition).
Flags
-f
-vg VolumeGroup
Forces the volume group to be created on the specified physical volume unless the
physical volume is part of another volume group in the Device Configuration Database
or a volume group that is active.
Specifies the volume group name rather than having the name generated automatically.
Volume group names must be unique system wide and can range from 1 to 15
characters. The name cannot begin with a prefix already defined in the PdDv class in
the Device Configuration database for other devices. The volume group name created is
sent to standard output.
The volume group name can only contain the following characters: "A" through "Z," "a"
through "z," "0" through "9," or "_" (the underscore), "-" (the minus sign), or "." (the
period). All other characters are considered invalid.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To create a volume group that contains physical disks hdisk3, hdisk5, and hdisk6, type:
mkvg hdisk3 hdisk5 hdisk6
The volume group is created with an automatically generated name, which is displayed.
298
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
2. To create the volume group newvg with one physical partition, type:
mkvg -vg newvg hdisk1
Related Information
The lsvg command, the chvg command, the extendvg command, the reducevg command, the mirrorios
command, the unmirrorios command, the activatevg command, the deactivatevg command, the
importvg command, the exportvg command, and the syncvg command.
mkvopt command
Purpose
Create a virtual optical media disk in the Virtual Media Repository
Syntax
mkvopt -name FileName {-size Size | -dev OptDevice | -file SourceFile} [-ro ]
Description
The mkvopt command creates a new virtual optical disk in the Virtual Media Repository. If the -size flag
is specified, the new optical disk is initialized to all zeros of the given Size. If the -dev flag is specified,
the given device, OptDevice, must be an optical device with media loaded. The contents of the loaded
media within the device, will be used to create the optical media. If the -file flag is specified, SourceFile
is copied into the repository. By default, the virtual optical disk is created as DVD-RAM media. If the -ro
flag is specified, the disk will be create as DVD-ROM media.
When specifying Size the following conventions must be used:
Size
Minimum file size
###M/m
###MB
###G/g
###GB
Flags
-dev OptDevice
-file SourceFile
-name FileName
-ro
-size Size
Specifies a physical optical device with media loaded.
Specifies the name of an existing file to by copied into the repository.
Specifies the name of the new virtual optical media file.
Create the new disk as read-only (DVD-ROM).
Specifies how big to make the new virtual optical media.
Examples
1. To create a read-only virtual optical disk with the name pressData from existing optical media in
device cd0, type the following command:
mkvopt -name pressData -dev cd0 -ro
2. To create a new virtual optical disk with the name blankDVD with 1 Gigabyte storage capacity, type
the following command:
mkvopt -name blankDVD -size 1g
Alphabetical list of commands
299
mkvt command
Purpose
Create a virtual terminal connection to a partition.
Syntax
mkvt { -id lparID }
Description
The mkvt command opens a virtual terminal connection to the target partition. You can terminate the
virtual terminal connection in one of the following ways:
v The virtual terminal contains an escape sequence that allows you to break out of the command. The
escape sequence is <cr>~., or more explicitly: the Enter key, the tilde (~), and the period (.).
v You can use the rmvt command to force the session to be closed.
A partition can only have one open virtual terminal session.
This command requires additional HMC configuration if used in an HMC environment.
Flags
-id lparID
The ID of the partition for which to open the virtual terminal session.
Exit Status
Unexpected error
Virtual terminal is already connected
Virtual terminal device is not found
Permission denied
Specified device does not exist
27
28
29
30
31
Security
This command is not accessible by users with the ViewOnly role.
Examples
1. Create a virtual terminal connection to the partition with ID 3:
mkvt -id 3
Related Information
The rmvt command.
more command
Purpose
Displays file contents one screen at a time.
300
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Syntax
more [ -c ] [ -d ] [ -e ] [ -H ] [ -i ] [ -l ] [ -N ] [ -s ] [ -u ] [ -v ] [ -z ] [ -n Number ] [ -p Subcommand ] [ -t
Tagstring ] [ -W Option ] [ -x Tabs ] [ File ... ]
Description
The more command reads files and displays the text one screen at a time. The command pauses after
each screen and prints the word More at the bottom of the screen. If you then press a carriage return, the
more command displays an additional line. If you press the space bar, the more command displays
another full screen of text.
Note: On some terminal models, the more command clears the screen, instead of scrolling.
Instead of naming files to read, you can either redirect or pipe standard output, such as a long directory
listing, to the more command. The command adds a % (percent sign) to its prompt when reading from a
file rather than a pipe. This provides the percentage of the file (in characters, not lines) that the more
command has read.
The more command sets the terminal to NOECHO mode so the output can be continuous. With the
exception of the / and ! subcommands, commands that are typed do not normally show up on the
terminal. If the standard output is not a terminal, the more command will act just like the cat command,
except that a header will be printed before each file in a series.
Environment Variables
Environment variables affect the way the more command works. You can set some environment
characteristics in the /etc/environment file and system profile files, such as the .ksh, .csh, and .profile
files.
The more command uses the TERM variable to determine terminal characteristics. If this variable is
NULL or not set, the command uses the default terminal type. The /usr/share/lib/terminfo directory
contains definitions for terminal characteristics.
By default, the more command window size is 2 lines less than what the system terminal is capable of.
The command sets the default window size based on the LINES variable. Also, you can easily adjust the
window size for each run of the command by adding the -n flag.
Use the MORE variable to customize the more command with your preferred configuration each time the
system starts. This variable accepts more command flags.
Flags
-c
-d
-e
-H
-i
-l
Prevents the screen from scrolling, which makes text easier to read as the more command
writes to the screen. The system ignores the -c flag if the terminal cannot clear to the end
of a line.
Prints a message, appended to the More prompt at the bottom of the screen, about which
keys continue, quit, and provide help for the more command. Displays error messages
rather than ringing the terminal bell if an unrecognized command is used. This is helpful
for inexperienced users.
Exits automatically after displaying the last line of the last file.
Disables the search pattern highlighting feature by default.
Searches for patterns without considering uppercase and lowercase.
Pauses after detecting a page break in the input. If the -l flag is not used, the more
command pauses to accept commands after any line containing a ^L (CTRL-L) character.
Also, if a file begins with a FORMFEED, the screen is cleared before the file is printed.
Alphabetical list of commands
301
-N
-n Number
-p Subcommand
Suppresses line numbering. The default display, with line numbers, can slow the more
command's performance on very large input files. The line numbering feature displays the
line number in the = subcommand and passes the line number to the editor (if it is the vi
editor).
Configures the more command to display the specified number of lines in the window.
Without the -n flag, the more command defaults to two lines less than what the terminal
is capable of. For example, on a 24-line terminal, the default is 22 lines. The -n option
overrides any values obtained from the environment.
Starts the more command and specified subcommand for each File operand. For example,
more -p 50j text1 text2 displays the text1 file at the fiftieth line; then does the same for the
text2 file when you finish the first. See "Subcommands" for descriptions of more
subcommands.
If the command is a positioning command, such as a line number or a regular expression
search, set the current position to represent the final results of the command, without
writing any intermediate lines of the file. For example, the two commands:
more -p 1000j filename
more -p 1000G filename
are functionally the same and will start the display with the current position at line 1000,
passing the lines that j would write and would scroll off the screen if it had been issued
during the file examination.
-s
-t Tagstring
-u
-v
-W Option
If the positioning command is unsuccessful, the first line in the file will be the current
position.
Reduces multiple blank lines in the output to only one blank line.
Displays the portion of the file that contains the specified tag.
Prevents the more command from treating a backspace character as a printable control
character (displayed as a ^H (CTRL-H)), suppressing backspacing, underlining, or creating
reverse video text for underlined information in a source file. The -u flag also forces the
more command to recognize a carriage-return character, if it exists, at the end of a line.
Suppresses the graphical translation of nonprinting characters. Without the -v flag, the
more command graphically interprets all non-ASCII and most control characters, except
Tab, Backspace, and Return. For example, if you do not use the -v flag, the more
command displays the non-ASCII characters Ctrl-x as ^X and x as M-x.
Provides the specified Option to the more command as an extension:
notite
Prevents the more command from sending the terminal initialization string (either
the ti termcap or the smcup terminfo capability) before displaying the file. This
option also prevents the more command from sending the terminal
de-initialization string (either the te termcap or the rmcup terminfo capability)
before exiting.
tite
Causes the more command to send the initialization and de-initialization strings.
This is the default.
These options control whether the more command sends the initialization strings
described, which, for certain terminals (such as some xterms), cause the more command to
switch to an alternative screen. The effect of switching screens is to erase the display of the
file you were viewing.
Sets tab stops at the specified Tabs position. The default tab setting is 8 columns.
Graphically displays the Tab, Backspace, and Return control characters. With the -z flag,
the more command translates the Backspace character as ^H, Return as ^M, and Tab as ^I.
-x Tabs
-z
Subcommands
The more command accepts subcommands when the command pauses and as parameters for the -p flag.
Many subcommands take an optional integer, symbolized here by K, which you must enter before the
302
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
subcommand, with no space between. The more command, in the paused state, processes subcommands
immediately and does not require you to press the Enter key.
The more command uses the following subcommands:
h
v
r or ^L
R
[K](Spacebar)
[K]f or [K]^F or [K]z
[K]b or [K]^B
[K]d or [K]^D
[K]u or [K]^U
[K]j or [K](Enter) or [K]^E
[K]k or [K]^Y
[K]g
[K]G
[K]p or [K]%
ma-z
'a-z
''
[K]/pattern
[K]/!pattern
[K]?pattern
[K]?!pattern
[K]n
Displays a help screen that describes the more subcommands.
Starts the vi editor, editing the current file in the current line.
Refreshes the display.
Refreshes the display and removes buffered input.
Moves forward K lines when you press the spacebar. If you do
not give a value for K, pressing the spacebar displays the next
full screen by default. This spacebar subcommand is the same
as [K]f or [K]^F or [K]z.
Moves forward K lines, or one full screen if you do not give a
value for K.
Moves backward K lines, or one full screen if you do not give a
value for K.
Moves forward K lines, or half a screen if you do not give a
value for K. If you give a value for K, the more command sets
the d and u scroll size to K lines for the session.
Moves backward K lines, or half a screen if you do not give a
value for K. If you give a value for K, the more command sets
the d and u scroll size to K lines for the session.
Moves forward K lines, or one line if you do not give a value
for K.
Moves backward K lines, or one line if you do not give a value
for K.
Moves to the beginning of the file, unless you give a line
number for K. The default for K is line number 1.
Moves to the last line in the file, unless you give a line number
for K. The default for K is the last line in the file.
Moves to the point in the file that is K percent of the total file.
The default for K is one percent, or the first line in the file.
Marks the current position in the file with the specified letter.
(Single quotation mark) Moves to the position marked with the
specified letter.
(Two single quotation marks) Returns to the position from
which the last large movement (moving more than a page)
command was run. If no such movements have been made,
returns to the beginning of the file.
(Slash) Searches forward, from the current position, for the
specified occurrence of the specified pattern of characters. The
default value for K is the first occurrence.
(Slash, exclamation mark) Searches forward, from the current
position, for the specified occurrence of a line that does not
contain the specified pattern of characters. The default value for
K is the first occurrence.
(Question mark) Searches backward, from the current position,
for the specified occurrence of the specified pattern of
characters. The default value for K is the first occurrence.
(Question mark, exclamation mark) Searches backward, from
the current position, for the specified occurrence of a line that
does not contain the specified pattern of characters. The default
value for K is the first occurrence.
Repeats the last search, specifying an occurrence of the pattern
(or an occurrence not containing the pattern if the search
subcommand included !). The default value for K is the first
occurrence.
Alphabetical list of commands
303
Lists the file or files you named in the more command line.
Displays information about the current file:
:a
:f or ^G or =
v file name
v order of the file in the list of files
v current line number
v current position in the file, given as a percentage
v current byte number and total bytes to display.
Examines the specified file, provided you named it in the more
command line.
Examines either the next file (if you do not give a value for K)
or the file K number of positions forward in the list of files you
named in the more command line.
Examines either the previous file (if you do not give a value for
K) or the file K number of positions backward in the list of files
you named in the more command line.
Displays the portion of the file that contains the specified tag.
This subcommand works only on files containing tags created
with the ctags command. The :t subcommand is the interactive
version of the -t flag.
Exits the more command.
Starts the specified command in a new shell.
Toggles the search pattern highlighting feature on or off.
:e[File] or E[File]
[K]:n or [K]N
[K]:p or [K]P
:t Tagstring
:q or q or Q
:!command or !command
H
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
Successful completion.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To view a file named myfile, enter:
more myfile
2. To view output from the nroff command, enter:
ls -l | more
3. To view each file starting at its last screen, enter:
more -p G file1 file2
4. To view each file with the 100th line at the current position, enter:
more -p 100 file1 file2
Typically, the current position in a more command display is the third line on the screen. In this
example, the first line on the screen is the 98th line in the file.
5. To view each file starting with the first line that contains the foo string, enter:
more -p /foo file1 file2
The more command displays the line in the current position, the third line on the screen.
Files
/usr/share/lib/terminfo
304
Indicates the terminal information database.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Related Information
The cat command.
motd command
Purpose
Displays or modifies the partition's message of the day file.
Syntax
motd
motd { -append | -overwrite } { -file Filename | "Message of the day string" }
Description
The motd command writes or appends to the partitions message of the day file. The new message can be
specified on the command line or in a file with the -file flag. If no flags are specified the current message
of the day is displayed.
Flags
-append
-file FileName
-overwrite
Appends the specified message to the current message of the day
Replaces the current message of the day with the contents of FileName
Replaces the current message of the day with the specified message
mount command
Purpose
Makes a file system available for use.
Syntax
mount [ [ Node:Directory ] Directory ]
mount -cd DeviceDirectory
Description
The mount command instructs the operating system to make a file system available for use at a specified
location (the mount point). The mount command mounts a file system expressed as a directory using the
Node:Directory parameter on the directory specified by the Directory parameter. After the mount command
has finished, the directory specified becomes the root directory of the newly mounted file system.
If you enter the mount command without flags, the command displays the following information for the
mounted file systems:
v the node (if the mount is remote)
v the object mounted
v the mount point
v the virtual-file-system type
v the time mounted
Alphabetical list of commands
305
v any mount options
The /mnt directory can be used as a local mount point, or you can create a directory using the mkdir
command. Any directories created with the mkdir command must be a sub-directory of your home
directory.
Flags
Specifies the cd device name on which to mount.
-cd
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To list the mounted file systems, type:
mount
This command produces output similar to the following:
node
----
sue
mounted
------/dev/hd0
/dev/hd3
/dev/hd1
/dev/hd2
/home/local/src
mounted
--------/
/tmp
/home
/usr
/usr/code
vfs
--jfs
jfs
jfs
jfs
nfs
date
-----------Dec 17 08:04
Dec 17 08:04
Dec 17 08:06
Dec 17 08:06
Dec 17 08:06
options
------rw, log
rw, log
rw, log
rw, log
ro, log
over
--------=/dev/hd8
=/dev/hd8
=/dev/hd8
=/dev/hd8
=/dev/hd8
For each file system, the mount command lists the node name, the device name, the name under
which it is mounted, the virtual-file-system type, the date and time it was mounted, and its options.
2. To mount the remote directory on to a local directory, enter:
mount testsys3:/test /mnt
This command mounts the /test directory located on testsys3 onto the local /mnt directory.
Related Information
The backupios command.
mv command
Purpose
Moves files.
Syntax
To Move and Rename a File
mv [ -E{force|ignore|warn} ] [ -i | -f ] [ -I ] SourceFile ... TargetFile
To Move and Rename a Directory
mv -E{force|ignore|warn} ] [ -i | -f ] [ -I ] SourceDirectory ... TargetDirectory
306
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
To Move Files or Directories to a Directory Maintaining Original File Names
mv -E{force|ignore|warn} ] [ -i | -f ] [ -I ] SourceFile/SourceDirectory TargetDirectory
Description
Attention: The mv command can overwrite many existing files unless you specify the -i flag. The -i flag
prompts you to confirm before it overwrites a file. If both the -f and -i flags are specified in combination,
the last flag specified takes precedence.
The mv command moves files and directories from one directory to another or renames a file or
directory. If you move a file or directory to a new directory, it retains the base file name. When you move
a file, all links to other files remain intact, except when you move it to a different file system. When you
move a directory into an existing directory, the directory and its contents are added under the existing
directory.
When you use the mv command to rename a file or directory, the TargetDirectory parameter can specify
either a new file name or a new directory path name.
If moving the file would overwrite an existing file that does not have write-permission set and if
standard input is a workstation, the mv command displays the file-permission code and reads a line from
standard input. If that line begins with a y or the locale's equivalent of a y, the mv command moves the
file. If the response is anything other than a y, the mv command does nothing to that file and continues
with the next specified file. The file-permission code displayed may not fully represent the access
permission if the TargetFile is associated with an ACL. When the parent directory of the SourceFile is
writable and has the sticky bit set, one or more of the following conditions are true:
v The user must own the file.
v The user must own the directory
v The user must be a privileged user.
v The file must be writable by the user.
This warning message and prompt for input can be overridden by using the -f option.
You can use the mv command to move files within the same file system or between file systems. Whether
you are working in one file system or across file systems, the mv command copies the file to the target
and deletes the original file. The mv command preserves in the new file the time of the most recent data
modification, the time of the most recent access, the user ID, the group ID, the file mode, the extended
attributes, and ACLs of the original file. For symbolic links, the mv command preserves only the owner
and group of the link itself.
If it is unable to preserve the owner and group ID, the mv command clears S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits in
the target. The mv command prints a diagnostic message to stderr if it is unable to clear these bits,
though the exit code is not affected.
The mv command modifies either the source file or the destination path if the command is prematurely
terminated.
Note: The mv command supports the — (dash, dash) parameter as a delimiter that indicates the end of
the flags.
The mv command will not move an object if the object is exported as an NFS version 4 referral. The
referral object is marked as busy and remains so until it is unexported.
Alphabetical list of commands
307
Flags
Attention: The mv command can overwrite many existing files unless you specify the -i flag. The -i flag
prompts you to confirm before it overwrites a file. If both the -f and -i flags are specified in combination,
the last flag specified takes precedence.
The -E option requires one of the following arguments. If you omit the -E option, warn is the default
behavior.
-E
force
Fails the mv operation on a file if the fixed extent size or space reservation of the file cannot be
preserved.
ignore
Ignores any errors in preserving extent attributes.
warn
Issues a warning if the space reservation or the fixed extent size of the file cannot be preserved.
Does not prompt you before overwriting an existing file.
Prompts you before moving a file or directory to an existing path name by displaying the name of the file
followed by a question mark. If you answer with a line starting with y or the locale's equivalent of a y, the
move continues. Any other reply prevents the move from occurring.
Suppresses the warning message during ACL conversion.
-f
-i
-I
Exit Status
All input files were moved successfully.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To rename a file, enter:
mv appendix apndx.a
This command renames appendix to apndx.a. If a file named apndx.a already exists, its old contents
are replaced with those of appendix.
2. To move a directory, enter:
mv book manual
This command moves all files and directories under book to the directory named manual, if manual
exists. Otherwise, the directory book is renamed manual.
3. To move a file to another directory and give it a new name, enter:
mv intro manual/chap1
This command moves intro to manual/chap1. The name intro is removed from the current directory,
and the same file appears as chap1 in the directory manual.
4. To move a file to another directory, keeping the same name, enter:
mv chap3 manual
This command moves chap3 to manual/chap3
Note: Examples 1 and 3 name two files, example 2 names two existing directories, and example
4 names a file and a directory.
5. To move several files into another directory, enter:
mv chap4 jim/chap5 /home/manual
This command moves the chap4 file to the /home/manual/chap4 file directory and the jim/chap5 file to
the /home/manual/chap5 file.
6. To use the mv command with pattern-matching characters, enter:
mv manual/* .
308
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
This command moves all files in the manual directory into the current directory . (period), retaining
the names they had in manual. This move also empties manual. You must type a space between the
asterisk and the period.
Note: Pattern-matching characters expand names of existing files only. For example, the
command mv intro man*/chap1 does not work if the file manual/chap1 does not exist.
Files
/usr/bin/mv
Contains the mv command.
Related Information
The chmod command and the rm command.
netstat command
Purpose
Shows network status.
Syntax
To display active sockets for each protocol or routing table information:
netstat [ -num ] [ -routtable ] [ -routinfo] [ -state ] [ -protocol Protocol ] [ Interval ]
To display the contents of a network data structure:
netstat [ -stats | -cdlistats ] [ -protocol protocol ] [ Interval ]
To display the address resolution protocol:
netstat -arp
To clear all statistics:
netstat -clear
To display network sockets:
netstat -socket
Description
The netstat command symbolically displays the contents of various network-related data structures for
active connections.
Flags
-arp
-cdlistats
-clear
Displays address resolution interfaces.
Shows statistics for CDLI-based communications adapters.
Clears all statistics.
Alphabetical list of commands
309
-num
-protocol protocol
-routinfo
-routtable
-socket
-state
Shows network addresses as numbers. When this flag is not specified, the netstat
command interprets addresses where possible and displays them symbolically. This flag
can be used with any of the display formats.
Shows statistics about the value specified for the protocol variable, which is either a
well-known name for a protocol or an alias for it. A null response means that there are
no numbers to report. The program report of the value specified for this variable is
unknown if there is no statistics routine for it.
Shows the routing tables, including the user-configured and current costs of each route.
Shows the routing tables. When used with the -stats flag, the -routtable flag shows
routing statistics. See Routing Table Display.
Specifies that network sockets are to be displayed.
Shows the state of all configured interfaces.
The interface display format provides a table of cumulative statistics for the following
items:
v Errors
v Collisions
Note: The collision count for Ethernet interfaces is not shown.
v Packets transferred
-stats
Interval
The interface information that is displayed also provides the interface name, number,
and address, as well as the maximum transmission units (MTUs).
Shows statistics for each protocol.
Continuously displays information, in seconds, regarding packet traffic on the
configured network interfaces.
Default Display
The default display for active sockets shows the following items:
v Local and remote addresses
v Send and receive queue sizes (in bytes)
v Protocol
v Internal state of the protocol
Internet address formats are of the form host.port or network.port if a socket's address specifies a network
but no specific host address. If the address can be resolved to a symbolic host name, the host address, as
well as network addresses, are displayed symbolically.
NS addresses are 12-bytes in length, consisting of a 4-byte network number, a 6-byte host number and a
2-byte port number, all stored in network standard format. For VAX architecture, the word and byte are
reversed.
If a symbolic name for a host is not known or if you specified the -num flag, the address is printed
numerically, according to the address family. Unspecified addresses and ports appear as an * (asterisk).
Interface Display
The interface display format provides a table of cumulative statistics for the following items:
v Errors
v Collisions
Note: The collision count for Ethernet interfaces is not applicable.
v Packets transferred
310
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
The interface display also provides the interface name, number, and address as well as the maximum
transmission units (MTUs).
Routing table display
The routing table display indicates the available routes and their statuses. Each route consists of a
destination host or network and a gateway to use in forwarding packets.
A route is given in the format A.B.C.D/XX, which presents two pieces of information. A.B.C.D indicates
the destination address and XX indicates the netmask associated with the route. The netmask is
represented by the number of bits that are set. For example, the route 9.3.252.192/26 has a netmask of
255.255.255.192, which has 26 bits set.
The routing table contains the following fields:
Flags
Gateway
Refs
Use
PMTU
Interface
Exp
Groups
The flags field in the routing table shows the state of the route:
A
An Active Dead Gateway Detection is enabled on the route
U
Up
H
The route is to a host rather than to a network
G
The route is to a gateway
D
The route was created dynamically by a redirect
M
The route has been modified by a redirect
L
The link-level address is present in the route entry
c
Access to this route creates a cloned route
W
The route is a cloned route
1
Protocol-specific routing flag #1
2
Protocol-specific routing flag #2
3
Protocol-specific routing flag #3
b
The route represents a broadcast address
e
Has a binding cache entry
l
The route represents a local address
m
The route represents a multicast address
P
Pinned route
R
Host or net unreachable
S
Manually added
u
Route usable
s
The group routing stopsearch option is enabled on the route
Direct routes are created for each interface attached to the local host.
Shows the address of the outgoing interface.
Shows the current number of active uses for the route. Connection-oriented protocols
hold on to a single route for the duration of a connection, while connectionless
protocols obtain a route while sending to the same destination.
Provides a count of the number of packets sent using that route.
Lists the Path Maximum Transfer Unit (PMTU).
Indicates the network interfaces utilized for the route.
Displays the time (in minutes) remaining before the route expires.
Provides a list of group IDs associated with that route.
Alphabetical list of commands
311
Netmasks
Route Tree for Protocol
Family
Lists the netmasks applied on the system.
Specifies the active address families for existing routes. Values for this field are as
follows:
1
Specifies the UNIX address family
2
Specifies the Internet address family (for example, TCP and UDP)
3
Specifies the Xerox Network System (XNS) address family
When a value is specified for the Interval variable, the netstat command displays a running count of
statistics related to network interfaces. This display contains two columns: a column for the primary
interface (the first interface found during autoconfiguration) and a column summarizing information for
all interfaces. The first line contains a summary of statistics accumulated since the system was last
restarted. The subsequent lines of output show values accumulated over intervals of the specified length.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To display routing table information for an Internet interface, type:
netstat -routtable
This produces the output similar to the following:
Routing tables
Destination
Gateway
Flags
Refs
Route tree for Protocol Family 2 (Internet):
default
129.3.141.1
UGc
0
129.33.140/23
127.0.0.1
U
6
129.33.41.2
localhost
UGHS
6
129.45.41.2
129.3.41.1
UGHW
1
dcefs100
129.31.41.1
UGHW
1
192.100.61
localhost
U
7
Use
If
PMTU Exp Groups
0 en0
53 en0
115 lo0
602 en0
2 en0
14446 lo0
Route tree for Protocol Family 24 (Internet v6):
::1
::1
UH
0
0
1500
-
-
lo0 16896
-
2. To display interface information for an Internet interface, type:
netstat -state
This produces the output similar to the following:
Name
en0
en0
lo0
lo0
lo0
Mtu
1500
1500
16896
16896
16896
Network
link#2
90.34.14
link#1
129
::1
Address
0.5.20.4.0.4e
hostname
localhost
Ipkts Ierrs
874986
0
874986
0
14581
0
14581
0
14581
0
Opkts Oerrs Coll
22494
0
0
22494
0
0
14590
0
0
14590
0
0
14590
0
0
3. To display network sockets:
netstat -socket
Related Information
The mktcpip command, the hostname command, the startnetsvc command, the stopnetsvc command,
the cfglnagg command, the entstat command, the cfgnamesrv command, the hostmap command, the
traceroute command, the ping command, and the optimizenet command.
312
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
oem_platform_level command
Purpose
Returns the operating system level of the OEM installation and setup environment.
Syntax
oem_platform_level
Description
The oem_platform_level command displays the name and version of the underlying Virtual I/O Server
operating system.
This command can only be executed by the prime administrator.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1
Examples
To get the operating system level of the OEM installation and setup environment, run the following
command:
oem_platform_level
Related Information
The lssw command, the ioslevel command, the remote_management command, the oem_setup_env
command, and the updateios command.
oem_setup_env command
Purpose
Initiates the OEM installation and setup environment.
Syntax
oem_setup_env
Description
The oem_setup_env command places the user into the OEM software instalation and setup environment.
In this environment, the user can install and setup OEM software by following the installation
instructions provided with each software package. After the software is installed, the user will need to
create a link in the /usr/ios/oem/ directory to any new commands that will run from the Virtual I/O
Server command line. After these links have been created, the commands will be accessible by all Virtual
I/O Server users. Note however that these commands will not run with root authority.
After the software has been installed,, typing exit will return the user to the Virtual I/O Server prompt.
Only the prime administrator can execute this command.
Alphabetical list of commands
313
Note: The oem_setup_env command will place the padmin user in a non-restricted UNIX root shell with
a home directory in the /home/padmin directory. The user can then run any command available to the
root user. This is not a supported Virtual I/O Server administration method. The purpose of this
command is to allow installation of vendor software, such as device drivers.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1
Examples
To initiate the OEM setup and installation environment, type the following:
oem_setup_env
Related Information
The lssw command, the ioslevel command, the remote_management command, the updateios command,
and the oem_platform_level command.
optimizenet command
Purpose
Manages network tuning parameters.
Syntax
optimizenet [ -reboot | -perm ] { -set Tunable[=NewValue] | -default Tunable }
optimizenet -list [ Tunable ]
optimizenet -h [ Tunable ]
Description
The optimizenet command is used to configure network tuning parameters. The optimizenet command
sets or displays current or next boot values for network tuning parameters. This command can also make
permanent changes or defer changes until the next reboot. Whether the command sets or displays a
parameter is determined by the accompanying flag. The -set flag performs both actions. It can either
display the value of a parameter or set a new value for a parameter.
If the -list flag is specified without any Tunables, only Tunables modifiable by this command will be
displayed.
Flags
-default Tunable
-h Tunable
314
Resets Tunable to its default value. If the Tunable needs to be changed (not currently set to its
default value) and it is of type Reboot, it will not be changed; a warning displays instead.
Displays help about Tunable parameter if one is specified.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-list [Tunable]
Lists the characteristics of one or all Tunables, one per line, using the following format:
NAME
CUR DEF BOOT MIN MAX UNIT
TYPE
DEPENDENCIES
-----------------------------------------------------------------General Network Parameters
----------------------------------------------------------------sockthresh
85 85 85
0
100 %_of_thewall D
----------------------------------------------------------------fasttimo
200 200 200 50 200 millisecond D
----------------------------------------------------------------inet_stack_size
16 16 16
1
kbyte
R
----------------------------------------------------------------where
CUR
current value
DEF
default value
BOOT reboot value
-perm
-reboot
-set Tunable
[=NewValue ]
MIN
minimal value
MAX
maximum value
UNIT
tunable unit of measure
TYPE
Parameter type: D (Dynamic), S (Static), R (Reboot), B (Bosboot), M (Mount), I
(Incremental), and C (Connect)
DEPENDENCIES
List of dependent tunable parameters, one per line
Makes changes apply to both current and reboot values when used in combination with -set
or -default. These combinations cannot be used on Reboot type parameters because their
current value can't be changed.
When used with -set without specifying a new value, values displays only if the current and
next boot values for a parameter are the same. Otherwise NONE displays as the value.
Makes changes apply to reboot values when used in combination with -set or -default.
When used with -set without specifying a new value, next boot values for tunables display
instead of the current values.
Displays the value or sets the Tunable to NewValue. If a tunable needs to be changed (the
specified value is different than current value), and is of type Reboot it will not be changed
but a warning displays instead.
When -reboot is used in combination without a new value, the nextboot value for Tunable is
displayed. When -perm is used in combination without a new value, a value displays only if
the current and next boot values for tunable are the same Otherwise NONE displays as the
value.
Alphabetical list of commands
315
Network tunable parameters
arptab_bsiz
Purpose:
Specifies Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table bucket size.
Values:
Default: 7
Range: 1 to MAXSHORT
Type: Reboot
Diagnosis
netstat -protocol arp will show the number of ARP packets sent and the
number of ARP entries purged from the ARP table. If large number of entries
are being purged, the ARP table size should be increased.
arptab_nb
Purpose:
Specifies the number of ARP table buckets.
Values:
Default: 73
Range: 1 to MAXSHORT
Type: Reboot
Diagnosis:
netstat -protocol arp will show the number of ARP packets sent and the
number of ARP entries purged from the ARP table. If large number of entries
are being purged, the ARP table size should be increased.
Increase this value for systems that have a large number of clients or servers.
The default provides for 73 x 7 = 511 ARP entries, but assumes an even hash
distribution.
clean_partial_conns
Purpose:
Specifies whether or not SYN (synchronizes the sequence number) attacks are
being avoided.
Values:
Default: 0 (off)
Range: 0 or 1
Type: Dynamic
Tuning:
This option should be turned on for servers that need to protect against
network attacks. If on, randomly removes partial connections to make room for
new non-attack connections.
316
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
net_malloc_police
Purpose:
Specifies the size of the net_malloc and net_free trace buffers.
Values:
Default: 0
Range: 0 to MAXINT
Type: Dynamic
Tuning:
If the value of this variable is non-zero, all net_malloc and net_free buffers
will be traced in a kernel buffer and by system trace hook
HKWD_NET_MALLOC. Additional error-checking will also be enabled. This
includes checks for freeing a free buffer, alignment, and buffer overwrite.
Enable this parameter only when investigating some network problem, because
performance is affected negatively when turned on. The default value is zero
(policing off). Values of net_malloc_police larger than 1024 will allocate that
many items in the kernel buffer for tracing.
rfc1323
Purpose:
Enables window scaling and timestamps as specified by RFC 1323 (TCP
Extensions for High Performance). Window scaling allows the TCP window
sizes (tcp_recvspace and tcp_sendspace) to be larger than 64KB (65536) and is
typically used for large MTU networks.
Values:
Default: 0 (off)
Range: 0 or 1
Type: Connect
Tuning:
The default value of 0 disables the RFC enhancements on a systemwide scale.
A value of 1 specifies that all TCP connections will attempt to negotiate the
RFC enhancements. Make changes before attempting to set tcp_sendspace and
tcp_recvspace to more than 64 KB.
route_expire
Purpose:
Specifies whether unused routes created by cloning, or created and modified
by redirects expire.
Values:
Default: 1 (on)
Range: 0 or 1
Type: Dynamic
Tuning:
A value of 1 allows route expiration, which is the default. Negative values are
not allowed for this option.
tcp_pmtu_discover
Purpose:
Enables or disables path MTU discovery for TCP applications.
Values:
Default: 1
Range: 0 or 1
Type: Dynamic
Tuning:
A value of 0 disables path MTU discovery for TCP applications, while a value
of 1 enables it.
Alphabetical list of commands
317
tcp_recvspace
Purpose:
Specifies the system default socket buffer size for receiving data. This affects
the window size used by TCP.
Values:
Default: 16384 bytes
Range: 4096 to 1048576
Type: Connect
Diagnosis:
Setting the socket buffer size to 16 KB (16,384) improves performance over
standard Ethernet and Token-Ring networks. Lower bandwidth networks, such
as Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP), or higher bandwidth networks, such as
Serial Optical Link, should have different optimum buffer sizes. The optimum
buffer size is the product of the media bandwidth and the average round-trip
time of a packet. For high-speed networks, like gigabit Ethernet or ATM 622, a
value of 65536 should be used for the minimum size for best performance.
For values larger than 65536, you must enable rfc1323 (rfc1323=1) to enable
TCP window scaling.
tcp_sendspace
Purpose:
Specifies the system default socket buffer size for sending data.
Values:
Default: 16384 bytes
Range: 4096 to 1048576
Type: Connect
Tuning:
This affects the window size used by TCP. Setting the socket buffer size to 16
KB (16,384) improves performance over standard Ethernet networks. Lower
bandwidth networks, such as Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP), or higher
bandwidth networks, such as Serial Optical Link, should have different
optimum buffer sizes. The optimum buffer size is the product of the media
bandwidth and the average round-trip time of a packet:
(optimum_window=bandwidth * average_round_trip_time) For high-speed
networks, like gigabit Ethernet or ATM 622, a value of 65536 should be used
for the minimum size for best performance. For values larger than 65536, you
must enable rfc1323 (rfc1323=1) to enable TCP window scaling.
udp_recvspace
Purpose:
Specifies the system default socket-buffer size for receiving UDP data.
Values:
Default: 42080 bytes
Range: 4096 to 1048576
Type: Connect
Diagnosis:
Nonzero n in netstat -stats report of udp: n socket buffer overflows
Tuning:
Increase size, preferably to multiple of 4096.
318
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
udp_sendspace
Purpose:
Specifies the system default socket-buffer size for sending UDP data.
Values:
Default: 9216 bytes
Range: 4096 to 1048576
Type: Connect
Diagnosis:
Increase size, preferably to multiple of 4096.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To display the maximum size of the mbuf pool, type:
optimizenet -set thewall
2. To change the default socket buffer sizes on your system, type:
optimizenet -reboot -set tcp_sendspace=32768
3. To use a machine as an internet work router over TCP/IP networks, type:
optimizenet -set ipforwarding=1
4. To list the current and reboot value, range, unit, type and dependencies of the arptab_bsiz parameter,
type:
optimizenet -list arptab_bsiz
5. To display help information on arptab_bsiz, type:
optimizenet -h arptab_bsiz
Related Information
The entstat command, the lsnetsvc command, the mktcpip command, the netstat command, and the
traceroute command.
IVM os_install Command
Purpose
Performs network install operations on OS_install objects.
Syntax
Traditional usage:
OS_install {-o Operation} [ -a attr=value... ] {ObjectName}
For system plan installations (System Plan mode):
OS_install -i sysplan {-x sysplan.xml} [ -d ]
For listing OS_install objects (List mode):
OS_install -l [-v] [-t object_type | object_name]
Alphabetical list of commands
319
Description
The OS_install command performs a network installation operation on an OS_install object. The type of
operation is dependent on the type of object specified by the ObjectName parameter. The object pointed
to by the ObjectName parameter can be one of three types: client, OS_Resource, or ControlHost.
Command operations involve the creation and management of OS_install objects in order to network
install an operation system onto a client machine.
OS_install can also be run in System Plan mode by passing the -i sysplan flag instead of specifying an
operation. This provides the ability to combine multiple OS_install operations into a single XML
document.
The List mode of OS_install is used to list the current configuration of objects in the OS_install
environment.
Flags
-a attr=value
-d
-i sysplan
-l
-o Operation
-t object_type | object_name
-v
-x sysplan.xml
320
Assigns the specified value to the specified attribute. “Operations” on page 321 lists the
required and optional attributes for a specific operation.
Destroys all OS_install objects created during System Plan mode after all operations
have been completed.
Specifies System Plan mode.
Lists all OS_install objects in the environment by default.
Specifies an operation to perform on an OS_install object.
Narrows the list returned by the -l flag to only objects of type object_type or to the
single OS_install object specified by object_name.
Displays the list returned by the -l flag.
Specifies the XML file that contains the system plan.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Operations
Operation
Description
Required Attributes
Optional Attributes
define_client [-a attr=value...]
{ClientObjectName}
Defines a new
client object.
ip_addr
adapter_speed
Speed of client's
network adapter.
Client's IP address.
mac_addr
MAC address of
client's network
interface.
adapter_duplex
Duplex setting of
client's network
adapter.
gateway
Client's IP gateway.
lpar
subnet_mask
Client's IP subnet
mask.
LPAR name to
install client.
profile LPAR profile to use
for client.
managed_system
Name of managed
system that
contains LPAR.
disk_location
Location of disk to
install client.
ctrl_host
Name of Hardware
Control Host object
for this client.
define_resource [-a
attr=value...]
{ResourceObjectName}
Defines a new
OS_Resource
object.
type
AIX or Linux
location
Absolute path
where
OS_Resource will
reside.
version Operating system
version
source
Source of
installation images.
configfile
Installation
configuration file.
define_ctrl_host [-a
attr=value...]
{ControlHostObjectName}
Defines a new
Hardware Control
Host object.
None.
communication_method
ssh, rsh, or local
hostname
Host name of control
host.
type
HMC or ivm
Alphabetical list of commands
321
Operation
Description
Required Attributes
Optional Attributes
allocate [-a attr=value...]
{ClientObjectName}
None.
Allocates an
os_resource
OS_Resource to a
Existing OS_Resource
client object. Both
object to allocate to the
objects must
client object.
already exist in the
OS_install
environment. An
error will occur if
the client object has
an OS_Resource
already allocated to
it.
netboot {ClientObjectName}
Instructs the
hardware control
host of the client
object to initiate a
network boot.
None.
None.
monitor_installation
{ClientObjectName}
Monitors the
installation status
of the client object.
None.
None.
deallocate {ClientObjectName}
None.
Deallocates the
OS_Resource that
was allocated to the
client object by an
allocate operation.
None.
remove {ObjectName}
Removes the object None.
from the OS_install
environment.
None.
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
The command completed successfully.
An error occurred.
Examples
1. To define a client object, enter a command similar to the following:
OS_install -o define_client -a ip_addr=128.0.64.117
-a mac_addr=ab:cc:de:10:23:45 -a gateway=128.0.64.1
-a subnet_mask=255.255.255.0 -a ctrl_host=myhmc -a lpar=AIX1
-a profile=AIX1 -a managed_system=myMngSys myclient01
2. To define an OS_Resource object, enter a command similar to the following:
OS_install -o define_resource -a location=/images/AIX/53ML3 -a type=AIX
-a version=53ML3 my53resource
3. To allocate the OS_Resource object defined in the preceding example to a client object, enter a
command similar to the following:
OS_install -o allocate -a os_resource=my53resource myclient01
To deallocate the my53resource client object that was allocated in the preceding example, enter:
4.
OS_install -o deallocate myclient01
5.
To define a ControlHost object to be specified for the ctrl_host attribute, enter a command similar to
the following:
322
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
OS_install -o define_ctrl_host -a type=ivm -a hostname=ivm_hostname
-a communication_method=ssh myivm
6.
To view a myclient01 installation, enter:
OS_install -o monitor_installation myclient01
7.
To remove the definition of the my53resource object, enter:
OS_install -o remove my53resource
8.
To remove the definition of the myclient01 object, enter:
OS_install -o remove myclient01
Note: If an OS_Resource object is specified, the remove operation also removes any OS images that
exist in the file system directory specified by the object's location attribute.
Related Information
The lparnetboot command.
passwd command
Purpose
Changes a user's password.
Syntax
passwd [ User ]
Description
The passwd command sets and changes passwords for users. Use this command to change your own
password (all users) or another user's password (padmin only). To change your own password, enter the
passwd command. The passwd command prompts the non-padmin user for the old password and then
prompts for the new password twice. The password is never displayed on the screen. If the two entries of
the new password do not match, the passwd command prompts for the new password again.
Password policy is checked during a password change. Construct locally defined passwords according to
the following password restrictions:
minother
Specifies the minimum number of other characters.
minlen
Specifies the minimum number of characters.
maxrepeats
Specifies the maximum number of times a single
character can be used in a password.
maxage
Specifies the maximum age of a password. A password
must be changed after a specified amount of time
measured in weeks.
maxexpired
Specifies the maximum number of weeks beyond the
maxage value that a password can be changed by the
user.
histexpire
Specifies the number of weeks that a user cannot reuse a
password.
histsize
Specifies the number of previous passwords that the user
cannot reuse.
Alphabetical list of commands
323
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Security
Changing a password other than your own requires prime administrator authority.
Examples
1. To change the password for user account heerlen, type:
passwd heerlen
The user will then be prompted to enter the new password.
Related Information
The chuser command, the lsuser command, the mkuser command, and the rmuser command.
pdump command
Purpose
Perform platform (hardware and firmware) dump-related actions.
Syntax
pdump -reserve fstype | -enable | -disable | -ls | -size
Description
The pdump command helps the operating system save firmware and hardware related dumps. This
command also provides an estimate of the disk space required for storing these dumps. Note that
platform and scan dumps are saved in order to capture the state of the firmware and the hardware for
analysis.
Flags
-disable
-enable
-ls
-reserve fstype
-size
Disables platform dumps.
Enables platform dumps.
Lists the current configuration of platform dump.
Reserves enough disk space on the system for platform dumps. The -enable option will
create a file system (if one does not exist) exclusively for platform dumps. If a file
system already exists and the size is not enough, the file system size will be increased.
The fstype must be a valid file system type. If the file system already exists, any may be
specified.
Provides an estimate of disk space required to save the platform dumps when they
occur. This option will interact with the firmware to provide this estimate. It is expected
that, based on this space information, the user will have enough disk space allocated
for platform dumps to be saved. The value output will be the required size in bytes.
ping command
Purpose
Sends an echo request to a network host.
324
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Syntax
ping [ -n ] [ -r] [ -s PacketSize ] [ -src hostname/IP_addr ] Host [ Count ]
Description
The ping command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) ECHO_REQUEST to obtain an
ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE from a host or gateway. The ping command is useful for:
v Determining the status of the network and various foreign hosts.
v Tracking and isolating hardware and software problems.
v Testing, measuring, and managing networks.
If the host is operational and on the network, it responds to the echo. Each echo request contains an
Internet Protocol (IP) and ICMP header, followed by a timeval structure, and enough bytes to fill out the
packet. The default is to continuously send echo requests until an Interrupt is received (Ctrl-C).
The ping command sends one datagram per second and prints one line of output for every response
received. The ping command calculates round-trip times and packet loss statistics, and displays a brief
summary on completion. The ping command completes when the program times out or on receipt of a
SIGINT signal. The Host parameter is either a valid host name or Internet address.
By default, the ping command will continue to send echo requests to the display until an Interrupt is
received (Ctrl-C). Because of the load that continuous echo requests can place on the system, repeated
requests should be used primarily for problem isolation.
Flags
-n
-r
-s PacketSize
-src hostname/IP_addr
Specifies numeric output only. No attempt is made to look up symbolic names for host
addresses.
Bypasses the routing tables and sends directly to a host on an attached network. If the
Host is not on a directly connected network, the ping command generates an error
message. This option can be used to ping a local host through an interface that no
longer has a route through it.
Specifies the number of data bytes to be sent. The default is 56, which translates into 64
ICMP data bytes when combined with the 8 bytes of ICMP header data.
Uses the IP address as the source address in outgoing ping packets. On hosts with
more than one IP address, the -src flag can be used to force the source address to be
something other than the IP address of the interface on which the packet is sent. If the
IP address is not one of the machine's interface addresses, an error is returned and
nothing is sent.
Parameters
Count
Specifies the number of echo requests to be sent (and received). This parameter is
included for compatibility with previous versions of the ping command.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To check the network connection to host canopus and specify the number of echo requests to send,
enter:
ping canopus 5
Alphabetical list of commands
325
Information similar to the following is displayed:
PING canopus.austin.century.com: (128.116.1.5): 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 128.116.1.5: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=2 ms
64 bytes from 128.116.1.5: icmp_seq=1 ttl=255 time=2 ms
64 bytes from 128.116.1.5: icmp_seq=2 ttl=255 time=3 ms
64 bytes from 128.116.1.5: icmp_seq=3 ttl=255 time=2 ms
64 bytes from 128.116.1.5: icmp_seq=4 ttl=255 time=2 ms
----canopus.austin.century.com PING Statistics---5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 2/2/3 ms
2. To obtain information about host opus and specify the number of data bytes to be sent, enter:
ping -s 2000 opus
Information similar to the following is displayed:
PING opus.austin.century.com: (129.35.34.234): 2000 data bytes
2008 bytes from 129.35.34.234: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=20 ms
2008 bytes from 129.35.34.234: icmp_seq=1 ttl=255 time=19 ms
2008 bytes from 129.35.34.234: icmp_seq=2 ttl=255 time=20 ms
2008 bytes from 129.35.34.234: icmp_seq=3 ttl=255 time=20 ms
2008 bytes from 129.35.34.234: icmp_seq=4 ttl=255 time=20 ms
2008 bytes from 129.35.34.234: icmp_seq=5 ttl=255 time=19 ms
2008 bytes from 129.35.34.234: icmp_seq=6 ttl=255 time=19 ms
^C
----opus.austin.century.com PING Statistics---7 packets transmitted, 7 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 19/19/20 ms
Note: The output is repeated until an Interrupt (Ctrl-C) is received.
Related Information
The optimizenet command and the traceroute command.
postprocesssvc command
Purpose
Performs actions on agents after the agent is started by the startsvc command.
Syntax
postprocesssvc AgentName { -attr Attribute[=Value] ... | -ls }
Description
The postprocesssvc command performs actions for an agent based on the set of attributes specified for
the command.
perfmgr
The performance manager agent (perfmgr) collects data about system performance and sends it to IBM
support by means of the Electronic Service Agent (ESA) agent for processing. When the agent is started,
it runs a set of utilities to collect metrics to measure performance. This command generates a file from the
list of available individual performance data files that the ESA agent can understand.
The list of available attributes for this agent are D, T, S, A, and V.
326
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Flags
-attr
Lists actionable agent options, which can be any of the following attributes:
D
Generates the stats.send file from the specified date. A value of 0 (zero) specifies
to generate data.send from all the available data files.
T
Enables or Disables the data transmission.
S
Prints the absolute path to the stats.send file.
A
Lists all the stats files in data directory, except the stats.send file.
V
Prints the version.
Lists the attributes that can be processed.
-ls
Exit Status
The command completed successfully
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To list the available attributes for the perfmgr agent, type:
postprocesssvc perfmgr -ls
2. To generate the stats.send file from the data available on 06/14/2006, type:
postprocesssvc perfmgr -attr D=20090614
3. To generate the stats.send file from the data available, type:
postprocesssvc perfmgr -attr D=0
4. To list the all the stats files in the data directory, type:
postprocesssvc perfmgr -attr A
5. To print the absolute path to the stats.send file, type:
postprocesssvc perfmgr -attr S
6. To print the version, type:
postprocesssvc perfmgr -attr V
Related Information
The startsvc command and the stopsvc command.
prepdev command
Purpose
Prepares a device to be assigned to a shared memory pool (to be used as a paging space device by a
shared memory partition).
Syntax
prepdev { -dev devicename }
Description
The prepdev command prepares a device to be assigned to a shared memory pool (to be used as a
paging space device by a shared memory partition). This command determines whether the device
specified by the -dev flag is already assigned or used in the following manner:
Alphabetical list of commands
327
v Assigned to a shared memory pool (being used as a paging device)
v Used as a backup device for virtual SCSI
v Used by a file system, logical volume, or volume group.
If the device is already being used or assigned to a shared memory pool, you receive system output that
tells you how to prepare the device to be used as a paging space device.
Flags
-dev devicename
--help
Specifies the logical device to be used as a paging space device.
Displays the help text for this command and exit.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Example
1. To verify that hdisk5 is ready to be used as a paging space device by a shared memory partition, type
the following command:
prepdev
-dev hdisk5
Related Information
The lspv command and the rmvdev command.
redefvg command
Purpose
Redefines the set of physical volumes of the given volume group in the device configuration database.
Syntax
redefvg { -dev Device | -vgid Vgid } VolumeGroup
Description
During normal operations, the device configuration database remains consistent with the Logical Volume
Manager (LVM) information in the reserved area on the physical volumes. If inconsistencies occur
between the device configuration database and the LVM, the redefvg command determines which
physical volumes belong to the specified volume group and enters this information in the device
configuration database. The redefvg command checks for inconsistencies by reading the reserved areas of
all the configured physical volumes attached to the system.
Flags
-dev Device
-vgid Vgid
The volume group ID, Vgid, is read from the specified physical volume device. You can
specify the Vgid of any physical volume belonging to the volume group that you are
redefining.
The volume group identification number of the volume group to be redefined.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
328
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Examples
1. To synchronize the copies on physical volumes hdisk04, type:
redefvg -dev hdisk04
2. To synchronize the copies on volume groups vg04 and vg05, type:
redefvg -vgid vg04 vg05
Related Information
The mkvg command, the syncvg command, the chvg command, the extendvg command, the lsvg
command, the mirrorios command, the unmirrorios command, the activatevg command, the
deactivatevg command, the importvg command, the exportvg command, and the reducevg command.
reducevg command
Purpose
Removes physical volumes from a volume group. When all physical volumes are removed from the
volume group, the volume group is deleted.
Syntax
reducevg [ -f ] [ -rmlv ]VolumeGroup PhysicalVolume ...
Description
The reducevg command removes one or more physical volumes represented by the PhysicalVolume
parameter from the VolumeGroup. When you remove all physical volumes in a volume group, the volume
group is also removed.
Note:
v Sometimes a disk is removed from the system without first running the reducevg command. The
VGDA still has this removed disk in its memory, but the PhysicalVolume name no longer exists or has
been reassigned. To remove references to this missing disk you can still use reducevg, but with the
Physical Volume ID (PVID) instead of the disk name: reducevg VolumeGroup PVID.
v The specified physical volume cannot contain a logical volume that is assigned to a shared memory
pool (to be used as a paging space device by a shared memory partition).
Flags
-f
-rmlv
Removes the requirement for user confirmation when the -rmlv flag is used.
Deallocates the existing logical volume partitions and then deletes resultant empty
logical volumes from the specified physical volumes. User confirmation is required
unless the -f flag is added.
Attention: The reducevg command with the -rmlv flag automatically deletes all
logical volume data on the physical volume before removing the physical volume from
the volume group. If a logical volume spans multiple physical volumes, the removal of
any of those physical volumes may jeopardize the integrity of the entire logical volume.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Alphabetical list of commands
329
Examples
1. To remove physical volume hdisk1 from volume group vg01, type:
reducevg vg01 hdisk1
2. To remove physical volume hdisk1 and all residing logical volumes from volume group vg01 without
user confirmation, type:
Attention: The reducevg command with the -rmlv flag automatically deletes all logical volume data
before removing the physical volume.
reducevg -rmlv -f vg01 hdisk1
The physical volume hdisk1 and all residing logical volumes are removed.
Related Information
The mkvg command, the chvg command, the extendvg command, the lsvg command, the mirrorios
command, the unmirrorios command, the activatevg command, the deactivatevg command, the
importvg command, the exportvg command, and the syncvg command.
remote_management command
Purpose
Enables the Virtual I/O Server to be remotely managed by an AIX NIM (Network Installation
Management) master.
Syntax
To enable the Virtual I/O Server to be remotely managed by an AIX NIM master:
remote_management [ -interface Interface ] Master
To disable remote management:
remote_management -disable
Description
The remote_management command will setup the Virtual I/O Server to allow remote management from
a NIM master. The Master parameter specifies the NIM master hostname. The Interface parameter specifies
the network interface to be used to connect to the NIM master. If Interface is not specified, the default
network interface used will be en0.
The remote_management command utilizes the NIM service handler for client communication (nimsh),
so the NIM master must be nimsh capable.
Once remote management has been enabled on the Virtual I/O Server, typical NIM functions, such as
update, backup, and reinstall, can be initiated from the NIM master.
Flags
-disable
-interface
330
Disables the Virtual I/O Server NIM client daemon.
Specifies which network interface to use. If no network interface is specified, interface
en0 will be used.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1
Examples
1. To enable remote_management using NIM master nimsys01, type:
remote_management nimsys01
2. To disable remote_management, type:
remote_management -disable
Related Information
The lssw command, the ioslevel command, the updateios command, the oem_setup_env command, and
the oem_platform_level command.
replphyvol command
Purpose
Replaces a physical volume in a volume group with another physical volume.
Syntax
replphyvol [-force ] {SourcePhysicalVolume | SourcePhysicalVolumeID} [DestinationPhysicalVolume]
replphyvol [-retry] dir_name [DestinationPhysicalVolume]
Description
The replphyvol command replaces allocated physical partitions and the data they contain from the
SourcePhysicalVolume to DestinationPhysicalVolume. The specified source physical volume cannot be the
same as DestinationPhysicalVolume.
Note:
1. The DestinationPhysicalVolume size must be at least the size of the SourcePhysicalVolume.
2. The replphyvol command cannot replace a SourcePhysicalVolume with stale logical volume unless this
logical volume has a non-stale mirror.
3. The replphyvol command is not allowed on a snapshot volume group or a volume group that has a
snapshot volume group. The allocation of the new physical partitions follows the policies defined for
the logical volumes that contain the physical partitions being replaced.
4. The DestinationPhysicalVolume cannot be a physical volume that is assigned to a shared memory pool
(to be used as a paging space device by a shared memory partition).
The allocation of the new physical partitions follows the policies defined for the logical volumes that
contain the physical partitions being replaced.
Flags
-force
-retry
SourcePhysicalVolume
SourcePhysicalVolumeID
DestinationPhysicalVolume
Runs the command without prompting the user to continue.
Displays specified boot list, after any specified alterations
Specifies the source physical volume name.
Specifies the source physical volume ID.
Specifies the destination physical volume name.
Alphabetical list of commands
331
dir_name
Recovers replphyvol if it is interrupted by CTL+C, a system lock up, or a loss of
quorum. Specify the directory name given during the initial run of replphyvol if
you are using the -retry flag. Using this flag, you can also change the
DestinationPhysicalVolume
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
To create a boot list of logical devices to be used in the next normal boot, type the following command:
replphyvol -force hdisk0 hdisk4
To recover a boot list of logical devices if the normal boot was interrupted, type the following command:
replphyvol -retry <directory_name> hdisk4
Related Information
The migratepv command.
restore command
Purpose
Extracts files from archives created with the backup command.
Syntax
To restore files archived by file name:
restore -x [ d M n Q v q e ] [ -b Number ] [ -f Device ] [ -s SeekBackup ] [ -E { force | ignore | warn } ] [
File ... ]
To list files archived by file name:
restore -T | -t [a l n q v Q ] [ -b Number ] [ -f Device ] [ -s SeekBackup ]
To restore files archived by file system:
v restore -r [ B n q v y ] [ -b Number ] [ -f Device ] [ -s SeekBackup ]
v restore -R [ B n v y ] [ -b Number ] [ -f Device ] [ -s SeekBackup ]
v restore -i [ h m n q v y ] [ -b Number ] [ -f Device ] [ -s SeekBackup ]
v restore -x [ B h n m q v y ] [ -b Number ] [ -f Device ] [ -s SeekBackup ] [ File ... ]
To restore files beginning at a specified volume number:
restore -X Number [ -Md n q v e Q ] [ -b Number ] [ -f Device ] [ -s Number ] [ -E { force | ignore | warn
} ] [ File ... ]
To list files archived by file system:
restore -t | -T [ B a l n h q v y ] [ -b Number ] [ -f Device ] [ -s SeekBackup ] [ File ... ]
To restore file attributes archived by file name:
332
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
restore -Pstring [B d q v Q ] [ b Number] [ s SeekNumber ] [-f Device ] [ File ... ]
To restore file attributes archived by file system:
restore -Pstring [ h q v] [ b Number] [ s SeekNumber ] [-f Device] [ File ... ]
Description
The restore command reads archives created by the backup operation and extracts the files stored on
them. These archives can be in either file name or file system format. An archive can be stored on disk,
diskette, or tape. Files must be restored using the same method by which they were archived. This
requires that you know the format of the archive. The archive format can be determined by examining
the archive volume header information that is displayed when using the -T flag. When using the -x, -r,
-T, or -t flags, the restore command automatically determines the archive format.
Note: The restore command determines the actively sparses files that are being restored. If a file has
block aligned and sized areas that are NULL populated, then the restore command does not cause
physical space for those file system blocks to be allocated. The size in bytes of the file remain the same,
but the actual space taken within the file system is only for the non-NULL areas.
Individual files can be restored from either file name or file system archives by using the -x flag and
specifying the file name. The file name must be specified as it exists on the archive. Files can be restored
interactively from file system archives using the -i flag. The names of the files on an archive can be
written to standard output using the -T flag.
Users must have write access to the file system device or have restore authorization in order to extract
the contents of the archive.
The diskette device, /dev/rfd0, is the default media for the restore command. To restore from standard
input, specify a dash (-) with the -f flag. You can also specify a range of devices, such as /dev/rmt0-2.
Note:
1. If you are restoring from a multiple-volume archive, the restore command reads the volume mounted,
prompts you for the next volume, and waits for your response. After inserting the next volume, press
the Enter key to continue restoring files.
2. If an archive was created using the backup command and was made to a tape device with the device
block size set to 0, it might be necessary for you to have explicit knowledge of the block size that was
used when the tape was created to restore from the tape.
3. Multiple archives can exist on a single tape. When you are restoring multiple archives from tape, the
restore command expects the input device to be a no-retension-on-open, no-rewind-on-close tape
device. Do not use a no-rewind tape device for restoring unless the -B, -s, or -X flag is specified.
File system archives
File system archives are also known as i-node archives due to the method used to archive the files. A file
system name is specified with the backup command, and the files within that file system are archived
based on their structure and layout within the file system. The restore command restores the files on a
file system archive without any special understanding of the underlying structure of the file system.
When restoring file system archives, the restore command creates and uses a file named restoresymtable.
This file is created in the current directory. The file is necessary for the restore command to do
incremental file system restore operation.
Note: Do not remove the restoresymtable file if you perform incremental file system backups and
restores.
Alphabetical list of commands
333
The File parameter is ignored when using either the -r or the -R flag.
File-name archives
File-name archives are created by specifying a list of file names to archive by using the backup
command. The restore operation restores the files from a file name archive without any special
understanding of the underlying structure of the file system. The restore operation allows for
metacharacters to be used when specifying files for archive extraction. This provides the capability to
extract files from an archive based on pattern matching. A pattern file name should be enclosed in single
quotations, and patterns should be enclosed in parentheses (...).
About sparse files
File system files for the operating system that contain long strings of NULLs can be stored much more
efficiently than other files. To be specific, if a string of NULLs spans an entire allocation block, that whole
block is not stored on disk at all. Files where one or more blocks are omitted in this way are called sparse
files. The missing blocks are also known as holes.
Note: Sparse files are not the same as compressed files. Sparse files are exactly the same as their
nonsparse equivalents when they are read.
Sparse files are generally created by database applications. Whenever a database file is created, it is
formatted with NULLs. These fragments might be either filled with allocated or unallocated NULLs.
Flags
Displays the -a option displays the list of files in the archive, along with their
permissions when specified with the -t or -T flag.
Specifies that the archive should be read from standard input. Normally, the restore
operation examines the actual medium to determine the backup format. When using a
| (pipe), this examination cannot occur. As a result, the archive is assumed to be in file
system format, and the device is assumed to be standard input (-f -).
-a
-B
-b Number
For backups done by name, specifies the number of 512-byte blocks. For backups done
by i-node, specifies the number of 1024-byte blocks to read in a single output operation.
When the restore operation reads from tape devices, the default is 100 for backups by
name and 32 for backups by i-node.
The read size is the number of blocks multiplied by the block size. The default read
size for the restore operation reading from tape devices is 51200 (100 × 512) for backups
by name and 32768 (32 × 1024) for backups by i-node. The read size must be an even
multiple of the tape's physical block size. If the read size is not an even multiple of the
tape's physical block size and it is in fixed block mode (nonzero), the restore command
tries to determine a valid value for Number. If successful, the restore operation changes
Number to the new value, writes a message about the change to standard output, and
continues. If unsuccessful in finding a valid value for Number, the restore operation
writes an error message to standard error and exits with a nonzero return code. Larger
values for the Number parameter result in larger physical transfers from the tape device.
-d
334
The value of the -b flag is always ignored when the restore command reads from
diskette. In this case, the command always reads in clusters that occupy a complete
track.
Indicates that, if the File parameter is a directory, all files in that directory should be
restored. This flag can only be used when the archive is in file name format.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-e
Restores the nonsparse files because they were archived by the name format of the
backup operation for both packed and unpacked files. It is necessary to know the
sparseness or nonsparseness of the files before archiving the files, since enabling this
flag restores the sparse files as nonsparse.
This flag should be enabled only if the files being restored are nonsparsed, consisting of
more than 4K NULLs. If the -e flag is specified during the restore opeation, it
successfully restores all normal files normally and nonsparse database files as
nonsparse.
-E
-f Device
Extracts beginning at a specified volume number and requires one of the following
arguments. If you omit the -E flag, warn is the default behavior.
force
Fails the restore operation on a file if the fixed extent size or space reservation
of the file cannot be preserved.
ignore
Ignores any errors in preserving extent attributes.
warn
Issues a warning if the space reservation or the fixed size of the file cannot be
preserved.
Specifies the input device. To receive input from a named device, specify the Device
variable as a path name (such as /dev/rmt0). To receive input from the standard output
device, specify a dash (-)
You can also specify a range of archive devices. The range specification must be in the
following format:
/dev/deviceXXX-YYY
where XXX and YYY are whole numbers, and XXX must always be less than YYY; for
example:
/dev/rfd0-3
All devices in the specified range must be of the same type. For example, you can use a
set of 8 mm, 2.3 GB tapes or a set of 1.44 MB diskettes. All tape devices must be set to
the same physical tape block size.
-h
If the Device variable specifies a range, the restore operation automatically goes from
one device in the range to the next. After exhausting all of the specified devices, the
restore operation halts and requests that new volumes be mounted on the range of
devices.
Restores only the actual directory, not the files contained in it. This flag can only be
used when the archive is in file system format. This flag is ignored when used with the
-r or -R flag.
Alphabetical list of commands
335
-i
Allows you to interactively restore selected files from a file system archive. The
subcommands for the -i flag are:
add [File]: Specifies that the File parameter is added to the list of files to extract. If File
is a directory, that directory and all the files contained in it are added to the extraction
list (unless the -h flag is used). If File is not specified, the current directory is added to
the extraction list.
cd Directory: Changes the current directory to the specified directory.
delete [File]: Specifies that the File parameter is to be removed from the list of files to
be extracted. If File is a directory, that directory and all the files contained in it are
removed from the extraction list (unless the -h flag is used).
extract: Restores all the directories and files on the extraction list.
help: Displays a summary of the subcommands.
ls [Directory]: Displays the directories and files contained within the Directory
parameter. Directory names are displayed with a slash (/) after the name. Files and
directories, within the specified directory, that are on the extraction list are displayed
with an asterick (*) before the name. If verbose mode is on, the i-node number of the
files and directories is also displayed. If the Directory parameter is not specified, the
current directory is used .
pwd: Displays the full path name of the current directory.
quit: Causes the restore operation to exit immediately. Any files on the extraction list
are not restored.
setmodes: Sets the owner, mode, and time for all directories added to the extraction list.
-l
-M
-m
-n
336
verbose: Causes the ls subcommand to display the i-node number of files and
directories. Additional information about each file is also displayed as it is extracted
from the archive.
Displays a detailed list of files, which includes the timestamp, file permissions, file size,
owner, and group when specified with the -t or -T flag.. The -l option overrides the -a
option.
Sets the access and modification times of restored files to the time of restoration. You
can specify the -M flag only when you are restoring individually named files and only
if the -x or -X flags are also specified. When the -M flag is not specified, the restore
operation maintains the access and modification times as they appear on the backup
medium.
Renames restored files to the file's i-node number as it exists on the archive. This is
useful if a few files are being restored and you want these files restored under a
different file name. Since any restored archive members are renamed to their i-node
numbers, directory hierarchies and links are not preserved. Directories and hard links
are restored as regular files. The -m flag is used when the archive is in file system
format.
By default the restore operation restores any Access Control List (ACL)s, Printing Color
Files (PCL)s, or named extended attributes in the archive. The -n flag causes the restore
operation to skip over any ACLs, PCLs, or named extended attributes in the archive
and not restore them.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-Pstring
Restore only the file attributes. This flag does not restore the file contents. If the file
specified does not exist in the target directory path, the file is not created. This flag
restores file attributes selectively depending on the flags specified in the string
parameter. The String parameter can be a combination of the following characters:
A
Restore all attributes.
a
Restore only the permissions of the files.
o
Restore only the ownership of the files.
t
Restore only the timestamp of the files.
c
Restore only the ACL attributes of the files
Note: Among the existing flags for the restore command, flags v, h, b, s, f, B, d, and q
are valid with the P flag. The P flag can be used with both file name and file system
archives. If the File parameter is a symbolic link, then the metadata of the target file is
modified and not that of the symbolic link.
-Q
-q
-r
-R
-s SeekBackup
-t
-T
Attention: Usage of -P flag overwrites the attributes of files owned by another user
when run by the superuser.
For backups done by name, specifies that the command should exit upon encountering
any type of error rather than attempt to recover and continue processing the archive.
Specifies that the first volume is ready to use and that the restore operation should not
prompt you to mount the volume and press Enter. If the archive spans multiple
volumes, the restore command prompts you for the subsequent volumes.
Restores all files in a file system archive. The -r flag is only used to restore complete
level 0 backups or to restore incremental backups after a level 0 backup is restored. The
restoresymtable file is used by the restore operation to pass information between
incremental restore operations. This file should be removed after the last incremental
backup is restored. The File parameter is ignored when using the -r flag.
Requests a specific volume of a multiple-volume, file system archive. The -R flag allows
a previously interrupted restore operation to be restarted. The File parameter is ignored
when using the -R flag. Once restarted, the restore command behavior is the same as
with the -r flag.
Specifies the backup to seek and restore on a multiple-backup tape archive. The -s flag
is only applicable when the archive is written to a tape device. To use the -s flag
properly, a no-rewind-on-close and no-retension-on-open tape device, such as
/dev/rmt0.1 or /dev/rmt0.5, must be specified. If the -s flag is specified with a rewind
tape device, the restore command displays an error message and exits with a nonzero
return code. If a no-rewind tape device is used and the -s flag is not specified, a default
value of -s 1 is used. The value of the SeekBackup parameter must be in the range of 1
to 100 inclusive. It is necessary to use a no-rewind-on-close, no-retension-on-open tape
device because of the behavior of the -s flag. The value specified with -s is relative to
the position of the tape's read/write head and not to an archive's position on the tape.
For example, to restore the first, second, and fourth backups from a multiple-backup
tape archive, the respective values for the -s flag would be -s 1, -s 1, and -s 2.
Displays information about the backup archive. If the archive is in file system format, a
list of files found on the archive is written to standard output. The name of each file is
preceded by the i-node number of the file as it exists on the archive. The file names
displayed are relative to the root (/) directory of the file system that was backed up. If
the File parameter is not specified, all the files on the archive are listed. If the File
parameter is used, then just that file is listed. If the File parameter refers to a directory,
all the files contained in that directory are listed. If the archive is in file name format,
information contained in the volume header is written to standard error. This flag can
be used to determine if the archive is in file name or file system format.
Displays information about the backup archive. If the archive is in file name format, the
information contained in the volume header is written to standard error, and a list of
files found on the archive is written to standard output. The File parameter is ignored
for file name archives. If the archive is in file system format, the behavior is identical to
the -t flag.
Alphabetical list of commands
337
Displays additional information when restoring. If the archive is in file name format
and either the -x or -T flag is specified, the size of the file as it exists on the archive is
displayed in bytes. Directory, block, or character device files are archived with a size of
0. Symbolic links are listed with the size of the symbolic link. Hard links are listed with
the size of the file, which is how they are archived. Once the archive is read, a total of
these sizes is displayed. If the archive is in file system format, directory and
nondirectory archive members are distinguished.
-v
-x
Restores individually named files specified by the File parameter. If the File parameter
is not specified, all the archive members are restored. If the File parameter is a directory
and the archive is in file name format, only the directory is restored. If the File
parameter is a directory and the archive is in file system format, all the files contained
in the directory are restored. The file names specified by the File parameter must be the
same as the names shown by the restore -T flag. Files are restored with the same name
they were archived with. If the file name was archived using a relative path name
(./filename), the file is restored relative to the current directory. If the archive is in file
system format, files are restored relative to the current directory.
The restore command automatically creates any needed directories. When using this
flag to restore file system backups, you are prompted to enter the beginning volume
number.
The restore command allows for shell-style pattern matching metacharacters to be used
when specifying files for archive extraction. The rules for matching metacharacters are
the same as those used in shell pathname "globbing," namely:
asterick* (* )
Matches zero or more characters, but not a . (period) or / (slash).
question mark (?)
Matches any single character, but not a . (period) or / (slash).
brackets ([ ])
Matches any one of the characters enclosed within the brackets. If a pair of
characters separated by a dash are contained within the brackets, the pattern
matches any character that lexically falls between the two characters in the
current local. Additionally, a . (period) or a / (slash) within the brackets will
not match a . (period) or a / (slash) in a file name.
-X VolumeNumber
-y
?
backslash (\)
Matches the immediately following character, preventing its possible
interpretation as a metacharacter.
Begins restoring from the specified volume of a multiple-volume, file name backup.
Once started, the restore command behavior is the same as with the -x flag. The -X flag
applies only to file name archives.
Continues restoring when tape errors are encountered. Normally, the restore command
asks you whether or not to continue. In either case, all data in the read buffer is
replaced with zeros. The -y flag applies only when the archive is in file system format.
Displays a usage message.
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
0
>0
Successful completion.
An error occurred.
Examples
1. To list the names of files in either a file name or file system archive on diskette device /dev/rfd0,
type the following command:
338
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
restore -Tq
The archive is read from the /dev/rfd0 default restore device. The names of all the files and
directories contained in the archive are displayed. For file system archives, the file name is preceded
by the i-node number of the file as it exists on the archive. The -q flag tells the restore command
that the first volume is available and is ready to be read. As a result, you are not prompted to mount
the first volume.
2. To restore a specific file, type the following command:
restore -xvqf myhome.bkup system.data
This command extracts the file system.data into the current directory from the archive myhome.bkup.
The archive in this example is in the current directory. File and directory names must be specified as
they are displayed when using the -T flag. The -v flag displays additional information during the
extraction. This example applies to both file name and file system archives.
3. To restore a specific file from tape into the virtual media repository, type the following command:
restore -xvqf /dev/rmt0 /var/vio/VMLibrary/media_file
4. To restore a specific directory and the contents of that directory from a file name archive, type the
following command:
restore -xdvqf /dev/rmt0 /home/mike/tools
The -x flag extracts files by their file name. The -d flag tells the restore command to extract all the
files and subdirectories in the /home/mike/tools directory. File and directory names must be
specified as they are displayed when using the -T flag. If the directories do not exist, they are
created.
5. To restore a specific directory and the contents of that directory from a file system archive, type the
following command:
restore -xvqf /dev/rmt0 /home/mike/tools
This command extracts files by file name. File and directory names must be specified as they are
displayed when using the -T flag. If the directories do not exist, they are created.
6. To restore an entire file system archive, type the following command:
restore -rvqf /dev/rmt0
This command restores the entire file system archived on tape device /dev/rmt0 the current
directory. This example assumes you are in the root directory of the file system to be restored. If the
archive is part of a set of incremental file system archives, the archives should be restored in
increasing backup-level order beginning with level 0 (for example, 0, 1, 2).
7. To restore the fifth and ninth backups from a single-volume, multiple-backup tape, type the
following command:
restore -xvqs 5 -f/dev/rmt0.1
restore -xvqs 4 -f/dev/rmt0.1
The first command extracts all files from the fifth archive on the multiple-backup tape specified by
/dev/rmt0.1. The .1 designator specifies that the tape device will not be retensioned when it is
opened and that it will not be rewound when it is closed. It is necessary to use a no-rewind-on-close,
no-retension-on-open tape device because of the behavior of the -s flag. The second command
extracts all the files from the fourth archive (relative to the current location of the tape head on the
tape). After the fifth archive has been restored, the tape read/write head is in a position to read the
archive. Since you want to extract the ninth archive on the tape, you must specify a value of 4 with
the -s flag. This is because the -s flag is relative to your position on the tape and not to an archive's
position on the tape. The ninth archive is the fourth archive from your current position on the tape.
8. To restore the fourth backup, which begins on the sixth tape on a 10-tape multiple-backup archive,
put the sixth tape into the tape drive and type the following command:
restore -xcs 2 -f /dev/rmt0.1 /home/mike/manual/chap3
Alphabetical list of commands
339
Assuming the fourth backup is the second backup on the sixth tape, specifying -s 2 advances the
tape head to the beginning of the second backup on this tape. The restore command then restores
the specified file from the archive. If the backup continues onto subsequent volumes and the file has
not been restored, the restore command instructs you to insert the next volume until the end of the
backup is reached. The -f flag specifies the no-rewind, no-retension tape device name.
Note: The -s flag specifies the backup number relative to the tape inserted in the tape drive, not to
the overall 10-tape archive.
9. To improve the performance on streaming tape devices, pipe the dd command to the restore
command and type the following command:
dd if=/dev/rmt0 bs=64b | restore -xf- -b64
The dd command reads the archive from the tape using a block size of 64 512-byte blocks and writes
the archive to standard output. The restore command reads the standard input using a block size of
64 512-byte blocks. The value of the block size used by the dd command to read the archive from
the tape must be an even multiple of the block size that was used to create the tape with the backup
command. For example, the following backup command could be used to create the archive that this
example extracts:
find /home -print | backup -ivqf/dev/rmt0 -b64
This example applies to archives in file name format only. If the archive was in file system format,
the restore command should include the -B flag.
10. To improve the performance of the restore command on 9348 Magnetic Tape Unit Model 12, you can
change the block size by typing the following command:
chdev -l DeviceName -a BlockSize=32k
11. To restore nonsparse database files, type the following command:
restore
-xef
/dev/rmt0
12. To restore files that were archived as sparse, type the following command:
restore
-xf
/dev/rmt0
13. To restore only the permissions of the files from the archive, type the following command:
restore -Pa -vf /dev/rmt0
14. To restore only the ACL attributes of the files from the archive, type the following command:
restore -Pc -vf /dev/rmt0
15. To view the table of contents along with the file permissions, type the following command:
restore -Ta -vf /dev/rmt0
16. To view the table of contents of a file name archive along with the timestamps and file permissions,
type the following command:
restore -Tl -vf /dev/rmt0
17. To view the table of contents of a file system archive along with the timestamps and file permissions,
type the following command:
restore -tl -vf /dev/rmt0
Related Information
The backup command.
restorevgstruct command
Purpose
Restores the user volume group.
340
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Syntax
restorevgstruct { -ls | -vg VolumeGroupLabel [ DiskName ... ] }
Description
The restorevgstruct command restores the structure of a previously saved user volume group. If the -ls
flag is specified, a list of previously-saved volume groups and the date each volume group was saved is
displayed. This command does not work on rootvg.
Flags
Specifies the names of disk devices to be used instead of the disk devices saved in the
volume group structure. Target disk devices must be defined as empty physical
volumes; that is, they must contain a physical volume identifier and must not belong to
a volume group. If the target disk devices belong to a volume group, they must be
removed from the volume group using the reducevg command. Also, the target disk
device cannot be a physical volume that is assigned to a shared memory pool (to be
used as a paging space device by a shared memory partition).
Displays a list of previously saved volume groups.
Specifies the name of the VolumeGroup to restore.
DiskName...
-ls
-vg
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To restore the volume group myvg, onto the hdisk2 and hdisk3 disks, enter:
restorevgstruct myvg hdisk2 hdisk3
2. To list all previously saved volume groups, enter:
restorvgstruct -ls
The message generated would be similar to:
-rw-r--r--rw-r--r--
1 root
1 root
system
system
51200 Jun 18 10:53 myvg.data
51200 Jun 18 10:53 myvg2.data
Related Information
The activatevg command, the savevgstruct command, the chvg command, the deactivatevg command, the
exportvg command, the extendvg command, the importvg command, the reducevg command, the lsvg
command, the mkvg command, and the syncvg command.
rm command
Purpose
Removes (unlinks) files or directories.
Syntax
rm [ -f ] [ -r ] [ -R ] [ -i] [ -e ] File ...
Alphabetical list of commands
341
Description
The rm command removes the entries for the specified File parameter from a directory. If an entry is the
last link to a file, the file is then deleted. If you do not have write permission for a file and the standard
input is a terminal, you are prompted with the file name and ask to confirm that you want to delete the
file. If you type a y (for yes), the file is deleted, type any other character and the file is not deleted. You
do not need read or write permission for the file you want to remove. However, you must have write
permission for the directory containing the file.
If the file is a symbolic link, the link is removed, but the file or directory that the symbolic link refers to
remains. You do not need write permission to delete a symbolic link, if you have write permission in the
directory.
If either of the files . (dot) or .. (dot, dot) are specified as the base name portion of the File parameter,
the rm command writes a diagnostic message to standard error and does nothing more with such
parameters.
The rm command writes a prompt to standard error and reads a line from standard input if the -f flag is
not specified, and either the File parameter does not have write permission and the standard input is a
workstation, or the -i flag is specified. If the response is not affirmative, the rm command does nothing
more with the current file and proceeds to the next file.
The files owned by other users cannot be removed if the sticky bit of the directory is set and the
directory is not owned by the user.
Note: The rm command supports the — (dash, dash) parameter as a delimiter that indicates the end of
the flags.
An attempt to remove a file or directory that has been exported for use by the NFS version 4 server will
fail with a message saying that the resource is busy. The file or directory must be unexported for NFS
version 4 use before it can be removed.
Flags
-e
-f
-i
-r
-R
Displays a message after each file is deleted.
Does not prompt before removing a write-protected file. Does not display an error message or return error
status if a specified file does not exist. If both the -f and -i flags are specified, the last one specified takes
effect.
Prompts you before deleting each file. When you use the -i and -r flags together, the rm command also
prompts before deleting directories. If both the -i and -f flags are specified, the last one specified takes effect.
Permits recursive removal of directories and their contents when the File parameter is a directory. This flag is
equivalent to the -R flag.
Permits recursive removal of directories and their contents when the File parameter is a directory. This flag is
equivalent to the -r flag.
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
>0
If the -f flag was not specified, all the named directory entries were removed; otherwise, all the existing
named directory entries were removed.
An error occurred.
342
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
0
Examples
1. To delete a file, enter:
rm myfile
If there is another link to this file, then the file remains under that name, but the name myfile is
removed. If myfile is the only link, the file itself is deleted.
2. To delete a file without first receiving a confirmation prompt, enter:
rm
-f core
No confirmation prompt is issued before the rm -f command attempts to remove the file named core.
However, an error message displays if the core file is write-protected and you are not the owner of
the file or you do not have root authority. No error message displays when the rm -f command
attempts to remove nonexistent files.
3. To delete files one by one, enter:
rm
-i mydir/*
After each file name is displayed, enter y to delete the file, or press the Enter key to keep it.
4. To delete a directory tree, enter:
rm -ir manual
This command recursively removes the contents of all subdirectories of the manual directory,
prompting you regarding the removal of each file, and then removes the manual directory itself, for
example:
You: rm -ir manual
System: rm: Select files in directory manual? Enter y for yes.
You: y
System: rm: Select files in directory manual/draft1? Enter y for yes.
You: y
System: rm: Remove manual/draft1?
You: y
System: rm: Remove manual/draft1/chapter1?
You: y
System: rm: Remove manual/draft1/chapter2?
You: y
System: rm: Select files in directory manual/draft2? Enter y for yes.
You: y
System: rm: Remove manual/draft2?
You: y
System: rm: Remove manual?
You: y
Here, the rm command first asks if you want it to search the manual directory. Because the manual
directory contains directories, the rm command next asks for permission to search manual/draft1 for
files to delete, and then asks if you want it to delete the manual/draft1/chapter1 and
manual/draft1/chapter2 files. The rm command next asks for permission to search the manual/draft2
directory. Then asks for permission to delete the manual/draft1, manual/draft2, and manual directories.
If you deny permission to remove a subdirectory (for example, manual/draft2), the rm command does
not remove the manual directory. Instead, you see the message: rm: Directory manual not empty.
Files
/usr/bin/rm
Contains the rm command.
Alphabetical list of commands
343
rmbdsp command
Purpose
Remove a backing device and return the storage back to the storage pool.
Syntax
rmbdsp {-sp StoragePool-bd LogicalVolume | -vtd VirtualTargetDevice} [-savebd][-f]
Description
The rmbdsp command removes a backing device from a virtual SCSI server adapter by removing its
associated virtual target device. By default the backing device is also removed and its storage returned to
the storage pool. If the -savebd flag is included then the backing device is not removed. The backing
device can be identified by either specifying the name, -bd, or the virtual target device, -vtd. If the
backing device is identified by the name, -bd, then the storage pool the device is contained within must
also be specified, -sp. If the storage pool is not given the default storage pool is assumed.
Note:
v A storage pool must be specified if the given backup device name is a file backing device. The default
storage pool is not assumed.
v The logical volume specified for the -bd option cannot be assigned to a shared memory pool (to be
used as a paging space device by a shared memory partition).
If -vtd flag is given only the specified virtual target device is removed. If -bd flag is given all virtual
target devices associated with the backing device will be removed.
Flags
-bd BackingDevice
-savebd
-sp
-vtd VirtualTargetDevice
-f
Specifies the backing device that is the backing device.
Instructs the command not to remove the backing device.
Specifies the storage pool the backing device is within.
Specifies the virtual target devices that associate the backing device with the virtual
SCSI adapter.
Forces the metadata file associated to the file-backed disk to be removed. If you also
specify the -savebd flag, the backing device will not be removed.
CAUTION:
Only use this flag if the metadata file associated to the file-backed disk is corrupt.
Exit Status
25
Specified logical volume is not a backing device.
Examples
To remove the virtual target device vtscsi4 and not remove the backing device associated with it, type:
rmbdsp -vtd vtscsi4 -savebd
344
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
rmdev command
Purpose
Removes a device from the system.
Syntax
rmdev { -dev | -pdev } Name [ -recursive ] [ [ -ucfg ]
Description
The rmdev command unconfigures and undefines the device specified with the device logical name. If
you specify the -recursive flag, the rmdev command acts on any children of the device as well. By
specifying the -ucfg flag the device will be unconfigured but not undefined.
Use the -pdev flag along with the parent device's logical name to delete all of the children devices. The
children are deleted in the same recursive fashion as described above for the -recursive flag. The only
difference is that the specified device itself is not deleted. Thus, the -recursive flag is redundant and need
not be specified with the -pdev flag.
Attention: To protect the Configuration database, the rmdev command cannot be interrupted. Stopping
this command before execution is complete could result in a corrupted database.
Note: The device specified or the children of the device specified cannot be a physical or logical volume
that is assigned to a shared memory pool (to be used as a paging space device by a shared memory
partition).
Flags
-dev Name
Specifies the logical device, indicated by the Name parameter. This flag may not be
used with the -pdev flag.
Specifies the parent logical device (indicated by the Name parameter whose children
need to be removed. This flag may not be used with the -dev flag.
Unconfigures the device and its children.
Unconfigures, but does not undefine, the specified device. The device's state will be
moved from Available to Defined. To move the device back to Available state run
cfgdev -dev Name
-pdev Name
-recursive
-ucfg
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To unconfigure the cd0 CD-ROM device, type:
rmdev
-dev cd0
2. To unconfigure the SCSI adapter scsi1 and all of its children, type:
rmdev
-recursive -dev scsi1
3. To unconfigure just the children of the SCSI adapter scsi1, but not the adapter itself, type:
rmdev
-pdev scsi1
4. To unconfigure the children of PCI bus pci1 and all other devices under them, type:
rmdev
-pdev pci1
Alphabetical list of commands
345
Related Information
The cfgdev command, the chdev command, the lsdev command, the mkvdev command, and the rmdev
command.
rmlv command
Purpose
Removes logical volumes from a volume group.
Syntax
rmlv [ -f ] LogicalVolume ...
Description
The rmlv command removes a logical volume. The LogicalVolume parameter can be a logical volume
name or logical volume ID.
Attention: This command destroys all data in the specified logical volumes. The specified logical
volume cannot be assigned to a shared memory pool (to be used as a paging space device by a shared
memory partition).
Flags
Removes the logical volumes without requesting confirmation.
-f
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To remove logical volume lv05 without requiring user confirmation, enter the following command:
rmlv -f lv05
The logical volume is removed from the volume group.
Related Information
The mklv command, the extendlv command, and the lslv command.
rmlvcopy command
Purpose
Removes a copy of a logical volume.
Syntax
rmlvcopy LogicalVolume [ PhysicalVolume ... ]
346
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Description
The rmlvcopy command removes one of the copies (disabling mirroring) of the logical volume. The
LogicalVolume parameter can be a logical volume name or logical volume ID. The PhysicalVolume
parameter can be the physical volume name or the physical volume ID. If the PhysicalVolume parameter is
used, then only the copy from that physical volume will be removed.
Note: If the LVM (Logical Volume Manager) has not recognized that a disk has failed, it is possible that
the LVM will remove a different mirror. Therefore, if you know that a disk has failed and the LVM does
not show those disks as missing, you should specify the failed disks on the command line.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
To remove mirroring from the logical volume lv0112, type:
rmlvcopy lv0112
Related Information
The mklv command, the extendlv command, the rmlv command, and the lslv command.
rmpath command
Purpose
Removes from the system a path to an MPIO-capable device.
Syntax
rmpath { [ -dev Name ] [ -pdev Parent ] [ -conn Connection ] } [ -rm ]
Description
The rmpath command unconfigures, and possibly undefines, one or more paths associated with the
specified target device (-dev Name). The set of paths that is removed is determined by the combination of
the -dev Name, -pdev Parent and -conn Connection flags. If the command will result in all paths associated
with the device being unconfigured or undefined, the command will exit with an error and without
unconfiguring or undefining any path. In this situation, rmdev command must be used instead to
unconfigure or undefine the target device itself.
The default action unconfigures each specified path, but does not completely remove it from the system.
If the -rm flag is specified, the rmpath command unconfigures (if necessary) and removes, or deletes, the
path definition(s) from the system.
When the rmpath command finishes, it displays a status message. When unconfiguring paths, it is
possible for this command to be able to unconfigure some paths and not others (for example, paths that
are in the process of doing I/O cannot be unconfigured).
The rmpath command provides status messages about the results of operation. Messages in one of the
following formats will be generated:
path [ defined | deleted ]
This message is displayed when a single path was successfully unconfigured or undefined. If the
Alphabetical list of commands
347
path is successfully configured the message path available displays. If the path is not successfully
configured and there is no explicit error code returned by the method, the message path defined
displays.
paths [defined | deleted]
This message is displayed if multiple paths were identified and all paths were successfully
unconfigured or undefined. If the -rm flag is not specified, the message would be paths defined.
If the -rm flag is specified, the message would be paths deleted.
some paths [ defined | deleted ]
This message is display if multiple paths were identified, but only some of them were
successfully unconfigured or undefined. If the -rm flag is not specified, the message would be
some paths defined. If the -rm flag is specified, the message would be some paths deleted.
no paths processed
This message is generated if no paths were found matching the selection criteria.
Flags
-rm
-dev Name
-pdev Parent
-conn Connection
Indicates that the specified paths are to be deleted from the system.
Specifies the logical device name of the target device whose path is to be removed. The
paths to be removed are qualified via the -pdev and -conn flags.
Indicates the logical device name of the parent device to use in qualifying the paths to
be removed. Since all paths to a device cannot be removed by this command, either this
flag, the -conn flag, or both must be specified.
Indicates the connection information to use in qualifying the paths to be removed. Since
all paths to a device cannot be removed by this command, either this flag, the -pdev
flag, or both must be specified.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. 1. To unconfigure the path from scsi0 to hdisk1 at connection 5,0, type:
rmpath -dev hdisk1 -pdev scsi0 -conn "5,0"
The message generated would be similar to:
path defined
2. To unconfigure all paths from scsi0 to hdisk1, type:
rmpath -dev hdisk1 -pdev scsi0
If all paths were successfully unconfigured, the message generated would be similar to:
paths defined
However, if only some of the paths were successfully unconfigured, the message would be similar to:
some paths defined
3. To undefine the path definition between scsi0 and hdisk1 at connection 5,0, type:
rmpath -rm -dev hdisk1 -pdev scsi0 -conn "5,0"
The message generated would be similar to the following:
path deleted
4. To unconfigure all paths from scsi0 to hdisk1, type:
rmpath -rm -dev hdisk1 -pdev scsi0
348
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
The message generated would be similar to:
paths deleted
Related Information
The chpath command, the lspath command, and the rmpath command.
rmrep command
Purpose
Remove the Virtual Media Repository
Syntax
rmrep [-f ]
Description
The rmrep command removes the Virtual Media Repository from the Virtual I/O Server. If there are any
Virtual Target Devices associated with any virtual optical media in the repository the command will fail.
If virtual optical media exist in the repository, but there are no Virtual Target Devices associated with
them, the command will fail unless the -f flag is specified.
Flags
-f
Forces the repository to be removed even if it contains virtual optical media.
Examples
To remove the Virtual Media Repository, type the following command:
rmrep
rmsp command
Purpose
Removes a file storage pool.
Syntax
rmsp [ -f StoragePool ]
Description
The rmsp command removes the specified storage pool from the Virtual I/O Server. This command only
works for file storage pools. To remove a logical volume storage pool, use the chsp command to remove
all physical volumes from the pool. If the pool contains any files, the -f flag must be specified or the
command will fail. Also, any virtual target devices associated with files in the pool must be removed
prior to running the rmsp command.
Flags
-f
Forces the pool to be removed even if it contains files.
Alphabetical list of commands
349
Example
To remove the storage pool Client_Data, type the following command:
rmsp Client_Data
IVM rmsyscfg command
Purpose
Removes a logical partition from the managed system. This command is valid only in an Integrated
Virtualization Manager environment.
Syntax
rmsyscfg -r lpar { -n ParitionName | --id PartitionID }
Description
The rmsyscfg command removes a logical partition from the managed system.
Flags
-r ResourceType
-m ManagedSystem
-n PartitionName
--id PartitionID
The type of resources to remove:
lpar - Logical partition resources
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
The name of the partition which you want to remove.
The partition ID of the partition to remove.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of zero on success.
Security
This command is not accessible by users with the ViewOnly role.
Examples
1. To delete a partition with an lpar ID of 3, type:
rmsyscfg -r lpar --id 3
2. To delete a partition a name of lp3, type:
rmsyscfg -r lpar -n lp3
Related Information
The lssyscfg command, the mksyscfg command, and the chsyscfg command.
IVM rmsysplan command
Purpose
Removes a system plan file.
350
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Syntax
rmsysplan [-f <system plan file name> [--help]
Description
The rmsysplan command removes a system plan file.
Flags
-f [SysPlanFileName]
--help
Specifies the system plan file name that will be removed from the Integrated
Virtualization Manager system plan file directory. File name should have suffix .sysplan
Displays the help text for this command and then exits.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
To remove a system plan file test.sysplan, type the following command:
rmsysplan -f
test.sysplan
Related Information
The deploysysplan command, mksysplan command, and the lssysplan command.
IVM rmsysplanres command
Purpose
Remove the system plan resource.
Syntax
rmsysplanres -r osinstall -n <resource name> [-help]
Description
The rmsysplanres command removes a system plan resource that is defined on the Integrated
Virtualization Manager (IVM).
Flags
-r
-n
-help
Specifies the type of system plan resources to remove. To remove the installation
resources for the operating system, the only valid value is osinstall.
Specifies the name of the system plan resource to remove.
Displays the help text for this command and exit.
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
Successful completion.
Invalid flag, argument, or command failure.
Alphabetical list of commands
351
Examples
1. To remove the system plan resource for the osinstall type used as the Red Hat installation source,
type:
rmsysplanres -r osinstall -n rhel4
2. To remove the system plan resource for the osinstall type used as the AIX 5.3 installation source,
type:
rmsysplanres -r osinstall -n aix53
Related Information
The defsysplanres, deploysysplan, lssysplanres, and lssysplan commands.
rmtcpip command
Purpose
Removes the Virtual I/O Server TCP/IP configuration.
Syntax
rmtcpip [-f] [-nextboot] {-all | [-hostname] [-routing] [-interface ifnameList]}
rmtcpip [-f] {-all | [-namesrv] [-hostname] [-routing] [-interface ifnameList]}
Description
The rmtcpip command removes Virtual I/O Server TCP/IP settings, such as name server information,
network interface configuration, routing information, and host name.
Flags
-all
-f
-interface
-hostname
-namesrv
-nextboot
-routing
Removes all TCP/IP settings, effectively resetting it to a newly installed system.
Executes the command with out prompting for user confirmation.
Removes TCP/IP configuration from listed interfaces.
Resets the hostname to ioserver.
Removes DNS information and clears the hosts file.
Removes the specified information from the configuration files, leaving the current
network parameters intact (all except DNS information and hosts file).
Removes static routing tables.
Examples
1. To remove all Virtual I/O Server TCP/IP configuration, type:
rmtcpip -all
Answer yes when prompted
2. To unconfigure a network interface en0 without confirmation, type:
rmtcpip -f -interface en0
3. To cleanup the static routing table, type:
rmtcpip -f -routing
4. To remove IP information from a network interface on the next boot, keeping the current
configuration running execute:
352
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
rmtcpip -f -interface en0 -nextboot
rmuser command
Purpose
Removes a user account.
Syntax
rmuser [-ldap] [-rmdir] Name
Description
The rmuser command removes the user account that is identified by the Name parameter. This command
removes a user account attribute. If you specify the rmdir flag, this command also removes the user's
home directory and files.
Flags
-rmdir
Removes the specified user's home directory and files.
-ldap
Attention: This will delete all data stored in this user account's home directory.
Identifies the user as an LDAP user account.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Security
This command can only be run by the prime administrator (padmin) user.
Examples
1. To remove user account haarlem, type the following command:
rmuser haarlem
2. To remove the user account and home directory of user account emmen, type the following
command:
rmuser -rmdir emmen
Attention:
This will delete all data stored in this user account's home directory.
Related Information
The chuser command, the lsuser command, the mkuser command, and the passwd command.
rmvdev command
Purpose
To remove the connection between a physical device and its associated virtual SCSI adapter.
Syntax
rmvdev [ -f ] { -vdev TargetDevice | -vtd VirtualTargetDevice } [-rmlv]
Alphabetical list of commands
353
Description
The rmdev command removes the connection between a physical device and its associated virtual SCSI
adapter. The connection can be identified by specifying the backing (physical) device or the virtual target
device. If the connection is specified by the device name and there are multiple connections between the
physical device and virtual SCSI adapters and error is returned unless the -f flag is also specified. If -f is
included then all connections associated with the physical device are removed.
If the backing (physical) device is a logical volume and the -rmlv flag is specified, then logical volume
will be removed as well.
Flags
-f
-vdev TargetDevice
-rmlv
-vtd VirtualTargetDevice
Forces the removal of all virtual target devices associated with the give backing device.
Specifies the physical backing device
Deletes the backing device. This flag is valid only for logical volume backing devices.
Specifies the virtual target device to remove.
rmvopt command
Purpose
Remove a virtual optical media disk from the Virtual Media Repository.
Syntax
rmvopt [-f ] -name FileName
Description
The rmrep command removes the specified media from the Virtual Media Repository. If the media is
currently loaded into one or more virtual optical devices the command will fail, unless the -f flag is
specified.
Flags
-f
-name FileName
Force the media to be removed even if it is loaded into one or more virtual optical
devices.
The name of the virtual optical media to remove.
Examples
To remove the file clientData from the Virtual Media Repository, type the following command:
rmvopt -name clientData
rmvt command
Purpose
Closes a virtual terminal connection to a partition. This command is valid only in an Integrated
Virtualization Manager environment.
Syntax
rmvt { -id lparID }
354
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Description
The rmvt command closes a virtual terminal connection to the target logical partition. To close the virtual
terminal session normally, enter the ~. character sequence in the terminal window.
This command requires additional HMC configuration if used in an HMC environment.
Flags
-id lparID
The ID of the partition for which to close the virtual terminal session.
Exit Status
Virtual terminal device is not found
29
Security
This command is not accessible by users with the ViewOnly role.
Examples
1.
To close a virtual terminal connection to the partition with ID 3, type:
rmvt -id 3
Related Information
The mkvt command.
IVM rsthwres command
Purpose
Restores hardware resources
Syntax
rsthwres -r io | mem | proc | virtualio | mempool [-m <managed system>] [-p <partition name> | -- id
<partition ID>] [-l <DRC index>] [-s <virtual slot number>] [-a "<attributes>"] [--help]
rsthwres -rhea | -m <managed system>] [-p <partition name> | --id <partition ID>] [-l<HEA DRC index>] [-g
<port group ID>] --logport <logical port ID>]--help]
To restore memory or processing resources
rsthwres -r {mem | proc} [{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}]
To restore physical I/O slots
rsthwres -r io [{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}] [-l slot-DRC-index]
To restore Host Ethernet Adapter resources
rsthwres -r hea [{-p partition-name | --id partition-ID}] [-lHEA-adapter-ID] [-g port-group --logport
logical-port-ID]
Alphabetical list of commands
355
To restore memory pool resources
rsthwres -r mempool [-a "<attributes>"] [--help]
Description
The rsthwres command restores the hardware resource configuration in the managed system. This
operation may need to be performed after a dynamic LPAR operation fails.
You also need to perform this operation to restore memory pool resources in the following situations:
v When you reinstall the VIOS base code and applied fix packs from original VIOS media.
v When you restore the VIOS from backup media prior to the time you created the memory pool, but the
firmware still has a memory pool configured.
Flags
Shows the type of hardware resources to restore:
-r
io
I/O slot (physical)
hea
Host Ethernet Adapter
mem
Memory
mempool
Memory pools
proc
Processing
virtualio
-m <managed system>
-p< partition name>
Virtual I/O
Indicates the name of the managed system which has the partitions for which to
restore the hardware resources. The name may either be the user-defined name for
the managed system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine
type, mmm is the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
Indicates the name of the partition for which to restore the hardware resources.
To restore hardware resources for a single partition, you must either use this option
to specify the name of the partition, or use the --id option to specify the partition's
ID. Otherwise, hardware resources for all partitions in the managed-system will be
restored.
The -p and the --id options are mutually exclusive.
--id<partition ID>
Indicates the ID of the partition for which to restore the hardware resources.
To restore hardware resources for a single partition, you must either use this option
to specify the ID of the partition, or use the -p option to specify the partition's name.
Otherwise, hardware resources for all partitions in the managed-system will be
restored.
The --id and the -p options are mutually exclusive.
-l <DRC index>
-s <virtual slot>
356
Indicates the DRC index of the physical I/O slot to restore. This option is only valid
when restoring physical I/O slots.
This option is also used to specify the physical Host Ethernet Adapter to restore.
Indicates the slot number of the virtual I/O.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-a "<attributes>"
The configuration data needed to set hardware resource related attributes. The
configuration data consists of attribute name/value pairs, which are in comma
separated value (CSV) format. The configuration data must be enclosed in quotation
marks. Possible values are:
paging_storage_pool
Note:
v If you intend to use a paging storage pool, you must specify the value here. After
you run the rsthwres command, you cannot set or change the paging storage pool
value without deleting your memory pool and recreating it.
-g port group ID
--logport <virtual slot>
--help
v The -a parameter is valid only with -r mempool, and the only supported attribute
is paging_storage_pool.
Indicates the logical ports that are part of the specified port group that will be
restored.
Indicates the ID of the logical port to recover.
Displays the help text for this command and exit.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Examples
To restore the physical I/O slots for all partitions type the following command:
rsthwres -r io -m mySystem
To restore the physical I/O slot with DRC index 21010003, type the following command:
rsthwres -r io -m 9406-570*12345678 -l 21010003
To restore memory resources for partition pl, type the following command:
rsthwres -r mem -m 9406-570*12345678 -p p1
To restore processing resources for the partition with ID 1, type the following command:
rsthwres -r proc -m mySystem --id 1
To clean up all recoverable Host Ethernet Adapter resources, type the following command:
rsthwres -r hea
To clean up a specific logical port with a given partition, type the following command:
rsthwres -r hea -l <HEA DRC> -g <PORT GROUP>
--logport <LP ID> {-p <LPAR NAME | --id <LPAR ID>}
To recover a memory pool using rootvg as the paging storage pool, type the following command:
rsthwres -r mempool -a paging_storage_pool=rootvg
Note: If you intend to use a paging storage pool, you must specify the value here. After you run the
rsthwres command, you cannot set or change the paging storage pool value without deleting your
memory pool and recreating it.
IVM rstprofdata command
Purpose
Restores profile data. This command is valid only in an Integrated Virtualization Manager environment.
Alphabetical list of commands
357
Syntax
To restore logical partition configuration data from a file:
rstprofdata -l RestoreType [-f RestoreFile] [ --ignoremtms ] [ --ignoremac ] [ --ignorehea ] [ -m
ManagedSystem ]
Description
The rstprofdata command performs a restore of logical partition configuration information from a file
which was created with the bkprofdata command. Logical partition configuration must be cleared using
the lpcfgop command before performing a restore operation. The restore operation may require a restart
of the managed system, after which the rstprofdata command should be run again with the same
parameters as were used the first time (before the system restart).
Flags
-l RestoreType
-f RestoreFile
--ignoremtms
The type of restore to perform. Valid options are:
1 - full restore from the backup file
The name of the file to read from in the current working directory. If not specified, the
default file is "/var/adm/lpm/profile.bak"
Do not fail the restore operation if the type, model, or serial number of the managed
system does not match the values in the backup file. This flag is used for the following
primary reasons:
v To clone the configuration from one system to another.
v To force new worldwide port names to be allocated for any logical partitions that use
virtual fibre channel.
--ignoremac
--ignorehea
-m ManagedSystem
--help
Note: If you use the -ignoremtms flag, new worldwide port names are generated.
Do not try to restore the virtual Ethernet MAC addresses from the backup file. Default
to the automatically generated MAC addresses.
Do not try to restore the Host Ethernet Adapter resources.
The name of the managed system. This attribute is optional because there is only one
system to manage. The name may either be the user-defined name for the managed
system, or be in the form tttt-mmm*ssssssss, where tttt is the machine type, mmm is
the model, and ssssssss is the serial number of the managed system.
Display the help text for this command and exit.
Exit Status
This command has a return code of 0 on success.
Security
This command is not accessible by users with the ViewOnly role.
Examples
1. To restore the partition configuration data from /var/adm/lpm/profile.bak, type:
rstprofdata -l 1
2. To restore the partition configuration data from lparData.bak without validating that the type, model,
and serial number match, type:
rstprofdata -l 1 -f lparData.bak --ignoremtms
358
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Related Information
The bkprofdata command.
save_base command
Purpose
Saves information about base-customized devices in the Device Configuration database for the boot
device.
Syntax
save_base [-path Directory][-file File][-verbose]
Description
The save_base command stores customized information for base devices to use during phase 1 of system
boot. By default, the save_base command retrieves this information from the /etc/objrepos directory.
However, you can override this action by using the -o flag to specify an ODM directory. The save_base
command is typically run without any parameters. It uses the /dev/ipl_blv special file link to identify
the output destination.
Alternatively, use the -d flag to specify a destination file or a device, such as the /dev/hdisk0 device file.
To identify a specific output destination, the -d flag identifies the file to which save_base writes the base
customized device data. This file can be either a regular file or a device special file. The device special file
identifies either a disk device special file or a boot logical volume device special file.
A disk device special file can be used where there is only one boot logical volume on the disk. The
save_base command ensures that the given disk has only one boot logical volume present. If neither of
these conditions is true, save_base does not save the base customized device data to the disk and exits
with an error.
When a second boot logical volume is on a disk, the boot logical volume device special file must be used
as the destination device to identify which boot image the base customized device data will be stored in.
A boot logical volume device special file can be used even if there is only one boot logical volume on the
disk. The save_base command ensures that the given device special file is a boot logical volume and it is
bootable before saving any data to it. If either of these checks fails, save_base exits with an error.
The save_base command determines what device information to save using the PdDv.base field
corresponding to each entry in the CuDv object class. Specifically, the PdDv.base field is a bit mask which
represents the type of boot for which this device is a base device. The save_base command determines
the current type of boot by accessing the boot_mask attribute in the CuAt object class. The value of this
attribute is the bit mask to apply to the PdDv.base field to determine which devices are base.
Note:
v Base devices are those devices that get configured during phase 1 boot; they may vary depending on
the type of boot (mask). For example, if the mask is NETWORK_BOOT, network devices are
considered base; for DISK_BOOT, disk devices are considered base. The type of boot masks are defined
in the /usr/include/sys/cfgdb.h file.
v The -m flag is no longer used by the save_base command. For compatibility reasons, the flag can be
specified, but is not used.
Alphabetical list of commands
359
Flags
-path Directory
-file file
-verbose
Specifies a directory containing the Device Configuration database.
Note: By default, the save_base command retrieves this information from the
/etc/objrepos directory.
Specifies the destination file or device to which the base information will be written.
Specifies that verbose output is to be written to standard output (STDIN).
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To save the base customized information and see verbose output, type the following command:
save_base -verbose
2. To specify an ODM directory other than the /usr/lib/objrepos directory, type the following
command:
save_base -o /tmp/objrepos
3. To save the base customized information to the /dev/hdisk0 device file instead of to the boot disk,
type the following command:
save_base -d /dev/hdisk0
savevgstruct command
Purpose
Backs up a volume group.
Syntax
savevgstruct VolumeGroupLabel
Description
The savevgstruct command will make a backup of a volume group structure.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To save the structure of the user defined volume group myvg, enter:
savevgstruct myvg
Related Information
The activatevg command, the restorevgstruct command, the chvg command, the deactivatevg command,
the exportvg command, the extendvg command, the importvg command, the lsvg command, the mkvg
command, and the syncvg command.
360
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
seastat command
Purpose
Generates a report to view, per client, Shared Ethernet Adapter statistics.
Syntax
To display Shared Ethernet Adapter statistics, per client.
seastat -d Shared Ethernet Adapter device name [-n]
To clear all Shared Ethernet Adapter statistics that have been gathered per client.
seastat -d Shared Ethernet Adapter device name -c
Description
The seastat command generates a report to view, per client, shared ethernet adapter statistics. To gather
network statistics at a per-client level, advanced accounting can be enabled on the Shared Ethernet
Adapter to provide more information about its network traffic. To enable per-client statistics, the VIOS
administrator can set the Shared Ethernet Adapter accounting attribute to enabled. The default value is
disabled. When advanced accounting is enabled, the Shared Ethernet Adapter keeps track of the
hardware (MAC) addresses of all of the packets it receives from the LPAR clients, and increments packet
and byte counts for each client independently. After advanced accounting is enabled on the Shared
Ethernet Adapter, the VIOS administrator can generate a report to view per-client statistics by running
the seastat command.
Note: Advanced accounting must be enabled on the Shared Ethernet Adapter before the seastat
command can print any statistics.
To enable advanced accounting on the SEA, enter the following command:
chdev -dev <SEA device name> -attr accounting=enabled
Flags
-d Shared Ethernet Adapter
device name
-n
-c
Specifies the device name of the Shared Ethernet Adapter.
Disables name resolution on the IP addresses.
Clears all of the per client Shared Ethernet Adapter statistics that have been gathered.
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
Successful completion.
Invalid flag, argument, or command failure
Examples
1. To display Shared Ethernet Adapter statistics for sea0, type:
seastat -d sea0
2. To clear the Shared Ethernet Adapter statistics for sea0, type:
seastat -d sea0 -c
Alphabetical list of commands
361
sed command
Purpose
A stream editor.
Syntax
sed [ -n ] Script [ File ... ]
sed [ -n ] [ -e Script ] ... [ -f ScriptFile ] ... [ File ... ]
Description
The sed command modifies lines from the specified File parameter according to an edit script and writes
them to standard output. The sed command includes many features for selecting lines to be modified and
making changes only to the selected lines.
The sed command uses two work spaces for holding the line being modified: the pattern space, where
the selected line is held; and the hold space, where a line can be stored temporarily.
An edit script consists of individual subcommands, each one on a separate line. The general form of sed
subcommands is the following:
[address-range] function[modifiers]
The sed command processes each input File parameter by reading an input line into a pattern space,
applying all sed subcommands in sequence whose addresses select that line, and writing the pattern
space to standard output. It then clears the pattern space and repeats this process for each line specified
in the input File parameter. Some of the sed subcommands use a hold space to save all or part of the
pattern space for subsequent retrieval.
When a command includes an address (either a line number or a search pattern), only the addressed line
or lines are affected by the command. Otherwise, the command is applied to all lines.
An address is either a decimal line number, a $ (dollar sign), which addresses the last line of input, or a
context address. A context address is a regular expression similar to those used in the ed command
except for the following differences:
v You can select the character delimiter for patterns. The general form of the expression is:
\?pattern?
where ? (question mark) is a selectable character delimiter. You can select any character from the
current locale except for the space or new-line character. The \ (backslash) character is required only
for the first occurrence of the ? (question mark).
The default form for the pattern is the following:
/pattern/
A \ (backslash) character is not necessary.
v The \n sequence matches a new-line character in the pattern space, except the terminating new-line
character.
v A . (period) matches any character except a terminating new-line character. That is, unlike the ed
command, which cannot match a new-line character in the middle of a line, the sed command can
match a new-line character in the pattern space.
362
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Certain commands called addressed commands allow you to specify one line or a range of lines to which
the command should be applied. The following rules apply to addressed commands:
v A command line without an address selects every line.
v A command line with one address, expressed in context form, selects each line that matches the
address.
v A command line with two addresses separated by commas selects the entire range from the first line
that matches the first address through the next line that matches the second. (If the second address is a
number less than or equal to the line number first selected, only one line is selected.) Thereafter, the
process is repeated, looking again for the first address.
Flags
-e Script
-f ScriptFile
-n
Uses the Script variable as the editing script. If you are using just one -e flag and no -f
flag, the -e flag can be omitted.
Uses the ScriptFile variable as the source of the edit script. The ScriptFile variable is a
prepared set of editing commands applied to the File parameter.
Suppresses all information normally written to standard output.
Note: You can specify multiple -e and -f flags. All subcommands are added to the script in the order
specified, regardless of their origin.
sed Subcommands
The sed command contains the following sed script subcommands. The number in parentheses preceding
a subcommand indicates the maximum number of permissible addresses for the subcommand.
Note:
1. The Text variable accompanying the a\, c\, and i\ subcommands can continue onto more than one
line, provided all lines but the last end with a \ (backslash) to quote the new-line character.
Backslashes in text are treated like backslashes in the replacement string of an s command and can be
used to protect initial blanks and tabs against the stripping that is done on every script line. The RFile
and WFile variables must end the command line and must be preceded by exactly one blank. Each
WFile variable is created before processing begins.
2. The sed command can process up to 999 subcommands in a pattern file.
Subcommand
(1) a\
Text
(2)b[label]
(2)c\
Text
(2)d
(2)D
(2)g
(2)G
(2)h
(2)H
(1)i\
Text
(2)l
Description
Places the Text variable in output before reading the next input line.
Branches to the : command bearing the label variable. If the label variable is empty, it
branches to the end of the script.
Deletes the pattern space. With 0 or 1 address or at the end of a 2-address range,
places the Text variable in output and then starts the next cycle.
Deletes the pattern space and then starts the next cycle.
Deletes the initial segment of the pattern space through the first new-line character
and then starts the next cycle.
Replaces the contents of the pattern space with the contents of the hold space.
Appends the contents of the hold space to the pattern space.
Replaces the contents of the hold space with the contents of the pattern space.
Appends the contents of the pattern space to the hold space.
Writes the Text variable to standard output before reading the next line into the
pattern space.
Writes the pattern space to standard output showing nondisplayable characters as
4-digit hexadecimal values. Long lines are folded.
Alphabetical list of commands
363
Subcommand
(2)l
(2)n
(2)N
(2)p
(2)P
(1)q
(2)r RFile
(2)s/pattern/replacement/flags
Description
Writes the pattern space to standard output in a visually unambiguous form. The
characters \\\, \\a, \\b, \\f, \\r, \\t, and \\v are written as the corresponding
escape sequence. Non-printable characters are written as 1 three-digit octal number
(with a preceding backslash character) for each byte in the character (most
significant byte first). This format is also used for multibyte characters. This
subcommand folds long lines. A backslash followed by a new-line character
indicates the point of folding. Folding occurs at the 72nd column position. A $
(dollar sign) marks the end of each line.
Writes the pattern space to standard output if the default output is not suppressed.
It replaces the pattern space with the next line of input.
Appends the next line of input to the pattern space with an embedded new-line
character (the current line number changes). You can use this to search for patterns
that are split onto two lines.
Writes the pattern space to standard output.
Writes the initial segment of the pattern space through the first new-line character to
standard output.
Branches to the end of the script. It does not start a new cycle.
Reads the contents of the RFile variable. It places contents in output before reading
the next input line.
Substitutes the replacement string for the first occurrence of the pattern parameter in
the pattern space. Any character that is displayed after the s subcommand can
substitute for the / (slash) separator except for the space or new-line character.
The value of the flags variable must be zero or more of:
g
Substitutes all non-overlapping instances of the pattern parameter rather
than just the first one.
n
Substitutes for the n-th occurrence only of the pattern parameter.
p
Writes the pattern space to standard output if a replacement was made.
w WFile
(2)tlabel
(2)wWFile
(2)x
(2)y/pattern1/pattern2/
(2)!sed-cmd
(0):label
(1)=
(2){subcmd }
(0)
(0)#
364
Writes the pattern space to the WFile variable if a replacement was made.
Appends the pattern space to the WFile variable. If the WFile variable was
not already created by a previous write by this sed script, the sed
command creates it.
Branches to the :label variable in the script file if any substitutions were made since
the most recent reading of an input line execution of a t subcommand. If you do not
specify the label variable, control transfers to the end of the script.
Appends the pattern space to the WFile variable.
Exchanges the contents of the pattern space and the hold space.
Replaces all occurrences of characters in the pattern1 variable with the corresponding
pattern2 characters. The number of characters in the pattern1 and pattern2 variables
must be equal. The new-line character is represented by \n.
Applies the specified sed subcommand only to lines not selected by the address or
addresses.
Marks a branch point to be referenced by the b and t subcommands. This label can
be any sequence of eight or fewer bytes.
Writes the current line number to standard output as a line.
Groups subcommands enclosed in {} (braces).
Ignores an empty command.
If a # (pound sign) appears as the first character on a line of a script file, that entire
line is treated as a comment, with one exception. For the first line of a script file
only, if the character after the # is an n, the default output will be suppressed. The
rest of the line after the #n is ignored.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
Successful completion.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To perform a global change, enter:
sed
"s/happy/enchanted/g" chap1
This command sequence replaces each occurrence of the word happy found in the file chap1 with the
word enchanted. The g character at the end of the s subcommand tells the sed command to make as
many substitutions as possible on each line. Without the g character, the sed command replaces only
the first occurrence of the word happy on a line.
The sed command operates as a filter. It reads text from standard input or from the files named on
the command line (chap1 in this example), modifies this text, and writes it to standard output. Unlike
most editors, it does not replace the original file. This makes the sed command a powerful command
when used in pipelines.
2. To use the sed command as a filter in a pipeline, enter:
pr
chap2 | sed "s/Page *[0-9]*$/(&)/" | enq
This command sequence encloses the page numbers in parentheses before printing the file chap2. The
pr command puts a heading and page number at the top of each page, then the sed command puts
the page numbers in parentheses, and the enq command prints the edited listing.
The sed command pattern /Page *[0-9]*$/ matches page numbers that appear at the end of a line.
The s subcommand changes this to (&), where the & stands for the page number that was matched.
3. To display selected lines of a file, enter:
sed
-n
"/food/p" chap3
The sed -n displays each line in the file chap3 that contains the word food. Normally, the sed
command copies every line to standard output after it is edited. The -n flag stops the sed command
from doing this. You then use subcommands like p to write specific parts of the text. Without the -n
flag, this example displays all the lines in the file chap3, and it shows each line containing food twice.
4. To perform complex editing, enter:
sed
-f
script.sed
chap4
This command sequence creates a sed script file when you want to do anything complex. You can
then test and modify your script before using it. You can also reuse your script to edit other files.
Create the script file with an interactive text editor.
5. A sample sed script file:
:join
/\\$/{N
s/\\\n//
b join
}
This sed script joins each line that ends with a \ (backslash) to the line that follows it. First, the
pattern /\\$/ selects a line that ends with a \ for the group of commands enclosed in {} (braces).
The N subcommand then appends the next line, embedding a new-line character. The s/\\\n//
deletes the \ and embedded new-line character. Finally, b join branches back to the label :join to
check for a \ at the end of the newly joined line. Without the branch, the sed command writes the
joined line and reads the next one before checking for a second \.
Alphabetical list of commands
365
Note: The N subcommand causes the sed command to stop immediately if there are no more lines of
input (that is, if the N subcommand reads an end-of-file character). It does not copy the pattern space
to standard output before stopping. This means that if the last line of the input ends with a \, it is not
copied to the output.
6. To copy an existing file (oldfile) to a new file (newfile) and replace all occurrences of the
testpattern text string with the contents of the $REPL shell variable, enter:
cat oldfile | sed -e "s/testpattern/$REPL/g" | tee newfile
7. To replace all occurrences of A with a, B with b, C with c, and all occurrences of newlines with
character Z in the input file, enter:
$ sed -f command.file input.file
where command.file is the script file and input.file is the input file.
$cat command.file
y/ABC\n/abcZ/
Alternatively, the following command can also be executed for the same function:
sed "y/ABC\n/abcZ/" input.file
Related Information
The awk command and the grep command.
showmount command
Purpose
Displays a list of exported directories.
Syntax
showmount Host
Description
The showmount command displays a list of all exported directories from a specified machine in the Host
parameter.
Parameters
Host
Host name of the systems to display exported directories.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To display all exported directories on the host middelburg, type:
showmount middelburg
Related Information
The mount command and the unmount command.
366
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
shutdown command
Purpose
Ends system operation.
Syntax
shutdown [-force ] [ -restart ]
Description
The shutdown command halts the operating system. When the shut down is complete, you receive a
shutdown completion message.
Attention: Do not attempt to restart the system or turn off the system before the shutdown completion
message is displayed; otherwise, file system damage can result.
The -force flag is used to bypass the following user prompt:
"Shutting down the VIOS could affect Client Partitions. Continue [y|n]?"
Flags
-force
-restart
Begins a system shut down without a user prompt.
Restarts the system after being shut down.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Security
This command can only be run by the prime administrator (padmin).
Examples
1. To shut down the system, type the following command:
shutdown
2. To restart the system, type the following command:
shutdown -restart
3. To shut down the system and restart, without the user prompt, type the following command:
shutdown -force -restart
snap command
Purpose
Gathers system configuration information.
Syntax
snap [-general] [-dev DeviceName]
snap script1 "script2 arg1 arg2" ...
Alphabetical list of commands
367
Description
The snap command gathers system configuration information and compresses the information into a pax
file (snap.pax.Z). The file can then be transmitted to a remote system. The information gathered with the
snap command may be required to identify and resolve system problems.
At least 8 MB of temporary disk space is required to collect all system information, including contents of
the error log.
Flags
-dev OutputDevice
-general
Copies the compressed image onto the specified device.
Gathers general system information which is a subset of the system configuration
information
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To gather all system configuration information, enter the following command:
snap
The output of this command is written to the users home directory.
2. To gather general system configuration information, including the output of the lslpp -hBc command,
enter the following command :
snap -general -dev /dev/rfd0
Output is written to the /tmp/ibmsupt/general/lslpp.hBc and /tmp/ibmsupt/general/general.snap
files. The final snap output is copied to /home/<User>/snap.pax.Z. This command also writes the
system information to a removable diskette.
3. To run the scripts foo1, foo2 and foo3. where foo1 takes no argument, foo2 takes three arguments and
foo3 takes one argument, type the following"
snap
foo1 "foo2 -x -y 3" "foo3 6" foo4
Output is written to /tmp/ibmsupt/snapscripts/foo1, /tmp/ibmsupt/snapscripts/foo2 and
/tmp/ibmsupt/snapscripts/foo3 assuming the destination directory is the default, /tmp/ibmsupt.
Files
snap.pax.Z
snmp_info command
Purpose
Requests or modifies values of Management Information Base (MIB) variables managed by a Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent.
Syntax
snmp_info [-mode get | next] [-verbose] [-com Community] [-debug Level] [-host HostName] [-file
ObjectFile] -retry Tries] [-waitWaitTime ] [Variable Instance]
The following syntax is for the set option:
368
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
snmp_info -mode set [-verbose] [-com Community] [-debug Level] [-host HostName] [-file ObjectFile] -retry
Tries] [-waitWaitTime ] Variable Instance=Value
The following syntax is for the dump option:
snmp_info -mode dump[-verbose] [-com Community] [-debug Level] [-host HostName] [-file ObjectFile]
-retry Tries] [-waitWaitTime ] [Variable Instance]
Description
The snmp_info command requests or modifies values for one or more Management Information Base
(MIB) variables managed by a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent. This command may
only be issued by a user with root privileges or by a member of the system group.
If you specify the get option, the snmp_info command requests information about one or more MIB
variables from an SNMP agent.
If you specify the next option, the snmp_info command requests information from an SNMP agent about
the instances following the specified instances. The next option makes it possible to obtain MIB values
without knowledge of the instance qualifiers.
If you specify the set option, the snmp_info command modifies values for one or more MIB variables for
an SNMP agent. Only a few MIB variables are designated read-write. The agent that manages the MIB
database may take various actions as a side effect of modifying MIB variables. For example, setting the
ifAdminStatus MIB variable to 2 will normally shut down a network interface. The action taken is
determined by the implementation of the SNMP agent that manages the database.
If you specify the dump option, the snmp_info command can be used to traverse the entire MIB tree of a
given agent. If a group is passed in as the Variable parameter, the snmp_info command will traverse that
specified path of the MIB tree.
The snmp_info command has a debug facility that will dump debug information for transmitted and
received packets. The facility is enabled with the -d flag.
Flags
-com Community
-debug Level
-host HostName
-file ObjectFile
Specifies the community name to be used to query. If you do not specify this flag, the
default community name is public.
Specifies the level of I/O debug information. Use one of the following values:
0
No debug information.
1
Port bindings and the number of bytes transmitted and received.
2
Level 1 plus a hexadecimal dump of incoming and outgoing packets.
3
Level 2 plus an English version of the request and response packets.
If you do not specify this flag, the default debug level is 0.
Specifies the host name of the SNMP agent to be queried. If you do not specify this
flag, the default host name is the host name of the system on which the user is
currently logged.
Specifies the name of the objects definition file. If you do not specify this flag, the
default objects definition file name is /etc/mib.defs.
Alphabetical list of commands
369
-mode Option
Specifies the mode by which to access the MIB variables. The value can be one of the
following options:
get
Requests information about the specified MIB variables
next
Requests the instances following the specified instances
set
Modifies the specified write access MIB variables
dump
Note:
Dumps the specified section of the MIB tree
1. The option name can be specified by the minimum number of characters required to
make it unique.
-retry Tries
-verbose
-wait
2. If you do not specify this flag, the default mode is get.
Specifies the number of times the snmp_info command transmits the SNMP request to
the SNMP agent before ending with the message no SNMP response. If you do not
specify this flag, the default number of tries is 3.
Specifies that the output from the snmp_info command be displayed in verbose mode.
If you do not specify this flag, the information will not be displayed in verbose mode.
Specifies the wait time in seconds for the response from the snmpd agent. If you do not
specify this flag, the default wait time is 15 seconds.
Parameters
Value
Variable
Instance
Specifies the value to which the MIB Variable parameter is to be set. A value must be
specified for each variable. If a value is not specified, the request packet will be invalid.
Specifies the name in text format or numeric format of a specific MIB variable as
defined in the /etc/mib.defs file. If the option to the -m flag is next or dump, the
Variable parameter may be specified as a MIB group.
Specifies the instance qualifier for the MIB Variable parameter. The Instance parameter
is required if the option to the -m flag is get or set. The Instance parameter is optional
if the option to the -m flag is next or dump.
Note:
1. There should be no blank spaces in the Variable.Instance parameter sequence.
2.
If the Instance parameter is not specified, do not place a period after the Variable
parameter.
For further information, consult RFC 1213, which defines the Management Information Base (MIB) for
network management, and RFC 1157, which defines the SNMP protocol for creating requests for MIB
information and formatting responses.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
To display the current system information and snmp configuration information, type the following
command:
snmp_info -mode dump system
Related Information
The snmp_trap command and the cl_snmp command.
370
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
snmp_trap command
Purpose
The snmp_trap command generates a notification (trap) to report an event to the SNMP manager with
the specified message.
Syntax
snmp_trap [-debug] [-hostHostName] [-com Community] [-target TargetHost] [-msg message]
Description
The snmp_trap command generates a notification (trap) to report an event to the SNMP manager with
the specified message.
Flags
-host HostName
-com Community
-debug
-msg Message
-target TargetHost
Specifies to connect to the SNMP agent on the specified host. If you do not specify this
flag, the default host is the local host. Host can be an IP address or a host name.
Specifies the community name to use. This community must have been set in the
/etc/snmpdv3.conf file for SNMP version 3 file. You also have to have read-access
privilege to at least the SNMP agent running on the specified host or local host. If you
do not specify this flag, the default community name is "public".
Enables the debug facility.
Defines the message that the snmptrap command will send. This value specifies the
information the trap will hold. This information is in the text format. You must order
this flag as the last one in the list when you specify this command.
Specifies the target network-manger host to which the trap message is sent. It is
different from -host flag. If you do not specify the -host and -target flags, the trap is
sent to the VIOS SNMP agent on the local host.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
To display the current system information and snmp configuration information, type the following
command:
snmp_trap -mode hello world
Related Information
The snmp_trap command and the cl_snmp command.
snmpv3_ssw command
Purpose
Switch the symbolic links among the non-encrypted snmpdv3 agent, encrypted snmpdv3 agent, and the
snmpdv1 agent.
Syntax
snmpv3_ssw [-e | -n | -1 ]
Alphabetical list of commands
371
Description
The snmpv3_ssw command switches the symbolic links among the non-encrypted snmpdv3 agent and
snmpdv1 agent. The snmpv3_ssw command then starts the newly chosen SNMP agent. You can choose
which version of SNMP agent to run.
Flags
Switches to the encrypted version of snmpdv3 agent.
Switches to the non-encrypted version of snmpdv3 agent.
Switches to the snmpdv1 agent.
-e
-n
-1
Exit Status
Return code
Description
0
Success
1
Invalid flag, argument, or command failure
Examples
To switch to the encrypted version of snmpdv3 agent, enter the following command:
snmp3_ssw -e
startnetsvc command
Purpose
Starts the ndpd-host, telnet, ftp, xntpd, ssh, snmp, ldap, or cimserver daemon.
Syntax
startnetsvc [NetworkService][TracingSelection]
Description
The startnetsvc command starts the ndpd-host, telnet, ftp, xntpd, ssh, snmp, ldap or cimserver daemon.
By enabling the network service daemon, users can use that service to connect to the Virtual I/O Server.
372
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Parameters
NetworkService
Use the following values:
ndpd-host
Enables the ndpd-host daemon.
telnet
Enables the telnet daemon.
ftp
Enables the ftp daemon.
xntpd
Enables the xntpd daemon.
ssh
Enables the ssh daemon.
snmp
Enables the snmp daemon.
ldap
Enables the ldap daemon.
cimserver
Enables the cimserver daemon.
ALL
TraceSelection
Enables all service daemons.
Specifying ALL starts all services, but does not enable the tracelog or errorlog
options.
Use the following values:
tracelog
Sends CLI tracing information to the system log.
Attention: Enabling the tracelog or errorlog can make the system log grow
quickly.
errorlog
Sends system error log information to the system log.
Attention: Enabling the tracelog or errorlog can make the system log grow
quickly.
Note: A padmin user can use the vi command to view files sent to the system log.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To start the telnet daemon, type the following command:
startnetsvc telnet
2. To start the ftp daemon, type the following command:
startnetsvc ftp
3. To start the tracelog option, type the following command:
startnetsvc tracelog
4. To start all service daemons, type the following command:
startnetsvc ALL
5. To start the ndpd-host daemon, type the following command:
startnetsvc ndpd-host
This command produces output similar to the following:
0513-059 The ndpd-host Subsystem has been started. Subsystem PID is 356522.
Alphabetical list of commands
373
Related Information
The mktcpip command, the hostname command, the stopnetsvc command, the cfglnagg command, the
netstat command, the entstat command, the cfgnamesrv command, the hostmap command, the
traceroute command, the ping command, the optimizenet command, and the vi command.
startsvc command
Purpose
Starts the agent or service that is specified by the given name.
Syntax
startsvc AgentName
Description
The startsvc command starts the specified agent or service. Use the lssvc command to obtain a list of
valid agent or service names. The agent determines the operations that occur while the start command is
running. If you attempt to restart an agent that is already started, you will receive a message indicating
that the agent has already been started.
Note: For the IBM TotalStorage Productivity Center (TPC) agent, the lssvc command only displays the
valid agent that is used by the cfgsvc command during configuration.
Agent or service names
The following agents can be managed by the Virtual I/O Server .
DIRECTOR_agent
ITM_premium
Starts the IBM Systems Director agent.
Starts the specified IBM Tivoli Monitoring agent.
ITM_cec
The ITM_premium and ITM_cec agents are IBM Tivoli Monitoring agents. These
agents provide system information including I/O virtualization mappings and system
utilization.
Starts the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager agent.
Starts the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager agent.
Starts the TotalStorage Productivity Center agent.
TSM_base
ITUAM_base
TPC
perfmgr
ipsec_tunnel
The TPC_fabric and TPC_data agents are valid IBM TotalStorage Productivity Center
agents for the startsvc command.
Starts the performance management data collector agent.
Creates secure tunnels between local and remote Virtual I/O Servers that are
configured with the cfgsvc command.
Note: The clic.rte file set has to be installed before you can create tunnels.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To start the ITM_premium agent, type the following command:
startsvc ITM_premium
2. To start the ITUAM base agent, type the following command:
startsvc ITUAM_base
374
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
3. To start the perfmgr agent, type the following command:
startsvc perfmgr
4. To start secure tunnels, type the following command:
startsvc ipsec_tunnel
Related Information
The lssvc command, the cfgsvc command, and the stopsvc command.
For more information about the various agents, see the following information:
v
v
v
v
IBM Tivoli software and the Virtual I/O Server
Configuring the IBM Tivoli agents and clients on the Virtual I/O Server
IBM Systems Director software
Configuring the IBM Systems Director agent
startsysdump command
Purpose
Starts a kernel dump to the primary dump device.
Syntax
startsysdump
Description
The startsysdump command provides a command line interface to start a kernel dump to the primary
dump device. Any previous kernel dumps will be erased before the dump is created. During a kernel
dump, the following values can be displayed on the three-digit terminal display as follows. The user will
be required the run the snap command to obtain the system dump.
0c0
Indicates that the dump completed successfully.
0c1
Indicates that an I/O occurred during the dump.
0c2
Indicates that the dump is in progress.
0c4
Indicates that the dump is too small.
0c5
Indicates a dump internal error.
0c6
Prompts you to make the secondary dump device ready.
0c7
Indicates that the dump process is waiting for a response from the remote host.
0c8
Indicates that the dump was disabled. In this case, no dump device was designated in
the system configuration object for dump devices. The startsysdump command halts,
and the system continues running.
0c9
Indicates that a dump is in progress.
0cc
Indicates that the system switched to the secondary dump device after attempting a
dump to the primary device.
Note: When the dump completes, the system reboots.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Alphabetical list of commands
375
Examples
1. To start a kernel dump, type:
startsysdump
starttrace command
Purpose
Records selected system events.
Syntax
starttrace [ -event Event[, Event ] ...]
Description
The starttrace command starts the trace daemon which configures a trace session and starts the collection
of system events. The data collected by the trace function is recorded in the trace log. A report from the
trace log can be generated with the cattracerpt command.
Flags
-event Event[,Event]
Specifies the user-defined events for which you want to collect trace data. The Event
list items should be separated by commas.
Note: The following events are used to determine the pid, the cpuid and the exec path
name in the cattracerpt report:
106 DISPATCH
10C DISPATCH IDLE PROCESS
134 EXEC SYSTEM CALL
139 FORK SYSTEM CALL
465 KTHREAD CREATE
If any of these events is missing, the information reported by the cattracerpt command
will be incomplete. When using the -event flag, you should include all these events in
the Event list.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To trace hook 234 and the hooks that will allow you to see the process names, enter:
starttrace -event 234,106,10C,134,139,465
Related Information
The stoptrace command and the cattracerpt command.
stopnetsvc command
Purpose
Disables the ndpd-host, telnet, ftp, xntpd, ssh, snmp, ldap, or cimserver daemon.
376
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Syntax
stopnetsvc [NetworkService][TracingSelection]
Description
The stopnetsvc command stops the ndpd-host, telnet, ftp, xntpd, ssh, snmp, ldap, or cimserver daemon.
By disabling a service daemon, users can prevent anyone from being able to connect through the
associated network service. The tracelog or errorlog options stop sending CLI tracing information or
system error log information to the system log.
Parameters
NetworkService
The following values can be used:
ndpd-host
Disables the ndpd-host daemon.
telnet
Disables the telnet daemon.
ftp
Disables the ftp daemon.
xntpd
Disables the xntpd daemon.
ssh
Disables the ssh daemon.
snmp
Disables the snmp daemon.
ldap
Disables the ldap daemon.
cimserver
Disables the cimserver daemon.
Disables all service daemons, but does not disable the tracelog or errorlog
option.
The following values can be used:
ALL
TraceSelection
tracelog
Stops sending CLI tracing information to the system log.
errorlog
Stops sending system error log information to the system log.
Note: A padmin user can use the vi command to view files sent to the system log.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To disable the telnet daemon, type the following command:
stopnetsvc telnet
2. To disable the ftp daemon, type the following command:
stopnetsvc ftp
3. To disable the ndpd-host daemon, type the following command:
stopnetsvc ndpd-host
This command produces output similar to the following:
0513-044 The /usr/sbin/ndpd-host Subsystem was requested to stop.
4. To stop the tracelog option, type the following command:
stopnetsvc tracelog
Alphabetical list of commands
377
5. To disable all service daemons, type the following command:
stopnetsvc ALL
Related Information
The mktcpip command, the hostname command, the startnetsvc command, the cfglnagg command, the
netstat command, the entstat command, the cfgnamesrv command, the hostmap command, the
traceroute command, the ping command, the optimizenet command, and the vi command.
stopsvc command
Purpose
Stops the agent or service that is specified by the given name.
Syntax
stopsvc AgentName
Description
The stopsvc command stops the specified agent or service. Use the lssvc command to obtain a list of
valid agent and service names. The agent determines the operations that occur during the stop command.
If you attempt to stop an agent or service that is already stopped, you will receive a message indicating
that the agent or service has already been stopped.
Note: For the IBM TotalStorage Productivity Center (TPC) agent, the lssvc command only displays the
valid agent used by the cfgsvc command during configuration.
Agent or service names
The following agents can be managed by the Virtual I/O Server .
DIRECTOR_agent
ITM_premium
Stops the IBM Systems Director agent.
Stops the specified IBM Tivoli Monitoring agent.
ITM_cec
TSM_base
ITUAM_base
TPC
The ITM_premium and ITM_cec agents are IBM Tivoli Monitoring agents. These
agents provide system information including I/O virtualization mappings and system
utilization.
Stops the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager agent.
Stops the IBM Tivoli Usage and Accounting Manager agent.
Stops the TotalStorage Productivity Center agent.
perfmgr
ipsec_tunnel
The TPC_fabric and TPC_data agents are valid IBM TotalStorage Productivity Center
agents for the stopsvc command.
Stops the performance management data collector agent.
Deactivates and deletes the secure tunnels.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To stop the TPC_data agent, type the following command:
stopsvc TPC_data
378
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
2. To stop the TPC_fabric agent, type the following command:
stopsvc TPC_fabric
3. To stop the DIRECTOR_agent agent, type the following command:
stopsvc DIRECTOR_agent
4. To stop the ITM_premium agent, type the following command:
stopsvc ITM_premium
5. To stop the ITUAM_base agent, type the following command:
stopsvc ITUAMM_base
6. To stop the perfmgr agent, type the following command:
stopsvc perfmgr
7. To stop and delete secure tunnels, type the following command:
stopsvc ipsec_tunnel
Related Information
The lssvc command, the cfgsvc command, and the startsvc command.
For more information about the various agents, see the following information:
v IBM Tivoli software and the Virtual I/O Server
v Configuring the IBM Tivoli agents and clients on the Virtual I/O Server
v IBM Systems Director software
v Configuring the IBM Systems Director agent
stoptrace command
Purpose
Stops the trace function.
Syntax
stoptrace
Description
The stoptrace command ends a trace session.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To end a trace session, type:
stoptrace
Related Information
The starttrace command and the cattracerpt command.
Alphabetical list of commands
379
stty command
Purpose
Sets, resets, and reports workstation operating parameters.
Syntax
stty [ -a ] [ -g ] [ Options ]
Description
The stty command sets certain I/O options for the device that is the current standard input. This
command writes output to the device that is the current standard output.
This version of the operating system uses the standard interface to control the terminals, maintaining a
compatibility with POSIX and BSD interfaces. The stty command supports both POSIX and BSD
compliant options, but the usage of POSIX options is strongly recommended. A list of obsolete BSD
options, with the corresponding POSIX options, is also provided.
When you redirect standard input from a tty device by typing:
stty -a </dev/ttyx
the stty command (POSIX) will hang while waiting for the open() of that tty until the RS-232 carrier
detect signal has been asserted. Exceptions to this rule occur if the clocal or forcedcd (128-port only)
option is set.
Flags
Writes the current state of all option settings to standard output.
Writes option settings to standard output in a form usable by another stty command.
-a
-g
Options
The stty command supports following categories of options:
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
“Control modes”
“Input modes” on page 381
“Output modes” on page 382
“Local modes” on page 382
“Hardware flow control modes” on page 383
“Control assignments” on page 383
“Combination modes” on page 384
v “Window size” on page 385
v “Obsolete options” on page 385
Control modes
Control mode
clocal
-clocal
cread
-cread
cstopb
380
Description
Assumes a line without modem control.
Assumes a line with modem control.
Enables the receiver.
Disables the receiver.
Selects 2 stop bits per character.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Control mode
-cstopb
cs5, cs6, cs7, cs8
hup, hupcl
-hup, -hupcl
parenb
-parenb
parodd
-parodd
0
speed
ispeed speed
ospeed speed
Description
Selects 1 stop bit per character.
Selects character size.
Hangs up dial-up connection on the last close.
Does not hang up dial-up connection on the last close.
Enables parity generation and detection.
Disables parity generation and detection.
Selects odd parity.
Selects even parity.
Hangs up phone line immediately.
Sets the workstation input and output speeds to the specified speed number of
bits per second. All speeds are not supported by all hardware interfaces. Possible
values for speed are: 50, 75, 110, 134, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 19.2, 38400, 38.4, exta, and extb.
Note: exta, 19200, and 19.2 are synonyms; extb, 38400, and 38.4 are synonyms.
Sets the workstation input speed to the specified speed number of bits per
second. All speeds are not supported by all hardware interfaces, and all
hardware interfaces do not support this option. Possible values for speed are the
same as for the speed option.
Sets the workstation output speed to the specified speed number of bits per
second. All speeds are not supported by all hardware interfaces, and all
hardware interfaces do not support this option. Possible values for speed are the
same as for the speed option.
Input modes
Input mode
brkint
-brkint
icrnl
-icrnl
ignbrk
-ignbrk
igncr
-igncr
ignpar
-ignpar
inlcr
-inlcr
inpck
-inpck
istrip
-istrip
iuclc
-iuclc
ixany
-ixany
ixoff
-ixoff
ixon
-ixon
imaxbel
-imaxbel
Description
Signals INTR on break.
Does not signal INTR on break.
Maps CR to NL on input.
Does not map CR to NL on input.
Ignores BREAK on input.
Does not ignore BREAK on input.
Ignores CR on input.
Does not ignore CR on input.
Ignores parity errors.
Does not ignore parity errors.
Maps NL to CR on input.
Does not map NL to CR on input.
Enables parity checking.
Disables parity checking.
Strips input characters to 7 bits.
Does not strip input characters to 7 bits.
Maps uppercase alphabetic characters to lowercase.
Does not map uppercase alphabetic characters to lowercase.
Allows any character to restart output.
Allows only the START (the Ctrl-Q key sequence) to restart output.
Sends START/STOP characters when the input queue is nearly empty/full.
Does not send START/STOP characters.
Enables START/STOP output control. Once START/STOP output control has
been enabled, you can pause output to the workstation by pressing the Ctrl-S
key sequence and resume output by pressing the Ctrl-Q key sequence.
Disables START/STOP output control.
Echoes the BEL character and discards the last input character if input overflows.
Discards all input if input overflows.
Alphabetical list of commands
381
Input mode
parmrk
-parmrk
Description
Marks parity errors.
Does not mark parity errors.
Output modes
Output mode
bs0, bs1
cr0, cr1, cr2, cr3
ff0, ff1
nl0, nl1
ofill
-ofill
ocrnl
-ocrnl
olcuc
-olcuc
onlcr
-onlcr
onlret
-onlret
onocr
-onocr
opost
-opost
ofdel
-ofdel
tab0, tab1, tab2
tab3
vt0, vt1
Description
Selects style of delay for backspaces (bs0 siginifes no delay).
Selects style of delay for CR characters (cr0 siginifes no delay).
Selects style of delay for form feeds (ff0 siginifes no delay).
Selects style of delay for NL characters (nl0 siginifes no delay).
Uses fill characters for delays.
Uses timing for delays.
Maps CR characters to NL characters.
Does not map CR characters to NL characters.
Maps lowercase alphabetic characters to uppercase on output.
Does not map lowercase alphabetic characters to uppercase on output.
Maps NL characters to CR-NL characters.
Does not map NL characters to CR-NL characters.
On the terminal, NL performs the CR function.
On the terminal, NL does not perform the CR function.
Does not output CR characters at column zero.
Outputs CR characters at column zero.
Processes output.
Does not process output; that is, ignores all other output options.
Uses DEL characters for fill characters.
Uses NUL characters for fill characters.
Selects style of delay for horizontal tabs (tab0 siginifes no delay).
Expands tab character to variable number of spaces.
Selects style of delay for vertical tabs (vt0 siginifes no delay).
Local modes
Local mode
echo
-echo
echoctl
-echoctl
echoe
-echoe
echok
-echok
echoke
-echoke
echonl
-echonl
echoprt
-echoprt
icanon
382
Description
Echoes every character typed.
Does not echo characters.
Echoes control characters as ^X (Ctrl-X), where X is the character given by
adding 100 octal to the code of the control character.
Does not echo control characters as ^X (Ctrl-X).
Echoes the ERASE character as the "backspace space backspace" string.
Note: This mode does not keep track of column position, so you can get
unexpected results when erasing such things as tabs and escape sequences.
Does not echo the ERASE character, just backspace.
Echoes a NL character after a KILL character.
Does not echo a NL character after a KILL character.
Echoes the KILL character by erasing each character on the output line.
Just echoes the KILL character.
Echoes the NL character.
Does not echo the NL character.
Echoes erased characters backwards with / (slash) and \ (backslash).
Does not echo erased characters backwards with / (slash) and \ (backslash).
Enables canonical input (canonical input allows input-line editing with the
ERASE and KILL characters).
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Local mode
-icanon
iexten
Description
Disables canonical input.
Specifies that implementation-defined functions shall be recognized from the
input data. Recognition of the following control characters requires iexten to be
set: eol2, dsusp, reprint, discard, werase, lnext. The functions associated with
these modes also require iexten to be set: imaxbel, echoke, echoprt, and echoctl.
Specifies that implementation-defined functions shall not be recognized from the
input data.
Enables the checking of characters against the special control characters INTR,
SUSP and QUIT.
Disables the checking of characters against the special control characters INTR,
SUSP and QUIT.
Does not clear buffers after INTR, SUSP, or QUIT control characters.
Clears buffers after INTR, SUSP, or QUIT control characters.
Causes any input that is pending after a switch from raw to canonical mode to
be re-input the next time a read operation becomes pending or the next time
input arrives. Pending is an internal state bit.
No text is pending.
Signals SIGTOU for background output.
Does not signal SIGTOU for background output.
Echoes uppercase characters on input, and displays uppercase characters on
output with a preceding \ (backslash).
Does not echo uppercase characters on input.
-iexten
isig
-isig
noflsh
-noflsh
pending
-pending
tostop
-tostop
xcase
-xcase
Hardware flow control modes
These options are extensions to the X/Open Portability Guide Issue 4 standard.
Extension
cdxon
-cdxon
ctsxon
-ctsxon
dtrxoff
-dtrxoff
rtsxoff
-rtsxoff
Description
Enables CD hardware flow control mode on output.
Disables CD hardware flow control mode on output.
Enables CTS hardware flow control mode on output.
Disables CTS hardware flow control mode on output.
Enables DTR hardware flow control mode on input.
Disables DTR hardware flow control mode on input.
Enables RTS hardware flow control mode on input.
Disables RTS hardware flow control mode on input.
Control assignments
To assign a control character to a character string, type:
stty Control String
where the Control parameter may be the INTR, QUIT, ERASE, KILL, EOF, EOL, EOL2, START, STOP,
SUSP, DSUSP, REPRINT, DISCARD, WERASE, LNEXT, MIN, or TIME character. (Use the MIN and TIME
characters with the -icanon option.)
Note: The values for MIN and TIME are interpreted as integer values, not as character values.
The String parameter may be any single character such as c. An example of this control assignment is:
stty STOP c
Another way of assigning control characters is to enter a character sequence composed of a \^
(backslash, caret) followed by a single character. If the single character after the ^ (caret) is one of the
characters listed in the ^c (caret c) column of the following table, the corresponding control character
Alphabetical list of commands
383
value will be set. For example, to assign the DEL control character by using the ? (question mark)
character, type the string \^? (backslash, caret, question mark), as in:
stty ERASE \^?
^c
Value
a, A
<SOH>
b, B
<STX>
c, C
<ETX>
d, D
<EOT>
e, E
<ENQ>
f, F
<ACK>
g, G
<BEL>
h, H
<BS>
i, I
<HT>
j, J
<LF>
k, K
<VT>
l, L
<FF>
m, M
<CR>
n, N
<SO>
o, O
<SI>
p, P
<DLE>
q, Q
<DC1>
r, R
<DC2>
s, S
<DC3>
t, T
<DC4>
u, U
<NAK>
v, V
<SYN>
w, W
<ETB>
x, X
<CAN>
y, Y
<EM>
z, Z
<SUB>
[
<ESC>
\
<FS>
]
<GS>
^
<RS>
_
<US>
?
<DEL>
@
<NUL>
Combination modes
Combination mode
cooked
384
Description
See the -raw option.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Combination mode
ek
Description
Sets ERASE and KILL characters to the Ctrl-H and Ctrl-U key sequences,
respectively.
Enables parenb and cs7.
Disables parenb and sets cs8.
Sets xcase, iuclc, and olcuc. Used for workstations with uppercase characters only.
Sets -xcase, -iuclc, and -olcuc.
Sets -icrnl and -onlcr.
Sets icrnl, onlcr, -inlcr, -igncr, -ocrnl, and -onlret.
Enables parenb, cs7, and parodd.
Disables parenb and sets cs8.
See the evenp option.
See the -evenp option.
Resets parameters to reasonable values.
Allows raw mode input (no input processing, such as erase, kill, or interrupt);
parity bit passed back.
Allows canonical input mode.
Preserves tabs.
Replaces tabs with spaces when printing.
evenp
-evenp
lcase, LCASE
-lcase, -LCASE
nl
-nl
oddp
-oddp
parity
-parity
sane
raw
-raw
tabs
-tabs, tab3
Window size
Window size
cols n, columns n
rows n
size
Description
The terminal (window) size is recorded as having n columns.
The terminal (window) size is recorded as having n rows.
Prints the terminal (window) sizes to standard output (first rows and then
columns).
Obsolete options
The following BSD options are supported by the stty command. For each of them, the recommended
POSIX option is given.
Option
all
crt
crtbs
crterase
-crterase
crtkill
-crtkill
ctlecho
-ctlecho
decctlq
-decctlq
even
-even
everything
litout
-litout
odd
-odd
pass8
-pass8
Description
Use the stty -a command to display all current settings.
Use the sane option to reset parameters to reasonable values.
Use the -echoe option.
Use the echoe option.
Use the -echoe option.
Use the echoke option.
Use the echok and -echoke options.
Use the echoctl option.
Use the -echoctl option.
Use the -ixany option.
Use the ixany option.
Use the evenp option.
Use the -evenp option.
Use the stty -a command to display all current settings.
Use the -opost option.
Use the opost option.
Use the oddp option.
Use the -oddp option.
Use the -istrip option.
Use the istrip option.
Alphabetical list of commands
385
Option
prterase
speed
tandem
-tandem
Description
Use the echoprt option.
Use the stty command to display current settings.
Use the ixoff option.
Use the -ixoff option.
Examples
1. To display a short listing of your workstation configuration, type:
stty
This lists settings that differ from the defaults.
2. To display a full listing of your workstation configuration, type:
stty -a
3. To enable a key sequence that stops listings from scrolling off the screen, type:
stty ixon ixany
This sets ixon mode, which lets you stop runaway listing by pressing the Ctrl-S key sequence. The
ixany flag allows you to resume the listing by pressing any key. The normal workstation
configuration includes the ixon and ixany flags, which allows you to stop a listing with the Ctrl-S key
sequence that only the Ctrl-Q key sequence will restart.
4. To reset the configuration after it has been messed up, type:
Ctrl-J stty
sane Ctrl-J
Press the Ctrl-J key sequence before and after the command instead of the Enter key. The system
usually recognizes the Ctrl-J key sequence when the parameters that control Enter key processing are
messed up.
Sometimes the information displayed on the screen may look strange, or the system will not respond
when you press the Enter key. This can happen when you use the stty command with parameters that
are incompatible or that do things you don't understand. It can also happen when a screen-oriented
application ends abnormally and does not have a chance to reset the workstation configuration.
Entering the stty sane command sets a reasonable configuration, but it may differ slightly from your
normal configuration.
5. To save and restore the terminal's configuration:
OLDCONFIG=`stty -g`
stty -echo
echo "Enter password: \c"
read PASSWD
stty $OLDCONFIG
# save configuration
# do not display password
# get the password
# restore configuration
This command saves the workstation's configuration, turns off echoing, reads a password, and
restores the original configuration.
Entering the stty -echo command turns off echoing, which means that the password does not appear
on the screen when you type it at the keyboard. This action has nothing to do with the echo
command, which displays a message on the screen.
File
/usr/bin/stty
386
Contains the stty command.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
su command
Purpose
Changes the user ID that is associated with a session.
Syntax
su [-] [Name [Argument...]]
Description
The su command changes user credentials to those of the root user or to the user specified by the Name
parameter, and then initiates a new session.
Any arguments, such as flags or parameters, that are specified by the Arguments parameter must relate
to the login shell defined for the user specified by the Name parameter. These arguments are passed to
the specified user's login shell. For example, if the login shell for user Fred is /usr/bin/rksh.
The following functions are performed by the su command:
account checking
Validates the user account to be certain it exists, that it is enabled for the su command, that the
current user is in a group permitted to switch to this account with the su command, and that it
can be used from the current controlling terminal.
user authentication
Validates the user's identity, using the system-defined primary authentication methods for the
user. If a password has expired, the user must supply a new password.
credentials establishment
Establishes initial user credentials, using the values in the user database. These credentials define
the user's access rights and accountability on the system.
session initiation
If the - flag is specified, the su command initializes the user environment from the values in the
user database and the /etc/environment file. When the - flag is not used, the su command does
not change the directory.
These functions are performed in the sequence shown. If one function is unsuccessful, the succeeding
functions are not done.
To restore the previous session, type exit or press the Ctrl-D key sequence. This action ends the shell
called by the su command and returns you to the previous shell, user ID, and environment.
Each time the su command is executed, an entry is made in the /var/adm/sulog and
/home/ios/logs/sulog file. Both log files record the following information: date, time, system name, and
login name. Both log files also records whether or not the login attempt was successful: a plus sign
indicates a successful login, and a minus sign indicates an unsuccessful login.
Note: Successful use of the su command resets the unsuccessful login count attribute in the
/etc/security/lastlog file only if the user's rlogin and login attributes are both set to false in
/etc/security/user. Otherwise, the su command does not reset the unsuccessful login count, because the
administrator often uses the su command to fix user account problems. The user is able to reset the
attribute through a local or remote login.
Alphabetical list of commands
387
Flags
Specifies that the process environment is to be set as if the user had logged in to the
system using the login command.
-
Name
Arguments
Tip: Nothing in the current environment is propagated to the new shell.
Specifies user ID.
Specifies the clear text password for the bindDN that is used to bind to the LDAP
server.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Files
/home/ios/logs/sulog
Contains the su command log files.
Note: A padmin user can use the vi command to view log files.
Examples
To change the user ID associated to a session, type the following command:
su - bob
Related Information
The vi command.
svmon command
Purpose
Captures and analyzes a snapshot of virtual memory.
Syntax
Global Report
svmon [-G [-i Intvl [ NumIntvl ][-z]]
Process Report
svmon[-P [pid1...pidn] [-r] [-u||-g|-v] [-ns] [-wfc] [-q[s|m|L|S]] [-t Count] [ -i Intvl [NumIntvl] ] [-l] [-j]
[-z] [-m] ]
Segment Report
svmon [-S [sid1...sidn] [-r] [-u|-P|-g|-v] [-ns] [-wfc] [-g [s|m|L|S]] [-t Count] [ -i Intvl [NumIntvl] ] [-l]
[-j] [-z] [-m] ]
Detailed Report
svmon [-D sid1...sidn [-b] [-q [s|m|L|S]] [ -i Intvl [NumIntvl] ][-z]]
Framed Report
388
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
svmon [-F [fr1...frn] [-q [s|m|L|S]] [-i Intvl [NumIntvl] ][-z]] ]
Command Report
svmon [-C cmd1...cmdn [-r] [-u|-p|-g|-v] [-ns] [-wfc] [-q [s|m|L|S]] [-t Count] [ -i Intvl [NumIntvl] ] [-d]
[-l] [-j] [-z] [-m] ]
User Report
svmon [-U [lognm1...lognmn] [-r] [-u|-p|-g|-v] [-ns] [-wfc] [-t Count] [ -i Intvl [NumIntvl] ] [-d] [-l] [-j] [-z]
[-m] ]
Workload Management Class Report
svmon [-W [class1...classn] [-e] [-r]] [-u|-p|-g|-v] [-ns] [-wfc] [-q [s|m|L|S]] [-t Count] [-i Intvl [NumIntvl]
] [-d] [-l] [-j] [-z] [-m] ]
Workload Management Tier Report
svmon [-T [tier1...tiern] [-a superclass] [-x] -e [-r] [-u|-p|-g|-v] [-ns] [-wfc] [-q [s|m|L|S]] [-t Count] [ -i
Intvl [NumIntvl] ] [-d] [-l] [-j] [-z] [-m] ]
Description
Flags
If no command line flag is given, then the -G flag is the default.
-a SupClassName
-b
-CCommand1...CommandN
-d
-DSID1...SIDN
-e
-f
-F[Frame1...FrameN]
-g
-G
Restricts the scope to the subclasses of the SupClassName class parameter (in
the Tier report -T). The parameter is a superclass name. No list of class is
supported.
Shows the status of the reference and modified bits of all the displayed
frames (detailed report -D). When shown, the reference bit of the frame is
reset. When used with the -i flag, it detects which frames are accessed
between each interval.
Note: Use this flag with caution because of its impact on performance.
Displays memory usage statistics for the processes running the command
name Commandnm1...CommandnmN. Commandnm is a string. It is the exact
basename of an executable file.
Displays for a given entity, the memory statistics of the processes belonging
to the entity (user name or command name).
Displays memory-usage statistics for segments SID1...SIDN, and a detail
status of all frames of each segment. Segment ids specified must be of
primary segments.
Displays the memory usage statistics of the subclasses of the Class parameter
in the Workload Class report -W and in the Tier report -T. The class
parameter of -W or -a needs to be a superclass name.
Indicates that only persistent segments (files) are to be included in the
statistics. By default all segments are analyzed.
Displays the status of frames Frame1...FrameN including the segments to
which they belong. If no list of frames is supplied, the percentage of memory
used displays.
Indicates that the information to be displayed is sorted in decreasing order by
the total number of pages reserved or used on paging space. This flag, in
conjunction with the segment report, shifts the non-working segment at the
end of the sorted list
Displays a global report.
Alphabetical list of commands
389
-i Interval [NumIntervals]
-j
-l
Instructs the svmon command to display statistics repetitively. Statistics are
collected and printed every Interval seconds. NumIntervals is the number of
repetitions; if not specified, svmon runs until user interruption, Ctrl-C.
Note: It may take a few seconds to collect statistics for some options. The
observed interval may be larger than the specified interval.
Shows, for each persistent segment, the file path referred.
Note: This flag should be used with caution because of its potential
performance impacts (especially with svmon -S).
Shows, for each displayed segment, the list of process identifiers that use the
segment and, according to the type of report, the entity name (login,
command, tier, or class) to which the process belongs. For special segments, a
label is displayed instead of the list of process identifiers.
System segment
This label is displayed for segments that are flagged system.
Unused segment
This label is displayed for segments which are not used by any
existing processes. For example, persistent segments relative to files
no longer in usage.
-m
-n
-s
-p
-P [PID1..PIDN]
-q [small | Large ]
-r
-S [SID1...SIDN ]
-t Count
-T [Tier1...TierN]
-u
-U [LogName1...LogNameN ]
390
Shared library text
This label is displayed for segments that contain text of shared
library, and that may be used by most of the processes (for example,
libc.a). This is to prevent the display of a long list of processes.
Displays information about source segment and mapping segment when a
segment is mapping a source segment. The default is to display only
information about the mapping segment.
Indicates that only non-system segments are to be included in the statistics.
By default, all segments are analyzed.
Indicates that only system segments are to be included in the statistics. By
default, all segments are analyzed.
Indicates that the information to be displayed is sorted in decreasing order by
the total number of pages pinned.
Displays memory usage statistics for process PID1...PIDN. PID is a decimal
value. If no list of process IDs (PIDs) is supplied, memory usage statistics are
displayed for all active processes.
Filters results regarding whether they deal with pages of the requested size or
not. The requested page size is specified through the option sub-argument.
4KB pages are specified with s and 16MB pages with Large. If no
sub-argument is specified, the default is 16MB pages (Large). Metrics per
page size are also displayed.
Displays the ranges within the segment pages which have been allocated. A
working segment may have two ranges because pages are allocated by
starting from both ends and moving towards the middle.
Displays memory-usage statistics for segments SID1...SIDN. SID is a
hexadecimal value. Segment IDs specified must be of primary segments. If no
list of segment IDs (SIDs) is supplied, memory usage statistics are displayed
for all defined segments.
Displays memory usage statistics for the top Count object to be printed
Displays memory usage statistics of all the classes of the tier numbers
Tier1...TierN. If no list of tier is supplied, memory usage statistics displayed
for all the defined tiers.
Indicates that the information to be displayed is sorted in decreasing order by
the total number of pages in real memory. It is the default sorting criteria if
none of the following flags are present: -p, -g and -v.
Displays memory usage statistics for the login name LogName1...LogNameN.
LogName is a string, it is an exact login name. If no list of login identifier is
supplied, memory usage statistics are displayed for all defined login
identifiers.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Indicates that the information to be displayed is sorted in decreasing order by
the total number of pages in virtual space. This flag, in conjunction with the
segment report, shifts the non-working segment at the end of the sorted list.
Indicates that only working segments are to be included in the statistics. By
default all segments are analyzed.
Displays memory usage statistics for the workload management class
Clnm1...ClnmN. Clnm is a string. It is the exact name of a class. For a subclass,
the name should have the form superclassname.subclassname. If no list of class
name is supplied, memory usage statistics display for all defined class names.
Indicates that only client segments are to be included in the statistics. By
default, all segments are analyzed.
Displays memory usage statistics for the segments for every class of a tier in
the Tier report -T.
Displays the maximum memory size dynamically allocated by svmon during
its execution.
-v
-w
-W [ Clnm1...ClnmN ]
-c
-x
-z
Examples
To print out global statistics, type: :
svmon -G
memory
pg space
size
262144
393216
pin
in use
work
52690
81741
inuse
99728
706
pers
0
0
free
162416
pin
52690
virtual
81741
clnt
0
17987
Related Information
Logical volume storage and device management
syncvg command
Purpose
Synchronizes logical volume copies that are not current.
Syntax
syncvg { -lv | -pv | -vg } Name ...
Description
The syncvg command synchronizes the physical partitions, which are copies of the original physical
partition, that are not current. The syncvg command can be used with logical volumes, physical volumes,
or volume groups, with the Name parameter representing the logical volume name, physical volume
name, or volume group name.
Unless disabled, the copies within a volume group are synchronized automatically when the volume
group is activated by the activatevg command.
Note: For the sycnvg command to be successful, at least one good copy of the logical volume should be
accessible, and the physical volumes that contains this copy should be in ACTIVE state.
The syncvg command will check for the NUM_PARALLEL_LPS environment variable. The value of
NUM_PARALLEL_LPS will be used to set the number of logical partitions to be synchronized in parallel.
Alphabetical list of commands
391
Flags
Specifies that the Name parameter represents a logical volume device name.
Specifies that the Name parameter represents a physical volume device name.
Specifies that the Name parameter represents a volume group device name.
-lv
-pv
-vg
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To synchronize the copies on physical volumes hdisk04 and hdisk05, type:
syncvg -pv hdisk04 hdisk05
2. To synchronize the copies on volume groups vg04 and vg05, type:
syncvg -vg vg04 vg05
Related Information
The mkvg command, the chvg command, the extendvg command, the lsvg command, the mirrorios
command, the unmirrorios command, the activatevg command, the deactivatevg command, the
importvg command, the exportvg command, and the reducevg command.
sysstat command
Purpose
Displays a summary of current system activity.
Syntax
sysstat [ -long | -short ] [ User]
Description
The sysstat command provides the following information: time of day, amount of time since last system
startup, number of users logged in and number of processes running.
Flags
Prints the summary in long form. This is the default
Prints the time of day, amount of time since last system startup, number of Users
logged in and number of processes running.
-long
-short
Parameters
User
Specify an existing user name.
392
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
tail command
Purpose
Displays the last few lines of a file.
Syntax
Standard Syntax
tail [ -f ] [ -c Number | -n Number | -m Number | -b Number | -k Number ] [ File ]
To Display Lines in Reverse Order
tail [ -r ] [ -n Number ] [ File ]
Description
The tail command writes the file specified by the File parameter to standard output beginning at a
specified point. If no file is specified, standard input is used. The Number variable specifies how many
units to write to standard output. The value for the Number variable can be a positive or negative integer.
If the value is preceded by + (plus sign), the file is written to standard output starting at the specified
number of units from the beginning of the file. If the value is preceded by - (minus sign), the file is
written to standard output starting at the specified number of units from the end of the file. If the value
is not preceded by + (plus sign) or - (minus sign), the file is read starting at the specified number of units
from the end of the file.
The type of unit used by the Number variable to determine the starting point for the count is determined
by the -b, -c, -k, -m, or -n flag. If one of these flags is not specified, the tail command reads the last ten
lines of the specified file and writes them to standard output. This is the same as entering -n 10 at the
command line.
The -m flag provides consistent results in both single- and double-byte character environments. The -c
flag should be used with caution when the input is a text file containing multibyte characters, because
output can be produced that does not start on a character boundary.
Flags
-b Number
-c Number
-f
-k Number
-m Number
-n Number
-r
Reads the specified file beginning at the 512-byte block location indicated by the Number variable.
Reads the specified file beginning at the byte location indicated by the Number variable.
If the input file is a regular file or if the File parameter specifies a FIFO (first-in-first-out), the tail
command does not terminate after the last specified unit of the input file has been copied, but
continues to read and copy additional units from the input file as they become available. If no File
parameter is specified and standard input is a pipe, the -f flag is ignored. The tail -f command can
be used to monitor the growth of a file being written by another process.
Reads the specified file beginning at the 1KB block location indicated by the Number variable.
Reads the specified file beginning at the multibyte character location indicated by the Number
variable. Using this flag provides consistent results in both single- and double-byte
character-code-set environments.
Reads the specified file from the first or last line location as indicated by the sign (+ or - or none)
of the Number variable and offset by the number of lines Number.
Displays the output from the end of the file in reverse order. The default for the -r flag prints the
entire file in reverse order. If the file is larger than 20,480 bytes, the -r flag displays only the last
20,480 bytes.
The -r flag is valid only with the -n flag. Otherwise, it is ignored.
Alphabetical list of commands
393
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
Successful completion.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To display the last 10 lines of the notes file, enter:
tail notes
2. To specify the number of lines to start reading from the end of the notes file, enter:
tail
-n 20 notes
3. To display the notes file a page at a time, beginning with the 200th byte, enter:
tail -c +200 notes | pg
4. To follow the growth of a file, enter:
tail
-f accounts
This displays the last 10 lines of the accounts file. The tail command continues to display lines as
they are added to the accounts file. The display continues until you press the Ctrl-C key sequence to
stop it.
File
/usr/bin/tail
Contains the tail command.
Related Information
The head command and the more command
tee command
Purpose
Displays the output of a program and copies it into a file.
Syntax
tee [ -a ] [ -i ] [ File ... ]
Description
The tee command reads standard input, then writes the output of a program to standard output and
simultaneously copies it into the specified file or files.
Flags
-a
-i
Adds the output to the end of File instead of writing over it.
Ignores interrupts.
394
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
The standard input was successfully copied to all output files.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Note: If a write to any successfully opened File operand is not successful, writes to other
successfully opened File operands and standard output will continue, but the exit value will be >0.
Examples
1. To view and save the output from a command at the same time:
lint program.c | tee program.lint
This displays the standard output of the command lint program.c at the workstation, and at the same
time saves a copy of it in the file program.lint. If a file named program.lint already exists, it is
deleted and replaced.
2. To view and save the output from a command to an existing file:
lint program.c | tee
-a program.lint
This displays the standard output of the lint program.c command at the workstation and at the same
time appends a copy of it to the end of the program.lint file. If the program.lint file does not exist,
it is created.
Files
/usr/bin/tee
Contains the tee command.
topas command
Purpose
Reports selected local system statistics.
Syntax
topas [ -disks number_of_monitored_hot_disks ] [ -interval monitoring_interval_in_seconds ] [ -nets
number_of_monitored_hot_network_interfaces ] [ -procs number_of_monitored_hot_processes ] [ -wlms
number_of_monitored_hot_WLM_classes ] [ -cpus number_of_monitored_hot_CPUs ] [ -procsdisp | -wlmdisp |
-cecdisp] [ -filesvs number_of_monitored_file_systems ] [ -tape] [ -fullscreen { process | WLM | lpar disk |
net | CEC | vg | filesys | tape }]
Description
The topas command reports selected statistics about the activity on the local system. The command
displays its output in a format suitable for viewing on an 80x25 character-based display.
If the topas command is invoked without flags, it runs as if invoked with the following command line:
topas -disks 20 -interval 2 -nets 20 -procs 20 -wlms 20 -cpus 20 -filesys 2
When you specify a single flag, the topas command will take that value and the other values will be the
default values. This is applicable to all the flags.
Alphabetical list of commands
395
The program extracts statistics from the system with an interval specified by the
monitoring_interval_in_seconds argument. The default output, as shown below, consists of two fixed parts
and a variable section. The top two lines at the left of the display show the name of the system the topas
command runs on, the date and time of the last observation, and the monitoring interval.
The second fixed part fills the rightmost 25 positions of the display. It contains five subsections of
statistics, as follows:
EVENTS/QUEUES
Displays the per-second frequency of selected system-global events and the average size
of the thread run and wait queues:
Cswitch
The number of context switches per second over the monitoring interval.
Syscalls
The total number of system calls per second executed over the monitoring
interval.
Reads
The number of read system calls per second executed over the monitoring
interval.
Writes
The number of write system calls per second executed over the monitoring
interval.
Forks
The number of fork system calls per second executed over the monitoring
interval.
Execs
The number of exec system calls per second executed over the monitoring
interval.
Runqueue
The average number of threads that were ready to run but were waiting for a
processor to become available.
FILE/TTY
Waitqueue
The average number of threads that were waiting for paging to complete.
Displays the per-second frequency of selected file and tty statistics.
Readch The number of bytes read per second through the read system call over the
monitoring interval.
Writech
The number of bytes written per second through the write system call over the
monitoring interval.
Rawin
The number of raw bytes read per second from TTYs over the monitoring
interval.
Ttyout The number of bytes written to TTYs per second over the monitoring interval.
Igets
The number of calls per second to the inode lookup routines over the
monitoring interval.
Namei The number of calls per second to the pathname lookup routines over the
monitoring interval.
Dirblk The number of directory blocks scanned per second by the directory search
routine over the monitoring interval.
396
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
PAGING
Displays the per-second frequency of paging statistics.
Faults
Total number of page faults taken per second over the monitoring interval.
This includes page faults that do not cause paging activity.
Steals
Physical memory 4K frames stolen per second by the virtual memory manager
over the monitoring interval.
PgspIn Number of 4K pages read from paging space per second over the monitoring
interval.
PgspOut
Number of 4K pages written to paging space per second over the monitoring
interval.
PageIn Number of 4K pages read per second over the monitoring interval. This
includes paging activity associated with reading from file systems. Subtract
PgspIn from this value to get the number of 4K pages read from file systems
per second over the monitoring interval.
PageOut
Number of 4K pages written per second over the monitoring interval. This
includes paging activity associated with writing to file systems. Subtract
PgspOut from this value to get the number of 4K pages written to file systems
per second over the monitoring interval.
The number of I/O requests per second issued by the virtual memory
manager over the monitoring interval.
Displays the real memory size and the distribution of memory in use.
Sios
MEMORY
Real,MB
The size of real memory in megabytes.
% Comp
The percentage of real memory currently allocated to computational page
frames. Computational page frames are generally those that are backed by
paging space.
% Noncomp
The percentage of real memory currently allocated to non-computational
frames. Non-computational page frames are generally those that are backed by
file space, either data files, executable files, or shared library files.
PAGING SPACE
% Client
The percentage of real memory currently allocated to cache remotely mounted
files.
Display size and utilization of paging space.
Size,MB
The sum of all paging spaces on the system, in megabytes.
% Used
The percentage of total paging space currently in use.
NFS
% Free The percentage of total paging space currently free.
Display NFS stats in calls per second
v Server V2 calls/sec
v Client V2 calls/sec
v Server V3 calls/sec
v Client V3 calls/sec
The variable part of the topas display can have one, two, three, four, or five subsections. If more than one
subsection displays, they are always shown in the following order:
v CPU
Alphabetical list of commands
397
v
v
v
v
Network Interfaces
Physical Disks
WorkLoad Management Classes
Processes
When the topas command is started, it displays all subsections for which hot entities are monitored. The
exception to this is the WorkLoad Management (WLM) Classes subsection, which is displayed only when
WLM is active.
CPU Utilization
This subsection displays a bar chart showing cumulative CPU usage. If more than one
CPU exists, a list of CPUs can be displayed by pressing the c key twice. Pressing the c
key only once will turn this subsection off. The following fields are displayed by both
formats:
User%
This shows the percent of CPU used by programs executing in user mode.
(Default sorted by User%)
Kern% This shows the percent of CPU used by programs executing in kernel mode.
Wait%
This shows the percent of time spent waiting for IO.
Idle%
This shows the percent of time the CPU(s) is idle.
When this subsection first displays the list of hot CPUs, the list is sorted by the User%
field. However, the list can be sorted by the other fields by moving the cursor to the
top of the desired column.
Network Interfaces
This subsection displays a list of hot network interfaces. The maximum number of
interfaces displayed is the number of hot interfaces being monitored, as specified with
the -nets flag. A smaller number of interfaces will be displayed if other subsections are
also being displayed. Pressing the n key turns off this subsection. Pressing the n key
again shows a one-line report summary of the activity for all network interfaces. Both
reports display the following fields:
Interf
The name of the network interface.
KBPS
The total throughput in megabytes per second over the monitoring interval.
This field is the sum of kilobytes received and kilobytes sent per second.
I-Pack
The number of data packets received per second over the monitoring interval.
O-Pack The number of data packets sent per second over the monitoring interval.
KB-In
The number of kilobytes received per second over the monitoring interval.
KB-Out
The number of kilobytes sent per second over the monitoring interval.
When this subsection first displays the list of hot network interfaces, the list is sorted
by the KBPS field. However, the list can be sorted by the other fields by moving the
cursor to the top of the desired column. Sorting is only valid for up to 16 network
adapters.
398
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Physical Disks
This subsection displays a list of hot physical disks. The maximum number of physical
disks displayed is the number of hot physical disks being monitored as specified with
the -disks flag. A smaller number of physical disks will be displayed if other
subsections are also being displayed. Pressing the d key turns off this subsection.
Pressing the d key again shows a one-line report summary of the activity for all
physical disks. Both reports display the following fields:
Disk
The name of the physical disk.
Busy% Indicates the percentage of time the physical disk was active (bandwidth
utilization for the drive).
KBPS
The number of kilobytes read and written per second over the monitoring
interval. This field is the sum of KB-Read and KB-Read.
TPS
The number of transfers per second that were issued to the physical disk. A
transfer is an I/O request to the physical disk. Multiple logical requests can be
combined into a single I/O request to the disk. A transfer is of indeterminate
size.
KB-Read
The number of kilobytes read per second from the physical disk.
K -Writ
The number of kilobytes written per second to the physical disk.
When this subsection first displays the list of hot physical disks, the list is sorted by the
KBPS field. However, the list can be sorted by the other fields by moving the cursor to
the top of the desired column. Sorting is only valid for up to 128 physical disks.
WLM Classes
This subsection displays a list of hot WorkLoad Management (WLM) Classes. The
maximum number of WLM classes displayed is the number of hot WLM classes being
monitored as specified with the -wlmdisp flag. A smaller number of classes will be
displayed if other subsections are also being displayed. Pressing the w key turns off
this subsection. The following fields are displayed for each class:
% CPU Utilization
The average CPU utilization of the WLM class over the monitoring interval.
% Mem Utilization
The average memory utilization of the WLM class over the monitoring
interval.
% Blk I/O
The average percent of Block I/O of the WLM class over the monitoring
interval.
When this subsection first displays the list of hot WLM classes, the list will be sorted
by the CPU% field. However, the list can be sorted by the other fields by moving the
cursor to the top of the desired column.
Alphabetical list of commands
399
This subsection displays a list of hot processes. The maximum number of processes
displayed is the number of hot processes being monitored as specified with the -procs
flag. A smaller number of processes will be displayed if other subsections are also being
displayed. Pressing the p key turns off this subsection. The process are sorted by their
CPU usage over the monitoring interval. The following fields are displayed for each
process:
Processes
The name of the executable program executing in the process. The name is
stripped of any pathname and argument information and truncated to 9
characters in length.
Name
Process ID
The process ID of the process.
% CPU Utilization
The average CPU utilization of the process over the monitoring interval. The
first time a process is shown, this value is the average CPU utilization over the
lifetime of the process.
Paging Space Used
The size of the paging space allocated to this process. This can be considered
an expression of the footprint of the process but does not include the memory
used to keep the executable program and any shared libraries it may depend
on.
Process Owner (if the WLM section is off)
The user name of the user who owns the process.
WorkLoad Management (WLM) Class (if the WLM section is on)
The WLM class to which the process belongs.
Implementation Specifics
Changes to WLM that are shown by topas (like adding new classes, or changing existing class names)
will not be reflected after starting topas. You must stop topas and all clients which use Spmi, then restart
after the WLM changes are made. This is also the case for Disks and Network Adapters added after topas
or any other Spmi consumer is started.
Sample Default Output
The following is an example of the display generated by the topas command:
Topas Monitor for host:
Mon Mar 13 15:56:32 2000
CPU
cpu0
cpu1
cpu2
Interf
lo0
tr0
User%
7.0
1.0
0.0
Disk
hdisk0
hdisk1
Kern%
4.0
8.0
0.0
KBPS
100.4
2.0
Busy%
0.0
0.0
400
2
Wait% Idle%
0.0
89.0
0.0
91.0
0.0 100.0
I-Pack
45.7
4.4
O-Pack
45.7
3.4
KBPS
0.0
0.0
WLM-Class (Active)
System
Shared
niller
Interval:
CPU%
8
1
KB-In
50.2
1.4
EVENTS/QUEUES
Cswitch
113
Syscall
2510
Reads
466
Writes
12
Forks
0
Execs
0
Runqueue
0.0
Waitqueue
0.0
KB-Out
50.2 PAGING
0.6 Faults
Steals
TPS KB-Read KB-Writ PgspIn
0.0
0.0
0.0 PgspOut
0.0
0.0
0.0 PageIn
PageOut
Mem%
Disk%
Sios
41
12
24
9
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
FILE/TTY
Readch 1853576
Writech
49883
Rawin
0
Ttyout
706
Igets
0
Namei
0
Dirblk
0
MEMORY
Real,MB
255
% Comp
81.0
% Noncomp 19.0
% Client
3.0
PAGING SPACE
Size,MB
% Used
% Free
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
0
Name
topas
X
notes
PID
CPU%
PgSP
(35242) 3.0
0.3
(3622)
1.4
44.4
(25306) 1.3 123.3
NFS
calls/sec
ServerV2
0
Press:
ClientV2
0
"h" for help.
ServerV3
0
"q" to quit.
ClientV3
0
Class
System
System
System
Sample Full Screen Process Output
Topas Monitor for host:
USER
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root
PID
1806
1032
1290
1548
1
2064
2698
3144
3362
3666
3982
4644
4912
5202
5426
5678
5934
6192
6450
6708
0
6990
PPID
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
4912
4912
4912
4912
4912
4912
4912
0
1
PRI
37
16
60
36
60
16
60
60
60
60
60
17
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
16
60
mothra
DATA
NI
RES
41
16
41
3
41
4
41
4
20
197
41
4
20
14
20
40
20
4
20
135
20
4
20
6
20
106
20
94
20
195
20
161
20
103
20
217
20
137
20
157
41
3
20
106
Interval:
2
TEXT PAGE
RES SPACE
TIME
3374
16
13:25
3374
3
0:00
3374
4
0:02
3374
4
0:26
9
180
0:24
3374
4
0:04
2
14
0:00
1
36
5:19
3374
4
0:00
23
123
0:00
3374
4
0:01
3374
6
0:00
13
85
0:00
8
84
0:01
76 181
0:12
11 147
0:01
11
88
0:00
61 188
0:21
10 116
0:00
29 139
0:06
3374
3
7:08
10
86
0:06
Wed Nov 8 12:27:34 2000
PGFAULTS
CPU% I/O OTH COMMAND
1.0
0
0 gil
0.0
0
0 lrud
0.0
0
0 xmgc
0.0
0
0 netm
0.0
0
0 init
0.0
0
0 wlmsched
0.0
0
0 shlap
0.0
0
0 syncd
0.0
0
0 lvmbb
0.0
0
0 errdemon
0.0
0
0 rtcmd
0.0
0
0 dog
0.0
0
0 srcmstr
0.0
0
0 syslogd
0.0
0
0 sendmail
0.0
0
0 portmap
0.0
0
0 inetd
0.0
0
0 snmpd
0.0
0
0 dpid2
0.0
0
0 hostmibd
0.0
0
0
0.0
0
0 cron
Sample Full-Screen WorkLoad Management Classes Output
Topas Monitor for host:
WLM-Class (Active)
System
Shared
Default
Unmanaged
Unclassified
mothra
CPU%
0
0
0
0
0
Interval:
Mem%
0
0
0
0
0
2
Wed Nov
Disk-I/O%
0
0
0
0
0
8 12:30:54 2000
==============================================================================
DATA TEXT PAGE
PGFAULTS
USER
PID PPID PRI NI
RES
RES SPACE
TIME CPU% I/O OTH COMMAND
root
1
0 108 20
197
9 180
0:24 0.0
0
0 init
root
1032
0 16 41
3 3374
3
0:00 0.0
0
0 lrud
root
1290
0 60 41
4 3374
4
0:02 0.0
0
0 xmgc
root
1548
0 36 41
4 3374
4
0:26 0.0
0
0 netm
root
1806
0 37 41
16 3374
16
13:25 0.0
0
0 gil
root
2064
0 16 41
4 3374
4
0:04 0.0
0
0 wlmsched
root
2698
1 108 20
14
2
14
0:00 0.0
0
0 shlap
root
3144
1 108 20
40
1
36
5:19 0.0
0
0 syncd
root
3362
0 108 20
4 3374
4
0:00 0.0
0
0 lvmbb
root
3666
1 108 20
135
23 123
0:00 0.0
0
0 errdemon
root
3982
0 108 20
4 3374
4
0:01 0.0
0
0 rtcmd
Flags
-cecdisp
Displays the cross-partition panel.
Alphabetical list of commands
401
Specifies the number of hot CPUs to be monitored. This is also the maximum number
of CPUs displayed when enough room is available on the screen. If this number
exceeds the number of CPUs available, only the installed CPUs will be monitored and
displayed. If this argument is omitted, a default of 2 is assumed. If a value of 0 (zero) is
specified, no CPU information is monitored.
-cpus
-disks
-interval
-nets
-procsdisp
-procs
-wlmdisp
-wlms
-filesys
-tape
402
When you specify a single flag, the topas command will take that value and the other
values will be the default values. This is applicable to all the flags.
Specifies the number of disks to be monitored. This is also the maximum number of
disks displayed when enough room is available on the screen. When this number
exceeds the number of disks installed, only the installed disks are monitored and
displayed. If this argument is omitted, a default of 2 is assumed. If a value of 0 (zero) is
specified, no disk information is monitored.
Sets the monitoring interval in seconds. The default is 2 seconds.
Specifies the number of hot network interfaces to be monitored. This is also the
maximum number of network interfaces displayed when enough room is available on
the screen. When this number exceeds the number of network interfaces installed, only
the installed network interfaces will be monitored and displayed. If this argument is
omitted, a default of 2 is assumed. If a value of 0 (zero) is specified, no network
information is monitored.
Displays the full-screen process display. This display shows a list of the busiest
processes, similar to the process subsection on the default display, only with more
columns showing more metrics per process. This list can be sorted by any column.
Specifies the number of hot processes to be monitored. This is also the maximum
number of processes shown when enough room is available on the screen. If this
argument is omitted, a default of 20 is assumed. If a value of 0 is specified, no process
information will be monitored. Retrieval of process information constitutes the majority
of the topas overhead. If process information is not required, always use this option to
specify that you do not want process information.
Displays the full-screen WLM class display, which is a split display. The top part of the
display shows a list of hot WLM classes, similar to the WLM classes subsection on the
default display, but with enough space available to display the full class names. This
list can be sorted on any column.
The bottom part of the display shows a list of busiest processes, similar to the full
screen process display, but only displays processes belonging to one WLM class
(selected with the f key).
Specifies the number of hot WorkLoad Management (WLM) classes to be monitored.
This is also the maximum number of WLM classes displayed when enough room is
available on the screen. If this number exceeds the number of WLM classes installed,
only the installed WLM classes will be monitored and displayed. If this argument is
omitted, a default of 2 is assumed. If a value of 0 (zero) is specified, no WLM class
information is monitored.
Specifies the number of file systems to be monitored. This is also the maximum number
of file systems displayed when enough room is available. When this number exceeds
the number of file systems mounted, only the mounted file systems are monitored and
displayed. If you do not specify the -filesys flag, the default value is 2. If you specify a
value of 0, the file system information is monitored.
Switches the tape display section between on and off in the main topas display.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-fullscreen
Specifies the full-screen display of the specified parameter. The following parameters
can be specified: process, WLM, lpar, disk, net, CEC, vg, filesys, or tape. This list can
be sorted by any column.
process Displays the full screen Process screen. This display shows a list of the busiest
processes. This is similar to the process subsection on the default panel, only
with more columns showing more metrics per process.
WLM
Displays the full screen WLM Classes panel. The top part of the screen shows
a list of hot WLM classes. This is similar to the WLM classes subsection on the
default screen, but with enough space available to display the full class names.
lpar
Displays the full screen Logical Partition panel. In shared-memory mode, this
screen displays information about I/O memory entitlement of the partition.
disk
Displays the full screen Disk Metrics panel (Disk Panel View). The screen
reports disk service times, disk queuing metrics, and disk throughput.
net
Displays the full screen statistics for the shared Ethernet adapter on a Virtual
I/O Server.
CEC
Displays the Cross-partition Panel. The topas command collects a set of
metrics from AIX partitions that are running on the same hardware platform.
Dedicated and shared partitions are displayed, and a set of aggregated values
provide an overview of the entire hardware systems partition set. Certain
values that are only available from the HMC platform can be set through the
HMC console.
vg
Displays the Volume Group Panel. The panel reports the following metrics of
the volume groups in the top section of the screen, and the same metrics of the
logical volumes in the bottom section of the screen.
filesys
Displays full file system information. The screen reports file system service
times, file system queuing metrics, and file system throughput.
tape
Displays the full screen tape screen. This reports bandwidth use of the tape
device, the amount of data transferred (read or written) to the tape device, and
the average number of transfers per second issued to the tape device.
Subcommands
While topas is running, it accepts one-character subcommands. Each time the monitoring interval elapses,
the program checks for one of the following subcommands and responds to the action requested.
a
c
d
h
n
w
p
The a key shows all of the variable subsections being monitored (CPU, network, disk,
WLM, and process). Pressing the a key always returns the topas command to the initial
main display.
The c key toggles the CPU subsection between the cumulative report, off, and a list of
the busiest CPUs. The number of busiest CPUs displayed will depend upon the space
available on the screen.
The d key toggles the disk subsection between a list of busiest disks, off, and the report
on the total disk activity of the system. The number of busiest disks displayed will
depend upon the space available on the screen.
Show the help screen.
The n key toggles the network interfaces subsection between a list of busiest interfaces,
off, and the report on the total network activity of the system. The number of busiest
interfaces displayed will depend upon the space available on the screen.
The w key toggles the WorkLoad Management (WLM) classes subsection on and off.
The number of busiest WLM classes displayed will depend upon the space available on
the screen.
The p key toggles the hot processes subsection on and off. The number of busiest
processes displayed will depend upon the space available on the screen.
Alphabetical list of commands
403
P
W
L
f
q
r
Arrow and Tab keys
The uppercase P key replaces the default display with the full-screen process display.
This display provides more detailed information about processes running on the system
than the process section of the main display. When the P key is pressed again, it toggles
back to the default main display.
The uppercase W key replaces the default display with the full-screen WLM class
display. This display provides more detailed information about WLM classes and
processes assigned to classes. When the W key is pressed again, it toggles back to the
default main display.
The uppercase L key replaces the current display with the logical partition display.
Moving the cursor over a WLM class and pressing the f key displays the list of top
processes in the class at the bottom of the WLM screen. This key is valid only when
topas is in the full-screen WLM display (by using the W key or the -wlms flag).
Quit the program.
Refresh the display.
Subsections from the main display such as the CPU, Network, Disk, WLM Classes, and
the full-screen WLM and Process displays can be sorted by different criteria.
Positioning the cursor over a column activates sorting on that column. The entries are
always sorted from highest to lowest value. The cursor can be moved by using the Tab
key or the arrow keys. Sorting is only valid for 128 disks and 16 network adapters.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To display up to twenty "hot" disks every five seconds and omit network interface, WLM classes,
and process information, type:
topas -interval 5 -nets 0 -procs 0 -wlms 0
2. To display the five most active processes and up to twenty most active WLM classes (which is the
default when omitting the -w flag) but no network or disk information, type:
topas -procs 5 -nets 0 -disks 0
3. To run the program with default options, type:
topas
4. To go directly to the process display, type:
topas -procsdisp
5. To go directly to the WLM classes display, type:
topas -wlmdisp
6. To display the top two file systems, type:
topas -filesys 2
7. To go directly to the WLM classes display, type:
topas -wlms 2
8. To go directly to the tape device display, type:
topas -tape
9. To go directly to the full screen WLM classes display, type:
topas -fullscreen WLM
10. To go directly to the full screen CEC display, type:
topas -fullscreen CEC
11. To go directly to the full screen volume group display, type:
topas -fullscreen vg
404
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
topasrec command
Purpose
Generates a binary recording of local system statistics, central electronics process (CEC) statistics, and
cluster statistics.
Syntax
topasrec { -local [ -trace trace_level] | -cec | -cluster} [ -count sample_count] [ -interval seconds] [ -out
filename ]
Description
The topasrec command records the local system data and the cross-partition data (CEC statistics) in
binary format.
When you run the topasrec command to record CEC statistics, the command collects a set of metrics
from the AIX logical partitions that are running on the same CEC. The command collects dedicated and
shared logical partition data, as well as a set of aggregated values to provide an overview of the partition
set on the same CEC.
When you run the command to record cluster statistics, the command collects a set of metrics for the list
of hosts that are specified in the cluster configuration file.
Flags
-count
-interval
-out
-cec
-local
-cluster
-trace
Specifies the number of records to generate.
Specifies the recording interval in seconds. The default is 2 seconds.
Specifies the name of the output file.
Records the CEC statistics in binary format.
Records local system statistics in binary format.
Records cluster statistics in binary format.
Specifies a trace level. Trace data is stored under /home/padmin/.topasrec. You can specify
a value from 1 - 9. More trace data is generated at higher trace levels. This data is
useful for recording status and for debugging purposes. Trace data is collected only for
local system recording.
Exit Status
Return Code
Description
0
Success
>0
An error occurred
Examples
1. To start recording local system statistics with a sample count of 5 and a sample interval of 60 seconds,
type:
topasrec -local -count 5 -interval 60
2. To start recording CEC statistics with a sample count of 5 and a sample interval of 60 seconds, type:
topasrec -cec -count 5 -interval 60
3. To start recording cluster statistics with a sample count of 5 and a sample interval of 60, type:
topasrec -cluster -count 5 -interval 60
Alphabetical list of commands
405
Related Information
The wkldout command.
traceroute command
Purpose
Prints the route that IP packets take to a network host.
Syntax
traceroute [ -hops Hops ] [ -num ] [ -port Port ] [ -src Address ] Host [ PacketSize ]
Description
The traceroute command attempts to trace the route an IP packet follows to an Internet host by launching
UDP probe packets with a small maximum time-to-live (Hops parameter), then listening for an ICMP
TIME_EXCEEDED response from gateways along the way. Probes are started with a Hops value of one
hop, which is increased one hop at a time until an ICMP PORT_UNREACHABLE message is returned.
The ICMP PORT_UNREACHABLE message indicates either that the host has been located or the
command has reached the maximum number of hops allowed for the trace.
The traceroute command sends three probes at each Hops setting to record the following:
v Hops value
v Address of the gateway
v Round-trip time of each successful probe
If the probe answers come from different gateways, the command prints the address of each responding
system. If there is no response from a probe within a 3-second time-out interval, an * (asterisk) is printed
for that probe.
Note: The traceroute command is intended for use in network testing, measurement, and management. It
should be used primarily for manual fault isolation. Because of the load it imposes on the network, the
traceroute command should not be used during normal operations or from automated scripts.
The traceroute command prints an ! (exclamation mark) after the round-trip time if the Hops value is one
hop or less. A maximum time-to-live value of one hop or less generally indicates an incompatibility in the
way ICMP replies are handled by different network software. The incompatibility can usually be resolved
by doubling the last Hops value used and trying again.
Other possible annotations after the round-trip notation are as follows:
!H
Host unreachable
!N
Network unreachable
!P
Protocol unreachable
!S
Source route failed
!F
Fragmentation needed
If the majority of probes result in an error, the traceroute command exits.
The only mandatory parameter for the traceroute command is the destination host name or IP number.
The traceroute command will determine the length of the probe packet based on the Maximum
406
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Transmission Unit (MTU) of the outgoing interface. The UDP probe packets are set to an unlikely value
so as to prevent processing by the destination host.
Flags
-hops Max_ttl
-num
-port Port
-src SRC_Addr
Sets the maximum time-to-live (maximum number of hops) used in outgoing probe
packets. The default is 30 hops (the same default used for TCP connections).
Prints hop addresses numerically rather than symbolically and numerically. This flag
saves a name-server address-to-name lookup for each gateway found on the path.
Sets the base UDP port number used in probes. The default is 33434. The traceroute
command depends on an open UDP port range of base to base + nhops - 1 at the
destination host. If a UDP port is not available, this option can be used to pick an
unused port range.
Uses the next IP address in numerical form as the source address in outgoing probe
packets. On hosts with more than one IP address, the -src flag can be used to force the
source address to be something other than the IP address of the interface on which the
probe packet is sent. If the next IP address is not one of the machine's interface
addresses, an error is returned and nothing is sent.
Parameters
Host
PacketSize
Specifies the destination host, either by host name or IP number. This parameter is
required.
Specifies the probe datagram length. The default packet size is determined by the
traceroute command based on the MTU of the outgoing interface.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To print the route to host nis.nfs.net, type:
traceroute nis.nsf.net
The output will look similar to the following:
traceroute to rotterdam (35.1.1.48), 30 hops max, 56 byte packet
1 helios.ee.lbl.gov (128.3.112.1) 19 ms 19 ms 0 ms
2 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 39 ms 39 ms 19 ms
3 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 39 ms 39 ms 19 ms
4 ccngw-ner-cc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.136.23) 39 ms 40 ms 39 ms
5 ccn-nerif22.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.168.22) 39 ms 39 ms 39 ms
6 128.32.197.4 (128.32.197.4) 40 ms 59 ms 59 ms
7 131.119.2.5 (131.119.2.5) 59 ms 59 ms 59 ms
8 129.140.70.13 (129.140.70.13) 99 ms 99 ms 80 ms
9 129.140.71.6 (129.140.71.6) 139 ms 239 ms 319 ms
10 129.140.81.7 (129.140.81.7) 220 ms 199 ms 199 ms
11 nic.merit.edu (35.1.1.48) 239 ms 239 ms 239 ms
Related Information
The ping command and the optimizenet command.
uname command
Purpose
Writes to standard output the name of the operating system that you are using
Alphabetical list of commands
407
Syntax
uname [ -a ] [-f ] [-F] [-l] [-L] [-m] [-M] [-n] [-p] [-r] [-s] [-u] [-x]
Description
The machine ID number contains 12 characters in the following digit format: xxyyyyyymmss. The xx
positions indicate the system and is always 00. The yyyyyy positions contain the unique ID number for
the entire system. The mm position represents the model ID. The ss position is the submodel number and
is always 00. The model ID describes the ID of the CPU Planar, not the model of the System as a whole.
You can use the uname -m command sometimes to determine which model you are using. The following
list is not complete. Refer to hardware vendor supplied documentation for values in the range E0 - FF.
Also note that not all machine types have a machine ID. Many new machines share a common machine
ID of 4C.
Flags
Displays all information specified with the -m, -n, -r, -s, and -v flags. Cannot be used
with the -x flag If the -x flag is specified with the -a flag, the -x flag overrides it.
Displays a system identification string comprised of hexadecimal characters. This
identification string is the same for all partitions on a particular system.
Similar to the F flag, except that the partition number is also used in the calculation of
this string. The resulting identification string is unique for each partition on a particular
system.
Displays the LAN network number.
Displays LPAR number and LPAR name. If LPAR does not exist, -1 is displayed for
LPAR number and NULL for LPAR name.
Displays the machine ID number of the hardware running the system.
Note: The -m flag cannot be used to generate a unique machine identifier for partitions
in an LPAR environment.
Displays the system model name. If the model name attribute does not exist, a null
string is displayed.
Displays the name of the node. This may be a name the system is known by to a UUCP
communications network.
Displays the architecture of the system processor.
Displays the release number of the operating system.
Displays the system name. This flag is on by default.
Displays the system ID number. If this attribute is not defined, the output is the same as
the output displayed by uname -m.
Displays the information specified with the -a flag as well as the LAN network number,
as specified by the -l flag.
-a
-F
-f
-l
-L
-m
-M
-n
-p
-r
-s
-u
-x
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
Successful completion.
An error occurred.
Examples
1. To display the complete system name and version banner, enter:
uname -a
AIX vios_bat 3 5 00CD1B0E4C00
2. To display the operating system name, enter:
408
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
uname
AIX
Virtual I/O Server uname command calls the AIX uname command. The flags are the same except
that -S, -T, and -v are not allowed.
Related Information
uname subroutine
unloadopt command
Purpose
Remove a virtual optical media disk from a virtual optical device.
Syntax
unloadopt [ -release ] -vtd VirtualTargetDevice
Description
The unloadopt command removes a virtual optical disk from the specified virtual optical device
(VirtualTargetDevice). After the command completes the specified optical device will contain no media.
Flags
-release
-vtd VirtualTargetDevice
Forces the virtual optical device to be unlocked even if the client has a reserve on the
device.
The name of the virtual target device.
Examples
To unload the virtual optical disk loaded into the virtual optical device vopt1, type the following
command:
unloadopt
-vtd vopt1
unmirrorios command
Purpose
Removes the mirrors that exist on the rootvg volume group.
Syntax
unmirrorios [ PhysicalVolume ...]
Description
The unmirrorios command unmirrors all the logical volumes detected on the rootvg volume group. By
default, unmirrorios will pick the set of mirrors to remove from a mirrored volume group. To control
which drives no longer are to contain mirrors, you must include the list of disks in the input parameters,
PhysicalVolume.
At the completion of this command, Quorum will be disabled until the system is rebooted.
Alphabetical list of commands
409
Note: If LVM has not recognized that a disk has failed, it is possible that it will remove a different
mirror. If you know that a disk has failed, and LVM does not show those disks as missing, you should
specify the failed disks on the command line or you should use the reducevg command to remove the
disk.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Security
This command can only be executed by the prime administrator.
Related Information
The activatevg command, the chvg command, the deactivatevg command, the exportvg command, the
importvg command, the lsvg command, the mkvg command, the syncvg command, and the mirrorios
command.
unmount command
Purpose
Unmounts a previously mounted file system, directory, or file.
Syntax
unmount { Directory | File | FileSystem }
Description
The unmount command unmounts a previously mounted directory, file, or file system. Processing on the
file system, directory, or file completes and it is unmounted.
To unmount local mounts you can specify the device, directory, file, or file system on which it is
mounted.
Exit Status
See “Exit status for Virtual I/O Server commands” on page 1.
Examples
1. To unmount files and directories, type the following command:
unmount /home/user/test
This unmounts the filesystem mounted at /home/user/test.
Related Information
The mount command.
410
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
IVM update_install_setup command
Purpose
Saves late binding installation information into the system plan.
Syntax
update_install_setup -f plan name [-m managed system name ] -id partition id | -p partition name -G gateway
-C client IP -sm subnet mask [-s speed -d duplex] -n resource name [-help]
update_install_setup -l -f plan name [-m managed system name ] [-id partition id | -p partition name] [-F
attribute names] [-help]
Description
The update_install_setup command saves the late binding installation parameters, such as the client IP
and subnet mask, into the system plan existing on this Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM). It also
lists the information already saved in the system plan.
Flags
-f plan name
-m managed system
-p partition name
-id partition id
-G gateway
-C client IP
-sm subnet mask
-s speed
-d duplex
-n resource name
-help
-l
-F attribute names
Specifies the name of the system plan file that is to be updated.
Specifies the name of the managed system.
Specifies the name of the logical partition for which the network information needs to
be updated into the system plan file.
Specifies the partition ID of the logical partition for which the network information
needs to be updated into the system plan file.
Specifies the gateway IP address.
Specifies the client IP address.
Specifies the subnet mask of the client interface.
Specifies the speed of the network adapter.
Specifies the network adapter duplex.
Specifies the name of the system plan resource.
Displays the help text for this command and exit.
Lists the installation parameters.
A delimiter-separated list of attribute names for the desired attribute values to be
displayed for each resource. If no attribute names are specified, values for all of the
attributes for the resource are displayed.
When this option is specified, only attribute values are displayed. No attribute names
are displayed.
-header
The attribute values displayed are separated by the delimiter that was specified with
this option. This option is useful when you want only the attribute values to be
displayed, or when you want the values of only selected attributes to be displayed.
Prints a header of attribute names when the -F flag is also specified.
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
The command completed successfully.
An error occurred.
Alphabetical list of commands
411
Examples
1. To save the late binding information into a system plan named test.sysplan for logical partition
client1 with the client IP address 9.3.126.77, subnet mask 255.255.255.0, gateway 9.3.126.1, and
resource name AIX53, type:
update_install_setup -f test.sysplan -p client1 -C 9.3.126.77
-sm 255.255.255.0 -G 9.3.126.1 -n AIX53
2. List the late binding installation information stored in a system plan named test.sysplan on the IVM:
update_install_setup -f test.sysplan -l
Related Information
The mksysplan, deploysysplan, and lssysplan commands.
updateios command
Purpose
Updates the Virtual I/O Server to latest maintenance level.
Syntax
updateios -dev Media [-f] [ -install ] [ -accept ]
updateios -commit | -reject [ -f ]
updateios -cleanup
updateios -remove { -file RemoveListFile | RemoveList }
Description
The updateios command is used to install fixes, or to update the Virtual I/O Server to the latest
maintenance level. Before installing a fix or updating the maintenance level, the updateios command runs
a preview installation and displays the results. You are then prompted to continue or exit. If the preview
fails for any reason, do not install the update.
Flags
-accept
-cleanup
-commit
-dev Media
-f
-file file
-install
Specifies that you agree to required software license agreements for software to be
installed.
Specify the clean up flag to remove all incomplete pieces of the previous installation.
Perform cleanup processing whenever any software product or update is after an
interrupted installation or update is in a state of either applying or committing. You can
run this flag manually, as needed.
The -commit flag will commit all uncommitted updates to the Virtual I/O Server.
Specifies the device or directory containing the images to install.
Forces all uncommitted updates to be committed prior to applying the new updates.
When combined with the -dev flag, this flag commits all updates prior to applying any
new ones. When combined with the -reject flag, this flag rejects all uncommitted
updates without prompting you for confirmation.
Specifies the file containing a list of entries to uninstall.
The -install flag is used to install new and supported file sets onto the Virtual I/O
Server.
Attention: The log file, install.log in the user's home directory, will be overwritten
with a list of all file sets that were installed.
412
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
The -reject flag will reject all uncommitted updates to the Virtual I/O Server. If
dependent software is in a committed state for a specific update, then that update
cannot be rejected.
If the -remove flag is specified, the listed file sets will be removed from the system. The
file sets to be removed must be listed on the command line or in the RemoveListFile
file.
-reject
-remove
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
All uncommitted updates must be committed
There are no uncommitted updates
19
20
Examples
1. To update the Virtual I/O Server to the latest level, where the updates are located on the mounted file
system /home/padmin/update, type the following command:
updateios -dev /home/padmin/update
2. To update the Virtual I/O Server to the latest level, when previous levels are not committed, type the
following command:
updateios -f -dev /home/padmin/update
3. To reject installed updates, type the following command:
updateios -reject
4. To cleanup partially installed updates, type the following command:
updateios -cleanup
5. To commit the installed updates, type the following command:
updateios -commit
Related Information
The lssw command, the ioslevel command, the remote_management command, the oem_setup_env
command, and the oem_platform_level command.
vasistat command
Purpose
Shows VASI device driver and device statistics.
Syntax
vasistat [ -all ] [ -reset ] [ -debug ] Device_Name
Description
The vasistat command displays the statistics gathered by the specified VASI device driver. The user can
optionally specify that the device-specific statistics be displayed in addition to the device generic
statistics. This will display statistics for all the operations, such as migrations, in that VASI device. If no
flags are specified, only the device generic statistics are displayed.
Alphabetical list of commands
413
Flags
-all
-reset
-debug
Displays all the statistics, including the device-specific statistics.
Resets all the statistics back to their initial values.
Toggles internal debug tracing in device driver
Parameters
The name of the VASI device, for example, vasi0.
-all
Exit Status
The statistic fields displayed in the output of the vasistat command and their descriptions are as follows:
Device Type
Displays the description of the adapter type.
Elapsed Time
Displays the real time period which has elapsed since last time the statistics were reset.
Transmit statistics fields
Table 2. Transmit statistics fields and descriptions.
Statistic
Description
Packets
The number of packets transmitted successfully to PHYP by the device.
Bytes
The number of bytes transmitted successfully to PHYP by the device.
Transmit Errors
The number of output errors encountered on this device. This is a counter for
unsuccessful transmissions due to errors returned by PHYP.
Bad Packets
The number of outgoing packets that could not be sent because they were malformed
(for example, packets exceeding the VASI MTU size).
No Buffers
The number of times a packet could not be sent to PHYP because there were no
transmit buffers available for sending.
Interrupts
The number of transmit interrupts (for example. attempts at transmitting a packet to
PHYP).
Receive Statistics Fields
Table 3. Receive statistics fields and descriptions.
Statistic
Description
Packets
The number of packets received successfully from PHYP by the device.
Bytes
The number of bytes received successfully from PHYP by the device.
Receive Errors
The number of receive errors encountered on this device (for example, bad packets).
Bad Packets
The number of incoming packets that could not be processed because they were
malformed (for example, VASI could not figure out to which operation the data
belonged to).
No Buffers
The number of times VASI tried to allocate a system buffer but there was no memory to
do so. This is a soft error since the data will still be delivered in the original buffer.
Interrupts
The number of receive interrupts (for example, number of CRQ entries received by
VASI).
System Buffers
The number of system buffers allocated when the receive buffer pools are low on
buffers.
414
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Miscellaneous Statistics Fields
Table 4. Miscellaneous statistics fields and descriptions.
Statistic
Description
Interrupt Processing
Exceeded
The number of times this device attempted to process more packets on the interrupt
context than the maximum allowed.
Offlevel Interrupt
Scheduled
The number of times an offlevel interrupt was scheduled on this device, in order to
handle packets that could not be handled on the interrupt context.
Maximum Operations
The maximum number of operations (for example, migrations) this device can handle
simultaneously.
Maximum Receive Pools
The maximum number of different receive pool sizes this device can handle.
Active Operations
The number of operations (for example, migrations) that are currently active on this
device.
Operation-specific Statistics Fields
These statistics are displayed for each operation, either active or inactive. Inactive applications will have
the text INACTIVE in the title header, and the text INVALID STREAM ID will appear in the Stream ID field.
None of these statistics will be zeroed out by the -reset flag.
Table 5. Operation-specific statistics fields and descriptions.
Statistic
Description
Operation Type
The type of this operation (for example, migration) as well as any pertinent information
(for example, whether it is the source or target of the migration).
Stream ID
The unique number that identifies this operation; the text INVALID STREAM ID denotes
that this operation is no longer active.
TOP/BOTTOM
The opaque identifiers used by the VASI device and PHYP to refer to this operation.
Elapsed Time
Displays the real time period which has elapsed since the operation was started. This
time will stop when the operation is terminated, so it can be used to measure how long
the operation took to complete.
Flags
Denotes values that may be used to describe this operation:
1. RUNNABLE - this operation has been initialized and is ready to receive CRQ
commands
2. TERMINATED - this operation has been terminated internally due to some error
within VASI
Operation State
State the operation is in with regards to its setup:
1. Not Operational - no memory has been allocated for this operation
2. Work Queues Allocated - the work queues (where incoming CRQ responses are
queued) have been allocated
3. PHYP Registered - VASI has established a connection with PHYP on behalf of this
operation
4. Pools Partially Allocated - some receive buffer pools have been allocated
5. Pools Allocated - all receive buffer pools have been allocated
6. Buffers Partially Registered - some receive buffers have been registered with PHYP
7. Operational - all setup is complete
Alphabetical list of commands
415
Table 5. Operation-specific statistics fields and descriptions. (continued)
Statistic
Description
Stream State
State the stream (for example, migration) is in; these values will vary depending on the
operation in question. For migration, these states are as follows:
1. Invalid - the migration has not been started
2. Enabled - the migration has been started
3. Aborted - the migration has aborted (may be due to internal VASI error,
user-initiated abort, Mover-initiated abort, or PHYP-initiated abort)
4. Suspending - the suspend trigger percentage has been reached and the migrating
partition may be suspended
5. Suspended - the migrating partition has been suspended at the source
6. Resumed - the migrating partition has been resumed at the target
7. Completed - the migration has completed successfully
Total Bytes to Transfer
The estimated total number of bytes to transfer for this operation
Bytes Left to Transfer
The estimated number of bytes that are left to transfer for this operation
Receive Buffer Usage Statistics Fields
These statistics are displayed only for operations that are currently active. For every receive buffer pool
the following information is shown in tabular form:
Table 6. Receive buffer usage statistics fields and descriptions.
Statistic
Description
Size
The size in bytes of the packets of the buffer pool.
Reg
The number of buffers from the buffer pool that are currently registered with PHYP.
Alloc
The number of buffers that have been allocated for the buffer pool.
Max
The maximum number of buffers that could ever be allocated to this buffer pool.
LowReg
The lowest number of buffers from this pool that have ever been registered with PHYP.
Transmit Buffer Usage Statistics Fields
These statistics are displayed only for operations that are currently active.
Table 7. Transmit buffer usage statistics fields and descriptions.
Statistic
Description
Number of Buffers
The number of buffers that have been allocated for the transmit buffer pool.
Buffer Size
The size in bytes of the packets of the transmit buffer pool.
Mapped
The number of buffers in the transmit buffer pool that have been DMA-mapped.
Next Available Buffer
The index of the next buffer to be used in the transmit buffer pool.
In Use
The number of buffers in the transmit buffer pool that are currently being used.
Maximum Used
The maximum number of buffers in the transmit buffer pool that have ever been used
concurrently.
Examples
1. To display the device generic statistics for vasi0, type:
vasistat vasi0
This produces output similar to the following:
416
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
VASI STATISTICS (vasi0) :
Device Type: Virtual Asynchronous Services Interface (VASI)
Elapsed Time: 0 days 0 hours 10 minutes 38 seconds
Transmit Statistics:
Receive Statistics:
-------------------Packets: 2
------------------Packets: 179098
Bytes: 224
Bytes: 753605020
Transmit Errors: 0
Receive Errors: 0
Bad Packets: 0
Bad Packets: 0
No Buffers: 0
No Buffers: 0
Interrupts: 2
Interrupts: 214876
System Buffers: 0
Interrupt Processing Exceeded: 0
Offlevel Interrupt Scheduled: 0
Driver Flags: Up Running 64BitSupport
Maximum Operations: 4
Maximum Receive Pools: 3
Active Operations: 1
2. To display the VASI device generic statistics and the statistics for all the operations for vasi0, type:
vasistat -all vasi0
This produces results similar to the following:
VASI STATISTICS (vasi0) :
Device Type: Virtual Asynchronous Services Interface (VASI)
Elapsed Time: 0 days 0 hours 10 minutes 38 seconds
Transmit Statistics:
Receive Statistics:
--------------------
-------------------
Packets: 2
Packets: 179098
Bytes: 224
Bytes: 753605020
Transmit Errors: 0
Receive Errors: 0
Bad Packets: 0
Bad Packets: 0
Alphabetical list of commands
417
No Buffers: 0
No Buffers: 0
Interrupts: 2
Interrupts: 214876
System Buffers: 0
Interrupt Processing Exceeded: 0
Offlevel Interrupt Scheduled: 0
Driver Flags: Up Running 64BitSupport
Maximum Operations: 4
Maximum Receive Pools: 3
Active Operations: 1
Statistics for each operation:
==============================
Operation #0 (ACTIVE):
---------------------Operation Type: Migration (Source)
Stream ID: 0000000000000001
TOP/BOTTOM: 00000000/00040000
Elapsed Time: 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 11 seconds
Flags: <RUNNABLE>
Operation State: Operational
Stream State: Enabled
Total Bytes to Transfer: 546832384
Bytes Left to Transfer: 360833024
418
Transmit Statistics:
Receive Statistics:
--------------------
-------------------
Packets: 1
Packets: 45415
Bytes: 112
Bytes: 191086638
Transmit Errors: 0
Receive Errors: 0
Bad Packets: 0
Bad Packets: 0
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
No Buffers: 0
No Buffers: 0
Interrupts: 1
Interrupts: 0
System Buffers: 0
Receive Buffer Usage:
---------------------
Size
Reg
Alloc
Max
LowReg
Pool #0
8192
198
256
256
193
Pool #1
2048
2048
2048
2048
2044
Transmit Buffer Usage:
----------------------
Number of Buffers: 64
Buffer Size: 16384 bytes
Mapped: 64
Next Available Buffer: 0
In Use: 0
Maximum Used: 1
Operation #1 (INACTIVE):
-----------------------Operation Type: Unknown (Unknown)
Stream ID: ** INVALID STREAM ID **
TOP/BOTTOM: 00000000/00000000
Elapsed Time: 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds
Flags:
Operation State: Not Operational
Stream State: Unknown
Total Bytes to Transfer: 0
Bytes Left to Transfer: 0
Transmit Statistics:
Receive Statistics:
Alphabetical list of commands
419
--------------------
-------------------
Packets: 0
Packets: 0
Bytes: 0
Bytes: 0
Transmit Errors: 0
Receive Errors: 0
Bad Packets: 0
Bad Packets: 0
No Buffers: 0
No Buffers: 0
Interrupts: 0
Interrupts: 0
System Buffers: 0
Operation #2 (INACTIVE):
-----------------------Operation Type: Unknown (Unknown)
Stream ID: ** INVALID STREAM ID **
TOP/BOTTOM: 00000000/00000000
Elapsed Time: 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds
Flags:
Operation State: Not Operational
Stream State: Unknown
Total Bytes to Transfer: 0
Bytes Left to Transfer: 0
Transmit Statistics:
Receive Statistics:
--------------------
-------------------
Packets: 0
Packets: 0
Bytes: 0
Bytes: 0
Transmit Errors: 0
Receive Errors: 0
Bad Packets: 0
Bad Packets: 0
No Buffers: 0
No Buffers: 0
Interrupts: 0
Interrupts: 0
System Buffers: 0
Operation #3 (INACTIVE):
-----------------------Operation Type: Unknown (Unknown)
420
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Stream ID: ** INVALID STREAM ID **
TOP/BOTTOM: 00000000/00000000
Elapsed Time: 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds
Flags:
Operation State: Not Operational
Stream State: Unknown
Total Bytes to Transfer: 0
Bytes Left to Transfer: 0
Transmit Statistics:
Receive Statistics:
--------------------
-------------------
Packets: 0
Packets: 0
Bytes: 0
Bytes: 0
Transmit Errors: 0
Receive Errors: 0
Bad Packets: 0
Bad Packets: 0
No Buffers: 0
No Buffers: 0
Interrupts: 0
Interrupts: 0
System Buffers: 0
vfcmap command
Purpose
Maps the virtual fibre channel adapter to the physical fibre channel port.
Syntax
vfcmap -vadapter virtual fibre channel adapter -fcp fibre channel port name
Description
The vfcmap command maps or unmaps the virtual fibre channel adapter to the physical fibre channel
port.
Flags
-vadapter virtual fibre channel adapter
-fcp fibre channel port name
Specifies the virtual server adapter.
Specifies the physical fibre channel port.
Note: If no parameter is specified with this flag, the command unmaps the
virtual fibre channel adapter from the physical fibre channel port.
Alphabetical list of commands
421
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
Successful completion.
Invalid flag, argument, or command failure.
Examples
1. To map the virtual fibre channel, vfchost7, to the physical fibre channel port, fcs0, type:
vfcmap -vadapter vfchost7 -fcp fcs0
The system displays a message similar to the following:
vfchost0 changed
2. To unmap the virtual fibre channel, vfchost7, from any physical fibre channel port, type:
vfcmap -vadapter vfchost7 -fcp
The system displays a message similar to the following:
vfchost0 changed
Related Information
The lsmap and lsnports commands.
vi command
Purpose
Edits files with a full-screen display.
Syntax
{ vi | vedit } [ -l ] [ -R ] [ -tTag ] [ -v ] [ -wNumber] [ -yNumber ] [ -r [ File ] ] [{ + | -c } { Subcommand } ] [
File ... ]
Description
The vi command starts a full-screen editor based on the underlying ex editor. Therefore, ex subcommands
can be used within the vi editor. The vedit command starts a version of the vi editor intended for
beginners. In the vedit editor, the report option is set to 1, the showmode option is set, and the novice
option is set, making it a line editor.
You start the vi editor by specifying the name of the file or files to be edited. If you supply more than
one File parameter on the command line, the vi editor edits each file in the specified order. The vi editor
on an existing file displays the name of the file, the number of lines, and the number of characters at the
bottom of the screen. In case of multibyte locales the number of characters need to be interpreted as the
number of bytes.
Since the vi editor is a full-screen editor, you can edit text on a screen-by-screen basis. The vi editor
makes a copy of the file you are editing in an edit buffer, and the contents of the file are not changed
until you save the changes. The position of the cursor on the display screen indicates its position within
the file, and the subcommands affect the file at the cursor position.
422
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
vi Editor Limitations
The following list provides the maximum limits of the vi editor. These counts assume single-byte
characters.
v 8192 characters per line
v 256 characters per global command list
v 128 characters in the previously inserted and deleted text
v 128 characters in a shell escape command
v 128 characters in a string-valued option
v
v
v
v
30 characters in a tag name
128 map macros with 2048 characters total
1,048,560 lines of 8192 characters per line silently enforced
The macro name and the macro text are limited to 100 characters.
Note: Running the vi editor on a file larger than 64 MB may cause the following error message to
display:
0602-103 file too large to place in /tmp
vi Editing Modes
The vi editor operates in the following modes:
command mode
text-input mode
last-line mode
When you start the vi editor, it is in command mode. You can enter any
subcommand except those designated for use only in the text input mode. The
vi editor returns to command mode when subcommands and other modes end.
Press the Esc key to cancel a subcommand.
You use the vi editor in this mode to add text. Enter text input mode with any
of the following subcommands: the a subcommand, A subcommand, i
subcommand, I subcommand, o subcommand, O subcommand, cx
subcommands (where the x represents the scope of the subcommand), C
subcommand, s subcommand, S subcommand, and R subcommand. After
entering one of these subcommands, you can enter text into the editing buffer.
To return to command mode, press the Esc key for normal exit or press
Interrupt (the Ctrl-C key sequence) to end abnormally.
Subcommands with the prefix : (colon), / (slash), ? (question mark), !
(exclamation point), or !! (two exclamation points) read input on a line
displayed at the bottom of the screen. When you enter the initial character, the
vi editor places the cursor at the bottom of the screen, where you enter the
remaining characters of the command. Press the Enter key to run the
subcommand, or press Interrupt (the Ctrl-C key sequence) to cancel it. When the
!! prefix is used, the cursor moves only after both exclamation points are
entered. When you use the : prefix to enter the last-line mode, the vi editor
gives special meaning to the following characters when they are used before
commands that specify counts:
%
All lines regardless of cursor position
$
Last line
.
Current line
Customizing the vi Editor
You can customize the vi editor by:
v Setting vi editor options
v Defining macros
Alphabetical list of commands
423
v Mapping keys
v Setting abbreviations
Setting vi Editor Options
The following list describes the vi editor options you can change with the set command. The default
setting for these options is off. If you turn on one of these toggle options, you can turn it off again by
entering the word no before the option. If you want to discontinue the autowrite vi option, enter noaw,
where no turns off the option and aw specifies the autowrite option.
Note: Do not include parentheses when entering vi options.
vi Option (Abbreviation)
autoindent (ai)
autoprin (ap)
autowrite (aw)
backtags (bt)
beautifying text (bf)
closepunct (cp=)
directory (dir=)
edcompatible (ed)
exrc (exrc)
hardtabs (ht=)
ignorecase (ic)
linelimit (ll=)
lisp (lisp)
424
Description
Indents automatically in text input mode to the indentation of the
previous line by using the spacing between tab stops specified by
the shiftwidth option. The default is noai. To back the cursor up to
the previous tab stop, press the Ctrl-D key sequence. This option is
not in effect for global commands.
Prints the current line after any command that changes the editing
buffer. The default is ap. This option applies only to the last
command in a sequence of commands on a single line and is not in
effect for global commands.
Writes the editing buffer to the file automatically before the :n
subcommand, the :ta subcommand, the Ctrl-A, Ctrl -], and Ctrl -T
key sequences, and the ! subcommand if the editing buffer changed
since the last write subcommand. The default is noaw.
Allows the Ctrl-T subcommand to return the file editing position to
the location where the previous Ctrl-] subcommand was issued. If
nobacktags is set, then Ctrl-T is the same as Ctrl-]. The default is
backtags.
Prevents the user from entering control characters in the editing
buffer during text entry (except for tab, new-line, and form-feed
indicators). The default is nobf. This option applies to command
input.
Handles a list of closing punctuation, especially when wrapping
text (wraptype option). Precedes multicharacter punctuation with
the number of characters; for example, cp=3..;)}. The vi command
does not split closing punctuation when wrapping.
Displays the directory that contains the editing buffer. The default
is dir = /var/tmp.
Retains g (global) and c (confirm) subcommand suffixes during
multiple substitutions and causes the r (read) suffix to work like
the r subcommand. The default is noed.
If not set, ignores any .exrc file in the current directory during
initialization, unless the current directory is that named by the
HOME environment variable. The default is noexrc.
Tells the vi editor the distance between the hardware tab stops on
your display screen. (This option must match the tab setting of the
underlying terminal or terminal emulator.) The default is ht=8.
Ignores distinction between uppercase and lowercase while
searching for regular expressions. The default is noic.
Sets the maximum number of lines, as per the -y command-line
option. This option only is effective if used with the .exrc file or the
EXINIT environment variable.
Removes the special meaning of ( ), { }, [ [, and ] ] and enables the
= (formatted print) operator for s-expressions, so you can edit list
processing (LISP) programs. The default is nolisp.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
vi Option (Abbreviation)
list (list)
magic (magic)
mesg (mesg)
modeline (modeline)
novice
number (nu)
optimize (opt)
paragraphs (para=)
partialchar (pc=)
prompt
readonly (ro)
redraw (redraw)
remap
report (re=)
scroll (scr=)
sections (sect=)
shell (sh=)
shiftwidth (sw=)
showmatch (sm)
Description
Displays text with tabs (^I) and the marked end of lines ($). The
default is nolist.
Treats the . (period), [ (left bracket), and * (asterisk) characters as
special characters when searching for a pattern. In off mode, only
the ( ) (parentheses) and $ (dollar sign) retain special meanings.
However, you can evoke special meaning in other characters by
preceding them with a \ (backslash). The default is magic.
Turns on write permission to the terminal if set while in visual
mode. This option only is effective if used with the .exrc file or the
EXINIT environment variable. The default is on.
Runs a vi editor command line if found in the first five or the last
five lines of the file. A vi editor command line can be anywhere in
a line. For the vi editor to recognize a command line, the line must
contain a space or a tab followed by the ex: or vi: string. The
command line is ended by a second : (colon). The vi editor tries to
interpret any data between the first and second colon as vi editor
commands. The default is nomodeline.
Indicates whether you are in novice mode. You cannot change the
value by using the set command.
Displays lines prefixed with their line numbers. The default is
nonu.
Speeds the operation of terminals that lack cursor addressing. The
default is noopt.
Defines vi macro names that start paragraphs. The default is
para=IPLPPPQPP\ LIpplpipnpbp. Single-letter nroff macros, such
as the .P macro, must include the space as a quoted character if
respecifying a paragraph.
Appears in the last display column where a double-wide character
would not be displayed completely. The default character is (minus sign).
Prompts for a new vi editor command when in command mode by
printing a : (colon). The default is on.
Sets permanent read-only mode. The default is noreadonly.
Simulates a smart workstation on a dumb workstation. The default
is nore.
Allows defining macros in terms of other macros. The default is on.
Sets the number of times you can repeat a command before a
message is displayed. For subcommands that produce many
messages, such as global subcommands, the messages are
displayed when the command sequence completes. The default is
report=5.
Sets the number of lines to be scrolled when the user scrolls up or
down. The default is 1/2 of the window size, rounded down.
Defines vi macro names that start sections. The default is
sect=NHSHHH\ HUuhsh+c. Single-letter nroff macros, such as the
.P macro, must include the space as a quoted character if
respecifying a paragraph.
Defines the shell for the ! subcommand or the :! subcommand. The
default is the login shell.
Sets the distance for the software tab stops used by the autoindent
option, the shift commands ( > and < ), and the text input
commands ( the Ctrl-D and Ctrl-T key sequences). This vi option
only affects the indentation at the beginning of a line. The default
is sw=8.
Shows the ( (matching left parenthesis) or { (left bracket) as you
type the ) (right parenthesis) or } (right bracket). The default is
nosm.
Alphabetical list of commands
425
vi Option (Abbreviation)
showmode (smd)
slowopen (slow)
tabstop (ts=)
tags (tags =)
term (term=)
terse (terse)
timeout (to)
ttytype
warn (warn)
window (wi=)
wrapmargin (wm=)
wrapscan (ws)
wraptype (wt=)
Description
Displays a message to indicate when the vi editor is in input mode.
The default is nosmd.
Postpones updating the display screen during inserts. The default
is noslow.
Sets the distance between tab stops in a displayed file. The default
is ts=8.
Defines the search path for the database file of function names
created using the ctags command. The default is tags=tags\
/usr/lib/tags.
Sets the type of workstation you are using. The default is
term=$TERM, where $TERM is the value of the TERM shell
variable.
Allows the vi editor to display the short form of messages. The
default is noterse.
Sets a time limit of two seconds on an entry of characters. This
limit allows the characters in a macro to be entered and processed
as separate characters when the timeout option is set. To resume
use of the macro, set the notimeout option. The default is to.
Indicates the tty type for the terminal being used. You cannot
change this value from the vi editor.
Displays a warning message before the ! subcommand executes a
shell command if it is the first time you issued a shell command
after changes were made in the editing buffer but not written to a
file. The default is warn.
Sets the number of lines displayed in one window of text. The
default depends on the baud rate at which you are operating: 600
baud or less, 8 lines; 1200 baud, 16 lines; higher speeds, full screen
minus 1 line.
Sets the margin for automatic word wrapping from one line to the
next. The default is wm=0. A value of 0 turns off word wrapping.
Allows string searches to wrap from the end of the editing buffer
to the beginning. The default is ws.
Indicates the method used to wrap words at the end of a line. The
default value is general. You can specify one of the following four
values:
general Allows wraps on word breaks as white space between two
characters. This setting is the default.
word
Allows wraps on words.
rigid
Allows wraps on columns and before closing punctuation.
flexible
writeany (wa)
Allows wraps on columns, but one character of
punctuation can extend past the margin.
Turns off the checks usually made before a write subcommand. The
default is nowa.
To see a list of the vi editor settings that have changed from the default settings, enter set and press the
spacebar. Press the Enter key to return to the command mode.
To see a complete list of the vi editor settings, enter set all. Press the Enter key to return to the
command mode.
To turn on a vi editor option, enter set Option. This command automatically returns you to the
command mode.
426
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
To turn on multiple vi editor options, enter set Option Option Option. This command turns on the three
designated vi editor options and returns you to the command mode.
To turn off a vi editor option, enter set noOption. This command automatically returns you to the
command mode.
To change the value of a vi editor option, enter set Option=Value. This command automatically returns
you to the command mode.
You can use the :set subcommand of the vi editor to set options for this editing session only, or to set
options for this editing session and all future editing sessions.
To set or change vi editor options for this editing session only, enter the :set subcommand from the
command line.
To set vi options for all editing sessions, put the :set subcommand in the EXINIT environment variable in
the .profile file (read by the shell on login) or put the set subcommand into a .exrc file. The vi editor first
looks for the EXINIT environment variable and runs its commands. If the EXINIT environment variable
does not exist, the vi editor then looks for the $HOME/.exrc file and runs its commands. Last, and
regardless of any previous results, the vi editor looks for the local .exrc file and runs its commands.
Note: This process is true except with the tvi command (trusted vi). In this instance, the vi editor looks
for and runs only the /etc/.exrc file.
For information about changing an option by setting the EXINIT environment variable, see the
description of environment variables in the environment file.
The .exrc file can contain subcommands of the form set Option=Value; for example:
set cp=3 . . ;
To include a comment in the .exrc file, use a " (double quotation mark) as the first character in the line.
Defining Macros
If you use a subcommand or sequence of subcommands frequently, you can use the vi editor to define a
macro that issues that subcommand or sequence.
To define a macro, enter the sequence of subcommands into a buffer named with a letter of the alphabet.
The lowercase letters a through z overlay the contents of the buffer, and the uppercase letters A through
Z append text to the previous contents of the buffer, allowing you to build a macro piece by piece.
For example, to define a buffer macro named c that searches for the word corner and makes the third line
after the word corner the current line, enter the following command:
o /corner/+3
Then press the Esc key and enter the following command:
"c
where c is the name of the buffer macro.
To add text to the previous contents of the defined buffer, enter the o viSubcommand, press the Esc key,
and enter "CapitalLetter, where the CapitalLetter variable specifies an uppercase letter A through Z. For
example, to build a buffer macro named T that searches for the word corner and allows you to add more
commands, enter the following command:
o corner
Alphabetical list of commands
427
Then press the Esc key and enter the following command:
"T
where T is the name of the buffer macro. You can repeat this process at any time to add more vi
subcommands to the same buffer.
For example, to add commands that move the cursor to the previous line and delete that line, enter the
following command:
o -dd
where - (minus sign) means to move the cursor up one line, and dd means to delete the current line.
Press the Esc key and enter the following command:
"Tdd
To start the macro, enter @Letter, where the Letter variable specifies the letter name of the buffer macro
you want to use. To use the same macro again, enter @@ (two at symbols). For example, enter @T to start
the T buffer macro and run the search, move cursor, and delete line commands. Enter @@T to start the T
buffer macro again.
The character set used by your system is defined by the collation table. This table affects the performance
of vi macros.
Mapping Keyse
You can use the :map, :map!, and :ab subcommands to map a keystroke to a command or a sequence of
commands. The :map subcommand is used in the command mode. The :map! and :ab subcommands are
used in the text input mode. You can map keys for this editing session and all future editing sessions or
only for the current editing session from either mode.
To map keys for all future editing sessions, put the subcommand into a $HOME/.exrc file. Each time you
start the vi editor, it reads this file. The mapping remains in effect for every editing session.
To map keys for the current editing session only from the command mode, start the subcommand during the
vi editor session. To map keys for the current editing session only from the text input mode, enter the
subcommand on the command line during the vi editor session. The mapping remains in effect only for
the current editing session.
Attention: If you use an IBM 3161 ASCII display station, IBM 3163 ASCII display station, or IBM 3101
ASCII display station, the default key-mapping of the vi editor can cause you to lose data. To see the
default mapping, issue a :map subcommand. Specific problems arise with the Esc-J or Shift-J key
sequence. These key sequences delete all information from the current position of the cursor to the end of
the file. To avoid problems, change this key sequence using a .exrc file.
The :map, :map!, and :ab subcommands are defined and used as follows:
428
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
:map
Defines macros in the command mode. The :map subcommand allows you to run a specified command or
sequence of commands by pressing a single key while in the vi editor.
To map keys in the command mode, start the vi editor with an empty editing buffer and do not name a vi
file using the vi command or type anything into the buffer after the vi editor starts. You can use the :map
subcommand to do the following:
v To map a character to a sequence of editing commands, enter:
:map Letter viSubcommand
v To unmap a character previously mapped in command mode, enter:
:unmap Letter
v To display a list of current mappings for the command mode, enter
:map
The following keys are not used by the vi editor, but are available for use with the :map subcommand in
the command mode:
v Letters g, K, q, V, and v
v Control key sequences Ctrl-A, Ctrl-K, Ctrl-O, Ctrl-W, and Ctrl-X
v Symbols _ (underscore), * (asterisk), \ (backslash), and = (equal sign)
Although you can map a key that is already used by the vi editor, the key's usual function is not available
as long as the map is in effect. Some terminals allow you to map command sequences to function keys. If
you are in LISP mode, the = (equal sign) cannot be used because it is used by the vi editor.
To map the letter v to the sequence of commands that would locate the next occurrence of the word map
and change it to the word MAP, enter the following command:
:map v /map<Ctrl-V><Enter>cwMAP<Ctrl-V><Esc><Ctrl-V><Enter>
The previous example instructs the vi editor to locate the next occurrence of map (/map<Ctrl-V><Enter>),
change map to MAP (cwMAP), end the change-word subcommand (<Ctrl-V><Esc>), and enter the command
(<Ctrl-V><Enter>).
Note: To prevent the vi editor from interpreting the Enter key, it must be preceded by the Ctrl-V key
sequence when being mapped. This condition is also true of the Esc, Backspace, and Delete keys.
To map the control characters Ctrl-A, Ctrl-K, and Ctrl-O, simultaneously press the Ctrl key and the letter.
For example, to map the Ctrl-A key sequence to the sequence of commands that saves a file and edits the
next one in a series, enter the following command:
:map <Ctrl-A> :w<Ctrl-V><Enter>:n<Ctrl-V><Enter>
To map the control characters Ctrl-T, Ctrl-W, and Ctrl-X, you must first escape them with the Ctrl-V key
sequence.
Alphabetical list of commands
429
To map the | (pipe symbol), you must first escape it with the two Ctrl-V key sequences, as illustrated by
the following example that maps the character g to the sequence of commands that escapes to the shell,
concatenates the file /etc/motd, and pipes the output to the wc command:
:map g :!cat /etc/motd <Ctrl-V><Ctrl-V>| wc<Ctrl-V><Enter>
If your terminal permits you to map function keys, you must reference them with the #number key
sequence to designate the number of the function key that you want to map. In the following example,
the F1 function key is mapped to the sequence of commands that deletes a word and moves the cursor
three words down:
:map #1 dwwww
In order for function key mapping to work, the output of the function key for your terminal type must
match the output defined in the terminfo file. These definitions are denoted by the kfnumber entries,
where kf1 represents the F1 function key, kf2 represents the F2 function key, and so on. If the output that
you get when you press the function key does not match this entry, you must use the terminal's setup
mode to correct the settings to match these terminal database entries before any mapping can occur.
You can also map certain keyboard special keys, such as the Home, End, Page Up, and Page Down keys.
For most terminals, these keys are already mapped in the vi editor. You can verify this mapping by using
the :map subcommand. If these keys are not already mapped, you can use the :map subcommand as
follows:
:map <Ctrl-V><End> G
:map <Ctrl-V><Home> 1G
:map <Ctrl-V><PageUp> <Ctrl-F>
:map <Ctrl-V><PageDown> <Ctrl-B>
To get a listing of all current maps in the command mode, enter the :map subcommand. The preceding
examples are then displayed as follows:
v
:map!
v
/map<Ctrl-M>cwMAP<Ctrl-[>Ctrl-M>
<Ctrl-A> <Ctrl-A>
:w<Ctrl-M>:n<Ctrl-M>
g
g
:!cat /etc/motd | wc <Ctrl-M>
Note: The Ctrl-V and Enter key sequence is displayed as the Ctrl-M key sequence, and the Ctrl-V and Esc
key sequence is displayed as the Ctrl-[ key sequence.
Maps character strings to single keys while in text input mode. To map keys in the text input mode, start
the vi editor with an empty editing buffer and do not name a vi file using the vi command or type
anything into the buffer after the vi editor starts. You can use the :map! subcommand to do the following:
v To map a letter to one or more vi strings in text input mode, enter:
:map! Letter String
v To unmap a letter previously mapped in text input mode, enter:
:unmap! Letter
v To display a list of existing strings that are mapped to specific keys in text input mode, enter:
:map!
Typing the mapped key while in text input mode produces the specified string. The Ctrl-V and Esc key
sequence puts you into command mode, backs up to the beginning of the current word (bbw), and starts
the cw (change-word) subcommand. For example:
:map! % <Ctrl-V><Esc>bbwcw
When typing text, if you realize that you have mistyped a word, you can change it by pressing the %
(percent) key and retyping the word. You are automatically returned to insert mode.
Note: Be careful when choosing keys to be used for the :map! subcommand. Once keys have been
mapped, they can no longer be input as text without first issuing the :unmap! subcommand.
430
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
:ab
Maps a key or sequence of keys to a string of characters for use in the text input mode. The :ab
subcommand is useful when inputting text that possesses several repetitive phrases, names, or titles.
The following example replaces the word city with the phrase Austin, Texas 78759 whenever it is typed
in text input mode and followed by a white space, period, or comma:
:ab city Austin, Texas 78759
For example, if while inputting text, you type the following:
My current residence is city.
Pressing the Tab key expands the word city to read:
My current residence is Austin, Texas 78759.
The abbreviation is not expanded within a word. For example, if you type My current residence iscity,
the word iscity is not expanded.
If the :map! subcommand is used to map abbreviations for insert mode, then all occurrences of the
abbreviations are expanded regardless of where it occurs. If you used the :map! subcommand for the
preceding example (:map! city Austin, Texas 78759), then whenever you type the word city, regardless
of what precedes or follows, the word will be expanded to Austin, Texas 78759. Therefore, the word
iscity becomes isAustin, Texas 78759.
Note: Be careful when choosing the keys that are used for the :ab subcommand. Once keys are defined,
they can no longer be input as text without first issuing the :unab subcommand.
Setting Abbreviations
The set command has behavior similar to the map! command except that the set command substitutes
the string for the abbreviation only when the abbreviation is a separate word. You can use the set
command of the vi editor to:
v List existing abbreviations
v Remove an abbreviation
v Set (define) an abbreviation
Note: Start the vi editor with an empty editing buffer. Do not name a vi file using the vi command or
type anything into the buffer after the vi editor starts. Press the Esc key to be sure you are in the
command mode.
To list abbreviations
To remove abbreviations
Enter the :ab command to list existing abbreviations.
Press the Enter key to return to command mode.
Enter the :anabAbbreviation command to remove an
abbreviation, where the Abbreviation variable specifies
the character string you do not want abbreviated any
more.
Alphabetical list of commands
431
To set (define) an abbreviation
Enter the :ab Abbreviation String command to set an
abbreviation, where the Abbreviation variable specifies
the character string being defined as an abbreviation
and the String variable specifies the character string
being abbreviated. The abbreviation can be substituted
for the string only when the abbreviation is a separate
word.
For example, if you enter the :ab kn upper command
and then type acknowledge while in the text input
mode, the set abbreviation string is not started because
the kn string in the word acknowledge is not a separate
word.
However, if you type the :ab kn upper command and
then type make the kn line all kncase while in the
text input mode, the result is make the upper line all
uppercase.
Flags
-cSubcommand
-l
-r[File]
-R
-tTag
-v
-wNumber
-yNumber
+[Subcommand]
Carries out the ex editor subcommand before viewing with vi begins. The cursor moves to
the line affected by the last subcommand to be carried out. When a null operand is
entered, as in -c' ', the vi editor places the cursor on the first line of the file. The -c flag is
incompatible with the + flag. Do not specify both flags at the same time.
Enters the vi editor in LISP mode. In this mode, the vi editor creates indents appropriate
for LISP code, and the (, ), {, }, [[, and ]] subcommands are modified to act appropriately
for LISP.
Recovers a file after a vi editor or system malfunction. If you do not specify the File
variable, the vi editor displays a list of all saved files.
Sets the readonly option to protect the file against overwriting.
Edits the file containing the Tag variable and positions the vi editor at its definition. To use
this flag, you must first create a database of function names and their locations using the
ctags command.
Enters the vi editor in the verbose mode.
Sets the default window size to the value specified by the Number variable. This flag is
useful when you use the vi editor over a low-speed line.
Overrides the maximum line setting of 1,048,560 with any value greater than 1024. You
should request twice the number of lines that you require because the vi editor uses the
extra lines for buffer manipulation.
Carries out the ex editor subcommand before editing begins. If you do not specify the
Subcommand variable, the cursor is placed on the first line of the file. This + flag is
incompatible with the -c flag. Do not specify both flags at the same time.
vi General Subcommand Syntax
Use the following general syntax to enter subcommands:
[Named_Buffer] [Operator] [Number] Object
Note: Square brackets indicate optional items.
[Named_Buffer]
[Operator]
[Number]
432
Specifies a temporary text storage area.
Specifies the subcommand or action; instructs the vi editor.
Specifies either the extent of the action or a line address as a whole number.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Object
Specifies what to act on, such as a text object (a character, word, sentence, paragraph,
section, character string) or a text position (a line, position in the current line, screen
position).
Counts before Subcommands
You can put a number in front of many subcommands. The vi editor interprets this number in one of the
following ways:
v Go to the line specified by the Number parameter:
5G
10Z
v Go to the column specified by the Number parameter:
25|
v Scroll the number of lines up or down specified by the Number parameter:
10Ctrl-U
10Ctrl-D
vi Editor Subcommands
Use the subcommands to perform these kinds of actions:
v Moving the cursor
v Editing text
v Manipulating files
v Other actions
Moving the Cursor
Use subcommands to move the cursor within a file in these ways:
v Moving within a line
v
v
v
v
v
v
Moving within a line by character position
Moving to words
Moving by line position
Moving to sentences, paragraphs, or sections
Moving by redrawing the screen
Paging and scrolling
v Searching for patterns
v Marking a specific location in a file and returning
Moving within a Line
Enter the following subcommands in command mode. You can cancel an incomplete command by
pressing the Esc key. If you need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi General
Subcommand Syntax."
Left Arrow or h or Ctrl-H
Down Arrow or j or Ctrl-J or Ctrl-N
Up Arrow or k or Ctrl-P
Right Arrow or l
Moves the cursor one character to the left.
Moves the cursor down one line (it remains in
the same column).
Moves the cursor up one line (it remains in the
same column).
Moves the cursor one character to the right.
Alphabetical list of commands
433
Moving within a Line by Character Position
Enter the following subcommands in command mode. You can cancel an incomplete command by
pressing the Esc key. If you need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi General
Subcommand Syntax."
Moves the cursor to the first nonblank character.
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.
Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
Moves the cursor to the next x character.
Moves the cursor to the last x character.
Moves the cursor to one column before the next x character.
Moves the cursor to one column after the last x character.
Repeats the last f, F, t, or T subcommand.
Repeats the last f, F, t, or T subcommand in the opposite direction.
Moves the cursor to the specified column.
^
0
$
fx
Fx
tx
Tx
;
,
Number|
Moving to Words
Enter the following subcommands in command mode. If you need information about the format of vi
subcommands, "vi General Subcommand Syntax."
w
b
e
W
B
E
Moves
Moves
Moves
Moves
Moves
Moves
the
the
the
the
the
the
cursor
cursor
cursor
cursor
cursor
cursor
to
to
to
to
to
to
the
the
the
the
the
the
next small word.
previous small word.
next end of a small word.
next big word.
previous big word.
next end of a big word.
Moving by Line Position
Enter the following subcommands in command mode. If you need information about the format of vi
subcommands, see "vi General Subcommand Syntax."
H
L
M
+
Enter
Moves
Moves
Moves
Moves
Moves
Moves
the
the
the
the
the
the
cursor
cursor
cursor
cursor
cursor
cursor
to
to
to
to
to
to
the
the
the
the
the
the
top line on the screen.
last line on the screen.
middle line on the screen.
next line at its first nonblank character.
previous line at its first nonblank character.
next line at its first nonblank character.
Moving to Sentences, Paragraphs, or Sections
Enter the following subcommands in command mode. You can cancel an incomplete subcommand by
pressing the Esc key. If you need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi General
Subcommand Syntax."
]]
Places the cursor at the beginning of the previous sentence, or the previous s-expression if you are in LISP
mode.
Places the cursor at the beginning of the next sentence, or the next s-expression if you are in LISP mode.
Places the cursor at the beginning of the previous paragraph, or at the next list if you are in LISP mode.
Places the cursor at the beginning of the next paragraph, at the next section if you are in C mode, or at the
next list if you are in LISP mode.
Places the cursor at the next section, or function if you are in LISP mode.
434
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
(
)
{
}
[[
Places the cursor at the previous section, or function if you are in LISP mode.
Moving by Redrawing the Screen
Enter the following subcommands in command mode. You can cancel an incomplete subcommand by
pressing the Esc key. If you need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi General
Subcommand Syntax."
Redraws the screen with the
Redraws the screen with the
Redraws the screen with the
Redraws the screen with the
parameter, at the bottom.
z
zz.
/Pattern/z-
current line at the top of the screen.
current line at the bottom of the screen.
current line at the center of the screen.
line containing the character string, specified by the Pattern
Paging and Scrolling
Enter the following subcommands in command mode. You can cancel an incomplete subcommand by
pressing the Esc key. If you need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi General
Subcommand Syntax."
Ctrl-U
Ctrl-D
Ctrl-F
Ctrl-B
Ctrl-E
Ctrl-Y
z+
z^
Scrolls up one-half screen.
Scrolls down one-half screen.
Scrolls forward one screen.
Scrolls backward one screen.
Scrolls the window down one line.
Scrolls the window up one line.
Pages up.
Pages down.
Searching for Patterns
Enter the following subcommands in command mode. You can cancel an incomplete subcommand by
pressing the Esc key. If you need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi General
Subcommand Syntax."
[Number]G
/Pattern
?Pattern
n
N
/Pattern/+Number
?Pattern?-Number
%
Places the cursor at the line number specified by the Number parameter or at the last
line if the Number parameter is not specified.
Places the cursor at the next line containing the character string specified by the
Pattern parameter.
Places the cursor at the next previous line containing the character string specified
by the Pattern parameter.
Repeats the last search for the text specified by the Pattern parameter in the same
direction.
Repeats the last search for the text specified by the Pattern parameter in the opposite
direction.
Places the cursor the specified number of lines after the line matching the character
string specified by the Pattern parameter.
Places the cursor the specified number of lines before the line matching the character
string specified by the Pattern parameter.
Finds the parenthesis or brace that matches the one at current cursor position.
Alphabetical list of commands
435
Editing Text
The subcommands for editing enable you to perform the following tasks:
v Marking a specific location in a file and returning
v Adding text to a file
v Changing text while in input mode
v Changing text from command mode
v Copying and moving text
v Restoring and repeating changes
Marking a Specific Location in a File and Returning
Enter the following subcommands in command mode. You can cancel an incomplete subcommand by
pressing the Esc key. If you need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi General
Subcommand Syntax."
"
"
mx
`x
'x
Moves the cursor to the previous location of the current line.
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line containing the previous location of the current line.
Marks the current position with the letter specified by the x parameter.
Moves the cursor to the mark specified by the x parameter.
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line containing the mark specified by the x parameter.
Adding Text to a File (Text Input Mode)
Enter the following subcommands in command mode to change the vi editor into text input mode. If you
need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi General Subcommand Syntax."
Inserts text specified by the Text parameter after the cursor. End text input mode by pressing the Esc key.
aText
Adds text specified by the Text parameter to the end of the line. End text input mode by pressing the Esc
key.
Inserts text specified by the Text parameter before the cursor. End text input mode by pressing the Esc key.
AText
iText
Inserts text specified by the Text parameter before the first nonblank character in the line. End text input
mode by pressing the Esc key.
Adds an empty line below the current line. End text input mode by pressing the Esc key.
IText
o
Adds an empty line above the current line. End text input mode by pressing the Esc key.
O
Changing Text While in Input Mode
Use the following subcommands only while in text input mode. These commands have different
meanings in command mode. If you need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi
General Subcommand Syntax."
Ctrl-D
^ Ctrl-D
0Ctrl-D
Esc
Ctrl-H
Ctrl-Q
Ctrl-V
Ctrl-W
436
Goes back to previous autoindent stop.
Ends autoindent for this line only.
Moves cursor back to left margin.
Ends insertion and returns to command state.
Erases the last character.
Enters any character if xon is disabled.
Enters any character.
Erases the last small word.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
\
Ctrl-?
Quotes the erase and kill characters.
Interrupts and ends insert or the Ctrl-D key sequence.
Changing Text from Command Mode
Use the following subcommands in command mode. An incomplete subcommand can be canceled by
pressing the Esc key. If you need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi General
Subcommand Syntax."
C
cc
cw
cwText
D
dd
dw
J
rx
RText
s
S
u
x
X
<<
<L
>>
>L
~
!
Changes the rest of the line (same as c$).
Changes a line.
Changes a word.
Changes a word to the text specified by the Text parameter.
Deletes the rest of the line (same as d$).
Deletes a line.
Deletes a word.
Joins lines.
Replaces the current character with the character specified by x.
Overwrites characters with the text specified by the Text parameter.
Substitutes characters (same as cl).
Substitutes lines (same as cc).
Undoes the previous change.
Deletes a character at the cursor.
Deletes a character before the cursor (same as dh).
Shifts one line to the left.
Shifts all lines from the cursor to the end of the screen to the left.
Shifts one line to the right.
Shifts all lines from the cursor to the end of the screen to the right.
Changes letter at the cursor to the opposite case.
Indents for LISP.
Copying and Moving Text
Use the following subcommands in command mode. An incomplete subcommand can be canceled by
pressing the Esc key. If you need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi General
Subcommand Syntax."
p
P
"xp
"xd
y
"xy
Y
Puts back text from the undo buffer after the cursor.
Puts back text from the undo buffer before the cursor.
Puts back text from the x buffer.
Deletes text into the x buffer.
Places the object that follows (for example, w for word) into the undo buffer.
Places the object that follows into the x buffer, where x is any letter.
Places the line in the undo buffer.
Restoring and Repeating Changes
Use the following subcommands in command mode. An incomplete subcommand can be canceled by
pressing the Esc key. If you need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi General
Subcommand Syntax."
Alphabetical list of commands
437
u
Undoes the last change.
U
.
Note: After an undo, the cursor moves to the first non-blank character on the updated current line.
Restores the current line if the cursor has not left the line since the last change.
Repeats the last change or increments the "np command.
Note:
1. This subcommand will repeat the last change, including an undo. Therefore, after an undo, repeat
performs an undo rather than repeat the last change.
2. This subcommand is not meant for use with a macro. Enter @@ (two at signs) to repeat a macro.
Retrieves the nth last delete of a complete line or block of lines.
"n p
Manipulating Files
The subcommands for manipulating files allow you to do the tasks outlined in the following sections:
v Saving changes to a file
v Editing a second file
v Editing a list of files
v Finding file information
Saving Changes to a File
Use the following subcommands in command mode. If you need information about the format of vi
subcommands, see "vi General Subcommand Syntax."
:w
:w File
:w! File
Writes the edit buffer contents to the original file. If you are using this subcommand within the ex
editor, you do not need to type the : (colon).
Writes the edit buffer contents to the file specified by the File parameter. If you are using this
subcommand within the ex editor, you do not need to type the : (colon).
Overwrites the file specified by the File parameter with the edit buffer contents. If you are using this
subcommand within the ex editor, you do not need to type the : (colon).
Editing a Second File
Enter the following subcommands in command mode. If you need information about the format of vi
subcommands, see "vi General Subcommand Syntax."
:e File
:e!
:e + File
:e + Number File
:e #
:r File
:r !Command
:ta Tag
438
Edits the specified file. If you are using this subcommand from the ex editor, you do
not need to type the : (colon).
Re-edits the current file and discards all changes.
Edits the specified file starting at the end.
Edits the specified file starting at the specified line number.
Edits the alternate file. The alternate file is usually the previous file name before
accessing another file with a :e command. However, if changes are pending on the
current file when a new file is called, the new file becomes the alternate file. This
subcommand is the same as the Ctrl-A subcommand.
Reads the file into the editing buffer by adding new lines below the current line. If
you are using this subcommand from the ex editor, you do not need to type the :
(colon).
Runs the specified command and places its output into the file by adding new lines
below the current cursor position.
Edits a file containing the Tag tag starting at the location of the tag. To use this
subcommand, you must first create a database of function names and their locations
using the ctags command. If you are using this subcommand from the ex editor, you
do not need to type the : (colon).
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Edits a file containing the tag associated with the current word starting at the
location of the tag. To use this subcommand, you must first create a database of
function names and their locations using the ctags command. Ctrl-T edits a file at
the editing position where the previous Ctrl-] subcommand was issued. If multiple
Ctrl-] subcommands have been issued, then multiple Ctrl-T subcommands can be
used to return to previous editing positions where Ctrl-] subcommands were issued.
Edits the alternate file. The alternate file is usually the previous current file name.
However, if changes are pending on the current file when a new file is called, the
new file becomes the alternate file. This subcommand is the same as the :e #
subcommand.
Ctrl-]
Ctrl-A
Editing a List of Files
Enter the following subcommands in command mode. If you need information about the format of vi
subcommands, see "vi General Subcommand Syntax."
:n
:n Files
Edits the next file in the list entered on the command line. If you are using this subcommand from
the ex editor, a : (colon) is not needed.
Specifies a new list of files to edit. If you are using this subcommand from the ex editor, a : (colon)
is not needed.
Finding File Information
Enter the following subcommand in command mode. If you need information about the format of vi
subcommands, see "vi General Subcommand Syntax".
Ctrl-G
Shows the current file name, current line number, number of lines in the file, and percentage of the way
through the file where the cursor is located.
Other Actions
The vi editor provides the subcommands described in the following sections:
v Adjusting the screen
v Entering shell commands
v Interrupting and ending the vi editor
Adjusting the Screen
Enter the following subcommands in command mode. An incomplete subcommand can be canceled by
pressing the Esc key. If you need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi General
Subcommand Syntax."
Ctrl-L
Ctrl-R
zNumber
Clears and redraws the screen.
Redraws the screen and eliminates blank lines marked with @ (at sign).
Makes the window the specified number of lines long.
Entering Shell Commands
The following subcommands allow you to run a command within the vi editor. Enter these
subcommands in command mode. If you need information about the format of vi subcommands, see "vi
General Subcommand Syntax."
Alphabetical list of commands
439
Enters the shell to allow you to run more than one command. You can
return to the vi editor by pressing the Ctrl-D key sequence. If you are
using this subcommand within the ex editor, a : (colon) is not needed.
Runs the specified command and then returns to the vi editor. If you
are using this subcommand within the ex editor, a : (colon) is not
needed.
:sh
:!Command
:!!
Number!!Command
!Object Command
Note: The # (alternate file), % (current file), and ! (previous command)
special characters are expanded when following a :! subcommand. To
prevent any of these characters from being expanded, use the \
(backslash).
Repeats the last :!Command subcommand.
Runs the specified command and replaces the lines specified by Number
with the output of the command. If a number is not specified, the
default value is 1. If the command expects standard input, the specified
lines are used as input.
Runs the specified command and replaces the object specified by the
Object parameter with the output of the command. If the command
expects standard input, the specified object is used as input.
Interrupting and Ending the vi Editor
Enter the following subcommands in command mode. If you need information about the format of vi
subcommands, see "vi General Subcommand Syntax."
Q
ZZ
:q
:q!
Esc
Ctrl-?
Enters the ex editor in command mode.
Exits the vi editor, saving changes.
Quits the vi editor. If you have changed the contents of the editing buffer, the vi editor displays a
warning message and does not quit. If you are using this subcommand from the ex editor, a : (colon) is
not needed.
Quits the vi editor, discarding the editing buffer. If you are using this subcommand from the ex editor, a
: (colon) is not needed.
Ends text input or ends an incomplete subcommand.
Interrupts a subcommand.
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
Indicates successful completion.
Indicates an error occurred.
Input Files
Input files must be text files or files that are similar to text files except for an incomplete last line that is
no longer than 8191 bytes in length and contains no null characters.
The .exrc files must be text files consisting of ex commands.
By default, the vi editor reads lines from the files to be edited without interpreting any of those lines as
any form of vi editor command.
Related Information
sed command.
440
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
viosbr command
Purpose
Performs the operations for backing up the virtual and logical configuration, listing the configuration,
and restoring the configuration of the Virtual I/O Server.
The viosbr command can be run only by the padmin user.
Syntax
To perform a backup:
viosbr -backup -file FileName [-frequency daily|weekly|monthly [-numfiles fileCount]]
To view a backup file:
viosbr -view -file FileName [-type devType] [-detail]
viosbr -view -file FileName -mapping
viosbr -view -list [UserDir]
To restore a backup file:
viosbr -restore -file FileName [-validate] [-type devType] [-inter]
viosbr -restore -file FileName [-type devType] [-force]
To disable a scheduled backup:
viosbr -nobackup
Description
The viosbr command uses the parameters -backup, -view, and -restore, respectively, to perform backup,
list, and recovery tasks for the Virtual I/O Server.
This viosbr command backs up all the relevant data to recover a Virtual I/O Server after a new
installation. The -backup parameter backs up all the device properties and the virtual devices
configuration on the Virtual I/O Server. This includes information regarding logical devices, such as
storage pools, file-backed storage pools, the virtual media repository, and PowerVM Active Memory
Sharing (AMS) paging devices. It also includes the virtual devices, such as Etherchannel, shared Ethernet
adapters (SEAs), virtual server adapters, and server virtual fibre channel (SVFC) adapters. Additionally, it
includes the device attributes, such as the attributes for disks, optical devices, tape devices, fibre channel
SCSI controllers controllers, Ethernet adapters, Ethernet interfaces, and logical Host Ethernet Adapters
(HEAs). All the configuration information is saved in a compressed XML file. If a location is not specified
with the -file option, the file is placed in the default location /home/padmin/cfgbackups if the user does not
specify a full path for saving the file. This command can be run once or can be run in a stipulated period
of time by using the -frequency parameter with the daily, weekly, or monthly option. Daily backups occur
at 00:00, weekly backups on Sunday at 00:00, and monthly backups on the first day of the month at 00:01.
The -numfile parameter specifies the number of successive backup files that will be saved, with a
maximum value of 10. After reaching the given number of files, the oldest backup file is deleted during
the next backup cycle. The format of the file name is <givenfilename>.xx.tar.gz, where xx starts from 01.
Alphabetical list of commands
441
The viosbr command does not back up the parent devices of adapters or drivers, device drivers, virtual
serial adapters, virtual terminal devices, kernel extensions, the Internet Network Extension (inet0), virtual
I/O bus, processor, memory, or cache.
The -view parameter displays the information of all the backed up entities in a formatted output. This
parameter requires an input file in a compressed or noncompressed format that is generated with the
-backup parameter. The -view parameter uses the option flags type and detail to display information in
detail or to display minimal information for all the devices or for a subset of devices. The -mapping
option flag provides lsmap-like output for Virtual Small Computer System Interface (VSCSI) server
adapters, SEA, server virtual fibre channel (SVFC) adapters, and PowerVM Active Memory Sharing
paging devices. The entities can be controllers, disks, optical devices, tape devices, network adapters,
network interfaces, storage pools, repositories, Etherchannels, Shared Ethernet Adapters, VSCSI server
adapters, server virtual fibre channel (SVFC) adapters, and paging devices. The -list option displays
backup files from the default location /home/padmin/cfgbackups or from a user-specified location.
The -restore parameter uses an earlier backup file as input and brings the Virtual I/O Server partition to
the same state as when the backup was created. With the information available from the input file, the
command sets the attribute values for physical devices, imports logical devices, and creates virtual
devices and their corresponding mappings. The attributes can be set for controllers, adapters, disks,
optical devices, tape devices, and Ethernet interfaces. Logical devices that can be imported are volume
groups, storage pools, logical volumes (LVs), file systems, and repositories. Virtual devices that can be
created are Etherchannel, shared Ethernet adapter, server virtual fibre channel (SVFC) adapters, virtual
target devices, and PowerVM Active Memory Sharing paging devices. The command creates mappings
between virtual SCSI server adapters and the VTD-backing devices, between a virtual Fibre Channel
(VFC) server adapter and a Fibre Channel (FC) adapter, and between PowerVM Active Memory Sharing
paging devices and backing devices. The viosbr command with the -restore option needs to be run on
the same Virtual I/O Server partition as the one where the backup was performed. The command uses
parameters to validate the devices on the system and restores a category of devices. The -restore option
runs interactively so that if any devices fail to restore, the user can decide how to handle the failure.
Flags
-file [Attribute ]
-frequency
-numfiles
-mapping
-type
-detail
-validate
442
Specifies the absolute path or relative path and file name of the file that has backup
information. If the file name starts with a slash (/) it is considered an absolute path;
otherwise, it is a relative path.
Specifies the frequency of the backup to run automatically. The user can add a cronjob
entry for backup frequencies other than daily, weekly, or monthly.
When backup runs automatically, this number indicates the maximum number of
backup files that can be saved. The oldest file is deleted during the next cycle of
backup. If this flag is not given, the default value is 10.
Displays mapping information for SEA, virtual SCSI adapters, VFC adapters, and
PowerVM Active Memory Sharing paging devices.
Displays information corresponding to all instances of the device type specified. The
devType can be pv, optical, tape, controller, interface, sp, fbsp, repository, ethchannel, sea,
svsa, svfca, pool, or paging. With the -restore option, devType can be net, vscsi, npiv, or
ams. When deploying a given type of device, all the dependent devices also are
deployed. For example, when deploying vscsi, related disks, attributes are set, the
corresponding storage pool is imported, and all file-backed storage pools are mounted.
Displays all the devices from the XML file with all their attribute values.
Validates the devices on the server against the devices on the backed-up file. If the
-inter option is specified, the user is prompted to specify how to handle items that do
not validate successfully. Without the -inter option, if items do not validate successfully,
the -restore operation fails.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
-inter
-force
-list
-nobackup
Interactively deploys each device with user confirmation.
Note: User input can be taken to set properties of all drivers, adapters, and interfaces
(disks, optical devices, tape devices, fibre channel SCSI controllers controllers, Ethernet
adapters, Ethernet interfaces, and logical HEAs) or each category of logical or virtual
devices. This includes logical devices, such as storage pools, file-backed storage pools,
and optical repositories, and virtual devices such as Etherchannel, SEA, virtual server
adapters, and virtual server fibre channel adapters.
If this option is specified in noninteractive mode, restoration of a device that has not
been successfully validated is attempted. This option cannot be used in combination
with the -inter or -validate options.
This option displays backup files from either the default location /home/padmin/
cfgbackups or a user-specified location.
This option removes any previously scheduled backups and stops any automatic
backups.
Exit Status
Table 8. Command specific return codes
Return code
Description
0
Success
-1
Failure
Examples
1. To back up all the device attributes and logical and virtual device mappings on the Virtual I/O Server
to a file called /tmp/myserverbackup, type:
viosbr -backup –file /tmp/myserverbackup
2. To back up all the device attributes and virtual device mappings daily on the Virtual I/O Server and
keep the last five backup files, type:
viosbr -backup –file mybackup -frequency daily –numfiles 5
The backup files resulting from this command are located under home/padmin/cfgbackups with the
names mybackup.01.tar.gz, mybackup.02.tar.gz, mybackup.03.tar.gz, mybackup.04.tar.gz, and
mybackup.05.tar.gz for the five most recent files.
3. To display information about all the entities in a backup file called myserverbackup.012909.tar.gz, type:
viosbr -view -file myserverbackup.012909.tar.gz
The system displays information similar to the following:
Controllers:
Name
Phys Loc
scsi0
U787B.001.DNWFPMH-P1-C3-T1
scsi1
U787B.001.DNWFPMH-P1-C3-T2
fscsi0
U789D.001.DQD42T5-P1-C1-T1
iscsi0
U787B.001.DNWFPMH-P1-T10
lhea0
U789D.001.DQD42T5-P1
fcs0
U789D.001.DQD42T5-P1-C1-T1
Physical Volumes:
Name
Phys loc
hdisk1
U787B.001.DNWFPMH-P1-C3-T2-L4-L0
hdisk2
U789D.001.DQD90N4-P3-D2
Optical Devices:
Name
Phys loc
cd0
U78A0.001.DNWGLV2-P2-D2
Tape devices:
Alphabetical list of commands
443
Name
rmt0
Phys loc
U78A0.001.DNWGLV2-P2-D1
Ethernet Interface(s):
Name
en0
en1
Etherchannels:
Name Prim adapter(s)
ent4 ent0
ent1
Backup adapter
NONE
Shared Ethernet Adapters:
Name Target Adapter
ent3 ent0
Virtual Adapter(s)
ent1
ent2
Storage Pools (*-default SP):
SP name
PV Name
testsp
hdisk1
hdisk2
mysp*
hdisk3
hdisk4
File-backed Storage Pools:
Name
Parent SP
myfbsp
mysp
Optical Repositories:
Name
Parent SP
VMLibrary_LV
mysp
VSCSI Server Adapters:
SVSA
VTD
Phys loc
vhost0
vtscsi0
U9133.55A.063368H-V4-C3
vtopt1
vhost1
vtopt0
U9133.55A.063368H-V4-C4
vttape0
SVFC Adapters:
Name
FC Adapter
vfchost0
fcs0
vfchost1
-
Phys loc
U9117.MMA.06AB272-V5-C17
U9117.MMA.06AB272-V5-C18
VBSD Pools:
Name
pool0
pool1
VRM Pages:
Name
StreamID
vrmpage0 0x2000011b7ec18369
vrmpage1 0x2000011b7dec9128
4. To display information for only physical disks, type:
viosbr -view –file myserverbackup.002.tar.gz –type pv
The system displays information similar to the following:
Physical Volumes:
=================
Name
Phys Loc
-----------
444
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
hdisk0
hdisk1
hdisk2
hdisk3
U789D.001.DQD42T5-P1-C1-T1-W500507630513402B-L4010400000000000
U789D.001.DQD42T5-P1-C1-T1-W500507630513402B-L4010400100000000
U789D.001.DQD42T5-P1-C1-T1-W500507630513402B-L4010400400000000
U789D.001.DQD42T5-P1-C1-T1-W500507630513402B-L4010405C00000000
5. To restore all the possible devices and display a summary of deployed and nondeployed devices,
type:
viosbr -restore
–file /home/padmin/cfgbackups/myserverbackup.002.tar.gz
The system displays information similar to the following:
Deployed/changed devices:
<Name(s) of deployed devices>
Unable to deploy/change devices:
<Name(s) of non-deployed devices>
Related Information
The lsdev command, the lsmap command, the backup command, the backupios command, the restore
command, the restorevgstruct command, the savevgstruct command, the alt_root_vg command, and the
save_base command.
viosecure command
Purpose
Activates, deactivates, and displays security hardening rules. Configures, unconfigures, or displays
firewall settings.
Syntax
viosecure -level LEVEL [-apply] [ -rule ruleName] [-outfile filename]
viosecure -view [ -actual | -latest] [-rule ruleName | -nonint]
viosecure -file rulesFile
viosecure -changedRules
viosecure -undo
viosecure -firewall on [[ -force] -reload]
viosecure -firewall allow | deny -port number [-interface ifname] [-address IPaddress] [-timeout Timeout]
[-remote]
viosecure -firewall view [-fmt delimiter]
Description
The viosecure activates, deactivates, and displays security hardening rules. By default, none of the
security strengthening features are activated after installation. Upon running the viosecure command, the
command guides the user through the proper security settings, which can be high, medium, or low. After
this initial selection, a menu is displayed itemizing the security configuration options that are associated
with the selected security level in sets of 10. These options can be accepted in whole, individually toggled
off or on, or ignored. After any changes, viosecure continues to apply the security settings to the
computer system.
Alphabetical list of commands
445
The viosecure command also configures, unconfigures, and displays network firewall settings. Using the
viosecure command, you can activate and deactivate specific ports and specify the interface and IP
address from which connections are allowed.
Flags
-level LEVEL
Specifies the security LEVEL settings to choose, where LEVEL is low, medium, high, or
default. The default LEVEL deactivates any previous security LEVEL system settings.
Except for the default LEVEL, ten security LEVEL settings are displayed at a time. The
user can then choose the desired security settings by entering comma-separated
numbers, the word ALL to choose all of the settings, A to apply the selected settings,
NONE to choose none of the settings, q to exit, or h for help. The security settings chosen
are then applied to the system.
-view
Displays the current security level settings. All of the security setting names start with 3
characters Xls, where X means l (low), m (medium), h (high) or d (default). For
example, the security level name lls_minlenl is the low-level security setting for the
minimum length of a password.
-apply
Applies all of the LEVEL security settings to the system. There is no user-selectable
option.
-nonint
Specifies non-interactive mode.
-outfile
Specifies that security rules be sent to a specific file.
-file
Specifies the security rules file to be applied.
-rule
Specifies the name of the rule, for example, lls_maxexpired, hls_telnet.
-changedRules
Displays new values, if they are changed by any other commands.
-latest
Displays last applied rules.
-actual
Displays actual values for the rules that are set.
-undo
Undoes the latest security settings that have been applied. Use -latest to view the latest
security settings.
-firewall on [[-force]
Configures the default firewall settings from the filter rules in ODM. If you use the
-reload]
reload option, then the ODM rules are deleted and the default values are loaded from
the /home/ios/security/viosecure.ctl file. If the viosecure.ctl file does not exist, the force
option specifies to use the hard-coded, default firewall settings.
-firewall off
Unconfigures the firewall settings and saves all the firewall filter rules to the
/home/padmin/viosfirewall.rules file.
-firewall allow -port Port
Permits IP activity per port with optional parameters according to interface, IP address,
[-interface ifname ]
and time that it is effective. The Port argument can be a number or a service name from
[-address IPaddress ]
the /etc/services file. The remote option specifies that the port is a remote port. All IP
[-timeout Timeout] [-source] activity to and from that remote port is allowed. The default is all IP activity to and
from a local port is allowed. The timeout period can be specified as a number (in
seconds), or with a number followed by m(minutes), h(hours), or d(days). The maximum
timeout period is 30 days.
-firewall deny -port Port
Removes a previous firewall -allow setting. The Port argument can be a number or a
[-interface Ifname] [-address service name from the /etc/services file. If -port 0 is specified, then all allow settings
IPaddress] [-timeout
are removed. The remote option specifies that the port is the remote port. The default is
Timeout] [-source]
local port. The timeout period can be specified as a number (in seconds), or with a
number followed by m(minutes), h(hours) or d(days). The maximum timeout period is
30 days.
-firewall view [-fmt
Displays the current allowable ports. If the -fmt option is specified, then it divides
delimiter]
output by a user-specified delimiter.
Examples
1. To display the high system security settings, and to select which of the high security settings to
apply to the system, type:
viosecure -level high
2. To apply all of the 'high' system security settings to the system, type:
viosecure -level high -apply
3. To display the current system security settings, type:
446
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
viosecure -view
4. To unconfigure the previous system security settings, type:
viosecure -level default
5. To allow IP activity on the ftp-data, ftp, ssh, www, https, rmc, and cimon ports, and to deny other IP
activity, type:
viosecure -firewall on
6. To allow IP activity on all ports, type:
viosecure -firewall off
7. To allow users from IP address 10.10.10.10 to rlogin, type:
viosecure -firewall allow -port login -address 10.10.10.10
8. To allow users to rlogin for seven days, type:
viosecure -firewall allow -port login -timeout 7d
9. To allow rsh client activity through interface en0, type:
viosecure -firewall allow -port 514 -interface en0 -remote
10. To removes the rule that allows users from IP address 10.10.10.10 to rlogin, type:
viosecure -firewall deny -port login -address 10.10.10.10
11. To display the list of allowed ports, type:
viosecure -firewall view
12. To undo the security settings that have been applied, type:
viosecure -undo /etc/security/aixpert/core/undo.xml
Note: This command removes all the security settings specified in the undo.xml file.
13. To write low-level security rules to myfile, type:
viosecure -level low -outfile myfile
14. To apply security rules from myfile, type:
viosecure -file myfile
15. To display recently applied rules, type:
viosecure -view -latest
16. To display rules that are changed after they are applied with the viosecure command, type:
viosecure -changedRules
17. To apply the single rule lls_maxage, type:
viosecure -level low -rule lls_maxage -apply
18. To view the applied rule ll_maxage, type:
viosecure -view -rule lls_maxage
19. To view the rule lls_maxage if it exists during last applied rules, type:
viosecure -view -rule lls_maxage -latest
20. To display the actual values of rules, even if they are changed by another command, type:
viosecure -view -actual
viostat command
Purpose
Reports Central Processing Unit (CPU) statistics, asynchronous input/output (AIO) and input/output
statistics for the entire system, adapters, tty devices, disks and CD-ROMs.
Alphabetical list of commands
447
Syntax
viostat
viostat [ -sys ] [ -adapter ] [ -tty | -disk ] [ -path ] [ -time ] [ PhysicalVolume ... ] [ Interval [ Count ] ]
Description
The viostat command is used for monitoring system input/output device loading by observing the time
the physical disks are active in relation to their average transfer rates. The viostat command generates
reports that can be used to change system configuration to better balance the input/output load between
physical disks and adapters.
The first report generated by the viostat command provides statistics concerning the time since the
system was booted. Each subsequent report covers the time since the previous report. All statistics are
reported each time the viostat command is run. The report consists of a tty and CPU header row
followed by a row of tty and CPU statistics. On multiprocessor systems, CPU statistics are calculated
system-wide as averages among all processors.
If the -sys flag is specified, a system-header row is displayed followed by a line of statistics for the entire
system. The hostname of the system is printed in the system-header row.
If the -adapter flag is specified, an adapter-header row is displayed followed by a line of statistics for the
adapter. This will be followed by a disk-header row and the statistics of all the disks/CD-ROMs
connected to the adapter. Such reports are generated for all the disk adapters connected to the system.
A disks header row is displayed followed by a line of statistics for each disk that is configured. If the
PhysicalVolume parameter is specified, only those names specified are displayed.
If the PhysicalVolume parameter is specified, one or more alphabetic or alphanumeric physical volumes
can be specified. If the PhysicalVolume parameter is specified, the tty and CPU reports are displayed and
the disk report contains statistics for the specified drives. If a specified drive name is not found, the
report lists the specified name and displays the message Drive Not Found. If no Drive Names are
specified, the report contains statistics for all configured disks and CD-ROMs. If no drives are configured
on the system, no disk report is generated. The first character in the PhysicalVolume parameter cannot be
numeric.
The Interval parameter specifies the amount of time in seconds between each report. The first report
contains statistics for the time since system startup (boot). Each subsequent report contains statistics
collected during the interval since the previous report. The Count parameter can be specified in
conjunction with the Interval parameter. If the Count parameter is specified, the value of count
determines the number of reports generated at Interval seconds apart. If the Interval parameter is
specified without the Count parameter, the viostat command generates reports continuously.
The viostat command reports number of physical processors consumed (physc) and the percentage of
entitlement consumed (% entc) in shared processor environments. These metrics will only be displayed in
shared processor environments.
The viostat command is useful in determining whether a physical volume is becoming a performance
bottleneck and if there is potential to improve the situation. The % utilization field for the physical
volumes indicates how evenly the file activity is spread across the drives. A high % utilization on a
physical volume is a good indication that there may be contention for this resource. Since the CPU
utilization statistics are also available with the viostat report, the percentage of time the CPU is in I/O
wait can be determined at the same time. Consider distributing data across drives if the I/O wait time is
significant and the disk utilization is not evenly distributed across volumes.
448
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
Reports
The viostat command generates four types of reports, the tty and CPU Utilization report, the Disk
Utilization report, the System throughput report and the Adapter throughput report.
tty and CPU Utilization Report
The first report generated by the viostat command is the tty and CPU Utilization Report. For
multiprocessor systems, the CPU values are global averages among all processors. Also, the I/O wait
state is defined system-wide and not per processor. The report has the following format:
Statistic
Description
tin
Shows the total number of characters read by the system for all ttys.
tout
Shows the total number of characters written by the system to all ttys.
% user
Shows the percentage of CPU utilization that occurred while executing at the user level
(application).
% sys
Shows the percentage of CPU utilization that occurred while executing at the system
level (kernel).
% idle
Shows the percentage of time that the CPU or CPUs were idle and the system did not
have an outstanding disk I/O request.
% iowait
Shows the percentage of time that the CPU or CPUs were idle during which the system
had an outstanding disk I/O request.
This information is updated at regular intervals by the kernel (typically sixty times per second). The tty
report provides a collective account of characters per second received from all terminals on the system as
well as the collective count of characters output per second to all terminals on the system.
Disk Utilization Report
The second report generated by the viostat command is the Disk Utilization Report. The disk report
provides statistics on a per physical disk basis. The report has a format similar to the following:
Statistic
Description
% tm_act
Indicates the percentage of time the physical disk was active (bandwidth utilization for
the drive).
Kbps
Indicates the amount of data transferred (read or written) to the drive in KB per second.
tps
Indicates the number of transfers per second that were issued to the physical disk. A
transfer is an I/O request to the physical disk. Multiple logical requests can be combined
into a single I/O request to the disk. A transfer is of indeterminate size.
Kb_read
The total number of KB read.
Kb_wrtn
The total number of KB written.
Statistics for CD-ROM devices are also reported.
For large system configurations where a large number of disks are configured, the system can be
configured to avoid collecting physical disk input/output statistics when the viostat command is not
executing. If the system is configured in the above manner, the first Disk report displays the message
Disk History Since Boot Not Available instead of the disk statistics. Subsequent interval reports generated
by the viostat command contain disk statistics collected during the report interval. Any tty and CPU
statistics after boot are unaffected.
Alphabetical list of commands
449
System Throughput Report
This report is generated if the -sys flag is specified. This report provides statistics for the entire system.
This report has the following format:
Statistic
Description
Kbps
Indicates the amount of data transferred (read or written) in the entire system in KB per
second.
tps
Indicates the number of transfers per second issued to the entire system.
Kb_read
The total number of KB read from the entire system.
Kb_wrtn
The total number of KB written to the entire system.
Adapter Throughput Report
This report is generated if the -adapter flag is specified. This report provides statistics on an
adapter-by-adapter basis. This report has the following format:
Statistic
Description
Kbps
Indicates the amount of data transferred (read or written) in the adapter in KB per
second.
tps
Indicates the number of transfers per second issued to the adapter.
Kb_read
The total number of KB read from the adapter.
Kb_wrtn
The total number of KB written to the adapter.
Disk Input/Output History
To improve performance, the collection of disk input/output statistics has been disabled. To enable the
collection of this data, type:
chdev -dev sys0 -attr iostat=true
To display the current settings, type:
lsdev -dev sys0 -attr iostat
If the collection of disk input/output history is disabled, the first disk report of viostat output displays
the message Disk History Since Boot Not Available instead of disk statistics. As before, subsequent
interval reports generated by the viostat command contain disk statistics collected during the report
interval.
Flags
-adapter
Displays the adapter throughput report.
If the -adapter flag is specified with the -tty flag, the tty and CPU report is displayed,
followed by the adapter throughput report. Disk Utilization reports of the disks
connected to the adapters, will not be displayed after the Adapter throughput report.
-disk
450
If the -adapter flag is specified with the -disk flag, tty and CPU report will not be
displayed. If Physical Volume parameter is specified, the Disk Utilization Report of the
specified Physical volume will be printed under the corresponding adapter to which it
belongs.
The -disk flag is exclusive of the -tty flag and displays only the disk utilization report.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
The -m flag will print the path statistics for the following
-path
v Paths to MPIO (Multi-Path I/O) enabled devices.
v Paths in the ESS machines.
The throughput is per device. The throughout for all the paths to that device follow the
throughput of that device.
For ESS machines, the vpaths will be treated as disks and hdisks will be treated as
Paths. Internally the vpaths are actually disks and hdisks are the paths to them. For
MPIO enabled devices, the path name will be represented as Path0, Path1, Path2 and so
on. The numbers 0, 1, 2, and so on are the path IDs provided by the lspath command.
Since paths to a device can be attached to any adapter, the adapter report will report
the path statistics under each adapter. The disk name will be a prefix to all the paths.
For all MPIO enabled devices, the adapter report will print the path names as
hdisk10_Path0, hdisk0_Path1, and so on. For all ESS Machines, the adapter report will
print the path names as vpath0_hdisk3, vpath10_hdisk25, and so on.
Displays the system throughput report.
Prints the time-stamp next to each line of output of viostat. The time-stamp displays in
the HH:MM:SS format.
The -tty flag is exclusive of the -disk flag and displays only the tty and cpu usage
reports.
-sys
-time
-tty
Examples
1. To display a single history since boot report for all tty, CPU, and Disks, type:
viostat
2. To display a continuous disk report at two second intervals for the disk with the logical name disk1,
type:
viostat -disk disk1 2
3. To display six reports at two second intervals for the disk with the logical name disk1, type:
viostat disk1 2 6
4. To display six reports at two second intervals for all disks, type:
viostat -disk 2 6
5. To display six reports at two second intervals for three disks named disk1, disk2, disk3, type:
viostat disk1 disk2 disk3 2 6
6. To print the System throughput report, type:
viostat -sys
7. To print the Adapter throughput report, type:
viostat -adapter
8. To print the System and Adapter throughput reports, with only the tty and CPU report (no disk
reports), type:
viostat -sys -adapter -tty
9. To print the System and Adapter throughput reports with the Disk Utilization reports of hdisk0 and
hdisk7, type
viostat -sys -adapter -disk hdisk0 hdisk7
10. To display time stamp next to each line of output of viostat, type:
viostat -time
vmstat command
Purpose
Reports statistics about kernel threads, virtual memory, disks, traps, and processor activity.
Alphabetical list of commands
451
Syntax
To report virtual memory statistics:
vmstat [ -f ] [-i ][-s ][-I ][-t ][-v ][-w ][-l ][{-p| -P| } pagesize | ALL ] ALL] [PhysicalVolume...] [Interval
[Count ] ]
Description
The vmstat command reports statistics about kernel threads, virtual memory, disks, traps and CPU
activity. Reports generated by the vmstat command can be used to balance system load activity. These
system-wide statistics (among all processors) are calculated as averages for values expressed as
percentages, and as sums otherwise.
Flags
-f
-i
-s
Reports the number of forks since system startup.
Displays the number of interrupts taken by each device since system startup.
Note: The -I, -t, -w, and -l flags are ignored when they are specified with the -i flag.
Writes to standard output the contents of the sum structure, which contains an absolute
count of paging events since system initialization. The -s flag can only be used with the
-v flag. These events are described as follows:
address translation faults
Incremented for each occurrence of an address translation page fault. I/O may
or may not be required to resolve the page fault. Storage protection page faults
(lock misses) are not included in this count.
page ins
Incremented for each page read in by the virtual memory manager. The count
is incremented for page ins from page space and file space. Along with the
page out statistic, this represents the total amount of real I/O initiated by the
virtual memory manager.
page outs
Incremented for each page written out by the virtual memory manager. The
count is incremented for page outs to page space and for page outs to file
space. Along with the page in statistic, this represents the total amount of real
I/O initiated by the virtual memory manager.
paging space page ins
Incremented for VMM initiated page ins from paging space only.
total reclaims
Incremented when an address translation fault can be satisfied without
initiating a new I/O request. This can occur if the page has been previously
requested by VMM, but the I/O has not yet completed; or if the page was
pre-fetched by VMM's read-ahead algorithm, but was hidden from the faulting
segment; or if the page has been put on the free list and has not yet been
reused
zero-filled page faults
Incremented if the page fault is to working storage and can be satisfied by
assigning a frame and zero-filling it.
executable-filled page faults
Incremented for each instruction page fault.
452
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
pages examined by the clock
VMM uses a clock-algorithm to implement a pseudo least recently used (lru)
page replacement scheme. Pages are aged by being examined by the clock. This
count is incremented for each page examined by the clock.
revolutions of the clock hand
Incremented for each VMM clock revolution (that is, after each complete scan
of memory).
pages freed by the clock
Incremented for each page the clock algorithm selects to free from real memory.
backtracks
Incremented for each page fault that occurs while resolving a previous page
fault.
free frame waits
Incremented each time a process is waited by VMM while free frames are
gathered.
extend XPT waits
Incremented each time a process is waited by VMM due to a commit in
progress for the segment being accessed.
-s (continued)
pending I/O waits
Incremented each time a process is waited by VMM for a page-in I/O to
complete.
start I/Os
Incremented for each read or write I/O request initiated by VMM. This count
should equal the sum of page-ins and page-outs.
iodones
Incremented at the completion of each VMM I/O request.
CPU context switches
Incremented for each CPU context switch (dispatch of a new process).
device interrupts
Incremented on each hardware interrupt
software interrupts
Incremented on each software interrupt. A software interrupt is a machine
instruction similar to a hardware interrupt that saves some state and branches
to a service routine. System calls are implemented with software interrupt
instructions that branch to the system call handler routine.
decrementer interrupts
Incremented on each decrementer interrupt.
mpc send interrupts
Incremented on each mpc send interrupt
mpc receive interrupts
Incremented on each mpc receive interrupt
phanton interrupts
Incremented on each phantom interrupt
traps
Not maintained by the operating system.
syscalls
-I
Incremented for each system call.
Displays I/O oriented view with the new columns of output, p under heading kthr,and
columns fi and fo under heading page instead of the columns re and cy in the page
heading.
Alphabetical list of commands
453
Prints the time-stamp next to each line of output of vmstat. The time-stamp is displayed
in theHH:MM:SS format.
Note: Time stamp will not be printed if -f, -s, or -i flags are specified.
Writes to standard output various statistics maintained by the Virtual Memory Manager.
The -v flag can only be used with the -s flag. Possible values:
-t
-v
memory pages
Size of real memory in number of 4 KB pages.
lruable pages
Number of 4 KB pages considered for replacement. This number excludes the
pages used for VMM internal pages, and the pages used for the pinned part of
the kernel text.
free pages
Number of free 4 KB pages.
memory pools
Tuning parameter (managed using vmo) specifying the number of memory
pools.
pinned pages
Number of pinned 4 KB pages
maxpin percentage
Tuning parameter (managed using vmo) specifying the percentage of real
memory which can be pinned.
minperm percentage
Tuning parameter (managed using vmo) in percentage of real memory. This
specifies the point below which file pages are protected from the re-page
algorithm.
maxperm percentage
Tuning parameter (managed using vmo) in percentage of real memory. This
specifies the point above which the page stealing algorithm steals only file
pages.
numperm percentage
Percentage of memory currently used by the file cache.
file pages
Number of 4 KB pages currently used by the file cache.
compressed percentage
Percentage of memory used by compressed pages.
compressed pages
Number of compressed memory pages.
numclient percentage
Percentage of memory occupied by client pages.
maxclient percentage
Tuning parameter (managed using vmo) specifying the maximum percentage
of memory which can be used for client pages.
-v (continued)
454
client pages
Number of client pages.
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
remote pageouts scheduled
Number of pageouts scheduled for the client file systems.
pending disk I/Os blocked with no pbuf
Number of pending disk I/O requests blocked because no pbuf was available.
Pbufs are pinned memory buffers used to hold I/O requests at the logical
volume manager layer.
paging space I/Os blocked with no psbuf
Number of paging space I/O requests blocked because no psbuf was available.
Psbufs are pinned memory buffers used to hold I/O requests at the virtual
memory manager layer.
filesystem I/Os blocked with no fsbuf
Number of file system I/O requests blocked because no fsbuf was available.
Fsbuf are pinned memory buffers used to hold I/O requests in the file system
layer.
client filesystem I/Os blocked with no fsbuf
Number of client file system I/O requests blocked because no fsbuf was
available. NFS (Network File System) and VxFS (Veritas) are client file systems.
Fsbuf are pinned memory buffers used to hold I/O requests in the file system
layer.
-w
-l
-p pagesize
-P pagesize
Interval
Count
external pager filesystem I/Os blocked with no fsbuf
Number of external pager client file system I/O requests blocked because no
fsbuf was available. JFS2 is an external pager client file system. Fsbuf are
pinned memory buffers used to hold I/O requests in the file system layer.
Display the report in wide mode
Displays an additional "large-page" section with the alp and flp columns.
Appends the VMM statistics for the specified page size to the regular vmstat output.
Displays only the VMM statistics which are relevant for the specified page size.
Specifies the amount of time in seconds between each report.
Determines the number of reports generated and the number of seconds apart.
Exit Status
The following exit values are returned:
0
>0
Successful completion.
Invalid flag, argument, or command failure
Examples
1. To display a summary of the statistics since boot, type: :
vmstat
2. To display five summaries at 2-second intervals, type:
vmstat 2 5
3. To display a summary of the statistics since boot including statistics for logical disks hdisk1 and
hdisk2, type
vmstat hdisk1 hdisk2
4. To display fork statistics, type:
vmstat -f
5. To display the count of various events, type:
vmstat -s
6. To display time-stamp next to each column of output of vmstat, type:
vmstat -t
Alphabetical list of commands
455
7. To display the I/O oriented view with an alternative set of columns, type:
vmstat -I
8. To display all the VMM statistics available, type:
vmstat -v -s
9. To display the large-page section with the alp and flp columns at 8-second intervals, type:
vmstat -l 8
10. To display the VMM statistics specific to a particular page size (in the example, 4K), type:
vmstat -p 4K
11. To display the VMM statistics for all page sizes that are supported on the system, type:
vmstat -p ALL
or
vmstat -p all
12. To display only the VMM statistics for a particular page size (in this example, 4K), type:
vmstat -P 4K
13. To display only the per-page breakdown of VMM statistics for all supported page sizes, type:
vmstat -P ALL
or
vmstat -P all
Related Information
The cfgdev command, the chdev command, the chpath command, the lsdev command, the lsmap
command, and the rmdev command.
wall command
Purpose
Writes a message to all users that are logged in.
Syntax
wall [ -a ] [ -g Group ][ Message ]
Description
The wall command writes a message to all users that are logged in. If the Message parameter is not
specified, the wall command reads the message from standard input until it reaches an end-of-file
character. The message is then sent to all logged in users. The following heading precedes the message:
Broadcast message from
user@node
(tty) at hh:mm:ss ...
hh:mm:ss represents the hours, minutes, and seconds when the message was sent.
To override any protections set up by other users, you must operate with root user authority. Typically,
the root user uses the wall command to warn all other users of an impending system shut down.
Note:
456
Power Systems: Virtual I/O Server and Integrated Virtualization Manager commands
1. The wall command only sends messages to the local node.
2. Messages can contain multibyte characters.
Flags
Performs the default operation. This flag is provided for
System V compatibility. It broadcast messages to the
console and pseudo-terminals.
Broadcasts to a specified group only.
-a
-g Group
Files
Specifies a device.
/dev/tty
wc command
Purpose
Counts the number of lines, words, bytes, or characters in a file.
Syntax
wc [ -c | -m ] [ -l ] [ -w ] [ File ... ]
wc -k [ -c ] [ -l ] [ -w ] [ File ... ]
Description
By default, the wc command counts the number of lines, words, and bytes in the files specified by the
File parameter. The command writes the number of newline characters, words, and bytes to the standard
output and keeps a total count for all named files.
When you use the File parameter, the wc command displays the file names as well as the requested
counts. If you do not specify a file name for the File parameter, the wc command uses standard input.
The wc command is affected by the LANG, LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LC_MESSAGES environment
variables.
The wc command considers a word to be a string of characters of non-zero length which are delimited by
a white space (for example SPACE , TAB).
Flags
-c
-k
-l
-m
-w
Counts bytes unless the -k flag is specified. If the -k flag is specified, the wc command counts
characters.
Counts characters. Specifying the -k flag is equivalent to specifying the -klwc flag. If you use the -k flag
with other flags, then you must include the -c flag. Otherwise, the -k flag is ignored. For more
information, see examples 4 and 5.
Note: This flag is to be withdrawn in a future release.
Counts lines.
Counts characters. This flag cannot be used with the -c flag.
Counts words. A word is defined as a string of characters delimited by spaces, tabs, or newline
characters.
Alphabetical list of commands
457
Note: If no flag is specified, wc by default counts the lines, words, bytes in a file or from standard
input.
Exit Status
This command returns the following exit values:
The command ran successfully.
An error occurred.
0
>0
Examples
1. To display the line, word, and byte counts of a file, enter:
wc chap1
The wc command displays the number of lines, words, and bytes in the chap1 file.
2. To display only byte and word counts, enter:
wc -cw chap*
The wc command displays the number of bytes and words in each file that begins with chap. The
command also displays the total number of bytes and words in these files.
3. To display the line, word, and character counts of a file, enter:
wc -k chap1
The wc command displays the n